DesignBuilderManual v3.0 Letter

DesignBuilder Documentation
DesignBuilder EnergyPlus Simulation Documentation

for DesignBuilder v3.0
DesignBuilder 2008-2011 No part of the manual is to be copied or reproduced in any form without the express agreement of DesignBuilder Software
Page 1 of 882
Contents
Learn About DesignBuilder ............................................................................................ 21 Keeping Up-to-date ....................................................................................................... 22 DesignBuilder Tips ......................................................................................................... 22 Capabilities...................................................................................................................... 22 Recent Files (Opening Screen) ....................................................................................... 23 User Interface .................................................................................................................. 24 Edit Screen ...................................................................................................................... 24 Licensing & Activation.................................................................................................... 26 Single User Licenses ..................................................................................................... 26 Activate From File.......................................................................................................... 27 Site Network Licensing .................................................................................................. 28 Core Concepts ................................................................................................................ 29 Model Data Hierarchy & Data Inheritance ...................................................................... 29 Templates And Components .......................................................................................... 31 Blocks Introduction ........................................................................................................ 31 Navigating Building Models............................................................................................ 33 Customising Model Options ........................................................................................... 34 Building Models .............................................................................................................. 35 Create New Site ............................................................................................................... 35 Create New Site - Location ............................................................................................. 35 Create New Site - Template ............................................................................................ 35 Building Geometry .......................................................................................................... 35 View Controls In Edit Mode ............................................................................................ 36 View Rotation .................................................................................................................. 37 Orbit................................................................................................................................. 38 Zoom Dynamic ................................................................................................................ 38 Zoom Window ................................................................................................................. 38 Fit View ............................................................................................................................ 39 Pan View .......................................................................................................................... 39 Normal View .................................................................................................................... 39 Perimeter Drawing Options ............................................................................................ 39 Shape............................................................................................................................... 40 Polygon ......................................................................................................................... 40 Rectangle ...................................................................................................................... 41 Circle............................................................................................................................. 42 Line Type ......................................................................................................................... 42 Straight Line .................................................................................................................. 43 Arc ................................................................................................................................ 43 Snaps, Drawing Guides & Protractor ............................................................................. 44 Direction Snaps............................................................................................................... 45 Axis Snap ........................................................................................................................ 45 Parallel Snap ................................................................................................................... 47 Normal (Perpendicular) Snap ......................................................................................... 48 Offset Snap...................................................................................................................... 51 Point Snaps ..................................................................................................................... 54 End-point Snap ............................................................................................................... 54 Mid-point Snap ................................................................................................................ 55 Edge Snap ....................................................................................................................... 56 DXF Snap......................................................................................................................... 57 Snap To Lower Perimeters ............................................................................................. 58 Increment Snap ............................................................................................................... 58 Drawing Guides............................................................................................................... 60 Protractor Tool ................................................................................................................ 62 Construction Lines ......................................................................................................... 64 Drawing Construction Lines ........................................................................................... 64
Page 2 of 882
Removing Construction Lines........................................................................................ 69 General Operations ......................................................................................................... 69 Select ............................................................................................................................... 69 Move ................................................................................................................................ 70 Clone (Copy) ................................................................................................................... 72 Rotate .............................................................................................................................. 72 Stretch ............................................................................................................................. 74 Delete............................................................................................................................... 76 Measure ........................................................................................................................... 76 Importing Geometric Data .............................................................................................. 77 Import Floor Plans .......................................................................................................... 77 Import Drawing File Wizard............................................................................................ 77 DXF File Types.............................................................................................................. 78 Editing DXF Data........................................................................................................... 81 Bitmap-based File Types ............................................................................................... 81 Editing Bitmap Data ....................................................................................................... 83 Partitions ....................................................................................................................... 84 Import 3-D CAD Data ....................................................................................................... 84 Import 3-D CAD Model Dialog........................................................................................ 84 How Does DesignBuilder GbXML Import Work? ............................................................ 86 Partition Representation ................................................................................................ 87 Exporting Geometric Data .............................................................................................. 88 Exporting 3-D DXF .......................................................................................................... 88 Working With Buildings (Site Level) .............................................................................. 90 Create New Building ....................................................................................................... 90 Create New Building - Model .......................................................................................... 90 Create New Building - Default Data ................................................................................ 90 Working With Blocks (Building Level) ........................................................................... 91 Adding Blocks ................................................................................................................. 92 Block Creation Options .................................................................................................. 98 Block And Zone Dimensions .......................................................................................... 99 Combined Constructions................................................................................................ 99 Block Wall Thickness.................................................................................................... 102 Effect Of Indents In The Block Perimeter ..................................................................... 102 Roof Blocks - Example 1.............................................................................................. 103 Curtain Glazing - Example 2 ........................................................................................ 104 Block Types................................................................................................................... 105 Building Block ............................................................................................................... 105 Outline Block................................................................................................................. 107 Using Outline Blocks To Create A Dormer Window ...................................................... 107 Component Block ......................................................................................................... 112 Standard Component Block ......................................................................................... 112 Ground Component Block............................................................................................ 113 Adiabatic Component Blocks ....................................................................................... 115 Block Forms .................................................................................................................. 116 Extruded Block Form .................................................................................................... 116 Sloped Wall Block Form ............................................................................................... 117 Pitched Roof Block Form.............................................................................................. 118 Pitched Roof Drawing Options ..................................................................................... 120 Automatic Pitched Roof Geometry ............................................................................... 120 Dome Block Form ......................................................................................................... 125 General Block Form ...................................................................................................... 125 Height ............................................................................................................................ 125 Auto-Complete Block .................................................................................................... 125 Edit Blocks .................................................................................................................... 126 Drag Block Face ............................................................................................................ 126 Divide Block Using Cutting Tool .................................................................................. 127 Draw Plane Method ..................................................................................................... 127
Page 3 of 882
Select Plane Method.................................................................................................... 133 Boolean Geometry Operations ..................................................................................... 138 Using The Boolean Operations .................................................................................... 138 Edit Block Options ........................................................................................................ 141 Convert Outline Block................................................................................................... 141 Transfer Blocks ............................................................................................................. 142 Working Within Blocks (Block Level) ........................................................................... 143 Zone Block By Drawing Partitions ............................................................................... 144 Advanced Topic........................................................................................................... 147 Hanging And Outline Partitions.................................................................................... 150 Virtual Partitions ........................................................................................................... 150 Creating Voids (Courtyard Spaces) Within Blocks ...................................................... 151 Working Within Zones (Zone Level) ............................................................................. 152 Placing Light Sensors................................................................................................... 153 Working With Surfaces (Surface Level) ....................................................................... 154 Draw Window ................................................................................................................ 156 Using Key Ins To Create Openings .............................................................................. 158 Draw Sub-Surface ......................................................................................................... 161 Draw Door ..................................................................................................................... 161 Draw Hole ...................................................................................................................... 161 Draw Vent ...................................................................................................................... 162 Edit Surfaces ................................................................................................................. 162 Editing Openings At The Building Level ...................................................................... 162 Undo/Redo..................................................................................................................... 165 Rebuild .......................................................................................................................... 166 Rezone Block ................................................................................................................ 166 Model Data..................................................................................................................... 166 Site Data ........................................................................................................................ 167 Location......................................................................................................................... 167 Site Location ................................................................................................................. 168 Site Details .................................................................................................................... 168 Ground ........................................................................................................................ 169 Site Water Mains Temperature .................................................................................... 170 Site Precipitation ......................................................................................................... 171 Roof Irrigation .............................................................................................................. 172 Time And Daylight Saving ............................................................................................ 172 Simulation Weather Data .............................................................................................. 173 Winter Design Weather Data......................................................................................... 173 Summer Design Weather Data ..................................................................................... 173 Legislative Region And Insulation Standards ............................................................. 174 Energy Codes/insulation Standards ............................................................................ 174 Building Model Data...................................................................................................... 174 Activity Model Data ....................................................................................................... 175 Total Building Floor Areas ............................................................................................ 176 Zone Type...................................................................................................................... 176 Zone Multiplier .............................................................................................................. 177 Adiabatic Component Blocks ....................................................................................... 178 Include Zone.................................................................................................................. 179 Occupancy .................................................................................................................... 179 Typical Workday Timing Model Option ......................................................................... 179 Schedule Timing Model Option .................................................................................... 180 Metabolic ....................................................................................................................... 180 Holidays......................................................................................................................... 182 Compact Schedules .................................................................................................... 182 7/12 Schedules............................................................................................................ 183 Typical Workday .......................................................................................................... 183 Environmental Control.................................................................................................. 183 Heating Setpoint Temperatures ................................................................................... 183
Page 4 of 882
Cooling Setpoint Temperatures ................................................................................... 184 Humidity Setpoint Temperatures .................................................................................. 184 Ventilation Setpoint Temperatures ............................................................................... 184 Minimum Fresh Air ...................................................................................................... 186 Lighting ....................................................................................................................... 187 Domestic Hot Water (DHW) .......................................................................................... 187 Computer Gains ............................................................................................................ 187 Office Equipment Gains................................................................................................ 188 Miscellaneous Gains..................................................................................................... 188 Catering Gains .............................................................................................................. 189 Process Gains ............................................................................................................... 191 Construction Model Data .............................................................................................. 192 Templates ................................................................................................................... 193 Constructions................................................................................................................ 193 'Combined' Constructions ............................................................................................ 194 Semi-Exposed ............................................................................................................. 196 Floors .......................................................................................................................... 197 Zone Statistics ............................................................................................................. 197 'Separate' Constructions .............................................................................................. 197 Sub-Surface Constructions .......................................................................................... 200 Internal Thermal Mass .................................................................................................. 201 Adjacency ...................................................................................................................... 202 Surface Convection ...................................................................................................... 203 Component Block ......................................................................................................... 207 Airtightness ................................................................................................................... 209 Airtightness Scheduled ................................................................................................ 209 Airtightness Calculated ................................................................................................ 210 Openings Model Data (Windows, Doors, Vents, Holes, Sub-surfaces) ...................... 210 External Glazing ............................................................................................................ 211 Dimensions ................................................................................................................... 211 Reveal ......................................................................................................................... 212 Frame And Dividers ...................................................................................................... 214 External Windows On Walls ......................................................................................... 214 Dividers ....................................................................................................................... 215 Shading ......................................................................................................................... 215 Window Shading ........................................................................................................... 216 Local Shading ............................................................................................................... 218 Window Operation ........................................................................................................ 219 Calculated Natural Ventilation ...................................................................................... 219 Scheduled Natural Ventilation ...................................................................................... 220 Internal Glazing ............................................................................................................. 220 Roof Glazing.................................................................................................................. 220 Dimensions ................................................................................................................... 220 Reveal ......................................................................................................................... 221 Roof Shading ................................................................................................................ 223 Frame And Dividers ...................................................................................................... 223 External Windows On Walls ......................................................................................... 224 Dividers ....................................................................................................................... 224 Window Shading ........................................................................................................... 225 Window Operation ........................................................................................................ 227 Calculated Natural Ventilation ...................................................................................... 227 Scheduled Natural Ventilation ...................................................................................... 228 Doors ............................................................................................................................. 228 Door Placement............................................................................................................. 228 Door Operation.............................................................................................................. 229 Wind Pressure Coefficients .......................................................................................... 229 Lighting Model Data ...................................................................................................... 229 General Lighting ........................................................................................................... 230
Page 5 of 882
Task And Display Lighting ........................................................................................... 232 Lighting Control ............................................................................................................ 233 Lighting Areas ............................................................................................................. 233 Procedure.................................................................................................................... 234 Glare ........................................................................................................................... 236 Algorithms ................................................................................................................... 236 Output ......................................................................................................................... 237 Exterior Lighting ........................................................................................................... 237 HVAC Model Data.......................................................................................................... 237 Simple HVAC ................................................................................................................. 238 Auxiliary Energy............................................................................................................ 238 NCM Setting ................................................................................................................ 238 Separate Fans And Pumps Setting .............................................................................. 239 Mechanical Ventilation.................................................................................................. 239 Fans ............................................................................................................................... 239 Simple HVAC Outsde Air .............................................................................................. 242 Heating .......................................................................................................................... 244 Heating Capacity ......................................................................................................... 244 Heating Plant ............................................................................................................... 244 Local Heating Units ..................................................................................................... 245 1-Convective ............................................................................................................... 245 2-Radiant/Convective Units ......................................................................................... 245 Operation .................................................................................................................... 246 Cooling .......................................................................................................................... 246 Supply Air Conditions .................................................................................................. 247 Cooling Plant ............................................................................................................... 247 Operation .................................................................................................................... 248 Compact HVAC ............................................................................................................. 248 Fan Coil Units................................................................................................................ 249 FCU Ventilation ............................................................................................................. 250 FCU Heating .................................................................................................................. 252 Operation .................................................................................................................... 253 FCU Cooling .................................................................................................................. 253 Operation .................................................................................................................... 254 Unitary Systems ............................................................................................................ 254 Unitary Single Zone ..................................................................................................... 254 Unitary Multizone ......................................................................................................... 255 Unitary Ventilation ........................................................................................................ 257 Mechanical Ventilation ................................................................................................. 257 Unitary Fans .................................................................................................................. 259 Unitary Heat Recovery .................................................................................................. 261 Unitary Economisers .................................................................................................... 262 Unitary Heating ............................................................................................................. 264 Heating Capacity ......................................................................................................... 264 Heating Plant ............................................................................................................... 264 Radiator/Baseboard Heating (Disabled In V3) .............................................................. 265 Operation .................................................................................................................... 266 Unitary Cooling ............................................................................................................. 266 Cooling Plant ............................................................................................................... 267 Operation .................................................................................................................... 267 Unitary Humidity Control .............................................................................................. 268 Humidification .............................................................................................................. 268 De-Humidification ........................................................................................................ 268 VAV + CAV ..................................................................................................................... 269 VAV Systems .............................................................................................................. 269 CAV Systems .............................................................................................................. 270 VAV & CAV Ventilation ................................................................................................. 272 Mechanical Ventilation ................................................................................................. 272
Page 6 of 882
Outside Air .................................................................................................................. 272 Outside Air Mixing ....................................................................................................... 274 VAV & CAV Fans ........................................................................................................... 275 VAV & CAV Economisers ............................................................................................. 277 VAV & CAV Heat Recovery ........................................................................................... 278 VAV Zone Terminal Units.............................................................................................. 279 VAV & CAV Heating ...................................................................................................... 281 Heating Capacity ......................................................................................................... 281 Heating Plant (Building Level) ...................................................................................... 281 Outside Air Preheat Coils (Building Level) .................................................................... 281 AHU Heating (Building Level) ...................................................................................... 282 VAV Terminal Reheat Coils (Zone Level) ..................................................................... 283 Radiator/Baseboard Heating (Zone Level) (Disabled In V3) ......................................... 283 Local Heating Control (Zone Level) .............................................................................. 284 VAV & CAV Cooling ...................................................................................................... 284 Cooling Plant (Building Level) ...................................................................................... 284 VAV Central Cooling Coils (Building Level) .................................................................. 285 Operation (Zone Data) ................................................................................................. 286 VAV & CAV Humidity Control ....................................................................................... 287 Humidification .............................................................................................................. 287 De-Humidification ........................................................................................................ 287 VAV & CAV Night Cycle Control ................................................................................... 288 Mixed Mode ................................................................................................................... 288 HVAC Control Zones..................................................................................................... 290 Plenums......................................................................................................................... 291 Domestic Hot Water ...................................................................................................... 293 Natural Ventilation ........................................................................................................ 294 Scheduled ................................................................................................................... 294 Calculated ................................................................................................................... 296 Air Temperature Distribution ........................................................................................ 297 Detailed HVAC ............................................................................................................... 298 Detailed Equipment....................................................................................................... 299 Edit Detailed Equipment ............................................................................................... 299 Options .......................................................................................................................... 301 Heating Design Output Options ................................................................................... 301 Cooling Design Output Options ................................................................................... 302 Simulation Design Output Options .............................................................................. 302 CFD ................................................................................................................................ 303 CFD Boundary Conditions Editor ................................................................................. 305 Edit Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................ 306 Import EnergyPlus Boundary Conditions ...................................................................... 306 Preparing Simulations To Generate CFD Boundary Conditions................................. 307 Infiltration In CFD .......................................................................................................... 308 Assembly Library .......................................................................................................... 309 Model Data Management .............................................................................................. 309 Load Data From Template ............................................................................................ 309 Clear Data To Default .................................................................................................... 311 Merging Zones .............................................................................................................. 311 Selective Zone Merging ............................................................................................... 312 Merging Zones ............................................................................................................ 314 Load Whole Building Infiltration................................................................................... 315 Model Options ............................................................................................................... 316 Model Data Options (Building) ..................................................................................... 316 Model Scope.................................................................................................................. 317 Construction And Glazing Model Option ..................................................................... 318 Gains Data Model Option .............................................................................................. 319 Timing Model Option..................................................................................................... 321 Natural Ventilation Model Option ................................................................................. 322
Page 7 of 882
HVAC Model Options .................................................................................................... 322 Advanced Concepts (Building)..................................................................................... 328 Simplification ................................................................................................................ 328 Natural Ventilation Options .......................................................................................... 330 Calculated Natural Ventilation Option........................................................................... 330 Lighting ......................................................................................................................... 332 Filters............................................................................................................................. 332 Component Blocks - Model Options ............................................................................ 332 Heating Design Calculation Options (Building) ........................................................... 333 Winter Design Day ........................................................................................................ 333 Heating System Sizing .................................................................................................. 333 Heating Design Output Options ................................................................................... 334 Cooling Design Calculation Options (Building) ........................................................... 334 Summer Design Day ..................................................................................................... 334 Cooling System Sizing.................................................................................................. 335 ASHRAE Cooling Sizing ............................................................................................... 335 Supply Air Conditions .................................................................................................. 336 Unitary DX Cooling Sizing ............................................................................................ 336 VAV Cooling Sizing ....................................................................................................... 337 Fan Coil Cooling Sizing ................................................................................................ 337 Cooling Design Output Options ................................................................................... 338 Simulation Calculation Options (Building) .................................................................. 338 Simulation Period.......................................................................................................... 338 Calculation Options ...................................................................................................... 339 Output Options.............................................................................................................. 341 Solar Options ................................................................................................................ 343 Advanced Calculation Options ..................................................................................... 347 Compact HVAC Simulation Autosizing Options ............................................................ 349 Include IDF Data (not Heating/cooling Design) ............................................................. 349 Display (Site) ................................................................................................................. 350 Show Data For Calculations ......................................................................................... 350 Edit Screen .................................................................................................................... 350 Visualisation Display .................................................................................................... 351 Drawing Tools (Site) ..................................................................................................... 352 Draw Block .................................................................................................................... 352 Direction Snaps............................................................................................................. 353 Point Snaps ................................................................................................................... 353 Drawing Guides............................................................................................................. 353 Object Rotation ............................................................................................................. 353 Protractor Tool .............................................................................................................. 353 Miscellaneous Edit ........................................................................................................ 353 Edit Block Options (Block) ........................................................................................... 354 Block Geometry ............................................................................................................ 355 Roof-Wall Transition ..................................................................................................... 355 Block Display ................................................................................................................ 356 Notes (and Project Details) ........................................................................................... 356 Project Details ............................................................................................................... 356 Owner Details ................................................................................................................ 356 Analyst Details .............................................................................................................. 356 Notes ............................................................................................................................. 356 Detailed HVAC ............................................................................................................... 357 Overview ..................................................................................................................... 358 Accessing Detailed HVAC ........................................................................................... 358 Detailed HVAC Contents ............................................................................................. 358 Understanding HVAC Loops ........................................................................................ 359 Air Loops ....................................................................................................................... 364 Generic Single Duct Air Loop ....................................................................................... 364 Generic Dual Duct Air Loop .......................................................................................... 365
Page 8 of 882
Unitary Heat/Cool Air Loop ........................................................................................... 366 Unitary Heat Pump Air Loop ......................................................................................... 367 Plant And Condenser Loops ........................................................................................ 368 Hot Water Plant Loop .................................................................................................... 368 Chilled Water Plant Loop .............................................................................................. 369 Primary/Secondary Chilled Water Plant Loop ............................................................. 370 Domestic Hot Water Plant Loop ................................................................................... 371 Condenser Loop ........................................................................................................... 372 Understanding HVAC Zone Groups ............................................................................. 373 HVAC Component Hierarchy And Navigation.............................................................. 377 HVAC System Control - Setpoint Managers ................................................................ 377 Mixed Air Setpoint Managers ....................................................................................... 378 Autosizing HVAC Components .................................................................................... 378 Working With Loops And Zone Groups At HVAC System Level ................................ 379 Add Zone Group Tool ................................................................................................... 379 Add Loop Tool............................................................................................................... 380 Working Within Sub-Loops (Sub-Loop Level) ............................................................. 380 Add Boiler Tool ............................................................................................................. 380 Add Chiller Tool ............................................................................................................ 381 Add Cooling Tower Tool ............................................................................................... 381 Add Water Heater Tool.................................................................................................. 381 Add Pump Tool ............................................................................................................. 381 Add Heating Coil Tool ................................................................................................... 382 Add Cooling Coil Tool................................................................................................... 383 Add Humidifier Tool ...................................................................................................... 383 Add Splitter/Add Mixer Tool ......................................................................................... 384 Add Supply Plenum/Add Return Plenum Tool ............................................................. 385 Connect Components Tool ........................................................................................... 387 Working Within HVAC Zone Groups (HVAC Zone Group Level) ................................. 388 Working Within HVAC Zones (HVAC Zone Level) ....................................................... 388 Add Zone Air Distribution Unit Tool ............................................................................. 388 Add Zone Forced Air Unit Tool ..................................................................................... 389 Add Zone Heated Floor Tool......................................................................................... 390 Add Zone Chilled Ceiling Tool ...................................................................................... 390 Add Zone Radiative-Convective Unit Tool ................................................................... 391 Add Zone Extract Unit Tool .......................................................................................... 392 Working Within Components (Component Level) ....................................................... 393 HVAC Components ....................................................................................................... 394 Editing Air Loop ............................................................................................................ 394 General ....................................................................................................................... 394 Sizing .......................................................................................................................... 394 Heating........................................................................................................................ 395 Cooling ........................................................................................................................ 396 Plant And Condenser Loop Edit Dialog ....................................................................... 397 General ....................................................................................................................... 397 Flow Type.................................................................................................................... 397 Temperatures .............................................................................................................. 397 Flow Rates .................................................................................................................. 398 Sizing .......................................................................................................................... 398 Operation .................................................................................................................... 398 Plant Equipment Operation .......................................................................................... 399 Scheme ....................................................................................................................... 399 Range ......................................................................................................................... 400 Air Handling Units ......................................................................................................... 400 Generic Air Handling Unit (AHU) .................................................................................. 401 General ....................................................................................................................... 401 Operation .................................................................................................................... 402 Night Cycle (Common To All AHUs)............................................................................. 402
Page 9 of 882
Extract Fan .................................................................................................................. 403 Air Handling Unit Outdoor Air System (Common To All AHUs) ..................................... 403 Recirculation ............................................................................................................... 404 Economiser ................................................................................................................. 404 Heat Recovery (Common To All AHUs) ....................................................................... 407 Pre-treatment .............................................................................................................. 411 Unitary Heat Cool AHU ................................................................................................. 412 General ....................................................................................................................... 412 Operation .................................................................................................................... 412 Supply Air Temperature ............................................................................................... 412 Supply Air Flow Rates ................................................................................................. 413 Supply Fan .................................................................................................................. 413 Extract Fan .................................................................................................................. 413 Thermostat Location .................................................................................................... 413 Dehumidification .......................................................................................................... 414 Outdoor Air System ..................................................................................................... 414 Unitary Heat Pump AHU ............................................................................................... 414 General ....................................................................................................................... 414 Operation .................................................................................................................... 415 Supply Air Flow Rates ................................................................................................. 415 Supply Fan .................................................................................................................. 415 Extract Fan .................................................................................................................. 416 Thermostat Location .................................................................................................... 416 Supplemental Heater ................................................................................................... 416 Outdoor Air System ..................................................................................................... 416 Heating Coils ................................................................................................................. 416 Heating Coil - Water ...................................................................................................... 416 General ....................................................................................................................... 417 Water Temperatures .................................................................................................... 418 Air Temperatures ......................................................................................................... 418 Operation .................................................................................................................... 418 Controller .................................................................................................................... 418 Heating Coil - Water Outputs ....................................................................................... 419 Heating Coil - Electric ................................................................................................... 420 General ....................................................................................................................... 420 Operation .................................................................................................................... 420 Heating Coil - Electric Outputs ..................................................................................... 420 Heating Coil - Gas ......................................................................................................... 421 Part Load Performance................................................................................................ 422 Operation .................................................................................................................... 422 Heating Coil - DX ........................................................................................................... 422 General ....................................................................................................................... 423 Compressor ................................................................................................................. 423 Defrost ........................................................................................................................ 423 Performance Curves.................................................................................................... 424 Crankcase Heater........................................................................................................ 426 Operation .................................................................................................................... 426 Heating Coil - DX Outputs............................................................................................ 426 Cooling Coils Detailed HVAC ....................................................................................... 427 Cooling Coil - Water ...................................................................................................... 427 General ....................................................................................................................... 428 Operation .................................................................................................................... 429 Controller .................................................................................................................... 429 Cooling Coil - Water Outputs ....................................................................................... 430 Single Speed DX Cooling Coil ...................................................................................... 431 General ....................................................................................................................... 431 Operation .................................................................................................................... 432 Performance Curves.................................................................................................... 432
Page 10 of 882
Latent Capacity Degradation........................................................................................ 433 Condenser................................................................................................................... 434 Evaporative Condenser ............................................................................................... 434 Crankcase Heater........................................................................................................ 436 Basin Heater ............................................................................................................... 436 DX Cooling Coil Outputs .............................................................................................. 436 Cooling Coil - Two Stage With Humidity Control DX ................................................... 438 General ....................................................................................................................... 438 Operation .................................................................................................................... 439 Normal Mode Stage 1 Coil Performance ...................................................................... 439 Normal Mode Stage 1+2 Coil Performance .................................................................. 439 Dehumidification Mode 1 Stage 1 Coil Performance..................................................... 439 Dehumidification Mode 1 Stage 1+2 Coil Performance ................................................. 439 Crankcase Heater........................................................................................................ 440 Basin Heater ............................................................................................................... 440 Run Settings................................................................................................................ 440 DX Cooling Coil Outputs .............................................................................................. 440 Fans ............................................................................................................................... 441 Fan - Constant Volume ................................................................................................. 441 General ....................................................................................................................... 441 Flow Rates .................................................................................................................. 442 Motor........................................................................................................................... 442 Operation .................................................................................................................... 442 Fan - Constant Volume Outputs ................................................................................... 442 Fan - Variable Volume ................................................................................................... 443 General ....................................................................................................................... 443 Flow Rates .................................................................................................................. 444 Motor........................................................................................................................... 444 Fan Coefficients .......................................................................................................... 445 Operation .................................................................................................................... 445 Fan - Variable Volume Ouputs ..................................................................................... 445 Fan - On/Off ................................................................................................................... 446 Operation .................................................................................................................... 447 Fan - On/Off Outputs ................................................................................................... 447 Pumps ........................................................................................................................... 447 Pump - Constant Speed ................................................................................................ 448 General ....................................................................................................................... 448 Pump Settings ............................................................................................................. 448 Pump - Constant Speed Outputs ................................................................................. 449 Pump - Variable Speed ................................................................................................. 449 General ....................................................................................................................... 450 Pump Settings ............................................................................................................. 450 Pump Coefficients ....................................................................................................... 451 Pump - Variable Speed Outputs................................................................................... 451 Humidifier - Steam Electric ........................................................................................... 452 General ....................................................................................................................... 452 Operation .................................................................................................................... 453 Humidifier - Steam Electric Outputs ............................................................................. 453 Chillers .......................................................................................................................... 454 General ....................................................................................................................... 454 Condenser................................................................................................................... 455 Temperatures .............................................................................................................. 456 Flow Rates .................................................................................................................. 456 Performance Curves.................................................................................................... 456 Part Load Settings ....................................................................................................... 457 Generic Chiller Outputs ............................................................................................... 457 Chiller Electric EIR Outputs ......................................................................................... 460 Chiller:Electric:EIR Technical Description................................................................... 461
Page 11 of 882
Overview ..................................................................................................................... 461 Model Description ........................................................................................................ 461 Boilers ........................................................................................................................... 466 General ....................................................................................................................... 466 Efficiency..................................................................................................................... 467 Water Outlet ................................................................................................................ 468 Part Load Ratios .......................................................................................................... 468 Boiler Outputs.............................................................................................................. 468 Cooling Tower ............................................................................................................... 470 General ....................................................................................................................... 472 Performance Input Method .......................................................................................... 473 Basin Heater Settings .................................................................................................. 474 Blowdown .................................................................................................................... 475 Capacity Control .......................................................................................................... 475 Multi-Cell Tower Settings ............................................................................................. 475 Performance Curves ..................................................................................................... 476 Linear .......................................................................................................................... 477 Quadratic .................................................................................................................... 478 Cubic........................................................................................................................... 479 Exponent ..................................................................................................................... 480 Biquadratic .................................................................................................................. 481 Bicubic ........................................................................................................................ 483 Editing Zone Group Data .............................................................................................. 485 General Tab ................................................................................................................ 485 Heating And Cooling Priorities Tab .............................................................................. 486 Zone Defaults .............................................................................................................. 486 Editing HVAC Zone Data ............................................................................................... 486 Edit HVAC Zone Data - General Tab ............................................................................. 487 General ....................................................................................................................... 487 Thermostat Schedules ................................................................................................. 487 Humidistat Control ....................................................................................................... 487 Cooling Sizing ............................................................................................................. 488 Heating Sizing ............................................................................................................. 489 Outdoor Air Sizing ....................................................................................................... 490 Edit HVAC Zone Data - Target ...................................................................................... 491 Air Distribution Units .................................................................................................... 491 Target Tab................................................................................................................... 492 Direct Air ADU ............................................................................................................... 492 General ....................................................................................................................... 493 Operation .................................................................................................................... 493 Constant Air Volume With Reheat ADU ....................................................................... 493 General ....................................................................................................................... 494 Heating Coil................................................................................................................. 494 Operation .................................................................................................................... 494 Advanced .................................................................................................................... 495 Variable Air Volume With Reheat ADU ......................................................................... 495 General ....................................................................................................................... 495 Air Flow ....................................................................................................................... 497 Heating Coil................................................................................................................. 498 Outdoor Air .................................................................................................................. 499 Operation .................................................................................................................... 500 Advanced .................................................................................................................... 500 Variable Air Volume With Reheat And Variable Speed Fan ADU ................................ 500 General ....................................................................................................................... 501 Air Flow ....................................................................................................................... 501 Heating Coil................................................................................................................. 501 Operation .................................................................................................................... 502 Advanced .................................................................................................................... 502
Page 12 of 882
Variable Air Volume With No Reheat ADU ................................................................... 502 General ....................................................................................................................... 503 Outdoor Air .................................................................................................................. 503 Operation .................................................................................................................... 504 Series Powered Induction Unit With Reheat ADU ....................................................... 504 General ....................................................................................................................... 505 Air Flow ....................................................................................................................... 505 Heating Coil................................................................................................................. 505 Operation .................................................................................................................... 506 Advanced .................................................................................................................... 506 Parallel Powered Induction Unit With Reheat ADU ..................................................... 506 General ....................................................................................................................... 507 Supply Air Flow Rates ................................................................................................. 507 Heating Coil................................................................................................................. 507 Operation .................................................................................................................... 508 Advanced .................................................................................................................... 508 Four Pipe Induction Unit ADU ...................................................................................... 508 General ....................................................................................................................... 509 Heating Coil................................................................................................................. 509 Cooling Coil ................................................................................................................. 510 Operation .................................................................................................................... 510 Advanced .................................................................................................................... 510 Dual Duct Constant Air Volume ADU ........................................................................... 510 General ....................................................................................................................... 511 Operation .................................................................................................................... 511 Dual Duct Variable Air Volume ADU ............................................................................. 511 General ....................................................................................................................... 512 Operation .................................................................................................................... 512 Cooled Beam ................................................................................................................. 513 General ....................................................................................................................... 513 Performance Parameters ............................................................................................. 514 Operation .................................................................................................................... 515 Zone Forced Air Units ................................................................................................... 515 Target Tab................................................................................................................... 515 Fan Coil Unit - Four Pipe............................................................................................... 516 Outdoor Air Supply ...................................................................................................... 518 Cooling Coil ................................................................................................................. 518 Heating Coil................................................................................................................. 518 Advanced .................................................................................................................... 518 Fan Coil Unit - Four Pipe Outputs ................................................................................ 519 Packaged Terminal Heat Pump .................................................................................... 520 Fan.............................................................................................................................. 521 Supply Air Flow Rates ................................................................................................. 522 Outdoor Air Supply ...................................................................................................... 522 Compressor ................................................................................................................. 523 Supplemental Heater ................................................................................................... 523 Operation .................................................................................................................... 523 Advanced .................................................................................................................... 524 Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Outputs ...................................................................... 524 Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner ............................................................................. 527 Fan.............................................................................................................................. 528 Supply Air Flow Rates ................................................................................................. 528 Outdoor Air .................................................................................................................. 529 Operation .................................................................................................................... 529 Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Outputs................................................................. 529 Radiative-Convective Units .......................................................................................... 532 Target Tab................................................................................................................... 532 Hot Water Convector..................................................................................................... 532
Page 13 of 882
General ....................................................................................................................... 533 Operation .................................................................................................................... 534 Electric Convector ........................................................................................................ 534 Operation .................................................................................................................... 534 Hot Water Radiator........................................................................................................ 535 General ....................................................................................................................... 535 Operation .................................................................................................................... 536 Advanced .................................................................................................................... 536 Electric Radiator ........................................................................................................... 536 General ....................................................................................................................... 537 Operation .................................................................................................................... 538 Chilled Ceiling ............................................................................................................... 538 Target Tab................................................................................................................... 538 Chilled Ceiling - Constant Flow .................................................................................... 538 General ....................................................................................................................... 539 Tube Settings .............................................................................................................. 539 Flow Settings ............................................................................................................... 539 Pump Settings ............................................................................................................. 539 Control ........................................................................................................................ 540 Condensation Control .................................................................................................. 541 Operation .................................................................................................................... 541 Chilled Ceiling - Variable Flow ..................................................................................... 542 General ....................................................................................................................... 542 Tube Settings .............................................................................................................. 542 Flow Settings ............................................................................................................... 542 Control ........................................................................................................................ 542 Condensation Control .................................................................................................. 543 Operation .................................................................................................................... 544 Heated Floor .................................................................................................................. 544 Target Tab................................................................................................................... 545 Heated Floor - Constant Flow ....................................................................................... 545 General ....................................................................................................................... 545 Tube Settings .............................................................................................................. 545 Flow Settings ............................................................................................................... 546 Pump Settings ............................................................................................................. 546 Control ........................................................................................................................ 546 Operation .................................................................................................................... 547 Heated Floor - Variable Flow ........................................................................................ 547 Tube Settings .............................................................................................................. 548 Flow Settings ............................................................................................................... 548 Control ........................................................................................................................ 548 Operation .................................................................................................................... 549 Setpoint Manager .......................................................................................................... 549 Scheduled Setpoint Manager ....................................................................................... 550 Warmest Setpoint Manager ......................................................................................... 550 Coldest Setpoint Manager ........................................................................................... 551 Multi-Zone Minimum Humidity Average Setpoint Manager ........................................... 551 Multi-Zone Maximum Humidity Average Setpoint Manager .......................................... 551 Multi-Zone Humidity Minimum Setpoint Manager ......................................................... 552 Multi-Zone Humidity Maximum Setpoint Manager ........................................................ 552 Single Zone Humidity Minimum Setpoint Manager ....................................................... 553 Single Zone Humidity Maximum Setpoint Manager ...................................................... 553 Outdoor Air Reset Setpoint Manager ........................................................................... 554 DHW ............................................................................................................................... 555 Water Outlet Group ....................................................................................................... 555 Drain Water Heat Exchanger ....................................................................................... 556 Water Outlet .................................................................................................................. 556 General ....................................................................................................................... 556
Page 14 of 882
Flow Rate .................................................................................................................... 557 Heat Gain To Zone ...................................................................................................... 557 Zones Served .............................................................................................................. 557 Water Heater .................................................................................................................. 558 General ....................................................................................................................... 559 External Heating Plant Connection .............................................................................. 559 Temperature Settings .................................................................................................. 559 Ambient Temperature Settings .................................................................................... 560 Heater Settings............................................................................................................ 560 On-Cycle Settings........................................................................................................ 561 Off-Cycle Settings........................................................................................................ 562 Use-Side Settings ........................................................................................................ 562 Source-Side Settings ................................................................................................... 563 Sizing .......................................................................................................................... 563 Water Heater Outputs .................................................................................................. 565 Components .................................................................................................................. 569 Construction Components ........................................................................................... 570 Construction Layer Data ............................................................................................... 570 Surface Properties ........................................................................................................ 575 Construction Image ...................................................................................................... 575 Construction Calculated Data ...................................................................................... 576 Internal Source .............................................................................................................. 576 Glazing Components .................................................................................................... 576 Glazing Layer Data ........................................................................................................ 577 Glazing Calculated Data ............................................................................................... 578 Simple Glazing Definition ............................................................................................. 578 Materials ........................................................................................................................ 579 Material Thermophysical Properties ............................................................................ 579 Detailed Properties ...................................................................................................... 580 Simple Resistance ....................................................................................................... 580 Surface Properties ........................................................................................................ 580 Green Roof .................................................................................................................... 581 Green Roof Data ......................................................................................................... 583 Embodied Carbon ......................................................................................................... 594 Embodied Carbon Report ............................................................................................ 595 Pane Components......................................................................................................... 595 Panes - General ............................................................................................................. 595 Panes - Thermal Data .................................................................................................... 596 Panes - Solar Data......................................................................................................... 596 Panes - Visible Data ...................................................................................................... 597 Panes - Long-wave (Infra-red) Properties .................................................................... 597 Spectral Data ................................................................................................................. 597 Glass Optical Properties Conversion........................................................................... 598 Schedules...................................................................................................................... 599 7/12 Schedules - Defined Using Profiles ...................................................................... 600 Compact Schedules ...................................................................................................... 602 Field-Set (Through, For, Interpolate, Until, Value) ........................................................ 602 Defining Setpoint Temperature And RH Schedules .................................................... 605 Schedules Timing Model Option .................................................................................. 605 Typical Workday Timing Model Option ......................................................................... 605 Schedules And Design And Sizing Simulations .......................................................... 606 Simulation Hourly Weather Data .................................................................................. 606 Hourly Weather Data - General ..................................................................................... 607 Hourly Weather Data - Statistics .................................................................................. 607 Add New Hourly Weather Data ..................................................................................... 608 Edit / Translate Hourly Weather Data ........................................................................... 611 Converting From Other Formats .................................................................................. 612 EnergyPlus Hourly Weather Data ................................................................................. 613
Page 15 of 882
Profiles .......................................................................................................................... 614 Textures......................................................................................................................... 615 Window Gas .................................................................................................................. 615 Custom Gases Only .................................................................................................... 616 Metabolic Rates............................................................................................................. 617 Local Shading Components ......................................................................................... 617 Local Shading - General ............................................................................................... 618 Local Shading - Louvres ............................................................................................... 619 Local Shading - Sidefins............................................................................................... 620 Local Shading - Overhangs .......................................................................................... 620 Window Blinds .............................................................................................................. 621 Window Blinds - General .............................................................................................. 622 Window Blinds - Slat Data ............................................................................................ 622 Slat Properties ............................................................................................................. 623 Slat Beam Solar Properties .......................................................................................... 624 Slat Diffuse Solar Properties ........................................................................................ 624 Slat Beam Visible Properties........................................................................................ 624 Slat Diffuse Visible Properties ...................................................................................... 625 Slat Infra Red Properties.............................................................................................. 625 Openings..................................................................................................................... 625 Window Blinds - Shade Data ........................................................................................ 626 Shade Properties......................................................................................................... 626 Openings..................................................................................................................... 627 Window Blinds - Electrochromic Switching ................................................................ 629 Vent Components ......................................................................................................... 630 Vents - General.............................................................................................................. 630 Vents - Airflow ............................................................................................................... 630 Holiday Schedule .......................................................................................................... 631 Holiday Schedule - General .......................................................................................... 631 Holiday Schedule - List ................................................................................................. 631 Templates ...................................................................................................................... 633 Activity Templates ........................................................................................................ 634 Activity Templates - General ........................................................................................ 635 Activity Templates - All Gains ...................................................................................... 635 Activity Templates - Occupancy................................................................................... 635 Activity Templates - Other Gains ................................................................................. 635 Activity Templates - DHW ............................................................................................. 636 Activity Templates - Environmental/Comfort ............................................................... 636 Construction Templates ............................................................................................... 636 Construction Templates - General ............................................................................... 637 Construction Templates - Simple ................................................................................. 637 Construction Templates - Walls ................................................................................... 637 Construction Templates - Roofs/Floors/Slabs/Ceilings .............................................. 637 Construction Templates - Doors .................................................................................. 637 Construction Templates - Airtightness ........................................................................ 638 Construction Templates - Thermal Mass ..................................................................... 638 Glazing Templates ........................................................................................................ 638 Glazing Templates - General ........................................................................................ 639 Glazing Templates - Glazing ......................................................................................... 639 Glazing Templates - Shading........................................................................................ 639 Facade Templates (Types)............................................................................................ 639 Facade Templates - General ......................................................................................... 639 Facade Templates - Openings ...................................................................................... 640 Lighting Templates ....................................................................................................... 640 Lighting Templates - General ....................................................................................... 640 Lighting Templates - Output ......................................................................................... 641 Lighting Templates - Control ........................................................................................ 641 HVAC Templates ........................................................................................................... 642
Page 16 of 882
HVAC Templates - General ........................................................................................... 642 HVAC Templates - Ventilation ...................................................................................... 643 HVAC Templates - System Heating/Cooling ................................................................ 643 HVAC Templates - Air Temperature Distribution ......................................................... 643 Location Templates ...................................................................................................... 644 Location Templates - Location ..................................................................................... 644 Location Templates - Winter Design Weather ............................................................. 644 Location Templates - Summer Design Weather .......................................................... 644 Location Templates - Simulation Weather ................................................................... 645 Crack Templates ........................................................................................................... 645 Crack Templates - General ........................................................................................... 645 Crack Templates - Openings ........................................................................................ 645 Crack Templates - Walls ............................................................................................... 646 Crack Templates - Floors/Ceilings ............................................................................... 646 Crack Templates - Roofs .............................................................................................. 646 Legislative Region Templates ...................................................................................... 646 Legislative Region Templates - General ...................................................................... 647 Legislative Region Templates - Standard Insulation ................................................... 647 Legislative Region Templates - Emissions .................................................................. 647 Energy Code Templates ............................................................................................... 647 Energy Code Templates - General ............................................................................... 648 Energy Code Templates - Envelope (component) ....................................................... 648 Energy Code Templates - Envelope (building) ............................................................ 648 Energy Code Templates - Energy Performance .......................................................... 648 Sector Templates .......................................................................................................... 648 Times Zone Templates.................................................................................................. 649 Wind Pressure Coefficient Templates.......................................................................... 649 Visualisation.................................................................................................................. 651 Visualisation Controls .................................................................................................. 652 Show Shadows, Time, Day, Month ............................................................................... 653 Show North Arrow......................................................................................................... 657 Sunpath ......................................................................................................................... 657 Antialiasing ................................................................................................................... 659 Dynamics....................................................................................................................... 660 Visualisation Limitations .............................................................................................. 660 Creating Movies ............................................................................................................ 661 Calculations .................................................................................................................. 663 Heating Design Calculation .......................................................................................... 663 Heating Design Calculation Options ............................................................................ 664 Reviewing Heating Design Output ............................................................................... 664 Data Options ............................................................................................................... 665 Y-Axis Options............................................................................................................. 665 Appearance ................................................................................................................. 666 EnergyPlus Script ........................................................................................................ 666 Heating Design Summary Table ................................................................................... 666 Heat Loss Breakdown Results ..................................................................................... 667 Cooling Design Calculation .......................................................................................... 670 Cooling Design Calculation Options ............................................................................ 670 Cooling Design Detailed Results.................................................................................. 671 Reviewing Cooling Design Output ............................................................................... 675 Data Options ............................................................................................................... 675 Y-Axis Options............................................................................................................. 676 Appearance ................................................................................................................. 676 EnergyPlus Script ........................................................................................................ 676 Summary Cooling Design Table ................................................................................... 676 Parametric Analysis (Cooling Design) ......................................................................... 677 Simulation Using Real Weather Data ........................................................................... 677 Simulation Calculation Options.................................................................................... 678
Page 17 of 882
General ....................................................................................................................... 678 Options........................................................................................................................ 678 Simulation Display Options .......................................................................................... 678 Data Options ............................................................................................................... 679 Y-Axis Options............................................................................................................. 680 Appearance ................................................................................................................. 680 Simulation Detailed Results ......................................................................................... 681 Building Level Only ...................................................................................................... 684 Comfort Analysis .......................................................................................................... 686 Temperature Distribution ............................................................................................. 687 Simplified ASHRAE 55-2004 Graph Related Outputs ................................................... 688 Parametric Analysis ...................................................................................................... 690 EnergyPlus Daylight Map Output ................................................................................. 693 Optimisation .................................................................................................................. 694 Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) .......................................................................... 695 Creating Model Geometry For CFD .............................................................................. 697 Finite Volume Grid And Geometric Modelling Considerations ................................... 698 Building Levels And CFD Analyses ............................................................................. 705 CFD Boundary Conditions............................................................................................ 705 Boundary Conditions For Internal CFD Analyses ....................................................... 706 Default Wall And Window Temperatures ...................................................................... 706 Zone And Component Block Surface Boundaries......................................................... 706 Component Blocks & Assemblies As CFD Boundaries .............................................. 711 Setting Up A New External CFD Analysis .................................................................... 713 Setting Up A New Internal CFD Analysis ..................................................................... 715 Editing The CFD Grid .................................................................................................... 717 CFD Grid Information .................................................................................................... 719 Setting Up CFD Cell Monitor Points ............................................................................. 720 CFD Calculation Options .............................................................................................. 722 Buttons ........................................................................................................................ 723 Turbulence Model ........................................................................................................ 723 Discretisation Scheme ................................................................................................. 724 Iterations ..................................................................................................................... 724 Isothermal ................................................................................................................... 725 Initial Conditions .......................................................................................................... 725 Cell Monitor ................................................................................................................. 725 Residual Display .......................................................................................................... 725 Dependent Variable Control Settings ........................................................................... 725 Residuals And Cell Monitor Graphs ............................................................................. 726 Convergence Difficulties And Troubleshooting .......................................................... 727 Displaying Results ........................................................................................................ 727 CFD Comfort Calculations ............................................................................................ 730 CFD Results Manager ................................................................................................... 731 Example - CFD External Analysis................................................................................. 734 Creating The Model ..................................................................................................... 734 Creating A New CFD External Analysis........................................................................ 735 Setting Up Monitor Cells .............................................................................................. 735 Running The CFD Calculations .................................................................................... 736 Displaying CFD Results ............................................................................................... 736 Display 3-D Contours................................................................................................... 738 Example - CFD Internal Analysis Basics...................................................................... 739 Creating The Model ..................................................................................................... 739 Default Wall And Window Boundary Temperatures ...................................................... 740 Adding Surface Supply Diffuser And Extract Grille ....................................................... 740 Creating A New CFD Internal Analysis ......................................................................... 741 Running The CFD Calculations .................................................................................... 742 Displaying CFD Results ............................................................................................... 742 Example - CFD Internal Analysis Including Assemblies ............................................. 743
Page 18 of 882
Creating The Radiator Assembly ................................................................................. 744 Positioning Radiators Within The Block ........................................................................ 745 Creating A New CFD Internal Analysis ......................................................................... 747 Editing The CFD Grid .................................................................................................. 748 Setting Up Monitor Cells .............................................................................................. 749 Running The CFD Calculations .................................................................................... 751 CFD Display Options ................................................................................................... 751 Comfort Calculations ................................................................................................... 752 Change CFD Analysis ................................................................................................. 753 Appendix - CFD Calculations And Convergence ......................................................... 753 Daylighting Calculations............................................................................................... 754 Daylighting Calculation Options .................................................................................. 755 General Calculation Options ........................................................................................ 755 Grid Size ..................................................................................................................... 757 Advanced Options ....................................................................................................... 758 Setting Ambient Parameters ........................................................................................ 759 Daylighting Display Options ......................................................................................... 760 1-Map - Daylight Illuminance Distribution ..................................................................... 760 2-Grid .......................................................................................................................... 762 LEED V2 Credit EQ8.1 Report ..................................................................................... 763 LEED V3 Credit EQ8.1 Report ..................................................................................... 764 BREEAM Credit HEA1................................................................................................. 766 Green Star IEQ4.......................................................................................................... 768 Cost And Carbon .......................................................................................................... 768 Cost ............................................................................................................................... 768 Embodied Carbon Results............................................................................................ 768 Reporting....................................................................................................................... 771 Export Data.................................................................................................................... 771 Report Topics................................................................................................................ 772 Compile Reports ........................................................................................................... 772 Program Options........................................................................................................... 773 Program Options - User Interface ................................................................................ 773 Program Options - Dialogs ........................................................................................... 775 EN ISO 6946 Glazing U-value Calculations.................................................................. 775 Program Options - Files................................................................................................ 776 Program Options - EnergyPlus..................................................................................... 776 IDF Options ................................................................................................................. 780 Program Options - Limits ............................................................................................. 780 Program Options - International ................................................................................... 780 Library Management ..................................................................................................... 783 Opening Screen - Component Libraries ...................................................................... 783 Template Library Management ..................................................................................... 785 Import Components/Templates .................................................................................... 786 Export Components/Templates .................................................................................... 786 Backup Component/Template Libraries ...................................................................... 788 Restore Component/Template Libraries ...................................................................... 789 Menu .............................................................................................................................. 791 File Menu ....................................................................................................................... 791 Edit Menu ...................................................................................................................... 792 Go Menu ........................................................................................................................ 793 View Menu ..................................................................................................................... 793 Tools Menu .................................................................................................................... 793 Help Menu ..................................................................................................................... 794 Modelling Advice .......................................................................................................... 795 Working With Large Models ......................................................................................... 795 Natural Ventilation Modelling ....................................................................................... 797 Scheduled Natural Ventilation And Infiltration ............................................................... 797 Calculated Natural Ventilation And Infiltration ............................................................... 798
Page 19 of 882
Mixed Mode Cooling ..................................................................................................... 800 Ground Modelling ......................................................................................................... 803 How It Works ............................................................................................................... 803 Ground Temperatures ................................................................................................. 803 Example Application - Basement Or Cellar Under Inclined Ground Slope ..................... 804 3-D Modelling Using The EnergyPlus Slab Preprocessor (Advanced) .......................... 807 Adjacent Buildings........................................................................................................ 807 Electrochromic Glazing ................................................................................................ 808 Trombe Walls ................................................................................................................ 809 Trombe Wall Example ................................................................................................. 810 Double Skin Facades .................................................................................................... 812 Double Skin Facade Example ...................................................................................... 813 Autosizing Heating And Cooling Equipment ............................................................... 814 Compact HVAC Autosizing .......................................................................................... 815 Daylight Saving And Local Time .................................................................................. 815 Solar Radiation Distribution ......................................................................................... 815 Solar Distribution ......................................................................................................... 817 Warehouse With Office ................................................................................................. 821 Reference ...................................................................................................................... 825 DesignBuilder Files, Location And Extensions ........................................................... 825 Hardware Requirements ............................................................................................... 828 DesignBuilder Licensing .............................................................................................. 829 Single User Licenses ................................................................................................... 829 Site Licenses ............................................................................................................... 831 Diagnostics ................................................................................................................... 835 Model Geometry Example............................................................................................. 835 Surface Types ............................................................................................................... 842 Calculation Of Air Density ............................................................................................ 848 Pitched Roof Geometry - Technical Description ......................................................... 849 Triangulation ................................................................................................................. 852 Tip To Reduce Number Of Triangles When Triangulation Is Required .......................... 853 Calculation Of HVAC Energy Consumption From EnergyPlus Loads ........................ 854 ASHRAE 90.1 Reference ............................................................................................... 854 Unmet Hours ............................................................................................................... 854 Limitations..................................................................................................................... 855 Component Blocks Used For Local Shading ............................................................... 855 EnergyPlus Background Information........................................................................... 859 Exporting IDF Files ....................................................................................................... 859 EnergyPlus Version Compatibility ............................................................................... 861 EnergyPlus IDF Window Dimensions .......................................................................... 861 Calculation Of DesignBuilder Output From EnergyPlus Report Variables ................ 861 EnergyPlus Errors And Warnings ................................................................................ 869 Errors .......................................................................................................................... 869 Warnings ..................................................................................................................... 872 EnergyPlus Daylight Calculations ................................................................................ 873 EnergyPlus Thermal Comfort ....................................................................................... 874 Fanger Comfort Model ................................................................................................. 875 Pierce Two-Node Model .............................................................................................. 876 KSU Two-Node Model ................................................................................................. 877 EnergyPlus Date Definition .......................................................................................... 878 EnergyPlus Documentation .......................................................................................... 879 When DesignBuilder Output Is Different From Unprocessed EnergyPlus Output ..... 879 Support - Getting Help .................................................................................................. 881 Tutorials ........................................................................................................................ 881 Getting Started ............................................................................................................ 881 Basic Geometry ........................................................................................................... 881 Basic Model Data ........................................................................................................ 881 Calculations................................................................................................................. 882
Page 20 of 882
Natural Ventilation ....................................................................................................... 882 Other Video Learning Resources ................................................................................. 882 Frequently Asked Questions ........................................................................................ 882
Welcome to DesignBuilder v3
DesignBuilder is a user-friendly modelling environment where you can work (and play) with virtual building models. It provides a range of environmental performance data such as: energy consumption, carbon emissions, comfort conditions, daylight illuminance, maximum summertime temperatures and HVAC component sizes. Some typical uses of DesignBuilder are: Calculating building energy consumption. Evaluating faade options for overheating and visual appearance. Thermal simulation of naturally ventilated buildings. Reporting savings in electric lighting due to use of natural daylight. Prediction of natural daylight distribution through Radiance simulations Visualisation of site layouts and solar shading. Calculating heating and cooling equipment sizes. Detailed design of HVAC and natural ventilation systems including the impact of supply air distribution on temperature and velocity distribution within a room using CFD ASHRAE 90.1 energy models UK, Ireland, France and Portugal Building regulations and certification reports Communication aid at design meetings. An educational tool for teaching building simulation to architectural and engineering students.
DesignBuilder uses the EnergyPlus dynamic simulation engine to generate performance data.
LEARN ABOUT DESIGNBUILDER

If you're new to DesignBuilder you are probably keen to start using the program right away, but there's a few things you should do before you dive in: Watch the Getting Started Tutorials. Read Important tips about software use.
A few minutes spent with these resources will be time well spent.
Page 21 of 882
There is a range of other freely available learning resources on the Learn DesignBuilder section of the website.
Where you see this icon in the Help documents there is a Video Tutorial providing extra information on the topic. Note that you can also work through all of the DesignBuilder Tutorials in a structured way.
KEEPING UP-TO-DATE
Visit www.designbuilder.co.uk for upgrades, new products and news about DesignBuilder.
DesignBuilder Tips
Miscellaneous information you should know before starting 'serious work' with DesignBuilder: 1. 2. 3. Buildings are put together by drawing blocks. Block creation and edit operations take place at the building level. Blocks can be subdivided into more than one zone by drawing partitions. Partitioning takes place at the block level. Default data is inherited from the level above, so blocks inherit their data from the building level, zones inherit their data from blocks, surfaces from zones and openings from surfaces. It is therefore possible to make global changes to the model by changing data at building level. It is possible to override default by editing the data. So for example, you could change the external wall construction for a whole block. Data templates are the source of default data in DesignBuilder. They can also be used for loading data to the model en masse. For example you can load the 'Energy code - heavyweight' construction template at the building level to change the construction of the entire building to thermally heavyweight elements which comply with local energy codes/building regulations. You can clear non-default data (i.e. data that has been explicitly entered) to its default state by using the Clear to default command. When drawing a block which touches another block, you should use the shift key to lock the base perimeter to the correct plane before drawing. You can release the shift key once you have placed the first point of the perimeter. Use the snap points - DesignBuilder block geometry is quite easy to work with but you must use the positioning tools provided to ensure that blocks connect exactly. The only way to do this is to use snaps do not position blocks and partitions relative to each other 'by eye'. Large building models can take a long time to simulate. You should familiarise yourself with the Working with Large Models help topic before creating a large/complex DesignBuilder model. DesignBuilder dsb files are already compressed so there is no need to 'Zip' them when attaching to e-mails or support forums. Understand DesignBuilder constructions, in particular the way floors and ceilings are defined. Name your zones. Do this by clicking twice (not double-clicking) on the name in the Navigator and typing the name. This is especially useful when merging zones and when checking adjacencies of individual surfaces in the Navigator. If you are exporting IDF data for use outside DesignBuilder please read the Exporting EnergyPlus IDF Files topic.
4.
5. 6. 7.
8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Capabilities
Environmental performance data is displayed without needing to run external modules and import data and any simulations required to generate the data are started automatically. EnergyPlus Compact HVAC descriptions provide an easy way into detailed analysis of commonly used heating and cooling systems.
- 22 -
Recent Files (Opening Screen)
Natural ventilation can be modelled with the option for windows to open based on a ventilation set point temperature. Daylighting - models lighting control systems and calculates savings in electric lighting. Shading by louvres, overhangs and sidefins as well as internal and mid pane blinds. A comprehensive range of simulation data can be shown in annual, monthly, daily, hourly or sub-hourly intervals: Energy consumption broken down by fuel and end-use. Internal temperatures Weather data Heat transmission through building fabric including walls, roofs, infiltration, ventilation etc. Heating and cooling loads. CO2 generation. Heating and cooling plant sizes can be calculated using design weather data. Parametric analysis screens allow you to investigate the effect of variations in design parameters on a range of performance criteria. Generate EnergyPlus IDF files and work with these outside DesignBuilder to access EnergyPlus system functionality not provided by DesignBuilder.
Recent Files (Opening Screen)
The Recent Files Opening Screen has a list of the files used in your previous DesignBuilder modelling sessions. To access one of these files again you can double-click on it in the grid, or single click in the grid to select it and then 'Open selected site' from the Info Panel on the Toolbar.
You can also:
- 23 -
Create a new file (site) from this screen. Open existing dsb file from the DesignBuilder Data folder. This is located beneath the main Documents by default.
User Interface
The DesignBuilder user interface has been designed from first principles for ease of use. Each screen has a specific purpose which is described in the Info panel on the right of the screen along with context sensitive commands and other relevant information. The Info panel is only displayed in Learning mode. If you would prefer to have simultaneous access to the Model Data and the Edit View you can switch Learning mode off from the Program Options dialog from the Tools menu. The user interface is described for each group of screens: Opening Screen - Recent Files Opening Screen - Component Libraries Opening Screen - Template Libraries Edit Screen Visualisation Screen
See also the Introducing DesignBuilder User Interface Tutorial
Edit Screen
The diagrams below illustrate the various components of the DesignBuilder Edit Screen with Learning Mode switched on and off.
Learning Mode On
With Learning mode switched on the Edit screen will look similar to the screenshot below.
- 24 -
Edit Screen
Use the Model data tabs to access Activity, Construction, Openings, Lighting and HVAC model data. You can find information on using the Info | Data tab to view component and template data in the Opening Screen - Templates help topic.
Learning Mode Off

The screenshot below shows the same model but with Learning mode Off. Edit Screen and Model data are visible simultaneously and there is no Info Panel..
- 25 -
Licensing & Activation

Help menu > Licence
SINGLE USER LICENSES

DesignBuilder consists of a modelling Graphical User Interface (GUI) connected to a number of modules each providing a particular functionality. You will need a license for each of the modules you intend to use. If you require more than one module then the most convenient way to obtain DesignBuilder licences is usually to purchase a DesignBuilder package. Each package consists of 2 or more module licences, each module giving access to a particular aspect of DesignBuilder functionality. When you first install DesignBuilder an evaluation license key is automatically generated for each module. These evaluation licences are valid for 30 days from the date of installation and allow you to try out a fully functional version of the software to check that it meets your needs and is compatible with your computer. The only restriction with evaluation licences is that a nag screen is displayed prior to each calculation or visualisation session. When you buy licences to use DesignBuilder, you are sent an e-mail containing an 8 digit activation code and information on when the licences expire (if ever). You should copy (Ctrl-C) the activation code from the e-mail you received when you bought the software and paste (Ctrl-V) directly into the License dialog on the Activation page. The License dialog is accessed from the Help menu. When you paste the activation code and press the Activate button the software attempts to activate the license over the Internet, and if successful, validates the license keys and unlocks the modules.
- 26 -
Licensing & Activation
If the activation was successful you will be shown the Modules tab displaying the licence status of each module (below).
ACTIVATE FROM FILE

You may have been supplied with a licence file with extension .lic containing your licence data or extended evaluations. Typical reasons for using a .lic file for activation are when on a training course where you may not have access to the Internet for activation or for customers who have purchased licences but either do not have Internet access or have strict firewall policies preventing the standard web-based activation from working. To activate DesignBuilder modules using a .lic file, click on the Activate from file button at the bottom of the dialog and select the file. The module list will be updated with the new licence information.
- 27 -
Note that by loading a .lic file containing evaluation keys (for example when at a DesignBuilder training course) you will not overwrite the status of any purchased full licences. Note 1: If you purchased a single user licence then you will be able to activate the code up to 2 computers. If you find that DesignBuilder is being used on these 2 computers simultaneously then you should purchase an extra licence. Note 2: You must be connected to the Internet to activate and deactivate DesignBuilder licenses. If your organisation has a strict firewall policy then you should ensure that DesignBuilder.exe is allowed to access the www.designbuilder.co.uk website. Note 3: If your are a UK or Ireland Energy Assessor do not confuse the DesignBuilder 8-digit activation code with the 8 character authorisation codes provided by the EPCgen system. DesignBuilder 8-digit activation codes are to be entered in the Licence dialog only as described above and provide use of the DesignBuilder SBEM software whereas the 8-character authorisation codes supplied by EPCgen are for entering in the Model options dialog only and allow generation of XML files and removal of the watermark from the EPC.
You need an EnergyPlus license to generate IDF files even if you want to simulate using an external version of EnergyPlus.
SITE NETWORK LICENSING

DesignBuilder site network licenses use a different technology to single user licenses. With site network licenses each client computer on the network can "check out" licenses from the license server which manages the allocation of licenses. The system is designed to provide a maximum number of concurrent users according to the number of seats purchased. For example if you purchased a site licence with 10 seats for the EnergyPlus module then the software can be installed on any number of computers but only a maximum of 10 people will be able to access DesignBuilder EnergyPlus simulations at any one time. If an eleventh person on the network tries to check out an EnergyPlus license (by starting DesignBuilder with EnergyPlus selected in the License dialog) then they will receive a message to say that the seats are all in use and to wait until one becomes available. In cases where you have a smaller number of CFD seats than EnergyPlus seats for example and you need to transfer a CFD license from one computer to another, you can remove the CFD license from your computer by unchecking the relevant option in the "Checked out" column on the License dialog. The CFD seat will then be available for use on another computer. If the CFD seat is not already requested on the other computer then the option in the "Checked out" column should be selected to make CFD available. DesignBuilder site licensing requires a simple server application to run on the network to provide licenses. Each client computer has an environment variable set to tell the software to run in site license mode and where to find the license server on the network. The site licensing system is quite straightforward but does require a network administrator with adequate IT skills to set it up. More on DesignBuilder Licensing
- 28 -
Core Concepts
Core Concepts
Some core concepts you should be familiar with before attempting to use DesignBuilder on a real project are: Model data hierarchy and data inheritance Templates and components Blocks Navigating building models Customising model detail
Model Data Hierarchy & Data Inheritance

DesignBuilder models are organised in a simple hierarchy:
Default data is inherited from the level above in the hierarchy, so block data is inherited from building level, zone data is inherited from block data and surface data from zone data. This arrangement allows you to make settings at building level which can becomes active throughout the whole building; or make settings at block level to change data for all zones/surfaces in the block. So for example, if the External wall construction is set to 'Wall 1' at building level, then this will be the default External wall for all blocks in the building. It is possible to change the inherited defaults in any of these blocks by making an explicit selection (say 'Wall 2'). All the zones in the block whose external wall construction was set to 'Wall 2' have that default External wall construction. The construction and opening defaults are inherited down to surface level where the data is actually used in the calculations. For example it is the External wall construction model data at the surface level that defines the actual construction used for that external wall. The External wall model data set at zone, block and building level has no effect on the model (other than by providing the default data for the level below in the hierarchy). To assist in identifying where data is inherited from DesignBuilder uses a colour code. Data set at building level or user defined data hard set at any level below will appear in red. All data inherited at levels below will be in blue (see below).
- 29 -
The simplest way of determining where data is inherited from is to start at the lowest level, a surface or opening, and go up through the levels until the data turns red. This then is the level from which the data has been inherited. The DesignBuilder hierarchy mechanism is a fast way of setting data globally in a building model, but you must take care to enter the minimum amount of data to get the most from the inheritance system. For example if all zones in a particular block have the same activity called say 'Office work', you should set the activity at block level and not multiple times at zone level. Equally if all the blocks in the building have the same activity, you should set the data at the building level and allow the blocks to inherit the data from the building. By keeping the amount of user data to a minimum, you will find it quicker to make changes at a later date. Clearly it is much faster to change a few Model data items at building and block level than it is to make multiple changes at zone or surface levels. When entering construction data, you could set the construction for each surface in the model but in practice this would be an extremely inefficient process. It is faster and less error-prone to set the construction as high up in the hierarchy as possible, possibly at building level (if all external walls in the building have that external wall construction), or at block level if all walls in that block have the construction (and other blocks don't). Most data at the building level is 'user data' as buildings do not inherit their data from the site level. To undo user defined hard set data run the Edit > Clear to default menu command and select All data or Custom openings and specify level (block, zone or surface) down to which the data is to be cleared.
Defaults
In short the rules are: Construction and Openings data is used at the surface level, i.e. all construction and opening data at building, block and zone level is default data and only data at surface level is actually used to define the model. Activity, Lighting, HVAC, Equipment data is used at the zone level, i.e. all Activity, Lighting, HVAC, Equipment data at building and block level is default data. The exception is AHU data for Compact HVAC systems which is set at building level.
A common question is "Why do I see Pitched roof constructions at building/block/zone level on the Constructions tab when my building/block/zone doesn't have a pitched roof"? The answer is that the Pitched roof construction setting at building, block and zone levels should be thought of as the default setting for any pitched roofs that may (or may not) exist in the model further down in the hierarchy. If there are no pitched roofs in the model then the data is simply not used.
Custom openings
When custom openings have been created at surface level these override the facade layout Model data for the surface.
Openings
Although openings (windows, vents, doors etc) appear in the DesignBuilder hierarchy, there is no way in version 1 to change data at the opening level. All openings inherit their data from the surface level. It is therefore not
- 30 -
Templates And Components
possible to have different glazing types on a particular surface. If you click on an opening in the Navigator you are actually taken to the surface containing the openings.
Component blocks
Component blocks inherit their data from building level.
Templates And Components

Templates are databases of typical generic data. Components are databases of individual data items (e.g. a construction type, material, window pane) .
DesignBuilder allows you to build up your own libraries of templates and components. Note that each user on a computer maintains their own database of templates and components. Template and component libraries are loaded into your model at the time it is created and new custom data from other computers can be imported at any time.
Blocks Introduction
Blocks are the basic geometric shapes that you use to assemble a DesignBuilder model. The idea of blocks is to provide fairly simple objects that you can easily move around in 3-D space in a similar fashion to that of building a physical model using bricks from a construction set. Blocks are created by drawing 2-D perimeters on horizontal or vertical planes and then extruding these perimeters to form 3-D shapes:
Blocks are versatile objects and once created can easily be modified by moving their surfaces, by stretching them and even by cutting them using arbitrary planes. Typically, you might use a block to represent an entire building storey:
- 31 -
Or a particular building design might lend itself to an obvious division into blocks:
You can model an entire building as a single block:
And then cut the block into storeys:
- 32 -
Navigating Building Models
Once the overall geometry of a model has been established with blocks, you can go 'into' a block and sub-divide it into a number of rooms or zones using partitions:
If you sub-divide a block internally using partitions, you can still modify the block by stretching, cutting, rotating, etc. and where possible the internal geometry will be kept. Also blocks can have boolean geometry operations applied such as Union, where 2 blocks are combined into a single new block, Difference (subtract), in which one block is subtracted from the other to form a single new block and Intersection, where a new block is formed where the 2 original blocks intersect.
Navigating Building Models

There are various ways of navigating (moving around) DesignBuilder models:
- 33 -
Single clicking the appropriate entry in the Navigator panel is the most versatile way because every object in the building has an entry in the Navigation panel. Double-clicking on the appropriate object in the Edit Screen takes you do it. Single-clicking on the appropriate object in the Edit Screen then mouse right mouse clicking on the object and selecting the 'Go to menu option at the top. Go to the level up in the hierarchy by pressing <F3> or by right mouse clicking in the Edit Screen and selecting the 'Go up... menu option. The Next <F5> and Back <F4> Navigation buttons allows you to move sequentially through the model (avoiding surfaces). This approach can be slow but can be useful when it is necessary to methodically work through the model for any reason.
The Figure below shows how to either click on the Navigator entry or double-click on the Edit Screen to go to 'Zone 1' from 'Block 1'.
See also HVAC Component Hierarchy and Navigation.
Customising Model Options

DesignBuilder models can be customised to allow you to enter the level of detail which is appropriate to your building design or modelling project. In early-stage design work you will generally want to use generic selections for most Model Data and so would choose the corresponding 'low data requirement' model options. As the building design firms up, more information becomes available and you can change the model options to use more specific data tailored to the project and less generic data. The 'standard' Model Option set is loaded at the point the building is created and you should generally keep these options unless you have specific reason to change. Model Options are set in the Model Options dialog from the Edit menu.
- 34 -
Building Models
Building Models
The process for creating a new building model typically follows a sequence: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Create new site. Create new building. Draw and manipulate building blocks to create building geometry. Partition building into thermal zones. Set Model Data. Add any 'custom openings' (windows, doors etc) by drawing up the surface level. Size heating and cooling systems. Check design by carrying out summer and winter simulations displaying hourly data. Once model has been checked over short periods, you can use it with confidence for annual simulations.
Create New Site
You can create a new site (dsb file) from the Opening screen. In DesignBuilder, 'Site' is synonymous with the file because each file can only contain one site. When you request a new site, the Add New Site dialog is opened which allows you to select the location and a template: Location Template
See also the Creating a model and Starting a New Project Tutorials
Create New Site - Location

Select the Location Template as a source of location and weather data for the site. The Location defines the geographical location and weather data for all buildings on this site. You will be able to load data from other location templates or override the default data from the Location Model Data tab at Site level.
Create New Site - Template

You can either select 'Blank' to create a clean site, or select a template to base your site on an existing site. If you have a DesignBuilder file you would like to use as a template for future sites save or copy it to the 'Templates' folder (accessed from the File | Folders | Template projects menu command).
Building Geometry
This section describes the various facilities within DesignBuilder to create and edit model geometry.
- 35 -
View Controls In Edit Mode

A number of view controls are provided to allow you to change the point of view for the model: View Rotation Orbit Zoom Fit view Pan view Zoom window
View tools can be activated at any time during operation of the drawing tools and control returned to the active drawing tool after completing the view process. For example to draw a block perimeter adjacent to an existing cylindrical block:
To continue drawing the perimeter around the other side of the cylindrical block, click on the 'Orbit' tool and orbit the model to reveal the other side and then pan to centre the model:
You can then return to the drawing process either by pressing the ESC key or selecting 'Cancel Pan' from the right-click menu:
- 36 -
View Rotation
View Rotation
DesignBuilder provides several pre-defined standard view rotations:
You can select one of these standard views from the view rotation drop list:
- 37 -
The default 'Axonometric' setting is designed to provide a good general 3-D view of the various components at each model level.
Orbit
The orbit tool is used to rotate the view around the model. To orbit the model click on the 'Orbit' tool and then press the left mouse button and keep the button pressed as you move the mouse cursor, the view will orbit around the model.
Zoom Dynamic
To zoom in and out from the current model point of view, click on the 'Zoom' tool, then press the left mouse button and keep the button pressed as you move the mouse cursor, the view will zoom in as you move the mouse cursor down and out as you move it up.
Zoom Window
- 38 -
Fit View
The 'Zoom window' tool is used to zoom in on a specific area of your model. To create a window on an area of the model, click on the 'Zoom window' tool and move the mouse cursor to a corner of the window you want to create, then press the left mouse button and keep the mouse button pressed as you drag the window, when you release the mouse button, the view will zoom to the extents of the defined window.
Fit View
The 'Fit view' tool is used to zoom your view to a distance which will enable the whole model to be made visible and centred in the 'Edit' window.
Pan View
The 'Pan' tool is used to move the model point of view vertically and horizontally across the plane of the screen. To pan the view, click on the 'Pan' tool, then press the left mouse button and keep the button pressed as you move the mouse cursor, the point of view will pan horizontally as you move the mouse cursor left and right and vertically as you move it up and down.
Normal View
At the surface level, The Normal button in the top right-hand corner of the screen can be used to rotate the point of view to be normal to the surface and to automatically zoom in so that the extents of the surface fill the view.
The Default surface normal view program option allows you to control the behaviour of this command.
Perimeter Drawing Options

Blocks, courtyards and surface openings are all created using perimeters. When any of these element drawing tools are activated, perimeter options can be accessed from the 'Drawing Options' data panel, for example when the Draw window tool is active at the surface level:
- 39 -
Shape
Three perimeter shapes are provided to enable specific perimeter topologies for blocks and surface openings to be drawn efficiently: 1-Polygon 2-Rectangle 3-Circle
POLYGON
The 'Polygon' is generally the most useful shape and can be used to draw block and opening perimeters of any topology. The 'Polygon' shape also allows you to change the line type from a straight line to an arc. To draw a perimeter using the 'Polygon' shape, start drawing the first line by clicking anywhere in the active drawing plane to place the starting point, then move the mouse cursor and click to place the line end-point, you can use the snaps and the protractor to help with alignment. Continue placing perimeter lines in the same way. If at any time you want to cancel the last line that you placed, you can press the ESC key or select 'Undo last point' from the rightclick menu. If you want to incorporate an arc within the perimeter, you can change the line type to 'Arc' and then place the centre-point of the arc:
- 40 -
Shape
To complete the perimeter, move the mouse cursor to the beginning of the first perimeter line, which activates the end-point snap and click on it to connect the lines:
RECTANGLE
The 'Rectangle' shape allows you to draw perimeters by placing diagonally opposite corners of a rectangle:
- 41 -
CIRCLE
The 'Circle' shape is used to draw circular perimeters by placing the circle centre and then setting the radius by placing a second point:
The associated 'Segments' option allows you to control the accuracy of the circle. In DesignBuilder geometry, circles are actually composed of polygons and the accuracy of the representation can be controlled by defining the number of segments (or lines) used in generating the polygon. Generally speaking, the greater the number of segments used will result in more memory usage and processing time and so, particularly in the case of blocks, it's advisable to use the default number of segments where possible.
More information on using the Circle shape can be found in the Basic Drawing Tools 9 Tutorial
Line Type
When the perimeter shape is set to 1-Polygon, you can set the perimeter Line type to one of: 1-Straight line or
- 42 -
Line Type
2-Arc
STRAIGHT LINE
When the line type is set to 1-Straight line, a perimeter is drawn by placing the origin and then a series of line end-points:
ARC
To incorporate an arc within a perimeter, set the line type to 2-Arc. An arc is defined using the sweep angle and number of segments:
A negative sweep angle can be used to create an arc in an anti-clockwise direction. In DesignBuilder geometry, arcs are created using a number of segments or straight lines and the accuracy of the representation can be controlled by defining the number of segments. Generally speaking, the greater the number of segments used will result in more memory usage and processing time and so, particularly in the case of blocks, it's advisable to use the default number of segments where possible. To draw the arc, place the arc centre:
- 43 -
More information on using the Arc line type can be found in the Basic Drawing Tools 9 Tutorial
Snaps, Drawing Guides & Protractor

A number of drawing aids are provided to enable block perimeter lines, partitions, etc. to be drawn precisely: Protractor Direction Snaps Point Snaps Drawing Guides
These items are made available when the various drawing tools are used, such as the Draw window tool at the zone surface:
- 44 -
Direction Snaps
Direction Snaps
When drawing perimeter lines, block partitions or surface openings direction snaps can be used to draw lines: Parallel with the active drawing plane axes (Axis snap), Parallel with existing elements (Parallel snap) or Perpendicular to existing elements (Normal snap).
Axis Snap
The axis snap check boxes are displayed under 'Direction snaps' in the 'Drawing Options' data panel when the various drawing commands are active. The axis snap is used to draw lines parallel with the major axes of the active drawing plane. As you move the cursor around to draw a line, the line will change colour and 'stick slightly as it becomes parallel with one of the major axes:
- 45 -
You can use axis snap to draw block perimeters on planes of any orientation. If the plane is non-horizontal, the axis snap applies to the local coordinate system of the plane as if it were rotated to the horizontal:
If the axis snap is operating on a horizontal plane, the perimeter line will change colour to red if the line is snapped to the X-axis or green if it's snapped to the Y-axis. However if the active drawing plane is not horizontal, the line will change colour to orange for the X-axis and purple for the Y-axis. At the building level, when the active drawing plane is horizontal, you can also snap block perimeters and construction lines to the Z-axis:
- 46 -
Parallel Snap
which allows you to draw horizontally extruded blocks, this process is explained under Adding Blocks
See also the Creating a model Tutorial
Parallel Snap
The parallel snap is used draw lines parallel with the edges of existing objects. The parallel snap check box is displayed under 'Direction snaps' in the 'Drawing Options' data panel when the various drawing commands are active. To draw a block perimeter line to be parallel with an existing block edge, switch the parallel snap on and move the mouse cursor to touch the edge with which the current perimeter line is to be parallel:
- 47 -
This will enable the active perimeter line to infer a direction from the selected edge and you can lock this inference by pressing the SHIFT key to prevent a parallel inference being picked up from an unwanted edge. So press the SHIFT key and move the mouse cursor to a position approximately parallel with the edge, the cursor will 'stick' when the parallel snap operates and the perimeter line will change colour to cyan:
When the parallel snap is in operation, intersections are automatically calculated with drawing guides to allow the two to be combined, so you can snap to the intersection of the two.
Normal (Perpendicular) Snap

The normal snap is used to draw lines perpendicular to the edges of existing objects. The normal snap check box is displayed under 'Direction snaps' in the 'Drawing Options' data panel when the various drawing commands are active. When the normal snap is switched on and you draw a line string, each line will automatically snap to be perpendicular with it's predecessor if it exists:
- 48 -
Normal (Perpendicular) Snap
To draw a block perimeter line to be perpendicular with the edge of an existing block, move the mouse cursor to touch the edge and then move it to be approximately perpendicular to it, the cursor will automatically snap to a line which is exactly perpendicular.
You can lock the perpendicular snap by pressing the SHIFT key which will prevent the cursor from picking up an unwanted direction inference. In this case, a construction line has been placed parallel with the block edge to help in positioning the new block. The perimeter line locks to a perpendicular from the construction line:
- 49 -
When the normal snap is in operation, intersections are automatically calculated with drawing guides, allowing you to snap to the intersection:
- 50 -
Offset Snap
Offset Snap
The offset snap is used to draw partitions and voids parallel to existing walls and partitions at a fixed offset distance. This help topic describes the use of offset snap for drawing partitions, but the information is equally applicable to drawing voids at a fixed offset from the perimeter. The offset snap check box is displayed under Direction snaps in the Drawing Options data panel when the Draw partitions command is active. The offset snap can be used whenever a string of partitions is to be located at a fixed offset from a perimeter, but can be specifically applied to dividing large open plan spaces up into perimeter and core zones for thermal simulation. When the offset snap is switched on, an additional Distance item will be displayed under the offset snap check box which allows you to define the offset distance. When you first switch on the offset snap, having clicked on the Draw partition icon, you will see offset snap indicators displayed as you move the cursor within the snap range of an existing wall or partition:
- 51 -
The offset snap works in conjunction with the other snaps and so, for example, you can start an offset partition at a fixed distance from the beginning of an existing wall using the edge snap in combination with the increment snap:
After placing the beginning of the partition, the rubber-banded partition will be automatically snapped to the offset from the selected wall and as you move the cursor to the next connected wall segment, the offset snap indicator will appear again:
- 52 -
Offset Snap
As you move the cursor, you will see that the offset snap interacts with other snaps allowing you to position partitions accurately. If you find that the other snaps are interfering with the offset snap, you can switch them off by pressing the SHIFT key.
Completed perimeter:
- 53 -
Point Snaps
When the various point snaps are switched on, a coloured indicator is displayed when the mouse cursor is close to a key-point on an existing element allowing a perimeter or partition line end-point to be positioned precisely at the selected key-point.
See also the Creating a model Tutorial The following point snaps are available: End-point snap mid-point snap Edge snap DXF snap Snap To Lower Perimeters Increment snap
Note: In some cases Snaps can interfere with attempts to draw to a particular point and in this case you can temporarily switch off the appropriate snap(s) using the check boxes in the Drawing options panel in the bottom left of the screen.
End-point Snap
This snap allows you to snap lines to the end-point of an existing edge. A green indicator is displayed when the mouse cursor is within the snap range of an end-point:
- 54 -
Mid-point Snap
For example, to snap the starting point of a new block perimeter to the end-point of an existing block edge, move the mouse cursor onto the background and press SHIFT to lock the drawing plane to the ground plane. Keep the SHIFT key pressed and move the mouse cursor close to the required edge marker to activate the end-point snap:
Similarly to snap the starting point of a new block partition to the end-point of an existing partition, make sure that the 'End-point' snap is switched on and move the mouse cursor close to the partition end-point to activate the snap:
Mid-point Snap
For details of using the 'Mid-point' snap, please refer to the End-point snap.
- 55 -
Edge Snap
The edge snap allows you to snap to any point on the edge of an existing object. The edge snap can be used in conjunction with the increment snap to enable a point to be located along an edge by moving it in defined increments. A red indicator is displayed when the mouse cursor is within the snap range of an edge and distance indicators are also displayed to help in locating a point a specific distance from either end of the edge:
By switching the increment snap on, the point can be moved along the edge in defined increments. For example, if you wanted to start a block perimeter line at 6.0 metres from the end of the block, after switching on the increment snap, you could set the snap increment to say 0.5m and then move the mouse cursor to snap to the edge at a distance of 6.0 metres from the end-point:
If you wanted to locate the beginning of the perimeter line at a specific distance from the other end of the edge, you can switch the end of the edge from which the increment snap operates by toggling the 'Switch snap increment direction' switch:
- 56 -
DXF Snap
DXF Snap
The DXF snap only applies when DXF data has been imported from an external file. The DXF snap enables you to snap to the end-points of DXF lines:
Note: You should generally switch DXF snap off when drawing partitions at block level and simply use the DXF lines as a visual guide. This ensures that partitions correctly snap to perimeters instead of snapping to DXF lines which may be very close to the perimeter but not actually touching.
- 57 -
Snap To Lower Perimeters

This snap allows you to snap to adjacent lower block perimeters and partitions. This snap is switched on by default but it can be useful sometimes to switch it off to avoid snapping to partitions in the block below.
Increment Snap
The increment snap applies to any process that involves moving a point or a surface in a particular direction. Such processes include drawing block partitions or perimeter lines which have an active direction snap or dragging the surface of a block normal to the original surface position. The increment snap allows you to move a point in a particular direction by defined increments. You can think of the increment snap acting in the same way as a conventional CAD drawing grid and in fact if you were just to use the axis snaps it would have the same effect, however the increment snap is more powerful in that it provides this type of incremental snap along any defined vector not just the axis vectors.
See also the Basic Drawing Tools 2 Tutorial The increment snap may be particularly useful during early stage design when you want to place geometry with reasonable accuracy but don't want to be constantly keying-in distances. Note: the increment snap will only come into operation when you are drawing a line or moving a surface along a defined vector. For example if you are drawing a block perimeter parallel with an existing block edge, the increment snap will operate when the parallel snap is active and in this case you would be able to move the mouse cursor along the parallel vector in increments of 0.5m:
The increment snap also works in conjunction with the Protractor:
- 58 -
Increment Snap
You can use the increment snap to control the location of block faces when you extrude a block on creation or drag faces during an edit or stretch operation:
The increment snap also comes into operation when an edge snap is active, allowing you to snap to the edge by increments from either end, please see edge snap for details.
Switch snap increment direction

Increment snap provides increments between the 2 end points of the reference line and increments can only be generated from one end point at a time. You can reverse the direction so that increments are generated from the other end of the reference line by checking the Switch snap increment direction drawing option. This option is found immediately below the Increment snap option (screenshot above).
- 59 -
Drawing Guides
Drawing guides are invisible lines that are automatically generated as soon as a drawing plane becomes active during a drawing operation. Drawing guides are parallel with the active drawing plane X and Y axes and run through all end-points and mid-points of existing object edges, which lie in the same plane as the drawing plane. As you move the cursor in the vicinity of a drawing guide, it will become visible and you can then snap the cursor to any point on the guide. When drawing guides are used in conjunction with Direction Snaps or the Protractor they offer a powerful mechanism for locating perimeter lines in relation to existing object edges.
See also the Creating a model Tutorial For example to create a triangular window in a surface with the same height as an existing opening, first click on the Draw window tool and check that the perimeter shape is set to 'Polygon', switch the protractor on and then move the cursor to align approximately with the lower edge of the existing window which will automatically snap the cursor to the required drawing guide:
Click to place the window origin and move the cursor to snap to the drawing guide associated with the existing window upper edge, the protractor angle lock will automatically combine with the drawing guide:
- 60 -
Drawing Guides
Click to place the apex of the window and then place the next point in a similar fashion:
Completing the window perimeter:
- 61 -
Note: In some cases Drawing guides can interfere with attempts to draw to a particular point and in this case you can temporarily switch off Drawing guides using the check boxes in the Drawing Options panel in the bottom left of the screen.
Protractor Tool
The protractor tool is used to draw perimeter lines and partitions at specified angles in relation to the current drawing plane. The protractor can be activated from the Drawing options data panel, which is displayed when any of the drawing tools are used. For example, to create an offshoot projecting from an existing block with a roof slope of 30, move the cursor over the existing block surface, press the SHIFT key to lock the drawing plane and draw the first perimeter line, snapping to the base edge using end-point snap:
Draw the second perimeter line to connect to the mid-point of the block edge and then activate the protractor:
- 62 -
Protractor Tool
The protractor will automatically snap to the current drawing plane and as you move the mouse cursor, the perimeter line will snap to the protractor in angular increments, which can be set in the Drawing options data panel. The rotation angle is displayed at the centre of the protractor. Move the cursor until the displayed angle is 30 and then move the snapped line towards the upper block edge. When the line end-point nears the edge, it will stick to the edge and the edge snap marker will be displayed:
Click to accept the point and complete the perimeter by snapping to the block face vertices using the end-point snap:
- 63 -
Drag the perimeter to complete the offshoot:
See also the Basic Drawing Tools 5 Tutorial
Construction Lines
Construction lines can be used to help in the creation of precise geometry. You can draw construction lines using the snaps and the protractor to lie at defined locations and then use these lines as a framework from which or to which various object geometries can be projected or attached. At the building level, construction lines can also be snapped to the Z-axis to form vertical planes from which block geometry can be extruded.
Drawing Construction Lines
- 64 -
Construction lines are drawn in the form of line strings. To draw a construction line, click on the 'Place construction line' tool and start drawing the first line by clicking anywhere in the active drawing plane then move the mouse cursor and click to place the line end-point, you can use point snaps, direction snaps, drawing guides and the protractor to help with alignment. Continue placing construction lines in this way. If at any time you want to cancel the last line that you placed, you can press the ESC key or select 'Undo last point' from the right-click menu.
Construction lines have numerous applications in forming temporary attachment points during the creation of precise geometry. As a simple example, if you want to place a block at a precise distance from the angled wall of an existing block, you could switch the Normal snap on, click on the 'Place construction line' tool and draw a perpendicular line a precise distance from the wall. To draw the perpendicular line, place the first point at an endpoint of the wall baseline, move the mouse cursor to touch the baseline and press SHIFT to lock the direction inference, then move the mouse cursor to activate the perpendicular lock and key-in the required distance:
You could then place a second construction line normal to the first line and key-in the required length:
- 65 -
You can then snap to the construction line to draw the new block perimeter:
The finished block:
- 66 -
You can also snap to the intersection of construction lines:
At the building level, construction lines can be snapped to the Z-axis in order to create vertical planes to which block geometry can be attached. To draw construction lines in a vertical plane, switch the Z-axis snap on, click on the 'Place construction line' tool and place the first point on the ground plane or any other horizontal plane. Move the mouse cursor to snap the current line to the Z-axis:
- 67 -
You can then use the protractor to place the next line in order to accurately define a plane:
After placing the second line, the two construction lines form a vertical plane that can be used for extruding blocks or as a plane to be used as a cutting plane.
- 68 -
Removing Construction Lines
Removing Construction Lines

You can remove construction lines individually by selecting and deleting or you can remove all construction lines from the model by selecting 'Remove all construction lines' from the 'Edit' menu.
General Operations
This section describes general geometric operations: Select Move Clone (copy) Rotate Stretch Delete
Select
To select an object, click on the 'Select' tool or select 'Select' from the right-click menu, then move the mouse cursor to the object to be selected and click the mouse to select. To select multiple objects you can either press the CTRL key while clicking on objects or drag a selection rectangle by pressing the left mouse button and keeping it pressed as you drag a window across the required selection, when you release the mouse button, the objects inside the window will be selected.
- 69 -
Move
You can move blocks, partitions, courtyards and openings. To move an object, first select it and then click on the 'Move' tool or select 'Move' from the right-click menu. If you want, you can move several objects at the same time by doing a multiple selection. You then need to define a 'handle point' for the move operation, the handle point can be any point on a model surface or ground plane but more usually will be a vertex on the object that you want to move, so make sure that the end-point snap is switched on, move the mouse cursor to the required object vertex and snap to it:
When you release the mouse button, you will be able to move the object to any required location. As you move the object, a displacement line is displayed to show how far the object has been moved, the displacement line can be snapped to the axes or the Protractor. When a direction snap is active the increment snap can also be used:
- 70 -
Move
You can then click the mouse button to place the object. At the building level, blocks can be moved in three dimensions onto any existing block face in the model. As you move the block around the model, each block face will highlight in blue as the block handle point is moved across it, indicating that the face has become the active drawing plane.
You can lock the active drawing plane by pressing the SHIFT key to position the block:
- 71 -
Clone (Copy)
For details of using the 'Clone' tool, please refer to the Move tool.
Rotate
You can rotate blocks, partitions, courtyards and openings. To rotate an object, first select it and then click on the 'Rotate' tool or select 'Rotate' from the right-click menu. If you want, you can rotate several objects at the same time by doing a multiple selection. As you move the cursor back into the Edit screen, the Protractor will be displayed at the cursor position. At the building level, you can rotate a block around an axis point defined on any plane and as you move the cursor from surface to surface in the model, each surface will highlight in blue to show that it's the active drawing plane and the protractor will automatically rotate into the same plane:
- 72 -
Rotate
You define the rotation axis about which the object will be rotated by clicking the mouse when the mouse cursor is in the required location, you can use the various snaps and drawing guides to locate the axis point. After placing the axis point, you can then rotate the object around the axis:
In the case of partitions and courtyards at the block level, the active drawing plane for rotation is always the plane of the block floor and in the case of surface openings, the active drawing plane is always the surface plane:
- 73 -
Stretch
Building and outline blocks can be stretched (or scaled) at the building level. To stretch a block, first select it and then click on the 'Stretch' tool or select 'Stretch' from the right-click menu. You can only stretch one block at a time. When you activate the 'Stretch' tool, a wire frame is displayed around the extent of the block and as you move the cursor across the faces of this frame, each face will highlight in the colour of the axis to which the face is normal:
- 74 -
Stretch
If you then click on one of these highlighted faces, you can then stretch the block along the axis normal to the face. If the increment snap is switched on, the block can be stretched in increments:
In the case of the Z-axis, the stretch operation will only operate along the positive Z-axis:
- 75 -
Tip: You can also key in the new dimension using the keyboard. Note the difference to the Drag face tool where the increment in the extrusion is keyed in See also the Basic Drawing Tools 3 Tutorial
Delete
To delete an object, first select the object you want to delete and then click on the 'Delete' tool or select 'Delete' from the right-click menu. If you want, you can delete several objects at the same time by doing a multiple selection. Tip: It is usually quicker however to simply press the <Delete> key on the keyboard.
Measure
The measure tool allows you measure distance, angles and areas on single planes in the model. To use the tool, navigate to the part of the model you wish to measure, click on the Measure toolbar icon, select the type of measurement to be made in the Display options panel on the left of the screen. The options are: 1-Distance - Click twice on a plane to define the length between the 2 points. 2-Angle - Click three times on a plane to define the area between the 2 lines. 3-Distance - Draw an enclosed polygon by clicking with the mouse on a single plane. 4-Perimeter - Draw an enclosed polygon by clicking with the mouse on a single plane. The requested data is displayed highlighted in the Drawing Options panel.
- 76 -
Importing Geometric Data
Importing Geometric Data

There are 2 ways to import geometric data into DesignBuilder: Importing floor plans where 2-D floor plan data is imported either from CAD or scanned paper drawings Import 3-D CAD data through the gbXML data format
Import Floor Plans

DXF and other bitmap-type drawing data formats can be imported in the form of 2-D floor plan layouts. These can be used to trace block perimeters and partitions as a fast way to enter the model geometry. A typical process might go like this: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Create new dsb site file. Select location. Import floor plan data. Draw blocks by tracing over the external perimeter corners of the floor plan. Go to block level and draw partitions by tracing over the drawing data. Import other DXF floor plans for other stories if necessary.
You can import 2-D DXF floor plan files created in AutoCAD or other CAD programs or the other bitmap-based drawing formats listed below. To start the process click on the Files > Import > Import 2-D drawing file menu command. This starts a the Import Drawing File Wizard (below).
More information on Importing floor plans can be found in the Basic Drawing Tools 10 Tutorial
IMPORT DRAWING FILE WIZARD

First select the File type to import. You can select from: 1-DXF - 2-D CAD data. This option allows you to snap to the end-points of the DXF line segments, the other bitmap-based formats below do not allow snapping. 2-PDF - PDF drawing file (single page) 3-BMP - Bitmap drawing file. 4-JPG - JPEG drawing file. 5-PNG - Portable Network Graphic drawing file.
- 77 -
6-GIF - GIF drawing file. 7-TIFF - TIFF drawing file.
When you have selected the file type then select the file by clicking into the 'Filename' control. Click on the ellipsis button to open the file browser dialogue box.
DXF FILE TYPES

If you selected a DXF file you must then select the units used in the DXF file from the Units drop list. You should be able to find this out from the creator of the CAD model - you are likely to get 'out of range' errors if you get it wrong. For example the CAD drawing may have been defined in millimetres and if you have selected metres as the units, when DesignBuilder tries to read the floor plan everything is 1000x too big and meters become kilometres! The DesignBuilder modeller has a range of several hundred metres and if any data falls outside this, the 'out of range' error occurs. You must also set the attachment height at which the 2-D DXF floor plan will be attached in the DesignBuilder model. The DXF data can be moved around the model once it is imported, so you do not need to know the exact
- 78 -
Import Floor Plans
attachment height at this stage - you can import the DXF data at zero height and move it to the correct location using the Move command. Click on the 'Next' button to set up layer visibility:
You can use these controls to switch off unnecessary layers in the DXF data. As you check/uncheck the checkboxes you will see the effect of the change in the Edit view under the Wizard. Click on the 'Finish' button to import the data:
- 79 -
At the building level, you can select, move and delete DXF data. When you select DXF data, you may need to zoom in to make the selection. You can move DXF file in 3-D and snap the data to the edges of blocks or endpoints of construction lines:
Move the DXF data on top of the existing block and snap to an edge end-point:
- 80 -
Import Floor Plans
When you have imported the DXF data you can use the Measure tool to check that the dimensions are correct. Import DXF floor plans for other stories if necessary. Note that only one set of DXF data can be imported at a time. Once the CAD data has been imported into the model, the source DXF file is no longer needed by DesignBuilder and can be moved or deleted.
EDITING DXF DATA

The DXF data must be selected to allow these operations: Move - move the DXF data Delete - delete the DXF data (not the source file itself). Also these 2 menu commands are available from the Edit menu when DXF data is loaded:
Set X-axis for imported DXF

When the command is started click twice to define the end points of a line in the direction of the X-axis on the imported DXF data. After the operation the DXF data is rotated to align with the DesignBuilder X-axis. Normally DXF data will already be orientated to the grid and this command is not required.
Scale DXF drawing

This command allows you to scale the DXF data to be larger or smaller. This may be necessary if the scale of the DXF data was unknown at the import stage. When the command is started click twice to define the end points of a reference line on the DXF data of known length (e.g. a dimension arrow or known length on a building wall). Then either move the cursor to define the new length of the reference line and click again or type in the dimension of the reference line. So a typical sequence might be: 1. 2. 3. 4. Start Edit > Scale DXF drawing command. Single click on one end of a large dimension line. Single click on the other end of the dimension line. Type in the dimension in m or ft (depending on the international units setting) followed by <Enter>.
BITMAP-BASED FILE TYPES

When the file type is one of the bitmap based formats (PDF, BMP, JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF collectively referred to here as 'bitmap' ) the next page of the Wizard provides a preview of the drawing and some options.
- 81 -
Invert bitmap
Check this option if you wish the colours in the bitmap to be inverted. For example if the picture is white on a black background then it will generally be best to invert these for use in DesignBuilder.
Auto scale bitmap after loading drawing

If you wish the 'scale bitmap' command to be automatically started when the Import Drawing File Wizard in closed then check this option.
Quality slider
By reducing the number of pixels in the bitmap it is possible to significantly reduce the size of the imported drawing data and hence speed subsequent drawing 'scale' and 'rotate' operations. The default Quality setting of 0.5 gives a good trade-off between image size and readability but if the drawing file is particularly large you may decide to reduce the quality to reduce the memory overhead or, if the drawing is difficult to read you could increase Quality.
Transparency slider
You can control the transparency of the drawing data from 0 to 1, the default is 0.5.
- 82 -
Import Floor Plans
Bitmap-based files may be used for: 1. 2. Existing buildings having paper floor plans that have been scanned into electronic format or, Early stage design sketch ideas are available only in bitmap form.
Note: bitmap drawings do not allow end-point snap like DXF but can be an equally effective option for rapid geometry entry in DesignBuilder.
EDITING BITMAP DATA

The bitmap data must be selected to allow these operations: Move - move the bitmap data. Delete - delete the bitmap data.
- 83 -
Also these 2 commands are available from the Edit menu when bitmap data is loaded:
Set X-axis for imported bitmap

Sometimes scanned bitmap files are not exactly aligned to the X-axis and you can use this command to reorientate the drawing. When the command is started click twice to define the end points of a line in the direction of the X-axis on the imported bitmap data. After the operation the bitmap data is rotated to align with the DesignBuilder X-axis.
Scale bitmap drawing

This command allows you to scale the bitmap data to be larger or smaller. This will usually be necessary for bitmap drawing formats as the scale is not defined at the import stage. When the command is started click twice to define the end points of a reference line on the bitmap data of known length (e.g. a dimension arrow or known length on a building wall). Then either move the cursor to define the new length of the reference line and click again or type in the dimension of the reference line. So a typical sequence might be: 1. 2. 3. 4. Start Edit > Scale bitmap drawing command. Single click on one end of a large dimension line. Single click on the other end of the dimension line. Type in the dimension in m or ft (depending on the international units setting) followed by <Enter>.
PARTITIONS
You can also use the imported floor plan data to draw internal partitions. To do this go to block level and draw partitions by tracing over using the floor plan partition data. You should take care to connect partitions to the external perimeters. A common mistake is to snap partitions to DXF data lying very close to the external perimeter but not close enough to create a connection with the external perimeter. It is recommended that you switch of DXF snap in the Drawing options panel when drawing partitions at block level to avoid this problem . Be sure to switch it back on again when you have finished drawing partitions.
Import 3-D CAD Data

DesignBuilder provides interoperability with BIM models through its' gbXML import capability. This allows you to import 3-D architectural models created in Revit, ArchiCAD or Microstation (and other 3-D CAD systems supporting gbXML data exchange) to provide heating and cooling system sizes and environmental performance data in the most efficient way possible. A unique feature of DesignBuilder gbXML import is the removal and repair of gaps between zone inner volumes which means that models lose very little geometric information in the transfer from CAD to DesignBuilder. To import gbXML data you should first create a building with no blocks, then click on File > Import > Import 3-D CAD model. This opens the Import 3-D CAD Model dialog. Unlike the 2-D floor plan import which provides only a set of lines for tracing over, importing 3-D CAD data imports the full geometry as blocks with zones, shading surfaces, windows, doors etc.
IMPORT 3-D CAD MODEL DIALOG

This dialog has two pages. On the first page you can select the xml file to import. Once you have selected the model, press the Next button to move to the second page. For large models there will be a delay at this point while the xml data is loaded. The second page shows a simple thumbnail view of the gbXML data along with some simple controls to control the way the import is to be carried out.
- 84 -
Import 3-D CAD Data
View
You can display the thumbnail of the gbXML data from various viewpoints. Select from: Plan, Left, Right, Back, Axonometric (3-D view).
Import as building blocks

By default the data will be imported as building blocks ready for use in DesignBuilder modelling. You can instead import as outline blocks by unchecking this option. Note that when importing as outline blocks, the zone data is imported as raw gbXML geometry.
- 85 -
Import shading surfaces

Shading surfaces are specially marked in gbXML data and so can be treated separately if required. You can choose to import shading surfaces as part of the import or not using this control. Shading surfaces imported through gbXML will be 2-D flat shading surfaces.
Merge co-planar surfaces

If the above Import shading surfaces option is selected then you can choose to either merge any such co-planar surfaces or not.
Example gbXML imported from ArchiCAD into DesignBuilder
HOW DOES DESIGNBUILDER GBXML IMPORT WORK?

The geometric information thats exported in gbXML is generally a collection of space objects which are essentially closed manifolds representing the inner volumes of rooms in the parent CAD model. These space objects arent native to the CAD system but are identified manually by users generally using some form of plug-in. Contrary to expectation, no native geometry is actually exported from the CAD system! The usual result of the spatial identification process is a collection of spaces that are separated by gaps that would be filled in the parent CAD model by the CAD primitives such as partitions, slabs, etc. The DesignBuilder gbXML import works by first recognising whether or not the gbXML spaces can be divided into a discrete number of storeys and then it separates these stories into plan extrusion storeys and non-plan extrusion storeys. Storeys that are represented by plan extrusions are then subject to further processing to combine the plan extrusions into single blocks containing zones which are separated by special partition component blocks. These partition component blocks should be geometrically identical to their counterpart partitions in the parent CAD model.
- 86 -
Import 3-D CAD Data
Non-plan extrusion spaces are converted directly to building blocks and in the case where these are separated by partitions in the CAD model then the representation in DesignBuilder is an approximation. It is important to understand that the success of the export process largely depends on how well the spatial identification process has been conducted in the CAD system.
PARTITION REPRESENTATION
Partitions are represented in the model using a special kind of component block. This allows complex shaped partitions between zones in the CAD model to be accurately represented in DesignBuilder. If you need to rearrange the internal zoning of a model imported to DesignBuilder it is possible to cut the large partition assemblies generated by the import process using the cutting tool. Alternatively the partition components can be selected and deleted and standard partitions can be drawn instead. Select the partition to be cut.
Click on the cutting tool to start the cutting operation. Then define the cutting plane and a final click confirms the cut.
- 87 -
Exporting Geometric Data

The model geometric data can be exported in formats: 3-D DXF
Exporting 3-D DXF

You can export the geometry of the current building model in 3-D DXF format using the Export 3-D DXF model command from the File > Export menu. This opens the 3-D DXF Export dialog:
- 88 -
Exporting 3-D DXF
Choose one of two options: 1-Whole model with details - The entire building model is exported including 3-D details such as window frames, 3-D building elements etc. This option can be useful for exporting for visualisation and further processing in other software such as SketchUp (image below) 2-Zones - The building model is exported showing only zones. This option can be useful for visualising the geometry of the model used in simulations.
Example 3-D DXF Output - Whole model with details The above model was created in DesignBuilder, exported in DXF format using the Whole model with details option and Imported into SketchUp where details such as textures, trees and people were added.
- 89 -
Note: when importing DXF files into SketchUp be sure to set the scale options on the Open dialog.
Working With Buildings (Site Level)

At the site level you can: Add new buildings, Copy, delete and change the position of existing buildings. Change the site orientation. Enter site model Data including information on the site location, weather data etc.
Create New Building
You can add one or more new buildings from the site level. Note that each building has its' own set of Model Options and is simulated separately but shares site Model Data with the other buildings on the site.
Create New Building - Model

Select the type of building model you wish to create from the list of options. Your selection will depend on what you want to do with the building model and the amount of data available. Some typical options are: Draw building + standard data - Recommended for general-purpose modelling. Single zone + simplified data - Early design stage analysis of building components, facade and cooling options. Parametric building + standard data - Buildings of standard form (rectangular, L-shaped or courtyard).
You can adjust the Model Options later if necessary using the Model Options dialog.
Create New Building - Default Data

This tab allows you to define the templates used to populate the new building:with default Model Data.
Construction
Select the construction template to use as a source of default fabric data for the building.
Activity
Select the activity template to use as a source of default activity-related data for the building. This will set the following default data:
- 90 -
Working With Blocks (Building Level)
Occupancy levels and timing, holidays etc Metabolic rates Levels of equipment use Heating and cooling temperature setpoints Illuminance requirements Fresh air requirements
Glazing
The glazing template is used as a source of default window, shading and percentage glazing data for the building.
Lighting
The lighting template is used as a source of default lighting and lighting control data for the building.
HVAC
The HVAC template is used as a source of default data for the HVAC equipment to heat and cool the building.
Working With Blocks (Building Level)

Blocks are the basic elements used to create a DesignBuilder model. Three types of block can be added to the building: Building Blocks are composed of building elements such as walls, floor slabs and roofs and may be partitioned internally to form a number of zones. Outline Blocks are used to help in the creation of more complex building block geometry. Component Blocks are used to create visual, ground and shading structures which do not contain zones.
All block types are created at the Building Level in the same way and are drawn using perimeters which can be extruded either horizontally or vertically. This section describes the various operations involved in creating and editing blocks at the building level. To create or edit a block you must first go to the building level and you can do this by clicking on the building entry in the navigator or if you're at the site level and you want to edit an existing building, you can double-click on the building in the 'Edit' screen.
- 91 -
Go to building level
Either operation will take you to the building level:
Adding Blocks
To add or create a new block, first go to the building level (if you are not already there) and click on the Add new block tool. If you've just created a new building, the Add new block tool is automatically activated. A block is created by drawing the base perimeter of the block using one of the perimeter shapes such as a polygon. The dimensions of the block are those measured from the outside, the height of the block is the floor-floor height.
- 92 -
Adding Blocks
See also the Creating a model Tutorial Please refer to perimeter shapes for details of drawing perimeters. After drawing a perimeter, a block will be automatically extruded by the Height entry in the Drawing options settings or if the Auto-complete block setting is switched off, the perimeter can be dragged to form the extrusion. To help in setting the correct extrusion height, the increment snap setting can be used which enables the drag movement to jump by any defined increment. Alternatively, you can simply type in an extrusion height and press the enter key:
When a block has been placed, additional blocks can be drawn onto any surface of the block to form more complex aggregate blocks. As you move the mouse cursor across the faces of an existing block, each face will change colour from grey to blue to indicate the active drawing plane. You can lock the active drawing plane by pressing the SHIFT key, which allows you to move the cursor off the current face while keeping the plane active. You can also lock the active drawing plane to the ground plane by moving the cursor over the background area and pressing the SHIFT key, this is particularly helpful in avoiding the selection of the wrong plane when drawing a vertically extruded block adjacent to an existing block. Once youve clicked the first data point into the active drawing plane, it becomes locked regardless of whether or not the SHIFT key is pressed until the perimeter has been completed or the tool is cancelled. In the example below the vertical plane shown in blue has been selected, the shape of the block will be drawn in this plane and the volume created by extruding normal to it.
- 93 -
When a block is added to the surface of another block, a geometric link is automatically created between the two blocks:
A hole can be added to the mating surface of this link (the inter-block partition) in order to form one contiguous space:
- 94 -
Adding Blocks
Note: the Merge zones connected by holes Model option must be set if you wish the two zones in the 2 blocks to be treated as one zone in the thermal calculations. As already illustrated, a block perimeter can be drawn on the ground plane or onto the surface of an existing block in which case the perimeter is extruded normal to the surface on which it is drawn.
Avoiding Indents
If the perimeter includes indents in such a way that the requested wall thickness is physically impossible and the wall thickness cannot be accommodated then DesignBuilder will still allow the block to be created but the wall thickness is reset to a small value (typically 0.025m). See the wall thickness topic for more on this.
Drawing in a vertical plane without reference to an existing block

To create horizontal extrusions from a vertical plane, the first perimeter line can be aligned with the Z-axis using the axis snap:
The protractor can be used to place the second line in order to accurately define the orientation of the plane relative to the base or ground plane:
- 95 -
Alternatively, the orientation of the plane can be defined using the first line:
Snapping the second line to the Z-axis then forms the horizontal extrusion:
- 96 -
Adding Blocks
Once a vertical plane has been defined it will be remembered until the Add new block command is cancelled, so the perimeter can be unwound using the ESC key or the right-click menu Undo last point entry and any perimeter shape drawn into the stored plane:
After drawing the last perimeter line to connect to the perimeter start point, the perimeter can then be dragged to create a horizontally extruded block:
- 97 -
Block Creation Options

The block creation options enable you to control the way a block is drawn: Block type Form Height Wall Thickness Auto-complete block
These options are accessed through the Drawing options data panel, which is displayed when you click on the Add new block tool:
- 98 -
Block And Zone Dimensions

COMBINED CONSTRUCTIONS
The diagram below illustrates how blocks should be defined and how zone volumes and surface dimensions are derived from the parent block when using the default Combined constructions model option. Note that there are 2 alternative dimensioning protocols: UK NCM Convention which should always be used when using DesignBuilder for assessing buildings through the UK National Calculation Methodology, i.e. for Part-L and Section 6 Building Regulations checks and EPC/BER calculations. Simulation and General Design Convention which should generally be used for all other applications where an NCM calculation is not required.
- 99 -
The main differences between the 2 conventions are: 1. UK NCM Convention - For ground and intermediate floors, the block height is defined as "top of floor to top of floor" and for top floor blocks with a flat roof the block height is "top of floor to soffit/underside of roof slab". Details on defining building geometry for other less common geometries when using the NCM can be found in the Non Domestic EPC Conventions for England & Wales document. Simulation and General Design Convention - For ground floors the block height is "top of floor to bottom of floor". For intermediate floors, the block height is defined as "bottom of floor to bottom of floor" and for top floor blocks with a flat roof the block height is "bottom of floor to soffit/underside of roof slab".
2.
The important points to note for both conventions are: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. The length/width dimensions of the block are measured from the outside of external walls. Zone height is always the same as block height, i.e. it is unaffected by block wall thickness or thickness of floor constructions. Wall surfaces extend the full height of the block. Flat roofs are placed on top of the block, so when drawing a block with a flat roof you should exclude the roof construction in the height. External floors are placed under the block, so when drawing a block with an external floor you should exclude the external floor construction thickness in the height.
- 100 -
6. 7.
Zone surface dimensions (shown in green dotted lines above) are measured from inner edges of outer walls and the centre line of partitions. Floor surfaces extend horizontally to the inner surface of external walls and to the centre line of partitions. See below for more on zone/surface dimensions.
Show diagram for Separate Constructions For Separate constructions the volume of the zone is calculated as the floor area x the block height. The volume of any floor and ceiling voids and associated constructions can be subtracted if the relevant model options are checked. The zone volume used in ventilation calculations is the actual inside volume (shown in yellow in the diagram above). These inside zone surface dimensions are used to define surface heat transfer areas in simulations and other calculations.
Zone perimeter (plan view)
Other related information

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. See Combined Constructions for information on the meaning of the Construction Model data. Also see Constructions for how to edit the construction configuration. Block wall thickness for information on how zone inner volumes are created from external block dimensions Construction and glazing model options for details of volume calculations with the options to include/exclude floor and ceiling volumes from the zone volume used in the energy calculations. And the Model Geometry Example section for a detailed worked example illustrating how surface areas and volumes are calculated.
The Creating a model Tutorial
- 101 -
Block Wall Thickness

The Block wall thickness is used to generate the geometric thickness of the external wall elements of building blocks. It is a significant parameter because the zone surfaces and volumes used in calculations are generated from the internal dimensions of the block which are turn derived from a) the external block geometry and b) block wall thickness. So the block wall thickness influences: 1. 2. 3. 4. Calculation of room air volume (thicker block walls mean less zone air volume). Size and shape of zone surfaces. Visual representation of external walls in rendered view (below). Position of component blocks used for local shading by positioning on or near windows on the block outer surface relative to windows positioned on the zone surface.
Block wall thickness does not affect zone height - zones always have the same height as the block. The default block wall thickness setting is automatically generated from the overall thickness of the external wall construction set in Construction Model data panel at building level at the time the block is drawn, but it can be overridden by typing in the required value. Subsequently changing the external wall construction layer thickness values won't affect the geometry of the block though. The block wall thickness can also be changed after the block has been drawn from the Block tab of Model options dialog when at block level. The Constructions that determine the thermal heat transfer characteristics of the external walls, roofs, floor surfaces can be edited in Constructions Model data.
See also the Creating a model Tutorial Note 1: The block wall thickness does not affect the thermal properties of the wall (U-value, thermal mass etc). Wall thermal properties are based purely on the construction data specified for the walls, floor, roof etc. Note 2: The external wall thickness is uniform for all block surfaces, so,for a particular block, there is no way to have some block walls thicker than others. Other blocks can have different wall thickness values. Note 3: A small value of wall thickness will mean that the zones dimensions will be very similar to the block external dimensions. The Wall thickness is also entered when Converting an Outline block to a Building block. You should enter a low value of Wall thickness if: You are using internal measurements to draw blocks instead of external measurements. The block is a roof with low roof slope angle sloping roof elements - see Example 1 below. The block is mainly glazed - see Example 2 below.
The lowest value of wall thickness allowed is 0.001m and the highest allowed value is 2.0m.
EFFECT OF INDENTS IN THE BLOCK PERIMETER

When creating the block, if the shape of the perimeter drawn includes indents in such a way that the requested wall thickness is physically impossible and the wall thickness cannot be accommodated then DesignBuilder will still allow the block to be created but the wall thickness is reset to a small value that is compatible (typically
- 102 -
Block Wall Thickness
0.025m). See screenshot below. In this case you will not be able to edit the wall thickness to a higher value without redrawing the block to avoid the indent.
ROOF BLOCKS - EXAMPLE 1

Select a small Wall thickness when creating a roof block having very shallow slope. This example shows a 2 block, 2 zone model, the top block (selected) representing a roof having shallow slope angles.
Using a Wall thickness 0f 0.01m gives good results as the roof zone covers most of the block floor area (below).
- 103 -
Using a large Wall thickness makes it impossible for DesignBuilder to generate a floor covering the whole block floor area giving Poor results (below).
In the image above the white areas of the block floor will not form part of the model which is probably not what the user had in mind.
CURTAIN GLAZING - EXAMPLE 2

When modelling continuous glazing for curtain walls, atria, greenhouses etc. it is often necessary to model glazing joining at the corners. It is not possible for windows to literally meet in this way because EnergyPlus requires all openings (windows, doors etc) to be placed on a parent surface with at least a small gap between the opening and the parent surface edge. But by using a low value of block thickness you can give the appearance of adjacent windows as shown below. A small Wall thickness, below, allows the glazing to cover most of the wall giving Good results (below).
A larger Wall thickness, below, requires more area to cater for the walls joining at the corners and the glazing does not meet 'round the corner' giving Poor results (below).
- 104 -
Block Types
Block Types
Three types of block are available: Building Blocks are used to draw the model or a section of the model. Outline Blocks are used to help in the creation of building block geometry and do not affect the model. Component Blocks are used to create visual and shading structures which do not contain zones.
Building Block
A building block represents the outer shell of the model or part of the model. A finished block comprises a set of building elements, which may include external walls, roofs and floor slabs, the constructions of which are determined from the current building construction model data. Similarly, using opening model data, block facades are automatically created with the required configuration of windows, doors, vents and solar shading devices:
- 105 -
Solar shading devices are displayed in the visualisation screen:
A block may be divided internally into any number of zones by drawing partitions and where needed, voids or courtyards can also be incorporated:
Custom openings (windows, doors, etc.) can be added to block facades by going to the surface level and using the 'Draw window' family of commands:
- 106 -
Outline Block
Blocks can be moved, copied and rotated. Blocks can also be cut or stretched and block faces can be dragged to different positions.
Outline Block
An outline block is created and edited in exactly the same way as a building block but is just a 3-D shape without associated building elements such as walls, floors, roofs, etc. Note: Because Outline blocks are not part of the model they do not appear in the Navigator panel. Outline blocks are very useful in the creation of more complicated models. Because they are relatively simple objects, they are much faster to create, copy, move, etc. than conventional building blocks and can be manipulated freely without worrying about intersections. Once the required geometry has been established, outline blocks can be converted to conventional blocks. Outline blocks can also be used as a temporary device to create drawing planes from which building blocks or other outline blocks can be extruded. You can remove all outline blocks from a model by selecting Remove all outlines from the Edit menu.
Basic use of outline blocks is covered in the Basic Drawing Tools 5 Tutorial
USING OUTLINE BLOCKS TO CREATE A DORMER WINDOW

For example, to create a dormer window, first set the Block type to 2-Outline block and lock the active drawing plane to the front surface of the first floor block by selecting it and pressing the SHIFT key, then draw the base line of the dormer face perimeter:
- 107 -
Create the angle of the dormer pitch using the Protractor:
and then complete the perimeter:
- 108 -
Outline Block
Now drag the dormer perimeter all the way through the main roof block:
Select the dormer block and click on the Cut block tool, making sure that the Cutting method on the Drawing options data panel is set to 2-Select plane and click on the forward facing plane of the main roof block to create a cut in the dormer block in the plane of the roof:
- 109 -
Click again to finish the cut and then select the section of the dormer block that is not required and delete it:
: Select the dormer outline block and click on the Convert outline block tool to complete the process:
- 110 -
Outline Block
The finished block after adding openings:
Drawing dormer roofs is also illustrated in the Dormer Roof Tutorial Note: Sometimes when converting outline blocks to component or building blocks you will notice that the new block has a very slightly different size to the original outline block. This can happen when DesignBuilder needs to slightly adjust the size in order to generate a viable zone with 3-D slab surfaces. It is therefore advisable when using outline blocks to create complex geometries to draw and convert the outline blocks individually. This avoids adjacencies between touching outline blocks from getting 'broken' when they are converted 'en-masse'.
- 111 -
Component Block
There are 3 types of component block: 1-Standard - used for shading, reflection and visualisation. 2-Ground - used for setting ground adjacency, shading, reflection and visualisation. 3-Adiabatic - used for setting adiabatic adjacency, shading, reflection and visualisation.
Component blocks are drawn in the same way as Building blocks but selecting the Block type in the Drawing Options panel as 3-Component block. Each Component block has its own Component block material, transmittance schedule and shade/not shade model data. To edit this you must first go to the component block itself by double-clicking on it in the model edit screen or clicking on the entry in the Navigator. Alternatively, component blocks inherit default model data from the building level so if you leave the component block model data in its default state (blue) you can change all model data in one go by making the edit at the building level. All component blocks cast shadows in Visualisations.
More information on component blocks can be found in the Basic Drawing Tools 8 Tutorial
STANDARD COMPONENT BLOCK

Sometimes it can be useful to create structures such as pillars, shading obstructions and balconies which do not contain zones. Standard component blocks can be used for modelling such structures as they are treated simply as shading/reflection surfaces in simulations without any zones. Standard component blocks are visible in Visualisations, using the texture associated with the Component block material as set on the Constructions tab under the Component Block header. They can be used to cast shadows and reflect solar radiation and light in simulations by checking the Component block shades and reflects model data under Component Blocks on the Constructions tab. Note: component blocks do not shade ground reflected solar radiation unless the reflection solar option is used. The image below shows some typical uses of Standard component blocks.
- 112 -
Component Block
Note: standard component blocks do not absorb or conduct heat in any way - their only effect on building surfaces in simulations is related to the shading and reflection of short-wave solar radiation and light. Component blocks are a flexible way to apply shading to any part of the building and can be used to model more complex window shading systems not catered for by the in-built local shading systems that can be selected on the Openings tab. However there are some issues that should be considered when using component block in this way and these are discussed in the Component blocks used for local shading reference page. Use of standard component blocks for shading is also covered in the Solar Shading Tutorial
GROUND COMPONENT BLOCK

Ground component blocks can be used as a convenient way to set the adjacency of any touching building block surfaces as being 'adjacent to ground'. In the model below the Ground block (shown in green) has been positioned in contact with the building block to create a ground adjacency in the part of the Building block surface in contact with the Ground block. Ground component blocks are visible in Visualisations, using the texture associated with the Component block material as set on the Constructions tab under the Component Block header. They can be used to cast shadows and reflect solar radiation and light in simulations by checking the Component block shades and reflects model data under Component Blocks on the Constructions tab. It is important to be aware that the material associated with the ground component block is not used in any way to modify the conduction path of heat from the building to the ground. The ground component block is used only to modify the adjacency of the surfaces touching it to be 'adjacent to ground'. Surfaces with any openings which touch a ground component block will have those openings removed when the component block is placed. Also it is not be possible to add openings in parts of a zone surface that touch a ground component block. This applies to sub-surfaces as well as windows, doors, vents and holes.
- 113 -
View from building level
View from zone level Ground component blocks are displayed in the visualisation screen using the Ground texture as set at the site level. More information on ground modelling can be found in the Ground Modelling topic.
- 114 -
Component Block
Note: The adjacencies established by contact with ground blocks can be overridden by making settings under Adjacency in Constructions model data at the surface level.
ADIABATIC COMPONENT BLOCKS

Adiabatic component blocks can be used as a convenient way to set the adjacency of any touching building block surfaces to 'adiabatic'. Adiabatic surfaces do not transfer heat beyond their outer surface and are often used for modelling boundaries with other spaces that can be considered to be at roughly the same temperature as the zone. In the model below the Adiabatic block (shown in red) has been positioned in contact with half of the South facade of the building to model the effect of an adjacent building which does not form part of the DesignBuilder model. The touching adiabatic component block creates an adiabatic adjacency in the part of the Building block surface in contact with the Adiabatic block. Adiabatic component blocks are visible in Visualisations, using the texture associated with the Component block material as set on the Constructions tab under the Component Block header. They can be used to cast shadows and reflect solar radiation and light in simulations by checking the Component block shades and reflects model data under Component Blocks on the Constructions tab.
View from building level
View from zone level
- 115 -
Note: While no heat is conducted across the outer side of adiabatic surfaces, these surface will still allow the flow of heat at the inside surface into the structure and so act to provide thermal mass to the connected zone. Therefore simulation results will show heat transfer for adiabatic surfaces. In thermally massive constructions (e.g. concrete floors) these heat flows can be quite significant over the period of hours and days,but usually less so over monthly intervals.
Block Forms
While drawing a block perimeter, you can select the block form from the Drawing options data panel in the bottom left of the screen. The standard block forms are provided to facilitate the creation of blocks representing specific building geometries. You can select from options 1-4 below: 1-Extruded 2-Sloped wall 3-Pitched roof 4-Dome (5-General)
The 5-General block form is not selectable but rather is defined internally by DesignBuilder following block geometry operations such as Cut block, Horizontal block extrusion, Drag face and Boolean geometry operation. Once a block has been created, it is possible in most cases to change to a new form by navigating to the block and opening the Model options dialog. When at block level the Model options dialog opens at the Block tab and there the Block form can in most cases be changed.
Extruded Block Form

The Extruded block form is the most commonly used geometry. You create an extruded block by drawing a perimeter using a number of pre-defined shapes and then extruding the perimeter by whatever distance is required. If you use the polygon perimeter shape you can create extrusions in both horizontal and vertical planes (or even in sloped planes).
- 116 -
Extruded Block Form
The various methods of drawing general extrusions are explained under Adding Blocks. Circular and rectangular perimeter shapes are used to create cylindrical and rectilinear prismatic extrusions from horizontal planes:
Sloped Wall Block Form

The Sloped wall block form is used to create blocks on horizontal planes with uniformly sloping walls. Sloped wall blocks can be created using any perimeter shape (polygon, rectangle or circle):
The wall angle is defined using the Slope setting in the Drawing options panel and the blocks are automatically truncated by the Height setting:
- 117 -
Pitched Roof Block Form

The pitched roof block form automatically generates a pitched roof from a perimeter drawn on a horizontal plane. Pitched roof blocks can be created using any perimeter shape (polygon, rectangle or circle):
The slope of the roof is defined using the Roof slope setting in the Drawing options data panel. A pitched roof can be created with hips or gable ends using the Gable roof setting:
- 118 -
If you draw a pitched roof on top of an existing block, you can control the overhang or the depth of the roof eaves using the Roof overhang setting:
Voids
Where roofs are to be created on top of conventional blocks that contain voids and the voids are to be automatically incorporated within the pitched roof, the Automatically include voids from lower blocks Model options switch must be switched on before drawing the roof perimeter.
- 119 -
PITCHED ROOF DRAWING OPTIONS Gable roof

Check this option if the roof is to have vertical gable ends (see above). If this option is not checked then the roof geometry will be a 'hip roof'.
Wall thickness
The wall thickness is only required for gable roofs and is equivalent to the Block wall thickness of extruded block types for the vertical gable end walls. The role of wall thickness in generating gable roof geometry is described below.
Roof overhang
The extent to which the roof forms an overhang over the zones below. if the Auto-calculate pitched roof thickness option is checked then the overhang displayed in the model and also the overhang modelled in the simulation will be exactly the value of Roof overhang entered here.
Roof slope
The slope of the roof to be generated measured from horizontal.
Auto-calculate pitched roof thickness

Check this option if the Block roof thickness is to be automatically calculated in a way that ensures that the Roof overhang value entered will be respected in both the model view and in the simulation.
Block roof thickness

This is the thickness of the sloped roof slabs and it is used to control the visual appearance of the model 3-D views in the Edit and Visualisation screens as well as Daylighting. It has no impact on the EnergyPlus simulations. The block roof thickness can be entered manually only if the Auto-calculate pitched roof thickness option is unchecked, otherwise it is calculated automatically as described above.
Roofspace occupied
If the roofspace is flagged as being unoccupied (this option is left unchecked) then a series of changes are made to the block attributes: Any glazing that would otherwise have been included on the gable end walls is removed. Zone type is set to 2-Semi-exterior unconditioned. Infiltration in the roofspace has a default value of 1 ac/h when using Scheduled natural ventilation or 'Very poor' sealing quality when using Calculated natural ventilation.
AUTOMATIC PITCHED ROOF GEOMETRY

This section describes the automatic DesignBuilder pitched roof geometry generation with reference to an example roof created by drawing a rectangular perimeter with a roof overhang of 0.3m and a roof slab thickness of 0.2m:
- 120 -
Roof perimeters are drawn using the perimeters of lower adjacent blocks:
The software first creates the roof zone (this would be the zone written to the EnergyPlus IDF file) by first identifying the wall thickness of the adjacent lower block and then deflating the drawn perimeter by this thickness to obtain the basic roof zone perimeter. The resulting roof zone perimeter is then guaranteed to coincide with the lower adjacent zone perimeter(s) in the absence of a roof overhang:
- 121 -
If a roof overhang is specified, the basic roof zone perimeter is then inflated by the roof overhang:
The roof zone is then completed by identifying the skeleton of the perimeter and applying the specified slope to the resulting segments. The base of the roof zone now overlaps the lower adjacent zone(s) by the specified roof overhang:
- 122 -
Note: In the case where a roof perimeter is drawn on top of several blocks having different wall thicknesses, the software identifies the block wall thickness having the longest perimeter and uses that thickness to derive the roof zone perimeter. You should be aware that in this case the specified roof overhang will only be guaranteed where the roof overlaps blocks having the same wall thickness as that identified for the roof zone perimeter. The roof building block slabs are then created by extruding the roof zone surfaces outward along a normal to the surfaces by a distance specified using the Roof Thickness setting. The perimeter of the resulting roof block will extend beyond the roof zone perimeter by a distance (d in the illustration) determined by the specified roof thickness: Note: The overhang created by the formation of the roof slabs (d in the above illustration) is only noticeable in the Edit and Visualisation views and will not be written to the IDF file i.e. unlike the roof zone overlap, it has no effect on the EnergyPlus shading calculations.
Gable roofs
If the Gable roof option is selected, all gable end roof segments (isosceles triangles) are generated to fit flush with the lower adjacent block surface:
- 123 -
If the specified gable wall thickness is different to the wall thickness of the lower adjacent block, an overlap will be created between the roof zone and the lower adjacent zone, which may affect shading calculations in EnergyPlus:
Note: Pitched roof form blocks are automatically configured so that the external walls are not shown on the Edit screen when at block level. This can help when drawing partitions, positioning assembly blocks etc. The option can be reversed using the Display external walls Block display model option if required.
- 124 -
Dome Block Form
Dome Block Form

The dome block form is used to create hemispherical blocks and can only be created using the circular perimeter shape:
More information on using the Dome block form can be found in the Basic Drawing Tools 9 Tutorial
General Block Form

When a block is edited in such a way that it no longer fits with one of the standard block forms (Extruded, Sloped wall, Pitched roof or Dome), it is labelled by DesignBuilder with the 5-General block form. Blocks having the General block form can still be transformed back to have the Sloped wall or Pitched roof form (but not the Extruded form) on the Block tab of the Model options dialog. Note: General form blocks are automatically configured so that the external walls are not shown on the Edit screen when at block level. This can help when drawing partitions, positioning assembly blocks etc. The option can be reversed using the Display external walls Block display model option if required.
Height
After drawing a vertically extruded block perimeter on a horizontal plane, the block will be automatically extruded using the Height setting, if the Auto-Complete Block option is switched on or the View Rotation has been set to 'Plan'.
Auto-Complete Block
After drawing a vertically extruded block perimeter on a horizontal plane, the block will be automatically extruded by the Height setting if the Auto-Complete Block option is switched on or the View Rotation has been set to 'Plan'.
- 125 -
With this option switched off (or in the case of a non-horizontal drawing plane), the perimeter can be dragged along an axis normal to the perimeter to obtain the required extrusion.
Edit Blocks
The geometry and other attributes of blocks can be modified using the following tools: Drag block face Divide block using cutting tool Boolean Geometry Operations Edit Block Geometry Dialog Convert Outline Block Transfer Blocks
Drag Block Face
The topology of a block can be edited using the 'Drag face' tool which allows you to select a block surface and drag it along an axis, normal to the surface. To edit a block topology first go to the building level, select the block that you want to modify and click on the 'Drag face' tool. Then move the mouse cursor to the surface that you want to move. As you move the cursor across the block surfaces, each surface will highlight to help in selecting the required surface. When the mouse cursor is over the required surface, click to start dragging it:
- 126 -
Divide Block Using Cutting Tool
Drag the surface using the mouse or key-in the distance to shift the surface by the required amount:
Blocks can be cut (i.e. divided into 2) using the Divide (Cut) Block Tool. To cut or divide a block first go to the building level, select the block that you want to modify and click on the Divide block toolbar icon. Blocks are divided using a plane which can be defined using one of 2 methods: 1-Draw plane - you define the plane by clicking on 3 points. 2-Select plane - you define the plane by selecting an existing plane in the model.
DRAW PLANE METHOD

The Draw plane cutting method involves drawing two lines which define the plane. For example to cut a pitched roof to fit flush with a rotunda:
- 127 -
Because the geometry is fairly complicated, it's advisable to use an outline block to generate the intermediate geometry and then convert the block to a building block after the editing process is complete. So, from the building level, click on the Add new block tool, select 2-Outline block as the block type, set the perimeter shape to 1Polygon and the Height to the same height as the rotunda, then draw a conventional vertical extrusion to fit flush to the rotunda. In order to trace round the base of the rotunda, it's probably easier to set the view rotation to 'Plan', click on to the ground plane and press SHIFT to lock the plane before placing the first perimeter point:
When tracing around a perimeter by snapping from end-point to end-point, it can be helpful to switch off the direction snaps and the drawing guides to prevent them from interfering with the point snaps. Completing the perimeter:
- 128 -
Click on the outline block to select it and then click on the 'Divide block' tool and make sure that the 'Cutting method' is set to 1-Draw plane in the Drawing Options data panel. Switch the protractor on and move the cursor over the end face of the selected block, the surface will highlight to indicate that it's become the active drawing plane. Press the SHIFT key to lock the drawing plane and then locate the cursor 4m from the base of the block using edge snap:
Click to place the beginning of the first cutting plane line, then place the end of the line to intersect the face edge with a pitch angle of 30:
- 129 -
Orbit to make the back face of the block visible. Move the mouse cursor over the back face and when it highlights, press the SHIFT key to lock the plane. Place the second cutting plane line to snap to the local X-axis of the back face:
Click to complete the cutting plane. The blocks that will be produced by the cut are displayed in red and green, depending on which side of the cutting plane they lie. At this point, you can choose to cancel the cut by pressing the ESC key or selecting 'Cancel Cut' from the right-click menu.
- 130 -
Click again to complete the cut and then select and delete the block that isn't needed:
Go through a similar process to create the other pitch. You may need to switch off the drawing guides and midpoint snap to prevent them from interfering with the protractor and edge snap:
- 131 -
Click to create the cutting plane:
Click again to make the final cut and then select and delete the block that isn't part of the finished structure:
- 132 -
The outline block can then be selected and converted to a building block:
SELECT PLANE METHOD

The Select plane method of cutting a block uses an existing plane to define the cutting plane. It can be demonstrated by modelling a roof offshoot:
- 133 -
Click on the Add new block tool, select 2-Outline block as the block type and set the perimeter shape to 1Polygon. Switch the protractor on and move the mouse cursor to the back face of the offshoot. When the cursor is over the back face, press the <Shift> key to lock the drawing plane and snap the protractor to the upper edge end-point:
Draw the first perimeter line at a 45 pitch and move the cursor to intersect with the back face upper edge midpoint drawing guide and click to set the end-point:
- 134 -
Move the cursor to snap to the other end-point of the back face upper edge and then complete the perimeter:
Now drag the outline block face through the main roof block:
- 135 -
Select the offshoot outline block and click on the Cut block along plane tool, making sure that the Cutting method on the Drawing options data panel is set to 'Select plane and click on the forward facing plane of the main roof block to create a cut in the offshoot block in the plane of the roof:
Click again to finish the cut and then select the section of the offshoot roof block that is not required and delete it:
- 136 -
Select the roof offshoot block and click on the 'Convert selected outline blocks to building blocks' tool to complete the process:
Note: In some circumstances, resulting blocks may not be able to be converted to building blocks due to geometrical limitations. In this case, the block will be displayed in a sepia colour to indicate that it cannot be converted.
- 137 -
Boolean Geometry Operations

DesignBuilder provides some very powerful modelling tools for combining blocks in various ways to create new more complex geometric forms. Boolean geometry (otherwise know as Constructive solid geometry or CSG) provides these functions: 1. 2. 3. Union, where 2 blocks are combined into a single new block. Difference (subtract), in which one block is subtracted from the other to form a single new block. Intersection, where a new block is formed where the 2 original blocks intersect.
The union operation can be applied to any block including building blocks, component blocks and outlines blocks, whereas the difference and intersection methods only apply to outline blocks. This is because the outline block is the only block type that allow the block intersections required for these operations. Outline blocks resulting from the boolean operation can then be converted to building or component blocks.
USING THE BOOLEAN OPERATIONS

The first step in using the boolean operations is to go to building level and select the 2 blocks to which the command is to apply.
The 2 blocks to be combined are shown above before the operation is started- a 3.5m height L-shaped block and a tall sports hall block.
- 138 -
Boolean Geometry Operations
When the 2 blocks are both selected the screen looks as above with the Boolean operations toolbar icon enabled. Pressing on the toolbar icon at this stage starts the command and the Display options panel is displayed in the bottom left of the screen. On this panel there is a drop list with the 3 boolean functions available for selection. In the case where 2 building blocks are selected, only the Union operation is allowed. This is because building blocks cannot intersect and the difference and intersection options require intersection to work.
- 139 -
Once the command has been started the 2 blocks will become purple. To complete the operation, click on the edit screen with the mouse.
After the final click, the 2 blocks are merged into a single block (above). This can be a very useful way to simplify geometry avoiding use of interconnecting blocks and the associated block connection surfaces, reducing the number of surfaces and easing the creation of zones that may span what were multiple blocks. Note: the first implementation of DesignBuilder boolean geometry has some limitations when used with building blocks. You will find that with some building block geometries, a union operation is not possible. Also some more complex outline block geometries created using boolean geometry cannot be converted to building blocks. These limitations do not apply when working directly with component blocks or when converting outline blocks to component blocks.
- 140 -
Edit Block Options
Edit Block Options
You can edit certain aspects of a building block geometry by clicking on the 'Building model options' icon while at the block level. This opens the Model Options dialog box:
At the block level, the Block tab on the Model Options data dialogue box is enabled and allows you to change the Form of the block and to modify pitched roof assignment. To change the form of the current block, make a selection from the 'Form' drop list. When you change the form of a block from an 'Extruded' form to 'Pitched Roof' or 'Sloping Walls' the original form will be remembered so that even if you have edited the block by cutting it or dragging a face, when you convert the form back to 'Extruded', the original form will be restored. The Pitched Roof/Wall Construction Transition settings allow you to control which elements within a block will be assigned pitched roof construction, either by disallowing pitched roof construction altogether or by adjusting the element slope to determine which elements should be identified as pitched roofs. The 'Roof-wall transition angle' is the angle from the horizontal below which the element will be considered a roof.
Convert Outline Block
- 141 -
To convert an Outline block to a Building block, or Component block select the blocks that you want to convert and then click on the Convert selected outline block tool. This opens the Convert Outline Block Options dialog below.
Select the type of block to convert to: Building block Component block
When converting to a Building block you can also enter the Wall thickness of the block.
Transfer Blocks
You can move blocks from one building to another using the Transfer blocks command accessed from the Edit menu when the site contains more than 1 building. This menu option opens the Transfer blocks dialog below. Select the building containing the blocks to be copied and the building to receive the blocks and Press OK.
Note: You should check before starting the block transfer that none of the source blocks overlap with blocks in the destination building. Even a small overlap will cause the whole process to fail.
- 142 -
Working Within Blocks (Block Level)
Note: the operation cannot be undone and it clears any existing undo/redo information.
Working Within Blocks (Block Level)

This section describes the various operations involved in partitioning a block to create zones and adding courtyards to blocks. Before you start to draw partitions or courtyards, you first need to go to the block that you want to edit and you can do this by clicking on the block entry in the navigator or by double-clicking on the block in the 'Edit' screen, if you're at the building level.
Go to block level
Either of these operations will take you to the block:
- 143 -
Zone Block By Drawing Partitions
Building blocks can be divided into any number of zones by drawing partitions inside the block. To start drawing partitions, click on the 'Draw partitions' tool. You can place partitions freely within a block either free-standing or snapped to an external block wall or existing partition. Partitions can be positioned using the snaps, drawing guides and protractor. A partition doesn't need to be snapped to a wall element, you can drag a partition across a wall and when you click the end-point, it will be automatically trimmed to the wall. You can enter the thickness of the first partition drawn in the block and subsequent partitions take on the same thickness as the first.
Note for partitioning large models

By default, blocks are automatically re-zoned as soon as complete zone perimeters are formed by drawing partitions. In order to speed up the process of adding partitions, particularly in the case of large and complex blocks, the block zoning process can be postponed until partitioning has been completed. To do this, open the Model options dialog and switch off the Automatic block zoning option under the Miscellaneous Edit header on the Drawing Tools tab. When partitioning has been completed, the block can be manually re-zoned by selecting the Rezone block command from the Tools menu. Partitions drawn with the Automatic block zoning option switched off are called Outline partitions and are shown in blue.
- 144 -
Click the partition end-point on the outside of the wall and it's automatically trimmed:
- 145 -
When you draw a partition or a series of partitions (stream), you can undo the last point placed by pressing the ESC key or selecting 'Undo last point' from the right-click menu. You can also terminate a partition stream anywhere by selecting 'End stream' from the right-click menu (or by pressing the ENTER key):
When partitions or partition streams are placed that don't connect with anything at either or both ends, they are called hanging partitions and can be used to add thermal mass to zones:
Once you've placed partitions that divide existing zones within a block, the block is re-zoned automatically:
- 146 -
When you partition complex blocks rather than simple vertical extrusions, partitions are automatically cut to fit within the block:
Tip: If the display of the block outer walls prevents you from drawing partitions (for example in a pitched roof block) then you can switch off the display of external walls.
ADVANCED TOPIC
In some cases, if the geometry is complex, it can be possible to create a zone that comprises several geometric bodies which are physically separated from each other. For example, in the case of a horizontally extruded 'C' shape:
- 147 -
If a partition is drawn as shown:
The partition and resulting zone will be cut to form what appears to be two partitions and two zones:
- 148 -
However the two resulting zones are in fact two geometric bodies within one zone:
While this geometry is perfectly acceptable for the default EnergyPlus solar calculations (see Model Options), it cannot be processed by the more rigourous Full exterior and interior solar distribution option. If this latter option is required, you can either model the geometry as two separate blocks or cut the block.
- 149 -
Hanging And Outline Partitions

Hanging partitions are partitions that do not create zones because they do not connect at both ends with other walls/partitions. Hanging partitions are created in the same way as ordinary partitions using the Draw partition tool, but are finished by pressing <Enter> (or the End partition stream command from the right click menu) to define the end of a partition stream. They are shown in blue (below).
Hanging partitions are modelled non-geometrically in EnergyPlus as Internal thermal mass.
Outline partitions
Also if Automatic block zoning is switched off, all new partitions are treated as outline partitions (shown in blue and do not create zones) until converted to standard partitions by using the Rezone block command from the Tools menu.
Virtual Partitions
A virtual partition is a partition between 2 zones which exists purely to sub-divide the space up and has no corresponding wall in the actual building. Virtual partitions are commonly used for separating perimeter zones from core zones when there is to be different HVAC provision or when carrying out daylighting or solar overheating studies in situations where a large open plan space is subject to a high level of solar gain around the perimeter. Virtual partitions can be placed to create separate perimeter and core zones so that the local effect of the solar gain in the perimeter zone may be calculated. In the absence of virtual partitions, the risk of overheating could be underestimated due to the distribution of solar gain throughout the open plan space. When drawing partitions you can set the Partition type to 2-Virtual in the Drawing option panel. Also for partitions that have already been created you can freely switch the partition type between 1-Standard and 2-Virtual using the same control. Virtual partitions are modelled using a hole that fills the whole surface area. You cannot draw custom openings on a virtual partition. The model options for controlling the effect of holes equally apply to virtual partition holes: Merge zones connected by holes Model holes (including holes in virtual partitions) Model airflow through internal openings using flow per unit area
- 150 -
Creating Voids (Courtyard Spaces) Within Blocks
Creating Voids (Courtyard Spaces) Within Blocks
To create an external courtyard within a block, go to the required block by clicking on the navigator entry or double-clicking the block in the 'Edit' screen and then click on the 'Draw void perimeter' tool. You can the select a perimeter shape and set the required wall thickness in the 'Drawing Options' data panel:
After completing the perimeter, a courtyard is automatically generated within the block:
- 151 -
Important note: the void space is modelled as being exterior to the building and not as any sort of zone. If you need to create an atrium space whose temperature and other conditions are calculated then avoid use of the Draw void tool and instead model it like any other zone within the block using partitions. If you would like DesignBuilder to automatically punch voids through new blocks drawn on top of existing blocks having voids, then use the Automatically include voids from lower blocks model option which can be set on the Miscellaneous Edit tab of the model options dialog. Restriction: The void perimeter lines you draw to create a void cannot touch any other external or internal wall, so you can't for example use the void command to take chunks out of the external wall - the void must be wholly contained within the block. Restriction: You can't create any other objects within a void - the void space is reserved and you will get intersection errors if you try to draw a block in the void space.
Working Within Zones (Zone Level)

This section describes the operations involved in placing light sensors within zones. To place light sensors within a zone, you first need to go to the zone that you want to modify. You can do this from the block level either by clicking on the navigator entry or double-clicking on the zone floor in the 'Edit' screen if you're at the block level.
Go to zone level
Either of these operations will take you to the zone:
- 152 -
Placing Light Sensors
Placing Light Sensors

If you switch zone Lighting Control on, a light sensor will be displayed as a blue rectangle with the number '1' inside it indicating 'Light sensor 1'. By default Light sensor 1 is positioned in the geometric centre of the zone. If you now switch on the Second Lighting Area, a second light sensor will be displayed with a number '2' inside it:
To move a light sensor to a different location, move the mouse cursor over the required sensor and click on it to select it and then Move it to wherever you want within a floor perimeter:
- 153 -
Note: You can set the height of the working plane (and hence the z-position of the lighting sensor) on the Advanced tab of the Model options dialog.
Working With Surfaces (Surface Level)

This section describes the operations involved in creating surface openings and sub-surfaces. To create openings and sub-surfaces in a zone surface, you first need to go to the surface that you want to modify. You can do this from the zone level either by clicking on the navigator entry or double-clicking on the zone surface in the 'Edit' screen, if you're at the zone level.
- 154 -
Working With Surfaces (Surface Level)
Go to surface level
Either of these operations will take you to the surface:
When working with surfaces, switching to Normal view rotation can be helpful in orientating openings and subsurfaces:
- 155 -
Openings
You can draw, move, clone (copy), rotate and delete the following types of opening: Window Sub-surface Hole Door Vent
Note that custom openings that have been drawn by hand or copied are displayed in bright colours to differentiate them from (grey) default openings: Yellow - windows Blue - sub-surfaces Green - holes Cyan - doors Magenta - vents
See also the Drawing Openings on Surfaces Tutorial
Draw Window
Before activating the Draw window tool, you are given the option of keeping any default surface openings. If you choose to keep these openings, they will not be subsequently affected by any changes to the surface attribute data and must be deleted or edited manually. To add a window to a surface, click on the 'Draw window' tool. If you have opted to keep the default openings, they will be converted to custom openings:
- 156 -
Draw Window
On the other hand, if you un-check the 'Keep default openings' option, all default openings will be removed. Select the perimeter shape that you require and then move the mouse cursor to place the window origin. As you move the mouse cursor over the surface, distance guides will be displayed from each of the surface vertices to help in placing the window origin. If the increment snap is switched on, the origin will snap in increments from the vertex that's nearest to the mouse cursor:
- 157 -
You can lock the origin to a particular vertex by moving the mouse cursor close to the vertex and pressing the SHIFT key and keeping it pressed until you actually place the origin. This can be helpful if you want to place a window relative to a vertex at the other end of the surface:
Having placed the window origin, you can then draw the window using the selected perimeter drawing mode, for details of drawing perimeters please refer to the Perimeters section.
USING KEY INS TO CREATE OPENINGS

You can type in the precise dimensions and offset from the origin of your window using 'Key Ins'. The procedure is: 1. Start the 'Draw window' command as described above. 2. Define the window position relative to an origin by first moving the mouse cursor to define the origin (typically the bottom left corner of the surface)
- 158 -
Draw Window
3. Then type in the offset of the window origin (bottom left corner of the window in this example) in the format x y. Note that there is no comma between the x and the y coordinates. The coordinates that you type in will appear under the 'Key In' header in Drawing Options panel. The convention used when positioning and drawing openings at surface level is that x increases from left to right and y increases from bottom to top. This is true whether viewing the surface from inside or from outside.
4. Then press <Enter> to define the window origin.
- 159 -
5. Next type in the window width followed by a space followed by the window height. Again the coordinates you type in are shown in the Drawing Options panel. In the example below a window is being defined having width 2m and height 1m.
6. Press enter to create the window:
You can use the mouse in conjunction with Key Ins if you prefer. So you could use the mouse to define the window offset from the origin and then use Key Ins to define the window dimensions or vice versa. Tip: You can also enter negative x and y values when keying in offset and coordinates.
- 160 -
Draw Sub-Surface
See the Drawing Openings on Surfaces Tutorial
Draw Sub-Surface
For details of using the Draw sub-surface tool, please refer to the Draw window tool. See the Sub-Surface Construction topic for information on the construction data used for sub-surfaces and other details.
Draw Door
For details of using the Draw door tool, please refer to the Draw window tool.
Draw Hole
For details of using the Draw hole tool, please refer to the Draw window tool. Holes are used for two purposes: 1. As an air flow path between a zone and an other zone or outside (in much the same way that Vents are used). Holes cannot be controlled - they simply represent a constant air flow path in the fabric. Holes are modelled using perfectly clear glass plus in some cases an airflow path. When positioned on external walls holes only generate airflow in Simulation calculations when the Natural ventilation building model option is set to Calculated. External holes have no effect on airflow in Heating and Cooling Design calculations but will create an additional heat flow path categorised in the heat balance as 'Glazing'. Holes positioned on internal partition walls are used to mix the air between the two adjacent zones when the Scheduled Natural ventilation building model option is set and for Heating and Cooling design calculations. They also provide an air flow path when the Calculated option is set. You can find information on the way Mixing works by looking at the Vent Operation help topic. 2. For merging zones together. Note that the Merge zones connected by holes option must be selected for this to work. Tip: It is possible to draw large holes in surfaces to give the effect of the surface having being removed. This can be a useful technique for creating atrium-type spaces, connecting gable roof blocks to the main roof block and generally merging zones in different blocks.
- 161 -
Note: Holes are modelled as windows with perfectly clear glazing and so they transmit solar radiation as well as presenting an air flow path. More information on Drawing holes can be found in the Basic Drawing Tools 7 Tutorial
Draw Vent
For details of using the Draw vent tool, please refer to the Draw window tool.
Edit Surfaces
You can select custom openings and move, clone (copy), delete and rotate them. Default openings cannot be selected and manipulated in this way. You can also clear custom openings their default state using the Clear Data to Default command.
Editing Openings At The Building Level

Building block faade openings can be selected at the building level and subsequently moved, copied or deleted. In order to edit openings at the building level you first need to select the openings either clicking on them using the Select tool or by dragging a selection window around them:
The selected openings are highlighted:
- 162 -
Editing Openings At The Building Level
When you have selected an opening, you will see that the Move selected object(s), Clone selected object(s) and Delete selected object(s) icons are active and you can select one of these commands. As an example, the arched openings and doorway are to be copied onto the angled faade of the leftmost block. To begin with, you need to delete the existing opening on the angled faade by selecting it and clicking on the Delete selected object(s) icon:
Opening removed:
- 163 -
All opening edit operations at the building level automatically convert default openings to custom openings, which is why you need to remove the existing opening. Then in order to copy the openings, you need to select a handle point and you can do this by first clicking on the Clone selected object(s) command icon and then clicking on the required handle point - the endpoint snap will help in selecting the handle point.
First select the handle point, and then position the copy using the various snaps:
- 164 -
Undo/Redo
As you move the copied openings across each block faade you will see them automatically snap into the faade plane and after positioning the openings, you can then click on the mouse key to add the openings in the required position:
You will see that any copies that wont fit into the selected location are automatically discarded. Note: You can select openings on multiple planes but in this case the openings can only be deleted, not moved or copied.
Undo/Redo
Undo/Redo commands accessed from Edit menu
- 165 -
To undo a geometric operation, select Undo from the 'Edit' menu (or press <Control-Z>) and similarly to redo a geometric operation, select Redo (or press <Control-R>). Because many of the geometric operations are dependent on specific model levels, you may need to undo or redo navigation operations before you get to the required geometric operation, e.g. 'Undo - Go to surface', etc. Note that Undo/Redo applies only to geometric operations and changes to Model Data cannot be undone.
Rebuild
Rebuild command accessed from Tools menu Sometimes the adjacencies within DesignBuilder models can become corrupt. The Rebuild command recalculates the zone, surface and adjacency geometry from the base building elements.
Rezone Block
Rezone block command accessed from Tools menu Use the Rezone block command to refresh the zoning in the current block. The command converts any outline partitions in a block to standard partitions and updates zones due to any partitions that may have deleted. The command should be used when the Automatic block zoning model option is switched off. When the option is switched on (and it has always been switched on during the life of a model) then you will not need to use this command.
Model Data
Model Data is the data for the site on the tabs: Location Legislative region and insulation standards
and data for building model on the tabs: Activity (usage) Constructions Openings (windows, doors, vents, holes, sub-surfaces) Lighting HVAC
The Model Data tabs are shown in the Edit Screen - User Interface help topic. At the point of the building is created, building model default data is initially loaded at the building level from templates. This is inherited from the building to blocks to zones to surfaces and to openings. This default model data can be overwritten by making edits on the Model Data tabs on the Edit screen.
See the Model Data Overview Tutorial
- 166 -
Site Data
Site Data
The site data represents information about the site including its location, the conditions of the ground, weather, the legislative region and the maximum allowed U-values for new buildings. All buildings on the site use the same site model data. To edit site model data, go to site level and click on the Location or Region tabs (below).
You can easily change the location of the site by making a selection for the Location template on the Location tab or by using the Load data from template command. Alternatively you can open up the headers on the Location and Region tabs to edit the data.
Location
Location tab on model data at Site level Use this screen to edit the location of the site, its weather data, the daylight savings and energy codes which apply. You can load a location from the database by clicking on Template line under the Location Template header then on the '...' at the right of the line.
- 167 -
When you make a selection from the list of location templates data from selected template will be loaded to the model. Alternatively you can use the Load data from template tool. You can enter data on: Site location, Site details, Time and daylight saving, Simulation weather, Winter design weather and Summer design weather.
Site Location
Location tab on model data at Site level You can set the latitude/longitude of the site for cooling design calculations as well as a number of site characteristics.
Latitude
The latitude (in degrees) of the site. By convention, North Latitude is represented as positive; South Latitude as negative. Minutes should be represented in decimal fractions of 60. (15 is 15/60 or .25)
Longitude
The longitude (in degrees) of the site. By convention, East Longitude is represented as positive; West Longitude as negative. Minutes should be represented in decimal fractions of 60. (15 is 15/60 or .25). Note: the latitude and longitude location data will only affect cooling design calculations. For simulations, the position of the sun is defined by the location in the hourly weather file.
Site Details
Location tab on model data at Site level
Elevation above sea level

This data are defines the elevation of the site relative to sea level and is passed directly to EnergyPlus for use in pressure-related calculations. It is also used to calculate air density within DesignBuilder when calculating volumetric flow rates from cooling loads.
Site orientation
The site orientation is the angle of the site plan view relative to North. For example enter 45 to rotate the building(s) clockwise by 45.relative to North (screenshot example below). This is the quickest and most reliable way to rotate all the buildings on the site relative to North and allows you to keep your x and y axes aligned with the building.
- 168 -
Site Details
North is indicated by the direction of the North arrow in the sketch plan view (above). Note: Rotating the building(s) is also possible but once this is done it is more difficult to make further geometric edits because, for rotations other than 90, 180 or 270, the x and y axes will be out of alignment with the building.
Exposure to wind
The exposure to wind model data affects the pressure coefficients used when the 'Calculated' Natural ventilation option is set. It also affects the calculation of U-values but these are not used in EnergyPlus simulations.
GROUND Add ground construction layers to surfaces in contact with ground

You can choose to add ground construction layers to any surface that is in contact with the ground. If you select this option you can define the construction layers of the ground. Note: this option only affects the model for buildings having the Separate constructions model option set.
Ground construction
When the Add ground construction layers to surfaces in contact with ground option is selected you can define the construction layers to be added below any ground floor constructions and on the outside of any other surfaces which have been specified as being adjacent to ground. More info on ground modelling.
Ground texture
The texture used to represent the ground in the rendered view on the Visualisation screen.
Ground surface reflectance

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the average reflectivity of the ground throughout the year. Ground reflectance data is used to calculate the ground reflected solar amount. This fractional amount is used in the following equation: GroundReflectedSolar = (BeamSolar x COS(SunZenithAngle) + DiffuseSolar) x GroundReflectance
- 169 -
Note: Reflection from the ground is calculated even if the Reflections option is not used, but if reflections are not calculated the ground plane is considered unobstructed, i.e., the shadowing of the ground by the building itself or by component blocks is ignored. Shadowing of the ground by component blocks is only taken into account if the Reflections option is used. Conclusion: Switch Reflections on for accurate shading calculations. The ground surface reflectance is also used in the Daylighting calculations.
Snow reflected solar modifier

A number between 0.0 and 10.0 which is used to modify the basic ground surface reflectance when snow is on the ground. Note that the value of GroundReflectanceUsed (below) must be <=1. GroundReflectanceUsed = GroundReflectance x ModifierSnow During simulations, the ground is considered to be snow-covered when the SnowDepth data in the hourly weather file is > 0.
Snow reflected daylight modifier

A number between 0.0 and 10.0 which is used to modify the basic ground surface reflectance when snow is on the ground. Note that the value of DaylightingGroundReflectanceUsed (below) must be <=1. DaylightingGroundReflectanceUsed = GroundReflectance x ModifierSnow During simulations, the ground is considered to be snow-covered when the SnowDepth data in the hourly weather file is > 0.
Ground monthly temperatures

There are 12 fields allowing you to represent the mean ground temperature for each month of the year. These temperatures are used as the outside surface temperature for all surfaces adjacent to ground. Note that the depth at which these temperatures apply depends on the thickness of the ground construction (see above) added to the main floor/wall construction. Caution: It may not be appropriate to use the 'undisturbed' ground temperatures calculated by the weather converter and listed in EnergyPlus hourly weather files as these values are too extreme for the soil under typical large conditioned buildings. A reasonable default value is 2C less than the average monthly indoor space temperature is appropriate for such buildings. For smaller buildings, the ground temperatures will be closer to be undisturbed ground temperatures. More information about determining appropriate ground temperatures is given in Ground Modelling and in the EnergyPlus Auxiliary Programs document.
SITE WATER MAINS TEMPERATURE

The Water Mains Temperature data is used to calculate water temperatures delivered by underground water main pipes. It is only required when using Detailed HVAC. The mains temperatures are used as default, make-up water temperature inputs for the Water heater. The mains temperatures are also used in the water systems objects to model the temperature of cold water supplies. Water mains temperatures are a function of outdoor climate conditions and vary with time of year. A correlation has been formulated to predict water mains temperatures based on two weather inputs: Average annual outdoor dry-bulb air temperature.
- 170 -
Site Details
Maximum difference in monthly average outdoor air temperatures. These values can be easily calculated from annual weather data using a spreadsheet or from the ".stat" file available with the EnergyPlus weather files at www.energyplus.gov. Monthly statistics for dry-bulb temperatures are shown with daily averages. The daily averages are averaged to obtain the annual average. The maximum and minimum daily average are subtracted to obtain the maximum difference. For more information on the water mains temperatures correlation, see the EnergyPlus Engineering Document. Alternatively, the water mains temperatures can come from a schedule. This is useful for measured data or when water comes from a source other than buried pipes, e.g., a river or lake.
Calculation method
Select from the options: 1-Schedule where the water mains temperature is scheduled. 2-Correlation where the water mains temperature is calculated from the average outdoor air temperature and range of monthly outdoor air temperatures.
Schedule
If the Calculation method is 1-Schedule, the water mains temperatures are read from the schedule referenced by this field. Note that the schedule temperatures must be in C even when using IP units.
Annual average outdoor air temperature

If the Calculation method is 2-Correlation, this field is used in the calculation as the annual average outdoor drybulb air temperature (in C or F).
Maximum difference In monthly average outdoor air temperatures

If the calculation method is 2-Correlation, this field is used in the calculation as the maximum difference in monthly average outdoor air temperatures (in K or F).
SITE PRECIPITATION
The Site precipitation data is used to describe the amount of precipitation on all Green roof surfaces over the course of the simulation. Precipitation includes both rain and the equivalent water content of snow. Precipitation is not yet described well enough in the usual building weather data file. So this object is used to provide the data using Schedule objects that define rates of precipitation in meters per hour. A set of schedules for site precipitation have been developed for USA weather locations and are provided with EnergyPlus in the data set called PrecipitationSchedulesUSA.idf. The user can develop schedules however they want. The schedules in the data set were developed using EnergyPlus weather file (EPW) observations and the average monthly precipitation for the closest weather site provided by NOAA. EPW files for the USA that were based on TMY or TMY2 include weather observations for Light/Moderate/Heavy rainfall, however most international locations do not include these observations. The values were modeled by taking the middle of the ranges quoted in the EPW data dictionary. The assumed piecewise function is shown below. Amount m/h Light 0.0125 Medium 0.052 Heavy 0.1
The values were inserted on hour by hour basis for the month based on the observations. Then each month was rescaled to meet the average precipitation for the month based on the 30-year average (1971-2000) provided by the NOAA/NCDC. Therefore, the flags in the EPW file match the precipitation schedules for the USA. Note that summing the average monthly precipitation values will not give you the average yearly precipitation. The resulting value may be lower or higher than the average yearly value. Once the typical rainfall pattern and rates are scheduled, the Site Precipitation data provides a method of shifting the total rainfall up or down for design purposes. Wetter or drier conditions can be modelled by changing the Design Annual Precipitation although the timing of precipitation throughout the year will not be changed.
- 171 -
Design annual precipitation

Magnitude of total precipitation for an annual period to be used in the model. Value selected by the user to correspond with the amount of precipitation expected or being assumed for design purposes. The units are in meters. This field works with the following two fields to allow easily shifting the amounts without having to generate new schedules. Units are m/yr or ft/yr
Precipitation schedule
The schedule that describes the rate of precipitation. The precipitation rate schedule is analogous to weather file data. However, weather files for building simulation do not currently contain adequate data for such calculations. Therefore, EnergyPlus schedules are used to enter the pattern of precipitation events. The values in this schedule are the average rate of precipitation in meters per hour. The integration of these values over an annual schedule should equal the nominal annual precipitation.
Nominal annual precipitation

Magnitude of annual precipitation associated with the rate schedule. This value is used to normalize the precipitation.
ROOF IRRIGATION
The Site Roof irrigation data is used to describe the amount of irrigation on all Green roof surfaces over the course of the simulation. You can define time-varying irrigation data using a maximum irrigation value and a schedule. There is also an option to apply some intelligence to the irrigation system to avoid over-watering the green roof.
Irrigation type
Defines the way irrigation water is supplied. Select from: 1-Scheduled - water is proved using the maximum irrigation rate and schedule modifier (below). 2-Smart - as Scheduled but overrides the irrigation to be off when the earth is 30% or more saturated with water.
Max irrigation rate

Maximum rate of irrigation per hour. Units are m/h or ft/h.
Irrigation schedule
The schedule defining the operation of the irrigation system. A schedule value of zero means the irrigation is switched off and a value of 1 means that the Max irrigation rate is used.
Time And Daylight Saving

Location tab on model data at Site level Select the Time zone for the site location. The time zone defines both the standard time meridian and information on daylight saving. Generally you should leave this as the default for the location. You can override daylight savings to be off by unchecking the Use daylight saving model data. DesignBuilder models the effect of daylight saving time where the clocks are moved forward one hour in the summer months in most non-equatorial countries. The timing of this is handled automatically using the Time zones database when you load data from one of the Location templates supplied with the program.
- 172 -
Simulation Weather Data
There are some factors you should be aware of: In EnergyPlus, summer Daylight saving works by adding the number of hours specified in the Time zone data (usually 1 hour) to the local mean time to get the time to determine schedule operation. Because Simulation results are displayed in local mean time, during the summer when daylight saving time is in use, occupancy and equipment etc will appear to start 1 hour earlier in the day than it does in the winter. To help you pinpoint this, DesignBuilder prints the times when daylight saving starts and ends on the graph. When comparing results with and without Daylight saving you will notice: Solar radiation data has exactly the same timing with and without daylight saving. Occupancy, equipment (and other aspects of building operation controlled by schedules) will start 1 hour earlier with daylight saving. Visualisations use local mean time when setting the position of the sun for site shading analysis. Again you can account for daylight saving time by adding 1 hour to the time during summer months to see shading for local clock time.
Simulation Weather Data

Location tab on model data at Site level DesignBuilder uses EnergyPlus epw format hourly weather data for simulations (heating and cooling design calculations use much simpler design weather data). You can review, edit and convert weather using the Edit hourly weather data dialog. You can also add your own hourly weather data.
Winter Design Weather Data

Location tab on model data at Site level You can select the 'confidence' of the design data, i.e. the probability that the design data will be at the very extreme of conditions encountered over recent years. Select either 99.6 or 99% confidence (i.e. 0.4 or 1% chance of more extreme winter weather occuring). The weather data used in heating design calculations: Minimum outside dry-bulb temperature - the design outside air temperature Co-incident wind speed and direction. - the speed of the wind and its direction for design conditions. Note that the direction is not used at the moment.
Summer Design Weather Data

Location tab on model data at Site level You can select the 'confidence' of the design data, i.e. the probability that the design data will be at the very extreme of conditions encountered over recent years. This risk can be specified based on dry or wet-bulb temperatures, for 99.6, 99 and 98% confidence (i.e. 0.4, 1 or 2% chance of more extreme weather occuring). The weather data used in cooling design calculations:
- 173 -
Maximum outside dry-bulb temperature - the maximum dry bulb air temperature over the day Minimum outside dry-bulb temperature - the minimum dry bulb air temperature (nighttime) Wet-bulb temperature at the time of the maximum dry-bulb temperature.
The daily temperature profile used in the cooling design calculations is calculated from the maximum and minimum values using a sinusoidal curve and assuming that the maximum temperature lags maximum solar elevation by 3 hours.
Legislative Region And Insulation Standards

Region tab on model data at Site level The data on the tab is related to the Legislative Region and associated insulation standards of the site.
Legislative region
A Legislative region in DesignBuilder is typically a whole country or a region, province or state within a country which has its own building control powers. The legislative region contains information on: Local energy codes and building regulations Carbon dioxide emission factors for a range of fuels.
Energy Codes/insulation Standards

Region tab on model data at Site level You can select the mandatory energy code in force as well as three additional levels of reference insulation standards to represent buildings with 'Uninsulated', 'Stock average' and 'Best practice' construction standards. This data is used: To identify the mandatory energy code in force in the region. To set the insulation levels used when the 'Pre-design' Construction and glazing Model option is selected. When calculating asset ratings.
Note that if you change any of this data, the insulation standards of the constructions in the <System> category will be automatically updated.
Building Model Data

Building Model Data can be entered at building, block, zone and surface levels (but not at site level). The set of data shown will depend on the level in the hierarchy (building, block etc) and on the Model options selected. Default data is inherited from the level above in the hierarchy and is shown in blue, while 'user data', i.e. data you have explicitly set (or loaded from template) is shown in red. You can clear user data back to its default state so it inherits from the level above using the Clear data to default command. Building Model Data is laid out on the tabs: Activity Construction
- 174 -
Activity Model Data
Openings Lighting HVAC Options CFD
Each of these categories of data has a template selection at the top of the tab allowing rapid loading of the data from template. Tip: Use DesignBuilder defaults wisely! Take care to enter the minimum amount of data to get the most from the inheritance system. For example if all zones in a particular block have the same activity called say 'Office work', you should set the activity at block level and not multiple times at zone level. Equally if all the blocks in the building have the same activity, you should set the data at the building level and allow the blocks to inherit the data from the building. By keeping the amount of user data to a minimum, you will find it quicker to make changes at a later date. Clearly it is much faster to change a few Model Data items at building and block level than it is to make multiple changes at zone or surface levels. See also section on Model Data Hierarchy & Data Inheritance.
Activity Model Data

Activity tab in model data Data on the Activity tab allows you to define the activity (usage) of the zones including information on: Zone Type (block and zone level only) Include zone Occupancy Metabolic rates Holidays (building level only) Domestic Hot Water (DHW) Environmental control Computer gains Office equipment gains Miscellaneous gains Catering gains Process gains
You can load generic activity data by clicking on the Template option under Activity Template and then by clicking on the '...' at the right of the line (below).
- 175 -
When you make a selection from the list of Activity templates, data from selected template will be loaded to the model. Alternatively you can use the Load data from template tool. Note that the appropriate Sector is loaded with the activity (screenshot above). All Activity data (apart from Holidays) is used to generate simulation data at the Zone level. Holiday data is used at Building level.
See the Activity Data Tutorial
Total Building Floor Areas

Activity tab in model data at building level only Total building floor areas for occupied and unoccupied zones is provided at building level towards the top of the Activity tab.
Occupied floor area

The total building occupied floor area is provided (in m2 or ft2). This is the sum of the floor areas for zones having 1-Standard Zone type.
Unoccupied floor area

The total building unoccupied floor area is provided (in m2 or ft2). This is the sum of the floor areas for zones not having 1-Standard Zone type.
Zone Type
Activity tab in model data under Activity Template header The zone type can be set at block or zone level on the Activity tab and can be one of: 1-Standard - considered to be occupied and heated or cooled. 2-Semi-exterior unconditioned - is an unoccupied zone in the building which is neither heated or cooled. Examples of 'semi-exterior unconditioned' spaces are roofspaces, sunspaces, car parks etc). 3-Cavity - the zone is a cavity such as the glazed cavity within a double facade or a Trombe wall. This algorithm correctly calculates the convection coefficients for a narrow sealed vertical cavity based on the ISO 15099 standard. 4-Plenum - the zone is a plenum which is unoccupied and has no heating, cooling, or mechanical ventilation (though of course air will flow through it to meet the needs of the zones it serves).
Zone types are also described in the Basic Drawing Tools 6 Tutorial
Semi-exterior unconditioned
When the Zone type is set to 2-Semi-exterior unconditioned, the program asks you 'Do you want to load default unoccupied data including Activity, HVAC and Construction templates'. If you reply 'Yes' then the zone is set as unoccupied by loading <None> Activity, HVAC and Lighting template data.
- 176 -
Zone Multiplier
Also Semi-exposed constructions will be used instead of standard partitions for adjacencies with 'Semi-exterior unconditioned' zones. For example the wall between an occupied office and a car park would use the Semiexposed construction, whereas the wall between two occupied offices would use Internal partition construction. Also roofspace insulation is applied in the floor of a Semi-exterior unconditioned space when it is above a Standard space, if 'Floor fitted above floor slab' option is checked.
Glazed cavity
When the Zone type is set to 3-Cavity, the program asks you 'Do you want to load default 'Glazed cavity' data including appropriate convection coefficients, calculation options and Activity, HVAC and Construction templates'. If you reply 'Yes' then the following changes are made: The zone is set as unoccupied by loading <None> Activity, HVAC and Lighting template data. Suspended floors and ceilings are switched off. The 5-Cavity Inside convection algorithm is set for Cooling design, Heating design and simulation calculations. The 3-Full interior and exterior Solar distribution algorithm is set for Cooling design and simulation calculations.
You can find out more about Trombe wall simulations in the Modelling Issues section.
Plenum
When the Zone type is set to 4-Plenum, the program asks you 'Do you want to load default plenum data including appropriate convection coefficients, calculation options and Activity and HVAC templates?'. If you reply 'Yes' then the following changes are made: The zone is set as unoccupied by loading <None> Activity, HVAC and Lighting template data. Suspended floors and ceilings are switched off. The 4-Ceiling diffuser Inside convection algorithm is set for Cooling design, Heating design and simulation calculations.
You can find out more about modelling plenums under HVAC.
Zone Multiplier
Activity tab in model data under Activity Template header The Zone multiplier data allows you to reduce the size of your model in cases where there are similar zones by specifying that certain zones are repeated and so only need to be simulated once. A typical use is for multi-storey buildings with identical (or very similar) floors. The image below is taken from the Zone Multiplier Example.dsb file and illustrates how the zone multiplier mechanism works.
- 177 -
The basic 7 storey building on the left doesn't use the zone multiplier and, as each storey has one zone, the whole building contains 7 zones. The equivalent building on the right has been simplified by using the zone multiplier. The single mid-storey zone has a zone multiplier of 5 which means that during the simulation the zone is treated as if there were 5 of them. In particular the energy consumption and HVAC airflow rates are multiplied by 5 so the results for the reduced building match approximately with that of the non-reduced model. The top floor and ground floor zones cannot be combined using the zone multiplier of course because they have roof and ground adjacencies respectively and so must be retained in the reduced model. However the 5 mid-floor zones all have the same operation and adjacencies and so can be combined.
ADIABATIC COMPONENT BLOCKS

Note the use of the adiabatic component blocks. These have various functions: Set the adjacency to be adiabatic for the underside of the top floor zone, the top and underside of the midfloor zone and the top of the ground floor zone. Help to position the mid-floor representative zone in a reasonable representative position to ensure that a good average wind speed will be applied. Ensures correct shading in a more complex model. Shadows will be correctly cast by 'missing zones' and also shading received by the representative mid-floor zone will be representative of the shading received by all of the actual mid-floor zones. Improves the look of the reduced model to match that of the full model.
For other ways to simplify models see Simplification on the Advanced tab of the Model options.
- 178 -
Include Zone
Include Zone
Activity tab in model data under Activity Template header
Include zone in thermal calculations

By default zones are included in the heating and cooling design calculations and simulations but they can be excluded. You may wish to exclude a zone or series of zones from the analysis to focus on a smaller part of the building for example a single shop within a mall and in this case you should uncheck this option on the Activity tab for zones as appropriate. Surfaces between included and excluded zones are modelled as being adiabatic, i.e .heat is transferred into the wall mass as if the temperature of the excluded zone is the same as the included zone. In large models it is sometimes easiest to uncheck this option at building level and just include the zones of interest.
Include zone in daylighting calculations

Zones which are not regularly occupied, or which for any other reason should not be included, can be excluded from daylighting calculations by unchecking this option. This option can be used when carrying out a LEED, BREEAM or Green Star daylighting credit calculation to avoid including zones that are not regularly occupied in the building assessment. From the LEED 3 documentation: Regularly occupied spaces in commercial buildings are areas where people sit or stand as they work. In residential applications these spaces include all living and family rooms and exclude bathrooms, closets, or other storage or utility areas. In schools, they are areas where students, teachers, or administrators are seated or standing as they work or study.
Occupancy
Activity tab in model data The Occupancy model data defines the number people in the space and the times of occupancy. This data is used in Simulations and Cooling design calculations together with the Metabolic heat output of the occupants and Holidays to calculate the heat input to the building.
The Occupancy schedule setting (Typical workday or Schedule) may also be used to control internal gains and/or HVAC systems if the appropriate Model options are set. Set the number of people (per unit floor area) and the occupancy times. Occupancy time definition depends on the Timing model data option:
TYPICAL WORKDAY TIMING MODEL OPTION

When the Typical workday Timing model option is set, the occupancy times are controlled by setting On and Off values and the number of days in the working week.
- 179 -
In above example there are 0.2 people per m2 between 8am and 6pm and there are no people outside these times and at weekends. Note: The Occupancy Days / week is set at the building level only and is used for all other Typical workday schedules in the model apart from Mechanical ventilation, and Heating and Cooling operation which have their own Days / week data.
SCHEDULE TIMING MODEL OPTION

When the Schedule Timing model option is set, the occupancy times are controlled by a Schedule . The metabolic gains for the zone are multiplied by the value of the Schedule at each time step in the simulation so you can define periods of part-occupancy using Schedule values less than 1. Use values of 0 to indicate that the space in unoccupied.
In above example number of people per m2 is calculated as 0.2 x Schedule value.
Latent fraction
If the Occupancy latent gains model option is set to Fixed fraction then you can enter the latent fraction here. A typical default value is 0.5.
Metabolic
Activity tab in model data under Occupancy header Select the level of activity by selecting a metabolic rate component based on the level of activity of people using the space. The metabolic rate determines the amount of heat gain per person in the zone under design conditions. This value is modified during simulations based on a correlation to account for variations in space temperature. This should be borne in mind when analysing occupant sensible heat output in the Cooling design and Simulation results screens. Metabolic rate has units Watts per person and represents the total heat gain per person including convective, radiant, and latent heat. An internal algorithm is used to determine what fraction of the total is sensible and what fraction is latent. Then, the sensible portion is divided into radiant and convective portions based on the assumption of 50% radiant fraction. Metabolic rate data can be found in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, Chapter 8, Table 5.
- 180 -
Metabolic
DesignBuilder data is derived from this data and is for adult males having typical surface area of 1.8m2. For women multiply the adult male value by 0.85 and for children multiply by 0.75. The metabolic factor accounts for people of various sizes. Enter 1.00 for men, 0.85 for women, 0.75 for children or you can use an average value if there is a mix of sizes.
Background
Heat is generated in the human body by oxidation at a rate called the metabolic rate. This heat is dissipated from the body surface and respiratory tract by a combination of radiation, convection and evaporation. The relative proportions of sensible and latent heat from people is a complex function of the metabolic rate and the environmental conditions. EnergyPlus uses a polynomial function to divide the heat gain into sensible and latent portions. More details can be found in the EnergyPlus EngineeringDoc.pdf documentation. Note: If the Occupancy latent gains model option is set to Dynamic calculation then the sensible/latent split for occupancy gains is affected by the internal temperature and relative humidity. With high internal temperatures, people cool themselves largely by evaporation (sweating) and sensible occupancy gains can be very low or even zero as the internal temperature approaches that of the human body.
Clothing
You can define the clothing levels of the occupants for summer and winter periods. This data is used when generating comfort output. Clothing reduces the body's heat loss and is classified according to its insulation value. The unit normally used for measuring clothing's insulation is the Clo unit. The more technical unit is mC/W is also used frequently (1 Clo = 0.155 m2C/W). The Clo value can be calculated by adding the Clo value of each individual garment. The insulation value for individual garments can be found in ISO 7730. Clo-Values for Different Items of Clothing and Ensembles Clothing Naked Briefs T-shirt Bra and panties Long underwear upper lower Shirt White, short sleeve heavy, long sleeve Add 5% for tie or turtleneck Skirt Trousers Sweater Socks Light summer outfit Working clothes Typical indoor winter clothing combination Heavy business suit Clo-Value 0.0 0.06 0.09 0.05 0.35 0.35 0.14 0.29 0.22-0.70 0.26-0.32 0.20-0.37 0.04-0.10 0.3 0.8 1.0 1.5
- 181 -
Note 1: Clo-values are additive, so one can calculate the clo-value for a person wearing a T-shirt and light socks (0.09 + 0.04) = 0.13. (Adapted from ASHRAE Fundamentals and "Technical Review of Thermal Comfort," Bruel and Kjaer, No. 2, 1982.) Note 2: for equatorial regions where there is no clear 'summer/winter' weather pattern you should generally use a 'summer' value for both summer and winter clo factors.
Holidays
Activity tab in model data (building level only) You can define the dates of holidays to include the effect of building shutdown during certain periods of the year. Do this by selecting the Holidays option under the Holidays header on the Activity tab at building level. Holidays defined at building level in this way are used for the whole simulation. The holiday data is used for Simulations only (not Heating/Cooling Design Calculations) and allows you to set the Holiday Schedule and the number of days of holiday per year. The possible holiday dates are defined in the Holiday schedule and the actual holidays to be used in the simulation are selected from the top of the list based on the Holidays per year data entered. Note that you must have at least as many days defined in the holiday schedules as you request here. If there are insufficient holidays in the holiday schedule you will receive an error message to this effect prior to a simulation.
With the data in the above screenshot there will be 5 holidays and the dates are given by the first 5 holiday dates set in the 'Typical UK' Holiday schedule.
See also the Timing, Schedules, Profiles and Holidays Tutorial The way holiday definition works depends on the Timing model option:
COMPACT SCHEDULES
When the Timing model option is Schedules you can use Compact schedules to define holiday dates and schedule values. The value of Compact schedule output during holidays can be defined explicitly using the Holidays day type following For:. For example: SCHEDULE:COMPACT, Bedroom_Cool, Temperature, Through: 31 Dec, For: Weekdays SummerDesignDay WinterDesignDay, Until: 05:00, 0.5,
- 182 -
Environmental Control
Until: 09:00, 1, Until: 24:00, 0.5, For: Weekends, Until: 05:00, 0.5, Until: 24:00, 1, For: Holidays AllOtherdays, Until: 24:00, 0; The Holiday data in this Compact schedule indicates that the cooling is switched off on holidays.
7/12 SCHEDULES
Holiday operation is not defined explicitly and holidays use the same data as Sundays
TYPICAL WORKDAY
Holidays use the same data as Sundays
Activity tab in model data The heating and cooling setpoint temperatures, minimum fresh air per person and illuminance requirements are related to the Activity or Usage of the zone and are accessed by opening the Environmental Comfort group header.
HEATING SETPOINT TEMPERATURES Heating setpoint temperature

Defines the ideal temperature (i.e. the setting of the heating thermostat) in the space when heating is required. Its meaning depends on the Temperature control calculation option. When using 1-Air temperature control the Heating setpoint temperature corresponds to the air temperature in the space and when it is set to set to 2Operative temperature it is the operative temperature (MAT+MRT)/2.
Heating setback setpoint temperature

Some buildings require a low level of heating during unoccupied periods to avoid condensation/frost damage or to prevent the building becoming too cold and to reduce peak heating requirements at startup. Enter the setpoint temperature to be used at night-time, weekends and other holidays during the heating season. Its meaning depends on the Temperature control calculation option (above). Note: when using the Typical workday timing option, this setback temperature set point is only applied during unoccupied periods such as night-time and holidays during the heating season. It is not applied during the summer (if heating is switched off during the summer.) Note: if the setback temperature set does not appear to affect results when using a Compact schedule, this may be because the Zone setpoint heating schedule selected uses only 0 and 1, not the 0.5 required to access setback temperature. See Defining setpoint temperature schedules for more on this.
- 183 -
COOLING SETPOINT TEMPERATURES Cooling setpoint temperature

Defines the ideal temperature (i.e. the setting of the cooling thermostat) in the space when cooling is required. Its meaning depends on the Temperature control calculation option. When using 1-Air temperature control the Cooling setpoint temperature corresponds to the air temperature in the space and when it is set to set to 2Operative temperature it is the operative temperature (MAT+MRT)/2. Note: the cooling setpoint temperature must be higher than the heating setpoint temperature.
Cooling setback setpoint temperature

Some buildings require a low level of cooling during unoccupied periods to prevent the building becoming too hot and to reduce the startup cooling load the next morning. Enter the setpoint temperature to be used at night-time, weekends and other holidays during the cooling season. Its meaning depends on the Temperature control calculation option (above). Note: when using the Typical workday timing option, this setback temperature set point is only applied during unoccupied periods such as night-time and holidays during the cooling season. It is not applied during the winter (if cooling is switched off during the winter.) Note: if the setback temperature set does not appear to affect results when using a Compact schedule, this may be because the Zone setpoint cooling schedule selected uses only 0 and 1, not the 0.5 required to access setback temperature. See Defining setpoint temperature schedules for more on this.
HUMIDITY SETPOINT TEMPERATURES

When using VAV, CAV and unitary Compact HVAC systems you can control humidity. More specifically, in the case of AHU-type systems the humidity in a control zone is actually controlled. The humidification and dehumidification setpoints can be defined here
Humidification setpoint
The zone humidistat Relative humidity setpoint for humidification (0 to 100%).
Dehumidification setpoint
The zone humidistat Relative humidity setpoint for dehumidification (0 to 100%).
VENTILATION SETPOINT TEMPERATURES Natural ventilation cooling setpoint temperature

The natural ventilation cooling setpoint temperature controls the activation of natural ventilation. If the inside air temperature is greater than this setpoint temperature (and the natural ventilation operation schedule is on) then natural ventilation can take place. The way this works depends on the Natural ventilation model option. Note that when using the Calculated natural ventilation model option windows and vents are only opened when: The inside air temperature is above this cooling setpoint temperature, and The inside air temperature is greater than the outside air temperature, and The operation schedule allows ventilation.
Also, the data under the Calculated Natural Ventilation header on the Advanced tab of the Model Options dialog can modify ventilation control behaviour.
- 184 -
When using the Scheduled natural ventilation model option the Natural ventilation delta T (below) can prevent natural ventilation from occurring if the outside air temperature is too high.
Natural ventilation delta T

The Natural ventilation temperature difference is used for Scheduled natural ventilation only and is the temperature difference between the indoor and outdoor air dry bulb temperatures below which ventilation is shut off. This is to allow ventilation to be stopped if the temperature outside is too warm and could potentially heat the space. It is not related to preventing drafts. For example, if you specify a delta temperature of 2C, ventilation is assumed to be available if the outside air temperature is at least 2C cooler than the zone air temperature. If the outside air dry bulb temperature is less than 2C cooler or warmer than the indoor dry bulb temperature, then ventilation is automatically turned off. The values for this field can include negative numbers. This allows ventilation to occur even if the outdoor temperature is above the indoor temperature. The Delta Temperature control works in the code in the following way: if (IndoorTemp - OutdoorTemp) < Natural ventilation delta T then ventilation is not allowed. For example: Value of Natural ventilation delta T 0 -50 2 Effect Natural ventilation only operates when OutdoorTemp < IndoorTemp Natural ventilation unrestricted by Inside-Outside delta T Natural ventilation only operates when OutdoorTemp + 2 < IndoorTemp
Tip: input a large negative number to allow ventilation even if the outdoor temperature is greater than the indoor temperature. This useful for uncontrolled natural ventilation (open windows) or as a way to estimate the effect of required ventilation air for load calculations. See also Defining setpoint temperature schedules.
Mechanical ventilation cooling setpoint temperature

The mechanical ventilation cooling setpoint temperature controls the activation of mechanical ventilation when using Simple HVAC data. If the inside air temperature is greater than this setpoint temperature (and the mechanical ventilation operation schedule is on) then mechanical ventilation can take place. This data is not used when working with Compact HVAC data.
Mechanical ventilation max natural ventilation in-out delta T

The mechanical ventilation Max int-out temp difference is used for Scheduled mechanical ventilationonly and is the temperature difference between the indoor and outdoor air dry bulb temperatures below which ventilation is shut off. This is to allow ventilation to be stopped if the temperature outside is too warm and could potentially heat the space. It is not related to preventing drafts. For example, if you specify a maximum delta temperature of 2C, ventilation is assumed to be available if the outside air temperature is at least 2C cooler than the zone air temperature. If the outside air dry bulb temperature is less than 2C cooler or warmer than the indoor dry bulb temperature, then ventilation is automatically turned off. The values for this field can include negative numbers. This allows ventilation to occur even if the outdoor temperature is above the indoor temperature. The Delta Temperature control works in the code in the following way: if (IndoorTemp - OutdoorTemp) < Max ventilation in-out delta T then ventilation is not allowed.
- 185 -
For example: Value of Mechanical ventilation Max in-out delta T 0 -50 2 Effect Mechanical ventilation only operates when OutdoorTemp < IndoorTemp Mechanical ventilation unrestricted by Inside-Outside delta T Mechanical ventilation only operates when OutdoorTemp + 2 < IndoorTemp
Tip: input a large negative number to allow ventilation even if the outdoor temperature is greater than the indoor temperature. This useful for uncontrolled mechanical ventilation or as a way to estimate the effect of required ventilation air for load calculations. See also Defining setpoint temperature schedules.
MINIMUM FRESH AIR

Minimum fresh air data is defined on the Activity tab because the fresh air requirement of the people in the zone depends on the activity (use) of the space.
Fresh air (fresh air flow per person)

The Minimum fresh air per person defines the fresh air requirements of each person in the zone and is used to generate appropriate mechanical outside air distribution rates when the mechanical air distribution Flow type on the HVAC tab is set to any of: 2-Min fresh air per person where the fresh air flow rate is calculated as the Fresh air (l/s//person) x People / m2 x Zone floor area (m2) 4-Min fresh air (Sum per person + per area) where the fresh air flow rate is the sum of 'per person' and 'per area' fresh air requirements 5-Min fresh air (Max per person and per area) where the fresh air flow rate based on 'per person' is compared with 'per area' and the maximum is used.
This data is also used to calculate natural ventilation outside air flow rates into the zone when the natural ventilation Flow type on the HVAC tab is set to 2-Min fresh air per person.
Mech vent (fresh air flow per area)

The Mech vent fresh air per area defines the fresh air requirements of the zone per floor area and is used to calculate mechanical outside air distribution rates when the mechanical air distribution Flow type on the HVAC tab is set to any of: 3-Min fresh air (Per area), where the fresh air flow rate is calculated as the Mech vent per floor area (l/s/m2) x Zone floor area (m2) 4-Min fresh air (Sum per person + per area), 5-Min fresh air (Max per person and per area).
The data is not currently used for natural ventilation.
- 186 -
Domestic Hot Water (DHW)
LIGHTING Target illuminance

The desired lighting level (in lux) at the first daylighting sensor. This is also the lighting level that would be produced at this sensor position at night if the overhead electric General lighting were operating at full input power. Recommended values depend on type of activity; they may be found, for example, in the Lighting Handbook of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America and in CIBSE A Guide. A typical value for general office work (excluding computer terminals) is 500 lux.
Default display lighting density

This data allows you to define the typical density of display lighting for the activity. The value is used as a default on the Lighting tab for the Task and Display lighting density to ensure that the display lighting density is appropriate for the activity of the zone. It is only used when a lighting template is loaded.
Domestic Hot Water (DHW)

Activity tab in model data
DHW Consumption rate

In DesignBuilder the amount of DHW consumed is considered to be a function of the activity in the zone. For example, there is a demand assumed to arise from the occupants of an office for activities such as washing hands and washing up cups. This demand is associated with the office rather than the toilet or tea room. Thus the demand from each space needs to be assigned to a DHW system even if the system itself is not present in the space. The effect of hot water consumption (hot water taps, showers etc) on building energy use can be included in your thermal model by switching on DHW on the HVAC tab. The data on this tab defines the hot water consumption rate in each zone as l/day/m2 data (gal/day/ft in IP units). The DHW consumption data is only used if DHW is selected on the HVAC tab. Note: Convert l/person/day DHW consumption data to the DesignBuilder format by multiplying it by occupant density (people/m2). With Simple and Compact HVAC, the hot water generation system is defined under DHW on the HVAC tab. Note: This DHW consumption data is also used in Detailed HVAC with the default 1-Simple HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data setting.
Computer Gains
Activity tab in model data Set the thermal gains due to computers and other related IT equipment per unit floor area. The fuel is assumed to be electricity, all gains are assumed to be emitted to the space and
- 187 -
Radiant Fraction
This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterise the amount of long-wave radiant heat being given off by computer equipment in a zone. The radiant fraction will be multiplied by the total energy consumed by electric equipment and (1-Fraction lost) to give the amount of long wavelength radiation gain from computer equipment in a zone. A value of zero means that the heat gain is entirely convective in which case all the heat is transferred to the air node in simulations. A value of 1 means that the gain is entirely radiative in which case all the heat is distributed to the inside surfaces. a typical value is somewhere between 0.1 and 0.2. If the Internal gains operate with occupancy model option is not selected you can also set the operation schedule. Tip: Some spaces like IT suites and dealing rooms have very high computer gain densities and you may need to Switch off the slider controls from the Program options dialog to enter these high values.
Office Equipment Gains

Activity tab in model data Set the thermal gains due to office equipment per unit floor area. The fuel is assumed to be electricity, all gains are assumed to be emitted to the space.
Radiant Fraction
This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterise the amount of long-wave radiant heat being given off by office equipment in a zone. The radiant fraction will be multiplied by the total energy consumed by electric equipment to give the amount of long wavelength radiation gain from office equipment in a zone. A value of zero means that the heat gain is entirely convective in which case all the heat is transferred to the air node in simulations. A value of 1 means that the gain is entirely radiative in which case all the heat is distributed to the inside surfaces. a typical value is somewhere between 0.1 and 0.4. If the Internal gains operate with occupancy model option is not selected you can also set the operation schedule.
Miscellaneous Gains
Activity tab in model data
Gain
Set the design level of energy consumption due to miscellaneous equipment per unit floor area. The actual heat gain to the space may be reduced through the Fraction lost data (below). The Gain, entered in Watts/m2 (or Watts/ft2), is typically used to represent the maximum fuel consumption of miscellaneous equipment in a zone that is then multiplied by a schedule fraction (below). This is slightly more flexible in that the design level could be a 'diversity factor' applied to a schedule of real numbers. Note that while the schedule value can vary from hour to hour, the design level field is constant.
Fuel
The fuel can be selected from a drop down list. Note that these fuels are currently mapped to a shorter list in the results as follows:
- 188 -
Catering Gains
Fuel in Model Data 1-Electricity from grid 2-Natural gas 3-Oil 4-Coal 5-LPG 6-Biogas 7-Anthracite 8-Smokeless fuel (including coke) 9-Dual fuel appliances (mineral + wood) 10-Biomass 11-Waste heat
Mapped to Fuel in Output Electricity Gas Oil Solid Gas Gas Solid Solid Other Other Other
Fraction lost
This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterise the amount of 'lost' heat being given off by the equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied by the total energy consumed by equipment to give the amount of heat which is 'lost' and does not impact the zone energy balances. This might correspond to electrical energy converted to mechanical work or heat that is vented to the atmosphere.
Latent fraction
This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of latent heat given off by miscellaneous equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied by the total energy consumed to give the amount of latent energy produced by the miscellaneous equipment. This latent energy affects the moisture balance within the zone.
Radiant Fraction
This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterise the amount of long-wave radiant heat being given off by miscellaneous equipment in a zone. The radiant fraction will be multiplied by the total energy consumed by electric equipment and (1-Fraction lost) to give the amount of long wavelength radiation gain from miscellaneous equipment in a zone. A value of zero means that the heat gain is entirely convective in which case all the heat is transferred to the air node in simulations. A value of 1 means that the gain is entirely radiative in which case all the heat is distributed to the inside surfaces. a typical value is somewhere between 0.1 and 0.5. If the Internal gains operate with occupancy model option is not selected you can also set the operation schedule.
Calculation
The fuel input to the equipment ultimately appears as heat that contributes to zone loads. In the simulation this heat is divided into four different fractions. Three of these are given by the input fields Latent fraction, Radiant fraction and Fraction lost. The convected fraction, defined as the fraction of the heat from electric equipment convected to the zone air, is calculated by the program as: Fconvected = 1.0 (Latent fraction + Radiant fraction + Fraction lost) You will get an error message if Fraction Latent + Fraction Radiant + Fraction Lost exceeds 1.0.
Catering Gains
Activity tab in model data Set the thermal gains due to cooking and other catering activities per unit floor area.
- 189 -
Gain
Set the design level of energy consumption due to catering equipment per unit floor area. The actual heat gain to the space may be reduced through the Fraction lost data (below). The Gain, entered in Watts/m2 (or Watts/ft2), is typically used to represent the maximum fuel consumption of catering equipment in a zone that is then multiplied by a schedule fraction (below). This is slightly more flexible in that the design level could be a 'diversity factor' applied to a schedule of real numbers. Note that while the schedule value can vary from hour to hour, the design level field is constant. Tip: Kitchens can have very high process gain densities and you may need to Switch off the slider controls from the Program options dialog to enter these high values.
Fuel
The fuel can be selected from a drop down list. Note that these fuels are currently mapped to a shorter list in the results as follows: Fuel in Model Data 1-Electricity from grid 2-Natural gas 3-Oil 4-Coal 5-LPG 6-Biogas 7-Anthracite 8-Smokeless fuel (including coke) 9-Dual fuel appliances (mineral + wood) 10-Biomass 11-Waste heat
Fraction lost
This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterise the amount of 'lost' heat being given off by the catering equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied by the total energy consumed by equipment to give the amount of heat which is 'lost' and does not impact the zone energy balances. This might correspond to cooker heat that is vented to the atmosphere through an extract hood.
Latent fraction
This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of latent heat given off by catering equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied by the total energy consumed to give the amount of latent energy produced by the catering equipment. This latent energy affects the moisture balance within the zone.
Radiant fraction
This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterise the amount of long-wave radiant heat being given off by catering equipment in a zone. The radiant fraction will be multiplied by the total energy consumed by electric equipment and (1-Fraction lost) to give the amount of long wavelength radiation gain from catering equipment in a zone. A value of zero means that the heat gain is entirely convective in which case all the heat is transferred to the air node in simulations. A value of 1 means that the gain is entirely radiative in which case all the heat is distributed to the inside surfaces. a typical value is somewhere between 0.1 and 0.5. If the Internal gains operate with occupancy model option is not selected you can also set the operation schedule.
- 190 -
Process Gains
Calculation
Process Gains
Activity tab in model data Set the thermal gains due to process heat per unit floor area.
Gain
Set the design level of energy consumption due to process activity per unit floor area. Process heat is the heat from any manufacturing or industrial process which is part of the business activity. The actual heat gain to the space may be reduced through the Fraction lost data (below). The Gain, entered in Watts/m2 (or Watts/ft2), is typically used to represent the maximum fuel consumption of process equipment in a zone that is then multiplied by a schedule fraction (below). This is slightly more flexible in that the design level could be a 'diversity factor' applied to a schedule of real numbers. Note that while the schedule value can vary from hour to hour, the design level field is constant. Tip: Spaces such as industrial units can have very high process gain densities and you may need to Switch off the slider controls from the Program options dialog to enter these high values. Tip: You can enter negative process gains for modelling the cooling effect from refrigeration units such as those found in supermarkets where the refrigerator doors may open and cool air may enter the zone.Note that Negative process gains are modelled in EnergyPlus using 'Other equipment' data instead of the usual 'Electrical equipment' data. The energy from negative process gains is calculated in the same way as for positive gains.
Fuel
The fuel can be selected from a drop down list. Note that these fuels are currently mapped to a shorter list in the results as follows: Fuel in Model Data 1-Electricity from grid 2-Natural gas 3-Oil 4-Coal 5-LPG 6-Biogas 7-Anthracite 8-Smokeless fuel (including coke) 9-Dual fuel appliances (mineral + wood) 10-Biomass 11-Waste heat
- 191 -
Fraction lost
This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterise the amount of 'lost' heat being given off by the process equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied by the total energy consumed by equipment to give the amount of heat which is 'lost' and does not impact the zone energy balances. This might correspond to electrical energy converted to mechanical work or heat that is vented to the atmosphere.
Latent fraction
This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of latent heat given off by process equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied by the total energy consumed to give the amount of latent energy produced by the process equipment. This latent energy affects the moisture balance within the zone.
Radiant fraction
This is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterise the amount of long-wave radiant heat being given off by process equipment in a zone. The radiant fraction will be multiplied by the total energy consumed by electric equipment and (1-Fraction lost) to give the amount of long wavelength radiation gain from process equipment in a zone. A value of zero means that the heat gain is entirely convective in which case all the heat is transferred to the air node in simulations. A value of 1 means that the gain is entirely radiative in which case all the heat is distributed to the inside surfaces. a typical value is somewhere between 0.1 and 0.5. If the Internal gains operate with occupancy model option is not selected you can also set the operation schedule.
Calculation
Construction Model Data

Construction tab in model data DesignBuilder uses construction components to model the conduction of heat through walls, roofs, ground and other opaque parts of the building envelope . Constructions can be selected on the Constructions model data tab to define the thermophysical and visual properties of the various internal and external surface elements in the building. From the Construction model data tab, you can access data on: Construction and Airtightness
Open the headers to enter construction details where they are different from those loaded from the template. Any changes you make that are different from the template data originally loaded shown in bold red.
See the Constructions 1 and Constructions 2 Model Data Tutorials
- 192 -
Constructions
TEMPLATES General Construction and glazing

When you have the General Construction and glazing model option set, you can load generic Construction data by clicking on the Template option under Construction Template and then by clicking on the '...' at the right of the line (below).
When you make a selection from the list of Construction templates data from selected template is loaded to the model.
Pre-design Construction and glazing

Alternatively if you have the Pre-design Construction and glazing model option set, generic constructions can be loaded using the sliders shown below. In this case you are restricted to the 4x3 construction templates from the <System> Construction templates category identified by the combination of Insulation and Thermal mass selected on the sliders. For example in the screenshot shown below data will be loaded from the 'Energy code Mediumweight' template.
Or in either case you can use the Load data from template tool.
Constructions
Construction tab in model data From the Construction tab, you can open the group header boxes to edit detailed makeup of the construction of walls, roofs, floors, ceilings, partitions etc. used in the building. The default/inheritance system used in DesignBuilder allows you to define building constructions quickly and easily by loading data from templates and by making global settings at building, block and zone levels. There are 2 alternative methods for representing floors/slabs/ceilings in DesignBuilder depending on the setting of the Floor/slab/ceiling representation model option :
- 193 -
Combined - option generally recommended for flexibility and ease of use. Separate - only option in v 1.2 and earlier allows you to set up floor/slab/ceiling configuration by making selections in model data.
Other construction data: Sub-Surface Construction - construction details of sub-surfaces (opaque surfaces within surfaces) Internal Thermal Mass - how to define additional thermal mass Component Block - construction and surface properties of component blocks Adjacency - defining special adjacency conditions Surface Convection - defining special surface convection options
Note: data on the Openings tab can be used to define the layout of the facade.
View/Edit construction details

To inspect the details of a selected construction, click on the icon to the left of the appropriate data entry box (Learning mode only). Alternatively double-click the icon to view/edit the data in a dialog. Note: Please be aware that all settings made on the Constructions Model data tab are defaults, (unless you are working at the surface level). Model data at the surface level (inherited from the zone above or directly set) defines the thermal and visual characteristics of the surface in the model.
'Combined' Constructions
Construction tab in model data under Construction header When the Floor/slab/ceiling representation model option is set to Combined wall, floor and roof constructions are all defined using simple constructions as shown in the diagram below. Note that if you are using the NCM for EPCs or Part-L/Section 6 calculations you should refer to the Block and Zone Dimensions page for a more detailed definition of block heights. The diagram shows: The location/definition of the various categories of construction Block and zone dimension definitions
Schematic Diagram Showing 'Combined' Floor/Slab/Ceiling Constructions

The schematic below shows the locations of the surface types and the constructions that will be applied to them.
- 194 -
'Combined' Constructions
External walls
The external wall construction defines the construction of walls adjacent to outside. The definition of walls is given by the roof-wall transition angle model option. In cold climates this construction will generally include an insulating layer.
Flat roof
Flat roof constructions apply to external horizontal surfaces. The construction used to represent the flat roof should include any slabs, insulation and suspended ceiling layers. If there are no flat roof surfaces, just ignore this data.
Pitched roof (occupied)

The Pitched roof (occupied) construction applies to external sloped surfaces when they appear in occupied zones. In cold climates this construction will generally include an insulating layer. If there are no pitched roof surfaces, just ignore this data. The definition of 'pitched roof' is given by the roof-wall transition angle model option.
Pitched roof (unoccupied)

The Pitched roof (unoccupied) construction applies to external sloped surfaces when they appear in semi-exterior unconditioned zones. This construction will generally not include any insulation layers. If there are no pitched roof surfaces, just ignore this data.
- 195 -
The definition of 'pitched roof' is given by the roof-wall transition angle model option.
Internal partitions
The internal partition construction defines the construction of internal partitions (walls used to divide blocks into zones) and inter-block partitions (internal walls shared with other blocks). Internal partitions are used where both zones are occupied. When one of the zones is occupied and the other is not the Semi-exposed walls construction data is used (below). If there are no partitions just ignore this data. The construction for the partition should represent all the layers in the actual internal wall. There is only one element representing the partition between the zones and all it's layers should be defined in the same construction. Note that changes in model data settings at the surface level are reflected as equivalent changes in data for the partition on the other side.
Partition data inheritance

There are 2 types of partition surface: Normal partitions separating zones within a single block. Inter-block partitions which separate zones in 2 different blocks. Inter-block partitions have 2 parent blocks and so it is not possible for the data to inherit from block level for these surfaces and data (usually construction data) instead inherits directly from building level. Normal partitions do have a single parent block and so block data for partitions does inherit as expected. If you need to differentiate data between inter-block and conventional partitions, you can set the inter-block partition defaults at the building level and then set the conventional block partition data for each of the appropriate blocks.
SEMI-EXPOSED Semi-exposed walls

The semi-exposed wall construction applies to walls between fully occupied zones and Semi-exterior unconditioned zones. They will normally include some insulation. DesignBuilder determines which of the zones is relatively 'outside' and uses this information to correctly order the material layers in the wall. The material layer defined in the construction as being 'outermost' (first-in list) will be the one adjacent to the semi-external unconditioned zone. If there are no semi-exposed wall surfaces, just ignore this data.
Semi-exposed roof
The semi-exposed roof construction is used between occupied zones and Semi-exterior unconditioned zones (such as roofspace/attic/loft spaces) above. The construction should include any slabs, insulation and suspended ceiling layers. DesignBuilder determines which of the zones is relatively 'outside' and uses this information to correctly order the material layers in the roof. If there are no semi-exposed roof surfaces, just ignore this data.
Semi-exposed floor
The semi-exposed floor construction is used between occupied zones and Semi-exterior unconditioned spaces below. The construction should include any slabs, insulation and raised floor layers. If there are no semi-exposed floor surfaces, just ignore this data.
- 196 -
'Separate' Constructions
FLOORS Ground floor

The ground floor construction is used between all internal zones and the ground and can be optionally combined with additional ground constructions layer(s) as shown in diagram above. The site ground temperatures are applied to the outside of all surfaces adjacent to ground. If there are no ground wall surfaces, just ignore this data.
External floor
External floors are floors that are adjacent to outside air, e.g. the floor of a cantilevered part of the building or where for any other reason there is no ground or other zone below. The External floor construction should include any slabs, insulation and raised floor layers. If there are no external floor surfaces, just ignore this data.
Internal floor
The internal floor construction defines the makeup of floors between occupied zones including any slabs, air gaps, raised floors and suspended ceilings. It will not usually contain insulation. Where the zone above is unoccupied the Semi-exposed roof construction is used instead. Likewise where the zone below is unoccupied the Semiexposed floor construction is used instead. If there are no internal floor surfaces, just ignore this data.
ZONE STATISTICS Zone Volume

The zone volume is calculated for all zone geometries and by default, the volume is the actual air volume of the space excluding the volume of floor and ceiling constructions but including half the volume of partition walls. The volume of the floor constructions can be optionally subtracted from the zone volume by using the Zone volume calculation Model options.

1. 2. 3. Block and Zone Dimensions is an introductory section explaining how to enter blocks and the relationship with zones. Also see Constructions for how to edit the construction configuration. And the Model Geometry Example section for a detailed worked example illustrating how surface areas and volumes are calculated.
Construction tab in model data under Construction header Warning: we advise new users not to use the Separate construction option. This is because it can be quite confusing trying to understand how constructions are built up with this option, especially if you do not check EnergyPlus idf data. When the Floor/slab/ceiling representation model option is set to Separate floor/ceiling and roof constructions are defined by combining constructions as shown in the diagram below. The diagram shows: The location/definition of the various categories of construction How constructions are combined (behind-the-scenes) to form the floor/ceiling 'combo constructions' passed to calculations.
- 197 -
Block and zone dimension definitions
Schematic Diagram Showing 'Separate' Floor/Slab/Ceiling Constructions
External walls
The external wall construction defines the construction of walls adjacent to outside. The formal definition of walls is given by the roof-wall transition angle model option. In cold climates this construction will generally include an insulating layer.
Flat roof
Flat roof constructions apply to external horizontal surfaces. The construction used to represent the flat roof should include all construction layers between inside and outside excluding any suspended ceiling and ceiling construction which is most easily included using the Suspended ceiling?, Suspension height and Ceiling construction data described below. In cold climates this construction will generally include an insulating layer. See Detail 5 above.
Pitched roof (occupied)

The Pitched roof (occupied) construction applies to external sloped surfaces when they appear in occupied zones. In cold climates this construction will generally include an insulating layer. The definition of 'pitched roof' is given by the roof-wall transition angle model option.
- 198 -
Pitched roof (unoccupied)

The Pitched roof (unoccupied) construction applies to external sloped surfaces when they appear in semi-exterior unconditioned zones. This construction will generally not include any insulation layers. The definition of 'pitched roof' is given by the roof-wall transition angle model option.
Internal partitions
The internal partition construction defines the construction of internal partitions (walls used to divide blocks into zones) and inter-block partitions (walls shared with other blocks). Internal partitions are used where both zones are occupied. When one of the zones is occupied and the other is not the Semi-exposed walls construction data is used (below).
Semi-exposed walls
The semi-exposed wall construction applies to walls which separate fully occupied zones with semi-exterior unconditioned zones. They will normally include some insulation. DesignBuilder determines which of the zones is relatively 'outside' and uses this information to correctly order the material layers in the wall. The material layer defined in the construction as being 'outermost' (first-in list) will be the one adjacent to the semi-external unconditioned zone.
Ceilings
In separate mode, you can define ceiling and floor constructions by combining standard structural slab constructions with optional ceiling and floor layers and air gaps. In DesignBuilder a ceiling is the construction immediately adjacent to the room at the top and is positioned below the floor slab of the zone above (diagram above). Often its' purpose is to as a finish (e.g. to hide ugly concrete slabs) or to provide an air gap between the slab above and the ceiling to allow light fittings, ducting, circuits and other services to be hidden from sight. Ceilings can also provide improved thermal and acoustic properties. If the ceiling is 'suspended' from the slab above it will have an air gap between the slab and the ceiling. You can use the following model data to define ceilings: Suspended ceiling? - check this option if there is a ceiling in the zone and it is to be defined separately from the floor slab. Checking this option shows: Suspension height - sets the height of the air gap between the floor slab of the zone above and the ceiling. Ceiling construction - the construction of the ceiling tiles or other ceiling construction layers, not including the suspension, slab or floor above.
See Details 4, 5, 6 and 7 in the diagram above. If there is no suspended ceiling, you should clear the 'Suspended ceiling' checkbox. In this case, the zone will be in direct contact with the floor slab of the zone above (if it is an internal ceiling) or the underside of the flat roof construction (if it is an external flat roof).
Floors
Floors are made up by combining floor, slab and ceiling constructions with floor and ceiling suspension voids as shown in the diagram above. If there is no raised floor, you should clear the 'Floor fitted above slab' check box. In this case, the room will be in direct contact with the floor slab. Note: it is not possible to use the gap defined by the suspension height in floors and ceilings as a plenum zone supply and return plenums for use in Compact HVAC must be completely separate zones.
- 199 -
Roofspace insulation
In Semi-exterior unconditioned spaces such as roofspaces, the Roofspace insulation data is used instead of the floor construction as the topmost floor layer. To include Insulation in the roofspace floor follow the steps: 1. 2. 3. Go to the roofspace block or zone Check the Floor fitted above slab checkbox Select the appropriate Roofspace insulation data. Note that this construction contains just the construction layers above the slab. The construction might typically contain two layers: i) insulation and possibly ii) boarding or other lining material. If the roofspace floor construction is directly in contact with the slab, i.e. there is no suspension, set the suspension height to zero.
4.
See Detail 6 in the diagram above.
Ground floors
Ground floors are made up by combining floor, ground floor slab and ground constructions (optional site level data) with an optional floor suspension void as shown in Construction Location and Block and Zone Dimensions. The site ground temperatures are applied to the outside of all surfaces adjacent to ground. In cold climates the Ground floor slab construction will generally include an insulating layer. See Detail 1 in the diagram above.
External floors
External floors are floors that are adjacent to outside air, e.g. the floor of a cantilevered part of the building or where for any other reason there is no ground or other zone below. With Separate constructions, External floors are generated from Floor slab and External floor constructions plus optional Floor suspension and Floor construction. In cold climates the External floor construction will generally include an insulating layer. See Detail 3 above.
Zone Volume
The zone volume is calculated correctly for all zone geometries and by default, the volume is the actual air volume of the space excluding the volume of floor and ceiling constructions and any raised floor and suspended ceiling voids (if selected) but including half the volume of partition walls.
Sub-Surface Constructions
Construction tab in model data under Construction header Sub-surfaces are exceptions to the main surface construction. Examples include cold-bridging elements such as window lintels and opaque panels in a lightweight facade. You can define different sub-surface construction types for external walls, internal partitions and pitched roofs. Sub-surfaces are modelled in the same detail as standard surfaces including the effect of thermal mass but not including any 2-D or 3-D heat conduction effects due to the interface between the sub-surface and the background parent surface. To add a sub-surface, go to the surface you wish to work on, click on the Layout tab and select the Draw subsurface command. You can also define default constructions for doors.
- 200 -
Internal Thermal Mass
Walls
Any opaque sub-surfaces created in a wall will have this construction.
Internal
Any opaque sub-surfaces created in any inside surface (partitons, internal floor etc) will have this construction.
Roof
Any opaque sub-surfaces created in any pitched roof will have this construction.
External door
Defines the construction of external doors.
Internal door
Defines the construction of internal doors.
Internal Thermal Mass

Construction tab in model data under Construction header DesignBuilder uses the thermal characteristics of the constructions for each of the walls, floors, roofs, partitions etc in each zone and accounts for the thermal mass in the simulations. You can also include additional thermal mass to account for partitions within a zone, furniture and any other mass which will affect the dynamic thermal response of the zone. There are two ways you can define additional internal thermal mass in DesignBuilder: 1. 2. Drawing hanging partitions (i.e. partitions which do not meet other walls at both ends), Entering a non-zero internal thermal mass exposed area on the Constructions tab under the Internal Thermal Mass header at zone level.
Thermal mass defined using these methods is lumped together for each zone and modelled in EnergyPlus in a 'non-geometric' way. In both cases, the construction is defined under the Internal Thermal Mass header on the Constructions tab. Internal thermal mass defined in this way is used to specify the construction and area of items within the space that are important to heat transfer calculations but not necessarily important geometrically. For example, furniture within the space particularly for large spaces. It can also be used for internal walls that are not needed for solar distribution, when Solar distribution is set to 3-Full interior and exterior or to represent all interior walls when solar is distributed to the floors only with Solar distribution set to 2-Full exterior. Example When zoning an office building, five west-facing offices have been combined into one zone. All of the offices have interior walls made of the same materials. As shown in the figure below, this zone may be described with 5 exterior walls and 11 internal walls or 1 exterior wall and 1 internal mass. Note that fewer surfaces will speed up the EnergyPlus calculations.
- 201 -
Example
A five-story building has the same ceiling/floor construction separating each of the levels. Zones that are on floors 2 through 4 may be described using a single piece of internal mass to represent both the floor and ceiling. The construction for this internal mass would be identical to the ceiling/floor construction that would be used to describe separate surfaces. Exposed Area The exposed area is the surface area of the internal mass. The area that is specified must be the entire surface area that is exposed to the zone. If both sides of a wall are completely within the same zone, then the area of both sides must be included when describing that internal wall.
Adjacency
Construction tab in model data under Construction header The adjacency of individual surfaces can be set to be either adjacent to ground or adiabatic. The adjacency data is used at the surface level, though defaults can be set at a block and zone level as well if all surfaces in a block or zone have the same adjacency. The available options are: 1-Auto - the adjacency of the surface is determined automatically by DesignBuilder based on its position. This is the default setting where external surfaces below the ground plane are considered to be adjacent to ground and external surfaces above the ground plane are considered to be adjacent to outside conditions. 2-Not adjacent to ground - the surface is not adjacent to ground even if it is situated below the ground plane. 3-Adjacent to ground - the surface is adjacent to ground even if it is above the ground plane or it is an internal surface. 4-Adiabatic - the surface is adiabatic. This means that heat is not transferred across in its external surface. Adiabatic surfaces are frequently used in thermal modelling to represent surfaces which are between two zones at substantially similar conditions. Note that thermal mass is still modelled in Adiabatic surfaces because heat can still be transferred into the mass through the internal surface. Adiabatic surfaces are often used for modelling the boundary between the actual building model and any adjacent buildings which are not to be modelled.
You can determine which surfaces are adiabatic or adjacent to ground by looking for the corresponding surface adjacency markers in the Edit Screen at zone and surface levels:
- 202 -
Surface Convection
Note that the recommended way to set ground and adiabatic adjacencies is to use component blocks. Adiabatic surfaces use internal constructions: Adiabatic external floors use Internal floor construction. Adiabatic flat roofs use reversed Internal floor construction. Adiabatic external wall surfaces use Internal partition construction. You can find out the construction that will be used for each adiabatic surface by looking at data on the Construction tab at surface level. Note that in the current version of DesignBuilder the Visualisations shows adiabatic surfaces using external surfaces properties but internal surfaces (Internal floor and partition constructions) are used in calculations as described above.
Exclude this surface area from total zone floor area?

When modelling situations such as offices space within large warehouse zones where the ceiling at the top of the offices is not usable floor area in the warehouse it may be useful to exclude the area of any unused floor surfaces from the floor area of the zone above. So for internal floors such as the unused 'floor' on top of the office space you can check the Exclude this surface area from total zone floor area? checkbox to ensure the floor is not used in the calculation of zone and building floor area and in the calculation of internal gains where defined per m2 or per ft2. Note this setting should not be made for the floor of office zone itself, which of course is useable floor area, but for the 'floor' of the zone above (typically a warehouse or other large volume space) which is not useable floor area. Another situation where this option can be used is where holes have been cut in a floor surface to remove it, so upper and lower zones can be merged. In this case, any small remaining border in the cut floor surface should ideally be removed from the floor area calculation for the combined zone.
Surface Convection
Construction tab in model data under Construction header You can select the inside and outside surface convection algorithms in the Model data on the Construction tab under the Surface Convection header. This allows you to make different selections in different parts of the building. Further details of the algorithms are provided in the EnergyPlus Engineering reference document.
Inside convection algorithm

You can select from 6 main EnergyPlus inside convection algorithms for calculating the convection between internal zone surfaces and the rest of the zone air in the simulation calculations. Unless you have good reason to do so you are advised to use the default TARP convection algorithm:
- 203 -
1-AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm -This advanced option provides a dynamic selection of convection models based on conditions. Beausoleil-Morrison (2000, 2002) developed a methodology for dynamically managing the selection of hc equations called adaptive convection algorithm. The algorithm is used to select among the available hcequations for the one that is most appropriate for a given surface at a given time. As Beausoleil-Morrison notes, the adaptive convection algorithm is intended to be expanded and altered to reflect different classification schemes and/or new hcequations. The adaptive convection algorithm implemented in EnergyPlus for the inside face has a total of 45 different categories for surfaces and 29 different options for hc equation selections. The tables provided in the Engineering document summarise the categories and the default assignments for hc equations. 2-Simple - The simple convection model uses constant coefficients for different heat transfer configurations, using the criteria to determine reduced and enhanced convection. The coefficients are taken directly from Walton (1983). Walton derived his coefficients from the surface conductances for =0.90 found in the ASHRAE Handbook (1985) in Table 1 on p. 23.2. The radiative heat transfer component was estimated at 1.02 * 0.9 = 0.918 BTU/h-ft2-F and then subtracted off. Finally the coefficients were converted to SI units to yield the values below. For a vertical surface: hc = 3.076 For a horizontal surface with reduced convection: hc = 0.948 For a horizontal surface with enhanced convection: hc = 4.040 For a tilted surface with reduced convection: hc = 2.281 For a tilted surface with enhanced convection: hc = 3.870. 3-CIBSE - applies constant heat transfer coefficient derived from traditional CIBSE values. 4-Ceiling diffuser - a mixed and forced convection model for ceiling diffuser configurations. The model correlates the heat transfer coefficient to the air change rate for ceilings, walls and floors. The ceiling diffuser algorithm is based on empirical correlations developed by Fisher and Pedersen (1997). The correlation was reformulated to use the room outlet temperature as the reference temperature. The correlations are shown below. For Floors: hc = 3.873 + 0.082 x ACH ^ 0.98, For ceilings: hc = 2.234 + 4.099 x ACH ^ 0.503 and for Walls: hc = 1.208 + 1.012 ACH ^ 0.604. 5-Cavity - This algorithm was developed to model convection in a "Trombe wall zone", i.e. the air space between the storage wall surface and the exterior glazing. (See the later sections on Passive and Active Trombe Walls below for more information about Trombe walls.) The algorithm is identical to the convection model (based on ISO 15099) used in Window5 for convection between glazing layers in multi-pane window systems. The use of the algorithm for modelling an unvented Trombe wall has been validated against experimental data by Ellis (2003).This algorithm gives the convection coefficients for air in a narrow vertical cavity that is sealed and not ventilated. This applies both to the air gap in between panes of a window or to the air gap between the Trombe wall glazing and the inner surface (often a selective surface). These convection coefficients are really the only difference between a normal zone and a Trombe zone. See also note below. 6-TARP - based on variable natural convection based on temperature difference from ASHRAE algorithms. This is the same as the old "Detailed" Inside convection algorithm provided in earlier versions of DesignBuilder. It is the default option for new models in v3.0.0.085 and later.
The 5-Cavity Inside convection algorithm is not available at the surface level. Paraphrased note from EnergyPlus developers on the 5-Cavity option: "The Trombe wall convection coefficients only make sense for a zone. They are specific coefficients calculated for a narrow enclosed space. The two major walls of a Trombe wall zone are so close together that the convection patterns for the two walls actually interact. If they are close enough they can fight each other and totally stagnate the convection cell in the space. This is not free-boundary convection such as that found in a typical room. Therefore, it does not make sense to apply these coefficients to a single surface. The algorithm analyses the zone to figure out which are the two major surfaces and then sets the coefficients on those surfaces. The other minor surfaces receive negligible convection." The following inside convection options are also available for advanced users: 7-ASHRAEVerticalWall 8-WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt 9-WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt 10-FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserWalls
- 204 -
Surface Convection
11-FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserCeiling 12-FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserFloor 13-AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal 14-AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal 15-AlamdariHammondVerticalWall 16-KhalifaEq3WallAwayFromHeat 17-KhalifaEq4CeilingAwayFromHeat 18-KhalifaEq5WallNearHeat 19-KhalifaEq6NonHeatedWalls 20-KhalifaEq7Ceiling 21-AwbiHattonHeatedFloor 22-AwbiHattonHeatedWall 23-BeausoleilMorrisonMixedAssistedWall 24-BeausoleilMorrisonMixedOpposingWall 25-BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableFloor 26-BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableFloor 27-BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableCeiling 28-BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableCeiling 29-FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall 30-KaradagChilledCeiling 31-ISO15099Windows 32-GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWindow 33-GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWalls 34-GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserFloor
To avoid discontinuities in surface heat transfer rate calculations, all correlations are extrapolated beyond the lower limit of the data set (3 ACH) to a natural convection limit which is applied during the hours when the system is off. These models are explained in greater detail in the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference Document.
Outside convection algorithm

Substantial research has gone into the formulation of models for estimating the exterior convection coefficient. Since the 1930's there have been many different methods published for calculating this coefficient, with much disparity between them (Cole and Sturrock 1977; Yazdanian and Klems 1994).Unless you have good reason to do so you are advised to use the default DOE-2 convection algorithm You can select from 7 main outside convection algorithms: 1-AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm - This advanced convection algorithm provides a dynamic selection of convection models based on conditions. This algorithm has a structure that allows for finer control over the models used for particular surfaces. The algorithm for the outside face was developed for EnergyPlus but it borrows concepts and its name from the research done by Beausoleil-Morrison (2000, 2002) for convection at the inside face (see above). The adaptive convection algorithm implemented in EnergyPlus for the outside face is much simpler than that for the inside face. The surface classification system has a total of 4 different categories for surfaces that depend on current wind direction and heat flow directions. However in other ways it is more complex in that the hcequation is split into two parts and there are separate model equation selections for forced and natural convection. 2-SimpleCombined - The simple algorithm uses surface roughness and local surface wind speed to calculate the exterior heat transfer coefficient. This is a combined heat transfer coefficient that includes radiation to sky, ground, and air. The correlation is based on Figure 1, Page 25.1 (Thermal and Water Vapor Transmission Data), 2001 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. Note: selecting the SimpleCombined option at building level on the Constructions tab under Surface Convection or on the Calculation options or Model options dialogs has a special meaning. In this case the outside convective selection covers both convection and radiation combined. This means for example that
- 205 -
any hard-set outside convective heat transfer coefficients set on the Surface properties tab of the Construction dialog will actually be used as a combined outside convective plus radiation coefficient. 3-CIBSE - applies constant heat transfer coefficients depending on orientation, derived from traditional CIBSE values. 4-ASHRAEVerticalWall - Identical to the DOE-2 option. 5-TARP - TARP, or Thermal Analysis Research Program, is an important predecessor of EnergyPlus (Walton 1983). Walton developed a comprehensive model for exterior convection by blending correlations from ASHRAE and flat plate experiments by Sparrow et. al. In older versions of EnergyPlus, prior to version 6, the TARP model was called Detailed. The model was re-implemented in version 6 to use Area and Perimeter values for the group of surfaces that make up a facade or roof, rather than the single surface being modelled. 6-DOE-2 - The DOE-2 convection model is a combination of the MoWiTT and BLAST Detailed convection models (LBL 1994). It is the default option for new models in v3.0.0.085 and later. 7-MoWiTT - The MoWiTT model is based on measurements taken at the Mobile Window Thermal Test (MoWiTT) facility (Yazdanian and Klems 1994). The correlation applies to very smooth, vertical surfaces (e.g. window glass) in low-rise buildings. The MoWiTT algorithm may not be appropriate for rough surfaces, high-rise surfaces, or surfaces that employ movable insulation.
The following outside convection options are also available for more advanced users: 8-WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt 9-WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt 10-AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal 11-AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal 12-FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall 13-NusseltJurges 14-McAdams 15-Mitchell 16-BlockenWindard 17-Emmel 18-ClearRoof
Note: When the surface is wet (i.e. it is raining and the surface is exposed to wind) then the convection coefficient appears in results as a very large number (1000) and the surface is exposed to the Outdoor Wet Bulb Temperature rather than the Outdoor Dry Bulb Temperature. As well as being able to define convection options on the Model data on Construction tab under the Surface Convection header as described above, building level inside and outside convection algorithm settings can be made on: Model options dialog (Heating design, Cooling design, Simulation tabs) Calculation options dialogs (Heating design, Cooling design, Simulation
You cannot make changes to individual surface convection settings where the surface is an internal partition. All of the above algorithms are described fully in the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference. Note: the equivalent inside and outside surface convection options in the Calculation and Model options dialogs control building default values (equivalent of making a setting in Model data at building level) and any changes made at block, zone or surface levels in the Model data will override these default settings.
- 206 -
Component Block
Component Block
Construction tab in model data under Construction header Component blocks can be used to include shading and reflection effects of objects such as local shading devices, awnings, adjacent buildings and trees. They can also be used to define ground and adiabatic adjacencies. The component block model data allows you to define the component block type, whether the component block shades and reflects in simulations, transmittance of the shading material and also a schedule for modelling variations in transmittance at different times of the day, seasons etc. For example they can be used for modelling deciduous trees which shade more in the summer when they have leaves than they do in winter when the leaves have fallen.
Component block type

You can change the type of the component block. Select from: 1-Standard - used for shading, reflection and visualisation. 2-Ground - used for setting ground adjacency, shading, reflection and visualisation. 3-Adiabatic - used for setting adiabatic adjacency, shading, reflection and visualisation.
For more information on the Component block types see Component Block under Working with Blocks (Building Level)
Component block shades and reflects

Switch this option on to include the component block as a shading/reflection surfaces in the simulations. Shading surfaces have the following effects: Shade direct beam solar radiation. Reflect solar radiation onto the building (if you select Model reflections in the calculation options). Shade diffuse solar and long-wave radiation from the sky. Shade diffuse solar radiation from the ground (if you select Model reflections in the calculation options).
Note: Solar and light reflection from the ground is included even if the solar Model reflections option is not used, but if reflections are not calculated the ground plane is considered unobstructed, i.e., the shadowing of the ground by the building itself or by component blocks is ignored. Shadowing of the ground by component blocks is only taken into account if the Model reflections option is used. Conclusion: Switch Model reflections on for the most accurate shading calculations. Note: all component block types cast shadows in the visualisations.
Material
The component block material is used to define the solar and visible reflectance of the block surfaces in Cooling design calculations and Simulations using real weather data when the model reflections calculation option is selected. Note: Although component blocks are displayed in DesignBuilder as solid objects, non-flat component blocks are modelled in EnergyPlus as a group of surfaces and it is the reflectance and transmission of each of these surfaces that is being described here. The solar flux incident upon a building facade will be attenuated by each successive shading object located on a path between the facade and the sun position.
Maximum Transmittance
This is the maximum solar transmittance of the entire component block. The transmittance of the component block during the simulation is calculated by multiplying the maximum transmittance by the time varying schedule value:
- 207 -
Transmittance = Max Transmittance x Schedule value You will generally want component blocks to provide 100% shading for 100% of the time. In this case you can leave the Maximum transmittance and Transmittance schedule in their default states of 0 and On respectively. If you wish the component block to transmit solar and visible radiation you can define the extent and timing of the transmission. The component block transmittance is calculated during the simulations as the Maximum transmittance multiplied by the value of the transmittance schedule below. The maximum transmittance can have any value between 0 and 1. Note that if the component block is flat (i.e. it consists of 2 large surfaces and several smaller 'edge' surfaces) the block is represented in the simulations by a single shading surface. In this case the surface used will depend on the value of the Flat component block surface selection model option. Tip: If your component block has a constant transmittance you can set the transmittance schedule below to On and set the constant transmittance for the block here.
For non-flat component blocks every surface is included in the simulation as a shading surface and the solar flux incident upon a building facade will be attenuated by each successive shading object located on a path between the facade and the sun position. The shading transmittance schedule you define is therefore modified to ensure that the overall transmittance of the block is the Maximum Transmittance value multiplied by the schedule you selected. This is done assuming that the component block is convex and that therefore solar rays can only pass through a maximum of 2 surfaces. The transmittance of each non-flat component block surface is set to square root of the value you defined to achieve this. Note: non-convex non-flat component blocks will provide more shading than you specified during times when solar rays pass through more than 2 surfaces.
Transmittance schedule
The component block transmittance schedule defines any time varying transmittance of the component block surfaces. By default, the component block is fully opaque for the whole year. The transmittance schedule can contain any value between 0 and 1. The transmittance schedule can be used to allow for seasonal transmittance change, such as deciduous trees that have a higher transmittance in winter than in summer. Transmittance based on time of day can also be used - a movable awning, for example, where the transmittance is some value less than 1.0 when the awning is in place and is 1.0 when the awning is retracted. The following assumptions are made in the shading surface transmittance calculation:
- 208 -
Airtightness
Both sides of the shading surface have the same transmittance properties. The transmittance is the same for both beam and diffuse solar radiation. Beam solar transmittance is independent of angle of incidence on the shading surface. Beam radiation incident on a shading surface is transmitted as beam radiation with no change in direction, i.e., there is no beam-to-diffuse component. If two shading surfaces with non-zero transmittance overlap, the net transmittance is the product of the individual transmittances. Inter-reflection between the shading surfaces (and between the shading surfaces and the building) is ignored. For the daylighting calculation the shading surfaces visible transmittance is assumed to be the same as its solar transmittance. Shading devices are assumed to be opaque to long-wave radiation no matter what the solar transmittance value is.
Note: Shading devices only shade solar radiation when the sun is up, which is automatically determined by EnergyPlus from latitude, time of year, etc. So you only need to account for the time-varying transmittance of the shading device in the transmittance schedule,for times whether the sun is up. In other words for times when the sun is not up, it doesn't matter what value of transmittance is contained in the schedule.
Airtightness
Construction tab in model data There are two ways of defining air tightness depending on the Natural ventilation model option: Scheduled Calculated
In both cases infiltration can be switched off at building, block or zone level.
Airtightness Scheduled
Construction tab in model data under Airtightness header The infiltration rate (rate of entry of unintentional air from outside through cracks, holes and through the porosity of the fabric) is assumed to be constant throughout the simulation and can be set in one of 4 different units depending on the setting of the Infiltration units model option: 1. 2. 3. 4. ac/h - the default option where infiltration is defined in air changes per hour (ac/h), i.e. zone volume per hour under standard operating pressures. m3/h-m2 at 50 Pa infiltration is defined as flow rate in m3/h per unit exposed surface area, when the pressure difference between inside and outside is 50 Pa. Unit commonly used in the UK. m3/h-m2 at 4 Pa infiltration is defined as flow rate in m3/h per unit exposed surface area, when the pressure difference between inside and outside is 4 Pa. Units commonly used in France and Belgium. n50 - ac/h at 50 Pa - infiltration is defined in air changes per hour (ac/h), i.e. zone volume per hour, when the pressure difference between inside and outside is 50 Pa. Unit commonly used in Europe.
The air flow rate in m3/s at standard pressure is calculated from the ac/h data using: m3/s = ac/h * ZoneVolume / 3600
- 209 -
where ZoneVolume is the total air volume of the space including the volume of floor and ceiling constructions and any raised floor and suspended ceiling voids (if selected in Separate constructions) and including half the volume of partition walls. Note: this total zone volume value may be different from the value used for calculating air flow rates for natural ventilation and mechanical ventilation which have model options for excluding floor/ceiling constructions. The ac/h at standard pressure is calculated from other units using formulae in EN12831 and the m3/s calculated using the above formula.
Airtightness Calculated
Construction tab in model data under Airtightness header When Calculated natural ventilation is active, the Airtightness is defined by a position on a five point scale:
The five settings correspond to the five Crack templates. You can switch off calculated infiltration off by unchecking the Model infiltration checkbox. This may be useful if you are carrying out a summertime simulation of a large building to reduce the number of cracks in the model and so speed simulations. Note: if you do switch off infiltration when calculated natural ventilation is active, you should make sure that Natural ventilation (HVAC tab) is switched on to ensure that sufficient flow paths exist. Otherwise EnergyPlus may crash.
Openings Model Data (Windows, Doors, Vents, Holes, Subsurfaces)

Openings tab in model data The term opening is used in DesignBuilder to describe any opening in the main building fabric. These are modelled as exceptions to the main surface construction. There are five types of opening: Windows Sub-surfaces ( i.e. opaque elements within the surface that have different properties from the main construction. For example lintels and lightweight panels can be defined as sub-surfaces. Data for these is held on the Construction tab) Holes Doors Vents
The layout, operation and construction data for these (apart from sub-surfaces) can be set on the Openings tab.
- 210 -
External Glazing
See also the Openings Model Data Tutorial
Templates
You can load generic Opening data by clicking on the Template option under Glazing Template and then by clicking on the '...' at the right of the line (below).
When you make a selection from the list of Glazing templates, data from selected template will be loaded to the model. You can also open the: External Glazing Internal Glazing Roof Glazing Doors Vents
headers to enter opening details where they are different from those loaded from the template. Note: Once you have created custom openings on any particular surface, changes made to facade layout on this tab will not affect the layout for the surface. All Openings data is used to generate simulation data at the Surface level. You can also override default Pressure Coefficient data when the Calculated Natural ventilation option is set and you are at surface level.
External Glazing
Openings tab in model data The data under the External Glazing header applies to all glazing lying on external walls. You can enter information on: Dimensions Frame Shading Operation
Dimensions
Openings tab in model data under External Glazing and Internal Glazing headers
- 211 -
You can use the Window to wall % (WWR) data and Window height, Window spacing and Sill height to easily change the amount of glazing and its layout on the walls. The way this data is used for each facade type is described below.
Facade types
There are a number of standard facade types: None - there is no glazing. Continuous horizontal - glazing is generated in a continuous horizontal strip using Sill height, Window spacing and Percentage glazing. Fixed height - glazing is generated with a fixed height at the specified Sill height and Window spacing, and width is calculated based on the Percentage glazing. This option uses Window to wall % but prioritises window height. Preferred height - glazing is generated using the window height data and the Percentage glazing, but the Window height may be adjusted to achieve the required Window to wall %. This option uses Window height, Window spacing and Sill height but prioritises Window to wall %. Fixed width and height - windows have fixed width and height. This option uses Window to wall % but prioritises Window Width, Height, Spacing and Sill height. Fill surface (100%) - the entire surface is filled with glazing and there is no frame.
Window to Wall %
Often referred to as the Window to Wall Ratio (WWR) this data can be used to change the amount of glazing for all openings at or below the current level in the building hierarchy. For example changing the WWR at building level changes the size of all windows in the model not overridden by other settings lower in the hierarchy.
Window spacing
The window spacing is the centre to centre spacing between windows, not the gap between windows.
Sill height
This is the height of the base of the window from the base of the block. Note 1: You can control the makeup of the building facades in greater detail by drawing individual windows at the surface level. In this case glazing, vent and door facade layout model data is ignored. Note 2: Flat roofs do not have default glazing set up using Roof glazing layout model data. To create openings on a flat roof you should go to the surface level and add them there. Note 3: Even with the 2 Facade type options that prioritise Window to wall % (Preferred height and Continuous horizontal), when the surface is non-rectangular, the Window to wall % will not be perfectly maintained. For these surfaces, DesignBuilder calculates a rectangle that can accept the windows and starts from one end of the rectangle adding windows using the Window spacing data until no more fit into the rectangle. This results in an approximately correct looking facade but only prioritises Window to wall % in the rectangle, not accounting for the areas outside the bounding rectangle. For relatively large values of Window spacing on non-rectangular surfaces, no glazing may be generated. For example you may find that gable window surfaces have no default windows generated and it is often easiest to draw a window in this case.
REVEAL
The schematics below show how DesignBuilder reveal data is used to describe real glazing systems.
- 212 -
Dimensions
Outside reveal depth

The outside reveal depth gives the extent to which the glazing is offset into the wall. As shown in the above diagram it is the distance from the exterior surface of the wall to the glazing outer surface (in m or ft). Note: EnergyPlus models outside reveals through the co-ordinates of the window, which are offset into the zone so the window and the base surface don't lie on the same plane. DesignBuilder provides window co-ordinates to EnergyPlus in this way and there is no specific data item in the IDF data to define it. Note: In DesignBuilder v3.0 the outside reveal depth is used in EnergyPlus only. In Visualisations and Daylighting calculations the window is assumed to be positioned halfway between inside and outside surfaces.
Inside reveal depth

The inside reveal depth is the distance (in m or ft) from the innermost surface of the window to the interior wall surface as shown in the diagram above.
- 213 -
Inside sill depth

The inside sill depth is the distance (in m or ft) from the innermost surface of the window to the innermost end of the sill as shown in the diagram above. EnergyPlus window dimensions - technical information The "FenestrationSurface:Detailed" window data written to the EnergyPlus IDF input file will usually have a slightly smaller area to the area defined in DesignBuilder. This is to account for the frame which is included in the window area defined in DesignBuilder but excluded from the IDF window area. In cases where the frame option is switched off in DesignBuilder the frame area in the IDF data will match the area set in DesignBuilder.
Frame And Dividers

Openings tab in model data under External Glazing, Internal Glazing and Roof Glazing headers
Frames are applied to all rectangular windows (default and custom) but not to other shaped windows and not when using the Fill surface (100%) facade type. If the glazing does not have a frame or dividers, uncheck the Has a frame? box. If Has a frame? is checked and then you can enter: The construction of the frame and dividers, The number of horizontal dividers and vertical dividers, Frame width and divider with (see diagrams below for definition).
EXTERNAL WINDOWS ON WALLS

For external windows on walls the following dimensions in the direction of the glazing normal can also be entered: Outside reveal depth Inside reveal depth Inside sill depth Outside divider projection Inside divider projection
- 214 -
Shading
Outside frame projection Inside frame projection Divider glass edge-centre conduction ratio Frame glass edge-centre conduction ratio Divider type
The definition of the above dimensions is shown in the diagrams.
DIVIDERS
The schematics below show how DesignBuilder divider data is used to describe real glazing systems.
Note: If you do not wish to model the shading/reflection effect of the reveal/frame/divider then simply set the projection/depth to zero.
Shading
Openings tab in model data under External Glazing, Internal Glazing and Roof Glazing headers You can select two types of shading for external windows:
- 215 -
Window shading (blinds, curtains etc walls and roofs). Local shading (overhangs, louvres, sidefins on external walls only)
These types of shading can be used individually or combined. Other shading mechanisms supported by DesignBuilder are: Component blocks Assemblies
Window and Local shading are both covered in the Solar Shading Tutorial
Window Shading
Openings tab in model data under External Glazing, Internal Glazing and Roof Glazing headers To include blinds, transparent insulation or electrochromic glazing check the 'Window shading' checkbox.
Type
Select the Window blind component type. There are 4 categories of window blinds: Slat Shade Transparent insulation Electrochromic switching (if you select a blind of this category the position must be 'Switchable'.
Position
The window shading devices can be positioned in one of four ways: 1-Inside - the window shading devices is positioned inside the zone. 2-Mid-pane - the window shading device is positioned between the inner pane and the second pane. 3-Outside - the shading devices positioned outside. 4-Switchable - select this option for electrochromic glazing in which case the outer pane is switched based on the shading control (below).
Control type
Control data specifies how the shading device is controlled. It determines whether the shading device is on or off. For blinds and shades, when the device is on it is assumed to cover all of the window except its frame;
- 216 -
Window Shading
when the device is off it is assumed to cover none of the window (whether on or off the shading device is assumed to cover none of the wall that the window is on). For switchable glazing, on means that the glazing is in the fully-switched state and off means that it is in the unswitched state; for example, for electrochromic glazing, on means the glazing is in its darkest state and "off means it is in its lightest state. The choices for Shading control type are the following. Equivalent EnergyPlus control types are shown in italics. If a setpoint is applicable its units are shown in parentheses. 1-Always on (AlwaysOn) - Shading is always on. The following six control types are used primarily to reduce zone cooling load due to window solar gain. 2-Daylight (MeetDaylightIlluminanceSetpoint) - Used only with Position = 4-Switchable in zones with daylighting controls. In this case the transmittance green roofof the glazing is adjusted to meet the daylight illuminance set point for the main photoelectric sensor used to control electric lighting according to daylight availability. This type of control assures that there is just enough daylight transmitted through windows with electrochromic shading to meet the daylighting requirements in a zone, and no more, thus reducing the cooling load. Note that the daylight illuminance set point is specified under Environmental Control on the Activity tab and that there is no option to apply separate setpoints for electrochromic shading and electric lighting control. 3-Schedule - Shading operation is defined by a schedule only. 4-Solar (OnIfHighSolarOnWindow) - Shading is on if beam plus diffuse solar radiation incident on the window exceeds SetPoint (W/m2 or BTU/h-ft2). 5-Glare (OnIfHighGlare) - Shading is on if the total daylight glare index at the zones first daylighting sensor from all of the exterior windows in the zone exceeds the maximum glare index specified in the daylighting input for zone. Note: Glare control requires Lighting control to be switched on in the zone. 6-Outside air temp (OnIfHighOutsideAirTemp) - Shading is on if outside air temperature exceeds SetPoint (C or F). 7-Inside air temp (OnIfHighZoneAirTemp) - Shading is on if zone air temperature in the previous time step exceeds SetPoint (C or F) 8-Cooling (OnIfHighZoneCooling) - Shading is on if zone cooling rate in the previous time step is non-zero. The following two control types can be used to reduce zone cooling load. They are applicable to any Shading type but are most appropriate for interior or exterior blinds, interior or exterior shades with low insulating value, or switchable glazing. 9-Day cooling and solar + night (OnNight/OnDayIfCoolingAndHighSolarOnWindow) - Shading is on at night. Shading is on during the day the solar radiation incident on the window exceeds SetPoint (W/m2 or BTU/h-ft2) and if the zone cooling rate in the previous time step is non-zeo. 10-Day cooling and solar (OffNight/OnDayIfCoolingAndHighSolarOnWindow) - Shading is off at night. Shading is on during the day when the solar radiation incident on the window exceeds SetPoint (W/m2 or BTU/h-ft2) and if the zone cooling rate in the previous time step is non-zero. The following three control types can be used to reduce zone heating load during the winter by reducing window conductive heat loss at night and leaving the window unshaded during the day to maximize solar gain. They are applicable to any Shading Type but are most appropriate for interior or exterior shades with high insulating value ("movable insulation"). Night means the sun is down and day means the sun is up. 11-Night outside low air temp (OnNightIfLowOutsideTemp/OffDay) - Shading is on at night if the outside air temperature is less than SetPoint (C or F) and schedule, if specified, allows shading. Shading is off during the day.
- 217 -
12-Night inside low air temp (OnNightIfLowInsideTemp/OffDay) - Shading is on at night if the zone air temperature in the previous time step is less than SetPoint (C or F) and schedule, if specified, allows shading. Shading is off during the day. 13-Night heating (OnNightIfHeating/OffDay) - Shading is on at night if the zone heating rate in the previous time step exceeds SetPoint (W) and schedule, if specified, allows shading. Shading is off during the day. The following two control types can be used to reduce zone heating and cooling load. They are applicable to any Shading type but are most appropriate for translucent interior or exterior shades with high insulating value ("translucent movable insulation"). 14-Night outside low air temp + day cooling (OnNightIfLowOutsideTemp/OnDayIfCooling) - Shading is on at night if the outside air temperature is less than Set point (C or F). Shading is on during the day if the zone cooling rate in the previous time step is non-zero. 15-Night heating + day cooling (OnNightIfHeating/OnDayIfCooling) - Shading is on at night if the zone heating rate in the previous time step is non-zero. Shading is on during the day if the zone cooling rate in the previous time step is non-zero.
SetPoint
The setpoint for activating window shading. The units depend on the type of trigger: W/m2 or BTU/h-ft2 for solar-based controls. C or F for temperature-based controls.
Operation schedule
For all shading control options apart from Glare and Always on, the shading can only be active when this schedule value is 1. Select the schedule 'On' if the blind is always activated or if the only control is one of the other listed above.
Local Shading
Openings tab in model data under External Glazing headers To include overhangs, sidefins and/or louvres check the 'Local shading' checkbox. This shows the Local shading component data. DesignBuilder comes with a small database of Local shading devices, but if you cannot find a suitable component for your model, you can create a custom local shading component by clicking on the New button from the Selection dialog (below).
- 218 -
Window Operation
Note: the DesignBuilder Local shading devices allow a range of different overhangs, side fins and louvres to be defined, but if you need to model a shading device not covered by the standard mechanism, you can draw custom shading devices using Component blocks.
Window Operation
Openings tab in model data under External Glazing, Internal Glazing and Roof Glazing headers Note this data is only shown if Natural ventilation is activated on the HVAC tab at the current level.
CALCULATED NATURAL VENTILATION

The operation of windows in the EnergyPlus simulation airflow network simulation can be defined by entering data under Operation headers. The data will depend on the Natural ventilation model option set:
% Glazing area opens

The % Glazing area opens data allows you to define the openable window area as a percentage of the total window area. For example enter '20' if 20% of the window area can open. The air flow opening is assumed to be a gap in the side of the window which takes on the full height of the window. Note: % Glazing area opens data does not define the size of the opening for CFD. The size and position of the opening in CFD calculations is defined on the CFD tab. Note: if modulation is switched on (it isn't by default) the glazing opening areas defined here are multiplied by a factor to account for external conditions.
Operation schedule
You can also enter a schedule to define the timing of the window operation. The schedule should have values of 0 and 1 only and intermediate fractional values do not indicate partial opening.
- 219 -
The windows are 'open' when: Tzone_air > Tsetpoint AND Tzone_air > Toutside_air AND the schedule value = 1 The ventilation rate is calculated based on the pressure difference across the opening calculated from wind and stack pressure effects using equations described in Natural Ventilation Modelling.
SCHEDULED NATURAL VENTILATION

Airflow through external windows, vents, doors and holes are not modelled explicitly with Scheduled natural ventilation because the natural ventilation airflow from outside is explicitly defined using the total natural ventilation flow rate and operation on the HVAC tab. No operation data is entered on the Openings tab for external windows in this case. Note: Natural Ventilation can be overridden to be off on the HVAC tab for both Calculated and Scheduled model options.
Internal Glazing
Openings tab in model data The data under the Internal Glazing header applies to all glazing lying on internal partition walls. You can enter information on: Dimensions Frame Operation
The data is as described previously for External glazing except that shading is not permitted for internal glazing.
Roof Glazing
Openings tab in model data The data under the Roof Glazing header applies to all glazing lying on external roof surfaces. You can enter information on: Dimensions Frame Shading Operation
Note: flat roofs do not have default glazing set up using Roof glazing layout model data. To create openings on a flat roof you should go to the surface level and add them there.
Dimensions
Openings tab in model data under External Glazing and Internal Glazing headers
- 220 -
Dimensions
You can use the Window to wall % (WWR) data and Window height, Window spacing and Sill height to easily change the amount of glazing and its layout on the walls. The way this data is used for each facade type is described below.
Facade types
There are a number of standard facade types: None - there is no glazing. Continuous horizontal - glazing is generated in a continuous horizontal strip using Sill height, Window spacing and Percentage glazing. Fixed height - glazing is generated with a fixed height at the specified Sill height and Window spacing, and width is calculated based on the Percentage glazing. This option uses Window to wall % but prioritises window height. Preferred height - glazing is generated using the window height data and the Percentage glazing, but the Window height may be adjusted to achieve the required Window to wall %. This option uses Window height, Window spacing and Sill height but prioritises Window to wall %. Fixed width and height - windows have fixed width and height. This option uses Window to wall % but prioritises Window Width, Height, Spacing and Sill height. Fill surface (100%) - the entire surface is filled with glazing and there is no frame.
Window to Wall %
Often referred to as the Window to Wall Ratio (WWR) this data can be used to change the amount of glazing for all openings at or below the current level in the building hierarchy. For example changing the WWR at building level changes the size of all windows in the model not overridden by other settings lower in the hierarchy.
Window spacing
The window spacing is the centre to centre spacing between windows, not the gap between windows.
Sill height
This is the height of the base of the window from the base of the block. Note 1: You can control the makeup of the building facades in greater detail by drawing individual windows at the surface level. In this case glazing, vent and door facade layout model data is ignored. Note 2: Flat roofs do not have default glazing set up using Roof glazing layout model data. To create openings on a flat roof you should go to the surface level and add them there. Note 3: Even with the 2 Facade type options that prioritise Window to wall % (Preferred height and Continuous horizontal), when the surface is non-rectangular, the Window to wall % will not be perfectly maintained. For these surfaces, DesignBuilder calculates a rectangle that can accept the windows and starts from one end of the rectangle adding windows using the Window spacing data until no more fit into the rectangle. This results in an approximately correct looking facade but only prioritises Window to wall % in the rectangle, not accounting for the areas outside the bounding rectangle. For relatively large values of Window spacing on non-rectangular surfaces, no glazing may be generated. For example you may find that gable window surfaces have no default windows generated and it is often easiest to draw a window in this case.
REVEAL
The schematics below show how DesignBuilder reveal data is used to describe real glazing systems.
- 221 -
Outside reveal depth

The outside reveal depth gives the extent to which the glazing is offset into the wall. As shown in the above diagram it is the distance from the exterior surface of the wall to the glazing outer surface (in m or ft). Note: EnergyPlus models outside reveals through the co-ordinates of the window, which are offset into the zone so the window and the base surface don't lie on the same plane. DesignBuilder provides window co-ordinates to EnergyPlus in this way and there is no specific data item in the IDF data to define it. Note: In DesignBuilder v3.0 the outside reveal depth is used in EnergyPlus only. In Visualisations and Daylighting calculations the window is assumed to be positioned halfway between inside and outside surfaces.
Inside reveal depth

The inside reveal depth is the distance (in m or ft) from the innermost surface of the window to the interior wall surface as shown in the diagram above.
- 222 -
Roof Shading
Inside sill depth

The inside sill depth is the distance (in m or ft) from the innermost surface of the window to the innermost end of the sill as shown in the diagram above. EnergyPlus window dimensions - technical information The "FenestrationSurface:Detailed" window data written to the EnergyPlus IDF input file will usually have a slightly smaller area to the area defined in DesignBuilder. This is to account for the frame which is included in the window area defined in DesignBuilder but excluded from the IDF window area. In cases where the frame option is switched off in DesignBuilder the frame area in the IDF data will match the area set in DesignBuilder.
Roof Shading
Openings tab in model data under Roof Glazing headers You can select one type of shading for external roof windows: Window shading (blinds, curtains etc walls and roofs).
Frame And Dividers

Openings tab in model data under External Glazing, Internal Glazing and Roof Glazing headers
Frames are applied to all rectangular windows (default and custom) but not to other shaped windows and not when using the Fill surface (100%) facade type. If the glazing does not have a frame or dividers, uncheck the Has a frame? box. If Has a frame? is checked and then you can enter: The construction of the frame and dividers, The number of horizontal dividers and vertical dividers, Frame width and divider with (see diagrams below for definition).
- 223 -
EXTERNAL WINDOWS ON WALLS

For external windows on walls the following dimensions in the direction of the glazing normal can also be entered: Outside reveal depth Inside reveal depth Inside sill depth Outside divider projection Inside divider projection Outside frame projection Inside frame projection Divider glass edge-centre conduction ratio Frame glass edge-centre conduction ratio Divider type
The definition of the above dimensions is shown in the diagrams.
DIVIDERS
The schematics below show how DesignBuilder divider data is used to describe real glazing systems.
- 224 -
Window Shading
Note: If you do not wish to model the shading/reflection effect of the reveal/frame/divider then simply set the projection/depth to zero.
Window Shading
Openings tab in model data under External Glazing, Internal Glazing and Roof Glazing headers To include blinds, transparent insulation or electrochromic glazing check the 'Window shading' checkbox.
Type
Select the Window blind component type. There are 4 categories of window blinds: Slat Shade Transparent insulation Electrochromic switching (if you select a blind of this category the position must be 'Switchable'.
Position
The window shading devices can be positioned in one of four ways: 1-Inside - the window shading devices is positioned inside the zone. 2-Mid-pane - the window shading device is positioned between the inner pane and the second pane. 3-Outside - the shading devices positioned outside. 4-Switchable - select this option for electrochromic glazing in which case the outer pane is switched based on the shading control (below).
Control type
Control data specifies how the shading device is controlled. It determines whether the shading device is on or off. For blinds and shades, when the device is on it is assumed to cover all of the window except its frame; when the device is off it is assumed to cover none of the window (whether on or off the shading device is assumed to cover none of the wall that the window is on). For switchable glazing, on means that the glazing is in the fully-switched state and off means that it is in the unswitched state; for example, for electrochromic glazing, on means the glazing is in its darkest state and "off means it is in its lightest state. The choices for Shading control type are the following. Equivalent EnergyPlus control types are shown in italics. If a setpoint is applicable its units are shown in parentheses. 1-Always on (AlwaysOn) - Shading is always on.
- 225 -
The following six control types are used primarily to reduce zone cooling load due to window solar gain. 2-Daylight (MeetDaylightIlluminanceSetpoint) - Used only with Position = 4-Switchable in zones with daylighting controls. In this case the transmittance green roofof the glazing is adjusted to meet the daylight illuminance set point for the main photoelectric sensor used to control electric lighting according to daylight availability. This type of control assures that there is just enough daylight transmitted through windows with electrochromic shading to meet the daylighting requirements in a zone, and no more, thus reducing the cooling load. Note that the daylight illuminance set point is specified under Environmental Control on the Activity tab and that there is no option to apply separate setpoints for electrochromic shading and electric lighting control. 3-Schedule - Shading operation is defined by a schedule only. 4-Solar (OnIfHighSolarOnWindow) - Shading is on if beam plus diffuse solar radiation incident on the window exceeds SetPoint (W/m2 or BTU/h-ft2). 5-Glare (OnIfHighGlare) - Shading is on if the total daylight glare index at the zones first daylighting sensor from all of the exterior windows in the zone exceeds the maximum glare index specified in the daylighting input for zone. Note: Glare control requires Lighting control to be switched on in the zone. 6-Outside air temp (OnIfHighOutsideAirTemp) - Shading is on if outside air temperature exceeds SetPoint (C or F). 7-Inside air temp (OnIfHighZoneAirTemp) - Shading is on if zone air temperature in the previous time step exceeds SetPoint (C or F) 8-Cooling (OnIfHighZoneCooling) - Shading is on if zone cooling rate in the previous time step is non-zero. The following two control types can be used to reduce zone cooling load. They are applicable to any Shading type but are most appropriate for interior or exterior blinds, interior or exterior shades with low insulating value, or switchable glazing. 9-Day cooling and solar + night (OnNight/OnDayIfCoolingAndHighSolarOnWindow) - Shading is on at night. Shading is on during the day the solar radiation incident on the window exceeds SetPoint (W/m2 or BTU/h-ft2) and if the zone cooling rate in the previous time step is non-zeo. 10-Day cooling and solar (OffNight/OnDayIfCoolingAndHighSolarOnWindow) - Shading is off at night. Shading is on during the day when the solar radiation incident on the window exceeds SetPoint (W/m2 or BTU/h-ft2) and if the zone cooling rate in the previous time step is non-zero. The following three control types can be used to reduce zone heating load during the winter by reducing window conductive heat loss at night and leaving the window unshaded during the day to maximize solar gain. They are applicable to any Shading Type but are most appropriate for interior or exterior shades with high insulating value ("movable insulation"). Night means the sun is down and day means the sun is up. 11-Night outside low air temp (OnNightIfLowOutsideTemp/OffDay) - Shading is on at night if the outside air temperature is less than SetPoint (C or F) and schedule, if specified, allows shading. Shading is off during the day. 12-Night inside low air temp (OnNightIfLowInsideTemp/OffDay) - Shading is on at night if the zone air temperature in the previous time step is less than SetPoint (C or F) and schedule, if specified, allows shading. Shading is off during the day. 13-Night heating (OnNightIfHeating/OffDay) - Shading is on at night if the zone heating rate in the previous time step exceeds SetPoint (W) and schedule, if specified, allows shading. Shading is off during the day. The following two control types can be used to reduce zone heating and cooling load. They are applicable to any Shading type but are most appropriate for translucent interior or exterior shades with high insulating value ("translucent movable insulation").
- 226 -
Window Operation
14-Night outside low air temp + day cooling (OnNightIfLowOutsideTemp/OnDayIfCooling) - Shading is on at night if the outside air temperature is less than Set point (C or F). Shading is on during the day if the zone cooling rate in the previous time step is non-zero. 15-Night heating + day cooling (OnNightIfHeating/OnDayIfCooling) - Shading is on at night if the zone heating rate in the previous time step is non-zero. Shading is on during the day if the zone cooling rate in the previous time step is non-zero.
SetPoint
The setpoint for activating window shading. The units depend on the type of trigger: W/m2 or BTU/h-ft2 for solar-based controls. C or F for temperature-based controls.
Operation schedule
For all shading control options apart from Glare and Always on, the shading can only be active when this schedule value is 1. Select the schedule 'On' if the blind is always activated or if the only control is one of the other listed above.
Window Operation
Openings tab in model data under External Glazing, Internal Glazing and Roof Glazing headers Note this data is only shown if Natural ventilation is activated on the HVAC tab at the current level.
CALCULATED NATURAL VENTILATION

The operation of windows in the EnergyPlus simulation airflow network simulation can be defined by entering data under Operation headers. The data will depend on the Natural ventilation model option set:
% Glazing area opens

The % Glazing area opens data allows you to define the openable window area as a percentage of the total window area. For example enter '20' if 20% of the window area can open. The air flow opening is assumed to be a gap in the side of the window which takes on the full height of the window. Note: % Glazing area opens data does not define the size of the opening for CFD. The size and position of the opening in CFD calculations is defined on the CFD tab. Note: if modulation is switched on (it isn't by default) the glazing opening areas defined here are multiplied by a factor to account for external conditions.
Operation schedule
You can also enter a schedule to define the timing of the window operation. The schedule should have values of 0 and 1 only and intermediate fractional values do not indicate partial opening. The windows are 'open' when:
- 227 -
Tzone_air > Tsetpoint AND Tzone_air > Toutside_air AND the schedule value = 1 The ventilation rate is calculated based on the pressure difference across the opening calculated from wind and stack pressure effects using equations described in Natural Ventilation Modelling.
SCHEDULED NATURAL VENTILATION

Airflow through external windows, vents, doors and holes are not modelled explicitly with Scheduled natural ventilation because the natural ventilation airflow from outside is explicitly defined using the total natural ventilation flow rate and operation on the HVAC tab. No operation data is entered on the Openings tab for external windows in this case. Note: Natural Ventilation can be overridden to be off on the HVAC tab for both Calculated and Scheduled model options.
Doors
Openings tab in model data DesignBuilder doors are opaque and are added to the model by navigating to the appropriate surface and checking the Door fitted option. This adds a single door replacing one of the windows. Alternatively, for more control over the placement position of the doors, you can go to surface level and draw the doors using the Draw Door command. On surfaces where custom openings have been defined, any changes to door layout model data on the Opening tab is ignored. Door Placement Door Operation
Note: if you have drawn custom doors at the surface level then these will be used even if the Doors fitted checkbox is not checked. The Doors fitted checkbox only controls the automatic generation of doors, not their use in the calculations. Note: Doors positioned on external walls only have an effect on airflow in Simulation calculations when the Natural ventilation building model option is set to Calculated. They have no effect on airflow in Heating and Cooling Design calculations. Doors positioned on internal partition walls are used to mix the air between the two adjacent zones when the Scheduled Natural ventilation building model option is set. They also provide an air flow path when the Calculated option is set.
Glazed doors
Exterior doors that have glazing should be modelled using windows. If only a portion of the door is glazed then the door could be modelled as part door and part window.
Door Placement
Openings tab in model data under Doors On surfaces where no custom openings have been defined, you can create doors simply by checking the 'Doors fitted?' options under the External and Internal Doors headers. In this case a single door is positioned on each surface in place of one of the windows in the automatically generated facade layout.
- 228 -
Door Operation
Door Operation
Openings tab in model data under Doors The operation of doors can be defined by entering data under Operation headers: % Area door opens - defines the area of the door which opens relative to the total area to give an approximation of the actual opening size and, % Time door is open - defines the average time the door is in the open position. Accounts for the fact that during occupied periods the door may open and close repeatedly. The average effect
The way this data is used depends on the Natural ventilation model option set:
Calculated
The average door opening size used in the simulation is calculated by multiplying the % Area door opens by the % Time the door is open by the gross door area. A schedule can be applied to control timing of the opening. The ventilation rate through the door opening is calculated based on the wind and stack pressure effects.
Scheduled
External door opening is not modelled explicitly with the Scheduled natural ventilation model data setting. Instead, the total natural ventilation flow rate and operation is defined for each zone on the HVAC tab. No operation data is entered on the Openings tab for external doors. Internal doors are modelled using the EnergyPlus 'Mixing' object which mixes air between the two adjacent zones. DesignBuilder uses a very approximate empirical relationship to calculate the mixing flow: Flow (m3/s) = Door area (m2) * % area door opens * % time door is open * Farea-flow where Farea-flow is a factor used to obtain the mixing flow from the opening area = 0.1. A schedule can be applied to control timing of the mixing flow..
Wind Pressure Coefficients

Openings tab in model data You can enter Wind pressure coefficients (WPC) for wind incidence angles in 45 increments for each surface in the model. DesignBuilder automatically sets up default WPC data as surfaces are created using published Wind Pressure Coefficient template data Note: the wind incidence angles are relative to the surface normal for each surface.
Lighting Model Data

Lighting tab in model data
Templates
You can load generic Lighting data by clicking on the Template option under Lighting Template and then by clicking on the '...' at the right of the line.
- 229 -
When you make a selection from the list of Lighting templates, data from selected template will be loaded to the model. With Early gains, the lighting gains in the space are separated into Task and General lighting. You can also open these headers to enter lighting details where they are different from those loaded from the template: General Lighting Task Lighting Lighting Control Exterior Lighting
When you load lighting data from template, the actual general lighting internal gain is calculated by dividing the W/m2/100 lux data in the template by the required illuminance level as set on the Activity tab. Consequently you should make sure the correct activity data has been loaded in each zone before loading lighting templates. Also, you may need to explicitly load data in each zone by checking each zone in the Target tab of the 'Load data from template' dialog. Lighting data generates simulation data at the Zone level.
See also the Lighting Model Data Tutorial
General Lighting
Lighting tab in model data General lighting accounts for the main lighting in the room. It is assumed to be able to be replaced by daylight through lighting control, if this option is selected.
Lighting energy
There are two ways to define the lighting energy use in a zone depending on the Lighting gain units setting made in model options: 1. 2. Watts per m2 - where the maximum lighting gains are defined as W/m2 independent of the required illuminance level. Watts per m2 per 100lux - where the maximum lighting gains are defined as W/m2/100lux and the actual lighting energy used for the zone in the simulation is based on this value plus floor area and illuminance requirements as follows: Max Lighting power (W) = Lighting energy (W/m2/100lux) x Zone floor area (m2) x Zone Illuminance requirement / 100 Example to calculate W/m2/100lux: For a lighting system emitting 40 W/m2 and providing 500 lux, the value to enter is 40/5 = 8W/m2/100lux For both the above 2 options, the lighting energy should be the maximum electrical power input to lighting in a zone, including ballasts, if present. This value is multiplied by a schedule fraction during the simulation to get the lighting power in a particular time step.
- 230 -
General Lighting
Note that when you load lighting data from template and you are using the W/m2 option, the actual lighting W/m2 gain is calculated by dividing the W/m2/100lux data in the template by the required illuminance level as set on the Activity tab. The electrical input to lighting ultimately appears as heat that contributes to zone loads or to return air heat gains. In EnergyPlus this heat is divided into four different fractions. Three of these are given by the input fields Return Air Fraction, Fraction Radiant and Fraction Visible. A fourth, defined as the fraction of the heat from lights convected to the zone air, is calculated by EnergyPlus as: Convected Fraction = 1.0 (Return Air Fraction + Radiant Fraction + Visible Fraction) You will get an error message if Return Air Fraction + Radiant Fraction + Visible Fraction exceeds 1.0. These fractions depend on the type of lamp and luminaire, whether the luminaire is vented to the return air, etc.
Luminaire type
Select from:
When you select using the drop-down list an appropriate set of defaults for the luminaire type is loaded according to the table below, assuming fluorescent lighting. 2-Surface Mount 0.0 0.72 0.18 0.10 4-Luminous and Recessed Ceiling 0.0 0.37 0.18 0.45 5-Return-air Ducted 0.54 0.18 0.18 0.10
Data Return Air Fraction Radiant Fraction Visible Fraction Convected Fraction
1-Suspended 0.0 0.42 0.18 0.40
3-Recessed 0.0 0.37 0.18 0.45
Approximate values of Return Air Fraction, Radiant Fraction and Visible Fraction for overhead fluorescent lighting for different luminaire configurations. These values assume that no light heat goes into an adjacent zone. Source: Lighting Handbook: Reference & Application, 8th Edition, Illuminating Engineering Society of North America, New York, 1993, p. 355.
Return air fraction

For Return Air Ducted luminaires this is the fraction of the heat from lights that is convected out of the room and into the zone return air (normally into a return plenum). If the return air flow is zero or the zone has no return air
- 231 -
system, the program will put this fraction into the zone air. Return Air Fraction is only visible on the screen for 5Return-air ducted luminaires.
Radiant fraction
The fraction of heat from lights that goes into the zone as long-wave (thermal) radiation. The program calculates how much of this radiation is absorbed by the inside surfaces of the zone according the area times thermal absorptance product of these surfaces.
Fraction visible
The fraction of heat from lights that goes into the zone as visible (short-wave) radiation. The program calculates how much of this radiation is absorbed by the inside surfaces of the zone according the area times solar absorptance product of these surfaces. Note: selecting an option from the Luminaire type drop-down list loads default Return Air Fraction, Radiant Fraction and Visible Fraction data from the table above.
Fraction convected
The fraction of the heat from lights convected to the zone air is calculated from: Fraction convected = 1.0 (Return Air Fraction + Fraction Radiant + Fraction Visible) You will get an error message if Return Air Fraction + Fraction Radiant + Fraction Visible exceeds 1.0. This data is provided on screen for information purposes.
Operation
If 'Internal gains operate with occupancy' under model options is not set General lighting has a specific operation schedule set under General Lighting, otherwise these gains are synchronised with occupancy.
Task And Display Lighting

Lighting tab in model data Task and Display Lighting accounts for lighting used for specific tasks (e.g. desk lamps) or for displaying items (e.g. display lighting for goods in shops). Note: Task and Display Lighting is not offset by lighting control. The following other data is assumed: Data Radiant fraction Visible fraction Return air fraction Value 0.42 0.18 0
Internal gain
Note that when you load lighting data from template, the actual lighting casual gain is calculated by dividing the W/m2/100 lux data in the template by the required illuminance level as set on the Activity tab.
- 232 -
Lighting Control
Operation
If 'Internal gains operate with occupancy' under model options is not set Task lighting has a specific operation schedule set under Task Lighting, otherwise these gains are synchronised with occupancy.
Lighting Control
Lighting tab in model data You can control the electric lights according to the availability of natural daylight. When Lighting control is switched on, illuminance levels are calculated at every time step during the simulation and then used to determine how much the electric lighting can be reduced. The daylight illuminance level in a zone depends on many factors, including sky condition, sun position, photocell sensor positions, location, size, and glass transmittance of windows, window shades and reflectance of interior surfaces. Reduction of electric lighting depends on daylight illuminance level, illuminance set point, fraction of zone controlled and type of lighting control. You should not use daylight control in zones without any windows - this will generate errors preventing calculations from running. You should therefore use the building and block level lighting control setting with care, checking for any zones without windows and switching off lighting control at the zone level. Lighting control is able to control General lighting but not Task and display lighting. If no general lighting is specified then lighting control won't be applied.
LIGHTING AREAS
When lighting control is switched on, by default all of the lights in the zone are controlled by the first (main) lighting sensor and % Zone Controlled by Lighting Area 1 has value 100%. Some larger spaces may have 2 Lighting Areas, each area having its own lighting sensor and covering its own area of the zone. The area is not defined geometrically in DesignBuilder - it simply reflects the fraction of the total General overhead electric lighting that can be dimmed by its lighting sensor. You may wish to use 2 Lighting Areas for these situations: 1. A large zone may need more than one sensor if the output from main sensor does not represent the daylight available in other parts of the zone. For example a zone having facades in both South and East directions would need 2 sensors (and 2 Lighting Areas), one on each facade. The zone has 2 different activity areas which have been lumped into a single zone for convenience. The 2 activities have different visual illuminance requirements and the Lighting Areas for both can benefit from daylighting through daylighting control. An example would be a zone having both office and recreational space. The office space may have a lighting requirement of 500 lux and the recreational space may need 300 lux.
2.
Note 1: if the zone has a different sensor for the back half (for example) you should check the Second light sensor option. Note 2: if the zone has perimeter and core areas, perimeter lights having daylight control and core lights not, then you only need to use a single lighting sensor. The fact that the core lights are not controlled can be modelled using % Zone Controlled by Lighting Area 1. If 60% of the lights in the zone are located in the core zone and do not have daylight control then set % Zone Controlled by Lighting Area 1 to 40. Perimeter Area A typical perimeter area would be the areas of the zone that are close to a window. By convention perimeter areas are defined as the area within a fixed distance from a normal to the perimeter. In the UK NCM the fixed distance is 6m.
- 233 -
If you wish to create a separate thermal zone to model the different lighting and solar conditions in the perimeter area, you can use the Offset snap option to draw Virtual partitions. Daylight illuminance on the 'working plane' is calculated for up to two locations in each zone during the simulation and illuminance setpoints are maintained where necessary by electric lighting. The sensor is always located in the working plane which, by default, is 0.8m above the floor. By default, when lighting control is switched on, a single photo sensor monitors the daylight illuminance at the first sensor location and controls the lights for the whole of the zone. You can however set up 2 Lighting Areas in each zone, by checking the Second lighting area check box. In this case you can set a target illuminance for the second lighting area separately and also define the percentage of the zone covered by Lighting Area 2. Note 1: the floor area covered by the 2 sensors does not need to add to 100%. The lights in the remaining floor area operate without daylight control. Note 2: the target illuminance for Lighting Area 1 is set on the Activity tab under Environmental Control. If there is only one lighting area then a percentage equal to 100 - (%Zone covered by Lighting Area 1) is assumed to have no lighting control..
% Zone Controlled by Lighting Area 2

The fraction of the zone floor-area whose electric lighting is controlled by the daylight illuminance on the second sensor. This data is required if Lighting Area 2 is being used. A percentage equal to 100 [%Zone Controlled by Lighting Area 1] - [%Zone Controlled by Lighting Area 2] is assumed to have no lighting control (i.e. in this uncontrolled area of the space, the lights operate purely according to the schedule without any dimming/switching).
PROCEDURE
The procedure for introducing the lighting control is: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check the Lighting Control On checkbox (at building level if all zones are to have lighting control). Select the type of control as described below. Position the first sensor in each zone having lighting control. The z-position is set by the Working plane height on the Advanced tab of the Model options dialog. Set the % Zone covered by Lighting Area 1. If all the lights in the zone are in Lighting Area 1 (i.e. they are controlled by the 1st (main) lighting sensor then enter 100%. If there are two lighting areas then position the second sensor. Set the % Zone covered by Lighting Area 2. If all the lights in the zone are in Lighting Area 2 (i.e. they are controlled by the 2nd lighting sensor) then enter 100 - %Zone covered by Lighting Area 1.
Note: by default the main lighting sensor is positioned in the geometric centre of the zone. It is important that you check the position of all lighting sensors to obtain accurate results. For example, if the lighting sensor is positioned right next to a window receiving large amounts of daylight, the lighting sensor will signal 'enough daylight' even if the rest of the zone is only dimly lit and electric lighting energy will be under-estimated (daylight savings overestimated).
- 234 -
Lighting Control
Continuous Control
With Continuous control, the overhead lights dim continuously and linearly from maximum electric power, maximum light output to minimum electric power, minimum light output as the daylight illuminance increases. The lights stay at the minimum point with further increase in the daylight illuminance.
The Minimum input power fraction for Continuous control type is the lowest power the lighting system can dim down to, expressed as a fraction of maximum input power. For Continuous/off lighting control, this is the power fraction reached just before the lights switch off completely. The Minimum output fraction for Continuous control type, is the lowest lighting output the lighting system can dim down to, expressed as a fraction of maximum light output. This is the fractional light output that the system produces at minimum input power. For Continuous/off lighting control, this is the power fraction reached just before the lights switch off completely. Note: Continuous control provides an idealised lighting control mechanism which can be useful for calculating upper limits on the potential for savings using natural daylight.
Continuous/Off Control
Continuous/off control is the same as continuous control except that the lights switch off completely when the minimum dimming point is reached.
Stepped Control
Stepped control allows you to switch lighting on/off according to the availability of natural daylight in discrete steps. Whereas the Continuous control described above provides precisely controlled illuminance by dimming the lights, the stepped control models blocks of lights switching on/off according to the electric lighting requirement. The electric power input and light output vary in discreet, equally spaced steps. The number of steps can be set. Example of a Stepped Lighting Control System with 3 Steps: Fraction of lights Daylight illuminance that are on 0-200 1.0 200-400 2/3 400-600 1/3 600 and above 0.0 Graphical representation of above example:
- 235 -
See also EnergyPlus Daylight Calculations.
GLARE Maximum allowable glare index

If a daylit zone has windows with Window shading devices, the shades will be deployed if the daylight glare at sensor 1 exceeds the value of Maximum allowable glare index. To get this type of glare control you have to specify Shading control type as 5-Glare for one or more windows in the zone (see Window Shading Control). Recommended Values of Maximum Allowable Discomfort Glare Index: Maximum Allowable Activity or zone type Discomfort Glare Index* Art Galleries 16 Factories Rough work 28 Engine assembly 26 Fine assembly 24 Instrument assembly 22 Hospital wards 18 Laboratories 22 Museums 20 Offices 22 School classrooms 20 *Source EnergyPlus documentation
View angle relative to y-axis

Daylight glare from a window depends on occupant view direction. It is highest when you look directly at a window and decreases as you look away from a window. This field specifies the view direction for calculating glare. It is the angle, measured clockwise in the horizontal plane, between the positive y-axis and the occupant view direction, i.e. it is the bearing of the persons line of sight. For example, with Site orientation = 0, in the Northern Hemisphere, 90 = Facing East, 180 = Facing South etc).
ALGORITHMS
By default, DesignBuilder uses the EnergyPlus Daylighting:Detailed object to model the control of electric lighting according to daylight illumination levels. You can find more information on the algorithms used in the EnergyPlus Daylight Calculations section.
- 236 -
Exterior Lighting
OUTPUT
For any zone simulated with daylighting controls, an illuminance map can be output with a 10 x 10 grid of additional daylighting reference points. The resulting map is output as a comma delimited text file called eplusmap.csv in the EnergyPlus folder. This file can be imported into a spreadsheet program for rapid visualisation of the daylighting illuminance patterns in a zone. To generate this file, at least one zone must have daylight control and the Daylight map output selection on the Output tab of the Simulation output options dialog must be made.
Exterior Lighting
Lighting tab in model data Exterior lighting allows you to account for the energy consumption of lights used to illuminate the exterior of the building. Options are available for scheduled operation and nighttime switching.
Operation schedule
The schedule allows the exterior lights consumption to be operationally different, hour to hour as well as seasonally. Fractional values in the basic schedule are applied to the design level data below.
Design level
This data is normally used to represent the maximum electrical input to exterior lighting fixtures that is then multiplied by a schedule fraction (see previous field). Alternatively, the lighting design level could be a diversity factor applied to a schedule of real numbers.
Control Option
This data is used to determine how the exterior lights are controlled. There are currently two options: Schedule only where the exterior lights always follow the operation schedule. Schedule + override off on daytime where the exterior lights will not run when the sun is up, no matter what the schedule indicates. Using this option makes it simple to model exterior lights that are controlled by a photocell or other controller that ensures that outdoor lights will not run during the daytime. However, this control works off of the position of the sun and therefore does not operate exactly like a photocell. During the night, the schedule values are still applied in the usual way.
HVAC Model Data

HVAC tab in model data
Templates
You can load generic HVAC data by clicking on the Template option under HVAC Template and then by clicking on the '...' at the right of the line. When you make a selection from the list of HVAC templates, data from selected template will be loaded to the model. The rest of this HVAC section is split into 3 main sections for each of the 3 HVAC model options: Simple HVAC Compact HVAC Detailed HVAC
- 237 -
Also independent of HVAC model options: Natural Ventilation Air Temperature Distribution
See also the HVAC Model Data Tutorial
Simple HVAC
Simple HVAC is suitable for use at early design stages or for other analyses where detailed treatment of heating, cooling and mechanical ventilation systems is required. You can also open headers to enter HVAC details where they are different from those loaded from the template: Auxiliary Energy Mechanical Ventilation Fans Outside Air Heating Cooling
See Simple HVAC Tutorial
Auxiliary Energy
HVAC tab in model data - Simple HVAC When using Simple HVAC, this data is used to calculate the electric energy consumption due to fans and pumps, control gear and any other HVAC-related equipment not accounted for elsewhere. The data used for this calculation depends on the Simple HVAC Auxiliary model options setting.
NCM SETTING
When the NCM Simple HVAC auxiliary option is set, only one data item is required to define the auxiliary energy consumption. This data is used at the zone level and the auxiliary energy consumption for the building is displayed at building level in the Simulation results as System Misc energy.
Auxiliary energy
The total annual Auxiliary energy consumption can be entered as kWh/m2 (SI units) or Btu/ft2 (IP units). Auxiliary energy accounts for any additional energy consumption due to fans, pumps, control gear etc. It is specified per floor area and is modelled as being consumed 24/7 during the simulation. Note that when using the NCM option, auxiliary energy consumption will not vary according to mechanical ventilation flow rates or any other settings - it is a very basic way to account for auxiliary energy consumption. The default auxiliary energy data provided in the HVAC templates is based on data published in the UK National Calculation Methodology (NCM). The energy consumption related to Auxiliary energy is shown at building level in the results screen.
- 238 -
Mechanical Ventilation
SEPARATE FANS AND PUMPS SETTING

When the Separate fans and pumps Simple HVAC auxiliary option is set, the auxiliary energy calculations are carried out separately for fans and pumps and their respective energy consumption values are displayed separately in the simulation results. Fan energy is calculated based on fan pressure rise and efficiency values as defined under Mechanical ventilation > Fans. The fan energy consumption data is displayed in simulation results as Fan energy and will depend on the actual mechanical ventilation flow rates applied in the simulation. Pump, control and any other electrical energy associated with the HVAC system is calculated using a power density value (W/m2 or W/ft2) plus a schedule to define time/seasonal variations.
Pump etc energy

The pump energy can be defined as a power density (W/m2 or W/ft2) and this is multiplied by the value of the associated schedule (below) to calculate the pump energy for each zone at any time in the simulation. The data is used at the zone level and the total energy consumption for the building is displayed at building level in the Simulation results as Pump energy.
Schedule
Select the schedule defining the time variation of the pump energy consumption.
Mechanical Ventilation
HVAC tab in model data - Simple HVAC Check the mechanical ventilation checkbox to indicate that outside air and/or re-circulated air is delivered to the zone. You can use this setting to define mechanical ventilation and air delivered through centrally ducted air conditioning systems. Simple and Compact HVAC options share many of the same data fields. Data which applies only to Compact systems is indicated in the text below. Note that Mechanical Ventilation data refers to the fan-powered air delivery through the main HVAC system and not a separate mechanical ventilation system. See also: Fans Outside Air
Fans
HVAC tab in model data under Mechanical Ventilation header - Simple HVAC
Fan Type
When using Simple HVAC, enter the type of fan. Select from: 1-Intake - fan blows outside air into the zone and the zone receives heat from the fan if Fan in air (below) >0 2-Exhaust - fan exhausts air from the zone. In this case there is no fan heat pickup. It is assumed that makeup air comes from outside.
- 239 -
Note that in Simple HVAC the Auxiliary energy data accounts for all electric fan and pump distribution energy plus controls and any other electrical energy use associated with HVAC that is not already accounted for elsewhere.
Fan pressure rise

Enter the pressure rise at full flow and standard conditions. Standard conditions are considered 20C at sea level, 101325 Pa. You can calculate the approximate fan pressure rise from Specific Fan Power (SFP) data using: Delta P = 1000 * SFP * Fan total efficiency Annex E of ISO 5801 shows that by rearranging the formula it can be derived that the SFP is a function of fan pressure divided by the efficiency of the fan system. Therefore the SFP will increase or decrease with a respective increase or decrease in the system pressure. The SFP is a function of the volume flow of the fan and the electrical power input and is quoted for a particular flow rate; SFP = Pe/ V Where: V is volume flow (l/s) Peis electrical power input (W) to the fan system or complete air movement installation [Reference FMA, UK, 2006] Typical values for various system types are shown in the table below. System Type Central mechanical ventilation including heating, cooling and heat recovery Central mechanical ventilation including heating and cooling All other systems Local ventilation units within the local area, such as window/wall/roof units, serving one room/area Local ventilation units remote from the local area, such as ceiling void or roof mounted units, serving one room/area Fan coil units (rating weighted average) Source ESTA: http://www.esta.org.uk/ Specific Fan Power (W/l-s) 2.5 2.0 1.8 0.5
1.2
0.8
Fan total efficiency (%)

Enter the product of the fan motor and impeller efficiency of the supply fan. This is the ratio of the power delivered to the air to the electrical input power at maximum flow expressed as a percentage. The motor efficiency is the power delivered to the shaft divided by the electrical power input to the motor. The fan efficiency is power
- 240 -
Fans
delivered to the air divided by the shaft power. The power delivered to the fluid is the mass flow rate of the air multiplied by the pressure rise divided by the air density. Must be greater than 0 and less than or equal to 100.
Fan motor in air (%)

Enter the percentage of the motor heat that is added to the air stream. A value of 0 means that the motor is completely outside the air stream. A value of 100 means that all of the motor heat will go into the air stream and act to cause a temperature rise. Must be between 0 and 100.
Fan placement
Enter the supply fan placement type. There are two choices: 1-Draw through models a system where the supply air fan is after the cooling and heating coils. 2-Blow through where the supply air fan is before the cooling and heating coils.
The default is 1-Draw through.
Fan part-load power coefficients

Select the set of generic pre-defined coefficients to use for the supply fan part-load power consumption. Choices are: Inlet Vane Dampers Outlet Dampers Variable Speed Motor ASHRAE 90.1-2004 Appendix G
The resulting power curves are shown in the graph below. The ASHRAE 90.1-2004 Appendix G coefficients are from TABLE G3.1.3.15, Method 2. The other sets of coefficients are from the EnergyPlus Input Output Reference, Fan Coefficient Values table.
- 241 -
Fan power and temperature pick up calculations

The calculations for fan power and airflow temperature pick up are detailed in the EnergyPlus Engineering reference. A summary is provided below: Total Fan Power = Mass flow rate. DeltaP / (Total fan efficiency . Air density) Shaft Fan Power = Motor efficiency . Total Fan Power Heat to air = Shaft Fan Power + (Total Fan Power - Shaft Fan Power) . Motor in air fraction
Simple HVAC Outsde Air

HVAC tab in model data under Mechanical Ventilation header - Simple HVAC You can set the amount, timing and control of outside air delivery through the HVAC air distribution system on the HVAC tab. Outside air requirement data is set at the zone level on the HVAC tab for all HVAC configurations and options. The Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltrationdata can displayed on the Heating design, Cooling design and Simulation screens when you select 1-All or 3-Comfort data. This is the sum of fresh air delivered through the HVAC system, infiltration and natural ventilation outside airflow in air changes per hour (ac/h) and when used together with the other environmental output it can be very useful in checking for occupant discomfort.
Outside air definition method

Defines the method used to set the maximum outside air delivery rate. The actual outside air flow rate during simulation is modified by the Minimum AHU outside air requirement schedule described below. The options are:
- 242 -
Simple HVAC Outsde Air
1-By zone - enter the zone outside air delivery rate in air changes per hour in the control directly below. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated from the ac/h data using: m3/s = ac/h x ZoneVolume / 3600 where ZoneVolume is the actual air volume of the space calculated according to Model options for excluding floor/ceiling constructions. Note: this zone volume may be slightly different from the value used for the purposes of calculating air flow rates for infiltration which uses the total zone volume.
2-Min fresh air (Per person) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air requirements per person as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as: m3/s = MinFreshAir x NumberPeople / 1000 NumberPeople = Occupancy density (people / m2) * Zone floor area (m2). MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per person (l/s/person or CFM).
3-Min fresh air (Per area) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air requirements as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as: m3/s = l/s-m2 x ZoneFloorArea / 1000 where ZoneFloorArea is the actual floor area of the space. MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per floor area (l/s-m2 or CFM/ft2).
4-Min fresh air (Sum per person + per area) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air requirements for both as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as: m3/s = (l/s-m2 x ZoneFloorArea + MinFreshAir x NumberPeople)/ 1000 where ZoneFloorArea is the actual floor area of the space. MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per floor area (l/s-m2 or CFM/ft2). NumberPeople = Occupancy density (people / m2) * Zone floor area (m2). MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per person (l/s/person or CFM).
5-Min fresh air (Max per person and per area) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air requirements for both as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as: m3/s = Maximum of (l/s-m2 x ZoneFloorArea / 1000) and (MinFreshAir x NumberPeople/ 1000) where ZoneFloorArea is the actual floor area of the space. MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per floor area (l/s-m2 or CFM/ft2). NumberPeople = Occupancy density (people / m2) * Zone floor area (m2). MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per person (l/s/person or CFM).
Outside air flow rate

Enter the minimum zone outside air delivery rate in air changes per hour when Outside air definition method (above) is 1-By zone.
- 243 -
The actual minimum amount of outside air entering the AHU can be modified by the Minimum AHU outside air requirement schedule (below). Note however that this value is used unmodified by any schedules for Heating design calculations when mechanical ventilation is switched on and included in the analysis.
Heating
HVAC tab in model data - Simple HVAC The data required to define the heating system will depend on whether the HVAC model option is set to Simple or Compact and if set to Compact the type of Compact HVAC system selected.
HEATING CAPACITY
The heating capacity can either be entered by hand or can be Autosized using the Heating Design Calculations. By default, if immediately prior to a Simulation the heating capacity has not been entered (neither by hand nor from a previous Heating design calculation) then a Heating design autosizing simulation is started to calculate the capacity. The Plant sizing building model option controls the way this works. You can change heating capacities by hand if you wish but you should bear in mind that, by default, if Model Options change, all heating and cooling capacities are reset to zero. Set the Plant sizing model option to '2Manual' to avoid this happening. If the HVAC system is Unitary multizone then the central heating coil capacity is calculated as the sum of the individual zone heating energy requirements.
HEATING PLANT Heating fuel

Select the type of fuel used to generate the heating energy - choose from: Interface Fuel Name 1-Electricity from grid 2-Natural Gas 3-Oil 4-Coal 5-LPG 6-Biogas 7-Anthracite 8-Smokeless Fuel (inc Coke) 9-Dual Fuel Appliances (Mineral + Wood) 10-Biomass 11-Waste Heat Fuel in results Electricity Gas Oil Solid fuel Bottled gas Bottled gas Solid fuel Solid fuel Other Other Other
You should select 1-Electricity from grid you wish the results displayed in DesignBuilder to agree with those calculated by EnergyPlus directly for District heating and displayed on the Summary tab of the Simulation screen.
Heating system CoP

The heating system Coefficient of Performance is used to calculate the fuel consumption required to meet heating demand. The value represents the total seasonal efficiency of the entire heating system and should include the
- 244 -
Heating
effect of all energy consumption associated with building heating such as any boiler fan energy, boiler inefficiency, control equipment etc. It does not include energy involved in air or water distribution (fans or pumps) or control gear, which is accounted for in the Auxiliary energy. Heating system CoP data is specified by zone so you can model different heating efficiencies in each zone. But generally you should access this data from the building level and allow zones to take on building default.
LOCAL HEATING UNITS Heating type

There are currently two heating types: 1-Convective - the space is heated by an air system and controlled to the air temperature set point. The system is modelled using EnergyPlus 'purchased air'. 2-Radiative/convective units - used for modelling general systems where a radiant heat is a factor. Allows modelling of convective systems, hot water radiator systems, underfloor heating systems, baseboard heating etc. using EnergyPlus 'High Temp Radiant System'.
1-CONVECTIVE
When using Simple HVAC you can specify the heating supply air conditions of the air.
Supply air delivery temperature

The constant dry-bulb air temperature of the air supplied for heating the zone.
Supply air humidity ratio

The constant humidity ratio (mass of water per mass of dry air) of the warm supply air to be delivered when heating is required. The default humidity ratio is 0.01. You should be careful to enter a value that is a valid condition, i.e. it is under the 100% saturation line on the Psychrometric Chart.
2-RADIANT/CONVECTIVE UNITS
When the Simple HVAC model option is set you can model radiant heating systems. Set the heating system type as '2-Radiant/convective units' (above) and enter the heating radiant fraction, control method and the way radiant heat is distributed through the space. Warning: EnergyPlus 3.1 no longer supports this radiant/convective option combined with Simple HVAC cooling systems so if you need radiant heating and cooling then you should switch to Compact HVAC and use a Unitary single system with hot-water radiator/baseboard heating.
Heating radiant fraction

The fraction of the power input to the radiant heater that is actually radiant heat transfer. The fraction should be between 0 and 1. In conjunction with the Radiant distribution option, it defines the breakdown of how the power input to the heater is distributed to the rest of the zone.
Control method
Radiant units can be controlled in one of three ways: 1-MAT - control the room mean air temperature to the heating setpoint temperature specified on the Activity tab. 2-Operative - control the room operative temperature (MAT+MRT) / 2 to the heating setpoint temperature specified on the Activity tab.
- 245 -
3-MRT - control the room mean radiant temperature to the heating setpoint temperature specified on the Activity tab.
This option overrides the overall simulation control radiant fraction option. Note: Operative control can be useful for calculating realistic heating energy because heating systems controlled using the operative temperature continue to heat the building until comfort conditions are met (just that they probably are in the real building). Also, the default heating temperature set points from the Activity templates are derived from sources quoting Operative temperatures. With MAT control the room air temperature is controlled to the heating set point temperature, which (depending on internal radiant temperatures) may not necessarily be comfortable.
Radiant distribution
The Radiant distribution allows you to control how the radiant heat from the Radiant unit is distributed around the room. Options are: 1-Uniform - radiant heat is distributed uniformly around the zone. 2-Floor - heat is distributed uniformly across all floors in the zone. Use this for modelling floor heating systems. 3-Wall - heat is distributed uniformly across all walls in the zone. Use this for modelling hot water radiators and other radiant heaters close to wall surfaces. Technical Note DesignBuilder uses the EnergyPlus 'HIGH TEMP RADIANT SYSTEM' to model radiant heating systems when in Simple HVAC mode. This system type is intended for modelling 'high-temperature' radiant sources but it can equally well be used for low temperature radiant sources.
Note: for all systems, heating setpoint temperatures are defined on the Activity tab.
OPERATION Heating operation schedule

This schedule data is used in conjunction with the heating setpoint temperatures on the Activity tab to define the time-varying heating setpoint schedule in the zone. The operation schedule defines the times when full and setback setpoints should be met and the setpoint data on the Activity tab define the actual setpoint values. See Defining setpoint temperature schedules for more on this. Note: the zone heating operation schedule is also used in Detailed HVAC with the default 1-Simple HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data setting.
Cooling
HVAC tab in model data - Simple HVAC You can enter details on the cooling system including the maximum capacity (at zone level).
Cooling capacity
The Cooling capacity can either be entered by hand or can be Autosized using the Cooling Design Calculations. If, immediately prior to a Simulation the Cooling capacity has not been entered (neither by hand nor from a
- 246 -
Cooling
previous Cooling Design Calculation) then a Cooling design autosizing simulation is started to calculate the capacity. The Plant sizing building model option controls the way this works. You can change cooling capacities by hand if you wish but you should bear in mind that, by default, if Model Options change, all heating and cooling capacities are reset to zero. Set the Plant sizing model option to '2Manual' to avoid this happening.
SUPPLY AIR CONDITIONS

When using Simple HVAC you can specify the cooling supply air conditions of the air. This data is used for simulations only - cooling design calculations have a specific equivalent setting on the Cooling design calculation options .

The constant dry-bulb air temperature of the air supplied for cooling the zone.

The constant humidity ratio (mass of water per mass of dry air) of the cold supply air to be delivered when cooling is required. The default humidity ratio is 0.009. You should be careful to enter a value that is a valid condition, i.e. it is under the 100% saturation line on the Psychrometric Chart.
COOLING PLANT Cooling fuel

Select the type of fuel used to generate the cooling energy - choose from: Interface Fuel Name 1-Electricity from grid 2-Natural Gas 3-Oil 4-Coal 5-LPG 6-Biogas 7-Anthracite 8-Smokeless Fuel (inc Coke) 9-Dual Fuel Appliances (Mineral + Wood) 10-Biomass 11-Waste Heat Fuel in results Electricity Gas Oil Solid fuel Bottled gas Bottled gas Solid fuel Solid fuel Other Other Other
You should select 1-Electricity from grid you wish the results displayed in DesignBuilder to agree with those calculated by EnergyPlus directly for District cooling and displayed on the Summary tab of the Simulation screen.
Cooling system CoP

The cooling system coefficient of performance is used to calculate the fuel consumption required to meet cooling demand. The value represents the total seasonal efficiency of the entire cooling system and should include the effect of all energy consumption associated with building cooling such as fan and pump energy, chiller inefficiency, control equipment etc. Cooling system CoP data is specified by zone so you can model different cooling efficiencies in each zone. But generally you should access this data from the building level and allow zones to take on building default. Note: for all systems, cooling setpoint temperatures are defined on the Activity tab.
- 247 -
OPERATION Cooling operation schedule

This schedule data is used in conjunction with the cooling setpoint temperatures on the Activity tab to define the time-varying cooling setpoint schedule in the zone. The operation schedule defines the times when full and setback setpoints should be met and the setpoint data on the Activity tab define the actual setpoint values. See Defining setpoint temperature schedules for more on this. Note: the zone cooling operation schedule is also used in Detailed HVAC with the default 1-Simple HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data setting.
Compact HVAC
Compact HVAC systems are used when the HVAC model option is set to Compact and is a powerful entry way into EnergyPlus HVAC modelling allowing you to model HVAC systems in quite some detail without the need to draw an air flow network and deal with the complexities of control systems and node connections. You can model many common HVAC systems including VAV with terminal reheat, VAV with PIU, Constant volume, Fan coil units, Packaged DX units and Mechanical ventilation. Compact HVAC is intermediate in detail between the Simple and Detailed HVAC model options. The heating/cooling systems defined in DesignBuilder using Compact HVAC descriptions are automatically expanded into detailed HVAC definitions behind the scenes and modelled in EnergyPlus including components such as boiler, chiller, coils, pump, cooling tower and fan part-load characteristics. These Compact HVAC systems are available in DesignBuilder: EnergyPlus simulations are carried out on the detailed HVAC component models generated by DesignBuilder from the compact descriptions. When the HVAC model option is set to Compact, there are 5 HVAC system types: Fan Coil Units_Ref-1142106010 Unitary single zone Unitary multizone VAV CAV
System type
When using Compact HVAC data, the HVAC Type is displayed beneath the Template. This cannot be edited directly - if you want to choose a different HVAC system type you should do this by selecting an appropriate template.
System availability
When using Compact HVAC data, the system availability schedule can be defined to control the overall operation of the HVAC system, including heating, cooling and ventilation. This schedule is used at the building level for 2Unitary multizone, 3-VAV and 5-CAV systems and at the zone level for 1-Unitary single zone and 5-Fan coil.
System availability schedule

The System availability schedule defines the operation of the air system fans. For Compact Unitary systems the Fan operation mode can be set to 2-Cycling in which case air distribution only occurs when there is heating or cooling demand.
- 248 -
Fan Coil Units
Rules
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Only one CAV, VAV or Unitary multizone system can be defined per building. If you select Unitary multizone, CAV or VAV at zone level, then the same selection must be made at building level. You can enter Fan coil and Unitary single zone systems in any zone without concern for the selection at building level. Pumps are modelled using typical default data. Unitary multizone and Fan coil units cannot be used in same building. Fan coil units are incompatible with Calculated natural ventilation.
HVAC Components
While most Compact HVAC data is entered directly on the HVAC model data tab, the following HVAC components are used in Compact HVAC: Boilers Chillers Performance Curves
Fan Coil Units

HVAC tab in model data - Compact HVAC The Fan coil unit Compact HVAC option simulates a 4 pipe fan coil unit with hot water heating coil, chilled water cooling coil, and an outside air mixer. The fan coil units are zone equipment units which are assembled from other components. Fan coils contain an outdoor air mixer, a fan, a simple heating coil and a cooling coil. The fan coil unit is connected to a hot water loop (demand side) through its hot water coil and to a chilled water loop (demand side) through its cooling coil. The unit is controlled to meet the zone (remaining) heating or cooling demand. If there is a heating demand, the cooling coil is off and the hot water flow through the heating coil is throttled to meet the demand. If there is a cooling demand from the zone, the hot water coil is off and the chilled water flow through the cooling coil is throttled to meet the load. You can model Fan coil unit systems with or without outside air. If you include Mechanical ventilation with your Fan coil unit system then heating and cooling will only operate when the Mechanical ventilation operation schedule is on. If you do not want to include outside air in your system, you should uncheck the Mechanical ventilation 'On' check box. In this case heating/cooling availability is determined entirely from the heating/cooling operation schedules under the Heating and Cooling headers. Unlike the Unitary multizone and CAV and VAV Compact HVAC types, Fan coil unit zone systems take all their data from the zone level.
- 249 -
Note 1: EnergyPlus fan coil supply fans run continuously at full speed whenever the availability schedules are > 0 so fan coil outside air flow can be 'fully on' or 'fully off' but cannot reduce to fractional values in between. You may therefore get higher outside air delivery rates than with other
System availability
The system availability schedule can be defined to control the overall operation of the HVAC system, including heating, cooling and ventilation. This schedule is used at the zone level for Fan coil units. You can also open headers to enter HVAC details where they are different from those loaded from the template: FCU Ventilation FCU Heating FCU Cooling
FCU Ventilation
HVAC tab in model data under Mechanical Ventilation header - Compact HVAC You can set the amount, timing and control of outside air delivery through the HVAC air distribution system on the HVAC tab. Outside air requirement data is set at the zone level on the HVAC tab for all HVAC configurations and options.
The Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltrationdata can displayed on the Heating design, Cooling design and Simulation screens when you select 1-All or 3-Comfort data. This is the sum of fresh air delivered through the HVAC system, infiltration and natural ventilation outside airflow in air changes per hour (ac/h) and when used together with the other environmental output it can be very useful in checking for occupant discomfort.

Defines the method used to set the maximum outside air delivery rate. The actual outside air flow rate during simulation is modified by the Minimum AHU outside air requirement schedule described below. The options are: 1-By zone - enter the zone outside air delivery rate in air changes per hour in the control directly below. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated from the ac/h data using:
- 250 -
FCU Ventilation
m3/s = ac/h x ZoneVolume / 3600 where ZoneVolume is the actual air volume of the space calculated according to Model options for excluding floor/ceiling constructions. Note: this zone volume may be slightly different from the value used for the purposes of calculating air flow rates for infiltration which uses the total zone volume. 2-Min fresh air (Per person) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air requirements per person as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as: m3/s = MinFreshAir x NumberPeople / 1000 NumberPeople = Occupancy density (people / m2) * Zone floor area (m2). MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per person (l/s/person or CFM). 3-Min fresh air (Per area) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air requirements as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as: m3/s = l/s-m2 x ZoneFloorArea / 1000 where ZoneFloorArea is the actual floor area of the space. MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per floor area (l/s-m2 or CFM/ft2). 4-Min fresh air (Sum per person + per area) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air requirements for both as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as: m3/s = (l/s-m2 x ZoneFloorArea + MinFreshAir x NumberPeople)/ 1000 where ZoneFloorArea is the actual floor area of the space. MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per floor area (l/s-m2 or CFM/ft2). NumberPeople = Occupancy density (people / m2) * Zone floor area (m2). MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per person (l/s/person or CFM). 5-Min fresh air (Max per person and per area) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air requirements for both as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as: m3/s = Maximum of (l/s-m2 x ZoneFloorArea / 1000) and (MinFreshAir x NumberPeople/ 1000) where ZoneFloorArea is the actual floor area of the space. MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per floor area (l/s-m2 or CFM/ft2). NumberPeople = Occupancy density (people / m2) * Zone floor area (m2). MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per person (l/s/person or CFM).

Enter the minimum zone outside air delivery rate in air changes per hour when Outside air definition method (above) is 1-By zone. The actual minimum amount of outside air entering the AHU can be modified by the Minimum AHU outside air requirement schedule (below). Note however that this value is used unmodified by any schedules for Heating design calculations when mechanical ventilation is switched on and included in the analysis.
- 251 -
Minimum AHU outside air requirement schedule

You can modify the total outside airflow using the Minimum AHU outside air requirement schedule. Whatever the outside air flow would have been without the schedule is multiplied by the current schedule value. So, for example, if you select a schedule which is always 0.5, then the system will supply half the outside air flow at all times vs. the same run without the schedule. You can also use this schedule to switch off outside air during unoccupied periods.
Maximum supply air flow rate

The maximum supply air flow rate is the total flow rate of air entering the zone (not necessarily all fresh air). It can be defined at the zone level when using Compact HVAC or it can be left in the default state (Auto), in which case the maximum supply air flow rate is calculated based only on the maximum heating and cooling capacities. This data is available at the zone level when using Unitary single zone, Unitary multizone or VAV Compact HVAC and the plant sizing options Autosize when not set or Manual.

The System availability schedule defines the operation of the air system fans. For Compact Unitary systems the Fan operation mode (below) can be set to 2-Cycling in which case air distribution only occurs when there is heating or cooling demand. Note: Fan coil units are incompatible with Calculated natural ventilation.
FCU Heating
HVAC tab in model data HVAC tab - Compact HVAC The data required to define the heating system will depend on whether the HVAC model option is set to Simple or Compact and if set to Compact the type of Compact HVAC system selected.
Heating capacity
The heating capacity can either be entered by hand or can be Autosized using the Heating Design Calculations. By default, if immediately prior to a Simulation the heating capacity has not been entered (neither by hand nor from a previous Heating design calculation) then a Heating design autosizing simulation is started to calculate the capacity. The Plant sizing building model option controls the way this works. You can change heating capacities by hand if you wish but you should bear in mind that, by default, if Model Options change, all heating and cooling capacities are reset to zero. Set the Plant sizing model option to '2Manual' to avoid this happening. If the HVAC system is Unitary multizone then the central heating coil capacity is calculated as the sum of the individual zone heating energy requirements.
Boiler
At building level you can select the boiler to be used to provide hot water to FCU heating coils. Only one boiler can be specified for the whole building, i.e. there is only a single hot water circuit served by one boiler in Compact HVAC simulations.
Off-coil air temperature set point

When preheat is specified, this data defines the temperature of the air coming off the FCU heating coils assuming idealised control. Preheat coils are automatically sized by EnergyPlus before the simulation to provide this off coil temperature given the flow rates in the air handling unit.
- 252 -
FCU Cooling

This schedule data is used in conjunction with the heating setpoint temperatures on the Activity tab to define the time-varying heating setpoint schedule in the zone. The operation schedule defines the times when full and setback setpoints should be met and the setpoint data on the Activity tab define the actual setpoint values. See Defining setpoint temperature schedules for more on this.
FCU Cooling
HVAC tab in model data - Compact HVAC You can enter details on the cooling system including the maximum capacity (at zone level).
Cooling capacity
The Cooling capacity can either be entered by hand or can be Autosized using the Cooling Design Calculations. If, immediately prior to a Simulation the Cooling capacity has not been entered (neither by hand nor from a previous Cooling Design Calculation) then a Cooling design autosizing simulation is started to calculate the capacity. The Plant sizing building model option controls the way this works. You can change cooling capacities by hand if you wish but you should bear in mind that, by default, if Model Options change, all heating and cooling capacities are reset to zero. Set the Plant sizing model option to '2Manual' to avoid this happening.
Chiller
At building level select the chiller to be used to provide cold water to cooling coils. Only one chiller can be specified for the whole building in Compact HVAC, i.e. there is only a single cold water circuit served by one chiller in Compact HVAC simulations.
Chilled water setpoint temperature

At building level enter the chilled water setpoint temperature to be used for sizing the chilled water loop and associated equipment.
Condenser water setpoint temperature

At building level enter the condenser water temperature to be used for sizing the condenser loop and associated equipment.
Cooling tower type

Select from: 1-Single speed 2- Two speed
The EnergyPlus equipment object types which are used are CoolingTower:SingleSpeed or CoolingTower:TwoSpeed.
- 253 -

This schedule data is used in conjunction with the cooling setpoint temperatures on the Activity tab to define the time-varying cooling setpoint schedule in the zone. The operation schedule defines the times when full and setback setpoints should be met and the setpoint data on the Activity tab define the actual setpoint values. See Defining setpoint temperature schedules for more on this.
Unitary Systems
HVAC tab in model data - Compact HVAC DesignBuilder Compact HVAC provides 2 types of unitary system: Unitary Single Zone Unitary Multizone These are described below.
UNITARY SINGLE ZONE

The Unitary single zone option allows you to model simple single constant volume direct-expansion (DX) based HVAC configurations with several different heating options. Direct expansion includes single packaged rooftop systems commonly seen in commercial buildings and split systems commonly seen in residential buildings. In this system, local cooling coils are used to condition air which is supplied to the zone through a local air delivery system. Air delivery can be set up to ensure minimum fresh air supply and there are options for economisers to provide free cooling and heat recovery. Note: With Unitary single zone systems each zone has its own 'AHU' and so, unlike the Unitary multizone, CAV and VAV Compact HVAC types, Unitary single zone systems take all their data from the zone level.
System availability
You can model unitary single zone systems with or without outside air. If you include Air distribution with your Unitary single zone system then heating and cooling will only operate when the Air distribution operation schedule is on. If you do not want to include outside air in your system, you should uncheck the Mechanical ventilation 'On' check box. In this case heating/cooling availability is determined entirely from the heating/cooling operation schedules under the Heating and Cooling headers.
- 254 -
Unitary Systems
UNITARY MULTIZONE
The Unitary multizone option allows you to model constant volume direct-expansion (DX) based HVAC configurations with several different heating options. Direct expansion (DX) includes single packaged rooftop systems commonly seen in commercial buildings and split systems commonly seen in residential buildings. In this system, central heating and cooling coils are used to condition air which is delivered to the each of the zones in the system through an air delivery system. Air delivery can be set up to ensure minimum fresh air supply and there are options for economisers to provide free cooling and heat recovery. For a multizone system, only one zone is specified as the control zone. The thermostat is located in this control zone as set by the Thermostatic control zone for unitary system at the top of the HVAC tab at zone level. So when using this system you should be careful to locate the thermostat in a zone which will have a representative temperature for the whole building, otherwise some zones may become over/under heated/cooled. Only one Unitary multizone system can be defined per building.
- 255 -
Note
The Compact HVAC type must be set to Unitary multizone at building level and in all zones which are part of the system. Other zones can have HVAC type Unitary single zone or Fan coil units but not VAV or CAV.
Technical EnergyPlus
For both single and multi zone unitary systems, EnergyPlus needs both the heating coil and cooling DX coil to be defined so even if heating or cooling is not selected in the input, DesignBuilder will include both coils in the IDF data supplied to EnergyPlus and schedule the appropriate coil to be off.
System type
System availability
When using Compact HVAC data, the system availability schedule can be defined to control the overall operation of the HVAC system, including heating, cooling and ventilation. This schedule is used at the building level for 2Unitary multizone systems and at the zone level for 5-Fan coil.

The System availability schedule defines the operation of the air system fans. For Compact Unitary systems the Fan operation mode can be set to 2-Cycling in which case air distribution only occurs when there is heating or cooling demand. You can also open headers to enter HVAC details where they are different from those loaded from the template:
- 256 -
Unitary Ventilation
Unitary Outside Air Unitary Fans Unitary Heat Recovery Unitary Economisers Unitary Heating Unitary Cooling Unitary Humidity Control
Unitary Ventilation
HVAC tab in model data under Mechanical Ventilation header - Compact HVAC
MECHANICAL VENTILATION
Check the mechanical ventilation checkbox to indicate that outside air and/or re-circulated air is delivered to the zone. You can use this setting to define mechanical ventilation and air delivered through centrally ducted air conditioning systems. Note that Mechanical Ventilation data refers to the fan-powered air delivery through the main HVAC system and not a separate mechanical ventilation system. You can set the amount, timing and control of outside air delivery through the HVAC air distribution system on the HVAC tab. Outside air requirement data is set at the zone level on the HVAC tab for all HVAC configurations and options. Outside air flow control through the AHU when using 2-Unitary multizone calculated set at building level based on the sum of the individual zones connected to the system.
The Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltration data can be displayed on the Heating design, Cooling design and Simulation screens when you select 1-All or 3-Comfort data. This is the sum of fresh air delivered through the HVAC system, infiltration and natural ventilation outside airflow in air changes per hour (ac/h) and when used together with the other environmental output it can be useful in checking for occupant discomfort.

Defines the method used to set the maximum outside air delivery rate. The actual outside air flow rate during simulation is modified by the Minimum AHU outside air requirement schedule described below. The options are: 1-By zone - enter the zone outside air delivery rate in air changes per hour in the control directly below. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated from the ac/h data using: m3/s = ac/h x ZoneVolume / 3600 where ZoneVolume is the actual air volume of the space calculated according to Model options for excluding floor/ceiling constructions. Note: this zone volume may be slightly different from the value used for the purposes of calculating air flow rates for infiltration which uses the total zone volume. 2-Min fresh air (Per person) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air requirements per person as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as:
- 257 -
m3/s = MinFreshAir x NumberPeople / 1000 NumberPeople = Occupancy density (people / m2) * Zone floor area (m2). MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per person (l/s/person or CFM). 3-Min fresh air (Per area) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air requirements as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as: m3/s = l/s-m2 x ZoneFloorArea / 1000 where ZoneFloorArea is the actual floor area of the space. MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per floor area (l/s-m2 or CFM/ft2). 4-Min fresh air (Sum per person + per area) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air requirements for both as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as: m3/s = (l/s-m2 x ZoneFloorArea + MinFreshAir x NumberPeople)/ 1000 where ZoneFloorArea is the actual floor area of the space. MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per floor area (l/s-m2 or CFM/ft2). NumberPeople = Occupancy density (people / m2) * Zone floor area (m2). MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per person (l/s/person or CFM). 5-Min fresh air (Max per person and per area) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air requirements for both as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as: m3/s = Maximum of (l/s-m2 x ZoneFloorArea / 1000) and (MinFreshAir x NumberPeople/ 1000) where ZoneFloorArea is the actual floor area of the space. MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per floor area (l/s-m2 or CFM/ft2). NumberPeople = Occupancy density (people / m2) * Zone floor area (m2). MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per person (l/s/person or CFM).

Enter the minimum zone outside air delivery rate in air changes per hour when Outside air definition method (above) is 1-By zone. The actual minimum amount of outside air entering the AHU can be modified by the Minimum AHU outside air requirement schedule (below). Note however that this value is used unmodified by any schedules for Heating design calculations when mechanical ventilation is switched on and included in the analysis. Note: in Compact HVAC systems, the total mixed air flow rate into the zone is calculated by EnergyPlus and will often be higher than the outside air flow rate due to the mixing of recirculated air to provide enough airflow to delivery any additional heating/cooling.

- 258 -
Unitary Fans

The maximum supply air flow rate is the total flow rate of air entering the zone (not necessarily all fresh air). It can be defined at the zone level when using Compact HVAC or it can be left in the default state (Auto), in which case the maximum supply air flow rate is calculated based only on the maximum heating and cooling capacities. This data is available at the zone level when using Unitary single zone, Unitary multizone or VAV Compact HVAC and the plant sizing options Autosize when not set or Manual.

The System availability schedule defines the operation of the air system fans. For Compact Unitary systems the Fan operation mode (below) can be set to 2-Cycling in which case air distribution only occurs when there is heating or cooling demand.
Outside air sizing

When the Outside air definition method is 2-Min fresh air per person, sizing for minimum Outside air (OA) flow rate is done using the 'Number of People' value (see above) with no regard for the schedules. The total OA requirement for each zone on the air handler is summed and used to set the minimum OA flow rate for the air handler. The OA controller sets an OA flow rate for the air handler each time step. After that, each zone receives a pro-rated share of the total OA flow proportioned by the current supply flow rate to each zone. There is no further zone-by-zone allocation of OA quantities, which is what happens in a real system.
Unitary Fans
Fan operation mode

In Compact Unitary HVAC systems the supply fan has two different possible operating modes. The choices for this field are: 1-Continuous - fan operates using air distribution availability schedule (above) 2-Cycling - fan operates when heating or cooling is delivered. For most commercial buildings, continuous fan operation will continue to supply outside air to the zones as typically required by code. For continuous fan operation, the 'System Availability Schedule' (see above) is the supply fan operating schedule. For systems where the supply fan only runs when either cooling or heating needs to be supplied to the zone such as for many residential systems, cycling should be specified.
Fan pressure rise

Enter the pressure rise at full flow and standard conditions. Standard conditions are considered 20C at sea level, 101325 Pa. You can calculate the approximate fan pressure rise from Specific Fan Power (SFP) data using: Delta P = 1000 * SFP * Fan total efficiency Annex E of ISO 5801 shows that by rearranging the formula it can be derived that the SFP is a function of fan pressure divided by the efficiency of the fan system. Therefore the SFP will increase or decrease with a respective increase or decrease in the system pressure. The SFP is a function of the volume flow of the fan and the electrical power input and is quoted for a particular flow rate; SFP = Pe/ V
- 259 -
Where: V is volume flow (l/s) Peis electrical power input (W) to the fan system or complete air movement installation [Reference FMA, UK, 2006] Typical values for various system types are shown in the table below. System Type Central mechanical ventilation including heating, cooling and heat recovery Central mechanical ventilation including heating and cooling All other systems Local ventilation units within the local area, such as window/wall/roof units, serving one room/area Local ventilation units remote from the local area, such as ceiling void or roof mounted units, serving one room/area Fan coil units (rating weighted average) Source ESTA: http://www.esta.org.uk/ Specific Fan Power (W/l-s) 2.5 2.0 1.8 0.5
1.2
0.8

Enter the product of the fan motor and impeller efficiency of the supply fan. This is the ratio of the power delivered to the air to the electrical input power at maximum flow expressed as a percentage. The motor efficiency is the power delivered to the shaft divided by the electrical power input to the motor. The fan efficiency is power delivered to the air divided by the shaft power. The power delivered to the fluid is the mass flow rate of the air multiplied by the pressure rise divided by the air density. Must be greater than 0 and less than or equal to 100.

Fan placement
- 260 -
Unitary Heat Recovery


Unitary Heat Recovery

- 261 -
With Compact HVAC, you can specify air-to-air heat recovery which is available between the relief air stream and the outside air inlet stream. Heat recovery is selected for Unitary multizone systems by checking Heat Recovery On under the Mechanical Ventilation header at building level. For Unitary single zone make the selection at the zone level.
Heat recovery type

Enter the type of air-to-air heat recovery. The choices are: 1-Sensible - recovers sensible heat 2-Enthalpy - recovers sensible and latent heat.
Sensible heat recovery effectiveness

Enter the sensible heat recovery effectiveness. This is applied as a constant effectiveness at all conditions. The valid range is from 0.0 to 1.0, and the default is 0.70.
Latent heat recovery effectiveness

Enter the latent heat recovery effectiveness if Heat Recovery Type is Enthalpy. This is applied as a constant effectiveness at all conditions. The valid range is from 0.0 to 1.0, and the default is 0.65.
Heat recovery heating setpoint temperature

When no economiser is selected this data defines the heating setpoint temperature of the heat recovery device. Note that the single value is applied throughout the year. For example enter 15C to model a system which heats outside air up to 15C and no higher. A high setpoint value will provide optimal heating but this may add to cooling loads in the summer.
Heat recovery operation schedule

Use this schedule to define the availability of the heat recovery device. Schedule values of 1 mean that heat recovery is available and values of 0 mean that it is not available and that the bypass is opened. You may want to use this control to bypass heat recovery in the summer for example.
Heat recovery + economizer

If an economiser (free cooling option) is selected, the heat recovery is bypassed whenever the economiser operates and the heat recovery is always bypassed if economiser operation would be beneficial. The heat recovery will operate when: Heat recovery is switched on at the building level for unitary multizone systems and at zone level for Unitary single zone systems AND The heat recovery schedule has a value of 1 AND When economiser operation is off. You can have heat recovery and no Economiser action by switching on Heat recovery and setting economiser to 1-None. In this case the heat recovery units heats outside air using the Heat recovery heating setpoint temperature above. It also cools outside air when return air temperature is lower than outside air temperature. If the economiser is selected together with heat recovery then the Heat recovery heating setpoint temperature data is not shown and the effective heat recovery setpoint temperature is given by the lower economiser limit temperature.
Unitary Economisers
- 262 -
Unitary Economisers
HVAC Economisers are useful for facilities which require some cooling even when the outdoor temperature is lower than the indoor temperature. An economizer is a damper opening that draws up to 100% outside air when the outside air is cooler than the temperature inside the building, thereby providing free cooling. An outdoor air economy cycle can reduce cooling energy requirements by some 20% to 30%, or around 5% of the air conditioning energy use and are often required by energy codes for larger air conditioning units. See under Heat recovery for information about how economisers interact with heat recovery. Note: Economiser operation applies to the overall HVAC system and so for Unitary multizone systems its data is set at building level. For Unitary single zone systems the data at zone level is used. There are four options: 1-None where no economizer operation will be simulated and outside fresh air is based on the Mechanical ventilation Outside air rate and associated operation schedule. 2-Return air temperature establishes a limit control on the return air temperature so that when the temperature of the air entering the mixer on the outside air side is greater than the return air temperature the outside airflow rate is set to the minimum. 3-Return air enthalpy establishes a limit control on the return air enthalpy so that when the enthalpy of air entering the mixer on the outside air side is greater than the return air enthalpy the outside airflow rate is set to the minimum. 4-Return air temperature and enthalpy - where both the above limit controls are in operation, i.e. both temperature or enthalpy limits are used so that when either the temperature or the enthalpy of the air entering the mixer on the outside air side is greater than the return air temperature/enthalpy, the outside airflow rate is set to the minimum.
In addition to the above checks, the economiser can also have absolute limits on temperature and enthalpy of the outside air. When the outside air conditions go beyond these limits the EnergyPlus economiser switches to minimum outside air mode, i.e. the outside air damper is closed to its minimum position and heat recovery will be enabled if available.
Economiser upper temperature limit

Enter the outside air temperature high limit for economizer operation. If the outside air temperature is above this limit, the outside air flow rate will be set to the minimum.
Economiser lower temperature limit

Enter the outside air temperature low limit for economizer operation. If the outside air temperature is below this limit, the outside air flow rate will be set to the minimum.
Economiser upper enthalpy limit

Enter the outside air upper enthalpy limit for economizer operation. If the outside air enthalpy is above this value, the outside air flow rate will be set to the minimum.
Lockout
Unitary systems can also have lockout control: 1-No lockout - default option. 2-Lockout with heating - when the packaged unit is in heating mode, the economiser is locked out i.e., the economiser dampers are closed and there is minimum outside air flow.
- 263 -
3-Lockout with compressor - in addition to locking out the economizer when the unit is in heating mode the economizer is locked out when the DX unit compressor is on. In other words, when the DX coil is off, the economizer must meet the entire cooling load it isnt allowed to operate in conjunction with the DX cooling coil. Similarly, when the DX coil is operating, the economizer is not allowed to operate. The Lockout with compressor option is sometimes called a 'non-integrated economizer'.
Unitary Heating
HVAC tab in model data - Compact HVAC
HEATING CAPACITY
This data is only visible at zone level and only when the Manual sizing model option is selected. The heating capacity can either be entered by hand or can be autosized using the Heating Design Calculations. By default, if immediately prior to a Simulation the heating capacity has not been entered (neither by hand nor from a previous Heating design calculation) then a Heating design autosizing simulation is started to calculate the capacity. The Plant sizing building model option controls the way this works. You can change heating capacities by hand if you wish but you should bear in mind that, by default, if Model Options change, all heating and cooling capacities are reset to zero. Set the Plant sizing model option to 2Manual to avoid this happening. If the HVAC system is Unitary multizone then the central heating coil capacity is calculated as the sum of the individual zone heating energy requirements.
HEATING PLANT
A single set of heating plant data is required per building and all unitary zones in the building refer to this data when plant fuel consumption is calculated.
Unitary heating fuel

This data is only visible at building level (even for Unitary single zone systems), that is all unitary heating systems in the building must use the same fuel. Select the type of fuel used to generate the heating energy - choose from: Interface Fuel Name 1-Electricity from grid 2-Natural Gas 3-Oil 4-Coal 5-LPG 6-Biogas 7-Anthracite 8-Smokeless Fuel (inc Coke) 9-Dual Fuel Appliances (Mineral + Wood) 10-Biomass 11-Waste Heat Fuel in results Electricity Gas Oil Solid fuel Bottled gas Bottled gas Solid fuel Solid fuel Other Other Other
You should select 1-Electricity from grid you wish the results displayed in DesignBuilder to agree with those calculated by EnergyPlus directly and displayed on the Summary tab of the Simulation screen.
- 264 -
Unitary Heating
Heating coil CoP

This data is only visible at building level, that is all Unitary heating systems have the same CoP. The CoP can only be entered for non-electric heating coils. Electric heating coils are assumed to a have a CoP of 1. The Unitary heating system Coefficient of Performance is only used to calculate the fuel consumption required to meet heating demand. The value represents the total seasonal efficiency of the entire heating system and should include the effect of all energy consumption associated with building heating such as any boiler fan energy, boiler inefficiency, control equipment etc. You should enter a value of 1 if you wish the results displayed in DesignBuilder to agree with those calculated by EnergyPlus directly and displayed on the Summary tab of the Simulation screen.
Unitary distribution loss

This data is only visible at building level, that is all unitary heating systems have the same distribution loss. The distribution loss is an additional loss accounting for the loss of heat to outside due to distribution of hot fluids through the building. It acts in combination with the CoP to increase the fuel consumption based on the heating load. You should enter a value of 0 if you wish the results displayed in DesignBuilder to agree with those calculated by EnergyPlus directly and displayed on the Summary tab of the Simulation screen.
RADIATOR/BASEBOARD HEATING (DISABLED IN V3)

Radiator/baseboard heating is controlled to meet any remaining zone load not met by other equipment in the zone that have higher heating priority.Radiators/baseboards operate according to the same set of time varying zone heating temperature setpoints as the main heating system. With unitary single zone system you have the option for the radiator/baseboard heating to either supplement the main heating coil or to replace it. With the other system types the radiators/baseboard heater always supplements the main heating though you can operate the system without terminal reheat and/or AHU heating coils and heat purely by baseboard heating. To use radiant/baseboard heating switch on the option under the Heating header on the HVAC tab and enter information on:
Type
Choose between: 1-Hot water - where the radiator/baseboard coils are served by hot water from the main heating system. In this case you can also enter a radiant fraction to model radiant heat (more below). 2-Electric - where the radiator/baseboard coils are heated by electricity and heating is considered to be entirely convective.
Mode
This option is only available for single zone unitary systems: 1-Supplements main heating - where the radiator/baseboard coils provide additional backup heating in cases where the heating setpoint temperature has not been satisfied by the main heating system. 2-Replaces main heating - where the radiator/baseboard coils are used instead of the main unitary single zone heating coils.This option allows you to model radiant heating systems.
- 265 -
Radiant fraction
Radiant fraction specifies what fraction of the power input to the radiator/baseboard heater is actually transferred to the space as radiant heat. The fraction should be between 0 and 1. This is the portion of the total power that is modelled as radiant, the remaining energy is added to the zone as convective heat transfer. The portion that is radiant heat transfer from the baseboard heater is distributed to people and specific surfaces using the remaining fields. This option is only available for hot-water radiator/baseboard systems. Technical Notes 1. Entering a value greater than zero will cause a the EnergyPlus ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water system to be used instead of the default ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Electric system as a post-process to the idf data. 2. The radiant heat is transferred to the floor, or if the floor is smaller than 1m2, then to the largest other surface in the zone. 3. A default of 10% of the radiant heat is assumed to fall directly on the zone occupants and this is subsequently convected into the zone.
Unitary Multizone
When using the 2-Unitary multizone system type, the operating schedule for the central heating coils is set under the AHU Heating Coil Operation header at building level. Note: only one set of zone thermostatic control data is used per Unitary multizone system - this is the zone for which Thermostatic control zone for unitary system is selected.
Unitary Single zone

Heating operation schedules are set at zone level and there is no central plant apart from the boiler.

Unitary Cooling
HVAC tab in model data - Compact HVAC
Cooling capacity
This data is only visible at zone level and only when the Manual sizing model option is selected. The Cooling capacity can either be entered by hand or can be autosized using the Cooling Design Calculations. If, immediately prior to a Simulation the Cooling capacity has not been entered (neither by hand nor from a previous Cooling Design Calculation) then a Cooling design autosizing simulation is started to calculate the capacity. The Plant sizing building model option controls the way this works. You can change cooling capacities by hand if you wish but you should bear in mind that, by default, if Model Options change, all heating and cooling capacities are reset to zero. Set the Plant sizing model option to 2Manual to avoid this happening.
- 266 -
Unitary Cooling
COOLING PLANT
A single set of cooling plant data is required per building and all unitary zones in the building refer to this data when plant fuel consumption is calculated.
Unitary cooling fuel

This data is only visible at building level (even for Unitary single zone systems), that is all unitary cooling systems in the building must use the same fuel. Select the type of fuel used to generate the heating energy - choose from: Interface Fuel Name 1-Electricity from grid <default value> 2-Natural Gas 3-Oil 4-Coal 5-LPG 6-Biogas 7-Anthracite 8-Smokeless Fuel (inc Coke) 9-Dual Fuel Appliances (Mineral + Wood) 10-Biomass 11-Waste Heat Fuel in results Electricity Gas Oil Solid fuel Bottled gas Bottled gas Solid fuel Solid fuel Other Other Other
You should select 1-Electricity from grid you wish the results displayed in DesignBuilder to agree with those calculated by EnergyPlus directly and displayed on the Summary tab of the Simulation screen.
Unitary Cooling system CoP

This data is only visible at building level, that is all Unitary cooling systems have the same CoP. The cooling system coefficient of performance is used to calculate the fuel consumption required to meet cooling demand. The value represents the total seasonal efficiency of the entire cooling system and should include the effect of all energy consumption associated with building cooling such as fan and pump energy, chiller inefficiency, control equipment etc. You should enter a value of 1 if you wish the results displayed in DesignBuilder to agree with those calculated by EnergyPlus directly and displayed on the Summary tab of the Simulation screen.
Unitary distribution loss

This data is only visible at building level, that is all Unitary cooling systems have the same distribution loss. An additional loss accounting for the loss of cooling to outside due to distribution of chilled fluids through the building. It acts in combination with the CoP to increase the fuel consumption based on the cooling load. You should enter a value of 0 if you wish the results displayed in DesignBuilder to agree with those calculated by EnergyPlus directly and displayed on the Summary tab of the Simulation screen.

- 267 -
Unitary Humidity Control

HVAC tab in model data - Compact HVAC When using Unitary Compact HVAC you can control humidity in zones by including separate humidification and/or dehumidification equipment and controls. Both humidification and dehumidification require settings at building level for Unitary multizone systems or at zone level for Single zone unitary systems (of course in the latter case defaults can be set at building level).
HUMIDIFICATION
To include humidification check the Humidification checkbox and make further settings. The humidifier is electric powered and the data required is: availability schedule, rated capacity and water supply rate. The humidification setpoint is defined on the Activity tab. For Unitary multizone systems you must also define the humidification control zone.
Humidification availability schedule

Select the schedule that defines the availability of humidification. The schedule values denote whether the humidifier can run during a given time period. A schedule value of 1.0 indicates that the humidifier can be on during a given time period. A value of zero denotes that the humidifier cannot be used during that time period.
Humidifier Rated Capacity

Enter the rated moisture output rate in m3/s or CFM. The humidifier does not currently autosize, so the default is very large to allow for adequate capacity. The default is 0.000001 m3/s.
DE-HUMIDIFICATION
To include dehumidification check the Dehumidification checkbox and make further settings. The dehumidification setpoint is defined on the Activity tab. For Unitary multizone systems you must also define the humidification control zone.
Control type
For unitary systems, there are two dehumidification control type options available: 1-Cool-Reheat Heating Coil cools beyond the dry-bulb setpoint as required to meet the humidity setpoint if the system is capable of doing so. Reheat is provided as required by the heating coil. In the simulation, two instances of the heating coil are modelled, one for heating, and one for reheat. The two coil objects represent the same physical coil and never operate simultaneously. 2-Cool-Reheat Desuperheater cools beyond the dry-bulb setpoint as required to meet the humidity setpoint if the system is capable of doing so. Reheat is provided by a desuperheater coil.
For Unitary multizone systems you must also define the dehumidification control zone. Note that dehumidification will result in simultaneous heating and cooling to achieve reduced humidity of the zone air.
- 268 -
VAV + CAV
Note: EnergyPlus autosizing does not yet account for dehumidification so in many cases you will have to increase the Compact HVAC sizing factor above the default of 1.2 to a value up to 10 to obtain adequate cooling coil sizes, depending on latent loads and the dehumidification setpoint. Note: If you use one of the reheat dehumidifiers you must have reheat available to heat during times when dehumidification is required. In practice this normally means having reheat available all year. Note: You may need to use shorter timesteps for accurate humidity control. We recommend 10 per hour.
VAV + CAV
HVAC tab in model data - Compact HVAC VAV (variable air volume) and CAV (constant volume) system types are both based on the EnergyPlus VAV system type and so have similar common data entry.
VAV SYSTEMS
The VAV option allows you to model Variable Air Volume (VAV) HVAC configuration with optional preheat, air handling unit heating and cooling coils and reheat and several different heating coil options. You can select series or parallel fan powered terminal units (also known as powered induction units or PIU). There are options to control the air distribution system in various ways including the ability to ensure minimum fresh air delivery to each zone, set VAV box minimum flow fraction and various outside air options including an economiser to provide free cooling when appropriate and heat recovery. You can also model heating and cooling coil temperature reset. Only one VAV system can be defined per building. Note: the Compact HVAC type must be set to VAV at building level and in all zones which are part of the VAV system. Other zones can have HVAC type Unitary single zone or Fan coil units but not Unitary multizone or CAV.
- 269 -
CAV SYSTEMS
The CAV option allows you to model Constant Air Volume HVAC configuration with optional preheat, main AHU heating coils and zone terminal reheat and several different heating coil options. There are options to control the air distribution system in various ways including the ability to ensure minimum fresh air delivery to each zone, set various outside air options including an economiser to provide free cooling when appropriate and heating and cooling coil temperature reset . Only one CAV system can be defined per building. Note: the Compact HVAC type must be set to CAV at building level and in all zones which are part of the CAV system. Other zones can have HVAC type Unitary single zone or Fan coil units but not Unitary multizone or VAV.
- 270 -
VAV + CAV
System type
System availability
When using Compact HVAC data, the system availability schedule can be defined to control the overall operation of the HVAC system, including heating, cooling and ventilation. This schedule is used at the building level for VAV and CAV systems. The rest of this section covers both VAV and CAV with differences pointed out where appropriate. You can also open headers to enter HVAC details where they are different from those loaded from the template: VAV & CAV Ventilation VAV & CAV Fans VAV & CAV Economisers VAV & CAV Heat Recovery VAV Zone Terminal Units VAV & CAV Heating VAV & CAV Cooling VAV & CAV Humidity Control Mixed Mode
- 271 -
VAV & CAV Ventilation

MECHANICAL VENTILATION
The mechanical ventilation checkbox must be checked for VAV and CAV systems. You can use this setting to define mechanical ventilation and air delivered through centrally ducted air conditioning systems. Note that Mechanical Ventilation data refers to the fan-powered air delivery through the main HVAC system and not a separate mechanical ventilation system.
OUTSIDE AIR
You can set the amount, timing and control of outside air delivery through the HVAC air distribution system on the HVAC tab. Outside air requirement data is set at the zone level on the HVAC tab for all HVAC configurations and options. Outside air flow control through the AHU is calculated at building from the sum of the outside air requirements of each zone connected to the system.
The Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltrationdata can displayed on the Heating design, Cooling design and Simulation screens when you select 1-All or 3-Comfort data. This is the sum of fresh air delivered through the HVAC system, infiltration and natural ventilation outside airflow in air changes per hour (ac/h) and when used together with the other environmental output it can be very useful in checking for occupant discomfort.

Defines the method used to set the maximum outside air delivery rate. The actual outside air flow rate during simulation is modified by the Minimum AHU outside air requirement schedule described below. The options are: 1-By zone - enter the zone outside air delivery rate in air changes per hour in the control directly below. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated from the ac/h data using: m3/s = ac/h x ZoneVolume / 3600 where ZoneVolume is the actual air volume of the space calculated according to Model options for excluding floor/ceiling constructions. Note: this zone volume may be slightly different from the value used for the purposes of calculating air flow rates for infiltration which uses the total zone volume. 2-Min fresh air (Per person) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air requirements per person as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as: m3/s = MinFreshAir x NumberPeople / 1000 NumberPeople = Occupancy density (people / m2) * Zone floor area (m2). MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per person (l/s/person or CFM). 3-Min fresh air (Per area) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air requirements as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as:
- 272 -
VAV & CAV Ventilation
m3/s = l/s-m2 x ZoneFloorArea / 1000 where ZoneFloorArea is the actual floor area of the space. MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per floor area (l/s-m2 or CFM/ft2). 4-Min fresh air (Sum per person + per area) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air requirements for both as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as: m3/s = (l/s-m2 x ZoneFloorArea + MinFreshAir x NumberPeople)/ 1000 where ZoneFloorArea is the actual floor area of the space. MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per floor area (l/s-m2 or CFM/ft2). NumberPeople = Occupancy density (people / m2) * Zone floor area (m2). MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per person (l/s/person or CFM). 5-Min fresh air (Max per person and per area) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air requirements for both as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as: m3/s = Maximum of (l/s-m2 x ZoneFloorArea / 1000) and (MinFreshAir x NumberPeople/ 1000) where ZoneFloorArea is the actual floor area of the space. MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per floor area (l/s-m2 or CFM/ft2). NumberPeople = Occupancy density (people / m2) * Zone floor area (m2). MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per person (l/s/person or CFM).

Enter the minimum zone outside air delivery rate in air changes per hour when Outside air definition method (above) is 1-By zone. The actual minimum amount of outside air entering the AHU can be modified by the Minimum AHU outside air requirement schedule (below). Note however that this value is used unmodified by any schedules for Heating design calculations when mechanical ventilation is switched on and included in the analysis. Note: in Compact HVAC systems, the total mixed air flow rate into the zone is calculated by EnergyPlus and will often be higher than the outside air flow rate due to the mixing of recirculated air to provide enough airflow to delivery any additional heating/cooling.


The maximum supply air flow rate is the total flow rate of air entering the zone (not necessarily all fresh air). It can be defined at the zone level or it can be left in the default state (Auto), in which case the maximum supply air flow rate is calculated based only on the maximum heating and cooling capacities. This data is available at the zone level when using Unitary single zone, Unitary multizone or VAV Compact HVAC and the plant sizing options Autosize when not set or Manual.
- 273 -

The System availability schedule defines the operation of the air system fans.
OUTSIDE AIR MIXING

This data is defined for CAV/VAV air handling units (AHU) at building level.
Outside air mixing

Select the way outside air is used: 1-Recirculation - the outside airflow supply to the AHU is mixed with recirculated return air from the zones. This is done to save energy often in conjunction with an economiser to ensure that optimal use is made of outside air. When heat recovery is used with the 1-Recirculation outside air mixing option, the economiser must be selected in the interface for the heat recovery to be by-passed. 2-Full fresh air - the airflow into the AHU is 100% outside air, without any recirculation. This is modelled in EnergyPlus by setting the supply airflow rate to the outside air flow rate. Note that when using this option, fixing the supply air flow rate to the outside air rate will in many cases mean that the system will not be capable of meeting the design cooling load. To increase the maximum cooling capacity of a Full fresh air VAV/CAV system you can increase the outside air flow rate (such systems could be very inefficient in energy use without heat recovery). When heat recovery is used with the 2-Full fresh air outside air mixing option, the heat recovery is by-passed when this is advantageous in reducing AHU cooling coil loads. The heat recovery also operates when the outside air temperature is less than 12C. Note: for Full fresh air systems, to ensure that a) there is no recirculation and b) that the requested fresh air flow rate is provided, you must set the HVAC sizing factor to 1 (the default is 1.2)
Outside air control minimum flow type

This option allows you to specify the way minimum outside air flow rate is controlled for 3-VAV and 5-CAV Compact HVAC types when the Outside air mixing type (above) is 1-Recirculation: 1-Fixed - the minimum outside air flow rate is fixed as set above no matter what the actual system flow rate is. In practice even with 'Fixed' outside air control minimum it is possible for the outside air flow rate into individual zones to be slightly different from the requested value. This is because the minimum outside air is controlled at the AHU level to ensure that the total fresh air entering the AHU is the total required for the building (the sum of the individual zone outside air requirements). But depending on the heating/cooling loads in each zone, some zones will require more supply air to meet the load than others. So the total fresh air entering the building will be correctly set as the sum of all the zone minimum fresh air requirements as specified but the distribution around the building may not be perfectly maintained.
2-Proportional - the minimum outside air flow rate varies in proportion to the total system air flow rate. The minimum outside air flow rate through the AHU outside air inlet is automatically calculated as the sum of the individual zone ventilation requirements. This is the 'design minimum'. During the simulation, 'minimum' and 'maximum' represent the limits for economizer operation. If there is no economizer, then the minimum flow of outside air is delivered. If 1-Fixed is selected, then this value will remain fixed (unless the total VAV system flow rate falls below this value, in which case, the system will deliver 100% outside air at whatever the system flow rate is). If, 2-Proportional is specified, then the operating minimum falls as system flow rate falls. This simulates a typical system with a fixed lower stop on the outside air supply damper. Delivering 1-Fixed requires enhanced control systems. Note: To ensure minimum outside air is delivered to all zones you should use 1-Fixed.
- 274 -
VAV & CAV Fans
If you select 2-Manual HVAC sizing you can enter the Outside air control minimum flow rate manually at building level.
Outside air sizing

When the Outside air definition method is 2-Min fresh air per person, sizing for minimum Outside air (OA) flow rate is done using the 'Number of People' value (see above) with no regard for the schedules. The total OA requirement for each zone on the air handler is summed and used to set the minimum OA flow rate for the air handler. The OA controller sets an OA flow rate for the air handler each time step. After that, each zone receives a pro-rated share of the total OA flow proportioned by the current supply flow rate to each zone. There is no further zone-by-zone allocation of OA quantities, which is what happens in a real system.
VAV & CAV Fans

HVAC tab in model data under Mechanical Ventilation header- Compact HVAC
Fan pressure rise

Enter the pressure rise at full flow and standard conditions. Standard conditions are considered 20C at sea level, 101325 Pa. You can calculate the approximate fan pressure rise from Specific Fan Power (SFP) data using: Delta P = 1000 * SFP * Fan total efficiency Annex E of ISO 5801 shows that by rearranging the formula it can be derived that the SFP is a function of fan pressure divided by the efficiency of the fan system. Therefore the SFP will increase or decrease with a respective increase or decrease in the system pressure. The SFP is a function of the volume flow of the fan and the electrical power input and is quoted for a particular flow rate; SFP = Pe/ V Where: V is volume flow (l/s) Peis electrical power input (W) to the fan system or complete air movement installation [Reference FMA, UK, 2006] Typical values for various system types are shown in the table below. System Type Central mechanical ventilation including heating, cooling and heat recovery Central mechanical ventilation including heating and cooling All other systems Local ventilation units within the local area, such as window/wall/roof units, serving one Specific Fan Power (W/l-s) 2.5 2.0 1.8 0.5
- 275 -
room/area Local ventilation units remote from the local area, such as ceiling void or roof mounted units, serving one room/area Fan coil units (rating weighted average) Source ESTA: http://www.esta.org.uk/
1.2
0.8

Enter the product of the fan motor and impeller efficiency of the supply fan. This is the ratio of the power delivered to the air to the electrical input power at maximum flow expressed as a percentage. The motor efficiency is the power delivered to the shaft divided by the electrical power input to the motor. The fan efficiency is power delivered to the air divided by the shaft power. The power delivered to the fluid is the mass flow rate of the air multiplied by the pressure rise divided by the air density. Must be greater than 0 and less than or equal to 100.

Fan placement

- 276 -
VAV & CAV Economisers

VAV & CAV Economisers

HVAC tab in model data under Mechanical Ventilation header - Compact HVAC HVAC Economisers are useful for facilities which require some cooling even when the outdoor temperature is lower than the indoor temperature. An economizer is a damper opening that draws up to 100% outside air when the outside air is cooler than the temperature inside the building, thereby providing free cooling. An outdoor air economy cycle can reduce cooling energy requirements by some 20% to 30%, or around 5% of the air conditioning energy use and are often required by energy codes for larger air conditioning units. See under Heat recovery for information about how economisers interact with heat recovery. Economiser operation applies to the overall HVAC system and so for CAV and VAV systems its data is set at building level. There are four options:
- 277 -
1-None where no economizer operation will be simulated and outside fresh air is based on the Mechanical ventilation Outside air rate and associated operation schedule. 2-Return air temperature establishes a limit control on the return air temperature so that when the temperature of the air entering the mixer on the outside air side is greater than the return air temperature the outside airflow rate is set to the minimum. 3-Return air enthalpy establishes a limit control on the return air enthalpy so that when the enthalpy of air entering the mixer on the outside air side is greater than the return air enthalpy the outside airflow rate is set to the minimum. 4-Return air temperature and enthalpy - where both the above limit controls are in operation, i.e. both temperature or enthalpy limits are used so that when either the temperature or the enthalpy of the air entering the mixer on the outside air side is greater than the return air temperature/enthalpy, the outside airflow rate is set to the minimum.
In addition to the above checks, the economiser can also have absolute limits on temperature and enthalpy of the outside air. When the outside air conditions go beyond these limits the EnergyPlus economiser switches to minimum outside air mode, i.e. the outside air damper is closed to its minimum position and heat recovery will be enabled if available.
Economiser upper temperature limit

Enter the outside air temperature high limit for economizer operation. If the outside air temperature is above this limit, the outside air flow rate will be set to the minimum.
Economiser lower temperature limit

Enter the outside air temperature low limit for economizer operation. If the outside air temperature is below this limit, the outside air flow rate will be set to the minimum.
Economiser upper enthalpy limit

Enter the outside air upper enthalpy limit for economizer operation. If the outside air enthalpy is above this value, the outside air flow rate will be set to the minimum.
VAV & CAV Heat Recovery

HVAC tab in model data under Mechanical Ventilation header - Compact HVAC With Compact HVAC, you can specify air-to-air heat recovery which is available between the relief air stream and the outside air inlet stream. Heat recovery is selected for CAV and VAV systems by checking Heat Recovery On under the Mechanical Ventilation header at building level.
Heat recovery type

Enter the type of air-to-air heat recovery. The choices are: 1-Sensible - recovers sensible heat 2-Enthalpy - recovers sensible and latent heat.
Sensible heat recovery effectiveness

Enter the sensible heat recovery effectiveness. This is applied as a constant effectiveness at all conditions. The valid range is from 0.0 to 1.0, and the default is 0.70.
- 278 -
VAV Zone Terminal Units
Latent heat recovery effectiveness

Enter the latent heat recovery effectiveness if Heat Recovery Type is Enthalpy. This is applied as a constant effectiveness at all conditions. The valid range is from 0.0 to 1.0, and the default is 0.65.
Heat recovery schedule

Use this schedule to define the availability of the heat recovery device. Schedule values of 1 mean that heat recovery is available and values of 0 mean that it is not available and that the bypass is opened. You may want to use this control to bypass heat recovery in the summer for example.
Heat recovery + economizer

If an economiser (free cooling) option is selected, the heat recovery is bypassed whenever the economiser operates and the heat recovery is always bypassed if economiser operation would be beneficial. The heat recovery will operate when: Heat recovery is switched on at the building level AND The heat recovery schedule has a value of 1 AND When economiser operation is off. You can have heat recovery and no Economiser action by switching on Heat recovery and setting economiser to 1-None. In this case the heat recovery units heats outside air using the Heat recovery heating setpoint temperature above. It also cools outside air when return air temperature is lower than outside air temperature. When heat recovery is used with the 2-Full fresh air outside air mixing option the heat recovery is by-passed when this is advantageous in reducing AHU heating/cooling coil loads. Otherwise, when using the 1Recirculation option, the economiser must be selected in the interface for the heat recovery to be by-passed in this way.
VAV Zone Terminal Units

HVAC tab in model data under Mechanical Ventilation header - Compact HVAC Variable air volume (VAV) systems control the dry bulb temperature inside a zone by varying the supply air volume instead of the air temperature. At full cooling the VAV terminal unit damper is fully open supplying the specified maximum design air flow rate. As the cooling load decreases, the damper closes until it reaches the minimum stop specified by the turndown ratio (zone minimum air flow fraction). If the supply flow rate is at its minimum value and zone temperature would still go below the heating setpoint temperature then the reheat coil is activated to ensure comfort levels are maintained. VAV systems can be used for interior or perimeter zones with a common fan system, air temperature control, and reheating devices. Heating is provided by use of reheat coils. Note: Zone Terminal unit data is used at the zone level.
Turndown ratio (supply air minimum flow fraction)

The fraction that the zone VAV box can reduce to based on the supply air maximum flow rate. The minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is operating is specified as a fraction of the maximum air flow rate. The turndown ratio is normally specified to meet the minimum ventilation requirement for the occupants. The reheat coil operates only when the damper is at this minimum flow rate when Zone damper heating action is set to 1-Normal (the default).
- 279 -
A value of 0 means the VAV box can completely shut off flow into the zone and a value of 1.0 means that the VAV box cannot reduce supply air at all (i.e. it is a constant volume system). For CAV systems this data is fixed at 1 and is not available for edit. Turndown ratio is typically in range 0.3 - 0.5. Minimum is 0 and maximum is 1.
VAV terminal unit type

DesignBuilder provides 3 different VAV zone terminal unit types: 1-Standard - The VAV terminal unit contains a damper and optionally a reheat coil. During heating the VAV unit can either work in Normal mode where the supply air flow into the zone is the minimum air flow rate of the VAV system, essentially acting like a constant volume system or in Reverse action mode the air flow rate through the VAV box may increase above the minimum air flow when the heating demand cannot otherwise be satisfied. This is also the terminal type used for CAV systems. 2-Series PIU - The Series Powered Induction Unit is an air system terminal unit that mixes varying amounts of secondary (recirculated) air and primary (conditioned supply) air to produce a fixed flow of air to a zone. The unit contains a small fan that acts to induce the secondary air and a heating coil for heating the mixed secondary and primary air. The fan runs at a constant volume flow rate whenever the unit is on. The fan is downstream of the primary and secondary air inlets. The variable mixing is accomplished by a damper in the units primary air supply inlet duct. This damper can move from fully open (100% primary air. 0% secondary air) to a minimum stop that can be specified in the input description. At full cooling the damper will be fully open. At minimum cooling and for heating the damper will be at the minimum stop and the secondary air flow will be at its maximum. It uses the EnergyPlus SINGLE DUCT:SERIES PIU:REHEAT data. 3-Parallel PIU - The Parallel Powered Induction Unit is an air system terminal unit that mixes varying amounts of secondary (recirculated) air and primary (conditioned supply) air to produce a variable total flow of air to a zone. The unit contains a small fan that acts to induce the secondary air and a heating coil for heating the mixed secondary and primary air. The secondary and primary air streams enter the unit in parallel. The fan sits in the secondary air stream and runs only when secondary air is needed. The primary air inlet contains a damper that can move from fully open (maximum primary air) to a minimum stop (minimum primary air). At full cooling load the primary air damper is fully open and the fan is off. The primary air flow is at maximum and there is little or no secondary air flow. As the cooling load decreases, the primary air damper gradually closes and the secondary air flow remains close to zero. At some point, usually when the primary air flow has reached the minimum, the fan switches on and secondary air is induced. The heating coil will switch on as needed to meet any heating demand. It uses the EnergyPlus SINGLE DUCT:PARALLEL PIU:REHEAT data. See VAV for a schematic diagram showing the 3 Zone terminal unit types connected to an air distribution system.
Parallel fan on flow fraction

For parallel PIUs, this data specifies the fraction of the primary air flow at which fan turns on. In the parallel PIU the fan operation is intermittent. If the primary air flow is above this fraction of the maximum, the fan is off. Otherwise it is on. This data is available when using VAV Compact HVAC with the Parallel PIU VAV terminal unit type and the plant sizing options Autosize when not set or Manual.
Terminal Unit Fans

When using fan powered terminal units (PIU) you can specify the characteristics of the terminal unit fans.
Terminal Unit Fan Total Efficiency

Enter the total efficiency of the zone induction fan. This is the ratio of the power delivered to the air to the electrical input power at maximum flow. This is also the product of the fan motor efficiency and fan (impeller) efficiency. The motor efficiency is the power delivered to the shaft divided by the electrical power input to the motor. The fan efficiency is the power delivered to the air divided by the shaft power. The power delivered to the fluid is the mass
- 280 -
VAV & CAV Heating
flow rate of the air multiplied by the pressure rise divided by the air density. Must be greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1.
Terminal Unit Fan Delta Pressure

Enter the pressure rise of the zone induction fan in Pa at full flow and standard conditions. Standard conditions are considered 20C at sea level, 101325 Pa.
VAV & CAV Heating

HVAC tab in model data - Compact HVAC Heating in VAV and CAV systems can be provided through any or all of: AHU heating, zone reheat and radiators/baseboards
HEATING CAPACITY
The heating capacity can either be entered by hand or can be Autosized using the Heating Design Calculations. By default, if immediately prior to a Simulation the heating capacity has not been entered (neither by hand nor from a previous Heating design calculation) then a Heating design autosizing simulation is started to calculate the capacity. The Plant sizing building model option controls the way this works. You can change heating capacities by hand if you wish but you should bear in mind that, by default, if Model Options change, all heating and cooling capacities are reset to zero. Set the Plant sizing model option to '2Manual' to avoid this happening.
HEATING PLANT (BUILDING LEVEL) Boiler

At building level you can select the boiler to be used to provide hot water to all heating coils. Only one boiler can be specified for the whole building, i.e. there is only a single hot water circuit served by one boiler in Compact HVAC simulations.
OUTSIDE AIR PREHEAT COILS (BUILDING LEVEL)

AHU preheat data is specified for the whole building and is not accessible at zone level.
Coil type
The preheat coil is located in the outside air stream, upstream of the outside air mixing box and tempers the outside air. If no preheat coil is used in the VAV system, then the option 1-None should be specified here. Otherwise this indicates the type of preheat coil. It is unlikely that both a heating coil and a preheat coil would be used at the same time. The options are: 1-None - no preheat. 2-Electric - preheat coils powered by electricity (assumed 100% efficient, 0 distribution loss). 3-Gas - gas-fired preheat coils (assumed 80% efficient, 0 distribution loss).

When preheat is specified, this data defines the temperature of the air coming off the preheat coils assuming idealised control. Preheat coils are automatically sized by EnergyPlus before the simulation to provide this off coil temperature given the flow rates in the air handling unit.
- 281 -
AHU HEATING (BUILDING LEVEL)

The central AHU heating data is specified for the whole building and is not accessible at zone level.
Coil type
The main central heating coil is located in the supply air stream, upstream of the cooling coil and after the outside air mixing box. If no central heating coil is used in the VAV system, then the option 1-None should be specified here. Otherwise this indicates the type of heating coil. It is unlikely that both a heating coil and a preheat coil would be used at the same time. The options are: 1-None - no heating. 2-Electric - heating coils powered by electricity (assumed 80% efficient, 0 distribution loss). 3-Hot water - heating coils supplied with hot water generated by a boiler. 4-Gas - gas-fired heating coils (assumed 80% efficient, 0 distribution loss). If you select 3-Hot water main heating coils, the program generates data to simulate the boiler and the pumps required to serve the heating coil.
Heating coil setpoint reset type

Select the type of automatic reset control for the central heating supply air temperature for CAV and VAV system. The choices are: 1-None no reset, use the Off-coil air temperature set point in conjunction with the Zone setpoint schedule. 2-Outdoor air temperature reset reset the heating supply air temperature to be lower than the design value when the outdoor temperature is milder according to the conditions defined below.
The default is 1-None. Take care when using 2-Outdoor air temperature reset as the resultant heating off coil temperature may sometimes be higher than the cooling coil temperature in which case simultaneous heating and cooling can occur if both are switched on at the time. This will not be obvious from looking at the heating and cooling off-coil temperature set points in the interface. In particular, if you also have an AHU cooling coil you must make sure that it does not operate simultaneously with the AHU heating coil by settings the appropriate AHU coil operation schedules.
Design off-coil set point temperature

When main heating coils are specified, this data defines the design temperature of the air coming off the coils assuming idealised control. Heating coils are automatically sized by EnergyPlus before the simulation to provide this off coil temperature given the flow rates in the air handling unit. You should make sure that this value is lower than the AHU cooling coil off-coil temperature at all times to avoid simultaneous heating and cooling.
Corresponding outdoor low temperature

When using Outdoor air temperature reset, this is the low outdoor temperature at and below which the Design off-coil set point temperature is applied.
Min off-coil set point temperature

Required when using Outdoor air temperature reset, this data defines the temperature of the air coming off the coils when the outdoor temperature is at or above the outdoor high temperature below. This value should be lower than the Design off-coil set point temperature.
- 282 -
VAV & CAV Heating
Corresponding outdoor high temperature

Required when using Outdoor air temperature reset, this data is the high outdoor temperature at and above which the Min off-coil set point temperature is applied.
VAV TERMINAL REHEAT COILS (ZONE LEVEL)

Reheat data is specified for individual zones.
Coil type
Use this data to either switch reheat off or select either electric or hot water reheat coils. The options are: 1-None - no heating. 2-Electric - heating coils powered by electricity (assumed 100% efficient, 0 distribution loss). 3-Hot water - heating coils supplied with hot water generated by a boiler.
If you select 3-Hot water main heating coils, DesignBuilder generates data to simulate the boiler and the pumps required to serve the reheat coil.
Zone damper heating action

During heating operation, there are two control options for the damper controlling the air flow in the VAV terminal unit as the zone moves above or below the zone setpoint. With both control options, the damper is at the minimum air flow rate whenever the zone temperature is between the cooling and heating setpoints. 1-Normal - the damper will remain at the minimum air flow rate during heating operation. As the heating load increases, the water flow rate in the reheat coil will be increased to maintain temperature in the zone until the maximum water flow rate is reached. The system essentially acts like a constant volume system during heating. 2-Reverse - the air flow rate through the VAV box may increase above the minimum air flow when the heating demand cannot be satisfied unless greater air flow is provided. As the heating load increases, the unit starts at minimum air flow and minimum hot water flow. The hot water flow is increased until it reaches maximum flow, then the air damper starts to open to meet the load. This option is used if the minimum air flow rate is not adequate to serve the peak heating load.
Note: you should switch heating 'on' if you want the zone to be heated to the heating setpoint temperature specified on the Activity tab.
RADIATOR/BASEBOARD HEATING (ZONE LEVEL) (DISABLED IN V3)

Radiator/baseboard heating is controlled to meet any remaining zone load not met by other equipment in the zone that have higher heating priority.Radiators/baseboards operate according to the same set of time varying zone heating temperature setpoints as the main heating system. To use radiant/baseboard heating switch on the option under the Heating header on the HVAC tab and enter information on:
Type
Choose between: 1-Hot water - where the radiator/baseboard coils are served by hot water from the main heating system. In this case you can also enter a radiant fraction to model radiant heat (more below).
- 283 -
2-Electric - where the radiator/baseboard coils are heated by electricity and heating is considered to be entirely convective.
Radiant fraction
Radiant fraction specifies what fraction of the power input to the radiator/baseboard heater is actually transferred to the space as radiant heat. The fraction should be between 0 and 1. This is the portion of the total power that is modelled as radiant, the remaining energy is added to the zone as convective heat transfer. The portion that is radiant heat transfer from the baseboard heater is distributed to people and specific surfaces using the remaining fields. This option is only available for hot-water radiator/baseboard systems. Technical Notes 1. Entering a value greater than zero will cause a the EnergyPlus ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water system to be used instead of the default ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Electric system as a post-process to the idf data. 2. The radiant heat is transferred to the floor, or if the floor is smaller than 1m2, then to the largest other surface in the zone. 3. A default of 10% of the radiant heat is assumed to fall directly on the zone occupants and this is subsequently convected into the zone.
LOCAL HEATING CONTROL (ZONE LEVEL) Heating operation schedule

VAV & CAV Cooling

HVAC tab in model data - Compact HVAC You can enter details on the cooling system including the maximum capacity (at zone level).
Cooling capacity
The Cooling capacity can either be entered by hand or can be Autosized using the Cooling Design Calculations. If, immediately prior to a Simulation the Cooling capacity has not been entered (neither by hand nor from a previous Cooling Design Calculation) then a Cooling design autosizing simulation is started to calculate the capacity. The Plant sizing building model option controls the way this works. You can change cooling capacities by hand if you wish but you should bear in mind that, by default, if Model Options change, all heating and cooling capacities are reset to zero. Set the Plant sizing model option to '2Manual' to avoid this happening. Psychrometric Chart.
COOLING PLANT (BUILDING LEVEL) Chiller

Select the chiller to be used to provide cold water to cooling coils. Only one chiller can be specified for the whole building in Compact HVAC, i.e. there is only a single cold water circuit served by one chiller in Compact HVAC simulations.
- 284 -
VAV & CAV Cooling
Chilled water setpoint temperature

Enter the chilled water setpoint temperature to be used for sizing the chilled water loop and associated equipment.
Condenser water setpoint temperature

Enter the condenser water temperature to be used for sizing the condenser loop and associated equipment.
Cooling tower type

Select from: 1-Single speed 2- Two speed The EnergyPlus equipment object types which are used are CoolingTower:SingleSpeed or CoolingTower:TwoSpeed.
VAV CENTRAL COOLING COILS (BUILDING LEVEL)

The central AHU cooling coil data is specified for the whole building and is not accessible at zone level.
Cooling coil type

The cooling coil must be one of: 1-None i.e. there is no cooling coil 2-Chilled water to model a chilled water coil.
The default is 2-Chilled water. Note: you can achieve 'free cooling' without a cooling coil by selecting 1-None but you will only get the cooling effect of the HVAC air on the zone if the outside air + any fan pickup is cooler than the zone air temperature. The difference between switching cooling off altogether (by unchecking the Cooled checkbox) and setting cooling coil type to 1-None is that in the latter case controlled free cooling is possible due to relatively cool outside air being introduced to the building but when cooling is switched off altogether there is no possibility of controlled cooling through the HVAC system.

This data defines the temperature of the air coming off the coils assuming idealised control. Cooling coils are automatically sized by EnergyPlus before the simulation to provide this off coil temperature given the flow rates in the air handling unit.
Cooling coil setpoint reset type

Select the type of automatic reset control for the central cooling supply air temperature. The choices are: 1-None no reset, use the Off-coil air temperature set point in conjunction with the Zone setpoint schedule. 2-Outdoor air temperature reset reset the cooling supply air temperature based on the following default rules. When the outdoor dry bulb temperature (ODB) is at or below 15.6C the setpoint is 18C. When the ODB is at or above 26.7C the setpoint is the Off-coil air temperature set point. In between, the setpoint is varied linearly. These control parameters are from ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix G par. G3.1.3.12. The specific off-coil temperature profile can be edited using the data below. 3-Warmest - reset the cooling supply air temperature to the highest supply air temperature that will meet the cooling requirements of all the zones (i.e. according to the cooling demand of the warmest zone). The
- 285 -
minimum setpoint allowed is the Off-coil air temperature set point (above). The maximum setpoint allowed is defaulted to 18C but can be overriden using controls below. For each zone in the system at each system time step the EnergyPlus set-point manager calculates a supply air temperature that will meet the zone cooling load at the maximum zone supply air flow rate. The lowest of the possible supply air temperatures becomes the new supply air temperature set point, subject to minimum and maximum supply air temperature constraints. The resulting temperature set point is the highest supply air temperature that will meet the cooling requirements of all the zones. When compared to a fixed cooling supply air temperature set point, this strategy minimizes zone reheat coil energy (or overcooling) and central chiller energy consumption (if the chilled water temperature is also reset) at the cost of possible increased fan energy. The 2003 ASHRAE Applications Handbook discusses warmest reset control for constant volume systems (p.41.27) and calls it "Supply Air Temperature Reset for Constant Air Volume (CAV)". A requirement is set out in ASHRAE Std 90.1-2004, Appendix G, paragraph G3.1.3.12: Supply air temperature shall be reset based on zone demand from the design temperature difference to a 10F temperature difference under minimum load conditions. Design air flow rates shall be sized for the reset supply air temperature, i.e., a 10F temperature difference. Tip: using Warmest or Outside air temperature cooling coil setpoint reset can drastically improve energy efficiency by reducing the cooling energy delivered to the airstream to the minimum required for occupant comfort. The DesignBuilder HVAC template default is Warmest for constant volume systems and None for other system types.
Corresponding outdoor high temperature

When using Outdoor air temperature reset, this is the high outdoor temperature at and above which the Design off-coil set point temperature is applied.
Max off-coil set point temperature

Required when using Outdoor air temperature reset and Warmest options, above. When using Outdoor air temperature this data defines the temperature of the air coming off the coils when the outdoor temperature is at or below the outdoor high temperature below. When using Warmest reset, this is the upper limit on off-coil cooling set point temperature. In both cases, this value should be higher than the Design off-coil set point temperature.
Corresponding outdoor low temperature

Required when using Outdoor air temperature reset, this data is the low outdoor temperature at and below which the Min off-coil set point temperature is applied.
OPERATION (ZONE DATA) Cooling operation schedule

- 286 -
VAV & CAV Humidity Control
VAV & CAV Humidity Control

HVAC tab in model data - Compact HVAC With VAV and CAV Compact HVAC systems, you can control humidity in zones by including separate humidification and/or dehumidification equipment and controls. Both humidification and dehumidification require settings at building level.
HUMIDIFICATION
To include humidification check the Humidification checkbox and make further settings. The humidifier is electric powered and the data required is: availability schedule, rated capacity and water supply rate. The humidification setpoint is defined on the Activity tab for each zone. You must also define the humidification control zone.
Humidification availability schedule

Select the schedule that defines the availability of humidification. The schedule values denote whether the humidifier can run during a given time period. A schedule value of 1.0 indicates that the humidifier can be on during a given time period. A value of zero denotes that the humidifier cannot be used during that time period.
Humidifier Rated Capacity

Enter the rated moisture output rate in m3/s or CFM. The humidifier does not currently autosize, so the default is very large to allow for adequate capacity. The default is 0.000001 m3/s.
Humidification control zone

The control zone to be used to control humidification.
DE-HUMIDIFICATION
To include dehumidification check the Dehumidification checkbox and make further settings. The dehumidification setpoint is defined on the Activity tab. You must also define the de-humidification control zone.
Control type
For VAV and CAV only one option is available: 1-Cool Reheat cools beyond the dry-bulb setpoint as required to meet the humidity setpoint if the system is capable of doing so. Reheat is provided as required by the terminal unit reheat coils if available.
Dehumidification control zone

The control zone to be used to control dehumidification. Note that dehumidification will result in simultaneous heating and cooling to achieve reduced humidity of the zone air. Note: EnergyPlus autosizing does not yet account for dehumidification so in many cases you will have to increase the Compact HVAC sizing factor above the default of 1.2 to a value up to 10 to obtain adequate cooling coil sizes, depending on latent loads and the dehumidification setpoint.
- 287 -
Note: If you use one of the reheat dehumidifiers you must have reheat available to heat during times when dehumidification is required. In practice this normally means having reheat available all year. Note: You may need to use shorter timesteps for accurate humidity control. We recommend 10 per hour.
VAV & CAV Night Cycle Control

Night cycle control (VAV/CAV)
The Night cycle control manager is used for cycling on CAV and VAV air systems when one or more zones become too hot or too cold. The usual situation is that the central air handler is turned off at night. However if the building gets too cold there might be condensation on the walls and other damage. Thus the control system is usually programmed to turn the system on if one control thermostat or any thermostat shows a zone temperature of less than a night time set point. Similarly there might be a concern about a building getting too hot. Again the control system is programmed to turn the air handler back on if one or any zone temperature exceeds a night time cooling set point. This data gives the user flexibility in determining how the night time on/off decision will be made. The manager can look at the temperature in one Night cycle control zone or it can sample all the zones connected to the air handler (Cycle on any). Enter the system behavior during times when the System availability schedule (above) is zero (off). The possible inputs are: Stay Off - the system will remain off, no matter how hot or cold the zones may be. Cycle on any - if any zone served by this system has an air temperature outside the cooling or heating set points the central fan will turn on even though the System availability schedule indicates the fan is off. Cycle on control zone - same as Cycle on any except the availability manager looks at the temperature in only the zone specified by the Night cycle control zone. Note that when using this option you must select one zone as being the Night cycle control zone. Do this by checking the option at zone level in the zone used as the control zone (below).
The default is 1-Stay off. The On cycle period is the time for which the system will run after it has cycled on. This is hard-set to 1 hour.
Mixed Mode
HVAC tab in model data - Compact HVAC You can include mixed mode natural ventilation and HVAC change-over control by checking the Mixed mode checkbox on the HVAC tab under the Natural ventilation header. Mixed mode is only available when Calculated natural ventilation is selected and (due to restrictions in EnergyPlus) currently works with CAV and VAV Compact HVAC systems only. The mixed mode control serves two purposes:
- 288 -
Mixed Mode
1. 2.
Prevents simultaneous natural ventilation and HVAC system operation, and, Allows you to test various ventilation strategies to maximize natural ventilation in order to reduce heating/cooling loads.
The mixed mode change-over controller links the associated HVAC system with the operable windows and vents in the zones served by the HVAC system. The controller overrides the natural ventilation controls for windows and vent openings, closing these openings under certain conditions and allowing the HVAC system to operate. If the controller determines that conditions are favourable for natural ventilation, then the HVAC system is disabled and the openings are able to operate based on the standard natural ventilation control mechanism (natural ventilation setpoint, maximum opening area, modulation etc). See also the Summary of Mixed mode modelling for background information.
Mixed mode control zone

You must select a control zone to define which zone conditions are used by the mixed mode controller for the HVAC system. Do this by going to the zone level and checking the Mixed mode control zone checkbox located near the top of the data on HVAC tab. You must select just one control zone per AHU. The selected mixed-mode control zone should generally have conditions representative of all of the zones served by the HVAC system.
Control mode schedule

This schedule determines whether or not for a given time the mixed mode ventilation control is to be applied. Schedule values equal to zero indicate no ventilation control, resulting in natural ventilation and HVAC system operation being performed based on their own controls. Schedule values equal to one denote temperature control for either cooling or heating, which is determined internally based on thermostat set point. The temperature control is restricted between the minimum and maximum outdoor temperatures provided in two additional input fields (below). Schedule values equal to two denote enthalpy control, which is restricted between minimum and maximum outdoor enthalpy values given in two additional input fields (below). Schedule values equal to three denote dew point control for either dehumidification or humidification. Schedule values equal to four represent outdoor ventilation air control. Schedule Operation mode value 0 No mixed mode control - HVAC and natural ventilation operate separately according to their own controls. 1 Temperature control for either cooling or heating - temperature control is restricted between minimum and maximum outdoor temperatures. When the outside air temperature falls below the minimum value or goes above the maximum value the openings are closed and the HVAC system operates. 2 Enthalpy control, outside enthalpy is restricted between minimum and maximum outdoor enthalpy values. 3 Dew point control, outside dew point temperature is restricted between minimum and maximum outdoor dew point values. 4 The minimum outdoor ventilation air for a given time in ac/h. The program calculates the natural (outdoor) ventilation in the controlled zone first and compares the amount of outdoor air brought by opening windows or doors and other small openings to this minimum value. If the amount of outdoor air from natural ventilation is less than the minimum value, the natural ventilation is shut off (i.e., the window or door openings are closed) and the HVAC system may operate if needed. Otherwise, the natural ventilation is on and the HVAC system is shut off. The amount of outdoor ventilation air entering the controlled zone is determined as air from outdoors and not from other adjacent zones. Therefore, this option is only applied to a zone having a window or door exposed to outdoors.
Close windows and vents when raining

Indicates whether the rain indicator in the hourly weather data is used to shut off natural ventilation. This can help simulate conditions where one would normally close windows to avoid rain penetration in a space. Any possible rain getting into a space will not be counted as a zone load.
- 289 -
Maximum wind speed

The wind speed above which natural ventilation is shut off. This can help simulate conditions where one would normally close windows to avoid wind problems in a space (papers blowing around, etc).
Minimum outdoor temperature

The outdoor temperature below which natural ventilation is shut off when the control mode schedule value = 1 (Temperature). This lower temperature limit is intended to avoid overcooling a space, which could result in a heating load.
Maximum outdoor temperature

The outdoor temperature above which natural ventilation is shut off when the control mode schedule value = 1 (Temperature). This upper temperature limit is intended to avoid overheating a space, which could result in a cooling load.
Minimum outdoor enthalpy

The outdoor enthalpy below which natural ventilation is shut off when the control mode schedule value = 2 (Enthalpy).
Maximum outdoor enthalpy

The outdoor enthalpy (in J/kg) above which natural ventilation is shut off when the control mode schedule value = 2 (Enthalpy).
Minimum outdoor dewpoint

The outdoor dew point temperature below which natural ventilation is shut off when the control mode schedule value = 3 (Dew point). This lower dew point temperature limit is intended to avoid dehumidifying a space.
Maximum outdoor dewpoint

The outdoor dew point temperature above which natural ventilation is shut off when the control mode schedule value = 3 (Dew point). This upper dew point temperature limit is intended to avoid humidifying a space.
HVAC Control Zones

HVAC tab in model data - Compact HVAC When using some Compact HVAC options you may need to specify a zone to be the control zone, i.e. the conditions in this single zone will be used to decide the operation of the HVAC system as a whole. The control zone checkboxes are only visible at zone level and for certain system types. To define which zone is the control zone for one of the 4 system types requiring this setting, you should navigate to the zone in question and check the check box as described below.
Thermostatic control zone for unitary system

Check this if the current zone provides the conditions used to control the operation of the Unitary multizone system. You should normally select a zone which is representative in terms of building temperature. In a dwelling, the central circulation area (hall/landing) is often a good location for the thermostat. However it is also important to note that if the zone selected as thermostatic control has no cooling selected then cooling for the whole building will not operate. The same applies to heating. So the zone selected here should also be representative in terms of the HVAC systems used to serve it.
Humidification control zone

The zone to be used to control humidification in Compact VAV, CAV and Unitary multizone systems.
- 290 -
Plenums
Dehumidification control zone

The zone to be used to control dehumidification in Compact VAV, CAV and Unitary multizone systems. It is now possible to use the same zone for humidification and dehumidification.
Mixed mode control zone

The zone to be used to control the operation of the change over mixed mode system.
Plenums
HVAC tab in model data under Mechanical Ventilation header - Compact HVAC A plenum is an air compartment or chamber including uninhabited crawl spaces, areas above ceilings or below a floor, including air spaces below raised floors of computer/data processing centers, or attic spaces, to which one or more ducts are connected and which forms part of either the supply air, return air or exhaust air system, other than the occupied space being conditioned. DesignBuilder Compact HVAC Unitary multizone, Unitary single zone, VAV and CAV systems can have air supplied and returned via plenums. The system supply and return plenums in the diagram below serve each of the 3 zones.
There are 4 types of plenum: 1. System supply plenum - a supply air plenum serving all zones in 3-VAV and 2-Unitary multizone system. If any zone supply plenums have been specified, the outlet from the system supply plenum will flow through the zone supply plenum to the zone terminal unit. The system supply plenum is defined at building level on the HVAC tab under the Plenums header and only one is allowed per simulation. System return plenum - return air plenums serving all zones in 3-VAV and 2-Unitary multizone systems. If any zone return plenums have been specified, the return air from the zone will flow through the zone return plenum and then into the system return plenum. The system return plenum is defined at building level on the HVAC tab under the Plenums header and only one is allowed per simulation.
2.
- 291 -
3.
4.
Zone supply plenum - a supply air plenum serving only this zone in 3-VAV, 2-Unitary multizone and 1Unitary single zone systems. The plenum zone is added to the supply air path after the system splitter or system-level supply plenum and before the zone terminal unit. The zone supply plenum is defined at zone level on the HVAC tab under the Plenums header. A zone supply plenum can serve only one zone. Zone return plenum - return air plenums serving only this zone in 3-VAV, 2-Unitary multizone and 1Unitary single zone systems. The plenum zone is added to the return air path immediately after the zone and before the system mixer or system-level return plenum. The zone supply plenum is defined at zone level on the HVAC tab under the Plenums header. A zone return plenum can serve only one zone.
When specifying a system or zone supply or return plenum you should enter a unique zone name. The zone does not need to be in the same block. The zone name you enter is checked just prior to the simulation and not before so you should enter the names with care to avoid mistakes.
Plenum modelling
Maximum of 1 system supply plenum allowed per simulation Maximum of 1 system return plenum allowed per simulation Each zone plenum can only serve one zone Set the Zone type of any plenum zones to 4-Plenum. This makes the necessary changes (remaining requirements and recommendations in bullet list) Plenum zones cannot be controlled. Use the HVAC template <None> to switch off heating, cooling and mechanical ventilation in all plenum zones. Remember to ensure plenum zones have no internal gains, occupancy, lighting etc. We recommend using the 4-Ceiling diffuser interior convection heat transfer coefficient for plenum zones to model the effect of fast moving air on surface heat transfer. You will probably find it easiest to use the Combined method for Floor/slab/ceiling definition for models using plenums as each surface element in the model has just a single construction and you don't have the confusion of Model data referring to 'raised floors' and 'suspended ceilings'. The floor of a ceiling plenum is the ceiling of the zone below so you will often define the plenum floor as 'Ceiling tiles' construction or similar.
If the building you are modelling has more than one plenum zone, each serving multiple zones you should use zone plenums. Use virtual partitions to partition the large plenum zones (which in reality serve multiple zones) into multiple plenum zones, each serving a single zone. See image below.
Red lines show the 5 zones of the occupied space. Each zone has its own return-air ceiling plenum.
- 292 -
Domestic Hot Water
This technique is also illustrated in the example file supplied with DesignBuilder Zone vs System Plenums Example.dsb. Note 1: when modelling plenums in DesignBuilder there is no need to add holes between the plenum and occupied space to represent supply diffusers or extracts. These are included in the model by EnergyPlus albeit as part of the system network. Note 2: it is not possible in DesignBuilder v2 to use the suspended ceiling/floor (as set on the Constructions tab when using Separate constructions) as a plenum - the plenum must be a completely separate zone.
Domestic Hot Water

HVAC tab in model data Simple and Compact HVAC The effect of hot water consumption (hot water taps, showers etc) on building energy use can be included in your thermal model by switching on DHW on the HVAC tab. When using Simple and Compact HVAC, Domestic Hot Water (DHW) is modelled in DesignBuilder by using hot water consumption rates based on the activity in each zone. DHW hot water consumption is defined on the Activity tab and the definition of the hot water generating equipment is described below) is defined on the HVAC tab.
Type
Three types of DHW are available: 1-Boiler - heat is supplied by the same boiler used for heating the building 2-Gas - gas-fired hot water system 3-Electric - electric immersion heater
Delivery hot water temperature

The temperature of the water supplied to the taps.
Mains supply temperature

The temperature of the water delivered to the building. This can be approximated to the annual average outside air temperature.
Operation
The operation schedules define the timing of the hot water draw off when the Timing HVAC + natural ventilation operates with occupancy option model option is not selected. The profile of hot water consumption in the EnergyPlus simulation is calculated from l/person/day data (gal/person/day in IP units) entered on the Activity tab by first estimating a typical number of hours per day. When typical workday schedules are used, this is simply the number of hours occupied during the working day. When 7/12 schedules are used the typical occupancy hours per day is determined from January Monday data. Note: When using a Compact schedule to define DHW operation DesignBuilder assumes a fixed 8 hours per day operation when calculating the maximum m3/s hot water draw off for passing to EnergyPlus. DHW volumetric consumption supplied to EnergyPlus is calculated as: DHW (m3/s) = DHW (l/day/m2) x 0.001 x m2 / (Typical hours per day x 3600)
- 293 -
Note: the zone DHW operation schedule is also used in Detailed HVAC with the default 1-Simple HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data setting.
DHW Type
A range of DHW types can be selected but note that different types of DHW system do not affect results in EnergyPlus simulations, apart from 1- Same as HVAC which causes heating CoP and fuel to be taken from the heating system. Other options all give the same results. 1- Same as HVAC 2- Dedicated DHW boiler 3- Stand alone water heater 4- Instantaneous DHW only 5- Instantaneous Combi 6- Direct (or off-peak) electricity 7- Heat pump
Natural Ventilation
HVAC tab in model data You can control the operation of natural ventilation using the data under the Natural Ventilation header on the HVAC tab. When using Calculated natural ventilation model option there is additional data on the Openings tab to control the timing and extent of operation of openings. Note: the Natural ventilation checkbox must be ticked here on the HVAC tab to allow window, vent and door operation to be defined on the Openings tab. The data shown under Natural ventilation on the HVAC tab depends on whether you are using the Scheduled or Calculated Natural ventilation setting in Model options. Both Scheduled and Calculated Natural ventilation options are available with Simple, Compact and Detailed HVAC options.
SCHEDULED
See the Video tutorial on Scheduled Natural ventilation. When the Natural ventilation model option is set to Scheduled,and for heating and cooling design calculations, natural ventilation is defined simply as follows: Check the 'On' checkbox under the Natural Ventilation header. Select the flow type Set the maximum zone natural ventilation rate in air changes per hour (if flow type is 1-By zone). Enter the operation information.
Find out more about Natural Ventilation Modelling under Modelling Issues.
Flow type
The Flow type defines the method used to set the maximum outside air natural ventilation rate. The options are:
- 294 -
Natural Ventilation
1-By zone - enter the zone natural ventilation rate in air changes per hour in the control directly below. The air flow rate is calculated from the ac/h data using: m3/s = ac/h x ZoneVolume / 3600 where ZoneVolume is the actual air volume of the space calculated according to options for optionally excluding floor/ceiling constructions. Note: this zone volume may be different from the value used for the purposes of calculating air flow rates for infiltration which uses the total zone volume.
2-Min fresh air per person - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air requirements as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as: m3s = MinFreshAir x NumberPeople / 1000 NumberPeople = Occupancy density (people / m2) * Zone floor area (m2) MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per person (l/s/person)
Scheduled natural ventilation is active at any time in the simulation when: The air temperature in the zone is higher than the Ventilation cooling set-point temperature (as set on the Activity tab under the Environmental Comfort header) AND ... The difference between inside and outside air temperatures (Tin - Tout) is greater than Ventilation delta T on the Activity tab) AND ... The operation schedule is on at that time in the simulation.
Note: to avoid temperature control of natural ventilation set a very low Natural ventilation cooling setpoint temperature and to avoid temperature difference control of natural ventilation set a high negative value of Natural ventilation delta T. The actual natural ventilation rate at any one time in the simulation is calculated by multiplying the maximum natural ventilation rate (ac/h) by the value of the operation schedule. When using the Typical workday Timing option, natural ventilation can be either on or off. When it is on, the ventilation rate is the 'maximum natural ventilation rate'. When using the 7/12 Timing option, it is possible to vary the natural ventilation rate between 0 and the maximum value by using daily profiles which have values between 0 and 100%.
- 295 -
Internal Windows, Doors and Vents

Airflow through external windows, vents, doors and holes are not modelled with Scheduled natural ventilation because the natural ventilation airflow from outside is explicitly defined (above). Internal windows, vents, doors and holes cause air to be exchanged between the two adjacent zones using the EnergyPlus 'Mixing' object. You can override operation of internal windows, vents, doors be off as follows: Window, Vent, Door position Internal adjacent to unconditioned semi-exterior Other internal Override Off Action Switch off the Natural ventilation 'On' checkbox in the occupied zone Unaffected by the Natural ventilation 'On' checkbox. Use the operation schedules on the Openings tab to switch off
CALCULATED
See the Video tutorial on Calculated Natural ventilation. When the Natural ventilation model option is set to Calculated, natural ventilation is defined as follows: Check the 'On' checkbox under the Natural Ventilation header. On the Openings tab by setting window, door and vent opening sizes and operation times.
You can override operation of windows, vents, doors to be off as follows: Window, Vent, Door position External Internal adjacent to unconditioned semi-exterior Other internal Override Off Action Switch off the Natural ventilation 'On' checkbox Switch off the Natural ventilation 'On' checkbox in the occupied zone Unaffected by the Natural ventilation 'On' checkbox. Use the operation schedules on the Openings tab to switch off
Note that even when operation is switched off as described above (or because operation schedules on the Openings tab are off) windows, vents and doors still provide a small flow path through the crack between the opening and the surrounding surface if the Model infiltration data is switched on. Note 1: For cooling design calculations, natural ventilation is always handled as Scheduled even when the Natural ventilation model option is set to Calculated. In this case you can still enter natural ventilation air change rates and operation schedule data on the HVAC tab but it is used only for design simulations. Note 2: With both the Scheduled and Calculated options, natural ventilation can be overridden to be off in Heating and Cooling design calculations. In Heating design calculations natural ventilation is switched off by default because it is considered to be a cooling mechanism - windows and vents will normally be closed during the coldest winter periods.
Mixed mode
You can also enter Mixed mode and data on opening Modulation under the Natural Ventilation header on the HVAC tab when using Calculated natural ventilation.
- 296 -
Air Temperature Distribution _Ref-1192162177
Control mode
For calculated natural ventilation the control mode defines the way that the openings are opened and closed based on air temperatures or enthalpy. The data can be entered at building, block or zone level. In the descriptions that follow: Tout is the outdoor air temperature, Tzone is the previous time steps zone air temperature, Tadjcacent zone is the previous time steps air temperature for the adjacent zone for interior surfaces, Tset is the zone natural ventilation setpoint temperature, Hzone is the specific enthalpy of zone air from the previous time step, and Hout is the specific enthalpy of outdoor air. The allowed choices for natural ventilation Control mode are: 1-NoVent - all of the zones openable windows and doors are closed at all times independent of indoor or outdoor conditions. The operation schedule is ignored in this case. 2-Temperature - all of the zones openable windows and doors are opened if Tzone > Tout and Tzone > Tset and operation schedule allows venting. 3-Enthalpy - All of the zones openable windows and doors are opened if Hzone > Hout and Tzone > Tset and operation schedule allows venting. 4-Constant - Whenever an opening's operation schedule allows venting, all of the zones openable windows and doors are open, independent of indoor or outdoor conditions. Note that Constant here means that the size of each opening is fixed while venting; the air flow through each opening can, of course, vary from time step to time step. This option allows modelling of a window that is opened for fresh air regardless of inside/outside temperature/enthalpy. 5-Adjacent temperature cooling - applies to interior surfaces only. All of the zones openable windows and doors are opened if Tzone > Tadjacent zone and Tzone > Tset and operation schedule allows venting. 6-Adjacent temperature heating - applies to interior surfaces only. All of the zones openable windows and doors are opened if Tzone < Tadjacent zone and Tzone > Tset and operation schedule allows venting. This option is a basic attempt to get round the EnergyPlus assumption that natural ventilation is always used for cooling and allow it to heat a zone as well. Note however that the zone setpoint is still used to switch off ventilation if the temperature goes too low (rather than too high as might be expected for a heating control).
For interior openings the zone temperature and setpoint used to control operation is that of the more 'occupied' of the 2 adjacent zones. Both of the Adjacent temperature control options (5 and 6) revert to 2-Temperature when applied to exterior surfaces. This allows these options to be set at building level.
Air Temperature Distribution _Ref-1192162177

HVAC tab in model data By default EnergyPlus assumes that air temperature within a zone is completely uniform (i.e. the air is fully mixed). The Air Distribution model data allows you to model stratification within a zone by setting up a temperature gradient which varies dynamically depending on: Outside temperature. Inside temperature. Inside-outside temperature difference. Heating load.
- 297 -
Cooling load.
How it works
Changing the Distribution mode to 2-Dynamic gradient reveals the air temperature distribution data. By default the Interpolation mode is 2-Inside-outside DeltaT. This means that the temperature gradient within the space is modelled as varying according to the inside-outside temperature difference. The Upper conditions define the most extreme temperature gradient, typically under design conditions. In the screenshot above right, the upper temperature difference is 10C and the corresponding temperature gradient is 4C/m. This means that when the temperature difference between inside and outside if 10C or more the internal temperature gradient is 4C/m. The Lower conditions data shows that when the temperature difference between inside and outside is zero there is no temperature gradient, i.e. the air is fully mixed. EnergyPlus calculates the temperature gradient for other inside-outside temperature differences by linear interpolation.
Operation schedule
The operation schedule defines the times when air temperature distribution is to be calculated. When the value of the schedule is 1, the distribution calculations take place, when the value is 0, the zone air temperature is fully mixed.
Thermostat height
Thermostat height specifies the distance above the floor where the thermostat for HVAC control is situated. This height is used by the model to determine the thermostat temperature relative to the mean air temperature by applying the gradient.
Return air height

Return air height specifies the distance above the floor where the air leaves the zone and returns to the air system. This height is used by the model to determine the return air temperature relative to the mean air temperature by applying the gradient.
Range of applicability
The air temperature distribution within the zone is used as follows: 1. 2. 3. To calculate boundary conditions for conduction through surfaces (walls, roofs, glazing etc). To include the effects of extracting relatively warmer air at the ceiling level when using Compact HVAC. To include the vertical position of the thermostat sensor for HVAC control.
Limitations
The air temperature distribution mechanism does not include: 1. 2. The effects of extracting relatively warmer air at the ceiling level when using Scheduled and Calculated natural ventilation. The vertical position of the sensor for ventilation control.
Detailed HVAC
When the Detailed HVAC model option is selected the HVAC tab is used only Natural ventilation and Air temperature distribution settings and the main HVAC data is entered by clicking on the <HVAC System> navigator node.
- 298 -
Detailed Equipment
Detailed Equipment
Equipment tab in model data (zone level only) Warning: This option is intended for modelling existing buildings where individual items of equipment have been recorded as part of a detailed survey and is not intended for general design simulation work. When the Gains model option is set to Detailed you can enter data on individual items of equipment in each zone. Details on editing Equipment data DesignBuilder has a software utility for recording and calibrating this data available on the Prerelease and beta test versions Downloads page of the DesignBuilder website. Note: For other modelling applications you should use the Early gains model option because data can be set at the building level and/or loaded from template with much less effort.
Edit Detailed Equipment

You can model time-varying internal gains and energy consumption of individual items of equipment in each zone by adding equipment data at the zone level on the Equipment tab. To add an item of equipment click on the Add toolbar icon, or if you are running DesignBuilder in Learning mode you can use the link in the Info panel to the right of the screen. This opens the Edit Equipment dialog:
- 299 -
You can define the category of internal gain (below), the number of items of equipment, the rated power per item of equipment as well as the operational schedule. The Radiant fraction is the fraction of heat emitted by the device as long-wave radiation. The rest of the heat is considered to be convective i.e. it is modelled as heating up the zone air directly. The Latent fraction is the fraction of the rated power which is converted to latent energy and affects the moisture balance in the zone instead of the sensible heat balance. Fraction heat lost is the fraction of the sensible heat emitted which is lost or vented directly to outside without affecting the zone heat balance. This can be used for modelling equipment such as fluorescent lighting with control gear which can have different higher energy consumption than heat gain into the space. A number of categories of gains are available. These are listed below together with the output data with which they are associated: Fluorescent lights - General lighting Tungsten lights - Task lighting Office equipment - Computer + equipment Computers - Computer + equipment Computer accessories - Computer + equipment Telecoms - Computer + equipment Lifts - Miscellaneous Catering - Catering Small power - Miscellaneous Heating - Miscellaneous Cooling - Miscellaneous Pumps - Miscellaneous Fans - Miscellaneous DHW - Miscellaneous. Process - Miscellaneous External lighting - Task lighting Other external - Miscellaneous Miscellaneous - Miscellaneous
Note that all of the above gains are modelled as scheduled gains in the zone and the data is reported as such in the program output. So for example categorising an item of equipment as DHW does not affect in any way DHW modelling as defined on the HVAC tab. Likewise data for Heating, Cooling, Pumps and Fans is simply modelled as a scheduled gain in the zone, completely unconnected with HVAC modelling.
- 300 -
Options
Options
Options tab in model data You can control the output data that is generated in the design calculations and simulations by making selections on the Options model data tab. Heating Design Output Options Cooling Design Output Options Simulation Output Options
Heating Design Output Options

Options model data tab Heating design output options apply to the whole building and are only visible at building level.
Include unoccupied zones in block and building averages and totals

By default, data for unoccupied zones is excluded from block and building totals and averages. Check this option to include data for unoccupied zones. This option can also be accessed from the Heating Design tab of the Model options dialog and on the Output tab of the Heating Design Calculation Options dialog.
Store surface output

Causes the following output to be stored for all walls, floors, roofs, ceilings, partitions etc: Inside Surface Temperature Outside Surface Temperature Glazing Heat Loss Internal Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient External Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient
Store opening output

Only visible when the Store surface output option is selected, this option causes the following data to be stored for windows vents, doors, holes, sub-surfaces:
Inside Surface Temperature Outside Surface Temperature Glazing Heat Loss Internal Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient External Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient
Warning: Use these options with caution on large models as, when selected, they will cause large amounts of data to be stored.
- 301 -
Cooling Design Output Options

Options model data tab Cooling design output options apply to the whole building and are only visible at building level.
Include unoccupied zones in block and building averages and totals

By default, data for unoccupied zones is excluded from block and building totals and averages. Check this option to include data for unoccupied zones. This option can also be accessed from the Cooling Design tab of the Model options dialog and on the Output tab of the Cooling Design Calculation Options dialog.

Causes the following output to be stored for all walls, floors, roofs, ceilings, partitions etc: Inside Surface Temperature Outside Surface Temperature Surface Heat Gain Solar Incident External Sunlit Fraction Internal Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient External Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient
Store opening output

Only visible when the Store surface output option is selected, this option causes the following data to be stored for windows vents, doors, holes, sub-surfaces:
Inside Surface Temperature Outside Surface Temperature Glazing Heat Gain Solar Incident Solar Transmitted External Sunlit Fraction Internal Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient External Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient
Warning: Use these options with caution on large models as, when selected, they will cause large amounts of data to be stored.
Simulation Design Output Options

Options model data tab Simulation output options can be accessed at building, block, zone, surface and opening levels giving you control of the elements in the model for which output data will be generated. The following options are available at building level only and the same options can also be accessed from the Simulation tab of the Model options dialog and on the Output tab of the Simulation Calculation Options dialog: Include unoccupied zones in block and building averages and total
- 302 -
CFD
Building and block output of zone data Report Surface heat transfer incl solar Environmental Comfort Internal gains Energy, HVAC Temperature distribution Daylight map output. When this option is selected it is possible to enter the number of grid cells in x and y directions. EnergyPlus is limited in the number daylight map outputs it can generate and if you request too many EnergyPlus may crash. You may be able to obtain more map outputs by reducing the size of the grids. DXF model output Construction and surface details RDD file

To obtain data for a particular surface or opening you should first navigate to that surface or opening and switch on the Store surface output option. This causes a table of results to be stored for that surface or opening but does not yet select any results. To do this select one or more of these options: Store opening output - at surface level and above in the model hierarchy, this is a default value for openings. It much be selected for a particular opening for any data for that opening to be generated. Inside Surface Temperature - for surfaces and openings. Outside Surface Temperature - for surfaces and openings. Surface Heat Gain - for surfaces. Glazing Heat Gain - for openings. Solar Incident - for surfaces and openings. Solar Transmitted - for window openings. External Sunlit Fraction - for surfaces and openings. Internal Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient - for surfaces and openings. External Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient - for surfaces and openings. Airflow in - for surfaces and openings - for surfaces it is infiltration and does not include the sum of the opening airflow in values. Airflow out - for surfaces and openings - for surfaces it is infiltration and does not include the sum of the opening airflow out values.
Warning: Use these surface and opening options with caution on large models as, when selected, they will cause large amounts of data to be generated and stored. Select only the data you need for the building elements of interest.
CFD
CFD tab of model options This tab allows you set various types of boundary condition for CFD calculations. If you have previously loaded simulation results as boundary conditions using the CFD Boundary Conditions Edit dialog then this data will be displayed at surface and opening levels.
- 303 -
The attributes that can be set on this tab are shown with the boundary condition type to which they apply. Note that all attributes are displayed at zone level and above in the hierarchy because these act as defaults, but at surface and opening level only the data applicable to the current object is displayed. Note: in current versions of the software any data specified on this tab does not affect EnergyPlus simulations
Inside surface temperature (internal surfaces)

Applies to: Internal surfaces, doors and sub-surfaces Default inside surface temperature for internal surfaces (partitions, internal floors and ceilings). It can be set for all levels in the model hierarchy from building level down.
Inside surface temperature (external surfaces)

Applies to: External surfaces, doors and sub-surfaces Default inside surface temperature for external surfaces (walls, roofs, external floors etc). It can be set for all levels in the model hierarchy from building level down.
Inside Surface window temperature

Applies to: Internal and external windows Default inside surface temperature for window surfaces. It can be set for all levels in the model hierarchy from building level down.
Average zone air temperature

Applies to: Zone Average zone temperatures are stored at zone level. These aren't used yet in CFD calculations yet but will be used in checks in a future version to ensure equal convective heat gains are considered in the CFD and EnergyPlus simulations.
Incoming air temperature

Applies to: Supply diffusers (types 1-3) and windows, vents, doors and holes Temperature of air entering the space through windows, vents, doors and holes.
Aperture position
Applies to: Windows The position of the window aperture in CFD calculations only. This data does not affect EnergyPlus airflow network simulations. Select from: 1-Top - the aperture is in the top of the window. Air flow in and out will flow through the top of the window. 2-Bottom - the aperture is in the bottom of the window. Air flow in and out will flow through the bottom of the window. 3-Left - the aperture is in the left of the window (looking from outside). Air flow in and out will flow through the left of the window. 4-Right - the aperture is in the right of the window (looking from outside). Air flow in and out will flow through the right of the window.
Aperture size
Applies to: Windows
- 304 -
CFD Boundary Conditions Editor
Enter the fractional size of the aperture relative to the overall window size to be used in CFD calculations only. Zero means there is no aperture and 1 means the entire window is open. This data does not affect EnergyPlus airflow network simulations.
Component Blocks, Assemblies and Boundary Condition patchs

Data on this tab is also used for entering boundary conditions for component blocks, assemblies and for boundary condition patches drawn onto zone or component block surfaces. For details see: Component Blocks and Assemblies as CFD Boundaries Boundary Conditions for Internal CFD Analyses
See also: CFD Boundary Conditions Editor Preparing Simulations to Generate CFD Boundary Conditions
CFD Boundary Conditions Editor

The CFD Boundary Conditions Editor allows you to view and edit all of the boundary conditions in the selected domain in one place. In particular you can: Check and set the airflow rate through each supply and extract boundary condition and also through each window, vent, door and hole in the selected domain. Check that total flow in balances with total flow out (a key requirement for the CFD calculations). If flows do not balance there are options to automatically apply a correction flow to one of the existing openings to ensure balance. Check and set the temperatures of each boundary condition where temperature is defined (surfaces, supply flow, windows, temperature boundary conditions). Import surface and opening boundary conditions for a specific time/date from a previous EnergyPlus simulation.
- 305 -
CFD Analysis Domain

You can select the CFD Analysis domain from previously defined CFD Analyses - this defines the extent of the model that is displayed and checked for flow balance. If you have more than one analysis then you must make sure to select the correct one here before starting. Alternatively you can select the whole building or the current block or zone. This selection does not limit the EnergyPlus simulation data that is imported, it only defines the boundary condition data that is displayed on the dialog and the domain for airflow balance checks.
Group
The Group options allows you to group boundary condition data by one of: 1-None - each boundary condition is displayed in a simple list without any grouping. 2-Boundary types - boundary conditions are displayed groups according to type (extract, supply, temperature, window etc). See screenshot above. 3-Zones and surfaces - the boundary conditions are grouped by zone and then by surface.
Under some circumstances the display can be erratic when using the 2-Boundary type grouping and in this case you may find it better to use one of the other grouping options. You can edit the flow in and flow out airflow rates and temperatures as appropriate on the dialog and the changes are only saved to the model when you press the OK button. No changes are made if you press Cancel.
EDIT BOUNDARY CONDITIONS Airflow

The Zone, Surface, Boundary and Boundary Type columns indicate the local of the boundary condition and it's type. You can edit the flow rates in the Flow In and Flow Out columns for windows, vents, doors and holes and the Flow In for supply diffusers and Flow Out for extracts. If flows do not already balance this will be indicated in red on the Info panel to the right and you can select one of the openings in the dialog and click on the Correct balance using selected opening link. A flow is added or subtracted as appropriate to get flows to balance.
Temperature
You can edit the temperature for all temperature-related boundary conditions. There are 2 temperature columns, one for surface temperatures and the other for air temperature. The air temperature column is only relevant for openings and supply diffusers and is the temperature of the air entering the space. Openings such as windows, vents and doors can have different surface and air temperatures defined. If the airflow rate through the opening is zero then you will not be able to edit the data in the air temperature column.
IMPORT ENERGYPLUS BOUNDARY CONDITIONS

You can import data that have been calculated in a previous EnergyPlus simulation as boundary conditions for the CFD simulation. The data that can be imported is: Surface inside temperatures of walls, floors, roofs, partitions, ceilings, windows, doors and sub-surfaces. Flow in and flow out of windows, vents, doors and holes (only when using the Calculated natural ventilation model option).
To import simulation data click on the Import button in the Boundary Conditions Editor (above).
- 306 -
Preparing Simulations To Generate CFD Boundary Conditions
Import Dialog
The Import data dialog allows you to select boundary conditions for a particular snapshot in time from the simulation results.
Interval
Select Hourly or Sub-hourly interval depending on how the data was generated in the simulation.
Time, Day, Month

Select the time and date to use for the import. The date must lie between the simulation start and end periods for the last simulation carried our.
Press OK to import the results to the CFD Boundary Conditions Editor. Note: all available opening airflow and inside surface temperature results from the most recent EnergyPlus simulation will be imported. That is the imported results are not restricted to the current CFD domain or zone (if this is a subset of the whole building).
Preparing Simulations To Generate CFD Boundary Conditions

You can use DesignBuilder simulations to generate boundary conditions for the CFD calculations. EnergyPlus simulations calculate the overall thermal behaviour of the building in terms of inside surface temperatures and natural ventilation flow rates then CFD allows you to 'zoom in' on the details of the temperature and flow distribution within the space for a particular snapshot in the simulation. The simulation data that can be used as boundary conditions in CFD calculations are: Surface inside temperatures Natural ventilation airflow rates through external windows, doors, vents and holes.
To obtain access to the above data the simulation must generate inside surface temperatures and any natural ventilation airflow rates to be included in the CFD calculations. Before starting you should decide on the extent of the CFD domain and the time period you wish to analyse. Then only generate simulation data for these areas and time periods.Otherwise, for large models you might generate an impractical amount of data and overload the software.
- 307 -
The steps required to generate boundary condition data from simulation are: 1. 2. If the CFD simulation is to use natural ventilation airflows through windows calculated by EnergyPlus then you must use the Calculated natural ventilation model option. Scheduled natural ventilation does not calculate airflows through individual windows. Because CFD calculations do not use infiltration flows you may want to switch off Infiltration treatment on the Constructions model data tab. This will help ensure that the flow balance with little or no need for extra correction flows to be introduced on the CFD Boundary Conditions dialog. It also speeds up simulations by reducing the complexity of the Airflow network in EnergyPlus. Switch off the Lump similar windows on surface model option to ensure that all windows are modelled individually. Prepare the simulation model data and carry out test simulations to check that the model is behaving as expected during the period of interest (e.g. summer design conditions). Look at hourly results. Navigate to the level in the model covering the CFD domain. If you are modelling a single zone in the CFD simulation, then navigate to that zone, if you are modelling a block then go that block or if you are modelling the whole building then go to building level. Then on the Options model data tab select the following output options: 6. 7. Store opening output - ensure that data for windows, vents, doors, holes and sub-surfaces is included in the output. Inside Surface Temperature - to store inside surface temperatures for all surfaces and openings in the domain. Airflow in - to record the flow in through windows, vents, doors and hole (natural ventilation calculations only). Airflow out - to record the flow out through windows, vents, doors and hole (natural ventilation calculations only).
3. 4. 5.
8. 9. 10. 11.
Once the model is prepared, click on the Simulation tab and request hourly or sub-hourly results and run the simulation. Check the simulation results by examining hourly results before feeding them into the CFD calculations. Check that airflow through windows is in the expected direction based on wind direction and expected wind pressures etc. Start the CFD Boundary Conditions Editor and follow instructions for importing the simulation hourly or subhourly results Add any assemblies or component blocks with any further boundary conditions needed to represent heat, temperature and flow boundaries imposed by HVAC, lighting and other equipment and occupants. Make sure you have the same total convective heat from your internal gains in the CFD model as you had in the EnergyPlus simulation. Check that CFD results correspond with the boundary conditions provided by the simulation. Note: It is not currently possible to set flow boundary conditions on internal openings. So although EnergyPlus calculates flow rates through interior openings, DesignBuilder CFD will ignore these flows and re-calculate them using a more detailed method taking into account distributed air velocities and pressures.This means that the flows through internal openings calculated by the CFD won't match exactly with the flows calculated by the EnergyPlus Airflow network. EnergyPlus flow rates through exterior openings are always respected by DesignBuilder CFD when used as boundary conditions. Note: Infiltration airflow is not modelled in CFD and if you are looking at summer time natural ventilation you may wish to switch Infiltration off in simulations. Winter time simulation may need infiltration included if it is significant.
Infiltration In CFD
DesignBuilder CFD doesn't include the concept of infiltration as cracks cannot be graphically defined and there can be no porous airflow through CFD surfaces as there can in EnergyPlus. Because airflow through cracks in
- 308 -
Assembly Library
simulations using Calculated natural ventilation can be significant, importing EnergyPlus opening airflows from simulations that include crack leakage can sometimes cause flow balance problems, especially in zones with only a single opening. It is therefore usually advisable to exclude the effects of infiltration from simulations that are to be used for setting boundary conditions for CFD. A warning message to this effect is given if you attempt to import simulation data generated using Calculated natural ventilation and infiltration. Another reason for excluding infiltration from simulations to be used for setting up CFD boundary conditions is that the flow is likely to balance much more easily without the need to add large balancing flows to one or more openings.
Assembly Library
DesignBuilder is provided with an assembly library which contains a small database of typical components that may be useful in defining a CFD model. Some assemblies in the library include thermal gains while others simply provide an obstruction to airflow. You can add your own assemblies to the library by selecting one or more component blocks and then using the Add assembly to library toolbar command (or Edit > Add assembly to library menu option). The assembly library data can be exported for use in other projects using the File > Export > Export assembly library menu command. The exported assembly library asl file can be loaded into other projects using the File > Import > Import assembly library menu command.
Model Data Management

Tools are provided to help manage the building model: Load data from template - load predefined data sets to the model from a template Clear data to default - clear data back to default values inherited from level above in model hierarchy) Merge Zones Dialog - control merging of zones from one dialog
Load Data From Template

Access the Load Data from Template from: 1. 2. 3. The Toolbar The Edit menu Mouse right-click in the Model Data.
Use it to load template data into the model. You can select one or more data sources from the following template libraries:
- 309 -
Construction Glazing Facade Activity Lighting HVAC
When you select one of the above templates as a source of data you must also set the template from which to load:
Target Object(s)
On the Target tab you can select the way you want to set data and, where appropriate, which model objects to load to. Selected object(s) - choose this option if you want to load the same data to one or more building, block, zone or surface. Check the boxes next to the target objects to select them as targets. Reload templates - reloads template data for the current building and all blocks, zones and surfaces in the building. Data is only loaded if the template selection is non-default. If the template inherits from the hierarchical level above, data is not loaded. Search & replace - allows you to search the model for particular data and replace with data from a template.
Selection tools are available to allow you to control the selection of building objects: Select all. Select all down to zone level. Select none.
Making global lighting settings

When you load lighting data from template you should consider that DesignBuilder sets the lighting output from the lights based on: a) Lighting system efficiency (W/m2/100 lux) using data from the lighting template and, b) Illuminance levels required in the zone as set on the Activity tab. If you have many types of activity in the building you can load lighting data for each zone taking into account the required illuminance level in the zone by selecting the appropriate zones in the Target tab.
- 310 -
Clear Data To Default
Clear Data To Default

The Clear Data to Default dialog allows you to: Clear Model Data Clear custom openings and revert back to default facades.
'Clearing to default' removes any 'user data' (shown in red) from the current object and instead default data is passed from the 'parent' object in the hierarchy (Model Data shown in blue). You can control the extent of the 'clearance' by setting the 'Clear Down to' data at the bottom. Leave this data as 'Surface level' if you want all data in the currently selected model object (including child objects) to be returned to a default state.
Merging Zones
Merging zones is the process whereby zones that are identified as being separate in the model can be merged together with other zones in simulations. This can help to simplify models and speed subsequent calculations. The Merge Zones dialog can be accessed from the Tools menu when on the Edit screen. It provides convenient access to the 3 ways of merging zones in DesignBuilder: 1. 2. 3. Merge zones of same activity model option. Merge zones connected by holes model option. Selective zone merging
These zone merging mechanisms are described below. They can also be accessed from the Model options dialog, though this does provide the controls for selective merging that are available from the Merge Zones dialog. Note that Selective zone merging is generally the preferred way to merge zones.
Merge zones of same activity

This option is a quick and easy way to reduce the number of zones, by merging all zones having the same activity template selection. It should be used with care as it could lead to a very crude zone merging with many zones lumped together.
- 311 -
Merge zones connected by holes

Use this option to merge zones that are connected by holes drawn at surface level (not the holes used to represent the airflow path in virtual partitions). You can merge one or more zones within the same block or across multiple blocks. Where holes have been cut in a floor surface to remove it so upper and lower zones can be merged, any small remaining border in the cut floor surface should ideally be removed from the floor area calculation for the combined zone. To do this, you should navigate to the floor surface and tick the option to Exclude this surface area from the total zone floor area in the Adjacency section of the Construction tab.
A tutorial illustrates the Merge zone connected by holes model option. Note: when merging 2 or more stacked zones using holes in the floor and the Merge zones connected by holes option, you should be aware that the combined floor area used to calculate internal gains in the simulations will exclude the area of any holes in the floor. In this case, if you require gains to be calculated using the total upper and lower floor area you should either ensure that the area of the hole is very small or else use the selective zone merging option instead and avoid using holes.
SELECTIVE ZONE MERGING

Selective merging controls can be used to merge zones irrespective of their activities or any connection by holes. This is done by assigning a parent zone for each zone group and then assigning one or more child zones to the parent to merge them with it. Note that once merged, zones can easily be un-merged again by making appropriate selections on this dialog. Once the merge has been applied, the parent zone will control the activity, lighting, HVAC and all other zonebased selections for the entire zone group. Constructions and glazing can still be applied to the child zones though.
- 312 -
Merging Zones
Creation of the Parent Zone

One zone must be selected to become the parent of the zone group. This zone must not already be either a parent zone or a member of an existing zone group. Selecting a suitable zone in the right hand pane will enable the Make Parent button located beneath the right hand pane of the dialog. Clicking this button will create a new entry for the parent zone in the left hand pane (The new zone in the left hand pane will be selected and highlighted).
Merging Zones
With a zone selected in the left hand pane it is now possible to select zones in the right hand pane to become members of the zone group. Zones to be merged cannot already be merged members of an existing group, however the parent of an existing group can be merged. Selecting a valid zone to be merged will enable the Merge button located between the two panes of the dialog. Clicking on this button carries out the merge and the newly merged zone will be shown on the tree in the left hand pane. If the parent of an existing zone group is selected and merged then the parent and all of its children become members of the merged zone group.
- 313 -
Unmerging Zones
A single child zone can be removed from a zone group by selecting it in the left hand pane, then using the Unmerge button located beneath the pane. Selecting the parent of a zone group then using the Unmerge button will remove all the child zones from the group but will not remove the parent itself If a parent zone having no children is selected, the text of the unmerge button changes to Remove Parent, and the parent zone can be removed from the tree in the left hand pane. Updating DesignBuilder Any changes made to zone merging settings are only applied when the dialog is closed using the OK button. Closing the dialog with the Cancel button discards any changes.
MERGING ZONES
When zones are merged using one of the above methods, combined merged zones are treated as a single zone in thermal calculations. When zones are merged, one of the zones is marked as being the 'parent' zone, and the other zones are 'child' zones. The child zones are marked in blue in the Navigator together with the parent zone they have been merged into as shown below.
This screenshot of the Navigation list shows the First floor zone, Second floor zone and Roof zones all merged into the Atrium zone. The parent zone is the zone that is used for defining Activity, HVAC, Lighting (and all other zone related data) for itself and all it's child zones. You therefore cannot access this zone-related Model data for merged child zones. You must go to the parent zone to edit the Model data for the combined zone. The internal gains are calculated based on the data set on the Activity tab for the parent zone but using the combined total floor area of all of the merged zones. Constructions, glazing and other surface level data can be defined separately in each of the parent and child zones in the normal way.
Why merge zones?

You may want to merge zones for various reasons: Speed up simulations. A geometrically complex space in the actual building is to be modelled using more than one block in DesignBuilder (e.g. dormer windows, atria). To reduce the number of zones and simplify HVAC system descriptions when exporting EnergyPlus IDF data for use outside DesignBuilder. If you have created a tall merged zone, you may want to use the Air distribution model data on the HVAC tab to create a dynamic vertical temperature gradient. This approach to modelling tall spaces is preferred over connecting a number of horizontal slices with air flow openings, because it does not rely on getting correct airflow conductances between the horizontal slices.
- 314 -
Load Whole Building Infiltration
Technical note When generating data for the calculations, surfaces between zones are defined twice, once from each side. Surfaces between 2 zones that have been merged are called Surfaces within zone. By default these are modelled in the same way as standard surfaces but with both sides adjacent to the same zone. If the Surfaces within zone treated as adiabatic option is set, the 'other side' in each of the 2 surfaces is modelled as adiabatic.
Disadvantages of merging
If done without consideration of the issues, merging zones can reduce cooling load peaks resulting in an underestimate of cooling equipment sizes required to condition the building (and associated energy consumption in a simulation). To understand this, consider a building in the Northern hemisphere with two zones, a North zone and a South zone connected to each other along the E-W axis. When solar gains are highest, the South zone may experience a cooling load and the North Zone not. Now imagine the same 2 spaces merged into a single zone. The combined single zone will now almost certainly have a lower cooling load than the load in the original South zone because the air and surfaces on the South side of the merged space is cooled by the shaded North side. As simple guide, where the temperatures, internal/solar gains, ventilation, HVAC system and other operational parameters in the actual separate zones are about the same as each other then the merging process should not affect simulation accuracy unduly, however, when merging zones which have different conditions and/or load profiles, the merging will reduce accuracy. In most cases, merging zones will speed up simulations but occasionally simulations can slow down, especially at the initialisation stage. This may be because any very large zones generated through merging can have many windows which can slow down solar and daylighting initialisation.
Merging rules
1. When merging zones using the Merge zones of same activity or Merge zones connected by holes, zones connected by the merge option are lumped together into a single 'parent' zone. In a vertical stack of zones the parent will be the lowest zone in the stack. The zone surfaces in merged child zones are generated in exactly the same way as they would have been without the merging but are associated with the parent zone rather than the original child zone. In child merged zones, you can access Constructions and Openings surface-based Model data but not space related data such as Activity, Lighting, HVAC. This is accessed from the parent zone only.
2. 3.
Effect of merging zones on EnergyPlus simulations

EnergyPlus IDF input files are generated without entries for child merged zones (they are not included in the simulation), but their surfaces, windows, doors are included and are associated with the zone description of the parent zone. So in a merged zone model, simulation results are not available for the child zone separately but are available for the overall merged zone. Results for the merged zone can be obtained from the simulation, cooling design and heating design screens either by clicking on the parent zone in the navigator, or by clicking on one of the child zones - the same data for the merged zone is displayed in either case.
Merging buildings
You can also 'merge' 2 existing buildings (including component blocks) using the Transfer blocks command from the Edit menu. See also Zone multiplier for a manual way to reduce models having similar zones and Boolean operations for how to combine blocks geometrically.
Load Whole Building Infiltration

The Load Infiltration dialog allows whole building infiltration data obtained from pressurisation tests also referred to as "blower door" tests to be entered and the appropriate infiltration rate is set in model data based on the infiltration data entry options selected. The whole building infiltration value must be entered in m3/s at 50 Pa
- 315 -
pressure difference (even if you have selected IP units). This flow rate is applied over the whole building and depending on whether the option to "Apportion infiltration to zones based on surface area" is selected, the infiltration flow is either simply set at building level (if the option is unchecked) or is applied differently to each zone depending on the amount of external exposed surface area (if it is checked). The infiltration flow rates are calculated from the entered whole building value using equations described in EN 12831 including consideration of the exposed area of surfaces in each zone, building height, wind exposure index and the infiltration units selected in model options.
Model Options
All Model Options are stored in the DesignBuilder dsb file and so any changes you make to the model configuration will not affect other models. You can open the Model Options dialog by: Clicking on the spanner icon on the toolbar (above). From the Edit menu. Pressing F11. All Model Options are stored in a single dialog but the options you can access depend on where you are in the model hierarchy. Some model options are stored at the site level: Options on the Display and Drawing tools tabs
Most model options are stored at the building level: Options on the Data, Advanced, Heating design, Cooling design, Simulation tabs
and some are stored at block level: Options on the Block tab.
So if you open the Model Options dialog when you are at building level you will not be able to access the Block Model Options. Likewise if you are at site level you will only be able to access the Display and Drawing tools tabs.
Model Data Options (Building)

Data tab on Model Options dialog. Use this dialog to customise the Model Data Options for the current building. You can edit the amount of detail in various aspects of the model: Model scope Construction and Glazing
- 316 -
Model Scope
Gains Timing HVAC Natural ventilation
The descriptions to the right of the sliders, taken together, provide a summary of the current model options.
Model Scope
Data tab on Model Options dialog. You can use the scope control to switch between whole building and single zone modes. 1. Zone - only the current zone is modelled and all internal surfaces between this zone and other zones are modelled as being adiabatic, i.e .heat is transferred into the wall mass as if the temperature of the other zone is the same as the current zone.. This option is only allowed if you are at zone level because the current zone is used to select the single zone to be analysed. Zone + Shading - as above but the surfaces of other zones are modelled as shading surfaces. This option models a single zone but includes shading due to other parts of the building and its shading devices. Note that if the single zone is part of a large complex building, simulations using this option are often little or no
2.
- 317 -
quicker to complete than the full building simulation. This is because the shading calculations required for the large number of shading elements used to model the rest of the building are slow. 3. Building - All zones and shading in the model are included in the simulations
To use one of the single-zone options make sure you are currently editing the zone you want to model. Note 1: When using one of the zone scope options, the model data that you actually see in the model is taken from the building level and not the zone level as you might expect. So for example having set this option, you may find that the zone data for the single zone model is different to the values that were set for that zone before the scope change. Note 2: A more flexible way to achieve the same effect is to use the Include zone option which allows more than one zone to be included in the cut-down model. Also in this case, the model data used is zone data rather than building level data as expected.
Construction And Glazing Model Option

Data tab on Model Options dialog.
Construction and glazing

The Construction and glazing model option controls the way construction templates are loaded on the construction model data tab. When the option is set to Pre-design you can load construction templates using the Insulation and Thermal mass slider controls. When set to General, templates are loaded by selection from a list in the usual way.
Floor/slab/ceiling representation
You can choose to model floors, ceilings and flat roofs each having a single construction or by combining separate constructions for floor, slab and ceiling. The options are: 1-Combined - all wall, floor and roof constructions are defined using a series of single constructions(Exception: ground floors can optionally have a ground construction added) without the complication of understanding how layers are combined. This can be easier to understand for new users and requires less input model data. You may also find it easier to use this option when assessing your building for compliance with energy codes because by default the combined constructions used have exactly the maximum U-values allowed by the local code. See the Combined Constructions section for more details.
- 318 -
Gains Data Model Option
With Combined constructions, the volume of the floor constructions can be included or excluded from the zone air volume used in calculations by making the appropriate setting under Zone volume calculations. By default the volume of floor constructions is ignored in the calculation of zone volume, i.e. for a single zone rectangular box block the zone volume is: Zone volume = Block height x (Block width - wall thickness) x (Block depth - wall thickness). When the floor constructions are to be subtracted from the zone volume then the volume of the floors are calculated by multiplying the construction Thickness by the surface area. The 3 options (shown in the screenshot above) are: Internal floor constructions not subtracted from zone volume - selected by default, this option allows you to include/exclude the volume of the internal floors from the zone volume. Clear this option if you wish internal floor constructions to be subtracted from zone volume. External floor constructions not subtracted from zone volume - selected by default, this option allows you to include/exclude the volume of the external floors from the zone volume. Clear this option if you wish external floor constructions to be subtracted from zone volume. Ground floor construction is below ground and is not subtracted from zone volume - selected by default, this option allows you to include/exclude the volume of the ground floors from the zone volume. Clear this option if you wish ground floor constructions to be considered as being within the zone and subtracted from zone volume. Keep option selected if the ground construction is to be modelled as being below ground level and not subtracted from the zone volume. For more information on the effect of these options and also some limitations see the Model Geometry Example section. 2-Separate - internal floors are defined in model data by selecting constructions for floor, slab and ceiling with air gaps. Likewise flat roofs are defined by separately defining the ceiling and roof details etc. This approach can be more economical in the number of different construction components required, but requires more input model data and more careful planning. When using this option you must first familiarise yourself with the meaning on the data as described in the Separate Constructions section. Choosing this option configures constructions in the same way as DesignBuilder version 1.2 and earlier. With Separate constructions, the volume of the floor constructions + floor void and ceiling constructions + ceiling void can be included or excluded from the zone air volume by making the appropriate setting under Zone volume calculations. Important Note: New users are advised not to use the Separate construction option. This is because it can be confusing trying to understand how constructions are built up with this option, especially if you do not check EnergyPlus idf data.
Note: the zone air volume referred to above is for calculating air flow rates for natural ventilation, mechanical ventilation and for infiltration. See also: Block and Zone Dimensions
Gains Data Model Option

- 319 -
Gains data
There are three levels of gains model detail: Lumped - all internal gains including occupancy, computer, office equipment, miscellaneous, catering process and lighting gains are lumped together into a single value. Solar gains are still calculated in the usual way.Note that with Lumped gains you cannot generate Temperature distribution and Comfort simulation output data. Early - gains can be defined separately under various categories (see above). Detailed - gains are specified by defining each individual item of equipment in each zone on the Equipment tab. If you select this option then DesignBuilder will automatically set the Timing model option to Schedules. Note that this option was developed for creating very detailed models of existing buildings based on survey data. Entering this data for a large building is very time-consuming and in most cases you will be better served by the Early gains option above. THIS OPTION IS INCLUDED FOR LEGACY MODELS ONLY AND WILL PROBABLY BE DISCONTINUED IN FUTURE.
Note: When using the Lumped Gains model option, Comfort data is not generated because in EnergyPlus the request for comfort calculations is made in the 'PEOPLE' statement and this is not used with Lumped gains.
Lighting gain units

There are 2 ways to define General lighting gains in DesignBuilder: 1. Watts per m2 - this used to be the default value in versions pre v2.1, where the General lighting gains are defined as W/m2 independent of the required illuminance level. This method has the advantage that the level of gains can clearly be understood by looking at W/m2 values and floor area. However it can cause problems when loading data from lighting templates (where lighting gains are defined in W/m2/100lux) in that if the activity is changed subsequently with a different illuminance requirement, the lighting W/m2 value is not updated. This led to the introduction of the second option. Watts per m2 per 100lux - the default option in v2.1 and later. Although the units W/m2/100lux may seem quite obscure, this method of defining lighting gains has advantages over using W/m2. Namely that the actual lighting level is associated with the lighting system type without the need to refer to the activity and hence illuminance requirement. So if a particular lighting system type is installed throughout a building but the building has a range of activities, it will usually be possible to enter the lighting W/m2/100lux value once only at building level, set the activity for each zone and still get realistic lighting gains. See General lighting gains for details on the calculation of lighting gains from W/m2/100lux, floor area and illuminance requirements.
2.
Occupancy latent gains

There are 2 ways for the sensible-latent split of occupancy gains to be defined: 1. Dynamic calculation - where the latent fraction of occupancy gains is calculated within EnergyPlus at runtime based on internal temperatures and metabolic rate. In this case the ratio of sensible to total occupancy gain will reduce as the internal temperature in the zone increases and at temperatures much above 30C all of the occupancy gain will be latent (occupants sweating). Fixed fraction - where the latent fraction of occupancy gains is constant regardless of internal conditions and defined on the Activity tab under the Occupancy header.
2.
Note: The total occupancy gain (sensible + latent) is not affected by this option, only the split of sensible vs latent gain.
- 320 -
Timing Model Option
Timing Model Option

Data tab on Model Options dialog. You can specify schedules in DesignBuilder using two approaches: Typical workday - where the timing is defined by a start time, end time, working days per week and seasonal variation. This approach is intended for easy early stage modelling of non-domestic buildings. Schedules - where Schedules can either be defined for each day of the week and each month of the year using daily Profiles or by using Compact Schedule format. Schedules are more flexible and can be used in other projects but they take longer to set up.
Generally if you start to find the Typical workday timing mode too restrictive you should switch to Schedules mode.
See also the Timing, Schedules, Profiles and Holidays Tutorial You can also request:
Timing HVAC + natural ventilation operates with occupancy

Select this option if all heating, cooling, natural ventilation and DHW operation follows occupancy. This option is only available if Timing is set to Typical workday. Note that HVAC operation data can modify the HVAC operation even when Timing HVAC + natural ventilation operates with occupancy is set. For example: Simple HVAC - Mechanical ventilation, Heating and Cooling operation have additional Days / week and seasonal operation data. Heating operation also has Preheat hours and Cooling operation also has Precool hours. Compact HVAC: Fan-coil units, Unitary single zone - Mechanical ventilation, Heating and Cooling operation have additional Days / week and seasonal operation data. Heating operation also has Preheat hours and Cooling operation also has Precool hours. VAV/CAV/Unitary multizone - Min AHU outside air, AHU heating/cooling, Zone setpoint schedules have additional Days / week and seasonal operation data. Heating operation also has Preheat hours and Cooling operation also has Precool hours.
These differences are applied as 'modifiers' to the basic occupancy schedule because HVAC systems generally switch on and off based on the occupancy time but with differences. e.g. Heating systems are often switched off in summer, they may operate during weekends when the building is unoccupied and they will often have a preheat period to get the building up to temperature before occupancy.
Internal gains operate with occupancy

Select this option if lighting and other internal gains operation follows occupancy. If you wish to enter specific schedules for lighting and/or other internal gains you should uncheck this option. For example there may be low levels of emergency lighting and some IT equipment usage while the building is unoccupied.
- 321 -
Natural Ventilation Model Option

Natural ventilation
Natural ventilation can either be 'Scheduled' or 'Calculated' Scheduled - the ventilation rates are predefined using a maximum air change rate modified by operation schedules. Calculated - the ventilation rates are calculated using wind and buoyancy-driven pressure, opening sizes and operation, crack sizes etc.
You should generally use the 'Scheduled' natural ventilation model option because it is quicker and easier to enter the related model data and also because the simulations run more quickly. However if you need to calculate natural ventilation rates which can be achieved with a particular configuration then you should use the 'Calculated' option. More on Natural Ventilation modelling.
Infiltration units
There are 4 different ways to specify infiltration in calculations not using the AirflowNetwork (Heating and Cooling design and Simulation with Scheduled natural ventilation): 1. 2. 3. 4. ac/h - the default option where infiltration is defined in air changes per hour (ac/h), i.e. zone volume per hour under normal operating pressures. m3/h-m2 at 50 Pa infiltration is defined as flow rate per unit exposed surface area, when the pressure difference between inside and outside is 50 Pa. Unit commonly used in the UK. m3/h-m2 at 4 Pa infiltration is defined as flow rate per unit exposed surface area, when the pressure difference between inside and outside is 4 Pa. Units commonly used in France and Belgium. ac/h - infiltration is defined in air changes per hour (ac/h), i.e. zone volume per hour, when the pressure difference between inside and outside is 50 Pa.
The selection made here will affect the units of the infiltration data prompted for on the Constructions tab under Airtightness.
HVAC Model Options

Data tab on Model Options dialog. HVAC can be defined in DesignBuilder using: Simple HVAC - the heating/cooling system is modelled using basic loads calculation algorithms. For convective heating systems and all cooling systems the EnergyPlus 'ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem' system is used to calculate heating and cooling loads. This supplies hot/cold air at predefined temperature and humidity for heating and cooling. See topics on Heating and Cooling for more on defining the condition of the supply air. Mechanical ventilation loads are calculated locally for each zone. When using the Radiant/convective heating system type the EnergyPlus 'ZoneHVAC:HighTemperatureRadiant' system type is used to calculate heating loads. With Simple HVAC, heat generator (typically a boiler or heat pump) and chiller fuel energy consumption is calculated from loads as a post-process using efficiency factors. See Simple HVAC Tutorial
- 322 -
HVAC Model Options
Compact HVAC - the heating/cooling systems are defined in DesignBuilder using moderately basic HVAC descriptions which are expanded into detailed HVAC definitions and modelled in EnergyPlus including boiler, chiller and fan part-load characteristics. Detailed HVAC - the HVAC system is modelled in detail using EnergyPlus air and water-side components linked together on a schematic layout drawing. In this case HVAC data is accessed by clicking on the <HVAC System> navigator node.
Detailed HVAC Activity data

This option controls how zone temperature and humidity setpoints as well as ventilation requirement and hot water consumption data is defined in Detailed HVAC. Two options are available: 1-Simple HVAC where zone temperature setpoints, ventilation requirements and hot water consumption rates for simulations are taken from the Activity and HVAC model data tabs. The advantage of this option is that the Activity-related HVAC data will typically already be set up correctly based on the activity selection and so a) there is less work involved in setting up the setpoints etc and b) the simulation outputs will be more comparable with any previous Simple and Compact HVAC simulations carried out. The downside is some loss of flexibility in setpoints (only 2 temperature setpoints per zone can be used - Setpoint and Setback temperatures). 2-Detailed HVAC where the activity-related HVAC data is entered on Detailed HVAC dialogs. This option will usually involve more work in setting up the setpoints etc but there is increased flexibility. For example it is possible to have a range of different heating and cooling setpoint values set up through schedules for different times of the day or year. It is also possible to apply different setpoints for Chilled ceilings and other cooling equipment and likewise for Heated floors.
The table below shows specifically where each item of Activity-related HVAC data is entered for the 2 options. Heating Heating setpoint temperature Heating setback temperature Cooling Cooling setpoint temperature Cooling setback temperature Humidity Control Humidification setpoint Dehumidification setpoint Ventilation Minimum fresh air per person Minimum fresh air per floor area DHW DHW consumption rate DHW operation schedule Temperature Control 1-Simple HVAC Heating setpoint temperature (Activity Tab) Heating setback temperature (Activity Tab) 2-Detailed HVAC HVAC Zone, Heated floor, Chilled ceiling dialogs HVAC Zone, Heated floor, Chilled ceiling dialogs HVAC Zone dialog, Heated floor, Chilled ceiling dialogs HVAC Zone, Heated floor, Chilled ceiling dialogs HVAC Zone, Heated floor, Chilled ceiling dialogs HVAC Zone dialog, Heated floor, Chilled ceiling dialogs HVAC Zone dialog HVAC Zone dialog HVAC Zone dialog
Heating operation schedule Heating operation schedule (HVAC Tab) Cooling setpoint temperature (Activity Tab) Cooling setback temperature (Activity Tab)
Cooling operation schedule Cooling operation schedule (HVAC Tab) Humidification setpoint (Activity Tab) Dehumidification setpoint (Activity Tab) Minimum fresh air per person (Activity Tab)
Minimum fresh air per floor area (Activity Tab) HVAC Zone dialog DHW consumption rate per floor area (Activity HVAC Zone dialog Tab) DHW operation schedule (HVAC Tab) Water outlet dialog
- 323 -
Heating Heated floors and Chilled ceilings
1-Simple HVAC
2-Detailed HVAC
Temperature Control (Simulation Calculation Heated floor, Chilled ceiling dialogs Options Dialog)
Note: For heating and cooling design calculations the humidity and temperature setpoints and ventilation requirement data comes from the Activity and HVAC tabs as described under the 1-Simple HVAC column in the above table, regardless of the Detailed HVAC Activity Data setting.
Specify Simple HVAC details

When using Simple HVAC, you can choose whether to specify some basic details on the system. If you activate this option then you will be able to specify: System type (convective or convective/radiant). Supply air temperatures for simulation. HVAC auxiliary data (below).
If you switch this option off then any heating or cooling is assumed to be entirely convective. This option might be switched off for early design stage architectural use to simplify the HVAC data entry.
Simple HVAC Auxiliary

When using Simple HVAC and you choose to specify Simple HVAC details (above), there are 3 options for modelling fans, pumps and other auxiliary energy associated with the HVAC system: 0-None - Auxiliary energy is not calculated. This option is typically used at early design stages where HVAC modelling may not be not required. 1-NCM - The only option in all versions of the software before v2.1, this option models auxiliary energy as a fixed annual per floor area energy consumption, with default values stored in the HVAC templates coming from the UK NCM. 2-Separate fans and pumps - introduced in v2.2, this option allows you to use the EnergyPlus fan energy consumption calculation and a basic W/m2 + schedule approach to modelling pumps and control equipment.
HVAC Sizing (Autosizing)

When using Simple and Compact HVAC, DesignBuilder can automatically calculate heating and cooling capacity in each zone based on the output from the Heating and Cooling design calculations. The Plant sizing model option provides control over how heating and cooling capacities are set for Simulations. Select from: 1-Adequate 2-Manual 3-Autosize 4-Autosize when not set
Note: In Heating and Cooling design calculations, heating and cooling loads are always met and so this option does not apply - it only applies to Simulations. The HVAC sizing options are described below.
- 324 -
HVAC Model Options
Adequate
The effect of this option depends on the HVAC model option. When using Simple HVAC, equipment is modelled as having unlimited capacity allowing it to meet any heating or cooling demand and setpoint temperatures are always maintained. This option can cause extremely large peaks in heating and cooling delivery to zones and will tend to over-predict heating and cooling energy and under predict discomfort hours. When using Compact HVAC this option is equivalent to Autosize and the Compact HVAC autosizing mechanism is used to size the components and flow rates to ensure that the required comfort conditions are met. No heating and cooling sizing calculations are required in this case.
Manual
Heating and cooling capacity Model Data must be entered manually. Choose this option if you have specific heating and cooling capacity data you wish to use and do not want it to be overwritten when model data or model options change. If you would like DesignBuilder to calculate the heating and cooling sizes and also maximum supply flow if you are using Compact HVAC you should follow this procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Switch to the Autosize option. Run heating and cooling design calculations. If you are using Compact HVAC also run a simulation. Switch to the Manual option. You should now see the heating and cooling sizes shown for each zone in the HVAC model data. If you are using Compact HVAC then you can also copy the Maximum supply flow in m3/s from the epluszsz.csv file. This can be found in the EnergyPlus folder straight after a Compact HVAC system simulation. The Maximum supply flow data is the bottom row labelled 'Peak Vol Flow (m3/s)'.
Manual Capacity - Compact HVAC

The most accurate way to define heating and cooling capacities is to use a Compact HVAC unitary single zone system. This allows the heating and cooling coil capacities to be directly transferred to the EnergyPlus HVAC definition without the need to convert to maximum air flow rates as in Simple HVAC. More on manual sizing with Compact HVAC
- 325 -
Tip: If you are using the Manual sizing option together with Compact HVAC and wish to use different cooling sizes to those obtained from looking at the output of previous EnergyPlus autosizing calculations (e.g . from eplusout.eio) you will need to ensure that the maximum supply flow is changed accordingly. If you increase the maximum cooling capacity but don't increase the Maximum supply flow rate (or even leave it as Auto) you will get "Rated air volume flow rate per watt of rated total cooling capacity is out of range" errors in the EnergyPlus simulation because the cooling capacity requested cannot be achieved with the specified air flow rate. Also due to a quirk in EnergyPlus, the Auto Maximum supply flow rate option does not work well with Manual sizing option and automatically calculated Maximum supply flow rates do not account for the 'higher than autosized' cooling capacity requested.
Manual Capacity - Simple HVAC

The way the DesignBuilder manual cooling capacity setting works with Simple HVAC is dictated by the mechanism provided by the EnergyPlus ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem that is used by DesignBuilder in Simple HVAC. The EnergyPlus ideal loads system specifies cooling supply conditions and maximum supply air flow rate, whereas in the DesignBuilder interface, the user enters a maximum cooling capacity. To convert from the maximum capacity entered on the dialog to a maximum supply air flow rate, DesignBuilder uses a formula: More on manual capacity and Simple HVAC
- 326 -
HVAC Model Options
MaxFlow = MaxHeat / (CPAIR * DeltaT * AirDensity) Where: DeltaT is Zone cooling setpoint temperature - Supply air temperature when cooling. MaxHeat is the user-defined cooling capacity. This equation works fine when the zone temperature setpoint is met, but when the zone temperature rises above the cooling setpoint temperature then the cooling supplied by the supply air will rise above the maximum value defined for the zone. Tip: A useful workaround to the above issue is to use a supply air temperature of 99C for heating and -99C for cooling. The higher temperature differences involved with these supply temperatures reduce the error when the inside temperature differs from the setpoint used. In this case, the larger delta T value helps to apply a more accurate manual capacity value in the above equation. With the above supply air temperature settings you should find that you get correct maximum capacity when the zone is heated/cooled to it's setpoint, but if the setpoint is not yet achieved then heating/cooling rates will be slightly higher than the maximum capacity value specified. Note: When using Simple HVAC with operative temperature control and manually entered coil sizes, the DeltaT value used in the above max supply flow rate calculation is reduced by 10C in DesignBuilder as a very approximate way to account for the lower air temperatures in the zone during hot days with high radiant temperatures. Without this correction, the effective cooling coil capacity would be reduced below the user-defined value when simulated air temperatures are reduced below the operative setpoint temperature to compensate for high radiant temperatures. This correction results in a (at times considerable) over-estimate of cooling capacity when zone air temperature is close to operative setpoint temperature.
Autosize
Autosize is the default option where heating and cooling capacities are always calculated prior to each simulation and the heating and cooling capacity model data is not displayed. When using Simple HVAC the heating and cooling design calculations will be run as required before the simulation to calculate the required sizes. When using Compact HVAC the components and flow rates are sized using the EnergyPlus autosizing mechanism to ensure that the required comfort conditions are met. In this case heating and cooling autosizing calculations are done internally within EnergyPlus and no extra autosizing calculations are carried out by DesignBuilder.
Autosize when not set

In this case heating and cooling capacities are autosized and loaded into model data following heating and cooling design simulations. If Capacity model data is not present before a simulation, it is generated by automatically by carrying out heating and cooling design calculations and is written into the HVAC model data. You should be aware that when using the Autosize when not set option, the heating/cooling zone capacity model data is not treated the same way as other calculated results. In general, calculated results are deleted when any edit is made to the building model, but this is not the case for zone capacity model data. This is only updated when: 1. There is no heating/cooling capacity data (the value is either blank or zero when heating/cooling is switched on) and a simulation is requested. In this case the appropriate design calculations are carried out to fill in the capacity data, before the simulation. The appropriate design calculation is carried out by clicking on the Heating/Cooling design tab. Model Options change. In this case zone HVAC capacity is deleted.
2. 3.
If you always want the heating capacity to be kept up-to-date with your model and do not have any specific capacity sizes you wish to use, you should consider using the Autosize option. This will cause autosizing to be carried out prior to every simulation.
- 327 -
You can change heating capacities by hand if you wish but you should bear in mind that, if Model options change, all heating and cooling capacities are reset to zero. Set the option to Manual to avoid this happening.
Advanced Concepts (Building)

Advanced tab on Model Options dialog. Simplification - options to allow zones to be merged and for controlling lumping of similar windows, openings and cracks and eliminating unnecessary zones and elements from the model. Natural ventilation - options to control the operation of natural ventilation. Miscellaneous Edit - options for controlling data displayed. Lighting - options for lighting. Filters - excluding elements from the model.
This data applies to the current building.
Simplification
Advanced tab on Model Options dialog. You can simplify and speed up simulations (sometimes quite significantly) by lumping zones, walls and windows and/or eliminating unnecessary zones and elements from the model. The following options are available:
Merge zones of same activity

This option reduces the number of zones by merging zones having the same activity.
Merge zones connected by holes

This option merges zones which are connected by holes drawn at surface level (not the holes used to represent the airflow path in virtual partitions). You can merge one or more zones within the same block or across multiple blocks.
A tutorial illustrates the Merge zone connected by holes model option.
Merge zone by selection

Check this option if zones are to be merged by selection using the Merge zones dialog.
Lump similar windows on surface

Causes all windows on a zone surface having the same area, construction, frame/dividers, shading etc to be lumped into a single opening. Lumping only occurs in zones which have no lighting control. The EnergyPlus Window Multiplier mechanism is used. For models having surfaces with many similar windows this option can provide a worthwhile reduction in simulation times. Note: With Calculated natural ventilation you should not use this option if you have repeated windows having same size, glazing type and shading on a surface but different % Glazing opens and/or Operation schedule because any differences in the natural ventilation settings are not accounted for when checking for similar windows on a surface.
- 328 -
Simplification
DesignBuilder does not allow a multiplier for windows to be used for zones with daylight lighting control or if the 3Full interior and exterior Solar distribution option is set. This is because for daylight control or Full interior and exterior Solar distribution, EnergyPlus must know where each of the individual windows is located to properly calculate the solar and visible light transmitted. This is currently the only 'Simplification' option switched on by default for new models.
Lump similar cracks

This option causes all cracks in a zone which are facing the same direction and have similar height to be lumped into a single crack. This option applies only when the natural ventilation model option is Calculated.
Lump walls and windows (developer option)

Reduces the number of walls and windows. This is currently a research only tool because it has undocumented restrictions. It is not available for general users
Generate fully enclosed zones

Check the Generate fully enclosed zones checkbox to model Link surfaces. This has 2 main effects on the model: 1. 2. Extra Link surfaces are generated to connect adjacent blocks together for both visual continuity and to allow fully closed zones to be generated. The volume enclosed by the link surfaces and the inter-block partition is included in the zone volume. This volume is essentially the thickness of the block wall x inter-block partition area).
Model 'semi-exterior unconditioned' zones as simple R-value to outside

Including complex roof structures in the model can sometimes cause simulations to run slowly for little benefit in accuracy. This option allows you to exclude such spaces from the calculations adding in their place a single Rvalue resistance to outside. The resistance can be used as a way to include the 'buffering' of the occupied space by the semi-exterior zones without sacrificing simulation speeds. This option can be very useful for speeding data entry for simple calculation methods like SBEM. Note: Any openings (window, doors, vents, sub-surfaces and holes) in semi-exposed surfaces do not include the additional R-Value when this option is selected. By default this option is off and roofspace zones (and all other semi-exposed unconditioned zones) are modelled as separate zones in calculations.
R-Value to outside
The R-value added to the outside of semi-exposed elements when Model 'semi-exterior unconditioned' zones as simple R-value to outside option (above) is set. You can enter an R-Value of 0 if you don't want to include a resistance between semi-exposed elements and outside. In this case it your responsibility to include the effect of the adjacent semi-exterior unconditioned zone in the semi-exposed constructions themselves. Tip: You can calculate approximations for R-Value to outside by adjusting the R-Value until the results match those of the equivalent simulation with Model 'semi-exterior unconditioned' zones as simple R-value to outside switched off.
- 329 -
Natural Ventilation Options

Advanced tab on Model Options dialog.
Model holes (including holes in virtual partitions)

You can optionally switch off all holes in the model including those holes generated by defining partitions as virtual partitions. In this case the building is modelled as if no holes were defined. Tip: Unchecking this data can be a quick way to model virtual partitions as standard partitions.
CALCULATED NATURAL VENTILATION OPTION Wind Factor

When carrying out conservative design simulations you may prefer to exclude (or reduce) the effects of wind from Calculated natural ventilation. To exclude wind-driven airflow from the analysis altogether set the Wind factor to 0. For full treatment of wind effects set it to 1 and for intermediate treatment of wind set to a number between 0 and 1.
Modulation of Openings
You can modulate the window/door openings when using Calculated natural ventilation by making appropriate settings to: Modulate opening areas - switch on modulation by checking this option. Limit value of opening modulation factor - gives the reduction on opening area for low outside air temperatures. Lower value of Tin-Tout - lower value on inside/outside temperature difference for modulating the venting open factor. Upper value of Tin-Tout - upper value on inside/outside temperature difference for modulating the venting open factor (defines 'low outside air temperatures')
This data is used within EnergyPlus to calculate a factor between 0 and 1 that multiplies the opening factor of each window and door in the building. Modulation of the openings can reduce the large temperature swings that can occur if the windows/doors are too far open when they are venting, especially when there is a large insideoutside temperature difference. This can avoid discomfort due to introduction of cold air and/or prevent heating system operation in summer when not really required.
- 330 -
Natural Ventilation Options
Temperature difference (Tin - Tout) Tin - Tout <= [Lower value of Tin - Tout] [Lower value of Tin - Tout] < Tin - Tout < [Upper value of Tin Tout] Tin - Tout >= [Upper Value of Tin - Tout]
Opening Multiplier 1.0 Factor varies linearly from 1.0 to Limit value of Opening modulation factor. Factor = Limit value of opening modulation factor.
For example if the Lower value of Tin - Tout is 0, the Upper value is 15 and the Limit value of opening modulation factor is 0.05, the windows and doors are only opened 5% of their full opening area when the outside air is 15K colder than inside.When the inside and outside temperatures are the same the windows are open to their maximum opening area and when the temperature difference is 7.5K the windows are opened halfway between these extremes. Important Notes 1. The purpose of the Modulate option is to prevent discomfort due to very cold air being introduced into the zone. You should keep in mind though that this control will also prevent ventilation when the temperature in the space is very hot and the outside air is not particularly cold because of the large temperature difference between inside and outside. For example if the upper modulation temperature difference is 15K and the limiting modulation factor is 0.05 then the maximum window and vent opening area will be reduced to 5% of their normal size if the temperature in the zone is 35C and the temperature outside is 20C. In this case the natural ventilation through the 'almost closed' openings would probably not be adequate to cool the zone back down again. So you should not use this option if you wish natural ventilation to occur when the temperature inside is very high. 2. 3. With Modulation active, openings will be completely closed if the difference between inside and outside air temperatures is greater than Upper value of Tin-Tout. While the modulation graph above shows the opening factor to be 1 when the inside temperature is greater than outside temperature, by default the natural ventilation openings will all be closed in this case based on the 2-Temperature control mode.
- 331 -
This modulation data can also be accessed from the HVAC tab under the Natural Ventilation > Options headers in v.1.8.1 and later.
Airflow through internal openings

When using Scheduled natural ventilation, windows, vents, doors and holes in internal partitions can be modelled by mixing a predefined amount of air from one zone with the adjacent zone by selecting the Airflow through internal openings option and entering the Airflow rate per opening area. Technical note: this airflow is modelled using the EnergyPlus Mixing option.
Lighting
Working plane height

You can set the height of the working plane (and hence the z-position of the lighting sensor). The x-y coordinate is set by placing the Lighting sensor marker(s) at zone level. This data is used for EnergyPlus daylighting simulations only and is not used in Radiance daylighting where a separate value is used.
Filters
Exclude surface elements smaller than

You can also filter out very small surfaces from the simulations (and from the Navigator panel) by defining a minimum area. Experience suggests that a value of 0.05 is a good default. If you set the limit much lower than this you will run the risk of including very small surface slivers in the calculations. These can cause problems with EnergyPlus.
Component Blocks - Model Options

Fraction two largest areas

A component block is considered 'flat' when its' 2 largest surfaces make up most of the total surface area of the component block. The Fraction two largest areas data defines the meaning of 'most'. The default value of 0.8 means that when the two largest equal areas make up 80% or more of the total surface area of the component block then the block is considered to be 'flat' and only one of the 2 surfaces will be modelled. Which of these surfaces is used in the calculations defined by Flat component block surface selection.
Flat component block surface selection

For flat component blocks DesignBuilder uses the selection made here to decide which of the 2 largest surfaces of the component block is used in the simulation as a shading surface. Choose from: 1-Highest - the upper of the 2 largest surfaces is used. 2-Lowest - the lower of the 2 largest surfaces is used.
- 332 -
Heating Design Calculation Options (Building)
Heating Design Calculation Options (Building)

Heating Design tab on Model Options dialog. Data on this tab allows you to control the Heating Design calculations. Winter Design Day Calculation Options Heating system sizing Advanced Calculation Options Output Options
This data is also shown before Heating Design Calculations.
Winter Design Day

Schedule types for Compact HVAC Autosizing (Compact and Typical workday Schedules)
This series of options allows you control which 7/12 Schedules are switched on during Compact HVAC heating autosizing. 7/12 Schedules are categorised using the following categories when using the End-use defaults option: General - include general purpose schedules in Compact HVAC heating autosizing calculations - on by default. Occupancy - include occupancy schedules - off by default Lighting - include lighting schedules - off by default. Equipment - include equipment schedules - off by default. Heating demand - include heating demand schedules - on by default. Cooling demand - include cooling demand schedules - on by default. HVAC - HVAC schedules - on by default. Natural ventilation demand - natural ventilation schedules - off by default. DHW - DHW schedules - on by default.
For example, occupancy gains should normally be excluded when sizing heating plant to ensure that the design heating plant meets all heating loads itself. So leave the Occupancy check box unchecked. Heating and cooling demand schedules must be included to ensure the system operates so the Heating demand and Cooling demand options should normally left selected. These options are also used for Typical workday schedules. Note: Some users find this system of categories confusing and so generally you are advised to use either the 2Profiles option where the schedule operation during heating and cooling are defined explicitly using a profile or use compact schedules where again heating and cooling design operation is defined explicitly.
Heating System Sizing

Heating Design tab on Model Options dialog.
- 333 -
Design margin
The Heating Design margin is used to multiply calculated steady state heating loads in each zone to give a recommended heating plant size. It accounts for the additional heat required to bring the building up to temperature in a reasonably short preheat period and allows you to be confident that comfort conditions will be maintained in all but the most extreme winter conditions.
Heating Design Output Options

Include unoccupied zones in block and building totals and averages
By default data for unoccupied zones is excluded from block and building totals and averages. Check this option to include data for unoccupied zones. A zone is defined as unoccupied if it has: No occupancy and, No cooling and, No heating and, No mechanical ventilation
Note: if you uncheck this option and all zones in the model are unoccupied then you will get a 'Zero floor area error' message
Cooling Design Calculation Options (Building)

Cooling Design tab on Model Options dialog. Data on this tab allows you to control the Cooling Design calculations: Summer Design Day Calculation Options Cooling system sizing Solar Options Advanced Calculation Options Output Options
This data can also be accessed before Cooling Design Calculations.
Summer Design Day

Day
Select the day of the month for the design day
Month
Select the month for the design day
Day of week
Select the day of week. This is used to identify the appropriate daily profile.
- 334 -
Cooling System Sizing
Cooling System Sizing

Cooling Design tab on Model Options dialog.
Design margin
The Cooling Design margin is a 'safety factor' used to multiply calculated cooling loads in each zone to give a recommended maximum cooling equipment capacity. It accounts for the additional cooling required to cool the building down in a reasonably short pre-cool period and allows you to be confident that comfort conditions will be maintained in all but the most extreme summer conditions (risk depends on the Summer Design Weather Data options selected at site level).
Sizing method
Sizing methods available are: 1-ASHRAE - standard 'Heat Balance' method implemented in EnergyPlus. 2-Unitary DX - calculations are made through a detailed EnergyPlus simulation using Unitary DX equipment. 3-VAV - detailed EnergyPlus simulation using VAV equipment. 4-Fan coil - detailed EnergyPlus simulation using Fan coil equipment.
Note: you do not need to have the Compact HVAC model option set to use the detailed cooling load sizing options 2, 3 and 4 above.
ASHRAE Cooling Sizing

In the ASHRAE cooling sizing method the cooling design load calculations are carried out using the standard ASHRAE Heat Balance method implemented in EnergyPlus using the 'ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem' system type. You can define the conditions of the supply air delivered to cooled zones using Design supply temperature and Supply air humidity ratio. The total (sensible + latent) load is calculated as the enthalpy change between the zone return air and the specified supply air condition for the current load. The ASHRAE system is modelled assuming: No economiser, No heat recovery, No heating, Zero pressure rise fan, No humidification/dehumidification, Zone plenums will not be used if specified, Outside airflow rate and operation schedule defined by the data under the Mechanical Ventilation and Natural ventilation headers on the HVAC tab at the zone level, Cooling coil availability defined by the schedule under the Cooling header on the HVAC tab at the zone level, Zone design cooling temperature setpoints are defined by the data under Environmental Control on the Activity tab.
- 335 -
SUPPLY AIR CONDITIONS

Caution: The Ideal Loads Air System component does not control zone humidity levels. The Ideal Loads Air System component total cooling load is simply the enthalpy change between the return air and the user-specified supply air condition for the current load. The latent load is the total load less the sensible load and may be positive or negative.

The constant dry-bulb air temperature of the air supplied for cooling the zone.

The constant humidity ratio (mass of water per mass of dry air) of the cold supply air to be delivered when cooling is required. The default humidity ratio is 0.008. You should be careful to enter a value that is a valid condition, i.e. it is under the 100% saturation line on the Psychrometric Chart. Cautionary Note: The EnergyPlus Ideal Loads Air System component used for these calculations does not control zone humidity levels. Total cooling load is simply calculated as the enthalpy change between the return air condition and the user-specified supply air condition for the current load. The latent load is the total load less the sensible load and may be positive or negative.
Unitary DX Cooling Sizing

When using the Unitary DX cooling sizing method the Cooling design calculation is made through a detailed EnergyPlus simulation using Compact HVAC Single zone Unitary DX equipment. A diagram of the system layout used is shown in the Unitary Single Zone topic. Each zone has it's own Unitary system with a fan (generating no pickup), a DX cooling coil, an outside air controller and a damper to reduce supply air flow. More specifically: No economiser, No heat recovery, No heating coil, Zero pressure rise fan, No humidification/dehumidification, Zone plenums will be used if specified, Outside airflow rate and operation schedule defined by the data under the Mechanical Ventilation and Natural ventilation headers on the HVAC tab at the zone level, Cooling coil availability defined by the schedule under the Cooling header on the HVAC tab at the zone level, Zone design cooling temperature setpoints are defined by the data under Environmental Control on the Activity tab.
Note: Unitary DX will tend to calculate higher latent loads than the other 3 cooling sizing methods and the zone air humidity will generally be lower. This is because DX coils run colder than water-cooled coils and will condense out more water from the supply air. Unitary DX can often be used to provide a conservative calculation for the latent cooling loads.
- 336 -
VAV Cooling Sizing
VAV Cooling Sizing

When using the VAV cooling sizing method, the Cooling design calculation is made through a detailed EnergyPlus simulation using Compact HVAC VAV equipment. A diagram of the system layout used is shown in the VAV topic. Each zone has it's own VAV AHU with a fan (generating no pickup), a water-cooled AHU cooling coil, an outside air controller and a zone terminal box with a damper to reduce supply air flow. More specifically: No economiser, No heat recovery, No AHU heating coil, No reheat coil, No preheat coil, Zero pressure rise fan, No humidification/dehumidification, Standard zone terminal unit, Zone plenums will be used if specified, Outside airflow rate and operation schedule defined by the data under the Mechanical Ventilation and Natural ventilation headers on the HVAC tab at the zone level, Cooling coil availability defined by the schedule under the Cooling header on the HVAC tab at the zone level, Zone design cooling temperature setpoints are defined by the data under Environmental Control on the Activity tab.
Design supply temperature

The constant dry-bulb air temperature of the air supplied for cooling the zone
Design turndown ratio (supply air minimum flow fraction)

The Design turndown ratio is the fraction that the zone VAV box can reduce to based on the supply air maximum flow rate. It is normally specified to meet the minimum ventilation requirement for the occupants. A value of 1.0 means that the VAV box cannot reduce supply air at all (i.e. it is a constant volume system). Turndown ratio is typically in range 0.3 - 0.5. Minimum is 0 and maximum is 1.
Fan Coil Cooling Sizing

When using the Fan coil cooling sizing method, the Cooling design calculation is made through a detailed EnergyPlus simulation using Compact HVAC Fan coil equipment. A diagram of the system layout used is shown in the Fan Coil Units topic. Each zone has it's own Fan coil unit with a fan (generating no pickup), a water-cooled cooling coil, an outside air controller and a zone terminal box with a damper to reduce supply air flow. More specifically: No economiser, No heat recovery, No heating coil, Zero pressure rise fan, No humidification/dehumidification, Outside airflow rate and operation schedule defined by the data under the Mechanical Ventilation and Natural ventilation headers on the HVAC tab at the zone level (see note below about outside fan coil unit air flow rates),
- 337 -
Cooling coil availability defined by the schedule under the Cooling header on the HVAC tab at the zone level, Zone design cooling temperature setpoints are defined by the data under Environmental Control on the Activity tab.
Design supply temperature

The constant dry-bulb air temperature of the air supplied for cooling the zone Note: the Fan coil outside air flow can be fully on or fully off but cannot reduce to fractional values in between. You may therefore get higher outside air delivery rates than with the other methods if you are using Schedules and your Mechanical ventilation operation schedule has fractional values.
Cooling Design Output Options

By default data for unoccupied zones is excluded from block and building totals and averages. Check this option to include data for unoccupied zones. A zone is defined as unoccupied if it has: No occupancy and, No cooling and, No heating and, No mechanical ventilation
Note: if you uncheck this option and all zones in the model are unoccupied then you will get a 'Zero floor area error' message.
Simulation Calculation Options (Building)

Simulation tab on Model Options dialog. Data on this tab allows you to control the simulations: Simulation Period Calculation options Solar options Advanced Calculation Options Output options
This data is also shown before simulations in the Simulation Calculation Options dialog.
Simulation Period
Simulation tab on Model Options dialog and General tab on Simulation Options dialog.
Simulation Period
Select the start and end days for the simulation, or select a typical period using the links on the Info panel:
- 338 -
Calculation Options
Annual simulation - all 365 days of the year. Summer design week - a week identified by the weather data translator as being the hottest of the year. Summer typical week - a week identified by the weather data translator as being typical of the summer. All summer - simulate the whole summer (as identified by the weather data translator). Winter design week - a week identified by the weather data translator as being the coldest of the year. Winter typical week - a week identified by the weather data translator as being typical of the winter. All winter - simulate the whole winter (as identified by the weather data translator).
The above typical simulation periods are derived from the Statistics data from the currently selected Hourly weather data.
Calculation Options
Heating Design, Cooling Design and Simulation tabs on Model Options dialog and Options tab on Simulation Options dialog.
Calculation description
Enter some text to identify the calculation. This will be used in reports and in the filename for automatically generated ESO files.
Number of time steps per hour (Simulation only)

The 'time steps per hour' is the number of times the building thermal network is solved per hour in the simulations. When the HVAC portion of the simulation begins it's solution for the current time step, it uses the basic time step as its maximum but then can reduce the time step, as necessary, to reach the solution. The technical details of the approach are explained in the EnergyPlus Engineering Documentation under 'Integrated Solution Manager'. Advanced EnergyPlus users can obtain and view data at intervals of the HVAC time step used if they select the 'detailed' option on an HVAC report variable (e.g. Zone/Sys Air Temp). The time step entered here is also known in the EnergyPlus documentation as the Zone Time Step. Though many buildings can be successfully simulated with 1 or 2 time steps per hour, EnergyPlus suggest 4 for non-HVAC simulations and 6 for simulations with HVAC. Hourly data (such as outdoor conditions expressed by Design Days or Weather data) are interpolated to the Zone Time Step. This is discussed the EnergyPlus documentation under: Weather Data Hourly Interpolation. Note 1: In general, increasing the number of time steps improves accuracy but slows the simulation (and generates more data if output is requested at the 'sub-hourly' interval). Note 2: When using 1 time steps per hour you will not be able to access Temperature distribution results
Temperature Control
Heating and cooling systems control internal temperatures to meet the setpoint temperatures specified on the Activity tab. These setpoint temperatures can be interpreted as air, operative or some other radiant fraction and DesignBuilder provides corresponding options to allow HVAC systems to be controlled by: 1-Air temperature - control the room mean air temperature to the heating and cooling setpoint temperatures specified on the Activity tab.
- 339 -
2-Operative temperature - control the room temperature using 0.5 radiant fraction. See notes of operative temperature control below if you plan to use this option. 3-Other- you can enter the radiant temperature control fraction.
The radiant fraction should be less than 0.9 and the minimum is 0.0. A value of 0.0 is the same as controlling on only zone air temperature. If air velocities are higher than 0.2 m/s, then lower values for radiative fraction might apply. Niu and Burnett (1998) cite International Standard ISO 77300 in recommending the values for this fraction listed in the following table. Radiative Fraction vs Air Velocity Air Velocity (m/s) <0.2 Radiant fraction 0.5 0.2 - 0.6 0.4 0.6 - 1.0 0.3
Reference: J. Niu and J. Burnett. 1998. Integrating Radiant/Operative Temperature Controls into Building Energy Simulations. ASHRAE Transactions Vol. 104. Part 2. page 210. ASHRAE. Atlanta, GA. You can think of the Temperature control option as: The radiant fraction sensed by the room thermostat, or, Given a room thermostat that mainly senses air temperature, the extent of automatic modification of the setpoint temperature to ensure occupant comfort.
Note: This option is overridden when using radiant heating systems by the radiant heating system control setting. Note::This option does not affect natural and mechanical ventilation setpoints - these always use air temperature set points.
Operative vs Air temperature control - Advanced discussion

There has been much debate amongst simulation experts over the years on the extent to which radiant effects should be included on the simulated thermostat. Most real-world thermostats probably don't actually sense more than about 20% radiant heat transfer - mostly the temperature sensor will be sensitive to the temperature of room air nearby. So one would think that air temperature (or 20% radiant) control is the best choice. But Operative control (radiant fraction = 0.5) can be useful for calculating realistic heating and cooling energy based on published summer and winter temperature requirements for the activities in each zone. This is because HVAC systems controlled using the operative temperature continue to condition the building until comfort conditions are met (just like they are in the real building where occupants may adjust thermostats until they are comfortable). Also, the default temperature set points from the Activity templates are generally derived from sources quoting operative temperatures. With Air temperature control the room air temperature is controlled to the set point temperature, which (depending on internal radiant temperatures) may not necessarily be comfortable. The disadvantage of Operative temperature control is that start up loads can be unrealistically high due to the lag in thermal response of the walls, floor, ceilings. The slow temperature response of the building fabric part governs the output of the operative thermostat and hence the operation of the heating/cooling equipment. If this effect dominates it can lead to an overestimate of the required design cooling load. You should be familiar with this issue before using operative temperature control to size heating and cooling equipment. In our experience using Operative temperature control usually leads to higher peak loads in Heating and Cooling design calculations and higher heating and cooling energy consumption in Simulations. Caution: Operative temperature control can cause EnergyPlus Error 3 when using Simple HVAC, or Cooling design calculations with Operative control in zones with strong radiant heat gains causing high radiant temperatures (e.g. uninsulated roof or zone is highly glazed). The error is caused by the fixed supply air temperature being higher than the zone air temperature required to give the operative setpoint (.e.g. 24C). The solution may be to use Air temperature control and to manage the high radiant temperatures using solar shading/insulation as appropriate.
- 340 -
Output Options
Air temperature control is easier to use as none of the aforementioned problems apply, but it can lead to inadequate equipment sizes peak loads in Heating and Cooling design calculations when not used with a design safety factor. This is especially true when radiant temperatures are very different from air temperatures for example in poorly insulated buildings, buildings with large unshaded glazing areas or high ventilation rates. Generally using air temperature control in Simulations of such buildings will underestimate energy consumption. Autosizing simple HVAC convective systems with operative temperature control Another issue to bear in mind with operative temperature control is that in simple HVAC convective systems, autosized cooling systems use a different algorithm to calculate the maximum supply airflow rate used in the EnergyPlus Purchased Air system. In convective systems the equation used is: DeltaT = ZoneCoolingSetPointTemperature - HVACCoolingCoilSetpointTemp (difference in temperature between zone air and supply air) DesignSupplyAirFlowM3PerS = DesignMaxCoolingLoad / (Cp * DeltaT * AirDensity) This equation works because the temperature of the air in the zone can safely be assumed to be the zone cooling set point and so there is fixed difference in temperature between zone air and supply air. Calculating the design supply cooling airflow rate in this way does not work for operative temperature control because the air temperatures in the space are often much lower than the zone cooling setpoint temperature and sometimes in zones having very high radiant temperatures, the air temperature in the zone approaches the supply air temperature. In other words the difference in temperature between zone air and supply air in the simulated system becomes very low and therefore very large airflow rates are required to meet cooling loads. So in order to account for this DesignBuilder assumes a Delta T of 1K in the above calculation when operative temperature control is in use. Tip: As a general rule you should prioritise checking building comfort levels when using Air temperature control and realistic plant operation (oversized equipment, supply temperatures very low) when using Operative temperature control.
Exclude all zone mechanical ventilation

Select this option if you wish to exclude the zone mechanical ventilation load from the heating/cooling loads in all zones. The option is useful in cases where the AHU is to meet mechanical ventilation loads and these loads are to be calculated separately when sizing the AHU coil capacity. Note that in Heating design calculations, when this option is deselected, mechanical ventilation will be applied without regard for schedule or mechanical ventilation setpoint temperature settings.
Exclude all zone natural ventilation

This option should be selected when natural ventilation is to be excluded from the Heating/Cooling calculations in all zones. Note that infiltration is always included regardless of this setting. Note that in Heating design calculations, when this option is deselected, natural ventilation will be applied without regard for schedule or natural ventilation setpoint temperature settings.
Output Options
Simulation tab on Model Options dialog and Output tab on Simulation Options dialog. You can control the data generated from simulations by making selections on the Simulation tab of the Model options dialog and on the Advanced tab of the Simulation calculation options dialog.
- 341 -
Zone environmental and comfort reports

You can restrict the simulation comfort output to just occupied periods by selecting 2-Just occupied periods. Options are: 1-All periods - comfort data is generated for all periods including times when the zone is unoccupied. 2-Just occupied periods - comfort data is only output during times when the zone is occupied so daily and monthly comfort statistics become more meaningful.
Default is 1-All periods.
Building and block output of zone data

This option causes average and total zone data to be generated for building and blocks. For example average temperatures, comfort conditions, total solar radiation, internal gains, fabric transmission losses etc. It does not affect the generation of energy consumption and CO2 data at the building level.

By default, data for unoccupied zones is excluded from block and building totals and averages. Check this option to include data for unoccupied zones. A zone is defined as unoccupied if it has: No occupancy and, No cooling and, No heating and, No mechanical ventilation
The way building and block averages are calculated is described in the Comfort Analysis section. Note: if you uncheck this option and all zones in the model are unoccupied then you will get a 'Zero floor area error' message
Surface heat transfer incl. solar

Select this option to generate heat flow at surface boundaries. Note that selecting this option results in large amounts of data being generated as EnergyPlus must generate output for every surface and window in the zone and you should only select it if you need to look at the zone heat balance.The following EnergyPlus reports are generated: Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduction Window Heat Gain Window Heat Loss Window Transmitted Solar
Environmental
This option generates temperatures and humidity data. The following EnergyPlus reports are generated: Zone Mean Air Temperature Zone Mean Radiant Temperature Zone Air Relative Humidity Outdoor Dry Bulb
Comfort
Select this option to generate Comfort output. The following EnergyPlus reports are generated:
- 342 -
Solar Options
FangerPMV PiercePMVET PiercePMVSET PierceDISC PierceTSENS KsuTSV Time Not Comfortable Summer Clothes Time Not Comfortable Winter Clothes Time Not Comfortable Summer or Winter Clothes
Internal gains and associated energy consumption

Select this option to generate internal gains-related output and any associated energy consumption. The following EnergyPlus reports are generated: Zone Lights Total Heat Gain Zone Task Lights Total Heat Gain Zone People Sensible Heat Gain Zone Electric Equipment Cat02 Electric Consumption Zone Electric Equipment Cat03 Electric Consumption Zone Electric Equipment Cat04 Electric Consumption Zone Electric Equipment Cat05 Electric Consumption Zone Transmitted Solar Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Loss Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Gain Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Loss Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Gain
HVAC energy
Select this option to generate energy consumption data for the HVAC system.
Temperature distribution
Select this option to generate Temperature distribution data for each zone (distribution data for Blocks and Buildings not available).
DXF model output

This option causes EnergyPlus to generate a DXF file summarising the building model. The file is called eplusout.dxf and it is stored in the EnergyPlus folder. This option can be useful for checking that the correct geometry has been generated.
Construction and surface details

This option causes EnergyPlus to generate a comma separated value file summarising the building model. The file is called eplusout.eio and it is stored in the EnergyPlus folder.
Solar Options
Cooling Design and Simulation tabs on Model Options dialog and Options tab on Simulation Options dialog. Solar Options allow you to control aspects of the model related to solar gains.
- 343 -
Include all buildings in shading calcs

The standard wall,floor, roof surfaces defining the current building provide shading but by default the other buildings on the site are excluded from the analysis. Use this option to include other buildings on the site as shading obstructions. Note: there is no way to simulate > 1 building at a time. All external surfaces in buildings other than the current one are modelled as shading surfaces. If you need to model the adjacency of another building in contact with the current one, you can use the adiabatic adjacency option to model the touching surfaces. Cooling Design Calculations and Simulations both use this option but have separate Model option data. Note: if one or more 'other buildings' are large/complex then you could generate a large number of shading elements and the simulation could be slow (even if the current building being simulated is simple).
Model reflections
If using reflections, the program calculates beam and sky solar radiation that is reflected from exterior surfaces and then strikes the building. These reflecting surfaces fall into 3 categories: 1. Shadowing surfaces. These are surfaces like overhangs or neighboring buildings (see below). These surfaces can have diffuse and specular (beam-to-beam) reflectance values derived from the material properties of the wall/windows.
Solar reflection from shadowing surfaces. Solid arrows are beam solar radiation; dashed arrows are diffuse solar radiation. (a) Diffuse reflection of beam solar radiation from the top of an overhang. (b) Diffuse reflection of sky solar radiation from the top of an overhang. (c) Beam-to-beam (specular) reflection from the faade of an adjacent highly-glazed building represented by a vertical shadowing surface. 2. Exterior building surfaces. In this case one section of the building reflects solar radiation onto another section (and vice-versa). See below. The building surfaces are assumed to be diffusely reflecting if they are opaque (walls, for example) and specularly reflecting if they are windows or glass doors. The reflectance values for opaque surfaces are calculated by the program from the Solar Absorptance and Visible Absorptance of the outer material layer of the surfaces construction. The reflectance values for windows and glass doors are calculated by the program from the reflectance properties of the individual glass layers that make up surfaces construction assuming no shading device is present and taking into account inter-reflections among the layers.
- 344 -
Solar Options
Solar reflection from building surfaces onto other building surfaces. In this example beam solar reflects from a vertical section of the building onto a roof section. The reflection from the window is specular. The reflection from the wall is diffuse. 3. The ground surface. Reflection from the ground is calculated even if the reflections option is not used. But in this case the ground plane is considered unobstructed, i.e., the shadowing of the ground by the building itself or by obstructions such as neighboring buildings is ignored. This shadowing is taken into account if the reflections option is used. This is shown in diagrammatically below.
Shadowing from building affects beam solar reflection from the ground. Beam-to-diffuse reflection from the ground onto the building occurs only for sunlit areas, A and C, not from shaded area, B. If reflections option is used for the ground surface then the ground view factor is NOT used.
Solar distribution
This option determines how EnergyPlus treats beam solar radiation and reflectance from exterior surfaces that strike the building and, ultimately, enter the zone. There are five choices: 1-Minimal shadowing - In this case, there is no exterior shadowing except from window and door reveals. All beam solar radiation entering the zone is assumed to fall on the floor, where it is absorbed according to the floor's solar absorptance. Any reflected by the floor is added to the transmitted diffuse radiation, which is assumed to be uniformly distributed on all interior surfaces. If no floor is present in the zone, the incident beam solar radiation is absorbed on all interior surfaces according to their absorptances. The zone heat balance is then applied at each surface and on the zone's air with the absorbed radiation being treated as a flux on the surface. 2-Full Exterior - in this case, shadow patterns on exterior surfaces caused by detached shading, wings, overhangs, and exterior surfaces of all zones are computed. As for Minimal shadowing, shadowing by window and door reveals is also calculated. Beam solar radiation entering the zone is treated as for 'Minimal shadowing' - all
- 345 -
beam solar radiation entering the zone is assumed to fall on the floor, where it is absorbed according to the floor's solar absorptance. Any reflected by the floor is added to the transmitted diffuse radiation, which is distributed among interior surfaces according to view factors. If no floor is present in the zone, the incident beam solar radiation is absorbed on all interior surfaces according to their absorptance. Note: If you use 2-Full Exterior you should make sure that all of your zones have a floor. If your building model has any zones of unusual shape without floors then the EnergyPlus simulation may not work because it will not have a surface to apportion solar gains to. 3-Full interior and exterior - this is the same as Full exterior except that instead of assuming all transmitted beam solar falls on the floor the program calculates the amount of beam radiation falling on each surface in the zone, including floor, walls and windows, by projecting the sun's rays through the exterior windows, taking into account the effect of exterior shadowing surfaces and window shading devices. If this option is used, you should be sure that the surfaces of the zone totally enclose a space. This can be determined by viewing the eplusout.dxf file with an external DXF viewer program. You should also be sure that the zone is convex. Examples of convex and non-convex zones are shown below. The most common non-convex zone is an L-shaped zone. A formal definition of convex is that any straight line passing through the zone intercepts at most two surfaces. Another definition is that a zone is convex if every surface in a zone can 'see' every other surface - no surfaces a 'round the corner' from each other. If the zones surfaces do not fully enclose a space or if the zone is not convex you should use Full exterior instead.
If you use 3-Full Interior and exterior the program will also calculate how much beam radiation falling on the inside of an exterior window (from other windows in the zone) is absorbed by the window, how much is reflected back into the zone, and how much is transmitted to the outside. In this calculation the effect of a shading device, if present, is accounted for. Note: You must use 3-Full Interior and exterior to account for direct solar and light transmission through internal windows.
Check for non-convex zones

When the solar distribution selection is 3-Full interior and exterior (above) you can choose whether DesignBuilder is to check for non-convex zones. The DesignBuilder check for non-convex zones is very strict whereas the EnergyPlus check is less so. Generally EnergyPlus will tolerate a small degree of non-convex geometry. By default this option is switched on and the strict internal DesignBuilder convex check is carried out, but if the zones are only slightly non-convex you can switch off this check and allow EnergyPlus to continue calculations. You will probably receive error message 2 if you switch this option off and have non-convex zones.
- 346 -
Advanced Calculation Options
One common reason for the strict DesignBuilder check to flag a zone as being non-convex even when at first sight it is convex is the use of block connection geometry. In the above example of a double skin facade (DSF) cavity zone, you can see when zooming right in on the corner of a set of block connection surfaces that these surfaces cause obtuse angles to the zone geometry resulting in very slight non-convex geometry. These are exactly the sort of small deviations from convex that the DesignBuilder checker will fail and the EnergyPlus checks will pass. In this case it is perfectly safe to switch off this check to allow EnergyPlus calculations to proceed.
Shadowing interval (Simulation only)

Enter the number of days (1-365) covered by each shadowing calculation. Enter 1 if you want shadowing to be calculated every day (for greater detail but slower calculations).

Heating Design, Cooling Design and Simulation tabs on Model Options dialog, Options tab on Simulation Options dialog and General tab on the Heating and Cooling Design Calculation options dialogs.
Maximum warmup days (not heating/cooling design)

The maximum number of 'warmup' or pre-conditioning days that can be used in the simulation before the simulation proper starts. Warmup is the process of repeatedly simulating the first day before the simulation proper starts to ensure that the temperatures in the building fabric are realistic. Warmup continues until temperatures and heat flows in each zone have converged. If convergence does not occur then simulation continues for the maximum number of days as specified in the calculation options. A warning message will occur when the warmup simulation does not converge in the allowed maximum number of warmup days. Loads Initialization did not Converge (CheckWarmupConvergence) You may be able to increase the Maximum Number of Warmup Days and get convergence, but some anomalous buildings may still not converge. Simulation proceeds for x warmup days until convergence is reached (see Temperature and Loads Convergence below).
Temperature and Loads convergence

The temperature and loads convergence values represent the maximum difference in zone temperature and loads between successive daily iterations before convergence is reached during warmup.
- 347 -
Convergence of the simultaneous heat balance/HVAC solution is reached when either the loads or temperature criterion is satisfied. Both tolerances work the same way, one looks at temperatures and one looks at heating and cooling loads. After the second warm-up day, the program compares the maximum temperature experienced in a space with the maximum temperature from the previous day. If those two temperatures are within the tolerance, then it has passed the first warm-up check. It does a similar comparison with lowest temperatures experience within all the zones. If the current simulation day and the previous day values are within the tolerance, then it has passed the second warm-up check. A similar comparison is carried with the loads tolerance and the maximum heating and cooling loads that are experienced within the spaces. Those are compared individually to the values for the previous day. If they are both in tolerance, then the simulation has passed the third and fourth warm-up check. The simulation stays in the warm-up period until ALL FOUR checks have been passed. Note that the maximum number of warmup days will override the above convergence criteria, i.e. the simulation proper will start even if convergence has not occurred after the maximum number of warmup days.
Relative airflow convergence tolerance

The calculated natural ventilation solution is assumed to have converged when the absolute value of the sum of the mass flow rates divided by the sum of the absolute value of the mass flow rates is less than this tolerance value. The mass flow rates described here refer to the mass flow rates at all nodes in the airflow network model. The solution converges when both this tolerance and the tolerance in the Absolute airflow convergence tolerance are satisfied. The default value is 1x10-4. Note that in cases where a large opening exists (in particular horizontal openings) this value and the absolute airflow convergence below may need to be increased by a factor of 10 or more to allow convergence to take place.
Absolute airflow convergence tolerance

The solution is assumed to have converged when the summation of the absolute value of all network airflows is less than the value specified for this input field. The default value is 1x10-6.
Inside and Outside convection algorithms

You can select from a range of EnergyPlus inside convection algorithms for calculating the convection between internal zone surfaces and the rest of the zone air in the simulation calculations. More details on this and external convection can be found under Constructions Model Data > Surface Convection header.
Solution Algorithm
Select from: CTF - sensible heat only solution not taking into account moisture storage or diffusion in the construction elements. The method used in EnergyPlus for CTF calculations is known as the state space method (Ceylan and Myers 1980; Seem 1987; Ouyang and Haghighat 1991). Finite Difference - currently research only because instabilities can occur with complex constructions.
Maximum shadow overlap (not heating design)

Enter the maximum number of figures per shadow overlap. The shadow overlaps is a measure of the amount of complexity in the shading calculation and this maximum value allows you to limit the amount of time spent in the solar initialisation calculations. Note: entering a small value here can speed up simulations in complex buildings. If you plan to use Maximum shadow overlaps below the default value of 15000 you should check accuracy of solar gains relative to results using default value
- 348 -
Surfaces within zone treated as adiabatic

EnergyPlus support recommend modelling surfaces wholly contained within a zone as adiabatic and this option allows you to follow this advice. We have found that in practice this option not make much difference in results or in simulation speed so for most cases you can leave it in its default state. See also EnergyPlus Errors and Warnings Note: 'surfaces contained within a zone' are frequently generated when one of the zone merging options is used where a partition or floor which would have separated two zones actually sits within the merged zone. These surfaces do not refer to hanging partitions which are modelled using Internal thermal mass.
COMPACT HVAC SIMULATION AUTOSIZING OPTIONS

The following 2 data items are used when autosizing Compact HVAC systems before simulations.
Sizing factor (not heating/cooling design)

This ratio is applied at the zone level to all of the zone heating and cooling loads and air flow rates. These new loads and air flow rates are then used to calculate the system level flow rates and capacities and are used in all of the component sizing calculations. Default value is 1.2. You must set this to 1.0 to achieve a full fresh air system when using Compact HVAC CAV/VAV.
Design averaging window period ( not heating/cooling design)

The time in the zone design flow sequence averaging window during EnergyPlus Compact HVAC autosizing calculations. The default is 1 hour, in which case the calculated zone design flow rates are averaged over an hour. The autosizing zone design air flow rate calculation is performed assuming a potentially infinite supply of heating or cooling air at a fixed temperature. Thus the calculated design air flow rate will always be able to meet any load or change in load no matter how large or abrupt. In reality air flow rates are limited by duct sizes and fan capacities. The idealized zone design flow calculation may result in unrealistically large flow rates, especially if the user is performing the sizing calculations using thermostat schedules with night setup or setback. The calculated zone design flow rates are always averaged over the load timestep. You may want to perform a broader average to mitigate the effect of thermostat setup and setback and prevent the warm up or cool down flow rates from dominating the design flow rate calculation. Specifying the width of the averaging window allows the user to do this.
Air velocity for comfort calculations

This data allows you to override the default air velocity of 0.137 m/s used by EnergyPlus when calculating the comfort indices. Higher values of air velocity might be appropriate for rooms with mixing fans or high volumes of HVAC air delivery, for example.
INCLUDE IDF DATA (NOT HEATING/COOLING DESIGN)

You can include up to 2 custom IDF data in your EnergyPlus simulations by checking the IDF File 1 or IDF File 2 check boxes and entering the name of the IDF data source file. The contents of any files specified are copied to the end of the IDF dataset generated by DesignBuilder before simulation.
- 349 -
Note: Included IDF files must be located in the EnergyPlus folder.
Display (Site)
Display tab on Model Options dialog. Options related to the display of data: Show Data for Calculations Edit Screen Visualisation Display
Show Data For Calculations

Display tab on Model Options dialog.
Analysis type
DesignBuilder user interface adapts to the currently selected Analysis type as set under Show Data for Calculations. This ensures that the Model data displayed in the UI is relevant to the calculation results. You can change the Analysis type at any time to carry out different calculations. The list of Analysis type options available will depend on the Location of the site. For example when the site is located in the UK, it possible to set the Analysis type to SBEM Part-L Compliance Checking mode. New Analysis type options will be available in future versions.
Edit Screen
Show zone labels

Select this option to display the name of each zone in the Edit screen while at block level. Zone labels are shown by default.
Fit includes imported drawing

Select this option to get the imported drawing included in the calculation of the model extent at site and building levels when the Fit view command is run and when the screen is refreshed internally within DesignBuilder.
Show imported drawing at zone and surface levels

Select this option to show the imported drawing at zone and surface levels. The option is switched off by default for the sake of clarity but you may wish to switch it on when drawing openings at surface level to help position windows, doors etc.
- 350 -
Visualisation Display
Show shading devices

Select this option to display shading devices while in the Edit screen. Shading devices are shown by default.
Show windows
You can speed up display in the edit screen by switching off window display. Windows are shown by default.
Zone floor shading at block level

Zone floors can be shaded by: 1-Activity Template, where zone floors are shaded according to the Activity Template selection allowing different areas of the block to be easily identified. 2-HVAC Template, where zone floors are shaded according to the HVAC Template selection to show the distribution of HVAC systems in the block. 3-None
The image below illustrates shading by Activity Template.
Visualisation Display
Dynamics
This option affects the display of the model when orbiting and zooming in the Edit and Visualisation Screens: 1-Rendered - the default setting where the whole building image is retained during the operation. For a large models/slow graphic adapters, this can result in a jerky motion in which case you should use...
- 351 -
2-Wire-frame - where the building is represented using a wire frame which moves smoothly even for large models/slow graphic adapters.
Show shadows
Use this option to display shadows in the Visualisation Screen.
Show North arrow

You can display the North Arrow in the Visualisation Screen.
Show ground plane

You can choose to show/hide the plane used to represent the ground in the Visualisation Screen. You may wish to hide the ground plane if you have used component blocks to represent the ground. Note: when displayed, the ground plane extents just beyond the x-y size of the model and hides any other building object situated at or below z=0.
Antialiasing
Antialiasing is the process used to remove 'jaggy' edges of lines which are not horizontal or vertical. Most modern medium-high-end graphics adapters allow effective antialiasing to be automatically applied to OpenGL screens using hardware acceleration. If you have one of these cards you should be getting sharp lines already and you can switch the DesignBuilder software antialiasing off. See hardware requirements for more on this. If you switch on software antialiasing you can select a quality setting from 1-4 where 4 gives the smoothest edges and takes longest time to generate. Note: some low-end graphics adapters are not suited to software antialiasing because they lack hardware acceleration for this feature.
Drawing Tools (Site)

Drawing Tools tab on Model Options dialog. Options for: Draw Block Direction Snaps Point Snaps Drawing Guides Object Rotation Protractor Miscellaneous Edit
To learn more about Drawing Tools go to the Block Creation Options and Snaps, Drawing Guides & Protractor sections.
Draw Block
Drawing Tools tab on Model Options dialog.
- 352 -
Direction Snaps
Auto complete block

See Auto-complete block entry under Block Creation Options.
Direction Snaps
Drawing Tools tab on Model Options dialog. See Direction Snaps entry under Snaps, Drawing Guides & Protractor.
Point Snaps
Drawing Tools tab on Model Options dialog. See Point Snaps entry under Snaps, Drawing Guides & Protractor.
Drawing Guides
Drawing Tools tab on Model Options dialog. See Drawing Guides entry under Snaps, Drawing Guides & Protractor.
Object Rotation
Drawing Tools tab on Model Options dialog. You can change the rotation increment to control the angular increments for the object rotation process. See Rotation entry under General Operations.
Protractor Tool
Drawing Tools tab on Model Options dialog. See Protractor entry under Snaps, Drawing Guides & Protractor.
Miscellaneous Edit
Drawing tools tab on Model Options dialog.
- 353 -
Automatic block zoning

By default DesignBuilder automatically generates zones as partitions are drawn. You can change this behaviour by unchecking the Automatic block zoning option. In this case partitions are shown in blue as they are drawn and are referred to as outline partitions. Outline partitions do not create new zones and are modelled in the same way in simulations as hanging partitions. To convert any outline partitions to standard partitions and to rezone the block use the Rezone block command accessed from the Tools menu. Note that outline partitions that do not connect at both ends (known in DesignBuilder as hanging partitions) will remain in blue even after the Rezone block command. Alternatively, to convert all outline partitions in the building to standard partitions and hence rezone the whole building you can use the Rebuild command. This will take longer to process than the Rezone block command as it recalculates the surface and adjacency geometry as well rezoning. Note: switching Automatic block zoning off also prevents rezoning following other partition edit commands such as delete, copy and undo/redo.
Automatically include voids from lower blocks

Select this option if you would like DesignBuilder to automatically punch voids through new blocks drawn on top of existing blocks having voids. If you leave this option switched off (default state) you can still draw voids at the block level using the ghosted outline of adjacent voids in a block below as a guide.
Edit block model data

Use this option to allow editing of block level model data. Note: If you disable block editing you will no longer be able to edit Model Data at the block level in the current building and so will not be able to set different defaults for different blocks.
Edit Block Options (Block)

Block tab on Model Options dialog.
Data on the Block tab of the Model options dialog allows you to edit the form, display and other related properties of the current block: Block geometry Roof-wall transition
- 354 -
Block Geometry
Block Display
See also Edit Block Geometry Dialog. Note: This tab is only enabled when at Block level in the model
Block Geometry
Block tab on Model Options dialog under Block Geometry header.
Wall thickness
You can change the Block wall thickness of the current block by entering the new thickness here. The thickness must be in the range 0.01m - 2.0m (0.39 - 78 inches).
Block form
Once a block has been created it's form can usually be changed to one of: 1-Extruded, 2-Sloped walls or 3-Pitched roof
If the block has 5-General block form due to a previous block edit operation, then only these block form options are available: 2-Sloped walls or 3-Pitched roof 5-General
Depending on the selected block form the full range of block geometry options is available as described under block forms.
Roof-Wall Transition
Block tab on Model Options dialog under Pitched Roof/Wall Construction Transition header.
Allow pitched roof construction

If you wish to allow pitched roofs to be defined for the current block then leave this option in its default checked state. Alternatively, you can force all non-horizontal surfaces to be walls by unchecking this option.
Roof-wall transition angle

When the Allow pitched roof construction option is checked you can enter the angle which defines the surface tilt below which a wall becomes a roof. For example if the roof-wall transition angle for a particular block is 45, a surface in this block having tilt 40 is modelled as being a roof (using pitched roof constructions, roof glazing layout etc). And a surface having tilt 50 is modelled as being a wall (using wall constructions, glazing layout etc).
- 355 -
Block Display
Block tab on Model Options dialog under Block Display header.
Display external walls

You can choose to switch on/off display of external walls for each block. Generally for standard extruded blocks it is best to show external walls to help reference locations within the block with respect to existing openings etc. For Pitched roof blocks and General block forms the external walls can obscure the internal space and so the default for these block types is to hide the external walls when at block level in the modeller. You can override this default behaviour using this option. Note: It can be useful to switch off external wall display when drawing partitions in roof blocks.
Notes (and Project Details)

Use the Notes tab to record General information about the building model: Project Details Owner Details Analyst Details Notes
The Project, Owner and Analyst Details data is used as a header in UK Part-L2 Compliance Check reports.
Project Details
Enter the building Sector, Project name and address.
Owner Details
Enter the name and contact details for the building owner/client.
Analyst Details
Enter your own name and contact details.
Notes
You can enter any information about the building model in free text format. Note: If you want to add hard carriage returns in the text you should hold the CTRL key down while pressing ENTER. Pressing ENTER on its own will save and close the dialog.
- 356 -
Detailed HVAC
Detailed HVAC
This section describes the graphical interface provided by DesignBuilder for the assembly of component based HVAC systems which may be combined with building models for energy simulation using EnergyPlus.
- 357 -
OVERVIEW
HVAC system models in DesignBuilder are assembled by placing a number of pre-defined air and water distribution loops together with groups of zones which are then connected to form complete systems. The air and water loops incorporate a number of HVAC components connected together by pipes or ducts to form distribution systems. These loops can be modified to incorporate any additionally required components and then connected to associated components in other loops or to heating, cooling and ventilation equipment located in zones to form complete systems. Zones are placed in the form of zone groups which enable a number of zones having the same HVAC equipment to be grouped together. Each zone in the group can different equipment ratings. The zone group mechanism greatly simplifies the HVAC schematic assembly in that only one set of equipment and connections needs to be defined for the group while maintaining the flexibility of changing equipment properties for individual zones within the group. The pre-defined loops incorporate setpoint managers which enable the loop to run without any additional control. However, additional setpoint managers can be added to the various loops to customise the control of the system. Data associated with all loops, zones and associated components can be edited via dialogs for specific system requirements. After placing loops, zone groups and setpoint managers and completing the required loop connections to associated equipment, an EnergyPlus simulation can be conducted for the combined building and HVAC system model.
ACCESSING DETAILED HVAC

To access detailed HVAC, you first need to select the Detailed HVAC option under the HVAC header on the Model Options dialog. After closing the Model Options dialog, a new <HVAC System> entry will appear in the Navigator tree list:
Click on this <HVAC System> entry to access the HVAC edit screen.
DETAILED HVAC CONTENTS

o o o Understanding HVAC Loops Air Loops Plant and Condenser Loops
- 358 -
Understanding HVAC Loops
o o o o o o o o o o
Understanding HVAC Zone Groups HVAC Component Hierarchy and Navigation HVAC System Control - Setpoint Managers Autosizing HVAC Components Working with Loops and Zone Groups (HVAC System Level) Working within Sub Loops (Sub Loop Level) Working within HVAC Zone Groups (HVAC Zone Group Level) Working within HVAC Zones (HVAC Zone Level) Working within Components (Component Level) HVAC Components

An HVAC loop is used to model air and water distribution systems such as mechanical ventilation systems, hot and chilled water piped distribution systems and condenser water distribution systems. A loop is divided into two sub-loops, a demand sub-loop and a supply sub-loop. At its simplest, a sub-loop comprises an inlet connection (pipe or duct) which is connected in series via a number of components to an outlet connection. The inlet connection of each loop sub-loop connects with the outlet connection of the other loop sub-loop:
- 359 -
The demand sub-loop is typically that section of a loop from which energy is extracted from a system and the supply sub-loop is that section of a loop to which energy is supplied by the system. Consequently, supply sub-loops incorporate equipment such as boilers in the case of heating systems or chillers in the case of cooling systems, the supply sub-loop of an air system incorporates items such as heating and cooling coils. The supply sub-loop also contains circulating equipment such as pumps and fans. Similarly, the demand sub-loop of a heating system includes items such as air conditioning heating coils or zone equipment such as hot water radiators, fan-coil unit heating coils, under-floor heating, etc. and similarly a chilled water demand sub-loop contains equipment such as air condition cooling coils, zone cooled beams, chilled ceilings, etc. The sub-loop of an air loop typically incorporates zone air distribution equipment such as VAV boxes, etc. There are three main types of loop: Plant loops (hot and chilled water loops), Condenser loops and Air loops.
Plant and condenser sub-loops incorporate a flow splitter and a flow mixer which allow a number of parallel branches to be defined. Each parallel branch would normally comprise an inlet connection from the splitter, a component and an outlet connection to the mixer. A by-pass parallel branch (without a component) is also included to ensure flow continuity.
- 360 -
The supply sub-loops for single duct air loops on the other hand generally comprise a single branch which incorporates an inlet connection connected to various components in series including an outdoor air mixer, fans, cooling coils, heating coils, etc. which are in turn connected to an outlet connection. Air loop supply sub-loops do not contain flow splitters or mixers. Demand sub-loops for single duct air loops incorporate the supply path connections to zone air distribution equipment and zone return air path connections. Air loop demand sub-loops also incorporate a flow splitter and a flow mixer allowing air distribution equipment in a number of zones to be connected to the supply and return paths:
- 361 -
The outdoor air mixer and fan components in DesignBuilder HVAC are incorporated within an air handling unit component. Optionally, additional components such as heat recovery, heating coils, cooling coils, humidifiers and outdoor air pre-treatment coils can also be added to air handling units:
- 362 -
Air supply sub-loops for dual duct systems incorporate two outlet connections, one for the hot duct and one for the cold duct; dual duct supply sub-loops also incorporate a single air splitter to split the flow between the hot and cold ducts:
- 363 -
The demand sub-loops for dual duct air loops similarly contain two inlet connections for hot and cold ducts which can then be connected to zone dual duct air distribution terminals via air splitters and a mixer. There are nine pre-defined loops in DesignBuilder HVAC, four air loops, four plant loops and one condenser loop:
Air Loops
There are four pre-defined air loops provided by detailed HVAC: Generic single duct air loop Generic dual duct air loop Unitary heat pump air loop Unitary heat/cool air loop
Generic Single Duct Air Loop

This air loop incorporates a Generic air handling unit (AHU) component in the supply sub-loop to which may be added various sub-components including pre-treatment coils (heating and cooling), heat recovery, recirculation with economiser, heating and cooling coils and a humidifier. The air handling unit automatically includes supply
- 364 -
Generic Dual Duct Air Loop
and extract fans. The demand sub-loop incorporates a flow splitter and a flow mixer to enable the loop to be connected up to zone equipment. The loop incorporates a single scheduled setpoint manager which by default is pre-defined to maintain a supply temperature. The image below shows a single duct air loop connected to 2 Zone groups.
Generic Dual Duct Air Loop

This air loop is similar to the Generic single duct air loop but includes two outlet connections for the hot and cold ducts in the supply-sub loop together with associated heating and cooling coils. The loop also incorporates a Warmest setpoint manager to control the cold duct temperature and a Coldest setpoint manager to control the hot duct temperature. The image below shows a dual duct air loop connected to a Zone group.
- 365 -
Unitary Heat/Cool Air Loop

This air loop is similar to the Generic single duct air loop but instead of a Generic air handling unit, the supply subloop contains a Packaged air conditioner component which incorporates DX heating and DX cooling coils consequently does not require any plant or condenser loops to be defined. The image below shows a unitary heat cool air loop connected to a Zone group.
- 366 -
Unitary Heat Pump Air Loop
Unitary Heat Pump Air Loop

This air loop is similar to the Generic single duct air loop but instead of a Generic air handling unit, the supply subloop contains a Packaged unitary heat pump component which incorporates DX heating and DX cooling coils together with a supplementary electric heating coil and consequently does not require any plant or condenser loops to be defined. The image below shows a unitary heat pump air loop connected to a Zone group.
- 367 -
Plant And Condenser Loops

There are 4 pre-defined plant loops provided by Detailed HVAC: Hot water plant loop Chilled water plant loop Primary/secondary chilled water plant loop Domestic hot water/solar plant loop
A single condenser loop is provided: Condenser loop
A plant equipment operation facility is included to provide plant and condenser loops with a mechanism for controlling the operation of the loop and to specify which equipment is available under what conditions. This allows you to model scheduled sequencing of plant equipment depending on time-varying load requirements. For example you may want to model a multiple chiller system and schedule low load chillers to handle loads up to a certain magnitude and then switch in higher load chillers as the cooling load increases. This feature is available through the plant/condenser loop Plant Equipment Operation tab.
Hot Water Plant Loop

The hot water plant supply sub-loop incorporates a single boiler, flow splitter and flow mixer together with a circulating pump. The sub-loop also includes a scheduled temperature setpoint manager which is set up by default to control the off-plant temperature at a constant 80C. The demand sub-loop incorporates a flow splitter and flow mixer in order that the loop can be connected to heating plant components. The image below shows a hot water plant loop connected to 2 water heating coils.
- 368 -
Chilled Water Plant Loop
Chilled Water Plant Loop

The chilled water plant supply sub-loop incorporates a single chiller, flow splitter and flow mixer together with a circulating pump. By default, the chiller has a water cooled condenser and connections are included to enable the condenser to be connected up to a condenser loop. The sub-loop also includes a scheduled temperature setpoint manager which is set up by default to control the off-plant temperature at a constant 6.0C. The demand sub-loop incorporates a flow splitter and flow mixer in order that the loop can be connected to cooling plant components. The image below shows a chilled water loop connected to a water cooling coil.
- 369 -
Primary/Secondary Chilled Water Plant Loop

The primary/secondary chilled water plant loop uses the EnergyPlus Common Pipe Simulation mechanism to represent a chilled water circuit comprising both primary and secondary pumped sub-loops. The primary sub-loop incorporates a single chiller, flow splitter and flow mixer together with a circulating pump. By default, the chiller has a water cooled condenser and connections are included to enable the condenser to be connected up to a condenser loop. The primary sub-loop also includes a scheduled temperature setpoint manager which is set up by default to control the sub-loop outlet temperature at a constant 6C. The secondary sub-loop includes a scheduled temperature setpoint manager which is pre-defined to control the sub-loop inlet temperature at a constant 6C but the schedule defining this temperature can be replaced with any required alternative. The secondary sub-loop also incorporates a flow splitter and flow mixer in order that the loop can be connected to cooling plant components.
- 370 -
Domestic Hot Water Plant Loop
Domestic Hot Water Plant Loop

The domestic hot water (DHW) plant supply sub-loop incorporates a single water heater, flow splitter and flow mixer together with a circulating pump. The sub-loop also includes a scheduled temperature setpoint manager which is set up by default to control the off-plant temperature at a constant 55C. The demand sub-loop incorporates a flow splitter and flow mixer in order that the loop can be connected to hot water outlets. The image below shows a DHW hot water plant loop connected to a water outlet group.
- 371 -
Condenser Loop
The condenser supply sub-loop incorporates a single cooling tower, flow splitter and flow mixer together with a circulating pump. The sub-loop also includes a scheduled temperature setpoint manager which is pre-defined to control the off-plant temperature at a constant 29.0C: The demand sub-loop incorporates a flow splitter and flow mixer in order that the loop can be connected to condenser components.
- 372 -
Understanding HVAC Zone Groups

Zone groups are used to simplify HVAC layouts by grouping together zones that have identical configurations of HVAC equipment but not necessarily the same equipment ratings. Consequently, only a single set of equipment items needs to be added to the group and only one set of connections between air/plant loops and zone group equipment need to be established. As an example, consider a building model where five ground floor zones are to be cooled and ventilated using a VAV box without reheat supplied by a single AHU and the zones are to be heated using radiators supplied by the same heating circuit. A single zone group can be used to incorporate the equipment for the five zones within the HVAC layout. From HVAC System level, a zone group can be placed and then edited to include the ground floor zones:
- 373 -
After adding the zones, the zone group becomes active and you can navigate down to it, either by double-clicking on the graphic in the Edit screen or by selecting it from the navigator. At the zone group level, you can see all of the zones added to the group:
You can then navigate down to any one of the zones to add the required equipment:
- 374 -
Now when you move back up to the zone group level, you will notice that the zone equipment has automatically been added to all zones in the group:
You can now navigate down to equipment in any zone to change the equipment default settings:
- 375 -
At the system level, only one set of connections is required to connect the equipment in all of the constituent zones up to the air and plant loops:
When data is written to the EnergyPlus IDF file prior to simulation, all constituent zones, zone equipment and zone equipment connections are written out separately.
- 376 -
HVAC Component Hierarchy And Navigation
HVAC Component Hierarchy And Navigation

HVAC systems are structured using a similar hierarchical system to that used by the DesignBuilder building model:
Methods of navigating the HVAC system are the similar to those used for navigating the building model (see Navigating Building Models for further information). To move down to an object lower down in the hierarchy, you can either select the object graphically on the Edit screen and double-click on it or alternatively, just select it from the navigator tree list at the left of the screen. To move up a level, you can either press the F2 key, or select the required level object from the Navigator. After moving down to an object, only that object and any related components in other objects will be active, all other objects in the hierarchy will become inactive and displayed in grey on the Edit screen.
HVAC System Control - Setpoint Managers

The setpoint manager is the main mechanism through which the behaviour of HVAC system loops is controlled. All HVAC loops require at least one setpoint manager to specify the supply sub-loop outlet temperature and these are automatically included in all pre-defined HVAC loops. Setpoint managers will place a calculated or scheduled setpoint value at the point or connection in the loop at which the setpoint manager control line has been placed. No two setpoint managers should be located on the same connection for like control types otherwise an error message will be displayed and the simulation aborted. There ten different types of setpoint manager available. However only certain types of setpoint manager are available for different types of air loops and plant/condenser loops:
- 377 -
1-Scheduled (All loops). 2-Warmest (Generic and dual duct air loops only). 3-Coldest (Generic and dual duct air loops only). 4-Multi-zone minimum humidity average (Air loops only). 5-Multi-zone maximum humidity average (Air loops only). 6-Multi-zone humidity minimum (Air loops only). 7-Multi-zone humidity maximum (Air loops only). 8-Single zone humidity minimum (Air loops only). 9-Single zone humidity maximum (Air loops only). 10-Outdoor air reset (Generic and dual duct air loops, plant and condenser loops).
Refer to the Setpoint manager section for information regarding specific setpoint manager types.
MIXED AIR SETPOINT MANAGERS

The Mixed Air Setpoint Manager is a special type of setpoint manager which is automatically added to air handling units that incorporate coils located before the supply fan and where no setpoint manager has been added explicitly before the fan. This type of setpoint manager works in conjunction with the AHU outdoor air controller (see Air Handling Unit Outdoor Air System). The Mixed Air Setpoint Manager is used to establish a temperature setpoint at the mixed air node. The AHU outdoor air controller then operates the outdoor air damper to attempt to meet this setpoint. The main function of the Mixed Air Setpoint Manager is to pick up a temperature setpoint provided by a setpoint manager located downstream of the supply fan and then set this value as the off-coil setpoint, having first subtracted the calculated temperature rise across the supply fan. Note: A Mixed Air Setpoint manager is only included in systems that incorporate draw-through coils. Also, if a setpoint manager is added in front of a draw-through fan, the Mixed Air Setpoint manager is omitted.
Autosizing HVAC Components

In many cases, HVAC component settings can be autosized by EnergyPlus. All settings that can be autosized are displayed in blue on the component edit dialogs and the special keyword autosize must typed into the settings edit control on the component edit dialog if a setting is to be autosized. For example, for a hot water coil, the Maximum water flow rate can be autosized:
- 378 -
Working With Loops And Zone Groups At HVAC System Level
Working With Loops And Zone Groups At HVAC System Level

At the HVAC system level, you can: 1. 2. Add and edit air, plant and condenser loops. Add and edit zone groups.
Add Zone Group Tool
To place an HVAC zone group, first go to the HVAC System level and click on the Add zone group tool. To place a zone group, simply move the cursor to the required position on the Edit screen and click the mouse button to place the zone group.
- 379 -
Add Loop Tool
To place an HVAC loop, first go to the HVAC System level and click on the Add loop tool which will display a dropmenu of available pre-defined loops. You can then select whichever loop you require from the menu. To place a loop, move the cursor to the required position on the Edit screen and click the mouse button to place the loop.
Working Within Sub-Loops (Sub-Loop Level)

At the sub-loop level, you can: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Add and Edit boilers (heating plant supply sub-loop). Add and Edit chillers (chilled water plant supply sub-loop). Add and Edit cooling towers (condenser supply sub-loop). Add and Edit water heaters (domestic hot water plant supply sub-loop). Add and Edit pumps (all plant and condenser supply sub-loops). Add and Edit heating coils (dual-duct air loop supply sub-loop) Add and Edit cooling coils (dual-duct air loop supply sub-loop) Add and Edit humidifiers (dual-duct air loop supply sub-loop) Add and Edit setpoint managers (all supply sub-loops). Add mixers and splitters (all sub-loops). Connect components (all sub-loops). Edit air handling units (air loop supply sub-loop).
Add Boiler Tool
Boilers can only be incorporated within the supply sub-loops of hot water plant loops so you first need to go to the supply sub-loop of the hot water plant loop to which the boiler is to be added. The Add boiler tool icon will then appear on the toolbar. To place a boiler, click on the Add boiler tool and then move the mouse cursor to the required position and click the mouse button to place the boiler.
- 380 -
Add Chiller Tool
Add Chiller Tool
Chillers can only be incorporated within the supply sub-loops of chilled water plant loops so you first need to go to the supply sub-loop of the chilled water plant loop to which the chiller is to be added. The Add chiller tool icon will then appear on the toolbar. To place a chiller, click on the Add chiller tool and then move the mouse cursor to the required position and click the mouse button to place the chiller.
Add Cooling Tower Tool
Cooling towers can only be incorporated within the supply sub-loops of condenser loops so you first need to go to the supply sub-loop of the condenser loop to which the cooling tower is to be added. The Add Cooling Tower tool icon will then appear on the toolbar. To place a cooling tower, click on the Add Cooling Tower tool and then move the mouse cursor to the required position and click the mouse button to place the cooling tower.
Add Water Heater Tool
Water heaters can only be incorporated within the supply sub-loops of domestic hot water plant loops so you first need to go to the supply sub-loop of the domestic hot water plant loop to which the water heater is to be added. The Add Water Heater tool icon will then appear on the toolbar. To place a water heater, click on the Add Water Heater tool and then move the mouse cursor to the required position and click the mouse button to place the water heater.
Add Pump Tool
Pumps can only be included in the supply sub-loops of plant and condenser loops. EnergyPlus requires that the pump must be the first component in the sub-loop. Consequently, a pump must be connected directly to the subloop inlet node. Only one pump can be added to each plant/condenser supply sub-loop and so the tool will only appear on the toolbar at the plant/condenser sub-loop level if you delete the existing pump in order to change its orientation.
- 381 -
To place a pump, click on the Add pump tool and click the mouse button when the pump is at the required location. After clicking the mouse button, you can then rotate the pump by moving the mouse in a circular direction around the centre of the pump to obtain the required orientation:
Add Heating Coil Tool
Heating coils can only be incorporated within the supply sub-loops of air loops so you first need to go to the supply sub-loop of the air loop to which the coil is to be added. The Add heating coil tool icon will then appear on the toolbar. To place a heating coil, click on the Add heating coil tool. Heating coils can be placed anywhere in the sub-loop but are more commonly incorporated within an air handling unit. To add a heating coil to an air handling unit, after clicking on the Add heating coil tool, move the cursor (with the coil attached to it) into the supply section of the air handling unit and click the mouse button to place the coil at the required location. Coils may be placed in front of the supply fan for a draw-through configuration or after the fan for a blow-through configuration:
- 382 -
Add Cooling Coil Tool
Add Cooling Coil Tool
Cooling coils can only be incorporated within the supply sub-loops of air loops so you first need to go to the supply sub-loop of the air loop to which the coil is to be added. The Add cooling coil tool icon will then appear on the toolbar. To place a cooling coil, click on the Add cooling coil tool and then select the required coil from the droplist. Cooling coils can be placed anywhere in the sub-loop but are more commonly incorporated within an air handling unit. To add a cooling coil to an air handling unit, after clicking on the Add cooling coil tool, move the cursor (with the coil attached to it) into the supply section of the air handling unit and click the mouse button to place the coil at the required location. Coils may be placed in front of the supply fan for a draw-through configuration or after the fan for a blow-through configuration:
Add Humidifier Tool
Humidifiers can only be incorporated within the supply sub-loops of air loops so you first need to go to the supply sub-loop of the air loop to which the humidifier is to be added. The Add humidifier tool icon will then appear on the toolbar. To place a humidifier, click on the Add humidifier tool. Humidifiers can be placed anywhere in the sub-loop but are more commonly incorporated within an air handling unit. To add a humidifier to an air handling unit, after clicking on the Add humidifier tool, move the cursor (with the humidifier attached to it) into the supply section of the air handling unit and click the mouse button to place the humidifier at the required location. Humidifiers may be placed in front of the supply fan for a draw-through configuration or after the fan for a blow-through configuration:
- 383 -
Add Splitter/Add Mixer Tool
Splitter and mixers are used in HVAC in order to connect multiple items of equipment to a sub-loop by means of parallel branches:
Only one splitter and one mixer can be incorporated within both the supply and demand sub-loops of plant and condenser loops and consequently the Add splitter and Add mixer tool will only appear on the toolbar if an existing splitter and mixer have been removed. Air loops are slightly different in that air supply sub-loops comprise series component connections and consequently do not require any splitter or mixer with the exception of dual-duct systems which incorporate a single splitter to enable the flow to be split between hot and cold ducts. Air demand sub-loops are similar to plant
- 384 -
Add Supply Plenum/Add Return Plenum Tool
and condenser sub-loops in that they can only contain a single mixer but can incorporate an additional splitter to cater for dual duct systems. To place a splitter or mixer, click on the Add splitter or Add mixer tool and click the mouse button when the splitter/mixer is at the required location. After clicking the mouse button, you can then rotate the splitter/mixer by moving the mouse in a circular direction around the centre of the component to obtain the required orientation:
Add Supply Plenum/Add Return Plenum Tool
Supply and return plenums are essentially uncontrolled building zones which may be incorporated within the supply and return paths of air loop demand side sub-loops. Plenums can account for building side heat balance but cannot incorporate HVAC equipment. HVAC air plenums are special types of component since there is a heat balance connection and building description and a system airflow connection that transfers the airflow directly from a supply plenum to a controlled zone or from a controlled zone to a return plenum in the system air simulation. Plenums may be used to model building features such as ceiling or floor voids which are used to supply or return centrally conditioned air. The only item of data required for an HVAC plenum is the name of the associated building zone.
Zone Name
If no zone has previously been allocated to the plenum, click on the ellipsis button adjacent to the <Select zone> tag to bring up a zone selection control. Only zones that have not already been associated with zone groups or other plenums are available for selection.
- 385 -
Each air loop demand sub-loop can contain a single return plenum but can incorporate an additional supply plenum to cater for dual duct systems. To place a supply or return plenum, click on the Add supply plenum or Add return plenum tool and click the mouse button when the plenum is at the required location. After clicking the mouse button, you can then rotate the plenum by moving the mouse in a circular direction around the centre of the component to obtain the required orientation:
- 386 -
Connect Components Tool
Connect Components Tool
The Connect components tool is used to create connections between the inlets and outlets of both air-side and water-side components. The tool can only be used at the sub-loop level. HVAC connections are created in the form of a number of segments or steps, each segment snapped to the X or Y axis. To create a connection between two components, first click on the Connect components tool and move the cursor to the required component inlet/outlet. When the cursor is over the required inlet/outlet, a green connection marker will be displayed to indicate that the beginning of the connection can be snapped to the inlet/outlet:
You can then click the mouse button to start the connection. Having snapped the beginning of the first connection segment to the required inlet/outlet, as you move the mouse cursor away, the cursor will automatically snap to the X or Y axis depending on the position of the cursor relative to the connection point. As you move the cursor across the screen, drawing guides are displayed to indicate that the current cursor position has been automatically snapped to align with existing connections in the X and Y axes:
When the cursor snaps to a required drawing guide, you can then click the mouse button to place the end point of the current connection segment. Finally, as you move the cursor towards the component inlet/outlet to which the
- 387 -
connection is to be created, a green connection marker will again be displayed to indicate that the end of the connection can be snapped into position by clicking the mouse cursor button.
Working Within HVAC Zone Groups (HVAC Zone Group Level)

At the HVAC zone group level, you can edit HVAC Zone data. To do this select the HVAC zone in the Edit screen - it will be highlighted in red. Then right-click and in the menu select the Edit option. Edit HVAC zone data.
Working Within HVAC Zones (HVAC Zone Level)

At the HVAC zone level, you can: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Add and edit air distribution units (VAV boxes, etc.). Add and edit forced air units (fan-coil units, etc.). Add and edit heated floors Add and edit chilled ceilings. Add and edit radiators/convectors. Add a zone extract.
Add Zone Air Distribution Unit Tool
Zone air distribution units are placed at the zone level. To place an ADU, click on the Add air distribution unit tool and then select the required unit from the drop-list and then making sure that the cursor is inside the boundary of the zone, just click the mouse button to place the ADU. The ADU will be automatically positioned at the top left of the zone:
- 388 -
Add Zone Forced Air Unit Tool
Note You must also add a zone extract unit to a zone that contains an ADU in order to connect up the air return path from the zone.
Add Zone Forced Air Unit Tool
Forced air units are placed at the zone level. To place a forced air unit, click on the Add forced air unit tool and then select the required unit from the drop-list and then making sure that the cursor is inside the boundary of the required zone, just click the mouse button to place the unit. The unit will be automatically positioned at the bottom left of the zone:
- 389 -
Add Zone Heated Floor Tool
Heated floors are placed at the zone level. To place a heated floor, click on the Add heated floor tool and then making sure that the cursor is inside the boundary of the required zone; just click the mouse button to place the heated floor. The heated floor will be automatically positioned at the bottom of the zone:
Add Zone Chilled Ceiling Tool
Chilled ceilings are placed at the zone level. To place a chilled ceiling, click on the Add chilled ceiling tool and then making sure that the cursor is inside the boundary of the required zone, just click the mouse button to place the chilled ceiling. The chilled ceiling will be automatically positioned at the top of the zone:
- 390 -
Add Zone Radiative-Convective Unit Tool
Note: Where chilled ceilings are added to zones with internal ceilings, the floor surface of the associated adjacent upper zone must have a construction with an internal source to represent the embedded piping system of the chilled ceiling. Similarly, in the case of zones with external flat roofs, the roof construction must contain an internal source. Refer to the documentation on Constructions for further information on defining internal sources for constructions.
Add Zone Radiative-Convective Unit Tool
Radiators and convectors are placed at the zone level. To place a radiator or convector, click on the Add radiative-convective unit tool and then select the required unit from the drop-list and then making sure that the cursor is inside the boundary of the required zone, just click the mouse button to place the radiator/convector. The unit will be automatically positioned at the bottom centre of the zone:
- 391 -
Add Zone Extract Unit Tool
Zone extracts are placed at the zone level. To place an extract, click on the Add extract tool and then making sure that the cursor is inside the boundary of the zone just click the mouse button to place the extract. The extract will be automatically positioned at the top right of the zone:
Note: A zone extract is required in an HVAC Zone if an ADU has been placed.
- 392 -
Working Within Components (Component Level)
Working Within Components (Component Level)

Many components in HVAC are composite components and are themselves composed of a number of subcomponents. Examples of composite components include air handling units and various items of zone equipment such as forced air units (fan-coil units, etc.) and air distribution units (VAV terminal boxes with reheat, etc.). In order to access and edit the data associated with each sub-component of a composite component you first need to go to the component level (by selecting it from the navigator or double-clicking on it with the mouse) and then you can select and edit any of the appropriate sub-components:
- 393 -
HVAC Components
A range of components are available with Detailed HVAC: Boilers Chillers Performance Curves Cooling Coil - Water Cooling Coil - Single Speed DX Cooling Coil - Two Stage with Humidity Control DX Heating Coil - Electric Heating Coil - Water Heating Coil - DX Fan - Constant Volume Fan - Variable Volume Fan - On/Off Humidifier - Steam Electric Pump - Constant Speed Pump - Variable Speed Fan Coil Unit - Four Pipe Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Water Heater
Editing Air Loop

Note that the Design supply air flow rate is defined in the AHU dialog contained within the Air loop.
GENERAL Name
This is the name of the loop. If the supplied loop name is found to already exist, the software will automatically append an integer to create a unique name.
SIZING
The rest of the Air loop dialog provides the sizing inputs needed to perform a central forced air system design air flow, heating capacity, and cooling capacity calculation for a system serving one or more zones. The information needed consists of the outside environmental conditions and the design supply air temperatures, outdoor air flow rate, and minimum system air flow ratio. The outside conditions come from the design days in the input. A system sizing calculation is performed for the design day defined in the input file and the resulting maximum heating and cooling air flow rates and capacities are used in the component sizing calculations. Supply air conditions are specified by inputting a supply air temperature for cooling, a supply air temperature for heating, and a preheat temperature. The system sizing calculation sums the zone design air flow rates to obtain a system supply air flow rate. The design conditions and the outdoor air flow rate are used to calculate a design
- 394 -
Editing Air Loop
mixed air temperature. The temperature plus the design supply air temperatures allows the calculation of system design heating and cooling capacities.
Sizing option
The options are: 1-Non-coincident where the central system air flow rate will be sized on the sum of the non-coincident zone air flow rates. 2-Coincident where the central system air flow rate will be sized on the sum of the coincident zone air flow rates.
Type of load to size on

The user specified type of load on which to size the central system. The choices are: 1-Sensible means that the central system supply air flow rate will be determined by combining the zone design air flow rates, which have been calculated to meet the zone sensible loads from the design days. 4-Ventilation requirement means that the central system supply air flow rate will be determined by the system ventilation requirement.
Design outdoor air flow rate

This is the design outdoor air flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min). Generally this should be the minimum outdoor air flow. It is used for both heating and cooling design calculations. The assumption for cooling is that any outdoor air economizer will be closed. If auto-sized, the outdoor air flow rate will be taken from the sum of the zone outdoor air flow rates.
Minimum system air flow ratio

This ratio is the minimum system air flow rate divided by the maximum system air flow rate. The value must be between 0 and 1. For constant volume systems the ratio should be set to 1. Note that this ratio should be set to reflect what the user expects the system flow rate to be when maximum heating demand occurs. This ratio is used in calculating the central system heating capacity. Thus if the system is VAV with the zone VAV dampers held at minimum flow when there is a zone heating demand, this ratio should be set to the minimum flow ratio. If the zone VAV dampers are reverse action and can open to full flow to meet heating demand, this ratio should be set to 1.
HEATING Preheat design temperature

This is the design air temperature exiting the preheat coil (C or F).
Preheat design humidity ratio

This is the design humidity ratio exiting the preheat coil (in kg/kg).
Central heating design supply air temperature

This is the design supply air temperature for heating (C or F). This can be either the reset temperature for a single duct system or the actual hot duct supply air temperature for dual duct systems. It should be the temperature at the exit of the main heating coil.
100% Outdoor air in heating

Entering 2-Yes means the system will be sized for heating using 100% outdoor air. Entering 1-No means the system will be sized for heating using minimum outside air (the default).
Central heating design supply air humidity ratio

This is the design humidity ratio at the exit of the central heating coil (in kg/kg) . The default is 0.008.
- 395 -
Heating design air flow method

The input must be either: 1-Design day which means the program will calculate the system design heating air flow rate using the System Sizing input data and a design day simulation. 2-Flow/System which means that the program will use the input of the field Heating Design Air Flow Rate as the system design heating air flow rate.
The default method is 1-Design day, i.e., the program uses the calculated design values.
Heating design air flow rate

This is the design system heating air flow rate (m 3/s or ft3/min). This input is an alternative to using the program calculated value. This input is used if Heating design air flow method is 2-Flow/System. This value will not be multiplied by any sizing factor or by zone multipliers. If using zone multipliers, this value must be large enough to serve the multiplied zones.
COOLING Pre-cool design temperature

This is the design air temperature exiting the pre-cooling coil (C or F).
Pre-cool design humidity ratio

This is the design humidity ratio exiting the pre-cooling coil (kg/kg).
Central cooling design supply air temperature

This is the design supply air temperature for cooling (in C or F). This should be the temperature of the air exiting the central cooling coil.
100% Outdoor air in cooling

Entering 2-Yes means the system will be sized for cooling using 100% outdoor air. Entering 1-No means the system will be sized for cooling using minimum outside air (the default).
Central cooling design supply air humidity ratio

This is the design humidity ratio at the exit of the central cooling coil (in kg/kg). The default is 0.008.
Cooling design air flow method

The input must be either: 1-Design Day which means that EnergyPlus will calculate the system design cooling air flow rate using the System Sizing input data and a design day simulation. 2-Flow/System where the Cooling design air flow rate below is used as the system design cooling air flow rate.
The default method is 1-Design Day, i.e. the program uses the calculated design values.
Cooling design air flow rate

This is the design system cooling air flow rate (m3/s or ft3/min). This input is an alternative to using the program calculated value. This input is used if Cooling design air flow method is 2-Flow/System. This value will not be multiplied by any sizing factor or by zone multipliers. If using zone multipliers, this value must be large enough to serve the multiplied zones.
- 396 -
Plant And Condenser Loop Edit Dialog
Availability schedule
Schedule values greater than zero (usually 1 is used) indicate that the system is on. Schedule values less than or equal to zero (usually 0 is used) denote that the system is off. This schedule overrides the air loop fan schedules for determining whether the fans are on.

The plant and condenser loop edit dialog incorporates two tabs, the first tab is General and incorporates loop characteristic and sizing data, the second tab covers Plant Equipment Operation allowing you to set up various equipment operation schemes for the loop.
GENERAL Name
If the supplied loop name is found to already exist, the software will automatically append an integer to create a unique name.
Fluid type
There is currently only one fluid type available which is 1-Water.
Plant loop volume

This is the volume of the plant loop (in m 3 or gal). This is the loop volume for the entire loop, i.e. both the demand side and the supply side. This is used for the loop capacitance calculation which updates the loop temperature from one time-step to the next and introduces some time delay between the supply and demand sides of the loop. The loop volume could be calculated from pipe size data but this is not usually known. If zero volume is specified the demand inlet temperature is set to the supply outlet temperature at the previous system time-step. If a very large capacitance is specified unrealistic time delay may result and there may be poor response to changes in loop setpoint temperature. If the loop volume is auto-calculated, the EnergyPlus provided calculation gives reasonable values for most system sizes. This calculation is described in the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference manual.
FLOW TYPE Plant loop flow type

Two options are available: 1-Constant flow, for constant flow plant loops. In this case a constant speed pump will automatically be specified. 2-Variable flow for variable flow plant loops. In this case a variable speed pump will automatically be specified.
The flow type is fixed as 1-Constant flow for DHW and condenser loops
TEMPERATURES Maximum loop temperature

This is the maximum allowable temperature (in C or F) for this loop.
- 397 -
Minimum loop temperature

This is the minimum allowable temperature (in C or F) for this loop.
FLOW RATES Maximum loop flow rate

This is the maximum loop flow rate (in m3/sec or ft3/min). This parameter is also used when the user chooses to auto-calculate the loop volume. See the Plant loop volume above and the EnergyPlus Engineering Manual for more details.
Minimum loop flow rate

This is the minimum loop flow rate (in m3/sec or ft3/min).
Load distribution scheme

The Load distribution scheme selects the algorithm used to sequence equipment operation in order to meet the plant loop demand. Currently, 3 schemes are functional: 1-Sequential uses each piece of equipment to its maximum part load ratio and will operate the last required piece of equipment between its minimum and maximum part load ratio in order to meet the loop demand. 2-Optimal operates each piece of equipment at its optimal part load ratio and will operate the last component between its minimum and maximum part load ratio in order to meet the loop demand. 3-Uniform evenly distributes the loop demand amongst all available components on the equipment list for a given load range.
Plant loop demand calculation scheme

There is currently only one plant loop demand calculation scheme which is the 1-SingleSetPoint scheme. In this scheme the Plant loop requires that a Setpoint manager set a single setpoint value. The Plant loop demand calculation scheme determines the amount of heating or cooling necessary to bring the temperature of the Plant loop to its setpoint. When this value is determined then the Load distribution scheme explained in the previous section takes this value and distributes the load to the appropriate equipment. The demand calculation scheme determines how the load is calculated. See more information in the EnergyPlus Engineering Document.
SIZING Design loop exit temperature

The water temperature (in C or F) at the exit of the supply side of the plant loop, Thus this is the temperature of the water supplied to the inlet of chilled or hot water coils in the case of plant loops or chiller condensers in the case of condenser loops.
Loop design temperature difference

This is the design temperature rise (for cooling or condenser loops) or fall (for heating loops) (in C or F) across the demand side of a plant or condenser loop.
OPERATION Availability schedule

This is the schedule that determines whether or not the Plant loop is available during the simulation. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the device can be on for the timestep. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the device must be off.
- 398 -
Outside temperature operation

This allows you to define external temperatures below and above which, the plant or condenser loop will turn off.
External cut-in temperature

This is the temperature (in C or F) above which the plant or condenser loop will be turned on.
External cut-in temperature

This is the temperature (in C or F) above which the plant or condenser loop will be turned off.
PLANT EQUIPMENT OPERATION

Plants and condenser loops have a mechanism for controlling the operation of the loop to allow control over which equipment is available under what conditions. Since there may be multiple control schemes that are assigned various priorities associated with each loop, an overall operation scheme must be defined. Each operation scheme must have the type of operation scheme together with the name of the scheme and the schedule that defines its availability. Note: The order in which the individual operation schemes appear in this list defines its priority relative to the others with the same scheduled availability. The first scheme appearing in the list is given the highest priority; the second scheme has second highest priority, etc. In other words, if according to its schedule, the first operation scheme is available, then it is used by the simulation to define how the plant or condenser loop operates. If it is not available, the second operation scheme in the list is checked to see if it is available until the highest priority scheme that is also available is found. To allow for simultaneous heating and cooling, there is one configuration where multiple operation schemes are available at a given timestep. This is allowed if a user inputs both a heating range based operation and a cooling range based operation with overlapping schedules. The simulation will look at the current loop demand to determine if the cooling scheme should be used or the heating scheme. In other cases, if two schemes overlap (are available at the same time), EnergyPlus will raise an error and the simulation will be aborted.
Number of schemes
This is the number of operational schemes that are to be associated with the plant or condenser loop. A maximum of ten schemes are allowed for each loop. After setting the required number of schemes, the dialog will be automatically populated with sections for each scheme, the settings for each operation scheme being described below.
SCHEME Scheme name

This is the name of the scheme. If the supplied scheme name is found to already exist, the software will automatically append an integer to create a unique name.
Scheme operation type

This is the type of control scheme used. The available options will depend on the current loop type. For condenser and chilled water plant loops, the options are: 1-Uncontrolled and 2-Cooling load
for heating and domestic hot water plant loops, the options are: 1-Uncontrolled and
- 399 -
3-Heating load.
Uncontrolled loop operation simply specifies a group of equipment that runs uncontrolled. If the loop runs, this equipment will run also, unless turned off by the loop flow resolver to maintain continuity in the fluid loop. The 2-Cooling load and 3-Heating load options allow different load ranges to be defined and which items of equipment will operate for each range. If either of these options is selected, at least one operational range must be defined. For each range, there is a lower limit for the load range, an upper limit for the load range, and a list of the equipment items that will operate in this range.
Scheme equipment
This setting is only displayed if the Scheme operation type is set to 1-Uncontrolled. A list of valid items of plant or condenser equipment is displayed together with check boxes allowing you to define which items of equipment will be turned on for this scheme.
Scheme schedule
This is the schedule for the control scheme. This schedule consists of weeks and days, with the days containing 0 or 1 for each hour of the day. This binary schedule (0 for off, 1 for on) determines if the control scheme is operating for that hour of the day or not.
Number of ranges
This setting is only displayed if the Scheme Operation Type is set to 2-Cooling load or 3-Heating load and is used to define the number of ranges required for the heating or cooling load scheme.
RANGE Range lower limit

This setting is only displayed if the Scheme Operation Type is set to 2-Cooling load or 3-Heating load. This is the lower demand range (W) for the equipment defined for the current range. If demand is below this value, then the equipment will not turn on to meet the demand.
Range upper limit

This setting is only displayed if the Scheme Operation Type is set to 2-Cooling load or 3-Heating load. This is the upper demand range (W) for the equipment defined for the current range. If demand is above this value, then the equipment will not turn on to meet the demand.
Range Equipment
This setting is only displayed if the Scheme Operation Type is set to 2-Cooling load or 3-Heating load. A list of valid items of plant or condenser equipment is displayed together with check boxes allowing you to define which items of equipment will be turned on for this range. Note: A priority drop-list associated with each item of equipment allows you to define the order in which equipment will be turned on when the loop demand is within this range.
Air Handling Units

Air handling units (AHUs) are components that are automatically included in the supply sub-loops of all air loops. AHUs are composite units incorporating all of the components that comprise central air handling plant such as outdoor air mixers, fans, heating/ cooling coils and humidifiers. There are two main types of AHU in DesignBuilder HVAC, generic and unitary AHUs. The main difference between the two units is that unitary AHUs incorporate an EnergyPlus unitary system such as air-to-air heat pump or heat/cool unit.
- 400 -
Generic Air Handling Unit (AHU)
To edit the data associated with an AHU, you first need to be at the supply sub loop level of the Air loop. Select the AHU component by moving the mouse cursor over it and then clicking the mouse button to select it. You can then access the edit dialog by right-clicking the mouse and selecting the Edit selected component option or alternatively, select the Edit selected component tool from the toolbar. These AHU types are available: Generic AHU Unitary Heat Cool AHU Unitary Heat Pump AHU

The basic generic AHU incorporates an outdoor air system, a supply fan, optional night cycle operation, an optional heat recovery system (see Heat Recovery), optional pre-heat and pre-cool coils and an optional extract fan. Additional components such as heating coils, cooling coils and humidifiers may also be added to generic AHUs.
GENERAL Name
This is the name that you assign to the AHU which should be unique. If the supplied name is not unique, the software will automatically append a backslash and integer to ensure that there are no duplicate names.
Fan type
This setting is used to indicate a Constant Air Volume (CAV) or Variable Air Volume (VAV) system. It can take one of two values: 1-Constant volume or 2-Variable volume.
Note 1: Once an air loop has been connected to a zone ADU, the Fan type setting is fixed (greyed out) preventing an invalid connection and remains greyed out until the air loop is disconnected from all ADUs. Note 2: Once the AHU fan type has been set, the air loop containing the AHU can only be connected to valid zone air distribution units (ADU), i.e. CAV air loops can only be connected to CAV ADUs and similarly VAV systems can only be connected to VAV ADUs.
- 401 -
Design supply air flow rate

This is the air loop primary air design volumetric flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min). This setting is auto-sizeable.

This is the schedule that contains information on the availability of the heat pump for operation. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during the hour. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the hour.
NIGHT CYCLE (COMMON TO ALL AHUS)

This setting may be used to enable cycling of an air system when one or more zones become too hot or too cold. A common requirement for this mechanism is where the AHU is turned off at night. However if the building gets too cold there might be condensation on the walls and other damage. Thus the control system is usually programmed to turn the system on either if a specified control thermostat or any thermostat shows a zone temperature of less than a night time set point. Similarly, there might be a concern about a building getting too hot. Again the control system is programmed to turn the AHU back on if one or any zone temperature exceeds a night time cooling set point. This mechanism offers considerable flexibility in determining how the night time on/off decision will be made. The temperature in one specific zone may be used or the temperatures in all the zones connected to the AHU may be sampled. You can specify a temperature tolerance and a run time for the system once it switches on. There is also an applicability schedule for scheduling when this mechanism may be applied.
Applicability schedule (night cycle)

This schedule determines whether or not for a given time period this mechanism is to be applied. Schedule values greater than zero (usually 1 is used) indicate the night cycle mechanism is to be applied, whereas schedule values less than or equal to zero (usually 0 is used) denote that it is not used for this time period.
Fan schedule
This is the central fan on/off schedule for the air loop that the night cycle mechanism will affect.
Control type
The possible inputs are: 1-Stay off means the night cycle mechanism will have no effect AHU on/off will be determined by the fan schedule 2-Cycle on any means that if any zone served by the air loop incorporating this AHU has an air temperature outside the cooling or heating set points the central fan will turn on even though the fan schedule indicates the fan is off. 3-Cycle on control zone means the same thing except that the temperature in only the specified control zone is used. 4-Cycle on any zone fans only is the same as 2-Cycle on any except that only the zone fans are cycled on and the AHU fan is left off.
Thermostat tolerance
This is the amount (in C or F) by which the zone temperature must exceed the cooling set point or fall below the heating set point in order for the night cycle mechanism to signal that the system should turn on.
Cycling run time

The time in seconds for which the system will run after it has cycled on. The default is 3600 seconds (1 hour).
- 402 -
Control zone
For the Control Type option 3-Cycle on control zone select the control zone.
EXTRACT FAN Include extract fan

An extract fan is included within all AHUs by default. This setting may be used to remove the extract fan from the AHU. Note: If the AHU is connected to a zone that incorporates a Variable Air Volume with Reheat and Variable Speed Fan ADU, the AHU extract fan should be omitted otherwise EnergyPlus will raise an error and the simulation will be aborted.
AIR HANDLING UNIT OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM (COMMON TO ALL AHUS)

The outdoor air system incorporates an air mixer, an optional pre-cool coil, an optional pre-heat coil, an optional heat recovery device and an outdoor air controller. The purpose of the outdoor air controller is to provide outdoor air for ventilation and also provide free cooling (through additional outdoor air and/or bypassing an air-to-air heat exchanger) whenever possible. The outdoor air controller includes a number of user-selectable limit controls. If any of the selected limits are exceeded, the outdoor airflow rate is set to the minimum. If all the limits are satisfied, the outdoor air controller does the following for continuous air flow systems: if the outdoor air temperature is greater than or equal to the mixed air temperature setpoint, the outdoor air flow rate is set to the maximum; if the outdoor air temperature is less than the mixed air temperature setpoint, the outdoor air controller will modulate the outdoor air flow so that the mixed air temperature will match the mixed air setpoint temperature. A time-of-day schedule may also be used to simulate an increase in outdoor air flow rate for push-button type economiser applications. When the schedule permits (i.e., schedule values are greater than 0), the outdoor air flow rate is increased to the user-specified maximum outdoor air flow rate. The outdoor air controller can also account for changes in the outdoor air flow rate during times when indoor humidity levels are high. A zone humidistat must be used with this control option. During high indoor humidity, the outdoor air flow rate is modified in response to a high indoor humidity condition. If high humidity control is based on the outdoor air humidity ratio and the outdoor humidity ratio is greater than the indoor humidity ratio, high humidity control is terminated. When the economiser is used in conjunction with the high humidity control option, high humidity control has priority and controls the change in air flow rates. If the AHU Night Cycle option is switched on, it has priority over high humidity control and will use the controllers maximum outdoor air flow rate when the Night Cycle mechanism cycles the fan on. Optional pre-cool coil, pre-heat coil and heat recovery may be specified upstream of the mixer. When this is the case, any modulation will be determined by the conditions at the inlet node of the mixer rather than the outdoor air. This means that the controller will account for the heat recovery device or pre-heating/pre-cooling coils that may modify the condition of outdoor air before it reaches the mixer. If all the limits are satisfied, the outdoor air controller does the following for cycling fan systems: the outdoor air flow rate is set to the maximum when the fan cycles on. If the limits are not satisfied, the outdoor air flow rate is at the minimum when the fan cycles on.
Name
This is a read-only label that is automatically generated by the software and which incorporates the name of the air loop in which the AHU is located.
- 403 -
RECIRCULATION
If this option is checked, the AHU will re-circulate a proportion of the air delivered by the AHU, otherwise the system will operate as a 100% fresh air system.
Outdoor air flow rate

This is the minimum outdoor air flow rate for the system (in m 3/s).
Minimum limit type

Choices for this field are: 1-Proportional minimum which means the minimum outdoor airflow rate varies in proportion to the total system air flow rate 2-Fixed minimum which means that the minimum outdoor airflow rate is fixed no matter what the actual system flow rate is.
ECONOMISER
Options for an economiser are: 1-No Economiser - the economiser will not operate and the outdoor airflow rate will be at the minimum for the entire simulation. 2-Fixed Dry-Bulb - the economiser will set the outdoor airflow rate at minimum if the outdoor air temperature is higher than a specified dry-bulb temperature limit. 3-Differential Dry-Bulb - will trigger the outdoor airflow to minimum when the dry-bulb temperature of outdoor air is higher than the dry-bulb temperature of the return air. 4-Fixed Enthalpy - checks the upper limit of the enthalpy given as a field input against the enthalpy content of outdoor air and will set the outdoor airflow rate to minimum if the latter is greater than the former. 5-Differential Enthalpy does the same as 4-Fixed Enthalpy but compares the return air enthalpy with the enthalpy of outdoor air. When the enthalpy of outdoor air is greater than the enthalpy of the return air, the outdoor air flow rate is set to minimum. 6-Electronic Enthalpy enables the simulation to calculate the humidity ratio limit of outdoor air based on the dry-bulb temperature of outdoor air and a quadratic/cubic curve, and compare it to the actual outdoor air humidity ratio. If the actual outdoor humidity ratio is greater than the calculated humidity ratio limit, then the outdoor airflow rate is set to minimum. 7-Fixed Dew-Point and Dry-Bulb compares both the outdoor dew-point temperature and the outdoor drybulb temperature to their specified high limit values. If either outdoor temperature exceeds the high limit value, the outdoor airflow rate is set to minimum. 8-Differential Dry-Bulb and Enthalpy enables the control strategy to be based on both the 3-Differential Dry Bulb and 5-Differential Enthalpy economiser control strategies.
In addition to all economiser control types listed above, each control type checks for user-entered values for the upper limit of dry-bulb temperature, enthalpy limit, humidity ratio limit and dew-point limit. The outdoor air flow rate is set to minimum if any of these entered limits are exceeded.
Maximum outdoor air flow rate

This is the maximum outdoor air flow rate for the system (in m3/s or ft3/min).
Economiser control action type

There are two choices: 1-Modulate flow and 2-Minimum flow with bypass.
- 404 -
The second option 2-Minimum flow with bypass is only available if Heat Recovery is selected. If 1-Modulate flow is selected, this means that the outdoor air flow rate will be increased to meet the mixed air setpoint temperature, subject to the limits imposed via other inputs for this object (e.g., Economizer Maximum Limit DryBulb Temperature, Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate, etc.). The 2-Minimum flow with bypass option is used in conjunction with a heat recovery device for providing free cooling operation in the absence of a conventional airside economizer (i.e., when outdoor air flow rate is not increased during economizer mode). The 2-Minimum flow with bypass choice forces the outdoor air flow rate to always remain at the minimum. However, when high humidity control is used, the outdoor air flow rate is set to the product of the maximum outdoor air flow rate multiplied by the high humidity outdoor air flow ratio. The heat exchanger uses the limit checking in the outdoor air controller to decide whether or not to bypass the outdoor air around the heat exchanger or turn off the wheel motor in the case of a rotary heat exchanger. Heat exchange is also suspended when high humidity control is active.
Lockout type
This option is only available for Unitary Heat Cool or Unitary Heat Pump AHUs. Choices for this setting are: 1-No lockout, 2-Lockout with heating, which means that if the packaged unit is in heating mode, the economiser is locked out i.e. the economizer dampers are closed and there is minimum outdoor air flow. 3-Lockout with compressor. This setting only applies to unitary systems with DX coils and means that in addition to locking out the economiser when the unit is in heating mode the economiser is locked out when the DX unit compressor is operating to provide cooling. In other words, the economiser must meet the entire cooling load it isnt allowed to operate in conjunction with the DX cooling coil. The 3-Lockout with compressor option is sometimes called a non-integrated economiser.
Economiser minimum limit dry-bulb temperature

This is an optional outdoor air temperature low limit (in C or F) for economiser operation. If the outdoor air temperature is below this limit, the outdoor airflow rate will be set to the minimum. This limit applies to the conditions at the Actuator Node regardless of whether or not there are any other components in the outdoor air path upstream of the mixer.
Economiser maximum limit dry-bulb temperature

This is an optional outdoor air temperature high limit (in C or F) for economiser operation. If the outdoor air temperature is above this limit, the outdoor airflow rate will be set to the minimum. This limit applies to the conditions at the Actuator Node regardless of whether or not there are any other components in the outdoor air path upstream of the mixer.
Economiser maximum limit enthalpy

This is an optional outdoor air enthalpy limit (in J/kg or Btu/lb) for economiser operation. If the outdoor air enthalpy is above this value, the outdoor airflow rate will be set to the minimum. This field is required if the Economiser type is set to 4-Fixed enthalpy. This limit applies to the conditions at the Actuator Node regardless of whether or not there are any other components in the outdoor air path upstream of the mixer.
Economiser maximum limit dew-point temperature

This is an optional outdoor air dew-point limit (in C or F) for economiser operation. If the outdoor air dew-point temperature is above this value, the outdoor airflow rate will be set to the minimum. This limit applies to the conditions at the Actuator Node regardless of whether or not there are any other components in the outdoor air path upstream of the mixer.
Electronic enthalpy limit curve

This is an optional Quadratic or Cubic curve which provides the maximum outdoor air humidity ratio (function of outdoor air dry-bulb temperature) for economiser operation. If the outdoor air humidity ratio is greater than the curves maximum humidity ratio (evaluated at the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature), the outdoor air flow rate will
- 405 -
be set to the minimum. This limit applies to the conditions at the Actuator node regardless of whether or not there are any other components in the outdoor air path upstream of the mixer.
Time of day economiser control schedule

This is an optional schedule which controls the outdoor air flow rate based on a time-of-day economiser. Schedule values equal to 0 disable this feature. A schedule value of greater than 0 causes the outdoor air flow rate to increase to the maximum. When an economiser is used in conjunction with the high humidity control option, high humidity control has priority.
High humidity control

This setting establishes whether or not the outdoor air flow rate is modified in response to high indoor relative humidity. If 2-Yes is selected, the outdoor air flow rate may be modified when the indoor relative humidity is above the humidistat setpoint. If 1-No is selected, this option is disabled and the following three settings are not displayed.
Humidistat Control Zone

This is the zone name where the humidistat is located. This setting is only required when the High Humidity Control is set to 2-Yes.
High humidity outdoor air flow ratio

This is the ratio of the modified outdoor air flow rate to the maximum outdoor air flow rate. When the high humidity control algorithm determines that the outdoor air flow rate will be changed (i.e. increased or decreased), the operating outdoor air flow rate is equal to the maximum outdoor air flow rate multiplied by this ratio. The minimum value for this setting is 0. This setting is only required when the High humidity control is set to 2-Yes. When an economiser is used in conjunction with the high humidity control option, high humidity control has priority.
Control high indoor humidity based on outdoor humidity ratio

This setting determines if high humidity control is activated based on high indoor relative humidity alone or is activated only when the indoor relative humidity is above the humidistat setpoint and the indoor humidity ratio is greater than the outdoor humidity ratio. Valid choices are 1-Yes and 2-No. If 2-No is selected, high humidity control is active any time the zone humidistat senses a moisture load. If 1-Yes is selected, the model also verifies that the outdoor humidity ratio is less than the humidistats zone air humidity ratio. This setting is only required when the High Humidity Control is set to 2-Yes.
Minimum outdoor air schedule

This is an optional schedule which uses decimal values (0.0 1.0). These values are multiplied by the minimum outdoor air flow rate. This schedule is useful for reducing the outdoor air flow rate to zero during unoccupied or start up hours. If this schedule option is not used, the minimum outdoor air flow rate either remains constant during the simulation period (Minimum limit type = 2-Fixed minimum) or varies in proportion to the supply air flow rate (Minimum limit type = 1-Proportional minimum).
Minimum fraction of outdoor air schedule

This is an optional schedule which uses decimal values (0.0 1.0). These values are multiplied by the total (design) air flow rate. This is an alternate method for specifying the minimum outdoor air amount. The other method is the Minimum outdoor air schedule described above. Note: This setting overrides Outdoor air flow rate.
Maximum fraction of outdoor air schedule

This is an optional schedule with values in decimal fractions (0.0-1.0). This setting enables you to limit the maximum amount of outdoor air permissible and thus also limits the permissible maximum outdoor air into the system.
- 406 -
HEAT RECOVERY (COMMON TO ALL AHUS)

If this option is checked, the AHU will incorporate a sensible and latent air-to-air heat recovery device.
The sensible and latent air-to-air heat exchanger is an HVAC component typically used for exhaust or relief air heat recovery. Heat exchanger performance can be specified to transfer sensible energy, latent energy or both between the supply and exhaust air streams. The input requires no geometric data. Performance is defined by specifying sensible and/or latent effectiveness at 75% and 100% of the nominal (rated) supply air flow rate at two operating conditions as shown in the following table:
Operating Conditions for Defining Heat Exchanger Performance. Note: Conditions consistent with the Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institutes (ARI) Standard 1060-2001 This object models the basic operation of an air-to-air heat exchanger. Heat exchange between the supply and exhaust air streams occurs whenever the unit is scheduled to be available (Availability schedule) and supply/exhaust air flow is present. This heat exchanger object can be used in conjunction with a conventional airside economiser (select 1-Modulate flow for the Economiser control action type), whereby heat exchange is suspended whenever the air-side economiser (or high humidity control) is active (i.e. air flow is fully by-passed around a fixed-plate heat exchanger or the rotation of a rotary heat exchanger is stopped). This object is also able to suspend heat exchange for the purpose of providing free cooling operation in the absence of a conventional air-
- 407 -
side economizer (i.e. specify 2-Minimum flow with bypass for the Economiser control action type). During winter weather, humid exhaust air entering the heat exchanger can form frost on the cold heat exchanger surfaces, which can reduce air flow and the amount of energy recovery. Several methods are used to control or eliminate frost formation, and the following types can be modelled for this heat exchanger object: supply air pre-heat, minimum exhaust air temperature, exhaust air recirculation and exhaust only. For preheat frost control, the Preheat Coil option must be checked under the Pre-Treatment header. The other frost control types may be selected using the Frost control type drop-list. Air-to-air heat exchangers are sometimes controlled to maintain a fixed supply air outlet temperature to avoid overheating. To model this control in EnergyPlus, a Setpoint manager is used to establish a temperature set point at the supply air outlet node of the heat exchanger. Wheel speed modulation or plate supply air bypass is used to control the supply air exiting conditions to this set point. The set point for supply air temperature control should be set at the minimum economizer temperature set point if an air-side economizer is also being used by the air system. If frost control and supply air outlet temperature control are used, frost control takes precedence over supply air temperature control (e.g. Control defrost time fraction is determined as if wheel speed modulation or plate supply air bypass is not used).
Nominal supply air flow rate

The nominal primary side (supply) air flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min). The actual supply and exhaust air flow rates must be between 50% and 130% of this value or a warning will be issued.
Nominal electric power

This is the electric consumption rate of the device (W). Electric power is considered constant whenever the unit operates. This numeric input can be used to model electric power consumption by controls (transformers, relays, etc.) and/or a motor for a rotary heat exchanger. None of this electric power contributes thermal load to the supply or exhaust air streams. The default value for this field is 0.
Supply air outlet temperature control

This alpha field determines if the heat exchangers supply air outlet is controlled to a temperature set point. The choices for this input field are 1-Yes or 2-No, with the default being 2-No. When supply air outlet temperature control is used, the wheel rotational speed modulates or supply air is bypassed around the plate heat exchanger to maintain the desired setpoint temperature. A Setpoint manager is required to establish the desired set point at the supply air outlet node. When an air-side economizer is also being modelled for this air system, the set point for the supply air outlet temperature control should be equal to the Economizer minimum limit dry-bulb temperature.
Heat exchanger type

This setting is used to define the type of heat exchanger being modelled. The options are: 1-Plate (e.g., fixed plate) or 2-Rotary (e.g., rotating cylinder or wheel).
The heat exchanger type affects the modelling of frost control options and supply air outlet temperature control. For rotary heat exchangers, rotational speed is varied to control frost formation or the supply air outlet temperature. For plate exchangers, air bypass around the heat exchanger is used to obtain the desired effect.
Sensible effectiveness at 100% heating air flow

The sensible heat exchange effectiveness at the heating condition defined in the Table above with both the supply and exhaust air volume flow rates equal to 100% of the nominal supply air flow rate specified in the previous input field. The default value for this field is 0.
Latent effectiveness at 100% heating air flow

The latent heat exchange effectiveness at the heating condition defined in the Operating Conditions for Defining Heat Exchanger Performance table with both the supply and exhaust air volume flow rates equal to 100% of the
- 408 -
nominal supply air flow rate. Specify this value as 0.0 if the heat exchanger does not transfer latent energy. The default value for this field is 0.
Sensible effectiveness at 75% heating air flow

The sensible heat exchange effectiveness at the heating condition defined in the Operating Conditions for Defining Heat Exchanger Performance table with both the supply and exhaust air volume flow rates equal to 75% of the nominal supply air flow rate. The default value for this field is 0.
Latent effectiveness at 75% heating air flow

The latent heat exchange effectiveness at the heating condition defined in the Operating Conditions for Defining Heat Exchanger Performance table with both the supply and exhaust air volume flow rates equal to 75% of the nominal supply air flow rate. Specify this value as 0.0 if the heat exchanger does not transfer latent energy. The default value for this field is 0.
Sensible effectiveness at 100% cooling air flow

The sensible heat exchange effectiveness at the cooling condition defined in the Operating Conditions for Defining Heat Exchanger Performance table with both the supply and exhaust air volume flow rates equal to 100% of the nominal supply air flow rate. The default value for this setting is 0.
Latent effectiveness at 100% cooling air flow

The latent heat exchange effectiveness at the cooling condition defined in the Operating Conditions for Defining Heat Exchanger Performance table with both the supply and exhaust air volume flow rates equal to 100% of the nominal supply air flow rate. Specify this value as 0.0 if the heat exchanger does not transfer latent energy. The default value for this setting is 0.
Sensible effectiveness at 75% cooling air flow

The sensible heat exchange effectiveness at the cooling condition defined in the Operating Conditions for Defining Heat Exchanger Performance table with both the supply and exhaust air volume flow rates equal to 75% of the nominal supply air flow rate. The default value for this setting is 0.
Latent effectiveness at 75% cooling air flow

The latent heat exchange effectiveness at the cooling condition defined in the Operating Conditions for Defining Heat Exchanger Performance table with both the supply and exhaust air volume flow rates equal to 75% of the nominal supply air flow rate. Specify this value as 0.0 if the heat exchanger does not transfer latent energy. The default value for this field is 0.
Frost control type

There are four options for frost control: 1-None, 2-Exhaust air recirculation, dampers are used to direct exhaust air back into the zone through the supply side of the heat exchanger when the supply (outdoor) air inlet temperature falls below a threshold temperature (defined in the next input field). The fraction of time that exhaust air is circulated through the supply side of the heat exchanger is dependent on the supply (outdoor) air inlet temperature with respect to the threshold temperature, the initial defrost time fraction, and the rate of change of defrost time fraction (see Rate of defrost time fraction increase). When exhaust air is being re-circulated, no supply (outdoor ventilation) air is being provided through the heat exchanger unit (which may or may not be acceptable regarding ventilation for occupants). 3-Exhaust only (supply air bypass): this control cycles off the supply air flow through the heat exchanger for a certain period of time while the exhaust air continues to flow through the exhaust side of the heat exchanger. The fraction of time that the supply flow through the heat exchanger is cycled off is dependent on the supply (outdoor) air inlet temperature with respect to the threshold temperature, the initial defrost time fraction, and the rate of change of defrost time fraction (see Rate of defrost time fraction increase).
- 409 -
When implemented in real applications, provisions are usually made to avoid building depressurization when this frost control is operating (automatic or pressure-operated dampers, or a bypass air damper around the supply side of the heat exchanger). For this frost control type, it is assumed that the supply air is bypassed around the heat exchanger during frost control operation, i.e. the total supply flow is not reduced during defrost, but merely bypassed around the heat exchanger. 4-Minimum exhaust temperature where the temperature of the exhaust air leaving the heat exchanger is monitored and the heat exchanger effectiveness is decreased (by slowing heat exchanger rotation or bypassing supply air around the plate exchanger) to keep the exhaust air from falling below the threshold temperature.
If a pre-heat frost control coil is specified, this setting is automatically set to 1-None and disabled.
Threshold temperature
This numeric field defines the dry-bulb temperature of air which is used to initiate frost control (in C or F). The default value is 1.7C. If 2-Exhaust air recirculation or 3-Exhaust only options are selected the Frost control type, the threshold temperature defines the supply (outdoor) air inlet temperature below which frost control is active. For 4-Minimum exhaust temperature frost control, heat exchanger effectiveness is controlled to keep the exhaust air outlet temperature from falling below this threshold temperature value. The appropriate threshold temperature varies with exhaust (inlet) air temperature and humidity, frost control type, heat exchanger type, and whether the heat exchanger transfers sensible energy alone or both sensible and latent energy (enthalpy). Typical threshold temperatures are provided in the table below. However, it is recommended that the user consult manufacturers information for the specific air-to-air heat exchanger being modelled.
Typical Threshold Temperatures Source: Indoor Humidity Assessment Tool, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, ** To model preheat frost control, specify frost control type as 1-None and select a pre-heat coil for the AHU controlled to the keep the air temperature above the frost threshold temperature.
- 410 -
Initial defrost time fraction

This is the fraction of the simulation timestep when frost control will be invoked when the threshold temperature is reached. This setting is only used for the 2-Exhaust air recirculation and 3-Exhaust only frost control types. The value for this setting must be 0 and 1. The default time fraction is 0.083 (e.g., 5 min / 60 min) which is typical for Exhaust air recirculation frost control. Higher initial defrost time fractions (e.g., 0.167 = 10 min / 60 min) are typically required for Exhaust only frost control. For best results, you should obtain this information from the manufacturer.
Rate of defrost time fraction increase

This is the rate of increase in the defrost time fraction as the supply (outdoor) air inlet temperature falls below the threshold temperature. This field is only used for the 2-Exhaust air recirculation and 3-Exhaust only frost control types. The value for this setting must be 0. The default value is 0.012 (e.g., 0.72 min / 60 min per degree C temperature difference) which is typical for Exhaust air recirculation frost control. Higher values (e.g. 0.024 = 1.44 min / 60 min per C temperature difference) are typically required for Exhaust only frost control. For best results, you should obtain this information from the manufacturer. The total defrost time fraction is determined as follows: Total defrost time fraction = Initial Defrost Time Fraction + Rate of Defrost Time Fraction Increase * (T threshold Tsupply air inlet) The model does not allow the total defrost time fraction to exceed 1.0 or be less than 0.
Economiser lockout
This input denotes whether the heat exchanger unit is locked out (bypassed for plate type heat exchangers or the rotation is suspended for rotary type heat exchangers) when the air-side economiser is operating. Both the economiser and High Humidity Control activate the heat exchanger lockout as specified by this input. The input choices are 1-Yes (meaning locked out) or 2-No.
This is the schedule that determines whether or not the heat recovery device is available for each timestep of the simulation. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the device can be on. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the device must be off.
PRE-TREATMENT Pre-heat coil

This setting allows you to add a pre-heat coil to the air handling unit.
Pre-heat coil setpoint temperature

The schedule value for each time period is the setpoint for the off-coil temperature (in C only).
Pre-cool Coil
This setting allows you to add a pre-cool coil to the air handling unit.
Pre-cool coil setpoint temperature

The schedule value for each time period is the setpoint for the off-coil temperature (in C only).
- 411 -
Unitary Heat Cool AHU

The unitary heat cool AHU incorporates an EnergyPlus unitary heat cool component, an outdoor air system (see Air Handling Unit Outdoor Air System), optional night cycle operation, an optional heat recovery system (see Heat Recovery), optional pre-heat and pre-cool coils and an optional extract fan. The unitary heat cool component itself comprises a supply fan, a DX cooling coil component and an electric heating coil component. If dehumidification control is selected, an electric reheat coil is automatically included.
GENERAL Name

SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE Maximum supply air temperature

This is the design operating air outlet temperature (in C or F) when the unitary system is heating.
- 412 -
Unitary Heat Cool AHU
SUPPLY AIR FLOW RATES Design air flow rate

Cooling operation air flow rate

This setting defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is auto-sizable.
Heating operation air flow rate

This setting defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX heating coil and/or supplemental heater are operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is auto-sizable.
Supply air flow rate when no cooling or heating is needed

This setting defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when neither cooling nor heating is required (i.e., DX coils and supplemental heater are off but the supply air fan operates). This setting is only used when the heat pump operating mode is specified as continuous fan operation (see Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule). Values must be greater than or equal to zero, or this field is auto-sizable. If the heat pump operating mode is specified as continuous fan operation and this value is set to zero or this field is left blank, then the model assumes that the supply air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is equal to the supply air flow rate when the compressor was last operating (for cooling operation or heating operation).
SUPPLY FAN Supply fan placement

There are two options: 1-Blow through where the supply air fan is before the DX cooling/heating coil. 2-Draw through where the supply air fan is after the DX cooling/heating coil.
Supply air fan operating mode schedule

This is the supply air fan operating mode schedule. The supply air fan operating mode may vary during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season. Schedule values of 0 denote that the unitary system supply air fan and the heating or cooling coil cycle on and off together to meet the heating or cooling load (a.k.a. AUTO fan). Schedule values other than 0 denote that the supply fan runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles to meet the load.

An extract fan is included within all AHUs by default. This setting may be used to remove the extract fan from the AHU.
THERMOSTAT LOCATION Controlling zone or thermostat location

Click on the <Select zone> label and then click on the displayed ellipsis button to bring up the zone selector dialog. Select the zone supplied by the AHU where the thermostat controlling the heat pump is located.
- 413 -
DEHUMIDIFICATION Dehumidification control type

There are two options for dehumidification control: 1-None - meet sensible load only, no active de-humidification control; 2-Cool Reheat - cool beyond the dry-bulb temperature set point as required to meet the high humidity setpoint. Note: If 2-Cool Reheat is used, a humidistat must be defined in one of the zones supplied by the AHU.
OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM

See Outdoor air system description for Generic AHU
Unitary Heat Pump AHU

The unitary air-to-air heat pump AHU incorporates an EnergyPlus unitary air-to-air heat pump component, an outdoor air system (see Air Handling Unit Outdoor Air System), optional night cycle operation, an optional heat recovery system (see Heat Recovery), optional pre-heat and pre-cool coils and an optional extract fan. The unitary air-to-air heat pump component itself comprises a supply fan, a DX cooling coil component, a DX heating coil component, and an electric supplementary heating coil component.
GENERAL Name
- 414 -
Unitary Heat Pump AHU

SUPPLY AIR FLOW RATES Design air flow rate

Cooling operation air flow rate

This setting defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is auto-sizable.
Heating operation air flow rate

This setting defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX heating coil and/or supplemental heater are operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is auto-sizable.

This setting defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when neither cooling nor heating is required (i.e., DX coils and supplemental heater are off but the supply air fan operates). This setting is only used when the heat pump operating mode is specified as continuous fan operation (see Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule). Values must be greater than or equal to zero, or this field is auto-sizable. If the heat pump operating mode is specified as continuous fan operation and this value is set to zero or this field is left blank, then the model assumes that the supply air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is equal to the supply air flow rate when the compressor was last operating (for cooling operation or heating operation).
SUPPLY FAN Supply fan placement

There are two options: 1-Blow through where the supply air fan is before the DX cooling/heating coil and the supplementary heating coil. 2-Draw through where the supply air fan is between the DX cooling/heating coil and the supplementary heating coil.

This is the supply air fan operating mode schedule. The supply air fan operating mode may vary during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season. Schedule values of 0 denote that the unitary system supply air fan and the heating or cooling coil cycle on and off together to meet the heating or cooling load (a.k.a. AUTO fan). Schedule values other than 0 denote that the supply fan runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles to meet the load.
- 415 -

An extract fan is included within all AHUs by default. This setting may be used to remove the extract fan from the AHU.
THERMOSTAT LOCATION Controlling zone or thermostat location

Click on the <Select zone> label and then click on the displayed ellipsis button to bring up the zone selector dialog. Select the zone supplied by the AHU where the thermostat controlling the heat pump is located.
SUPPLEMENTAL HEATER Maximum supply air temperature from supplemental heater

This setting defines the maximum allowed supply air temperature exiting the heat pump supplemental heating coil.
Maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for supplemental heater operation

This setting defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature above which the heat pump supplemental heating coil is disabled. The temperature for this input field must be less than or equal to 21C.
OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM

See Outdoor air system description for Generic AHU
Heating Coils
These heating coil types are available within Detailed HVAC: Heating Coil - Water Heating Coil - Electric Heating Coil - Gas Heating Coil - DX
Heating Coil - Water

Coil:Heating:Water
Used in: Air Handling Units Demand loops of Dual duct systems Air Distribution Units
- 416 -
The simple water heating coil model provides sensible heating of the air. The calculations use the EffectivenessNTU algorithm and assume a cross-flow heat exchanger.
GENERAL Name
An auto-generated name for the heating coil.
Type
The type of a hot water coil must be: 1-Water
In all cases it will also be possible to select 2-Electric in which case the Electric heating coil is used or 3-Gas where the Gas heating coil is used instead.
Performance input method

The user can choose one of: 1-Nominal capacity, or, 2-UA and Design water flow rate.
If the 2-UA and Design water flow rate option is selected, you must input values for UA of the Coil and Max water flow rate of the Coil. If 1-Nominal capacity is chosen you must input a Rated capacity and UA of the Coil. Rated capacity is defined as the heating capacity in watts of the coil at the rating points (i.e. the rated inlet and outlet water/air temperatures defined below). The rated capacity is used to calculate a water mass flow rate and a UA for the coil. The default is 1-Nominal capacity. To autosize the capacity, choose 2-UA and Design water flow rate and use autosize as the inputs for UA, Maximum water flow rate, and Rated capacity. EnergyPlus will use the Sizing inputs to size the coil. The rated temperatures (see below) are not used in autosizing. These are used only when the user is specifying coil performance using the 1-Nominal capacity input method.
Maximum water flow rate

The maximum possible water flow rate (m3/sec or gal/min) through the coil. This field is used when Performance input method = 2-UA and Design water flow rate. This field is autosizable.
UA (U-Factor x Area)
Enter the UA value for the coil needed for the Effectiveness-NTU heat exchanger model. An estimate of the UA can be obtained from:
where: q is the heat transferred from water to the air in W; Twater, avg is the average water temperature in C; and Tair, avg is the average air temperature in C. Or the LMTD temperature difference can be used. This field is only used when Performance input method = 2-UA and Design water flow rate This field is autosizable.
- 417 -
Rated capacity
The heating capacity of the coil (in W or Btu/h) at the rated inlet and outlet air and water temperatures. This field is used when the Performance input method = 1-Nominal capacity. This field is autosizable. The rating points are given in the four subsequent input fields.
WATER TEMPERATURES Rated inlet water temperature

The inlet water temperature (C or F) corresponding to the rated heating capacity. The default is 82.2C (180F).
Rated outlet water temperature

The outlet water temperature (C or F) corresponding to the rated heating capacity. The default is 71.1C (160F)
AIR TEMPERATURES Rated inlet air temperature

The inlet air temperature (C or F) corresponding to the rated heating capacity. The default is 16.6C (60F)..
Rated outlet air temperature

The outlet air temperature (C or F) corresponding to the nominal heating capacity. The default is 32.2C (90F).

Schedule that defines when the coil is available, i.e. whether the coil can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during a given time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit is off.
CONTROLLER Control variable

The Control variable defines how the coil is controlled. Temperature control is currently the only option. 1-Temperature control is used for air temperature control and is normally specified for the coils outlet air node.
Action
The Action determines how the controlled variable (e.g. mass flow rate through a water coil) is changed based on the control signal. In a heating coil where water mass flow rate is to be controlled, the mass flow rate through the coil is increased when more heating is required, which increases the value of heat transfer from the water to the air stream. So this is considered a "normal" action controller and so the value of this field is fixed as 1-Normal.
Actuator variable
This was again meant to be more generic but currently has only been used to control the water mass flow rate of a heating or cooling coil. This actuator variable is fixed as 1-Flow to control the water mass flow rate.
- 418 -
Controller convergence tolerance

The coil is controlled by knowing the outlet temperature and/or humidity ratio specified by the setpoint managers, and setting the outlet conditions from the coil to meet these setpoints. The hot water coils use complex models that cannot be inverted directly. Therefore, to determine the correct mass flow rate the models are inverted numerically using an iterative procedure. The iterative solution uses an interval-halving routine and needs a termination criteria that is set here. The convergence tolerance is the maximum difference between the actual temperature at the setpoint node and the setpoint temperature. This control offset is typically set to a small temperature difference, such as 0.01C. The default is Autosize.
Maximum actuated flow

This is the maximum water flow (m3/sec or gal/min) through the coil. Set to the maximum design water flow for the coil.
Minimum actuated flow

Set to the minimum design water flow (m3/sec or gal/min) for the water coil, normally a shut off valve that is set to zero.
Rated ratio for air and water convection

This is the ratio of convective heat transfers between air side and water side of the heating coil at the rated operating conditions. The default is 0.5. This ratio describes the geometry and the design of the coil and is defined by:
where is the fin efficiency h is the surface convection heat transfer coefficient A is the surface area
HEATING COIL - WATER OUTPUTS

HVAC,Sum, Total Water Heating Coil Energy[J] HVAC,Average,Total Water Heating Coil Rate[W] HVAC,Average,Water Heating Coil U-factor Times Area [W]
Total Water Heating Coil Energy (J)

Total Water Heating Coil Energy is the total amount of heat transfer taking place in the coil at the operating conditions.
Total Water Heating Coil Rate (W)

Total Water Heating Coil Rate is the Rate of heat transfer taking place in the coil at the operating conditions. The units are (J/sec) or Watts.
Water Heating Coil U-factor Times Area (W/K)

This characterizes the overall heat transfer UA value, or U-factor times Area. The simple heating coil model adjusts UA value based on inlet temperatures and flow rates and this
- 419 -
Heating Coil - Electric

Coil:Heating:Electric
Used in: Air Handling Units Demand loops of Dual duct systems PTAC PTHP Unitary Heat Cool Unitary Heat Pump
The electric heating coil is a simple capacity model with a user-defined efficiency. In most cases, the efficiency for the electric coil will be 100%. Depending on where it is used this coil may be either temperature or capacity controlled. If used in the air loop simulation it will be controlled to a specified temperature scheduled from the Setpoint Manager. If it is used in zone equipment, it will be controlled from the zone thermostat by meeting the zone demand.
GENERAL Name
A unique auto-generated name for the coil.
Type
The type is fixed as: 2-Electric.
In Generic AHUs and ADUs it will also be possible to select 1-Hot water or 3-Gas as the heating coil type, in which case a Water heating coil or Gas heating coil is used instead.
Efficiency
This is user-inputted efficiency (fraction, not percent) and can account for any loss. In most cases for the electric coil, this will be 100% (enter a value of 1).
Nominal capacity
This is the maximum capacity of the coil (in W). This controlled coil will only provide the needed capacity to meet the control criteria whether it is temperature or capacity controlled. This field is autosizable.
OPERATION Available schedule

The schedule that denotes whether the heating coil can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the coil can be on during a given time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the coil must be off.
HEATING COIL - ELECTRIC OUTPUTS

HVAC,Sum,Heating Coil Energy[J] HVAC,Average,Heating Coil Rate[W] HVAC,Sum,Heating Coil Electric Consumption [J]
- 420 -
Heating Coil - Gas
HVAC,Average,Heating Coil Electric Power [W]
Heating Coil Energy (J)

Heating Coil Energy is the total amount of heat transfer taking place in the coil at the operating conditions.
Heating Coil Rate[W]

Heating Coil Rate is the Rate of heat transfer taking place in the coil at the operating conditions. The units are (J/sec) or Watts.
Heating Coil Electric Consumption [J]

Heating Coil electric consumption after the efficiency of the coil has been taken into account in Joules for the timestep reported.
Heating Coil Electric Power [W]

This field is the average Heating Coil electric power after the efficiency of the coil has been taken into account in Watts for the timestep reported.
Heating Coil - Gas

Coil:Heating:Gas
Used in: Air Handling Units Demand loops of Dual duct systems Air Distribution Units
The gas heating coil is a simple capacity model with a user inputted gas burner efficiency. The default for the gas burner efficiency is 80%. The coil can be used in the air loop simulation or in the zone equipment as a reheat coil. Depending on where it is used determines if this coil is temperature or capacity controlled. If used in the air loop simulation it will be controlled to a specified temperature scheduled from the Setpoint manager. If it is used in zone equipment, it will be controlled from the zone thermostat by meeting the zone demand.
Name
A unique identifying name for each coil.
Type
The type of a gas coil must be: 3-Gas
In all cases it will also be possible to select 2-Electric in which case the Electric heating coil is used or 1-Water where the Water heating coil is used instead.
Efficiency
This is user inputted gas burner efficiency (decimal, not percent) and is defaulted to 0.8 (80%).
Parasitic electric load

This is the parasitic electric load associated with the gas coil operation, such as an inducer fan, etc.. This will be modified by the PLR (or coil runtime fraction if a part-load fraction correlation is provided in the next input field) to reflect the time of operation in a simulation timestep.
- 421 -
Parasitic gas load

This numeric field is the parasitic gas load associated with the gas coils operation (in W), such as a standing pilot light. The model assumes that this parasitic load is consumed only for the portion of the simulation timestep where the gas heating coil is not operating.
Nominal capacity
This is the maximum capacity of the coil (in W). This controlled coil will only provide the needed capacity to meet
PART LOAD PERFORMANCE Part load fraction correlation

Check this option if a part load fraction correlation is to be applied.
Part load fraction correlation curve

The Quadratic or Cubic performance curve selected here parameterises the variation of gas consumption rate by the heating coil as a function of the part load ratio (PLR, sensible heating load/nominal capacity of the heating coil). For any simulation timestep, the nominal gas consumption rate (heating load/burner efficiency) is divided by the part-load fraction (PLF) if a part-load curve has been defined. The part-load curve accounts for efficiency losses due to transient coil operation. The part-load fraction correlation should be normalized to a value of 1.0 when the part load ratio equals 1.0 (i.e., no efficiency losses when the heating coil runs continuously for the simulation timestep). For PLR values between 0 and 1 ( 0 <= PLR < 1), the following rules apply: PLF >= 0.7 and PLF >= PLR If PLF < 0.7 a warning message is issued, the program resets the PLF value to 0.7, and the simulation proceeds. The runtime fraction of the heating coil is defined a PLR/PLF. If PLF < PLR, then a warning message is issues and the runtime fraction of the coil is limited to 1.0. A typical part load fraction correlation for a conventional gas heating coil (e.g., residential furnace) would be: PLF = 0.8 + 0.2(PLR)
OPERATION Available schedule

Schedule that defines when the coil is available.
Heating Coil - DX
Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed
Used in: PTAC, PTHP, Unitary Heat Cool, Unitary Heat Pump
The single speed heating DX coil model uses performance information at rated conditions along with curve fits for variations in total capacity, energy input ratio and part load fraction to determine performance at part-load conditions. The impacts of various defrost strategies (reverse cycle, resistive, timed or on-demand) are modelled
- 422 -
Heating Coil - DX
based on a combination of user inputs and empirical models taken from the air-to-air heat pump algorithms in DOE-2.1E.
GENERAL Name
This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a DX heating coil. Any reference to this DX heating coil by another object will use this name.
Rated total heating capacity

This numeric field defines the total, full load heating capacity (in W or Btu/h) of the DX coil unit at rated conditions (outdoor air dry-bulb temperature of 8.33C, outdoor air wet-bulb temperature of 6.11C, heating coil entering air dry-bulb temperature of 21.11C, heating coil entering air wet-bulb temperature of 15.55C, and a heating coil air flow rate defined by field rated air flow volume below). The v alue entered here must be greater than 0. Capacity should not include supply air fan heat. Rated total heating capacity should be within 20% of the Rated total cooling capacity, otherwise a warning message is issued.
Rated air flow rate

This numeric field defines the volume air flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min), across the DX heating coil at rated conditions. The value entered here must be greater than 0. The rated air volume flow rate should be between 0.00004027 m3/s and 0.00006041 m3/s per watt of rated total heating capacity. The Rated total heating capacity and Rated COP should be performance information for the unit with outdoor air dry-bulb temperature of 8.33C, outdoor air wet-bulb temperature of 6.11C, heating coil entering air dry-bulb temperature of 21.11C, heating coil entering air wet-bulb temperature of 15.55C, and the rated air volume flow rate defined here.
Rated COP
This numeric field defines the coefficient of performance (COP=heating power output in watts divided by electrical power input in watts) of the DX heating coil unit at rated conditions (outdoor air dry-bulb temperature of 8.33C, outdoor air wet-bulb temperature of 6.11C, coil entering air dry-bulb temperature of 21.11C, coil entering air wetbulb temperature of 15.55C, and a heating coil air flow rate defined by field rated air flow volume rate below). The value entered here must be greater than 0. The input power includes power for the compressor(s) and outdoor fan(s) but does not include the power consumption of the indoor supply air fan. The heating power output is the value entered above in the field Rated total heating capacity.
COMPRESSOR Minimum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for compressor operation

This numeric field defines the minimum outdoor air dry-bulb temperature (in C or F) where the heating coil compressor turns off. The temperature for this input field must be greater than or equal to 20C. The default value is -8C.
DEFROST Defrost strategy

Choose from two options: 1-Reverse-cycle or 2-Resistive.
- 423 -
If the reverse-cycle strategy is selected, the heating cycle is reversed periodically to provide heat to melt frost accumulated on the outdoor coil. If a resistive defrost strategy is selected, the frost is melted using an electric resistance heater. The default defrost strategy is reverse-cycle.
Defrost control
Choose from two options: 1-Timed or 2-On-demand.
If timed control is selected, the defrost time period is calculated based on a fixed value or compressor runtime whether or not frost has actually accumulated. For timed defrost control, the fractional amount of time the unit is in defrost is entered in the input field Defrost time period fraction described below. If on-demand defrost control is selected, the defrost time period is calculated based on outdoor weather (humidity ratio) conditions. Regardless of which defrost control is selected, defrost does not occur above the user specified outdoor temperature entered in the input field Maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for defrost operation described above.
Defrost time period fraction

This numeric field defines the fraction of compressor runtime when the defrost cycle is active, and only applies to timed defrost (see Defrost Control input field above). For example, if the defrost cycle is active for 3.5 minutes for every 60 minutes of compressor runtime, then the user should enter 3.5/60 = 0.058333. The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0. The default value is 0.058333.
Resistive defrost heater capacity

This numeric field defines the capacity of the resistive defrost heating element (in W). This input field is used only when the selected defrost strategy is resistive (see input field Defrost strategy above). The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0.
Maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for defrost operation

This numeric field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature (in C or F) above which outdoor coil defrosting is disabled. The temperature for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0 C and less than or equal to 7.22C. The default value is 5C.
PERFORMANCE CURVES
The DX Cooling coil requires up to 6 curves be selected from the Curves database to define coil performance depending on the defrost strategy selected.
Total heating capacity function of temperature curve

The Bi-quadratic, Quadratic or Cubic performance curve that parameterises the variation of the total heating capacity as a function of the both the indoor and outdoor air dry-bulb temperature or just the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature depending on the type of curve selected. The bi-quadratic curve is recommended if sufficient manufacturer data is available as it provides sensitivity to the indoor air dry-bulb temperature and a more realistic output. The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated total heating capacity to give the total heating capacity at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at an indoor air dry-bulb temperature or outdoor air dry-bulb temperature different from the rating point temperature). The curve is normalised to have the value of 1.0 at the rating point.
Total heating capacity function of flow fraction curve

The Quadratic or Cubic performance curve that parameterises the variation of total heating capacity as a function of the ratio of actual air flow rate across the heating coil to the rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full load flow). The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated total heating capacity and the total heating capacity modifier curve (function of temperature) to give the total heating capacity at the specific temperature and air flow conditions
- 424 -
Heating Coil - DX
at which the coil is operating. The curve is normalised to have the value of 1.0 when the actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate.
Energy input ratio function of temperature curve

The Bi-quadratic, Quadratic or Cubic performance curve that parameterises the variation of the energy input ratio (EIR) as a function of the both the indoor and outdoor air dry-bulb temperature or just the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature depending on the type of curve selected. The bi-quadratic curve is recommended if sufficient manufacturer data is available as it provides sensitivity to the indoor air dry-bulb temperature and a more realistic output. The EIR is the inverse of the COP. The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated EIR (inverse of rated COP) to give the EIR at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at an indoor air dry-bulb temperature or outdoor air dry-bulb temperature different from the rating point temperature). The curve is normalised to have the value of 1.0 at the rating point.
Energy input ratio function of flow fraction curve

The Quadratic or Cubic performance curve that parameterises the variation of the energy input ratio (EIR) as a function of the ratio of actual air flow rate across the heating coil to the rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full load flow). The EIR is the inverse of the COP. The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated EIR and the EIR modifier curve (function of temperature) to give the EIR at the specific temperature and air flow conditions at which the coil is operating. This curve is normalised to a value of 1.0 when the actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate.

The Quadratic or Cubic performance curve that parameterises the variation of electrical power input to the DX unit as a function of the part load ratio (PLR, sensible heating load/steady-state sensible heating capacity). The product of the rated EIR and EIR modifier curves is divided by the output of this curve to give the effective EIR for a given simulation timestep. The part load fraction (PLF) correlation accounts for efficiency losses due to compressor cycling. The 2 important rules to be followed when setting up this curve are: 1. The part load fraction correlation curve coefficients need to be defined so that the output of the curve equals 1.0 when the PLR is 1.0, e.g. PLF=0.85+0.15(PLR) So the associated quadratic would have Coefficient 1 = 0.85 and Coefficient 2 = 0.15 with a maximum x = 1.0. 2. When 0.0 <= PLR < 1.0, the PLF must be >= 0.7 which is guaranteed as long as Coefficient 1 of the PLF curve is > 0.7. Also, in this PLR range, the PLF must be less than the PLR which is also guaranteed as long as the coil capacity is always greater than the demand. If the demand is greater than the coil capacity and PLF becomes greater than PLR, the software automatically limits the runtime fraction (PLR/PLF) to 1.0.
Defrost energy input ratio function of temperature curve

The Bi-quadratic performance curve that parameterises the variation of the energy input ratio (EIR) during reverse-cycle defrost periods as a function of the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature and the wet-bulb temperature of the air entering the indoor coil. The EIR is the inverse of the COP. The output of this curve is multiplied by the coil capacity, the fractional defrost time period and the runtime fraction of the heating coil to give the defrost power at the specific temperatures at which the indoor and outdoor coils are operating. This curve is only required when a reverse-cycle defrost strategy is selected. The curve is normalised to a value of 1.0 at the rating point conditions.
- 425 -
CRANKCASE HEATER Crankcase heater capacity

This numeric field defines the crankcase heater capacity (in W). When the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is below the value specified in the input field Maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for crankcase heater operation (described below), the crankcase heater is enabled during the time that the compressor is not running. If this heating coil is used as part of an air-to-air heat pump (Ref. UnitarySystem:HeatPump:AirToAir or PackageTerminal: HeatPump:AirToAir), the crankcase heater defined for this DX heating coil is enabled during the time that the compressor is not running for either heating or cooling (and the crankcase heater power defined in the DX cooling coil object is disregarded in this case). The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0. The default value is 0. To simulate a unit without a crankcase heater, enter a value of 0.
Maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for crankcase heater operation

This numeric field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature (in C or F) above which the compressors crankcase heater is disabled. The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0.0 C.
OPERATION Availability schedule name

The schedule that denotes whether the DX heating coil can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during a given time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off.
HEATING COIL - DX OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,DX Coil Total Heating Rate[W] HVAC,Sum,DX Coil Total Heating Energy[J] HVAC,Average,DX Heating Coil Electric Power[W] HVAC,Sum,DX Heating Coil Electric Consumption[J] HVAC,Average,DX Heating Coil Electric Defrost Power[W] HVAC,Sum,DX Heating Coil Electric Defrost Consumption[J] HVAC,Average,DX Heating Coil Crankcase Heater Power[W] HVAC,Sum,DX Heating Coil Crankcase Heater Consumption[J] HVAC,Average,DX Heating Coil Runtime Fraction
DX Coil Total Heating Rate [W]

This field is the total heating rate output of the DX coil in Watts. This is determined by the coil inlet and outlet air conditions and the air mass flow rate through the coil.
DX Coil Total Heating Energy[J]

This is the total heating output of the DX coil in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by the coil inlet and outlet air conditions and the air mass flow rate through the coil. This output is also added to a report meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key = CoolingCoils, Group Key = System (ref. Report Meter).
DX Heating Coil Electric Power[W]

This output is the electricity consumption rate of the DX coil compressor and outdoor fan(s) in Watts. This rate is applicable when the unit is providing heating to the conditioned zone(s), and excludes periods when the unit is in reverse-cycle defrost mode.
- 426 -
Cooling Coils Detailed HVAC
DX Heating Coil Electric Consumption[J]

This is the electricity consumption of the DX coil compressor and condenser fan(s) in Joules for the timestep being reported. This consumption is applicable when the unit is providing heating to the conditioned zone(s), and excludes periods when the unit is in reverse-cycle defrost mode. This output is also added to a report meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Cooling, Group Key = System (ref. Report Meter).
DX Heating Coil Electric Defrost Power[W]

This is the electricity consumption rate of the DX coil unit in Watts when the unit is in defrost mode (reverse-cycle or resistive).
DX Heating Coil Electric Defrost Consumption[J]

This is the electricity consumption of the DX coil unit in Joules for the timestep being reported. This consumption is applicable when the unit is in defrost mode (reverse-cycle or resistive).
DX Heating Coil Crankcase Heater Power[W]

This is the average electricity consumption rate of the DX coil compressors crankcase heater in Watts for the timestep being reported.
DX Heating Coil Crankcase Heater Consumption[J]

This is the electricity consumption of the DX coil compressors crankcase heater in Joules for the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a report meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Miscellaneous, Group Key = System (ref. Report Meter).
DX Heating Coil Runtime Fraction

This is the runtime fraction of the DX heating coil compressor and outdoor fan(s) for the timestep being reported.
Cooling Coils Detailed HVAC

These cooling coil types are available within Detailed HVAC: Cooling Coil - Water Cooling Coil - Single Speed DX Cooling Coil - Two Stage with Humidity Control DX
Cooling Coil - Water

Used in:
Coil:Cooling:Water
Air Handling Units, Demand loops of Dual duct systems Four-Pipe Air Distribution Units
The water cooling coil provides detailed output with simplified inputs without the need for complex coil geometry definition. Instead the coil is sized in terms of auto-sizeable thermodynamic inputs such as temperatures, mass flow rates and humidity ratios.
- 427 -
Coil heat transfer (UA) values are calculated from the design conditions. A rough estimate of the coil area is provided along with percentage of surface wet and/or dry. This model uses the NTU-effectiveness approach to model heat transfer and has two types of flow arrangements cross-flow or counter-flow. See section Cooling Coil Model in the EnergyPlus Engineering Document for further details on this model.
GENERAL Name
A unique name for an instance of a cooling coil which is predetermined by DesignBuilder.
Design water flow rate

The maximum possible water volume flow rate (m3/sec or gal/min) through the coil. This value is autosizable and the default is Autosize.
Design air flow rate

The maximum possible air volume flow rate (m3/sec or ft3/min) through the coil. This value is autosizable and the default is Autosize.
Design inlet water temperature

The inlet water temperature for the design flow (C or F). This value is autosizable and the default is Autosize.
Design inlet air temperature

The inlet air temperature for the design flow (C or F). This value is autosizable and the default is Autosize.
Design outlet air temperature

The outlet air condition desired for design flow (C or F). This value is autosizable and the default is Autosize.
Design inlet air humidity ratio

The highest value of humidity ratio possible for the Design inlet air stream. This value is autosizable and the default is Autosize.
Design outlet air humidity ratio

The value of humidity ratio for the Design outlet air stream. This value is autosizable and the default is Autosize.
Type of analysis
The coil has two modes of operation: 1-Simple analysis 2-Detailed analysis
The difference between the two modes being, the simple mode reports the value of surface area fraction wet of the coil as dry or wet. The detailed mode give the exact value, however the execution time in detailed mode is noticeably higher.
Heat exchanger configuration

The coil is operable in two modes: 1-Cross flow for general A/C applications and 2- Counter flow mode.
- 428 -
Cooling Coil - Water
Air-conditioning systems generally use cross flow heat exchangers, hence the default is set to 1-Cross flow.

Schedule that defines when the coil is available, i.e. whether the coil can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during a given time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit is off.
CONTROLLER
The controller allows the flow of water through the coil to be controlled based on temperature and/or humidity ratio typically downstream of the coil.
Control variable
The Control variable defines how the coil is controlled. Select one of: 1-Temperature control is used for air temperature control and is normally specified for the coils outlet air node 2-Humidity ratio control is used for humidity control and would normally be specified for a dehumidifier outlet node 3-Temperature and humidity ratio control is used for controlling both air temperature and high humidity levels, and is normally specified for a cooling coils outlet air node.
Options 2 and 3 (the control variables involving humidity ratio) both require: Humidistat must be selected on the HVAC zone dialog and "Maximum humidity" setpoint manager must be associated with the cooling coil.
Action
The Action determines how the controlled variable (mass flow rate through a water coil) is changed based on the control signal. In a coil where water mass flow rate is to be controlled, the mass flow rate through the coil is increased when more cooling is requested. In a cooling coil, an increase in water mass flow rate through the coil decreases the value of heat transfer from the water to the air stream (absolute value increases, but since cooling is traditionally described as a negative number, an increase in absolute value results in a decrease in the actual heat transfer value). Thus the cooling coil controller has Reverse action since an increase in flow rate results in a decrease in heat transfer.
Actuator variable
The actuator variable must currently be use the keyword 1-Flow to control the water mass flow rate.
Controller convergence tolerance

The coil is controlled by knowing the outlet temperature and/or humidity ratio specified by the setpoint managers, and setting the outlet conditions from the coil to meet these setpoints. The chilled water coils use complex models that cannot be inverted directly. Therefore, to determine the correct mass flow rate for the cold water the models are inverted numerically using an iterative procedure. The iterative solution uses an interval-halving routine and needs a termination criteria that is set here. The convergence tolerance is the maximum difference between the actual temperature at the setpoint node and the setpoint temperature. This control offset is typically set to a small temperature difference, such as 0.01C. This value is autosizable and the default is Autosize.
- 429 -
Maximum actuated flow

This is the maximum water flow (m3/sec or gal/min) through the coil. Set to the maximum design water flow for the coil. This value is autosizable and the default is Autosize.
Minimum actuated flow

Set to the minimum design water flow (m3/sec or gal/min) for the water coil, normally a shut off valve that is set to zero.
COOLING COIL - WATER OUTPUTS

Following are the list of possible output report variables from this coil model: HVAC,Sum,Total Water Cooling Coil Energy[J] HVAC,Sum,Sensible Water Cooling Coil Energy[J] HVAC,Average,Total Water Cooling Coil Rate[W] HVAC,Average,Sensible Water Cooling Coil Rate[W] HVAC,Average,Cooling Coil Area Wet Fraction HVAC,Average,Cooling Coil Condensate Volumetric Flow Rate [m3/s] Zone,Meter,OnSiteWater:Facility [m3] Zone,Meter,OnSiteWater:HVAC [m3] Zone,Meter,Condensate:OnSiteWater [m3] HVAC,Sum,Cooling Coil Condensate Volume [m3]
Total Water Cooling Coil Energy (J)

Total Water Cooling Coil Energy is the total amount of heat transfer taking place in the coil at the operating conditions.
Sensible Water Cooling Coil Energy (J)

Sensible Water Cooling Coil Energy is the total amount of Sensible heat transfer taking place in the coil at the operating conditions. It only takes into account temperature difference in the inlet and outlet air streams at operating conditions.
Total Water Cooling Coil Rate (W)

Total Water Cooling Coil Rate is the Rate of heat transfer taking place in the coil at the operating conditions. The units are (J/sec) or Watts.
Sensible Water Cooling Coil Rate (W)

Sensible Water Cooling Coil Rate is the Rate of Sensible heat transfer taking place in the coil at the operating conditions.
Cooling Coil Area Wet Fraction

It defines the fraction of total surface area of coil which is wet due to moisture condensation on the surface of the coil. Value varies between 0.0 and 1.0. I n addition, if a Water Storage Tank is used to collect coil condensate, then the following outputs will be available.
- 430 -
Single Speed DX Cooling Coil
Cooling Coil Condensate Volumetric Flow Rate [m3/s] Cooling Coil Condensate Volume [m3]
These reports provide the rate and amount of condensate from the coil. Condensate is water condensed out of the air as a result of cooling. The condensate volume is also reported on the meter for OnSiteWater.

Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
Used in: PTAC, PTHP, Unitary Heat Cool, Unitary Heat Pump
The DX single speed cooling coil model and data are quite different from that for the heating and cooling water coils. The simple water coils use an NTU-effectiveness heat exchanger model. The single speed DX coil model uses performance information at rated conditions along with curve fits for variations in total capacity, energy input ratio and part-load fraction to determine performance at part-load conditions. Sensible/latent capacity splits are determined by the rated sensible heat ratio (SHR) and the apparatus dewpoint/bypass factor (ADP/BF) approach. This approach is analogous to the NTU-effectiveness calculations used for sensible-only heat exchanger calculations, extended to a cooling and dehumidifying coil. This DX cooling coil input requires an availability schedule, the rated total cooling capacity, the rated SHR, the rated COP, and the rated air volume flow rate. The latter 4 inputs determine the coil performance at the rating point (air entering the cooling coil at 26.7C dry-bulb/19.4C wet-bulb and air entering the outdoor condenser coil at 35C dry-bulb/23.9C wet-bulb). The rated air volume flow rate should be between .00004027 m3/s and .00006041 m3/s per watt of rated total cooling capacity (300 to 450 cfm/ton). See section DX Cooling Coil Model in the EnergyPlus Engineering Document for further details regarding this model.
GENERAL Name
A unique auto-assigned name for an instance of a DX cooling coil. Any reference to this DX coil by another object will use this name.
Rated total cooling capacity

The total, full load cooling capacity (sensible plus latent) (in W or Btu/h) of the DX coil unit at rated conditions. These are: air entering the cooling coil at 26.7C dry-bulb/19.4C wet-bulb, air entering the outdoor condenser coil at 35C dry-bulb/23.9C wet-bulb (The 23.9C wet-bulb temperature condition is not applicable for air-cooled condensers which do not evaporate condensate), and a cooling coil air flow rate fan heat is NOT included. When used in a heat pump, the rated total cooling capacity should be within 20% of the rated total heating capacity, otherwise a warning message is issued.
Rated sensible heat ratio

The sensible heat ratio (SHR=sensible capacity divided by total cooling capacity) of the DX cooling coil at rated conditions (air entering the cooling coil at 26.7C dry-bulb/19.4C wet-bulb, air entering the outdoor condenser coil at 35C dry-bulb/23.9C wet-bulb, and a cooling coil air flow rate defined by field rated air volume flow rate
- 431 -
below). Both the sensible and total cooling capacities used to define the Rated SHR should be gross (i.e., supply air fan heat is NOT included).
Rated COP
The coefficient of performance (cooling power output in watts divided by electrical power input in watts) of the DX cooling coil unit at rated conditions (air entering the cooling coil at 26.7C dry-bulb/19.4C wet-bulb, air entering the outdoor condenser coil at 35C dry-bulb/ 23.9C wet-bulb, and a cooling coil air flow rate defined by field rated air volume flow rate below). The input power includes electric power for the compressor(s) and condenser fan(s) but does not include the power consumption of the supply air fan. The cooling power output is the value entered above in the field Rated Total Cooling Capacity (gross).
Rated air flow rate

The air volume flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min), across the DX cooling coil at rated conditions. The rated air volume flow rate should be between 0.00004027 m3/s and 0.00006041 m3/s per watt of rated total cooling capacity (300 to 450 cfm/ton). The rated total cooling capacity, rated SHR and rated COP should be performance information for the unit with air entering the cooling coil at 26.7C dry-bulb/19.4C wet-bulb, air entering the outdoor condenser coil at 35C dry-bulb/23.9C wet-bulb, and the rated air volume flow rate defined here.
Rated evaporator fan power per volume flow rate

This field is the electric power for the evaporator (cooling coil) fan per air volume flow rate through the coil at the rated conditions (in W/(m3/s) or W/(ft3/min)). The default value is 773.3 W/(m3/s) (365 W/1000 cfm). The value must be >= 0.0 and <= 1250 W/(m3/s). This value is only used to calculate Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER), Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER), Integrated Energy Efficiency Ratio (IEER) and the Standard Rating (Net) Cooling Capacity which will be outputs in the EnergyPlus eio file (ref. EnergyPlus Engineering Reference, Single Speed DX Cooling Coil, Standard Ratings). This value is not used for modelling the evaporator (cooling coil) fan during simulations; instead, it is used for calculating SEER, EER, IEER and Standard Rating Cooling Capacity to assist the user in verifying their inputs for modelling this type of equipment.

The name of the schedule that denotes whether the DX cooling coil can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during a given time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off.
PERFORMANCE CURVES
The DX Cooling coil requires 5 curves be selected from the Curves database to define coil performance:
Total cooling capacity function of temperature curve

The Bi-quadratic performance curve that parameterises the variation of the total cooling capacity as a function of the wet-bulb temperature of the air entering the cooling coil, and the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the air-cooled condenser coil (wet-bulb temperature if modelling an evaporative-cooled condenser). The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated total cooling capacity to give the total cooling capacity at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the rating point temperatures). The curve is normalized to have the value of 1.0 at the rating point.
Total cooling capacity function of flow fraction curve

The Quadratic or Cubic performance curve that parameterises the variation of total cooling capacity as a function of the ratio of actual air flow rate across the cooling coil to the rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full load flow). The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated total cooling capacity and the total cooling capacity modifier curve (function of temperature) to give the total cooling capacity at the specific temperature and air flow conditions at
- 432 -
which the coil is operating. The curve is normalized to have the value of 1.0 when the actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate.
Energy input ratio function of temperature Curve

The Bi-quadratic performance curve that parameterises the variation of the energy input ratio (EIR) as a function of the wet-bulb temperature of the air entering the cooling coil, and the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the air-cooled condenser coil (wet-bulb temperature if modelling an evaporative-cooled condenser). The EIR is the inverse of the COP. The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated EIR (inverse of rated COP) to give the EIR at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the rating point temperatures). The curve is normalized to a value of 1.0 at the rating point.
Energy input ratio function of flow fraction curve

The Quadratic or Cubic performance curve that parameterises the variation of the energy input ratio (EIR) as a function of the ratio of actual air flow rate across the cooling coil to the rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full load flow). The EIR is the inverse of the COP. The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated EIR and the EIR modifier curve (function of temperature) to give the EIR at the specific temperature and air flow conditions at which the cooling coil is operating. This curve is normalized to a value of 1.0 when the actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate.

The Quadratic or Cubic performance curve that parameterises the variation of electrical power input to the DX unit as a function of the part load ratio (PLR, sensible cooling load/steady-state sensible cooling capacity). The product of the rated EIR and EIR modifier curves is divided by the output of this curve to give the effective EIR for a given simulation timestep. The part load fraction (PLF) correlation accounts for efficiency losses due to compressor cycling. The 2 important rules to be followed when setting up this curve are: 1. The part load fraction correlation curve coefficients need to be defined so that the output of the curve equals 1.0 when the PLR is 1.0, e.g. PLF=0.85 + 0.15(PLR) So the associated quadratic would have Coefficient 1 = 0.85 and the Coefficient 2 = 0.15 with a maximum x = 1.0. 2. When 0.0 <= PLR < 1.0, the PLF must be >= 0.7 which is guaranteed as long as the Coefficient 1 of the PLF curve is > 0.7. Also, in this PLR range, the PLF must be less than the PLR which is also guaranteed as long as the coil capacity is always greater than the demand. If the demand is greater than the coil capacity and PLF becomes greater than PLR, the software automatically limits the runtime fraction (PLR/PLF) to 1.0.
LATENT CAPACITY DEGRADATION Latent capacity degradation

Check this option if the degradation of latent cooling capacity is to be modelled. In this case the following four input fields are shown allowing you to enter data relating to the degradation of latent cooling capacity when the supply air fan operates continuously while the cooling coil/compressor cycle on and off to meet the cooling load. The fan operating mode is determined in the parent object and is considered to either be constant (e.g. AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryCoolOnly) or can be scheduled (e.g. AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool). When scheduled, the schedule value must be greater than 0 to calculate degradation of latent cooling capacity. At times when the parent objects supply air fan operating mode schedule is 0, latent degradation will be ignored. When modelling latent capacity degradation, these next four input fields must all have positive values.
- 433 -
Nominal time for condensate removal to begin

The nominal time (in seconds) after startup for condensate to begin leaving the coil's condensate drain line at the coil's rated airflow and temperature conditions, starting with a dry coil. Nominal time is equal to the ratio of the energy of the coil's maximum condensate holding capacity (J) to the coil's steady-state latent capacity (W). Suggested value is 1000; zero value means the latent degradation model is disabled. The default value for this field is zero. The supply air fan operating mode must be continuous (i.e., the supply air fan operating mode may be specified in other parent objects and is assumed continuous in some objects (e.g., AirloopHVAC:UnitaryCoolOnly) or can be scheduled in other objects [e.g., AirloopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool]), and this field as well as the next three input fields for this object must have positive values in order to model latent capacity degradation.
Ratio of initial moisture evaporation rate and steady state latent capacity
The ratio of the initial moisture evaporation rate from the cooling coil (when the compressor first turns off (in W) and the coil's steady-state latent capacity (W) at rated airflow and temperature conditions. Suggested value is 1.5; zero value means the latent degradation model is disabled. The default value for this field is zero. The supply air fan operating mode must be continuous (i.e., the supply air fan operating mode may be specified in other parent objects and is assumed continuous in some objects (e.g., AirloopHVAC:UnitaryCoolOnly) or can be scheduled in other objects [e.g., AirloopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool]); and this field, the previous field and the next two fields must have positive values in order to model latent capacity degradation.
Maximum cycling rate

The maximum on-off cycling rate for the compressor (cycles per hour), which occurs at 50% run time fraction. Suggested value is 3; zero value means latent degradation model is disabled. The default value for this field is zero. The supply air fan operating mode must be continuous (i.e., the supply air fan operating mode may be specified in other parent objects and is assumed continuous in some objects (e.g., AirloopHVAC:UnitaryCoolOnly) or can be scheduled in other objects [e.g., AirloopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool]); and this field, the previous two fields and the next field must have positive values in order to model latent capacity degradation.
Latent capacity time constant

Time constant (in seconds) for the cooling coil's latent capacity to reach steady state after startup. Suggested value is 45. The supply air fan operating mode must be continuous (i.e., the supply air fan operating mode may be specified in other parent objects and is assumed continuous in some objects (e.g., AirloopHVAC:UnitaryCoolOnly) or can be scheduled in other objects [e.g., AirloopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool]), and this field as well as the previous three input fields for this object must have positive values in order to model latent capacity degradation.
CONDENSER Condenser type

The type of condenser used by the DX cooling coil. Valid choices for this input field are: 1-Air cooled, or 2-Evaporatively cooled.
The default Condenser type is is 1-Air cooled.
EVAPORATIVE CONDENSER
The data below is required only for Condenser type = Evaporatively cooled.
- 434 -
Evaporative condenser effectiveness

The effectiveness of the evaporative condenser, which is used to determine the temperature of the air entering the outdoor condenser coil as follows: Tcond inlet = Twbo + (1 - EvapCondEffectiveness) (Tdbo - Twbo) where: Tcond inlet = the temperature of the air entering the condenser coil (C) Twbo = the wet-bulb temperature of the outdoor air (C) Tdbo = the dry-bulb temperature of the outdoor air (C) The resulting condenser inlet air temperature is used by the Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of temperature) and the Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature). The default value for this field is 0.9, although valid entries can range from 0.0 to 1.0. This field is not used when Condenser Type = Air Cooled. If the user wants to model an air-cooled condenser, they should simply specify an air cooled Condenser Type. In this case, the Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of temperature) and the Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature) input fields for this object should reference performance curves that are a function of outdoor dry-bulb temperature. If you wish to model an evaporative-cooled condenser AND have performance curves that are a function of the wet-bulb temperature of air entering the condenser coil, then you should specify Condenser Type = Evaporatively cooled and the evaporative condenser effectiveness value should be entered as 1.0. In this case, the Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of temperature) and the Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature) input fields for this object should reference performance curves that are a function of the wet-bulb temperature of air entering the condenser coil. If you wish to model an air-cooled condenser that has evaporative media placed in front of it to cool the air entering the condenser coil, then you should specify Condenser Type = Evaporatively cooled. You must also enter the appropriate evaporative effectiveness for the media. In this case, the Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of temperature) and the Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature) input fields for this object should reference performance curves that are a function of outdoor dry-bulb temperature. Be aware that the evaporative media will significantly reduce the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the condenser coil, so the Total Cooling Capacity and EIR Modifier Curves must be valid for the expected range of dry-bulb temperatures that will be entering the condenser coil.
Evaporative condenser air flow rate

The air volume flow rate, (in m3/s or ft3/min), entering the evaporative condenser. This value is used to calculate the amount of water used to evaporatively cool the condenser inlet air. The minimum value for this field must be greater than zero, and this input field is autosizable (equivalent to 0.000144 m3/s per watt of rated total cooling capacity [850 cfm/ton]). This field is not shown for Air cooled condensers.
Evaporative condenser pump rated power consumption

The rated power of the evaporative condenser water pump (in W or Btu/h). This value is used to calculate the power required to pump the water used to evaporatively cool the condenser inlet air. The default value for this input field is zero, but it is autosizable (equivalent to 0.004266 W per watt [15 W/ton] of rated total cooling capacity). This field is not shown for Air cooled condensers.
- 435 -

This numeric field defines the crankcase heater capacity (in W). When the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is below the value specified in the input field Maximum Outdoor Dry-bulb Temperature for Crankcase Heater Operation (described below), the crankcase heater is enabled during the time that the compressor is not running. If this cooling coil is used as part of an air-to-air heat pump (Ref. UnitarySystem:HeatPump:AirToAir or PackageTerminal: HeatPump:AirToAir), the crankcase heater defined for this DX cooling coil is ignored and the crankcase heater power defined for the DX heating coil (Ref. Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed) is enabled during the time that the compressor is not running for either heating or cooling. The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0, and the default value is 0. To simulate a DX cooling coil without a crankcase heater, enter a value of 0.

This numeric field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature (in C or F) above which the compressors crankcase heater is disabled. The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0.0C, and the default value is 10C.
BASIN HEATER Basin heater capacity

This numeric field contains the capacity of the DX coils electric evaporative cooler basin heater in (W/K or Btu/h F). This field only applies for Condenser type = Evaporatively cooled. This field is used in conjunction with the Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature described in the following field. The basin heater electric power is equal to this field multiplied by the difference between the basin heater set point temperature and the outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The basin heater only operates when the DX coil is off, regardless of the basin heater schedule described below. The basin heater capacity must be greater than or equal to zero.
Basin heater setpoint temperature

This numeric field contains the set point temperature (in C or F) for the basin heater described in the previous field. This field only applies for Condenser type = Evaporatively cooled. The basin heater is active when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below this setpoint temperature, as long as the DX coil is off. This set point temperature must be greater than or equal to 2C.
Basin heater operating schedule

This alpha field contains the name of the basin heater operating schedule. This field only applies for Condenser type = Evaporatively cooled. The basin heater operating schedule is assumed to be an on/off schedule and the heater is available to operate any time the schedule value is greater than 0. The basin heater operates when scheduled on and the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is below the set point temperature described in the previous field. Regardless of this schedule, the basin heater can only operate when the DX coil is off.
DX COOLING COIL OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,DX Coil Total Cooling Rate[W] HVAC,Sum,DX Coil Total Cooling Energy[J] HVAC,Average,DX Coil Sensible Cooling Rate[W] HVAC,Sum,DX Coil Sensible Cooling Energy[J] HVAC,Average,DX Coil Latent Cooling Rate[W] HVAC,Sum,DX Coil Latent Cooling Energy[J] HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Electric Power[W] HVAC,Sum,DX Cooling Coil Electric Consumption[J] HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Runtime Fraction If not part of UnitarySystem:HeatPump:AirToAir:
- 436 -
HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Crankcase Heater Power[W] HVAC,Sum,DX Cooling Coil Crankcase Heater Consumption[J] Evaporative-cooled condenser: HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Condenser Inlet Temp[C] HVAC,Sum,DX Cooling Coil Evap Condenser Water Consumption[m3] HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Evap Condenser Pump Electric Power[W] HVAC,Sum,DX Cooling Coil Evap Condenser Pump Electric Consumption[J] HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Basin Heater Electric Power[W] HVAC,Sum,DX Cooling Coil Basin Heater Electric Consumption[J] Additional variables for Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode only: HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Stage 2 Runtime Fraction HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Dehumidification Mode HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Condensate Volumetric Flow Rate [m3/s] Zone,Meter,Condensate:OnSiteWater [m3]
DX Coil Total Cooling Rate [W]

This field is the total (sensible and latent) cooling rate output of the DX coil in Watts. This is determined by the coil inlet and outlet air conditions and the air mass flow rate through the coil.
DX Coil Total Cooling Energy [J]

This is the total (sensible plus latent) cooling output of the DX coil in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by the coil inlet and outlet air conditions and the air mass flow rate through the coil. This output is also added to a report meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key = CoolingCoils, Group Key = System (Ref. Report Meter).
DX Coil Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This output is the moist air sensible cooling rate output of the DX coil in Watts. This is determined by the inlet and outlet air conditions and the air mass flow rate through the coil.
DX Coil Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This is the moist air sensible cooling output of the DX coil in Joules for the timestep being reported. This is determined by the inlet and outlet air conditions and the air mass flow rate through the coil.
DX Coil Latent Cooling Rate [W]

This is the latent cooling rate output of the DX coil in Watts. This is determined by the inlet and outlet air conditions and the air mass flow rate through the coil.
DX Coil Latent Cooling Energy [J]

This is the latent cooling output of the DX coil in Joules for the timestep being reported. This is determined by the inlet and outlet air conditions and the air mass flow rate through the coil.
DX Cooling Coil Electric Power [W]

This output is the electricity consumption rate of the DX coil compressor and condenser fan(s) in Watts. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep, and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.
- 437 -
DX Cooling Coil Electric Consumption [J]

This is the electricity consumption of the DX coil compressor and condenser fan(s) in Joules for the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a report meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Cooling, Group Key = System (Ref. Report Meter).
DX Cooling Coil Runtime Fraction

This is the runtime fraction of the DX coil compressor and condenser fan(s) for the timestep being reported.
DX Cooling Coil Crankcase Heater Power[W]

This is the average electricity consumption rate of the DX coil compressors crankcase heater in Watts for the timestep being reported.
DX Cooling Coil Crankcase Heater Consumption[J]

This is the electricity consumption of the DX coil compressors crankcase heater in Joules for the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a report meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Cooling, Group Key = System (ref. Report Meter).
Cooling Coil - Two Stage With Humidity Control DX

Used in:
Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling
DX cooling coils in Air handling units when Two stage with dehumidification option used
The multimode DX coil is functionally equivalent to the single-speed DX cooling coil but with multiple performance modes available. It is capable of modelling two-stage DX units and units with an enhanced dehumidification mode such as coil bypass or subcool reheat. It can have up to 4 performance modes to accommodate a 2-stage 2-mode unit.
GENERAL Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a DX cooling coil. Any reference to this DX coil by another object will use this name. This name is fixed and cannot be changed by the user.
Number of capacity stages

The value for this input defines the number of capacity stages and must be 1 or 2. The default value is 1. Larger DX units often have two capacity stages, which are often two completely independent compressor/coil circuits with the evaporator coils arranged in parallel in the supply air stream. Two-stage operation affects cycling losses and latent degradation due to re-evaporation of moisture with continuous fan operation.
Enhanced dehumidification mode

Check this option if the DX coil provides enhanced dehumidification to increase dehumidification based on a humidistat signal.
Dehumidification control type

Defines the type of dehumidification control. The following options are valid for this field:
- 438 -
Cooling Coil - Two Stage With Humidity Control DX
1-None - meet sensible load only, no active dehumidification control 2-Multi mode - activate enhanced dehumidification mode as needed and meet sensible load. This option is used to model DX equipment with a switchable option such as subcool reheat. 3-Cool reheat - cool beyond the dry-bulb setpoint as required to meet the humidity setpoint.
The default is 1-None. For all dehumidification controls, the max humidity setpoint on the control node is used. This must be set using a Zone humidistat and a downstream setpoint manager of type: 5-Multi zone maximum humidity average, or, 7-Multi zone humidity maximum, or, 9-Single zone humidity maximum
When extra dehumidification is required, the equipment may not be able to meet the humidity setpoint if its full capacity is not adequate.

The name of the schedule that denotes whether the DX cooling coil can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the coil can be on during a given time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the coil must be off.
NORMAL MODE STAGE 1 COIL PERFORMANCE

The data under this header defines the DX coil performance for stage 1 operation without enhanced dehumidification (normal mode). The data items for Normal Mode Stage 1 Coil Performance are described under Cooling Coil - Single Speed DX coils.
NORMAL MODE STAGE 1+2 COIL PERFORMANCE

The data under this header defines the DX coil performance for stage 1+2 operation (both stages active) without enhanced dehumidification (normal mode). The data items for Normal Mode Stage 1+2 Coil Performance are described under Cooling Coil - Single Speed DX coils.
DEHUMIDIFICATION MODE 1 STAGE 1 COIL PERFORMANCE

The data under this header defines the DX coil performance for stage 1 operation with enhanced dehumidification active. The data items for Dehumidification Mode 1 Stage 1 Coil Performance are described under Cooling Coil Single Speed DX coils.
DEHUMIDIFICATION MODE 1 STAGE 1+2 COIL PERFORMANCE

The data under this header defines the DX coil performance for stage 1+2 operation (both stages active) with enhanced dehumidification active. An EnergyPlus CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling object is generated based on these inputs.
- 439 -
The data items for Dehumidification Mode 1 Stage 1+2 Coil Performance are described under Cooling Coil Single Speed DX coils.

This numeric field defines the crankcase heater capacity (in W). When the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is below the value specified in the input field Maximum Outdoor Dry-bulb Temperature for Crankcase Heater Operation (described below), the crankcase heater is enabled during the time that the compressor is not running. The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0, and the default value is 0. To simulate a DX cooling coil without a crankcase heater, enter a value of 0.

This numeric field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature (in C or F) above which the compressors crankcase heater is disabled. The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0C, and the default value is 10C.
BASIN HEATER Basin heater capacity

This numeric field contains the capacity of the DX coils electric evaporative cooler basin heater (in W/K or Btu/h F). This field only applies for Condenser type = Evaporatively cooled. This field is used in conjunction with the Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature described in the following field. The basin heater electric power is equal to this field multiplied by the difference between the basin heater set point temperature and the outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The basin heater only operates when the DX coil is off, regardless of the basin heater schedule described below. The basin heater capacity must be greater than or equal to zero.

This numeric field contains the set point temperature (in C or F) for the basin heater described in the previous field. This field only applies for Condenser type = Evaporatively cooled. The basin heater is active when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below this setpoint temperature, as long as the DX coil is off. This set point temperature must be greater than or equal to 2C.

This alpha field contains the name of the basin heater operating schedule. This field only applies for Condenser type = Evaporatively cooled. The basin heater operating schedule is assumed to be an on/off schedule and the heater is available to operate any time the schedule value is greater than 0. The basin heater operates when scheduled on and the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is below the set point temperature described in the previous field. Regardless of this schedule, the basin heater can only operate when the DX coil is off.
RUN SETTINGS Run on sensible load only

This setting must be switched on if the coil is to meet sensible loads only.
Run on latent load only

This setting must be switched on if the coil is to meet latent loads only.
DX COOLING COIL OUTPUTS

See Outputs section under Cooling Coil - Single Speed DX coils.
- 440 -
Fans
Fans
These fan types are available within Detailed HVAC: Fan - Constant Volume Fan - Variable Volume Fan - On/Off
Fan - Constant Volume

Fan:ConstantVolume
Supply Used in: Air Handling Unit (Constant Volume) Fan Coil Unit PTAC, PTHP, Unitary Heat Cool, Unitary Heat Pump
Extract This object models a constant air volume fan that is intended to operate continuously based on a time schedule. This fan will not cycle on and off based on cooling/heating load or other control signals (Ref: Fan:OnOff).
GENERAL Name
A unique auto-assigned name for the Fan. Any reference to this fan by another object will use this name.
Type
The type of the constant volume fan is fixed as: 2-Constant volume
To change from constant volume to variable volume you most open the parent AHU dialog and change the Fan type to 1-Variable volume.
Fan efficiency
The ratio of the power delivered to the fluid to the electrical input power. It is the product of the motor efficiency and the fan efficiency. The motor efficiency is the power delivered to the shaft divided by the electrical power input to the motor. The fan efficiency is power delivered to the fluid (air) divided by the shaft power. The power delivered to the fluid is the mass flow rate of the air multiplied by the pressure rise divided by the air density. Must be between 0 and 1.
Pressure rise
The pressure rise (in Pascals or ftH2O) at full flow and standard (sea level) conditions (20C and 101325 Pa).
- 441 -
End-use subcategory
Allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., "Central System", etc. A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Report Meter). Subcategories are also reported in the ABUPS table. If this field is omitted or blank, the fan will be assigned to the "General" end-use subcategory.
FLOW RATES Maximum flow rate

The full load air volumetric flow rate (m3/sec or ft3/min) at standard temperature and pressure (dry air at 20C drybulb). EnergyPlus uses local barometric pressure to account for altitude using equation for "standard atmospheric" pressure on p 6.1 of the ASHRAE 1997 HOF (SI edition) to initialize the air systems being simulated. p=101325*(1-2.25577E-05*Z)**5.2559 where p=pressure in Pa and Z=altitude in m
MOTOR Motor efficiency

The shaft power divided by the electrical power consumed. Must be between 0 and 1.
Motor in airstream fraction

The fraction of the motor heat that is added to the air stream. A value of 0 means that the motor is completely outside the air stream. A value of 1 means that all of the motor heat loss will go into the air stream and act to cause a temperature rise. Must be between 0 and 1.

Select the Schedule that defines whether the fan can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the fan can be on during a given time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the fan is off.
FAN - CONSTANT VOLUME OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,Fan Electric Power[W] HVAC,Average,Fan Delta Temp[C] HVAC,Sum,Fan Electric Consumption[J]
Fan Electric Power [W]

This output field contains the average electricity consumption rate for the fan in Watts for the timestep being reported.
Fan Delta Temp [C]

This output field contains the average rise in air temperature across the fan (outlet air temperature minus inlet air temperature) (in C or F)elsius for the timestep being reported.
- 442 -
Fan - Variable Volume
Fan Electric Consumption [J]

This output field contains the electricity consumption of the fan in Joules for the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a report meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key= Fans, Group Key= System (ref. Report Meter).

Fan:VariableVolume
Supply Used in: Air Handling Unit (Variable Volume)
Extract
GENERAL Name
A unique auto-generated name for the fan. Any reference to this fan by another object will use this name.
Type
The type of the variable volume fan is fixed as: 2-Variable volume
To change from variable volume to constant volume you most open the parent AHU dialog and change the Fan type to 1-Constant volume.
Fan efficiency
The ratio of the power delivered to the fluid to the electrical input power at maximum flow. It is the product of the motor efficiency and the fan efficiency. The motor efficiency is the power delivered to the shaft divided by the electrical power input to the motor. The fan efficiency is power delivered to the fluid (air) divided by the shaft power. The power delivered to the fluid is the mass flow rate of the air multiplied by the pressure rise divided by the air density. Must be between 0 and 1.
Pressure rise
End-use subcategory
- 443 -
FLOW RATES Fan minimum flow rate input method for fan power
This field is a key/choice field that tells which of the next two fields is filled and is descriptive of how the minimum flow rate is specified for calculating the fan power. The key/choices are: 1-Fraction where the fan power will be calculated using the value specified in the Minimum flow fraction for fan power below. 2-Fixed flow rate where the fan power is calculated using the value specified in the Minimum air flow rate for fan power below.
Minimum flow fraction for fan power

The minimum air volumetric flow rate for fan power, specified as a fraction of maximum system air flow rate. Must be between 0 and 1. Note that this field is only used to calculate the fan power. This field does not enforce the system air flow rate during simulation.
Minimum air flow rate for fan power

The minimum air volumetric flow rate for fan power, specified as a constant minimum air flow rate (m3/sec or ft3/min). Note that this field is only used to calculate the fan power. This field does not enforce the system air flow rate during simulation.
Maximum flow rate

The full load air volumetric flow rate (m3/sec or ft3/min) at standard temperature and pressure (dry air at 20C drybulb). The program does use local barometric pressure to account for altitude using equation for "standard atmospheric" pressure on p 6.1 of the ASHRAE 1997 HOF (SI edition) to initialize the air systems being simulated. p=101325*(1-2.25577E-05*Z)5.2559 where p=pressure in Pa and Z=altitude in m
Minimum flow rate

The minimum air volumetric flow rate (m3/sec or ft3/min) for the fan at standard temperature and pressure (see Maximum Flow Rate field above for details).
MOTOR Motor efficiency


- 444 -
FAN COEFFICIENTS
Fan coefficient data under this header provides the coefficients C2 to C5 in the fourth order polynomial curve giving the fraction of full load power (PLF) as a function of flow fraction (FF). Flow fraction is the air mass flow rate divided by the maximum air mass flow rate.
PLF = C1 + C2. FF + C3 FF2 + C4.FF3 + C5. FF4
Fan coefficient 1
The constant coefficient C1 in the above curve
Fan coefficient 2
The linear coefficient C2 in the above curve
Fan coefficient 3
The quadratic coefficient C3 in the above curve
Fan coefficient 4
The cubic coefficient C4 in the above curve
Fan Coefficient 5
The coefficient C5 in the above curve

Schedule that defines whether the fan can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the fan can be on during a given time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the fan is off.
FAN - VARIABLE VOLUME OUPUTS

HVAC,Average,Fan Electric Power[W] HVAC,Average,Fan Delta Temp[C] HVAC,Sum,Fan Electric Consumption[J]

Fan Delta Temp [C]


- 445 -
Fan - On/Off
Fan:OnOff
Used in: Fan Coil Unit PTAC, PTHP, Unitary Heat Cool, Unitary Heat Pump
The On/off fan models a constant air volume fan that is intended to cycle on and off in tandem with a cooling or heating system (i.e., AUTO fan control mode). The fan can also operate continuously like a Constant volume fan. If modelling continuous operation and this object is used as part of a system that utilizes Coil:Heating:Gas, Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed or Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed, the user should confirm proper air flow rates (coil and fan max load fraction is less than or equal to 1 for all values of coil part-load ratio). Multi-speed fan operation can also be modelled when the On/off fan is included as part of a compound object that allows multiple fan speeds (e.g.,Unitary Heat Cool, PTAC, etc.). In this case, the ratio of the compound object air flow rate to the fans maximum air flow rate is used to determine the power at alternate fan speeds. The input for Fan Power Ratio Function of Speed Ratio Curve Name must be entered to model multi-speed fan operation. An optional fan total efficiency ratio curve is also available to model efficiency differences at alternate fan speeds.
Name
A unique system assigned name for an instance of an On/off fan. Any reference to this fan by another object will use this name.
Fan efficiency
The ratio of the power delivered to the fluid to the electrical input power. It is the product of the motor efficiency and the fan efficiency. The motor efficiency is the power delivered to the shaft divided by the electrical power input to the motor. The fan efficiency is power delivered to the fluid (air) divided by the shaft power. The power delivered to the fluid is the mass flow rate of the air multiplied by the pressure rise divided by the air density. Must be between 0 and 1.
Pressure rise
End-use subcategory
Maximum flow rate

The full load air volumetric flow rate (m3/sec or ft3/min) at standard temperature and pressure (dry air at 20C drybulb). EnergyPlus uses local barometric pressure to account for altitude using equation for "standard atmospheric" pressure on p 6.1 of the ASHRAE 1997 HOF (SI edition) to initialize the air systems being simulated. p=101325*(1-2.25577E-05*Z)**5.2559 where p=pressure in Pa and Z=altitude in m
Motor efficiency
- 446 -
Pumps

Fan power ratio function of speed ratio curve

Select an Exponent Performance curve. This curve is used to simulate multi-speed fan motors, representing the ratio of actual fan power to rated fan power when a change in fan speed occurs.
Fan efficiency ratio function of speed ratio curve

Enter the name of a Quadratic or Cubic Performance curve. This curve is used to simulate multi-speed fan motors, representing the ratio of actual fan total efficiency to rated fan total efficiency when a change in fan speed occurs.

Select the Schedule that defines whether the fan can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the fan can be on during a given time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the fan is off.
FAN - ON/OFF OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,Fan Electric Power[W] HVAC,Average,Fan Delta Temp[C] HVAC,Sum,Fan Electric Consumption[J] HVAC,Average,On/Off Fan Runtime Fraction

Fan Delta Temp [C]


On/Off Fan Runtime Fraction

This output field contains the fraction of time that this fan operated for the timestep being reported
Pumps
These pump types are available within Detailed HVAC: Pump - Constant Speed Pump - Variable Speed
- 447 -
Pump - Constant Speed

Pump:ConstantSpeed
Used in: Plant and Condenser loops
GENERAL Name
The auto-generated name for the pump.
Type
The type of the variable speed pump is fixed as: 2-Constant speed
To change from constant speed to variable speed you most open the parent Plant or Condenser loop dialog and change the Plant loop flow type to 1-Variable flow.
PUMP SETTINGS Rated flow rate

This numeric field contains the pumps rated volumetric flow rate (in m3/s or gal/min).
Rated pump head

This numeric field contains the pumps rated head pressure (in Pascals or ftH2O). Important Note: The default pump head provided by the Plant and Condenser Loop templates is 20,000 Pa. This may be suitable for a small building, but it is important that you enter the correctly sized pump head if you wish to simulate pump energy consumption accurately in your model.
Rated power consumption

This numeric field contains the pumps rated power consumption (in W). If the user is performing a pressure simulation on the loop in which this pump is found, this value would only be used to estimate pump efficiency. During reported calculations, the pump would use the loop pressure drop and current flow conditions along with efficiency to calculate pump power dynamically.
Motor efficiency
This numeric field contains the pumps efficiency in decimal form (0 = 0%, 1 = 100%).
Fraction of motor inefficiencies to fluid stream

This is the pumps fraction of power loss to the fluid.
Pump control type

This is a choice field of
- 448 -
Pump - Variable Speed
1-Continuous or 2-Intermittent.
The operation of a constant speed pump is fairly straightforward. If the user designates a constant speed pump that is operating continuously, the pump will run regardless of whether or not there is a load. This may have the net effect of adding heat to the loop if no equipment is turned on. If the pump is constant speed and operates intermittently, the pump will run at its capacity if a load is sensed and will shut off if there is no load on the loop.
Pump flow rate schedule

The schedule values modify the Rated flow rate of the pump on a time basis. The default is that the pump is on and runs according to its other operational requirements specified above. This schedule is for special, not typical pump operations.
PUMP - CONSTANT SPEED OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,Pump Electric Power [W] HVAC,Sum,Pump Electric Consumption [J] HVAC,Average,Pump Shaft Power [W] HVAC,Average,Pump Heat To Fluid [W] HVAC,Sum,Pump Heat To Fluid Energy [J] HVAC,Average,Pump Outlet Temp [C] HVAC,Average,Pump Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
Pump Electric Power [W] Pump Electric Consumption [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the pump motor. Consumption is metered on Pumps:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.
Pump Shaft Power [W]

This is the shaft power delivered from the motor to the pump.
Pump Heat To Fluid [W] Pump Heat To Fluid Energy [J]

These outputs are the energy added to the fluid as heat. For the current algorithm, this is equal to Pump Shaft Power, because the loops are closed and all energy added to the fluid will ultimately become heat due to friction.
Pump Outlet Temp [C] Pump Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the water outlet temperature and mass flow rate.

Pump:VariableSpeed
Used in: Plant and Condenser loops
- 449 -
GENERAL Name
The auto-generated name for the pump.
Type
The type of the variable speed pump is fixed as: 2-Variable speed
To change from variable speed to constant speed you most open the parent Plant or Condenser loop dialog and change the Plant loop flow type to 1-Constant flow.
PUMP SETTINGS Rated flow rate

This numeric field contains the pumps rated volumetric flow rate (in m3/s or gal/min).
Rated pump head

This numeric field contains the pumps rated head pressure (in Pascals or ftH2O). Important Note: The default pump head provided by the Plant and Condenser Loop templates is 20,000 Pa. This may be suitable for a small building, but it is important that you enter the correctly sized pump head if you wish to simulate pump energy consumption accurately in your model.

This numeric field contains the pumps rated power consumption (in W). If the user is performing a pressure simulation on the loop in which this pump is found, this value would only be used to estimate pump efficiency. During reported calculations, the pump would use the loop pressure drop and current flow conditions along with efficiency to calculate pump power dynamically.
Motor efficiency
This numeric field contains the pumps efficiency in decimal form (0 = 0%, 1 = 100%).

This numeric field contains the pumps fraction of power loss to the fluid.
Pump control type

This is a choice field of: 1-Continuous or 2-Intermittent. A variable speed pump is defined with maximum and minimum flow rates that are the physical limits of the device. If there is no load on the loop and the pump is operating intermittently, then the pump can shutdown. For any other condition such as the loop having a load and the pump is operating intermittently or the pump is continuously operating (regardless of the loading condition), the pump will operate and select a flow somewhere between the minimum and maximum limits. In these cases where the pump is running, it will try to meet the flow request made by demand side components.
- 450 -
Pump flow rate schedule

The schedule values modify the value for Rated flow rate of the pump on a time basis. The default is that the pump is on and runs according to its other operational requirements specified above. This schedule is for special, not typical pump operations.
PUMP COEFFICIENTS
The fraction of full load power is determined during the simulation by the cubic equation: FractionFullLoadPower = C1 + C2. PLR + C3 PLR2 + C4.PLR3 where C1to C4are the coefficients described below and PLR is the Part Load Ratio.
Coefficient 1 of the part load performance curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient, C1, in the part load ratio curve.

This numeric field contains the second coefficient, C2, in the part load ratio curve.

This numeric field contains the third coefficient, C3, in the part load ratio curve.

This numeric field contains the fourth coefficient, C4, in the part load ratio curve.
Minimum flow rate

This field contains the minimum volumetric flow rate while operating in variable flow capacity rate (in m3/s or gal/min).
PUMP - VARIABLE SPEED OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,Pump Electric Power [W] HVAC,Sum,Pump Electric Consumption [J] HVAC,Average,Pump Shaft Power [W] HVAC,Average,Pump Heat To Fluid [W] HVAC,Sum,Pump Heat To Fluid Energy [J] HVAC,Average,Pump Outlet Temp [C] HVAC,Average,Pump Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
Pump Electric Power [W] Pump Electric Consumption [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the pump motor. Consumption is metered on Pumps:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.
Pump Shaft Power [W]

This is the shaft power delivered from the motor to the pump.
Pump Heat To Fluid [W] Pump Heat To Fluid Energy [J]

These outputs are the energy added to the fluid as heat. For the current algorithm, this is equal to Pump Shaft Power, because the loops are closed and all energy added to the fluid will ultimately become heat due to friction.
- 451 -
Pump Outlet Temp [C] Pump Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the water outlet temperature and mass flow rate.
Humidifier - Steam Electric

Humidifier:Steam:Electric
Used in: Air Handling Units
The electric steam humidifier is a component that represents an electrically heated, self contained steam humidifier. The component uses electrical energy to convert ordinary tap water to steam which it then injects into the supply air stream by means of a blower fan. The actual unit might be an electrode-type humidifier or a resistance-type humidifier. The humidifier model includes local control of the humidifier unit to meet a humidity ratio setpoint on its air outlet node. A Setpoint manager is needed to put a setpoint on the exit node but no other local controllers are needed. The humidifier will add moisture to meet the humidity ratio setpoint.
GENERAL Name
A unique system assigned name for a particular humidifier unit. Any reference to this unit by another object will use this name.
Rated capacity
The nominal full output water addition rate of the unit (in m3/sec or gal/min of water at 5.05C). The Rated capacity can be autosized.
Rated power
The nominal full output power consumption of the unit (in W), exclusive of the blower fan power consumption and any standby power.
Rated fan power

The nominal full output power consumption of the blower fan (in W).
Standby power
The standby power consumption (in W). This amount of power will be consumed whenever the unit is available (as defined by the availability schedule).
- 452 -
Humidifier - Steam Electric

Schedule that defines whether the unit can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the fan can be on during a given time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit is off.
HUMIDIFIER - STEAM ELECTRIC OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,Humidifier Water Consumption Rate[m3/s] HVAC,Sum,Humidifier Water Consumption[m3] HVAC,Average,Humidifier Electric Power[W] HVAC,Sum,Humidifier Electric Consumption[J] Zone,Meter,Humidifier:Water [m3] Zone,Meter,Humidifier:Electricity [J] HVAC,Average,Humidifier Water From Storage Tank Rate [m3/s] HVAC,Sum,Humidifier Water From Storage Tank [m3] HVAC,Average,Humidifier Water Starved By Storage Tank Rate [m3/s] HVAC,Sum,Humidifier Water Starved By Storage Tank [m3] Zone,Meter,Humidifier:MainsWater [m3] HVAC,Sum,Humidifier Water Mains Draw [m3]
Humidifier Water Consumption Rate[m3/s]

This field reports the water consumption rate of the steam humidifier in cubic meters of water per second.
Humidifier Water Consumption[m3]

This ouput is the cubic meters of water consumed by the steam humidifier over the timestep being reported.
Humidifier Electric Power[W]

This output is the electricity consumption rate in Watts of the steam humidifier.
Humidifier Electric Consumption[J]

This is the electricity consumption in Joules of the steam humidifier over the timestep being reported.
Humidifier:Water [m3]
This meter output contains the sum of the water consumed (in cubic neters of water during the report timestep) by all the steam humidifiers at the HVAC level in the simulation.
Humidifier:Electricity [J]
This meter output contains the sum of the electricity consumed (in Joules during the report timestep) by all the steam humidifiers at the HVAC level in the simulation.
Humidifier Water From Storage Tank Rate [m3/s] Humidifier Water From Storage Tank [m3]
These outputs contain the rate and volume of water obtained from water storage tank. These are only present if the humidifier is connected to a Water Storage Tank for its water supply.
- 453 -
Humidifier Water Starved By Storage Tank Rate [m3/s] Humidifier Water Starved By Storage Tank [m3]
These outputs contain the rate and volume of water that could not be obtained from the water storage tank. The component will still operate as if it did get all the water with the balance obtained directly from the mains
Humidifier Water Mains Draw [m3]

This output contains the volume of water obtained from the mains.
Chillers
Chiller:Electric:EIR
Used in: Chilled water loop, supply side
Chillers provide chilled water to cooling coils, chilled beams and cooled ceilings. Chiller components are used in both Compact and Detailed HVAC: When using the Compact HVAC model option, a chiller component can be selected at building level on the HVAC tab when the main HVAC system type is VAV or CAV or if one or more zone in the model has a fan coil unit. When using the Detailed HVAC model option, chiller can be added only when you are currently located in a Chilled water supply loop. Chillers can be placed using the Add Chiller command.
When using Detailed HVAC, to edit an existing chiller go to the Cold water supply loop (HVAC System > Cold water loop > Supply loop) level where the chiller is placed, click on the chiller icon to highlight it then either right click and select the Edit selected component menu option or, when using Learning mode, click on the Edit icon in at the top of the info panel. The EnergyPlus Chiller:Electric:EIR model is used internally to represent all chillers in DesignBuilder.This chiller model is the empirical model used in the DOE-2.1 building energy simulation program. It uses performance information at reference conditions along with three curve fits for cooling capacity and efficiency to determine chiller operation at off-reference conditions. Chiller performance curves can be generated by fitting manufacturers catalog data or measured data. Performance curves for more than 160 chillers, including the default DOE-2.1E reciprocating and centrifugal chillers, are provided as templates for selection within the chiller dialog. This data comes from in the EnergyPlus Reference DataSets (Chillers.idf and AllDataSets.idf). Note: Chiller:Electric:EIR objects and their associated performance curve objects are developed using performance information for a specific chiller and should normally be used together for an EnergyPlus simulation. Changing the object input values, or swapping performance curves between chillers, should be done with caution.
GENERAL Name
The auto-generated name of the chiller can be edited.
- 454 -
Chillers
Chiller template
Use this browse option to select a chiller from the EnergyPlus chiller database.
Reference capacity
This numeric field contains the reference cooling capacity of the chiller (in W or Btu/h). This should be the capacity of the chiller at the reference temperatures and water flow rates defined below. Alternately, this field can be autosized.
Reference COP
This numeric field contains the chillers coefficient of performance which is multiplied by the output of the chiller performance curves described below. This value should not include energy use due to pumps, evap-cooled or aircooled condenser fans, or cooling tower fans. This COP should be at the reference temperatures and water flow rates defined below.
Compressor motor efficiency

This numeric input represents the fraction of compressor electrical energy consumption that must be rejected by the condenser. Enter a value of 1.0 when modelling hermetic chillers. This value must be between 0.0 and 1.0, with a default value of 1.0.
Chiller flow mode

This field determines if the chiller is modelled with constant or variable water flow through the evaporator. Valid choices are: 1-Constant flow (default option) or, 2-Variable flow
Sizing factor
This numeric field allows you to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. For this component the inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Reference capacity, Reference chilled water flow rate and Reference condenser water flow rate. Sizing factor allows the user to size a component to meet part of the design load while continuing to use the autosizing feature.
CONDENSER Condenser type

The condenser type determines what type of condenser will be included with this chiller. Valid condenser types are: 1-Air cooled, 2-Water cooled, 3-Evaporatively cooled
The default is 2-Water cooled which requires the full specification of the Condenser loop and its associated equipment. 1-Air cooled and 3-Evaporatively cooled do not require a Condenser loop to be specified.
Condenser fan power ratio

This field is used to model condenser fan power associated with air-cooled or evaporatively cooled condensers. Enter the ratio of the condenser fan power to the reference chiller cooling capacity in W/W.
- 455 -
TEMPERATURES Reference leaving chilled water temperature

This numeric field contains the chillers reference leaving chilled water temperature (in C or F). The default value is 6.67C.
Reference entering condenser fluid temperature

This numeric field contains the chillers reference entering condenser fluid temperature (in C or F). The default value is 29.4C. For water-cooled chillers this is the water temperature entering the condenser (e.g., leaving the cooling tower). For air- or evap-cooled condensers this is the entering outdoor air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature, respectively.
Leaving chilled water lower temperature limit

This numeric field contains the lower limit for the leaving chilled water temperature (in C or F). This temperature acts as a cut off for heat transfer in the evaporator, so that the fluid doesnt get too cold. This input field is currently unused. The default value is 2C.
FLOW RATES Reference chilled water flow rate

For a variable flow chiller this is the maximum water flow rate and for a constant flow chiller this is the operating water flow rate through the chillers evaporator. The units are (in m3/s or gal/min). This numeric input field must be greater than zero, or it can be autosized.
Reference condenser fluid flow rate

This numeric field contains the chillers operating condenser water flow rate (in m3/s or gal/min). This field can be autosized.
PERFORMANCE CURVES Cooling capacity function of temperature curve

The name of a Bi-quadratic performance curve that parameterizes the variation of the cooling capacity as a function of the leaving chilled water temperature and the entering condenser fluid temperature. The output of this curve is multiplied by the reference capacity to give the cooling capacity at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the reference temperatures). The curve should have a value of 1.0 at the reference temperatures and flow rates specified above. The bi-quadratic curve should be valid for the range of water temperatures anticipated for the simulation.
Electric input to cooling output ratio function of temperature curve

The name of a Bi-quadratic performance curve that parameterizes the variation of the energy input to cooling output ratio (EIR) as a function of the leaving chilled water temperature and the entering condenser fluid temperature. The EIR is the inverse of the COP. The output of this curve is multiplied by the reference EIR (inverse of the reference COP) to give the EIR at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the reference temperatures). The curve should have a value of 1.0 at the reference temperatures and flow rates specified above. The bi-quadratic curve should be valid for the range of water temperatures anticipated for the simulation.
Electric input to cooling output ratio function of part load ratio curve
The name of a Quadratic performance curve that parameterizes the variation of the energy input ratio (EIR) as a function of the part-load ratio. The EIR is the inverse of the COP, and the part-load ratio is the actual cooling load divided by the chillers available cooling capacity. The output of this curve is multiplied by the reference EIR
- 456 -
Chillers
(inverse of the reference COP) and the Energy input to cooling output ratio function of temperature curve to give the EIR at the specific temperatures and part-load ratio at which the chiller is operating. This curve should have a value of 1.0 when the part-load ratio equals 1.0. The quadratic curve should be valid for the range of partload ratios anticipated for the simulation.
PART LOAD SETTINGS Minimum part load ratio

This numeric field contains the chillers minimum part-load ratio. The expected range is between 0 and 1. Below this part-load ratio, the compressor cycles on and off to meet the cooling load. The Minimum part load ratio must be less than or equal to the Maximum part load ratio. The default value is 0.1.
Maximum part load ratio

This numeric field contains the chillers maximum part-load ratio. This value may exceed 1, but the normal range is between 0 and 1.0. The Maximum part load ratio must be greater than or equal to the Minimum part load ratio. The default value is 1.0.
Optimum part load ratio

This numeric field contains the chillers optimum part-load ratio. This is the part-load ratio at which the chiller performs at its maximum COP. The optimum part-load ratio must be greater than or equal to the Minimum part load ratio, and less than or equal to the Maximum part load ratio. The default value is 1.0.
Minimum unloading ratio

This numeric field contains the chillers minimum unloading ratio. The expected range is between 0 and 1. The minimum unloading ratio is where the chiller capacity can no longer be reduced by unloading and must be false loaded to meet smaller cooling loads. A typical false loading strategy is hot-gas bypass. The minimum unloading ratio must be greater than or equal to the Minimum part load ratio, and less than or equal to the Maximum part load ratio. The default value is 0.2.
GENERIC CHILLER OUTPUTS

Many output variable names are common across all chiller types. These generic chiller output names all begin with the word "Chiller". Certain chiller types have additional output variables which are specific to that type of chiller. Specific chiller output names begin with the chiller type, for example, "Gas Absorption Chiller Heating Energy [J]." Chiller energy use is added to the appropriate plant-level meters as a cooling end-use. HVAC,Average,Chiller Electric Power [W] HVAC,Sum,Chiller Electric Consumption [J] Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J] Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J] HVAC,Average,Chiller Evap Heat Trans Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Chiller Evap Heat Trans [J] Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J] Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J] HVAC,Average,Chiller Evap Water Inlet Temp [C] HVAC,Average,Chiller Evap Water Outlet Temp [C] HVAC,Average,Chiller Evap Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s] HVAC,Average,Chiller Cond Heat Trans Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Chiller Cond Heat Trans [J] Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J] HVAC,Average,Chiller COP [W/W] The following output is applicable only for air-cooled or evap-cooled chillers:
- 457 -
HVAC,Average,Chiller Cond Air Inlet Temp [C] The following outputs are applicable only for evap-cooled chillers: HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electric Power [W] HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electric Consumption [J] The following three outputs are only available for water-cooled chillers: HVAC,Average,Chiller HVAC,Average,Chiller HVAC,Average,Chiller HVAC,Average,Chiller Cond Water Inlet Temp [C] Cond Water Outlet Temp [C] Cond Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s] Shaft Power [W]
Chiller Electric Power [W] Chiller Electric Consumption [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the chiller. In the case of steam or fuel-powered chillers, this repesents the internal chiller pumps and other electric power consumption. Consumption is metered on Cooling:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.
Chiller Evap Heat Trans Rate [W] Chiller Evap Heat Trans [J]
These outputs are the evaporator heat transfer which is the cooling delivered by the chiller. Chiller Evap Heat Trans is metered on Chillers:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.
Chiller Evap Water Inlet Temp [C] Chiller Evap Water Outlet Temp [C] Chiller Evap Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
These outputs are the evaporator (chilled water) inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate.
Chiller COP [W/W]

This output is the coefficient of performance for the chiller during cooling operation. It is calculated as the evaporator heat transfer rate (Chiller Evap Heat Trans Rate) divided by the fuel consumption rate by the chiller. For the constant COP and electric chillers, the fuel is electricity so the divisor is Chiller Electric Power [W]. For the absorption chiller, the fuel is steam so the divisor is Steam Consumption Rate [W]. For the engine driven chiller and combustion turbine chiller, the output variable is renamed as Chiller Fuel COP to clarify that the primary energy input to the chiller is a gaseous or liquid fuel (natural gas, diesel, gasoline, etc.). The divisor is the appropriate fuel consumption rate (Chiller [fuel type] Consumption Rate). For the direct fired absorption chiller, this variable is renamed as Direct Fired Absorption Chiller Cooling Fuel COP and the divisor is Direct Fired Absorption Chiller Cooling Gas Consumption Rate. Note that this variable is reported as zero when the chiller is not operating. When reported for frequencies longer than "detailed" (such as timestep, hourly, daily, monthly or environment), this output will only be meaningful when the chiller is operating for the entire reporting period. To determine an average COP for a longer time period, compute the COP based on total evaporator heat transfer divided by total electric or fuel input over the desired period.
- 458 -
Chillers
Chiller Part-Load Ratio

This output is the operating part-load ratio of the indirect absorption chiller. This output may fall below the minimum part-load ratio specified in the input. For this case, the Chiller Cycling Fraction is used to further define the performance of the indirect absorption chiller.
Chiller Cycling Fraction

This output is the fraction of the timestep the indirect absorption chiller operates. When the chiller operates above the minimum part-load ratio, a chiller cycling fraction of 1 is reported. When the chiller operates below the minimum part-load ratio, the chiller cycling fraction reports the fraction of the timestep the indirect absorption chiller operates.
Chiller Cond Heat Trans Rate [W] Chiller Cond Heat Trans [J]
These outputs are the condenser heat transfer which is the heat rejected from the chiller to either a condenser water loop or through an air-cooled condenser. Chiller Cond Heat Trans is metered on HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.
Chiller Cond Air Inlet Temp [C]

This output is the condenser (heat rejection) inlet temperature for air-cooled or evap-cooled chillers. For an aircooled chiller, this output would be the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the condenser coil. For an evapcooled chiller, this output would be the wet-bulb temperature of the air entering the evaporatively-cooled condenser coil.
Chiller Basin Heater Electric Power [W] Chiller Basin Heater Electric Consumption [J]
These outputs are the electric power input to the chillers basin heater (for evaporativelycooled condenser type). Consumption is metered on Chillers:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility
Chiller Cond Water Inlet Temp [C] Chiller Cond Water Outlet Temp [C] Chiller Cond Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
These outputs are the condenser (heat rejection) inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate for water-cooled chillers.
Chiller Shaft Power [W] Chiller Shaft Energy [J]

For engine-driven and turbine-driven chillers, these outputs are the shaft power produced by the prime mover and transferred to the chiller compressor.
- 459 -
Chiller Lube Heat Recovery Rate [W] Chiller Lube Heat Recovery [J] Chiller Jacket Heat Recovery Rate [W] Chiller Jacket Heat Recovery [J] Chiller Exhaust Heat Recovery Rate [W] Chiller Exhaust Heat Recovery [J] Chiller Total Heat Recovery Rate [W] Chiller Total Heat Recovery [J]
For chillers with heat recovery, such as engine-driven chillers, these outputs are the components of recoverable energy available. For a given chiller type, one or more of the following components may be applicable: Lube (engine lubricant), Jacket (engine coolant), Exhaust (engine exhaust), and Total. Chiller Lube Heat Recovery, Chiller Jacket Heat Recovery, and Chiller Exhaust Heat Recovery are metered on HeatRecovery:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.
Chiller Exhaust Stack Temp [C]

This is the exhaust temperature leaving an engine chiller.
Chiller Heat Recovery Inlet Temp [C] Chiller Heat Recovery Outlet Temp [C] Chiller Heat Recovery Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
These outputs are the heat recovery inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate for chillers with heat recovery such as engine-driven and gas turbine chillers.
Chiller <FuelType> Consumption Rate [W] Chiller <FuelType> Consumption [J] Chiller <FuelType> Mass Flow Rate [kg/s] Chiller Gas Mass Consumption [kg] (Gas Turbine Chiller only)
These outputs are the steam or fuel input for steam or fuel-fired chillers. Valid fuel types depend on the type of chiller. <FuelType> may be one of: Gas (natural gas), Steam, Propane, Diesel, Gasoline, FuelOil#1, and FuelOil#2. Consumption is metered on Cooling:<FuelType>, <FuelType>:Plant, and <FuelType>:Facility.
CHILLER ELECTRIC EIR OUTPUTS

These reports are available only for Electric EIR Chillers.
Chiller Condenser Fan Electric Power [W] Chiller Condenser Fan Electric Consumption [J]
These outputs are for the electric power consumption of the chiller condenser fan and are applicable to air- or evaporatively-cooled chillers. This output is also added to a report meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Chillers, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Report Meter).
- 460 -
Chiller:Electric:EIR Technical Description
ChillerCapFTemp
This is the output of the curve object Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve.
ChillerEIRFTemp
This is the output of the curve object Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature Curve.
ChillerEIRFPLR
This is the output of the curve object Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Curve.
Chiller Part Load Ratio

This output is the ratio of the evaporator heat transfer rate plus the false load heat transfer rate (if applicable) to the available chiller capacity. This value is used to determine ChillerEIRFPLR.
Chiller Cycling Ratio

The cycling ratio is the amount of time the chiller operates during each simulation timestep. If the chiller part-load ratio falls below the minimum part-load ratio, the chiller cycles on and off to meet the cooling load.
Chiller False Load Heat Trans Rate Chiller False Load Heat Trans
These outputs are the heat transfer rate and total heat transfer due to false loading of the chiller. When the chiller part-load ratio is below the minimum unloading ratio, the chiller false loads (e.g. hot-gas bypass) to further reduce capacity. The false load heat transfer report variable is not metered.

Electric Chiller Model Based on Condenser Entering Temperature
OVERVIEW
This model (EnergyPlus name Chiller:Electric:EIR) simulates the performance of an electric liquid chiller. The model is based on the compression chiller model (COMREF) in the DOE-2.1 building energy simulation program. The EnergyPlus model contains all of the features of the DOE-2.1 chiller model, plus additional abilities for modelling evaporatively-cooled condensers and heat recovery for water heating. This model simulates the thermal performance of the chiller and the power consumption of the compressor(s). It also models the power consumption of condenser fans if modelling an air-cooled or evaporatively-cooled condenser. This model does not simulate the thermal performance or the power consumption of associated pumps or cooling towers.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
The chiller model uses user-supplied performance information at reference conditions along with three performance curves (curve objects) for cooling capacity and efficiency to determine chiller operation at offreference conditions. The three performance curves are: 1. 2. 3. Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature Curve Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Ratio Curve
- 461 -
Cooling capacity function of temperature curve

The cooling capacity function of temperature curve is a biquadratic performance curve with two independent variables: the leaving chilled water temperature and the entering condenser fluid temperature. The output of this curve is multiplied by the reference capacity to give the full-load cooling capacity at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the reference temperatures). The curve should have a value of 1.0 at the reference temperatures and flow rates specified in the input data file by the user. The biquadratic curve should be valid for the range of water temperatures anticipated for the simulation. ChillerCapFTemp = a + b(Tcw,l) + c(Tcw,l) ,+ d(Tcond,e) + e(Tcond,e) + f(Tcw,l )(Tcond,e) where: ChillerCapFTemp = cooling capacity factor, equal to 1 at reference conditions Tcw,l = leaving chilled water temperature, C Tcond,e = entering condenser fluid temperature, C. For a water-cooled condenser this will be the water temperature returning from the condenser loop (e.g., leaving the cooling tower). For air- or evap-cooled condensers this will be the entering outdoor air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature, respectively.
2 2
Energy input to cooling output ratio function of temperature curve

The energy input to cooling output ratio function of temperature curve is a biquadratic performance curve that parameterises the variation of the energy input to cooling output ratio (EIR) as a function of the leaving chilled water temperature and the entering condenser fluid temperature. The EIR is the inverse of the COP. The output of this curve is multiplied by the reference EIR (inverse of the reference COP) to give the full-load EIR at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the reference temperatures). The curve should have a value of 1.0 at the reference temperatures and flow rates specified in the input data file by the user. The Biquadratic curve should be valid for the range of water temperatures anticipated for the simulation. ChillerEIRFTemp = a + b(Tcw,l) + c(Tcw,l)2 ,+ d(Tcond,e) + e(Tcond,e)2 + f(Tcw,l )(Tcond,e) where: ChillerEIRFTemp = energy input to cooling output factor, equal to 1 at reference conditions Tcw,l = leaving chilled water temperature, C Tcond,e = entering condenser fluid temperature, C. For a water-cooled condenser this will be the water temperature returning from the condenser loop (e.g., leaving the cooling tower). For air- or evap-cooled condensers this will be the entering outdoor air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature, respectively.
Energy input to cooling output ratio function of part-load ratio curve

The energy input to cooling output ratio function of part-load ratio curve is a quadratic performance curve that parameterizes the variation of the energy input ratio (EIR) as a function of the part-load ratio. The EIR is the inverse of the COP, and the part-load ratio is the actual cooling load divided by the chillers available cooling capacity. The output of this curve is multiplied by the reference EIR (inverse of the reference COP) and the Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature Curve to give the EIR at the specific temperatures and part-load ratio at which the chiller is operating. This curve should have a value of 1.0 when the part-load ratio equals 1.0. The quadratic curve should be valid for the range of part-load ratios anticipated for the simulation. ChillerEIRFPLR = a + b PLR + c PLR 2 where: ChillerEIRFPLR = energy input to cooling output factor, equal to 1 at reference conditions PLR = part-load ratio = (cooling load) / (chillers available cooling capacity) All three of the performance curves are accessed through EnergyPlus built-in performance curve equation manager (curve:quadratic and curve:biquadratic). It is not imperative that the user utilize all coefficients in the performance curve equations if their performance equation has fewer terms (e.g., if the users ChillerEIRFPLR performance curve is linear instead of quadratic, simply enter the values for a and b, and set coefficient c equal to zero).
- 462 -
Note: Chiller:Electric:EIR objects and their associated performance curve objects are developed using performance information for a specific chiller and should normally be used together for an EnergyPlus simulation. Changing the object input values, or swapping performance curves between chillers, should be done with caution. For any simulation time step, the chillers available cooling capacity is calculated as follows: Qavail = Qref ChillerCapFTemp where: Qref = chiller capacity at reference conditions (reference temperatures and flow rates defined by the user), W Q avail = available chiller capacity adjusted for current fluid temperatures, W The model then calculates the evaporator heat transfer rate required to bring the entering chilled water temperature down to the leaving chilled water setpoint temperature (established using a Setpoint manager and referenced in the Plant loop). If this calculated heat transfer rate is greater than the heat transfer rate being requested by the plant equipment operation scheme, then the evaporator heat transfer rate is reset to the requested cooling rate. The evaporator heat transfer rate is then compared to the available capacity. If the available chiller capacity is sufficient to meet the evaporator heat transfer rate, the leaving chilled water temperature is set equal to the chilled water setpoint temperature. If the requested evaporator heat transfer rate is larger than the available capacity the chilled water leaving the evaporator is allowed to float upward. For this case, the exiting chilled water temperature is calculated based on the water temperature entering the evaporator, the available cooling capacity, and the evaporator mass flow rate as follows: Q
pevap where Tcw,l = water temperature leaving the evaporator, C Tcw,e = water temperature entering the evaporator, C mevap = evaporator mass flow rate, kg/s Cp,evap = specific heat of water entering evaporator at Tcw,e, J/kg-C The part-load ratio is then calculated as the ratio of the evaporator heat transfer rate to the available chiller capacity. The part-load ratio is not allowed to be greater than the maximum part-load ratio specified by the user or less than zero as follows:
- 463 -
Q where PLR = part-load ratio Q = load to be met by the chiller, W evap PLRmax = maximum part-load ratio (specified by the user in the input data file) The model assumes that the cooling load is met through chiller unloading down to the minimum unloading ratio. False loading (e.g. hot-gas bypass) is assumed to occur between the minimum unloading ratio and the minimum part load ratio yielding constant electrical power consumption under these conditions. Below the minimum part load ratio, the chiller cycles on and off to meet very small loads and the power consumption during the on cycle is the same as when the chiller is operating at the minimum part load ratio. When the chiller part load ratio is less than the minimum part load ratio, the on-off cycling ratio of the chiller is calculated as follows and is available as an output variable.
To properly account for chiller electric power consumption when PLR is less than the minimum unloading ratio, the PLR is reset to the greater of the PLR calculated above and the PLR at the minimum unloading ratio. The result is available as the output variable Chiller Part Load Ratio. PLR (, MinUnloadRatio This revised PLR accounts for the false loading (e.g., hot gas bypass) that is assumed to occur whenever the PLR (based on cooling load divided by available capacity) is less than the minimum unloading ratio specified. The amount of false loading on the chiller is calculated using this revised PLR and is reported as an output variable as follows:
The electrical power consumption for the chiller compressor(s) for any simulation time step is then calculated using the following equation:
where Pchiller = chiller compressor power, W COPref = reference coefficient of performance, W/W Heat rejected by the chiller condenser includes the heat transferred in the evaporator plus a portion or all of the compressor electrical energy consumption. For electric chillers with hermetic compressors, all compressor energy consumption is rejected by the condenser (compressor motor efficiency = effmotor = 1.0). For chillers with semihermetic or open compressors, only a portion of the compressor energy use is rejected by the condenser. The heat transfer rate for the chiller condenser is calculated as follows:
- 464 -
where Q = condenser heat transfer rate, W cond eff = compressor motor efficiency = fraction of compressor electrical energy motor consumption rejected as condenser heat For water-cooled chillers, the water temperature leaving the condenser is then calculated as shown below.
, p cond where: Tcond,l = water temperature leaving the condenser, C Tcond,e = water temperat ure entering the condenser, C mcond = mass flow rate through the condenser, kg/s Cp cond = specific heat of water entering the condenser at Tcond,e, J/kg-C , For air- and evaporatively-cooled condensers, the exiting air temperature is not calculated and is set equal to the entering air or wet-bulb temperature, respectively. The model then calculates the condenser fan energy for air- and evaporatively-cooled condensers. The amount of condenser fan energy is assumed to be proportional to the chiller cycling ratio and is calculated as follows: cond ref condfanratio where Pcond = chiller condenser fan electric power, W Pcondfanratio = condenser fan power ratio, W/W The final calculations determine the total heat transfer energy for the condenser and evaporator, as well as the total electric energy consumed by the chiller compressor motor(s) and condenser fan(s). The results are available as output variables.
cond cond evap evap chiller chiller
where Qcond = chiller condenser heat transfer, J Qevap = chiller evaporator heat transfer, J Echiller = chiller (compressor) electric consumption, J Econd = chiller condenser fan electric consumption, J TimeStepSys = HVAC system simulation time step, hr 3600 = conversion factor, sec/h
- 465 -
Boilers
Boiler:HotWater
Used in: Hot water loop, supply side
Boilers provide hot water to hot water heating coils, hot water radiators, heated floors, baseboards etc. The fuel consumed by the boiler is based on a nominal thermal efficiency value. A normalised efficiency performance curve can additionally be used to more accurately represent the performance of non-electric boilers, but is not a required input. Boiler components are used in both Compact and Detailed HVAC: When using the Compact HVAC model option, a boiler component can be selected at building level on the HVAC tab when the main HVAC system type is VAV or CAV or if one or more zone in the model has a fan coil unit. When using the Detailed HVAC model option, boilers can be added only when you are currently located in a hot water supply loop. Boilers can be placed using the Add Boiler command.
To edit an existing boiler go to the Hot water supply loop (HVAC System > Hot water loop > Supply loop) level where the boiler is placed, click on the boiler icon to highlight it then either right click and select the Edit selected component menu option or, when using Learning mode, click on the Edit icon in at the top of the info panel.
GENERAL Name
The auto-generated name of the boiler can be edited.
Boiler template
Use this browse option to select a boiler from the EnergyPlus boilers database.
Fuel type
Select the type of fuel used by the boiler. The fuel type can be one of: 1-Electricity, 2-Natural gas, 3-Propane gas, 4-Fuel oil #1, 5-Fuel oil #2, 6-Coal, 7-Diesel, 8-Gasoline, 9-Steam, or 10-District heating.
Nominal capacity
This numeric field contains the nominal operating capacity of the boiler (in W or Btu/h). The boiler nominal capacity may be autosized.
- 466 -
Boilers
Boiler flow mode

Select from 2 options: 1-Constant flow, for constant water flow rate, or, 2-Variable flow if the water flow rate can be varied (default)
Parasitic electric load

This optional numeric field contains the parasitic electric power (in W or Btu/h) consumed by a forced draft fan or other electrical device associated with the boiler. This parasitic electric load is consumed whenever the boiler is operating, and the model assumes that this parasitic power does not contribute to heating the water. The minimum value for this field is 0.0.
Sizing factor
This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. For this component the inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Nominal capacity and Design water flow rate. Sizing factor allows the user to size a component to meet part of the design load while continuing to use the autosizing feature.
EFFICIENCY Nominal thermal efficiency

This required numeric field contains the heating efficiency (as a fraction between 0 and 1) of the boilers burner. This is the efficiency relative to the higher heating value (HHV) of fuel at a part load ratio of 1.0 and the temperature entered for the Design boiler water outlet temp. Manufacturers typically specify the efficiency of a boiler using the higher heating value of the fuel. For the rare occurrences when a manufacturers (or particular data set) thermal efficiency is based on the lower heating value (LHV) of the fuel, multiply the thermal efficiency by the lower-to-higher heating value ratio. For example, assume a fuels lower and higher heating values are approximately 45,450 and 50,000 kJ/kg, respectively. For a manufacturers thermal efficiency rating of 0.90 (based on the LHV), the nominal thermal efficiency entered here is 0.82 (i.e. 0.9 multiplied by 45,450/50,000).
Normalized boiler efficiency performance curve

This field contains the curve which describes the normalized heating efficiency (as a fraction of nominal thermal efficiency) of the boilers burner. If the <None> linear curve is selected, the nominal thermal efficiency is assumed to be constant (i.e., Fuel Used is equal to the Theoretical Fuel Use in the equation above). When a boiler efficiency curve is used, the curve may be any valid curve with 1 (PLR) or 2 (PLR and boiler outlet water temperature) independent variables. A tri-quadratic curve object is not allowed since it uses 3 independent variables. The linear, quadratic, and cubic curve types may be used when the boiler efficiency is only a function of boiler part-load ratio (PLR). When this type of curve is used, the boiler should operate at (or very near) the design boiler water outlet temperature. Other curve types may be used when the boiler efficiency is a function of both PLR and boiler water temperature. Examples of valid single and dual independent variable equations are shown below. For all curve types PLR is always the x independent variable. When using 2 independent variables, the boiler outlet water temperature (Toutlet) is always the y independent variable. Linear: Eff = A0 + A1*PLR Quadratic: Eff = A0 + A1*PLR + A2*PLR2 Cubic: Eff = A0 + A1*PLR + A2*PLR2 + A3*PLR3 BiQuadratic: Eff = A0 + A1*PLR + A2*PLR2 + A3* Tw + A4* Tw 2 + A5*PLR* Tw QuadraticLinear: Eff = A0 + A1*PLR + A2*PLR2 + A3* Tw + A4*PLR* Tw + A5*PLR2* Tw BiCubic: Eff=A0+A1*PLR+A2*PLR2+A3*Tw+A4*Tw2+A5*PLR2+A6*Tw3+A7*PLR2* Tw+A8*PLR* Tw2 where: Eff = normalized boiler efficiency PLR = boiler part-load ratio Tw = boiler (outlet) water temperature [C]
- 467 -
When using the normalized efficiency performance curve, if all coefficients are not required simply set the unused coefficients to 0. For example, an electric boiler could be modelled by setting the nominal thermal efficiency to a value in the range of 0.96 to 1.0. Coefficient 0 in the normalized efficiency performance curve would equal 1 and all other coefficients would be set to 0. Coefficients for other types of non-electric boilers would set a combination of the available coefficients to non-zero values.
WATER OUTLET Design water outlet temperature

This numeric field contains the desired boiler water outlet temperature (in C or F).

This numeric field contains the maximum design water volumetric flow rate (in m3/sec or gal/min). This should be the largest flow rate than can be heated to the design outlet temperature. This field is autosizable.
Water outlet upper temperature limit

This numeric field contains the outlet temperature upper limit (in C or F).
PART LOAD RATIOS Minimum part load ratio

This numeric field contains the minimum part load ratio. If the ratio of demand to boiler nominal capacity is less than the minimum part load ratio, then the Min PLR will determine the operating PLR. The expected range is between 0 and 1.
Maximum part load ratio

This numeric field contains the maximum part load ratio. If the ratio of demand to boiler nominal capacity is greater than the maximum part load ratio, then the Max PLR will determine the operating PLR. This value may exceed 1, but the normal range is between 0 and 1.1.
Optimum part load ratio

This numeric field contains the optimum part load ratio. This is the part load ratio at which the boiler performs at its maximum efficiency.
BOILER OUTPUTS
HVAC,Average,Boiler Heating Output Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Boiler Heating Output Energy [J] Zone,Meter,Boilers:EnergyTransfer [J] HVAC,Average,Boiler Water Inlet Temp [C] HVAC,Average,Boiler Water Outlet Temp [C] HVAC,Average,Boiler Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s] HVAC,Average,Boiler Parasitic Electric Power [W] HVAC,Sum,Boiler Parasitic Electric Consumption [J] HVAC,Average,Boiler Part-Load Ratio One of the following blocks will be applicable based on fuel type: HVAC,Average,Boiler Electric Consumption Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Boiler Electric Consumption [J] Zone,Meter, Electricity:Plant [J] Zone,Meter,Heating:Electricity [J]
- 468 -
Boilers
HVAC,Average,Boiler Gas Consumption Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Boiler Gas Consumption [J] Zone,Meter,Gas:Plant [J] Zone,Meter,Heating:Gas [J] HVAC,Average,Boiler Propane Consumption Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Boiler Propane Consumption [J] Zone,Meter, Propane:Plant [J] Zone,Meter,Heating:Propane [J] HVAC,Average,Boiler FuelOil#1 Consumption Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Boiler FuelOil#1 Consumption [J] Zone,Meter, FuelOil#1:Plant [J] Zone,Meter,Heating:FuelOil#1 [J] HVAC,Average,Boiler FuelOil#2 Consumption Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Boiler FuelOil#2 Consumption [J] Zone,Meter, FuelOil#2:Plant [J] Zone,Meter,Heating:FuelOil#2 [J] HVAC,Average,Boiler Coal Consumption Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Boiler Coal Consumption [J] Zone,Meter,Coal:Plant [J] Zone,Meter,Heating:Coal [J] HVAC,Average,Boiler Diesel Consumption Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Boiler Diesel Consumption [J] Zone,Meter, Diesel:Plant [J] Zone,Meter,Heating:Diesel [J] HVAC,Average,Boiler Gasoline Consumption Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Boiler Gasoline Consumption [J] Zone,Meter, Gasoline:Plant [J] Zone,Meter,Heating:Gasoline [J]
Boiler Heating Output Rate [W] Boiler Heating Output Energy [J]
These outputs are the heating output (load) of the boiler. Energy is metered on Boilers:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.
Boiler Water Inlet Temp [C] Boiler Water Outlet Temp [C] Boiler Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
These outputs are the hot water inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate for the boiler.
Boiler Part-Load Ratio

This output is the operating part-load ratio of the boiler. The part-load ratio is calculated as the boiler load divided by the boiler nominal capacity. The part-load ratio is limited by the minimum and maximum part-load ratio inputs specified by the user.
- 469 -
Boiler <FuelType> Consumption Rate [W] Boiler <FuelType> Consumption [J]

These outputs are the energy input to the boiler. Valid fuel types are: Electric, Gas (natural gas), Propane, FuelOil#1, FuelOil#2, Coal, Diesel, and Gasoline. Consumption is metered on Heating:<FuelType>, <FuelType>:Plant, and <FuelType>:Facility.
Boiler Parasitic Electric Power [W] Boiler Parasitic Electric Consumption [J]
These outputs are the parasitic electric power and parasitic electric consumption associated with the boiler. Used when simulating a forced draft fan or other electric component. Consumption is metered on Heating:Electricity and Electricity:Plant.
Cooling Tower
Cooling towers are components that may be added to condenser loops. The cooling tower is modelled as a counter-flow heat exchanger with a single-speed fan (induced draft configuration) based on Merkels theory. The user must define tower performance via one of two methods: design heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA) and design water flow rate, or nominal tower capacity at a specific rating point. Regardless of which method is chosen, the design airflow rate and corresponding fan power must be specified. The model will also account for tower performance in the free convection regime, when the tower fan is off but the water pump remains on and heat transfer still occurs (albeit at a low level). If the user wants the model to account for free convection, they must specify the corresponding airflow rate and heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA), or the nominal tower capacity during this mode of operation. The cooling tower seeks to maintain the temperature of the water exiting the cooling tower at (or below) a set point. The set point schedule value is defined by the condenser loop outlet setpoint manager:
- 470 -
Cooling Tower
The model first checks to determine the impact of free convection, if specified by the user, on the tower exiting water temperature. If the exiting water temperature based on free convection is at or below the set point, then the tower fan is not turned on. If the exiting water temperature based on free convection is below the set point, the tower will operate in FluidBypass mode whereby a portion of the water goes through the tower media and gets cooled while the remaining water flow gets bypassed, two water flows then mix together trying to meet the water setpoint temperature. If the exiting water temperature remains above the set point after free convection is modelled, then the tower fan is turned on to reduce the exiting water temperature to the set point. If the capacity control is FanCycling, the model assumes that part-load operation is represented by a simple linear interpolation between two steady-state regimes (i.e. the tower fan is on for the entire simulation time-step and the tower fan is off for the entire simulation time-step). Cyclic losses are not taken into account. If the capacity control is FluidBypass, the model determines the fraction of water flow to be bypassed while the remaining water goes through the tower cooling media and gets cooled, then the two water flows mix to meet the setpoint temperature. In this case, the fan runs at full speed for the entire time-step. Cooling towers here are wet and consume water through evaporation, drift, and blow-down. The model can be used to predict water consumed by the towers. For the operation of multi-cell towers, the first step is to determine the number of cells to operate based on the cell control method, between the minimum number of cells subject to the maximum water flow rate fraction per cell and maximum number of cells subject to the minimum water flow rate fraction per cell. If the calculated cells do not meet the loads, additional cells will be operating to help meet the loads. Inside each cell, the existing capacity controls still apply. For multi-cell towers, the following inputs are assumed to be for the entire tower including all cells: Design water flow rate; Design air flow rate; Fan power at design air flow rate; Air flow rate in free convection regime; Nominal capacity; Free convection capacity Basin heater (we assume that there is a common basin)
To edit the data associated with a cooling tower, you first need to select the component by moving the mouse cursor over it and then clicking the mouse button to select it. You can then access the edit dialog by right-clicking the mouse and selecting the Edit selected component option or alternatively, select the Edit selected component tool from the toolbar.
- 471 -
GENERAL Name
This is the name that you assign to the cooling tower which should be unique. If the supplied name is not unique, the software will automatically append a backslash and integer to ensure that there are no duplicate names.
Design air flow rate

This numeric field contains the design air flow rate induced by the tower fan (in m3/s or ft3/min). A value of greater than zero must be defined regardless of the tower performance input method. Alternately, this field can be autosized. If auto-sized, the design air flow rate is calculated as follows:
In which a fan pressure rise of 190 Pa and total fan efficiency of 0.5 are assumed.
Fan power at design air flow rate

This is the fan power (W) at the design air flow rate specified under Design air flow rate. A value of greater than zero must be specified regardless of the tower performance input method, or alternatively, this field can be autosized. If auto-sized, the fan power is calculated as follows: If Performance input method is specified as 1-Nominal capacity, then the fan power is obtained from:
If Performance input method is specified as 2-UA and Design water flow rate, then the fan power is obtained from:
Air flow rate in free convection regime

This is the air flow rate (in m 3/s or ft3/min) when the tower is in the free convection regime (water flow exists but tower fan is turned off). This value must be less than the value specified for the field Design Air Flow Rate. This setting may be auto-sized, in which case it is set to 10% of the Design Air Flow Rate. If the user does not wish to model free convection and is using the Performance Input Method 2UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate, then this setting should be set to 0.0. If the user specifies the UFactor Times Area Value at Free Convection Air Flow Rate or Free Convection Capacity as a value greater than zero, then the free convection air flow rate must be specified greater than 0.0.
Evaporation loss mode

This field is used to choose which method is used to model the amount of water evaporated by the cooling tower. There are two options: 1-Saturated exit or 2-Loss factor.
The default is 1-Saturated exit. The user-defined loss factor is entered under Evaporation Loss Factor. By assuming that the air leaving the tower is saturated, the evaporation can be directly calculated using moist air engineering calculations with data available within the cooling tower model (and does not require additional user input).
- 472 -
Cooling Tower
Evaporation loss factor

This field is used to specify the rate of water evaporated from the cooling tower and lost to the outside air (in %/K or %/F). This field is only used if the Evaporation Loss Mode is set to 2-LossFactor. The evaporation loss is then calculated as a fraction of the circulating condenser water flow and varies with the temperature change in the condenser water. The evaporation rate will equal this value times each degree Kelvin of temperature drop in the condenser water. Typical values are from 0.15 to 0.27 (%/K). The default is 0.2.
Drift loss percent

This field is used to specify the rate of water lost to the exiting air as entrained droplets (%). The drift loss is a percent of the condenser water flow. Typical values for towers with efficient drift eliminators are between 0.002 and 0.2% of the condenser water flow rate. The default value is 0.008%.
Sizing factor
This setting allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing factor is used when the component design inputs are auto-sized: the auto-sizing calculations are performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. Sizing factor allows the user to size a component to meet part of the design load while continuing to use the auto-sizing feature. For this component the inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Design water flow rate. Design air flow rate. Fan power at design air flow rate. UA at design air flow rate. Air flow rate in free convection regime. UA at free convection air flow rate. Note that the U-Factor Times Area Value at Design Air Flow Rate is not multiplied by the Sizing Factor. Instead the design tower load is multiplied by the sizing factor and the design UA then calculated as usual. The U-Factor Times Area Value at Free Convection Air Flow Rate is set to 10% of the new design Tower UA.
PERFORMANCE INPUT METHOD Performance input method

This setting allows the method by which the user will specify tower performance to be selected. There are two options: 1-Nominal Capacity or 2-UA and design water flow rate.

This is the design water flow rate through the tower (in m3/s or gal/min). This value is the flow rate of the condenser loop water being cooled by the tower (not the flow rate of water being sprayed on the outside of the heat exchange coil). If the Performance input method is specified as 2-UA and design water flow rate, then a water flow rate greater than zero must be defined or the item can be auto-sized. If auto-sized, the design water flow rate is derived from the design load to be rejected by the condenser loop and the design loop temperature difference. If Performance input method is specified as 1-Nominal capacity, then the model automatically assumes a water flow rate of 5.382E-8 m3/s per W of tower capacity.
UA at design air flow rate

This is the heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA) (in W/K or Btu/h-F) corresponding to the design air and water flow rates specified above. If the Performance Input Method is specified as 2-UA and design water flow rate, then a UA value greater than zero but less than or equal to 300,000 must be defined, or the setting can be auto-sized. If auto-sized, the design tower UA value is derived from the design load to be rejected by the
- 473 -
condenser loop and the design loop delta T, assuming a tower water inlet temperature of 35C and tower inlet air at 35C dry-bulb/25.6C wet-bulb. If Performance input method is specified as 1-Nominal capacity, then this field must be left blank since the model automatically calculates the tower UA based on the tower capacity specified under the Nominal capacity setting.
UA at free convection air flow rate

This is the heat transfer coefficient-area product (W/K or Btu/h-F) when the tower is in the free convection regime (water flow exists but tower fan is turned off). This value must be less than the value specified for the field U-Factor Times Area Value at Design Air Flow Rate. This field may be auto-sized, in which case it is set to 10% of the U-Factor Times Area Value at Design Air Flow Rate. If the user does not wish to model free convection and is using the Performance input method 2-UA and design water flow rate, then this setting should be set to 0.0. If Performance input method is specified as 1-Nominal capacity, then the model automatically calculates the tower UA based on the tower capacity specified under the setting Free convection capacity.
Nominal capacity
This is the nominal heat rejection capacity of the cooling tower (in W or Btu/h), with entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air at 25.6C (78F) wet-bulb and 35C (95F) dry-bulb temperatures. The design water flow rate is assumed to be 5.382E-8 m3/s per watt of nominal capacity (3 gpm/ton). 125% of this nominal tower capacity gives the actual tower heat rejection at these operating conditions (based on historical assumption that the tower must dissipate 0.25W of compressor heat for every watt of heat removed by the evaporator).
Free convection capacity

This is the nominal heat rejection capacity of the cooling tower (in W or Btu/h) when the tower is in the free convection regime (water flow exists but tower fan is turned off), with entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air at 25.6C (78F) wet-bulb and 35C (95F) dry-bulb temperatures. The design water flow rate is assumed to be 5.382E-8 m3/s per watt of nominal tower capacity (input field above). 125% of this free convection tower capacity gives the actual tower heat rejection at these operating conditions (based on historical assumption that the tower must dissipate 0.25W of compressor heat for every watt of heat removed by the evaporator). The value specified under this setting must be less than the value specified for the field Nominal capacity. If you do not wish to model free convection, then this field should be set to 0.0. If you specify a value greater than zero, then the Air flow rate in free convection regime setting must contain a value greater than zero.
BASIN HEATER SETTINGS Basin heater capacity

This is the capacity of the towers electric basin heater (in W/K or Btu/h-F). This field is used in conjunction with the Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature. The basin heater electric power is equal to this setting multiplied by the difference between the basin heater set point temperature and the outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The basin heater only operates when the tower fan is off and water is not flowing through the tower, regardless of the basin heater schedule described below. The basin heater capacity must be greater than or equal to zero, with a default value of zero if this field is left blank.

This is the set point temperature (C or F) for the towers electric basin heater. The basin heater is active when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below this setpoint temperature, as long as the tower fan is off and water is not flowing through the tower. This set point temperature must be greater than or equal to 2C, and the default value is 2C if this field is left blank.

This is the basin heater operating schedule. The basin heater operating schedule is assumed to be an on/off schedule and the heater is available to operate any time the schedule value is greater than 0. The basin heater operates when scheduled on and the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is below the Basin Heater Setpoint
- 474 -
Cooling Tower
Temperature. Regardless of this schedule, the basin heater may only operate when the cooling tower fan is off and water is not flowing through the tower.
Blow-down calculation mode

This setting specifies which method is used to determine blow-down rates. There are two options: 1-Concentration ratio or 2-Scheduled rate.
The choice will determine which of the two models below is used. The default is 1-Concentration ratio.
BLOWDOWN Blow-down concentration ratio

This is used to dynamically adjust the rate of blow-down in the cooling tower as a function of the rate of evaporation. Blow-down is water intentionally drained from the tower in order to offset the build up of solids in the water that would otherwise occur because of evaporation. The value entered here is dimensionless. It can be characterized as the ratio of solids in the blow-down water to solids in the make-up water. Typical values for tower operation are 3 to 5. The default value is 3.
Blow-down makeup water usage schedule

This is the schedule used to define the amount of water (in m 3/s only) flushed from the basin on a periodic basis to purge the tower of mineral scale build-up and other contaminants. This schedule is only used if the Blow-down Calculation Mode is set to 2-Scheduled rate. The amount of water used due to blow-down depends on the makeup water quality and is specific to each geographical location. Typical values range from 0.0002 to 0.0013 m3/s (17.3 to 112.3 m 3/day). This water usage is in addition to the amount of water lost to the atmosphere due to evaporation and/or drift. Since blow-down occurs when the basin water contaminant concentration is high, blowdown only occurs when the cooling tower is active and water is flowing through the tower (regardless of the water usage defined by this schedule).
CAPACITY CONTROL Capacity control

This is the cooling capacity control for the cooling tower. Two choices are available: 1-Fan cycling and 2-Fluid bypass.
During part-load conditions, there are two ways to maintain the exiting water temperature at the setpoint: either cycling the tower fan, or bypassing a portion of the tower water with a three-way valve. For 2-Fluid bypass, the tower fan still runs at full speed for the entire time-step, but only a portion of the water flow goes through the cooling tower media to get cooled while the remaining portion of the water flow gets bypassed, consequently, two water flows then mix at the common water sump to meet the setpoint temperature.
MULTI-CELL TOWER SETTINGS Multi-cell tower

This setting is used to enable a multi-cell tower to be defined.
Number of cells
This is the number of cells in the multi-cell cooling tower.
- 475 -
Cell control
This specifies the method used to control the number of cells used to meet the load, the two choices are: 1-Minimal cell - the program will use minimal number of cells needed, all other cells will be shut down with no water flow. It will attempt to use as few cells as possible to cool the fluid. In no case, however, will the flow per cell be allowed to exceed its maximum value defined by the Cell maximum water flow rate fraction. 2-Maximal cell - as many cells as possible will be turned on. In no case, however, will the flow per cell be allowed to drop below its minimum value specified by the Cell minimum water flow rate fraction.
Cell minimum water flow rate fraction

This is the allowable smallest fraction of the design water flow rate. Flows less than this value will commonly result in fluid distribution problems; the pressure at each nozzle will be too weak for the fluid to be sprayed out in the correct pattern, not all the fill would be wet. If this field is left blank, the default value is 0.33.
Cell maximum water flow rate fraction

This numeric field specifies the allowable largest fraction of the design water flow rate. If this field is left blank, the default value is 2.5.
Performance Curves
Curve:Linear Curve:Quadratic Curve:Cubic Curve:Quartic Curve:Exponent Curve:Bicubic Curve:Biquadratic Used in: Cooling coils Heating coils Boilers Chillers Water heaters
This group of objects primarily consists of polynomial curves that are used to characterize the performance of HVAC equipment. Several other non-polynomial curves are also included to characterize the performance of pumps and fans. All of the curves are input, stored, and evaluated entirely within the EnergyPlus Curve Manager module. The curves are usually derived from fits or regressions to data covering a limited range. Results for independent variable values outside this range are likely to be invalid, so curve input always contains a range of validity (maximum and minimum permitted values) for each independent variable and can optionally have limits on the curve output. No error or warning message is issued if an independent variable is outside the range. Instead, the Curve Manager uses the minimum value if an independent variable is less than the minimum, and the maximum if a variable exceeds the maximum. Similarly, no error or warning message is issued if the curve output is outside the range of the optional minimum and maximum curve output limits. Instead, the Curve Manager uses the minimum and maximum curve limits to cap the output of the performance curve. The curve data follow a similar pattern and all have the same first 4 data items:
Name
A user assigned unique name for a curve. When a curve is used, it is referenced by this name.
Note
Specific information about the curve.
- 476 -
Performance Curves
Source
Where the curve was derived from (usually either EnergyPlus, meaning it comes from the EnergyPlus curves database, which is largely derived from the DOE-2 database, or DesignBuilder meaning that the curve is provided by DesignBuilder Software)
Category
The category can be one of: Linear Quadratic Cubic Exponent Bi-Quadratic Bi-Cubic The rest of the data depends on the category as described below.
LINEAR
Input for the linear curve consists of a curve name, the two coefficients, and the maximum and minimum valid independent variable values. Optional inputs for curve minimum and maximum may be used to limit the output of the performance curve (e.g. limit extrapolation). The equation represented by the linear curve is: y = C1 + C2 * x
Name
Coefficient 1 constant
The constant coefficient (C1) in the equation.
Coefficient 2 x
The linear coefficient (C2) in the equation.
Minimum value of x
The minimum allowable value of x. Values of x less than the minimum will be replaced by the minimum.
Maximum value of x
The maximum allowable value of x. Values of x greater than the maximum will be replaced by the maximum.
Minimum curve output

The minimum allowable value of the evaluated curve. Values less than the minimum will be replaced by the minimum.
Maximum curve output

The maximum allowable value of the evaluated curve. Values greater than the maximum will be replaced by the maximum.
Input unit type for x

This field is used to indicate the kind of units that may be associated with the x values. It is used by editor to display the appropriate SI and IP units for the Minimum Value of X and Maximum Value of x. The unit conversion is not applied to the coefficients. The available options are shown below. If none of these options are appropriate, select Dimensionless which will have no unit conversion.
- 477 -
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Dimensionless Temperature VolumetricFlow MassFlow Distance Power
Output unit type

This field is used to indicate the kind of units that may be associated with the output values. It is used by IDF Editor to display the appropriate SI and IP units for the Minimum Curve Output and Maximum Curve Output. The unit conversion is not applied to the coefficients. The available options are shown below. If none of these options are appropriate, select Dimensionless which will have no unit conversion. 1. 2. 3. Dimensionless Capacity Power
QUADRATIC
Input for a quadratic curve consists of the curve name, the three coefficients, and the maximum and minimum valid independent variable values. Optional inputs for curve minimum and maximum may be used to limit the output of the performance curve (e.g. limit extrapolation). The equation represented by the quadratic curve is: y = C1 + C2 * x + C3 * x2
Coefficient 2 x
Coefficient 3 x2
The quadratic coefficient (C3) in the equation.
Minimum value of x
Maximum value of x



This field is used to indicate the kind of units that may be associated with the x values. It is used by editor to display the appropriate SI and IP units for the Minimum Value of x and Maximum Value of x. The unit conversion is not applied to the coefficients. The available options are shown below. If none of these options are appropriate,
- 478 -
Performance Curves
select Dimensionless which will have no unit conversion. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Dimensionless Temperature VolumetricFlow MassFlow Distance Power
Output unit type

CUBIC
Input for a cubic curve consists of the curve name, the 4 coefficients, and the maximum and minimum valid independent variable values. Optional inputs for curve minimum and maximum may be used to limit the output of the performance curve (e.g. limit extrapolation). The equation represented by the cubic curve is: y = C1 + C2 * x + C3 * x2 + C4 * x3
Name
Coefficient 2 x
Coefficient 3 x2
Coefficient 4 x3
Minimum value of x
Maximum value of x

- 479 -


This field is used to indicate the kind of units that may be associated with the x values. It is used by editor to display the appropriate SI and IP units for the Minimum Value of x and Maximum Value of x. The unit conversion is not applied to the coefficients. The available options are shown below. If none of these options are appropriate, select Dimensionless which will have no unit conversion. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Dimensionless Temperature VolumetricFlow MassFlow Distance Power
Output unit type

EXPONENT
Input for a exponent curve consists of the curve name, the 3 coefficients, and the maximum and minimum valid independent variable values. Optional inputs for curve minimum and maximum may be used to limit the output of the performance curve (e.g. limit extrapolation). The equation represented by the exponent curve is: y = C1 + C2 * xC3
Name
The exponent coefficient (C3) in the equation.
Minimum value of x
Maximum value of x
- 480 -
Performance Curves



Output unit type

BIQUADRATIC
This curve is a function of two independent variables. Input consists of the curve name, the six coefficients, and min and max values for each of the independent variables. Optional inputs for curve minimum and maximum may be used to limit the output of the performance curve (e.g. limit extrapolation). The equation represented by the biquadratic curve is: z = C1 + C2 * x + C3 * x2 + C4* y + C5 * y2 + C6*xy
Name
Coefficient 2 x
Coefficient 3 x2
- 481 -
Coefficient 4 y
The coefficient C4 in the equation.
Coefficient 5 y2
Coefficient 6 xy
Minimum value of x
Maximum value of x
Minimum value of y
The minimum allowable value of y. Values of y less than the minimum will be replaced by the minimum.
Maximum value of y
The maximum allowable value of y. Values of y greater than the maximum will be replaced by the maximum.



Input unit type for y

This field is used to indicate the kind of units that may be associated with the y values. It is used by editor to display the appropriate SI and IP units for the Minimum Value of y and Maximum Value of y. The unit conversion is not applied to the coefficients. The available options are shown below. If none of these options are appropriate, select Dimensionless which will have no unit conversion. 1. 2. 3. Dimensionless Temperature VolumetricFlow
- 482 -
Performance Curves
4. 5. 6.
MassFlow Distance Power
Output unit type

BICUBIC
This curve type is a function of two independent variables. Input consists of the curve name, the ten coefficients, and the minimum and maximum values for each of the independent variables. Optional inputs for curve minimum and maximum may be used to limit the output of the performance curve (e.g. limit extrapolation). The equation represented by the bicubic curve is: z = C1 + C2 * x + C3* x2 + C4* y + C5 * y2 + C6*xy + C7* x3 + C8* y3 + C9 * x2y + C10 * xy2
Name
Coefficient 2 x
Coefficient 3 x2
Coefficient 4 y
Coefficient 5 y2
Coefficient 6 xy
Coefficient 7 x3
Coefficient 8 y3
Coefficient 9 x2y
- 483 -
Coefficient 10 xy2
Minimum value of x
Maximum value of x
Minimum value of y
The minimum allowable value of y. Values of y less than the minimum will be replaced by the minimum.
Maximum value of y
The maximum allowable value of y. Values of y greater than the maximum will be replaced by the maximum.



This field is used to indicate the kind of units that may be associated with the x values. It is used by editor to display the appropriate SI and IP units for the Minimum Value of X and Maximum Value of x. The unit conversion is not applied to the coefficients. The available options are shown below. If none of these options are appropriate, select Dimensionless which will have no unit conversion. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Dimensionless Temperature VolumetricFlow MassFlow Distance Power
Input unit type for y

This field is used to indicate the kind of units that may be associated with the y values. It is used by editor to display the appropriate SI and IP units for the Minimum Value of y and Maximum Value of y. The unit conversion is not applied to the coefficients. The available options are shown below. If none of these options are appropriate, select Dimensionless which will have no unit conversion. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Dimensionless Temperature VolumetricFlow MassFlow Distance Power
Output unit type

This field is used to indicate the kind of units that may be associated with the output values. It is used by IDF Editor to display the appropriate SI and IP units for the Minimum Curve Output and Maximum Curve Output. The
- 484 -
Editing Zone Group Data
unit conversion is not applied to the coefficients. The available options are shown below. If none of these options are appropriate, select Dimensionless which will have no unit conversion. 1. 2. 3. Dimensionless Capacity Power
Editing Zone Group Data

Zone group data is divided using three tabs: General Heating and cooling priorities Zone defaults
GENERAL TAB Title

This is the name that you assign to the zone group. The name must be unique and if a duplicate name is entered, the software will automatically append an integer in order to ensure a unique name.
Zones in Group
This is a tree control with checkboxes that you can use to define which building zones are to be added to the zone group. Only zones that have not already been assigned to other zone groups or plenums are made available for selection.
- 485 -
Tip: You can use the checkboxes at building and block levels as a fast way to select/deselect all of the available zones in the building or block.
HEATING AND COOLING PRIORITIES TAB

Heating and cooling priorities are used to specify the order in which items of equipment are to be switched on in order to satisfy a heating or cooling load.
Select a value of 1 for highest priority. In the example above the heated floor has priority over the single duct VAV reheat system. Note: The heating and cooling priorities can only be assigned after equipment has been added to one of the constituent HVAC zones.
ZONE DEFAULTS
The zone default settings may be used to change the default zone settings that will be applied to new zones added to the zone group using the Zones in Group control on the General tab. Refer to the HVAC Zone Data section for information on the specific zone settings. Important Note: HVAC does not use the same inheritance mechanism as the building model and once the zone defaults have been applied to constituent zones, the only way to change them is to edit a specific zone directly. So making changes on the HVAC Zone Group dialog will not affect the equivalent settings in the HVAC zones associated with that Zone group. It is however possible on the HVAC Zone dialog to make changes to multiple similar zones using the Target tab.
Editing HVAC Zone Data

Zone data is divided using two tabs: General Target
The first tab which is the General tab is used to define temperature and humidity control together with zone sizing information (Cooling Sizing, Heating Sizing and Outdoor Air Sizing). The Cooling sizing and Heating sizing information provides the data needed to perform a zone design air flow calculation for a single zone. This calculation assumes a variable amount of supply air at a fixed temperature and humidity. The information needed consists of the zone inlet supply air conditions: temperature and humidity ratio for heating and cooling. The calculation is done for every design day included in the input. The maximum cooling load and air flow and the maximum heating load and air flow are then saved for the system level design calculations and for the component automatic sizing calculations. The Outdoor air sizing information is used to define the design outdoor air flow rate. This can be specified in a number of ways as described under Outdoor air method. This data is then used in the EnergyPlus system sizing calculation for sizing zone components that use outside air. You can also place limits
- 486 -
Edit HVAC Zone Data - General Tab
on the heating and design cooling air flow rates. See Heating design air flow method and Cooling design air flow method and the explanations of the various heating and cooling flow input fields. The second Target tab is used to specify which other zones in the zone group the changes will be applied to.

GENERAL Name
This is the name of the building zone with which the current HVAC zone is linked.
THERMOSTAT SCHEDULES
Detailed HVAC Activity data set to 2-Detailed HVAC If the 2-Detailed HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data model option is set then you can select schedules defining zone heating and cooling setpoints on this dialog. Otherwise, if the 1-Simple HVAC option is selected then zone setpoint temperatures and schedules are defined on the Activity and HVAC model data tabs respectively and the Thermostat schedule data is not displayed. Note: The temperatures defined in these schedules must be in C regardless of whether you are using IP or SI units in the interface.
Thermostat heating setpoint schedule

This is the zone heating temperature schedule. Values in the schedule are temperatures (in C).
Thermostat cooling setpoint schedule

This is the zone cooling temperature schedule. Values in the schedule are temperatures (in C).
HUMIDISTAT CONTROL Humidistat control

This check-box is used to specify whether or not the zone has humidity control. Detailed HVAC Activity data is 1-Simple HVAC If the 1-Simple HVAC option is selected then zone RH setpoints on the Activity tab are used and the demand schedule data on this dialog defines the times when these setpoints operate.
Humidifying demand schedule

This is a schedule that defines the times when humidification may be required. The schedule should have only values of 0 (for times when no humidification is required) or 1 (when humidification to the humidification setpoint defined on the Activity tab is required).
Dehumidifying demand schedule

This is a schedule that defines the times when dehumidification may be required. The schedule should have only values of 0 (for times when no dehumidification is required) or 1 (when dehumidification to the dehumidification setpoint defined on the Activity tab is required).
- 487 -
Detailed HVAC Activity data is 2-Detailed HVAC If the 2-Detailed HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data model option is set then you can select schedules defining zone relative humidity setpoints on this dialog.
Humidifying RH setpoint schedule

This is a schedule that defines the humidifying relative humidity setpoint, expressed as a percentage (0-100), for each timestep of the simulation.
Dehumidifying RH setpoint schedule

This is a schedule that defines the dehumidifying relative humidity setpoint, expressed as a percentage (0-100), for each timestep of the simulation.
COOLING SIZING Cooling design supply air temperature

This is the supply air temperature (in C or F) for the zone cooling design air flow rate calculation. Air is supplied to the zone at this temperature during the cooling design day simulation; the zone load is met by varying the zone air flow rate. The maximum zone flow rate is used as the zone cooling design air flow rate.
Cooling design supply air humidity ratio

This is the humidity ratio in kilograms of water per kilogram of dry air of the supply air in the zone cooling design air flow rate calculation.
Cooling minimum air flow fraction

This is the minimum zone design cooling volumetric flow rate expressed as a fraction of the zone design cooling volumetric flow rate. In all cases the maximum flow derived from Cooling minimum flow per zone floor area, Cooling minimum air flow, and Cooling minimum air flow fraction is used to set a minimum supply air flow rate for the zone for VAV systems. The default is zero. This input is currently used in sizing the fan minimum flow rate. It does not currently affect other component auto-sizing.
Zone cooling sizing factor

This is the zone level cooling sizing ratio. The zone design cooling air flow rates and loads will be multiplied by the number input in this field.
Cooling design air flow method

1-Design day means the program will calculate the zone design cooling air flow rate using the zone cooling sizing information and a design day simulation without imposing any limits other than those set by the minimum outside air requirements. 2-Flow/zone means that the program will use the Cooling design air flow rate as the zone design cooling air flow rate. 3-Design day with limit means that the maximum from Cooling minimum flow per zone floor area and Cooling minimum air flow will set a lower limit on the design maximum cooling air flow rate.
Cooling design air flow rate

This is the design zone cooling air flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min). This setting is only required if Cooling design air flow method is specified as 2-Flow/zone. This value will be multiplied by the global or zone sizing factor and by zone multipliers.
Cooling minimum flow per zone floor area

This is the minimum zone cooling volumetric flow rate per square meter (units are m3/s-m2). This setting is only required if the Cooling design air flow method is specified as 3-Design day with limit. In this case it sets a lower
- 488 -
bound on the zone design cooling air flow rate. In all cases the maximum flow derived from Cooling minimum flow per zone floor area, Cooling minimum air flow, and Cooling minimum air flow fraction is used to set a minimum supply air flow rate for the zone for VAV systems. The default is 0.000762 m 3/s-m2, corresponding to 0.15 cfm/ft2. The applicable sizing factor is not applied to this value.
Cooling minimum air flow

This is the minimum zone cooling volumetric flow rate (in m 3/s). This field is used when Cooling design air flow method is specified as 3-Design day with limit. In this case it sets a lower bound on the zone design cooling air flow rate. In all cases the maximum flow derived from Cooling minimum flow per zone floor area, Cooling minimum air flow, and Cooling minimum air flow fraction is used to set a minimum supply air flow rate for the zone for VAV systems. The default is zero. The applicable sizing factor is not applied to this value.
HEATING SIZING Heating design supply air temperature

This is the supply air temperature (in C or F) for the zone heating design air flow rate calculation. Air is supplied to the zone at this temperature during the heating design day simulation, The zone load is met by varying the zone air flow rate. The maximum zone flow rate is used as the zone heating design air flow rate.
Heating design supply air humidity ratio

This is the humidity ratio in kilograms of water per kilogram of dry air of the supply air in the zone heating design air flow rate calculation.
Heating maximum air flow fraction

This is the maximum zone design heating volumetric flow rate expressed as a fraction of the zone design heating volumetric flow rate.. In all cases the maximum flow derived from Heating maximum flow per zone floor area, Heating maximum air flow, and Heating maximum air flow fraction is used to set a maximum heating supply air flow rate for the zone for VAV systems. The default is 0.3. This input is not currently used for auto-sizing any of the components.
Zone heating sizing factor

This is the zone level heating sizing ratio. The zone design heating air flow rates and loads will be multiplied by the number input in this field.
Heating design air flow method

There are three options; 1-Design day means the program will calculate the zone design heating air flow rate using the zone heating sizing information and a design day simulation without imposing any limits other than those set by the minimum outside air requirements. 2-Flow/zone means that the program will use the Heating design air flow rate as the zone design heating air flow rate. 3-Design day with limit means that the maximum from Heating maximum flow per zone floor area and Heating maximum air flow will set a lower limit on the design maximum heating air flow rate.
Heating design air flow rate

This is the design zone heating air flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min). This setting is only required if Heating design air flow method is specified as 2-Flow/zone. This value will be multiplied by the global or zone sizing factor and by zone multipliers.
- 489 -
Heating maximum flow per zone floor area

This is the maximum zone heating volumetric flow rate per square metre (units are m 3/s-m2). This setting is only required if the Heating design air flow method is specified as 3-DesignDayWithLimit. In this case it sets an upper bound on the zone design heating air flow rate. In all cases the maximum flow derived from Heating maximum flow per zone floor area, Heating maximum air flow, and Heating maximum air flow fraction is used to set a maximum heating supply air flow rate for the zone for VAV systems. The default is 0.002032 m3/s-m2, corresponding to .40 cfm/ft2. This input is not currently used for auto-sizing any of the components.
Heating maximum air flow

This is the maximum zone heating volumetric flow rate in m 3/s. This setting is only required if the Heating design air flow method is specified as 3-Design day with limit. In this case it sets an upper bound on the zone design heating air flow rate. In all cases the maximum flow derived from Heating maximum flow per zone floor area, Heating maximum air flow, and Heating maximum air flow fraction is used to set a maximum heating supply air flow rate for the zone for VAV systems. The default is 0.14158 m3/s, corresponding to 300 cfm. This input is not currently used for auto-sizing any of the components.
OUTDOOR AIR SIZING Outdoor air method

There are five options: 1-Flow/Zone, means that the program will use the Outdoor air flow per zone as the zone design outdoor air flow rate. 2-Flow/Person, means the program will use the input from the field Outdoor air flow per person and the maximum occupancy to calculate a zone design outdoor air flow rate. 3-Flow/Area, means that the flows calculated from the fields Outdoor air flow per zone floor area used to obtain the zone design outdoor air flow rate. 4-Sum, means that the flows calculated from the fields Outdoor air flow per person, Outdoor air flow per zone floor area and Outdoor air flow per zone will be added to obtain the zone design outdoor air flow rate. 5-Maximum means that the maximum flow derived from Outdoor air flow per person, Outdoor air flow per zone floor area and Outdoor air flow per zone will be used for the zone design outdoor air flow rate.
Outdoor air flow per person

This is the design outdoor air flow rate per person for this zone (in m3/s or ft3/min). This setting is only required if either one of the 2-Flow/person, 4-Sum, or 5-Maximum options have been selected for the Outdoor air method. The default is 0.00944 m3/s (20 cfm per person). An outdoor air flow rate is calculated based on the total number of people assigned to the zone. Occupancy schedule values are not applied. Note: If the Detailed HVAC Activity data is set to 1-Simple HVAC then this option is disabled and the Outdoor air flow per person data is copied from the Activity model data.
Outdoor air flow per zone floor area

This is the design outside air volumetric flow rate per square meter of floor area (in m 3/s-m2). This setting is only required if either one of the 3-Flow/area, 4-Sum, or 5-Maximum options have been selected for the Outdoor air method. This value is multiplied by the zone floor area to obtain a flow rate. Note: If the Detailed HVAC Activity data is set to 1-Simple HVAC then this option is disabled and the Outdoor air flow per zone floor area data is copied from the Activity model data.
- 490 -
Edit HVAC Zone Data - Target
Outdoor air flow per zone

This is the design outdoor air flow rate for this zone (in m3/s or ft3/min). This setting is only required if either one of the 1-Flow/zone, 4-Sum, or 5-Maximum options have been selected for the Outdoor air method.
Edit HVAC Zone Data - Target

By default any edits made to the HVAC Zone dialog will apply only to the current HVAC Zone. However it is often convenient to make the same changes to one or more other zones in the same HVAC Zone group. In this case ensure that the Save changes to which HVAC Zones option is set to 2-Multiple HVAC Zones and select the HVAC zones that are also to be targets for the changes.
Air Distribution Units

To edit the data associated with an air distribution unit (ADU), you first need to select it by moving the mouse cursor over it and then clicking the mouse button to select it. You can then access the edit dialog by right-clicking the mouse and selecting the Edit selected component option or alternatively, select the Edit selected component tool from the toolbar. These ADU types are available: Direct Air ADU Constant Air Volume with Reheat ADU Variable Air Volume with Reheat ADU Variable Air Volume with Reheat and Variable Speed Fan ADU Variable Air Volume with No Reheat ADU Series Powered Induction Unit with Reheat ADU Parallel Powered Induction Unit with Reheat ADU Four Pipe Induction Unit ADU Dual Duct Constant Air Volume ADU Dual Duct Variable Air Volume ADU Cooled Beam
- 491 -
TARGET TAB
When editing the attributes associated with an ADU it is possible to apply the same changes to ADUs in other zones in the same HVAC Zone group. To do this select the ADUs on the Target tab of the ADU edit dialog as shown below.
Direct Air ADU

Central system air is usually supplied to a zone through a terminal unit such as a single duct VAV reheat box. Sometimes, however, it is desirable to supply central system air directly to a zone without any zone level control or tempering, e.g. when used in conjunction with a unitary packaged system. The Direct Air ADU creates the capability of supplying central system air directly to a zone. The data required for the unit consists of the unit name, availability (on/off) schedule, and a maximum flow rate. For the units to work correctly, it is important in any systems including Direct Air ADUs for the sum of the maximum zone air flow rates to be equal to the maximum central system flow rate. The central air system flow rate is specified in the air loop AHU data.
- 492 -
Constant Air Volume With Reheat ADU
GENERAL Name
This is a read-only label that is automatically generated by the software and which incorporates the name of the zone in which the ADU is located.
Maximum air flow rate

The design maximum volume flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min) specified for the Direct Air ADU. This field may be autosized.

This is the schedule that determines whether or not the unit is available for each timestep of the simulation. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during the timestep . A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the timestep .
Constant Air Volume With Reheat ADU

Generally, a constant volume with reheat system provides cooling by means of a cooling coil located in the air supply sub-loop AHU that supplies cooling to the entire supply air volume. The cooling coil is controlled by a controller setpoint specified for the cooling coil. Zone control is accomplished by heating (reheating) the airflow into each zone as determined by the zone thermostat. Reheat can be supplied by an electric, gas or hot water coil that tries to meet the zone demand. The unit contains a single heating coil which can be edited to change the type to 1-Water, 2-Electric or 3-Gas.
- 493 -
GENERAL Name

The design maximum volume flow rate (in m3/sec) specified for the ADU. This field may be auto-sized.
HEATING COIL
This section is visible only if the heating coil sub-component of this ADU has Type 1-Water.
Maximum hot water flow rate

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m3/s) through the units heating coil if a water coil has been selected. This value may be auto-sized.
Minimum hot water flow rate

The minimum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m 3/s) through the units heating coil if a water coil has been selected. This value may be auto-sized.

- 494 -
Variable Air Volume With Reheat ADU
ADVANCED Convergence tolerance

The coil is controlled by knowing the zone demand determined by the zone thermostat and setting the outlet conditions to meet this demand. For the electric and gas coils, this is set exactly since the coil model solution can be inverted. With the hot water coil that uses an effectiveness-NTU method, the solution cannot be inverted directly. Therefore, to determine the correct mass flow rate for the hot water the solution is solved for by iteration. The iterative solution uses an interval halving routine and needs a termination criterion that is set with the Convergence Tolerance parameter. This control offset is set to a decimal fraction of the zone demand as the criteria, i.e. 0.001. The default for the field is 0.001.

Variable air volume (VAV) systems control the dry-bulb temperature inside a zone by varying the supply air volume instead of the air temperature. At full cooling the VAV damper is fully open supplying the specified maximum air flow rate. As the cooling load decreases, the damper closes until it reaches the minimum stop specified by the zone minimum air flow fraction. VAV systems can be used for interior or perimeter zones with a common fan system, air temperature control, and reheating devices. The VAV concept may vary according to the VAV box locations, air temperature controls and types of heating elements. Heating can usually be provided by use of reheat coils or thermostatic baseboard. The unit contains a single heating coil which can be edited to change the type to 1-Water, 2-Electric or 3-Gas.
GENERAL Name
- 495 -
Damper heating action

The damper heating action determines the damper action in the terminal unit as the zone moves above or below the zone setpoint. With both control options, the damper is at the minimum air flow rate whenever the zone temperature is between the cooling and heating setpoints (deadband condition). With 1-Normal (the default) action, the damper will remain at the minimum air flow rate during heating operation. As the heating load increases, the water flow rate in the reheat coil will be increased to maintain temperature in the zone until the maximum water flow rate is reached or the user-specified maximum reheat air temperature is reached.. This is sometimes called the single maximum control logic as illustrated below.
Single Maximum Control Logic With 2-Reverse, as the heating load increases, the unit starts at minimum air flow and minimum hot water flow. The hot water flow is increased until it reaches maximum flow or the user-specified maximum reheat air temperature is reached, then the air damper starts to open to meet the load. This option is used if the minimum air flow rate is not adequate to serve the peak heating load. This is sometimes called the dual maximum control logic as illustrated in the following figure. For an electric heating coil, the reverse action works the same as the normal action always keeping the air flow at the minimum during heating.
- 496 -
Dual Maximum Control Logic
Maximum reheat temperature

This is the maximum supply air temperature (C) leaving the reheat coil in the VAV terminal unit during heating operation.
AIR FLOW Maximum air flow rate

The design maximum volume flow rate (m3/sec) specified for the ADU. This field may be auto-sized.
Zone minimum air flow method

This is used to select how the software will determine the minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is operating. There are three choices for selecting how the minimum flow rate is specified: 1-Constant where the value entered for Constant minimum air flow fraction will be used. 2-Fixed flow rate, the value entered for Fixed minimum air flow rate is used. 3-Scheduled then the software will obtain the value for minimum flow fraction from the schedule selected from Minimum air flow fraction schedule.
Air flow control for coil sizing

This item will only appear if 3-Scheduled is selected as the Zone minimum air flow method. It can be used to control the air flow rate used to size the unit heating coil if the coil is a water coil and the water flow rate for the coil is set to be auto-sized. The Air flow control for coil sizing drop-list contains three options: 1-None, 2-Constant minimum air flow fraction and 3-Fixed minimum air flow rate.
If 1-None is selected, then the air flow rates used for sizing normal-action reheat coils is the average of the minimum and maximum values in this schedule. The air flow rate used for reheat coil sizing is reported with other component sizing information as Reheat coil sizing air volume flow rate.
- 497 -
Constant minimum air flow fraction

If 1-Constant is selected for the Zone minimum air flow method, then this setting is used to define the minimum flow rate to the zone specified as a fraction of the maximum air flow rate while the system is operating. The minimum zone fraction is normally specified to meet the minimum ventilation requirement for the occupants. The reheat coil operates only when the damper is at this minimum flow rate when Damper Heating Action is set to 1Normal (the default).
Fixed minimum air flow rate

If 2-Fixed flow rate is selected for the Zone minimum air flow method, then this setting is used to define the minimum flow rate (m 3/s) to the zone specified as a fixed air flow rate while the system is operating. The minimum air flow rate is normally specified to meet the minimum ventilation requirement for the occupants. The reheat coil operates only when the damper is at this minimum flow rate when Damper Heating Action is set to 1-Normal (the default). This field is used if the Zone minimum air flow method field is set to 2-Fixed flow rate.
Minimum air flow fraction schedule

If 3-Scheduled is selected for the Zone minimum air flow method, then this setting is used to define the schedule that determines the value of the minimum air flow fraction. The schedule should contain fractions from 0.0 to 1.0. These values will define the minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is operating, specified as a fraction of the maximum air flow rate. The reheat coil operates only when the damper is at this minimum flow rate when Damper heating action is set to 1-Normal (the default).
HEATING COIL

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m3/s or gal/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil has been selected. This value may be auto-sized.

The minimum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m 3/s or gal/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil has been selected. This value may be auto-sized.
Maximum flow control during reheat

This item is only available if the reheat coil is a water coil and the Damper heating action is set to 2-Reverse. There are two available options: 1-None, 2-Maximum flow per zone floor area during reheat and 3-Maximum flow fraction during reheat.
These methods are used to calculate the maximum allowable air flow rate during reheat operation. If 1-None is selected, the maximum flow will not be limited. If Control on outdoor air flow is selected, the limit established through a 2-Maximum flow control during reheat option may be increased by the software to meet the outdoor air flow rate requirement. At no time will the maximum flow rate calculated here exceed the value for Maximum air flow rate. This limit is active only when the zone thermostat requests heating and the VAV box damper is reverse acting.
- 498 -
Maximum flow per zone floor area during reheat

This factor (m3/s-m2) is multiplied by the zone area, to determine the maximum volume flow rate (m3/s) allowed during reheat operation (see detailed explanation above). This field may be auto-calculated by entering autocalculate. If auto-calculated, the value is set to 0.002032 m 3/s-m2 (0.4 cfm/ft2).
Maximum flow fraction during reheat

This fraction is multiplied by the Maximum air flow rate to determine the maximum volume flow rate (m 3/s) allowed during reheat operation (see detailed explanation above). This field may be auto-calculated by entering autocalculate. If auto-calculated, the value is set to 0.002032 m 3/s-m2 (0.4 cfm/ft2) multiplied by the zone floor area divided by the Maximum air flow rate.
OUTDOOR AIR Control on outdoor air flow

If this option is selected, the terminal unit will increase flow as needed to meet the specified outdoor air requirement. If Outdoor air flow per person is non-zero, then the outdoor air requirement will be calculated by the software based on the current number of occupants in the zone. At no time will the supply air flow rate exceed the value for Maximum air flow rate. If this option is not selected, then the terminal unit will not be controlled for outdoor air flow.
Outdoor air method

The input must be one of: 1-Flow/Person, means the program will use the value entered under Outdoor air flow per person and the actual zone occupancy to calculate a zone outdoor air flow rate. 2-Flow/Area, means that the software will use the value entered under Outdoor air flow per zone floor area and the actual zone floor area as the zone outdoor air flow rate. 3-Flow/Zone,means that the program will use the value entered under Outdoor air flow per zone as the zone outdoor air flow rate. 4-AirChanges/Hour, means that the program will use the value entered under Air changes per hour and the actual zone volume (divided by 3600 seconds per hour) as the zone outdoor air flow rate. 5-Sum, means that the flows calculated from the values entered under Outdoor air flow per person, Outdoor air flow per area, Outdoor air flow per zone, and Air changes per hour (using the associated conversions to m3/s for each field) will be added to obtain the zone outdoor air flow rate. 6-Maximum. means that the maximum flow derived from Outdoor air flow per person, Outdoor air flow per area, Outdoor air flow per zone, and Air changes per hour (using the associated conversions to m3/s for each value) will be used as the zone outdoor air flow rate.
The default is 1-Flow/Person.

This is the design outdoor air volume flow rate per person for the associated zone (m 3/s/person). The default is 0.00944 (20 cfm per person). An outdoor air flow rate is calculated based on the total number of people for the zone occupancy. Occupancy schedule values are not applied during sizing calculations and are applied during the remainder of the simulation. This input is used if Outdoor air method is one of 1-Flow/Person, 5-Sum, or 6-Maximum.

This is the design outdoor air volume flow rate per square meter of floor area (m 3/s-m2). This value is used if Outdoor Air Method is 2-Flow/area, 5-Sum or 6-Maximum.
- 499 -

This is the design outdoor air flow rate for this zone (in m3/s). This value is used if Outdoor air method is 3-Flow/zone, 5-Sum or 6-Maximum.
Air changes per hour

This is the design outdoor air volume flow rate in air changes per hour (in ac/h). This factor is used along with the zone volume and converted to cubic metres per second. This value is used if Outdoor air method is 4-Air changes/hour, 5-Sum or 6-Maximum.

This is the schedule that determines whether or not the unit is available for each hour of the simulation. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during the hour. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the hour

The coil is controlled by knowing the zone demand determined by the zone thermostat and setting the outlet conditions to meet this demand. For the electric and gas coils, this is set exactly since the coil model solution can be inverted. With the hot water coil that uses an effectiveness-NTU method, the solution cannot be inverted directly. Therefore, to determine the correct mass flow rate for the hot water the solution is solved for by iteration. The iterative solution uses an interval halving routine and needs a termination criterion that is set with the Convergence tolerance parameter. This control offset is set to a decimal fraction of the zone demand as the criteria, i.e. 0.001. The default for the field is 0.001.
Variable Air Volume With Reheat And Variable Speed Fan ADU
The VAV terminal unit with variable-speed fan and reheat coil is an air system terminal unit consisting of a variable speed fan in series with a heating coil. These units are usually employed in under-floor air distribution (UFAD) systems where the air is supplied at low static pressure through an under-floor plenum. The fan is used to control the flow of conditioned air that enters the space. When the fan is off the plenum pressure drives the minimum air flow through the terminal unit. At maximum cooling the fan runs at its maximum speed. At full heating the fan runs at its heating maximum usually less than the cooling maximum flow rate. Thus this unit has two separate maximum flow rates one for heating and one for cooling. For cooling, control is maintained simply by varying the fan speed. For heating, the unit first tries to meet the heating load by varying the heating coil output while keeping the air flow at minimum (fan off). If this is not adequate the fan turns on and operates in variable flow mode up to the heating maximum flow rate. This unit is modelled in EnergyPlus as a compound component a variable speed fan and a heating coil in series in the air stream. The unit is blow through the fan is upstream of the heating coil. The heating coil can be edited to change the type to 1-Water, 2-Electric or 3-Gas.
- 500 -
Variable Air Volume With Reheat And Variable Speed Fan ADU
Note: When using the VAV with VS fan and reheat coil ADU, the associated AHU must have the extract fan option switched OFF.
GENERAL Name
AIR FLOW Maximum cooling air flow rate

This is the maximum volumetric air flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min) through the unit when the thermostat is calling for cooling. Normally this is the same as the units fan maximum volumetric flow rate.
Maximum heating air flow rate

This is the maximum volumetric air flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min) through the unit when the thermostat is calling for heating.
Minimum air flow fraction

This is the minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is operating, specified as a fraction of the maximum air flow rate. For this unit this is the flow rate when the fan is off.
HEATING COIL

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m3/s or gal/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil has been selected. This value may be auto-sized.
- 501 -

The minimum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m 3/s or gal/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil has been selected. This value may be auto-sized.

ADVANCED Heating convergence tolerance

This is the control tolerance for the unit heating output. The unit is controlled by matching the unit output to the zone demand. The model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure. Basically this is the fraction:
Variable Air Volume With No Reheat ADU

Variable air volume (VAV) systems control the dry-bulb temperature inside a zone by varying the supply air volume instead of the air temperature. At full cooling the VAV damper is fully open supplying the specified maximum air flow rate. As the cooling load decreases, the damper closes until it reaches the minimum stop specified by the zone minimum air flow fraction. VAV systems can be used for interior or perimeter zones with a common fan system and air temperature control. The VAV concept may vary according to the VAV box locations and air temperature controls. Heating can be provided if necessary by use of baseboard.
- 502 -
Variable Air Volume With No Reheat ADU
GENERAL Name

The design maximum volume flow rate (m3/s or ft3/min) specified for VAV ADU. This is auto-sizable.
Zone minimum air flow method

This is used to select how the software will determine the minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is operating. There are 5 choices for selecting how the minimum flow rate is specified: 1-Constant where the value entered for Constant minimum air flow fraction will be used. 2-Fixed flow rate, the value entered for Fixed minimum air flow rate is used. 3-Scheduled then the software will obtain the value for minimum flow fraction from the schedule selected from Minimum air flow fraction schedule. 4-Sum used to provide the summation of all entered inputs 5-Maximum used to either provide the maximum of all entered inputs
Constant minimum air flow fraction

If 1-Constant is selected for the Zone minimum air flow method, then this setting is used to define the minimum flow rate to the zone specified as a fraction of the maximum air flow rate while the system is operating. The minimum zone fraction is normally specified to meet the minimum ventilation requirement for the occupants.
Fixed minimum air flow rate

If 2-Fixed flow rate is selected for the Zone minimum air flow method, then this setting is used to define the minimum flow rate (m 3/s or ft3/min) to the zone specified as a fixed air flow rate while the system is operating. The minimum air flow rate is normally specified to meet the minimum ventilation requirement for the occupants.
Minimum air flow fraction schedule

If 3-Scheduled is selected for the Zone minimum air flow method, then this setting is used to define the schedule that determines the value of the minimum air flow fraction. The schedule should contain fractions from 0.0 to 1.0. These values will define the minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is operating, specified as a fraction of the maximum air flow rate.
OUTDOOR AIR Control on outdoor air flow

If this option is selected, the terminal unit will increase flow as needed to meet the specified outdoor air requirement. If Outdoor air flow per person is non-zero, then the outdoor air requirement will be calculated by the software based on the current number of occupants in the zone. At no time will the supply air flow rate exceed the value for Maximum air flow rate. If this option is not selected, then the terminal unit will not be controlled for outdoor air flow.
Outdoor air method

The input must be one of: 1-Flow/Person, means the program will use the value entered under Outdoor air flow per person and the actual zone occupancy to calculate a zone outdoor air flow rate.
- 503 -
2-Flow/Area, means that the software will use the value entered under Outdoor air flow per zone floor area and the actual zone floor area as the zone outdoor air flow rate. 3-Flow/Zone,means that the program will use the value entered under Outdoor air flow per zone as the zone outdoor air flow rate. 4-AirChanges/Hour, means that the program will use the value entered under Air changes per hour and the actual zone volume (divided by 3600 seconds per hour) as the zone outdoor air flow rate. 5-Sum, means that the flows calculated from the values entered under Outdoor air flow per person, Outdoor air flow per area, Outdoor air flow per zone, and Air changes per hour (using the associated conversions to m3/s for each field) will be added to obtain the zone outdoor air flow rate. 6-Maximum. means that the maximum flow derived from Outdoor air flow per person, Outdoor air flow per area, Outdoor air flow per zone, and Air changes per hour (using the associated conversions to m3/s for each value) will be used as the zone outdoor air flow rate.
The default is 1-Flow/Person.

This is the design outdoor air volume flow rate per person for the associated zone (m 3/s-person or ft3/min-person, i.e. cfm). The default is 0.00944 (20 cfm per person). An outdoor air flow rate is calculated based on the total number of people for the zone occupancy. Occupancy schedule values are not applied during sizing calculations and are applied during the remainder of the simulation. This input is used if Outdoor air method is one of 1-Flow/Person, 5-Sum, or 6-Maximum.

This is the design outdoor air volume flow rate per square meter of floor area (m 3/s-m2 or ft3/min-ft2). This value is used if Outdoor Air Method is 2-Flow/area, 5-Sum or 6-Maximum.

This is the design outdoor air flow rate for this zone (in m3/s or ft3/min). This value is used if Outdoor air method is 3-Flow/zone, 5-Sum or 6-Maximum.
Air changes per hour

This is the design outdoor air volume flow rate in air changes per hour (in ac/h). This factor is used along with the zone volume and converted to cubic metres per second. This value is used if Outdoor air method is 4-Air changes/hour, 5-Sum or 6-Maximum.

This is the schedule that determines whether or not the unit is available for each timestep of the simulation. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during the timestep . A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the timestep.
Series Powered Induction Unit With Reheat ADU

The series powered induction unit (PIU) is an air system terminal unit that mixes varying amounts of secondary (re-circulated) air and primary (conditioned supply) air to produce a fixed flow of air to a zone. The unit contains a small fan that acts to induce the secondary air and a heating coil for heating the mixed secondary and primary air. The fan runs at a constant volume flow rate whenever the unit is on. The fan is downstream of the primary and secondary air inlets. The variable mixing is accomplished by a damper in the units primary air supply inlet duct. This damper can move from fully open (100% primary air. 0% secondary air) to a minimum stop that is specified in the input description. At full cooling the damper will be fully open. At minimum cooling and for heating the damper will be at the minimum stop and the secondary air flow will be at its maximum.
- 504 -
Series Powered Induction Unit With Reheat ADU
The EnergyPlus model of the series PIU terminal unit is composed of three components: a zone mixer, a constant volume fan, and a heating coil (water, electric, or gas).
GENERAL Name
AIR FLOW Maximum air flow rate

This is the maximum volumetric air flow rate through the unit (in m 3/s or ft3/min). Since this is a constant air volume unit, this is also the design, rated air flow rate of the unit.
Maximum primary air flow rate

This is the maximum volumetric air flow rate of primary air through the unit (in m3/s or ft3/min). This is the primary air flow rate at full cooling load when the primary air damper is fully open. Usually this quantity is the same as the total unit flow rate, but it can be less.
Minimum primary air flow fraction

The minimum volumetric air flow rate of primary air through the unit expressed as a fraction of the maximum volumetric air flow rate of primary air. This input can be 0.0.
HEATING COIL

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate in (m3/s or gal/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil has been selected. This value may be auto-sized.
- 505 -

The minimum hot water volumetric flow rate in (m 3/s or gal/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil has been selected. This value may be auto-sized.

This is the schedule that determines whether or not the unit is available for each timestep of the simulation. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during the timestep . A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the timestep.

This is the control tolerance for the unit heating output. The unit is controlled by matching the unit output to the zone demand. For units with water coils, the model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure. Basically this is the fraction:
Parallel Powered Induction Unit With Reheat ADU

The parallel powered induction unit (PIU) is an air system terminal unit that mixes varying amounts of secondary (re-circulated) air and primary (conditioned supply) air to produce a variable total flow of air to a zone. The unit contains a small fan that acts to induce the secondary air and a heating coil for heating the mixed secondary and primary air. The secondary and primary air streams enter the unit in parallel. The fan sits in the secondary air stream and runs only when secondary air is needed. The primary air inlet contains a damper that can move from fully open (maximum primary air) to a minimum stop (minimum primary air). At full cooling load the primary air damper is fully open and the fan is off. The primary air flow is at maximum and there is little or no secondary air flow. As the cooling load decreases, the primary air damper gradually closes and the secondary air flow remains close to zero. At some point, usually when the primary air flow has reached the minimum, the fan switches on and secondary air is induced. The heating coil will switch on as needed to meet any heating demand. The EnergyPlus model of the parallel PIU terminal unit is composed of three components: a constant volume fan, a zone mixer, and a heating coil (water, electric or gas):
- 506 -
Parallel Powered Induction Unit With Reheat ADU
GENERAL Name
Fan on flow fraction

This is the fraction of the primary air flow at which fan turns on. In the parallel PIU the fan operation is intermittent. If the primary air flow is above this fraction of the maximum, the fan is off. Otherwise it is on.
SUPPLY AIR FLOW RATES Maximum primary air flow rate

This is the maximum volumetric air flow rate of primary air through the unit (in m 3/s or ft3/min). This is the primary air flow rate at full cooling load when the primary air damper is fully open.
Maximum secondary air flow rate

This is the maximum volumetric air flow rate of secondary air through the unit (in m 3/s or ft3/min). This flow rate can be any amount but is commonly less than the maximum primary air flow rate.
Minimum primary air flow fraction

This is the minimum volumetric air flow rate of primary air through the unit expressed as a fraction of the maximum volumetric air flow rate of primary air. This input can be 0.0.
HEATING COIL

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m3/sec or gal/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil has been selected. This value may be auto-sized.
- 507 -

The minimum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m 3/sec or gal/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil has been selected. This value may be auto-sized.


Four Pipe Induction Unit ADU

The four pipe induction terminal unit provides local hot water heating or chilled water cooling of induced zone air which then mixes with centrally conditioned supply air. An air conditioning system consisting of these terminal units is effectively a mixed central air/local hydronic system. The centrally conditioned air supplied to the induction terminal units is constant volume at quite high pressure. The central air is discharged through a nozzle in the terminal unit, inducing a flow of room air over a hydronic heating/cooling coil. The coil is connected either to a single inlet and outlet pipe (2 pipe unit) or to 2 inlets and 2 outlets (4 pipe unit). The heated or cooled induced air mixes with the centrally conditioned air before being discharged into the zone. The terminal units are usually expected to do only sensible cooling any dehumidification is done by the central air conditioning system. The EnergyPlus model of the four pipe induction terminal unit is a compound component consisting of a hot water heating coil, a chilled water cooling coil, and an air mixer. The unit has two inlet air streams: the centrally conditioned supply air and the induced air from the zone. The induced air passes first through the heating coil, then through the cooling coil and finally through the mixer. The central supply air goes directly into the mixer. The water flow through the hot or cold water coil is varied to meet the zone air conditioning requirement. Note that EnergyPlus models the four pipe induction terminal unit as having separate heating and cooling coils whereas real units have only a single coil used for both heating and cooling. Note also that the four pipe induction unit model can be used to model a two pipe unit by simply adjusting the heating and cooling coil schedules so that the heating coil is off when the cooling coil is on and vice versa.
- 508 -
Four Pipe Induction Unit ADU
GENERAL Name
Maximum total air flow rate

The maximum volumetric air flow rate discharged from the unit (in m3/s or ft3/min). Since this is a constant air volume unit, this is also the design, rated air flow rate of the unit. Note that this is the total discharge flow rate including both central supply and induced air.
Induction ratio
The ratio of induced air flow rate to primary supply air flow rate. The default is 1.0 the supply air induces an equal amount of zone air.
HEATING COIL

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil has been selected. This value may be auto-sized.

The minimum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m 3/s or ft3/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil has been selected. This value may be auto-sized.
- 509 -
COOLING COIL Maximum cold water flow rate

The maximum cold water volumetric flow rate (in m 3/s or ft3/min) through the units cooling coil. This value may be auto-sized.
Minimum cold water flow rate

The minimum cold water volumetric flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min) through the units cooling coil. This value may be auto-sized.

ADVANCED Heating convergence tolerance

Cooling convergence tolerance

This is the control tolerance for the unit cooling output. The unit is controlled by matching the unit output to the zone demand. The model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure. Basically this is the fraction:
Dual Duct Constant Air Volume ADU

The dual duct constant air volume simulation or the typical multi-zone is described by this Air Distribution Unit (ADU). Multi-zone systems condition all the air in a central apparatus and distribute it to the conditioned zones through two parallel ducts. One duct carries cold air and the other warm air, providing air sources for both heating and cooling at all times. In each conditioned zone, a mixing valve responsive to a room thermostat mixes the warm and cold air in proper proportions to satisfy the prevailing heating or cooling load of the space. The total airflow to each room is kept constant while the proportion of hot air to cold air is adjusted to maintain the temperature in each zone at the desired level.
- 510 -
Dual Duct Variable Air Volume ADU
GENERAL Name

The design constant volume flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min) specified for the multi-zone ADU.

Dual Duct Variable Air Volume ADU

Dual duct variable air volume (DDVAV)) systems are used to obtain zone temperature control by mixing the cold and warm air in various volume combinations. The fan is sized for the anticipated maximum coincident hot or cold volume, not the sum of the instantaneous peaks. This system has an advantage of a true single path VAV system, except for warm port leakage. When cold air is modulated for control before mixing, it operates similar to the VAV induction when mixing occurs without hot deck reheat. It is similar to a reheat system when mixing occurs while the hot deck is using the reheat coil. It uses more energy than a true VAV system, but less than a constant volume dual duct system.
- 511 -
GENERAL Name
Maximum damper air flow rate

The design maximum volume flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min) specified for the DDVAV ADU.
Zone minimum air flow fraction

The minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is operating specified as a fraction of the Maximum Damper Air Flow Rate. The minimum zone fraction is normally specified to meet the minimum ventilation requirement for the occupants.

- 512 -
Cooled Beam
Cooled Beam
The Cooled Beam system is a mixed air-hydronic system. A central, single-duct forced-air system supplies conditioned ventilation air to the zones. Sensible cooling is done by chilled water circulating through ceiling mounted cooled beam units. Chilled water flow rate through the cooled beam units is varied to meet the zone sensible cooling load. Any dehumidification is done by the central ventilation air system. Heating is usually accomplished with hot water radiators. Thermodynamically, the cooled beam system resembles the four-pipe induction unit. To model a typical cooled beam system the user will need to define a conventional central constant volume forced air system. This system will normally be 100% outside air delivered at a fixed supply temperature (which could be reset by schedule or by outside air temperature). On the supply side of this air loop there will be the usual central AC equipment: outside air mixer, fan, heating and cooling coil. On the zone equipment (demand) side of the loop, the chilled beams will be represented as terminal units. Additional zone equipment (such as baseboard heaters) will be needed to handle heating loads. Although the cooled beam equipment in a zone is treated by the program as a single terminal unit, the actual installation will have multiple beams in each zone. The program (in its sizing calculation for the system) figures out how many beams of what length are needed to meet the zone design load. Important Note: If an air loop is exclusively supplying cooled beams, the Air loop Type of load to size on setting should be set to 2-Ventilation requirement, otherwise the system air flow rate will be sized on the zone sensible load and the resulting flow rate may be too high for the cooled beams to maintain the zone setpoint temperatures.
GENERAL Name
Cooled beam type

Two types of units are modelled: Active or Passive. In the active unit, primary air is supplied through the beam, inducing some secondary zone air into contact with the coil. This unit acts as an active convector. The passive unit is simply a passive, finned convector. Primary air is supplied through a normal diffuser.
- 513 -
Supply air volumetric flow rate

This is the air flow rate of the supply air entering the zone (in m3/s or ft3/min). This input would normally be autosized based on the zone ventilation requirement.
Maximum total chilled water volumetric flow rate

The maximum chilled water flow rate (in m3/s or gal/min) for the unit. This input would normally be autosized based on the zone design load.
Number of beams
The number of individual cooled beam units in the zone. Normally this unit would be auto-sized by the program based upon the previous field and the nominal flow rate for a single beam unit (set by the program to 0.07 kg/s).
Beam length
This is the length of an individual beam in metres. Normally this will be auto-sized by the program based upon the number of beam units and the zone design sensible cooling load. 1 to 4 meters is a typical length range.
Design inlet water temperature

The nominal or design inlet water temperature (in C or F). The default is 15C.
Design outlet water temperature

The nominal or design outlet water temperature (in C or F). The default is 17C.
PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS
The following inputs are parameters used to characterize the performance of the chilled beam units. Values for a given unit can be obtained from the manufacturer. The parameters are used in the following equations. Pbeam = AKT K=Tn1vn2n3 V =(qin/0)air qin = K1Tn + Kinqpr Where: T is the room air water temperature difference (average water temperature is used) in C. is the water velocity in m/s. qpr is the supply air flow rate per unit length m3/ (s-m) beam cooling output per unit length W/m coil heat transfer coefficient W/(m2K) room air mass flow rate across coil kg/(m2s) volumetric flow rate across coil per unit length m3/(s-m)
Coil surface area per coil length

This is the surface area on the air side of the beam per unit beam length (in m2/m or ft2/ft). The default is 5.422. This is A in the equations above.
Coefficient of induction (Kin)

This is the coefficient of induction Kin in the equations above. The default is 2.0 for active beams and 0.0 for passive beams.
Pipe inside diameter

This is the water pipe inside diameter (in m or in). The default is 0.0145.
Model parameter
This is in the above equations. The default is 15.3
- 514 -
Zone Forced Air Units
Model parameter n1
This is n1 in the above equations. The default is 0.
Model parameter n2
This is n2 in the above equations. The default is 0.84.
Model parameter n3
This is n3 in the above equations. The default is 0.12.
Model parameter 0
This is 0 in the above equations. It is the free area of the coil in plan view (for the air flow) per unit beam length. The units are square meters per meter. The default is 0.171.
Model parameter K1
This is K1 in the above equations. The default is 0.005.
Model parameter n
This is n in the above equations. The default is 0.4.

Zone Forced Air Units

These zone forced air units are available within Detailed HVAC: Fan Coil Unit - Four Pipe Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner
TARGET TAB
When editing the attributes associated with a Zone forced air unit it is possible to apply the same changes to units in other zones in the same HVAC Zone group. To do this select the components on the Target tab of the edit dialog as shown below.
- 515 -
Fan Coil Unit - Four Pipe

ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil
Used in: HVAC Zones
The EnergyPlus Fan coil unit (FCU) is an in-room forced-convection hydronic unit. Typically these units are small (200 1200 cfm) and self-contained. They are mostly used in exterior zones, usually in hotels, apartments, or offices. They may be connected to ducted outside air, or have a direct outside air vent, but they do not have outside air economizers. The heating or cooling output of the unit ventilator is controlled by varying the air flow rate, the water flow rate, or both. Air flow rate can be controlled by cycling the fan on/off or with a variable speed fan drive. The most common setup is a two or three speed fan with the speed selected by hand. The fan then cycles on/off to control heating / cooling output. The controls are often a wall mounted thermostat with hand selection of heating/cooling and fan speed (off/low/medium/high). These controls may also be mounted on the unit. Fan coil units are objects made up of other components. Each FCU consists all of these fixed components: Outdoor air mixer Cooling coil - water Heating coil - water Constant volume supply air fan
Default settings are assigned to these components at the point the FCU is created and these can be overridden by editing the individual component properties. The fan coil unit is connected to a hot water loop (demand side) through its hot water coil and to a chilled water loop (demand side) through its cooling coil.
Outdoor air mixer

An outdoor air mixer is one of the components of the FCU. See above under Outdoor Air Supply for details of data entry.
Fan
A fan component is one of the components of a fan coil unit. See above under Fan type for details of fan types that are used.
Terminology
Like many HVAC terms, fan coil unit is used rather loosely. Sometim es it is used for terminal units that would be better described as powered induction units. Carrier and others use the term for the room side of refrigerantbased split systems. Real world fan coil units can be 4-pipe or 2-pipe. For 4-pipe units there are 2 supply pipes and 2 return pipes. For 2-pipe units there is a single supply pipe and a single return pipe and the supply is switched between hot and chilled water depending on the season. DesignBuilder provides only a 4-pipe unit, but the 4-pipe model can be used to model 2-pipe units simply by using the heating and cooling coil availability schedules to make sure that either hot or chilled water is exclusively available.
- 516 -
Units with outside air economizers are marketed (in the United States) as unit ventilators. Unit ventilators are typically bigger than fan coils and are widely used in classrooms or other applications where ventilation is a priority. If a zonal unit with an outside economizer is required, ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator should be used (not yet implemented in DesignBuilder Detailed HVAC).
Name
A unique system-assigned name for an instance of a Fan Coil unit. Any reference to this Fan Coil unit by another object will use this name.
Schedule that defines whether the fan coil unit can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the fan coil unit can be on during a given time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the fan coil unit is off.
Capacity control method

This input denotes how the units output is controlled in order to meet zone heating or cooling requirement. The choices are 1-Constant fan variable flow - the fan speed is held constant to produce a fixed air flow rate whenever the unit is scheduled on. The hot water or chilled flow rate is varied so that the unit output matches the zone heating or cooling requirement. When this method is selected, the fan type can be defined, see below. 2-Cycling fan - the fan speed is chosen so that the unit capacity is greater than or equal to the heating / cooling load and the fan is cycled to match unit output with the load. Cycling fans can have 3 speeds, Low, Medium and High speed and the ratio of supply air to the maximum supply rate is defaulted to 0.33, 0.66 and 1.00 for these speeds respectively. Custom values can be entered in Low speed supply air flow ratio and Medium speed supply air flow ratio described below. 3-Variable fan variable flow where both air and water flow rates are varied to match the load. 4-Variable fan constant flow where the water flow rate is at full flow and the fan speed varies to meet the load.
Low speed supply air flow ratio

This is the ratio of the low speed supply air flow rate to the maximum supply air flow rate. Its value should be less than Medium speed supply air flow ratio below. The default value is 0.33. This data is only required if the capacity control method selected is 2-Cycling fan.
Medium speed supply air flow ratio

This is the ratio of the medium speed supply air flow rate to the maximum supply air flow rate. Its value should be greater than the Low speed supply air flow ratio above, but less than 1. The default value is 0.66. This data is only required if the capacity control method selected is 2-Cycling fan.
Fan type
When the Capacity control method is set to 1-Constant fan variable flow you can select the type of fan. Choose from: 1-Constant volume fan 2-Off/off fan
For the other types of Capacity control method the fan type is fixed internally based on the method. For 2-Cycling fan, an On/off fan is used and for 3-Variable fan variable flow or 4-Variable fan constant flow a Variable volume fan will be used.
- 517 -

The maximum volumetric airflow rate (m3/sec or ft3/min) through the fan coil unit. This is also the design, rated airflow rate of the unit.
OUTDOOR AIR SUPPLY Outdoor air supply

Check this option if the fan coil unit includes an outdoor air supply.
Maximum outdoor air flow rate

If the fan coil unit uses outdoor air, this data specifies the outdoor air volumetric flow rate (m3/sec or ft3/min). This flow rate should be less than or equal to the maximum airflow rate.
COOLING COIL
A cooling coil is another component of the fan coil unit. Only the standard water cooling coil type is available.
Maximum cold water flow rate

The maximum cold water volumetric flow rate (m3/sec or gal/min) through the fan coil units cooling coil.
Minimum cold water flow rate

The minimum cold water volumetric flow rate (m3/sec or gal/min) through the fan coil units cooling coil.
HEATING COIL
Heating coil component also make up part of the fan coil unit. Only the standard water heating coil type can be used.

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate (m3/sec or gal/min) through the fan coil units heating coil.

The minimum hot water volumetric flow rate (m3/sec or gal/min) through the fan coil units heating coil.
ADVANCED Cooling convergence tolerance

The convergence tolerance for the control of the unit cooling output can be defined. The unit is controlled by matching the unit output to the zone demand. For units with water coils, the model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The cooling convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure. Basically this is the fraction: (Qfan coil out - Qzone load) / Qzone load <= Cooling Convergence Tolerance
Heating Convergence Tolerance

The convergence tolerance for the control of the unit heating output can be defined. The unit is controlled by matching the unit output to the zone demand. For units with water coils, the model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The heating convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure. Basically this is the fraction:
- 518 -
(Qfan coil out - Qzone load) / Qzone load <= Heating Convergence Tolerance
FAN COIL UNIT - FOUR PIPE OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,Fan Coil Heating Rate[W] HVAC,Sum,Fan Coil Heating Energy[J] HVAC,Average,Fan Coil Total Cooling Rate[W] HVAC,Sum,Fan Coil Total Cooling Energy[J] HVAC,Average,Fan Coil Sensible Cooling Rate[W] HVAC,Sum,Fan Coil Sensible Cooling Energy[J] HVAC,Average,Fan Coil Electric Power[W] HVAC,Sum,Fan Coil Electric Consumption[J] HVAC,Average,Fraction Of Timestep Fancoil is ON [] HVAC,Average,Fan Speed []
Fan Coil Heating Rate[W]

This field reports the dry air heating addition rate of the fan coil unit to the zone it is serving in Watts. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions and the mass flow rate through the unit.
Fan Coil Heating Energy[J]

This field is the dry air heat addition of the fan coil unit to the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions, the mass flow rate through the unit, and the timestep.
Fan Coil Total Cooling Rate[W]

This field is the total (sensible and latent) heat extraction rate of the fan coil unit from the zone it is serving in Watts. This is determined by the outlet and zone conditions and the mass flow rate through the unit.
Fan Coil Total Cooling Energy[J]

This field is the total (sensible and latent) heat extraction of the fan coil unit from the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions, the mass flow rate through the unit, and the timestep.
Fan Coil Sensible Cooling Rate[W]

This field reports the dry air sensible heat extraction rate of the fan coil unit from the zone it is serving in Watts. This is determined by the outlet and zone conditions and the mass flow rate through the unit.
Fan Coil Sensible Cooling Energy[J]

This field is the dry air sensible heat extraction of the fan coil unit from the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by the outlet and zone conditions, the mass flow rate through the unit, and the timestep.
Fan Coil Electric Power[W]

This field reports the electricity consumption rate of the fan coil unit in Watts.
Fan Coil Electric Consumption[J]

This field is the electricity consumption of the fan coil unit in Joules over the timestep being reported.
Fraction Of Timestep Fancoil is ON

This field is the fraction of the system timestep the fan coil unit is running for the CyclingFan capacity control method. This variable is defined only for the CyclingFan capacity control method.
- 519 -
Fan Speed
This field is indicates the speed chosen for the fan in the CyclingFan capacity control method. A value of '0' means that the unit is off, '1' the fan is running at its low speed, '2' medium speed, and '3' high speed (maximum). This variable is defined only for the CyclingFan capacity control method.
Part Load Ratio

When the capacity control method is VariableFanVariableFlow or VariableFanConstantFlow, this report variable reports the unit part load ratio (ratio of unit heating / cooling output to the maximum heating / cooling output). This variable is defined only for VariableFanVariableFlow or VariableFanConstantFlow capacity control methods.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump

ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump
Used in: HVAC Zones
The packaged terminal heat pump (PTHP) is a compound object made up of other components. Each PTHP consists of these fixed components: Outdoor air mixer, DX cooling coil - single speed, DX heating coil Supplemental heating coil (electric), and, Constant volume supply air fan.
Default settings are assigned to these components at the point the PTHP is created and these can be overridden by editing the individual component properties. The layout is illustrated below.
- 520 -
Schematic of a packaged terminal heat pump (draw through fan placement) The packaged terminal heat pump coordinates the operation of these components and is modelled as a type of zone equipment. The data that must be entered for the PTHP is as follows.
Name
A unique system-assigned name for an instance of a packaged terminal heat pump. Any reference to this heat pump by another object will use this name.
FAN
A constant volume fan component is included as a component of the PTHP. Note that the fans maximum flow rate should be greater than or equal to the maximum supply air flow rate for the PTHP.
Fan placement
There are 2 fan placement options: 1-Blow through where the unit consists of an outdoor air mixer followed by a fan followed by the DX coils and supplemental heating coil. The fan blows through the cooling and heating coils. 2-Draw through where the unit consists of an outdoor air mixer followed by the DX coils followed by a fan, with the supplemental heater located at the outlet of the fan. The fan draws air through the DX coils.

This data specifies the supply air fan operating mode schedule. The supply air fan operating mode may vary during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season. Schedule values of 0 denote that the supply air fan and the heating or cooling coil cycle on and off together to meet the heating or cooling load (a.k.a. AUTO fan). Schedule values other than 0 denote that the supply fan runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles to meet the load.
- 521 -
The default schedule is On with a constant value of 1, i.e. that the supply fan runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles to meet the load at all times. To obtain the AUTO fan configuration select the Off schedule which has a constant value of 0. To set up a time-varying fan operation mode, create and select a schedule with values of 0 and 1 to define the way the fan operation mode varies in time.
SUPPLY AIR FLOW RATES Supply air flow rate during cooling operation
This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable.
Supply air flow rate during heating operation

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX heating coil and/or supplemental heater are operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable.

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when neither cooling or heating is required (i.e., DX coils and supplemental heater are off but the supply air fan operates). This field is only used when the heat pumps supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan operation. Values must be greater than or equal to zero, or this field is autosizable. If the heat pumps supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan operation and this value is set to zero, then the model assumes that the supply air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is equal to the supply air flow rate when the cooling or heating coil was last operating (for cooling operation or heating operation).
OUTDOOR AIR SUPPLY Outdoor air supply

If the PTAC provides outdoor air then check this option.
Outdoor air flow rate during cooling operation

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note that the outdoor air flow rate during cooling operation is fixed; it cannot change during the simulation. In addition, the outdoor air flow rate during cooling operation cannot be greater than the heat pumps supply air volumetric flow rate during cooling operation.
Outdoor air flow rate during heating operation

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX heating coil and/or supplemental heater are operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note that the outdoor air flow rate during heating operation is fixed; it cannot change during the simulation. In addition, the outdoor air flow rate during heating operation cannot be greater than the heat pumps supply air volumetric flow rate during heating operation.
- 522 -
Outdoor air flow rate when no cooling or heating is needed

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when neither cooling or heating is required (i.e., DX coils and supplemental heater are off but the supply air fan operates). Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note that the outdoor air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is fixed; it cannot change during the simulation. In addition, the outdoor air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed cannot be greater than the heat pumps supply air volumetric flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed. This field is only used when the heat pumps supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan operation. If the heat pumps supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan operation and the field Supply air volumetric flow rate when no cooling or heating is needed is set to zero or is left blank, then the model assumes that the outdoor air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is equal to the outdoor air flow rate when the cooling or heating coil was last operating (for cooling operation [i.e., Outdoor air flow rate during cooling operation] or heating operation [i.e., Outdoor air flow rate during heating operation]) and this field is not used.
COMPRESSOR Minimum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for compressor operation

This numeric field defines the minimum outdoor dry-bulb temperature (in C or F)elsius for PTHP compressor operation. The compressor will not operate (for DX heating or DX cooling) when outdoor dry-bulb temperatures fall below this value. The minimum value must be greater than or equal to -20C. The default value is -8C. This temperature should match the minimum compressor operating temperature specified for the heat pumps DX heating coil (if they dont match, the highest of the two temperatures will be the cut -off temperature for compressor operation).
SUPPLEMENTAL HEATER
The supplemental heating coil used by this PTHP is fixed as Electric. The supplemental heating coil default settings can be overridden by editing the coil properties.
Maximum supply air temperature from supplemental heater

This numeric field defines the maximum supply air temperature (in C or F) exiting the heat pump supplemental heater coil. The supplemental heater will be controlled so that its supply air temperature does not exceed this value. This field is autosizable.
Maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for supplemental heater operation

This numeric field defines the maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature (in C or F) for PTHP supplemental heater operation. The supplemental heater will not operate when the outdoor dry-bulb temperature is above this value. The maximum value must be less than or equal to 21C. The default value is 21C.

Select the Schedule that defines whether the heat pump operates during a given time period. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the heat pump must be off for that time period. A value greater than 0 denotes that the heat pump is available to operate during that time period. This schedule may be used to completely disable the heat pump (all of its coils and the supply air fan) as required.
- 523 -
ADVANCED Cooling convergence tolerance

This numeric field defines the convergence tolerance for the units cooling output. This field allows the user some control over how closely the heat pump will control the air-side conditions. The relative size of this parameter relates directly to the closeness of the control. A very small value in this field will result in tight control and will probably result in larger numbers of iterations. A large value in this field will result in looser controls and could result in unsatisfactory fluctuations in zone air temperature. Initial experience with this parameter lends to the recommendation of using 0.001 as the starting point. The heat pump is controlled by matching its sensible (temperature) cooling output to the zone sensible load (demand). Because the performance of the DX cooling coil is frequently nonlinear, the heat pump model must call the DX cooling coil model several times (iterate) to determine the proper run time fraction to meet the zone load. The cooling convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the iteration procedure when the following equation is satisfied: ( Qzone load - Qheat pump out ) / Qzone load <= Cooling Convergence Tolerance The maximum number of iterations is limited, with a warning message generated if the above equation is not satisfied within the maximum number of iterations.
Heating convergence tolerance

This numeric field defines the convergence tolerance for the units heating output. This field allows the user some control over how closely the heat pump will control the air-side conditions. The relative size of this parameter relates directly to the closeness of the control. A very small value in this field will result in tight control and will probably result in larger numbers of iterations. A large value in this field will result in looser controls and could result in unsatisfactory fluctuations in zone air temperature. Initial experience with this parameter lends to the recommendation of using 0.001 as the starting point. The heat pump is controlled by matching its sensible (temperature) heating output to the zone sensible load (demand). Because the performance of the DX heating coil is frequently non-linear, the heat pump model must call the DX heating coil model several times (iterate) to determine the proper run time fraction to meet the zone load. The heating convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the iteration procedure when the following equation is satisfied: ( Qzone load - Qheat pump out) / Qzone load <= Heating Convergence Tolerance The maximum number of iterations is limited, with a warning message generated if the above equation is not satisfied within the maximum number of iterations.
PACKAGED TERMINAL HEAT PUMP OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Zone Heating Rate[W] HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Zone Heating Energy[J] HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Zone Cooling Rate[W] HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Zone Cooling Energy[J] HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Zone Heating Rate[W] HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Zone Heating Energy[J] HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Zone Cooling Rate[W] HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Zone Cooling Energy[J] HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Zone Heating Rate[W] HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Zone Heating Energy[J] HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Zone Cooling Rate[W] HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Zone Cooling Energy[J] HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Electric Power[W] HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Electric Consumption[J] HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Fan Part-Load Ratio
- 524 -
HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Compressor Part-Load Ratio
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Zone Heating Rate[W]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition rate of the packaged terminal heat pump to the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Zone Heating Energy[J]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition of the packaged terminal heat pump to the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through the heat pump, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Zone Cooling Rate[W]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction rate of the packaged terminal heat pump from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Zone Cooling Energy[J]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction of the packaged terminal heat pump from the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through the heat pump, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Zone Heating Rate[W]

This output field is the sensible heat addition rate of the packaged terminal heat pump to the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (heating only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Zone Heating Energy[J]

This output field is the sensible heat addition of the packaged terminal heat pump to the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, the air mass flow rate through the heat pump, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (heating only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Zone Cooling Rate[W]

This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction rate of the packaged terminal heat pump from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (cooling only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Zone Cooling Energy[J]

This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction of the packaged terminal heat pump from the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, the air mass flow rate through the heat
- 525 -
pump, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (cooling only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Zone Heating Rate[W]

This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) rate of the packaged terminal heat pump to the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy rate and the sensible energy rate provided by the packaged terminal heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat addition only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Zone Heating Energy[J]

This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) of the packaged terminal heat pump to the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the zone by the packaged terminal heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat addition only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Zone Cooling Rate[W]

This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) rate of the packaged terminal heat pump from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy rate and the sensible energy rate provided by the packaged terminal heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Zone Cooling Energy[J]

This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) of the packaged terminal heat pump from the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the zone by the packaged terminal heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Electric Power[W]

This output field is the electricity consumption rate of the packaged terminal heat pump in Watts. The consumption includes electricity used by the compressor (including crankcase heater), fans (indoor supply air fan and the condenser fan), and the supplemental heating coil (if electric). This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Electric Consumption[J]

This output field is the electricity consumption of the packaged terminal heat pump in Joules for the time period being reported. The consumption includes electricity used by the compressor (including crankcase heater), fans (indoor supply air fan and the condenser fan), and the supplemental heating coil (if electric). This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Fan Part-Load Ratio

This output field is the part-load ratio of the fan. The fan part-load ratio is defined as the average supply air mass flow rate divided by the maximum supply air mass flow rate. The maximum supply air mass flow rate depends on whether heating, cooling, or no heating or cooling is required during the timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Compressor Part-Load Ratio

This output field is the part-load ratio of the compressor used by the DX coils (cooling and heating). Compressor part-load ratio is defined as the total coil load divided by the coil steady-state capacity. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.
- 526 -
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner

ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner
Used in: HVAC Zones
The packaged terminal air conditioner (PTAC) is a compound object made up of other components. Each PTAC consists all of these fixed components: Outdoor air mixer DX cooling coil - single speed Electric heating coil Constant volume supply air fan
Default settings are assigned to these components at the point the PTAC is created and these can be overridden by editing the individual component properties. While the figure below shows the PTAC with draw through fan placement, blow through fan placement can also be modelled by positioning the supply air fan between the outdoor air mixer and the DX cooling coil. The packaged terminal air conditioner coordinates the operation of these components and is modelled as a type of zone equipment.
Schematic of a Packaged terminal air conditioner with draw through fan placement
- 527 -
Name
A unique system-assigned name for an instance of a packaged terminal air conditioner. Any reference to this air conditioner by another object will use this name.
FAN Fan placement

There are 2 fan placement options: 1-Blow through where the unit consists of an outdoor air mixer followed by a fan followed by the DX cooling coil and heating coil. The fan blows through the DX cooling coil and the heating coil. 2-Draw through where the unit consists of an outdoor air mixer followed by the DX cooling coil and heating coil with the fan located at the outlet of the PTAC. The fan draws air through the DX cooling coil and the heating coil.

This data specifies the supply air fan operating mode schedule. The supply air fan operating mode may vary during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season. Schedule values of 0 denote that the supply air fan and the heating or cooling coil cycle on and off together to meet the heating or cooling load (aka AUTO fan). Schedule values other than 0 indicate that the supply fan runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles to meet the load. The default schedule is On with a constant value of 1, i.e. that the supply fan runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles to meet the load at all times. To obtain the AUTO fan configuration, select the Off schedule which has a constant value of 0. To set up a time-varying fan operation mode, create and select a schedule with values of 0 and 1 to define the way the fan operation mode varies in time.
SUPPLY AIR FLOW RATES Supply air flow rate during cooling operation
This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the air conditioner (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable.
Supply air flow rate during heating operation

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the air conditioner (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable.

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the air conditioner (in m3/s or ft3/min) when neither cooling nor heating is required (i.e., DX coil and heater are off but the supply air fan operates). This field is only used when the air conditioners supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan operation. Values must be greater than or equal to zero, or this field is autosizable. If the air conditioners supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan operation and this value is set to zero or this field is left blank, then the model assumes that the supply air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is equal to the supply air flow rate when the cooling or heating coil was last operating (for cooling operation or heating operation).
- 528 -
OUTDOOR AIR Outdoor air supply

If the PTAC provides outdoor air then check this option.
Outdoor air flow rate during cooling operation

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the air conditioner (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note that the outdoor air flow rate during cooling operation is fixed; it cannot change during the simulation. In addition, the outdoor air flow rate during cooling operation cannot be greater than the air conditioners supply air volumetric flow rate during cooling operation.
Outdoor air flow rate during heating operation

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the air conditioner (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note that the outdoor air flow rate during heating operation is fixed; it cannot change during the simulation. In addition, the outdoor air flow rate during heating operation cannot be greater than the air conditioners supply air volumetric flow rate during heating operation.
Outdoor air flow rate when no cooling or heating is needed

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the air conditioner (in m3/s or ft3/min) when neither cooling nor heating is required (i.e., cooling and heating coils are off but the supply air fan operates). Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note that the outdoor air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is fixed; it cannot change during the simulation. In addition, the outdoor air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed cannot be greater than the air conditioners supply air volumetric flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed. This field is only used when the air conditioners supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan operation. If the air conditioners supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan operation and the field Supply air volumetric flow rate when no cooling or heating is needed is set to zero or is left blank, then the model assumes that the outdoor air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is equal to the outdoor air flow rate when the cooling or heating coil was last operating (for cooling operation [i.e., Outdoor air Flow rate during cooling operation] or heating operation [i.e., Outdoor air flow rate during heating operation]) and this field is not used.

Select the Schedule that defines whether the air conditioner can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the air conditioner can be on during a given time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the air conditioner is off. This schedule may be used to completely disable the air conditioner (all of its coils and the supply air fan) as required.
PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONER OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Air HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Air HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Air HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Air Air Conditioner Total Zone Heating Rate[W] Conditioner Total Zone Heating Energy[J] Air Conditioner Total Zone Cooling Rate[W] Conditioner Total Zone Cooling Energy[J] Air Conditioner Sensible Zone Heating Rate[W] Conditioner Sensible Zone Heating Energy[J] Air Conditioner Sensible Zone Cooling Rate[W] Conditioner Sensible Zone Cooling Energy[J]
- 529 -
HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Air HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Air HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Air HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal
Air Conditioner Latent Zone Heating Rate[W] Conditioner Latent Zone Heating Energy[J] Air Conditioner Latent Zone Cooling Rate[W] Conditioner Latent Zone Cooling Energy[J] Air Conditioner Electric Power[W] Conditioner Electric Consumption[J] Air Conditioner Fan Part-Load Ratio Air Conditioner Part-Load Ratio
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Zone Heating Rate[W]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner to the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Zone Heating Energy[J]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition of the packaged terminal air conditioner to the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Zone Cooling Rate[W]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Zone Cooling Energy[J]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction of the packaged terminal air conditioner from the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Zone Heating Rate[W]

This output field is the sensible heat addition rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner to the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (heating only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Zone Heating Energy[J]

This output field is the sensible heat addition of the packaged terminal air conditioner to the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (heating only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Zone Cooling Rate[W]

This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner. This value
- 530 -
is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (cooling only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Zone Cooling Energy[J]

This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction of the packaged terminal air conditioner from the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (cooling only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Zone Heating Rate[W]

This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner to the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy rate and the sensible energy rate provided by the packaged terminal air conditioner. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat addition only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Zone Heating Energy[J]

This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) of the packaged terminal air conditioner to the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the zone by the packaged terminal air conditioner. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat addition only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Zone Cooling Rate[W]

This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy rate and the sensible energy rate provided by the packaged terminal air conditioner. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Zone Cooling Energy[J]

This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) of the packaged terminal air conditioner from the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the zone by the packaged terminal air conditioner. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Electric Power[W]

This output field is the electricity consumption rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner in Watts. The consumption includes electricity used by the compressor (including crankcase heater), fans (indoor supply air fan and the condenser fan), and the heating coil (includes electricity consumption rate for electric heating coil or parasitic electricity consumption rate for non-electric coils). This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Electric Consumption[J]

This output field is the electricity consumption of the packaged terminal air conditioner in Joules for the time period being reported. The consumption includes electricity used by the compressor (including crankcase heater), fans (indoor supply air fan and the condenser fan), and the heating coil (includes electricity consumption for electric heating coil or parasitic electricity consumption for non-electric coils). This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are summed for the timestep being reported.
- 531 -
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Fan Part-Load Ratio

This output field is the part-load ratio of the fan. The fan part-load ratio is defined as the average supply air mass flow rate divided by the maximum supply air mass flow rate. The maximum supply air mass flow rate depends on whether heating, cooling, or no heating or cooling is required during the timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Part-Load Ratio

This output field is the part-load ratio used by the coils (cooling and heating). Part-load ratio is defined as the total coil load divided by the coil steady-state capacity. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Radiative-Convective Units
To edit the data associated with a zone radiative-convective unit, you first need to select it by moving the mouse cursor over it and then clicking the mouse button to select it. You can then access the edit dialog by right-clicking the mouse and selecting the Edit selected component option or alternatively, select the Edit selected component tool from the toolbar. 4 types of radiant-convective units are available: Zone Hot Water Convector Zone Electric Convector Zone Hot Water Radiator Zone Electric Radiator
TARGET TAB
When editing the attributes associated with a Radiative-convective unit it is possible to apply the same changes to units in other zones in the same HVAC Zone group. To do this select the components on the Target tab of the edit dialog as shown below.
Hot Water Convector

The hot water convector is controlled to meet any remaining zone load not met by any other item of equipment in the zone that has a higher heating priority. The control is accomplished by throttling the hot water flow.
- 532 -
Hot Water Convector
GENERAL Name
This is a read-only label that is automatically generated by the software and which incorporates the name of the zone in which the convector is located.
U-Factor times area value

This is the overall heat transfer coefficient for the convector (in W/K or Btu/h-F) at design conditions. The U-Factor Times Area Value (UA) is used in an NTU - effectiveness calculation. An estimate of the UA can be obtained from: Q = UA (Twater, avg - Tair, avg)
Where, q is the heat transferred from water to the air in watts ,Twater, avg is the average water temperature (C) and Tair, avg is the average air temperature (C). Or the LMTD temperature difference can be used.

This is the maximum hot water volumetric flow rate in (m3/s or gal/min).
Convergence tolerance
This is the control tolerance for the convector output. The convector is controlled by matching the convector output to the zone demand. The model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure. Basically this is the fraction:
The default is 0.001.
- 533 -

This is the schedule that determines whether or not the component is available for each timestep of the simulation. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during the timestep. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the timestep.
Electric Convector
The electric convector is controlled to meet any remaining zone load not met by any other item of equipment in the zone that has a higher heating priority. The control is accomplished by taking the remaining zone load and dividing by the efficiency of the baseboard.
Name
This is a read-only label that is automatically generated by the software and which incorporates the name of the zone in which the convector is located.
Nominal capacity
This is the nominal or maximum capacity of the electric convector (in W).
Efficiency
This is the overall electrical efficiency of the convector. The zone load met by this unit is divided by the electrical efficiency to obtain the total electric energy used.

- 534 -
Hot Water Radiator
Hot Water Radiator

The zone hot water radiator model calculates the convective and radiant heat transfer from the device to the people and the surfaces within a zone so that surface heat balances can take into account the radiant heat transfer to the surfaces and thus enhance the accuracy of thermal comfort predictions within the space. The component is controlled to meet any remaining zone load not met by other zone equipment.
GENERAL Name
This is a read-only label that is automatically generated by the software and which incorporates the name of the zone in which the radiator is located.

This is the maximum water volumetric flow rate in (m 3/sec or gal/min). It can be auto-sized by EnergyPlus.
Rated average water temperature

This is the rated average water temperature for the radiator (in C or F). It typically ranges from 65C to 115C and the lowest allowable temperature is 32C. The default value is 75C. This information should be provided by manufacturers literature.
Rated water mass flow rate

This is the rated standard water flow rate (in kg/s or lb/s) which should be provided by manufacturers literature. It is used by the manufacturers when determining the rated capacity (see Rated capacity below). The default value is 0.063kg/s
Rated capacity
This is the rated water radiator capacity (in W or Btu/h) at a rated water mass flow rate (see Rated water mass flow rate above). Almost all publications from manufacturers indicate it as W/m (Btuh per linear foot). The user thus must multiply it by the active length of the unit. The active length is available in the literature. Manufacturers are required to publish the difference between active and total length of the unit. This field can be auto-sized by EnergyPlus.
- 535 -
Fraction radiant
This field specifies what fraction of the power input to the radiator is actually transferred to the space as radiant heat. The fraction should be between 0 and 1. This is the portion of the total power that is modelled as radiation. The portion that is radiant heat transfer from the radiator is distributed to people and specific surfaces using the remaining fields.
Fraction of radiant energy incident on people

This field specifies the fraction of radiant portion of heat transfer to the zone from the radiator that is incident directly on people within the space. This has an impact on the predicted thermal comfort of the zone occupants. Note that although this energy is radiant it is actually modeled in the zone heat balance as convective energy (like an internal gain). The basic assumption here is that most radiant energy falling on people will most likely be re-released to the zone air by convection. This is a simplification of reality, but it maintains the overall energy balance. Note: The remaining fraction is divided across all of the surfaces of the zone in which the radiator is located.


This is the control tolerance for the radiator output. The radiator is controlled by matching the radiator output to the zone demand. The model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure. Basically this is the fraction:
The default is 0.001.
Electric Radiator
The zone electric radiator model calculates the convective and radiant heat transfer from the device to the people and the surfaces within a zone so that surface heat balances can take into account the radiant heat transfer to the surfaces and thus enhance the accuracy of thermal comfort predictions within the space. The component is controlled to meet any remaining zone load not met by other zone equipment and the total electric consumption of the radiator is calculated by dividing the load by the efficiency of the radiator.
- 536 -
Electric Radiator
GENERAL Name
This is a read-only label that is automatically generated by the software and which incorporates the name of the zone in which the radiator is located.
Nominal capacity
This is the nominal or maximum capacity of the radiator (in W). This field may be auto-sized.
Efficiency
This is the overall electrical efficiency of the radiator. The zone load met by this unit is divided by the electrical efficiency to obtain the total electric energy used.
Fraction radiant
This field specifies what fraction of the power input to the radiator is actually transferred to the space as radiant heat. The fraction should be between 0 and 1. This is the portion of the total power that is modelled as radiation. The portion that is radiant heat transfer from the radiator is distributed to people and specific surfaces using the remaining fields.
Fraction of radiant energy incident on people

This field specifies the fraction of radiant portion of heat transfer to the zone from the radiator that is incident directly on people within the space. This has an impact on the predicted thermal comfort of the zone occupants. Note that although this energy is radiant it is actually modeled in the zone heat balance as convective energy (like an internal gain). The basic assumption here is that most radiant energy falling on people will most likely be re-released to the zone air by convection. This is a simplification of reality, but it maintains the overall energy balance. Note: The remaining fraction is divided across all of the surfaces of the zone in which the radiator is located.
- 537 -

Chilled Ceiling
The chilled ceiling component is a low temperature radiant system and can be used to define cooling elements that comprise water fed tubular systems embedded within the ceiling construction of a building. Two types of chilled ceiling are available in DesignBuilder HVAC, a constant flow and a variable flow system. Note that chilled ceilings will only control based on the radiant system controls defined for the component and not via a zone thermostat such as is used for forced air systems. If the radiant system is serving a zone with forced air equipment, the radiant system will follow the priority order established by the zone thermostat but will still base its response on the controls defined by the user for the radiant system.
Note: The ceiling constructions of zones in which chilled ceilings are to be positioned must have a special internal source construction which incorporates details of the embedded tubing system. See Internal Source under Constructions for further details. To edit the data associated with a chilled ceiling, you first need to select it by moving the mouse cursor over it and then clicking the mouse button to select it. You can then access the edit dialog by right-clicking the mouse and selecting the Edit selected component option or alternatively, select the Edit selected component tool from the toolbar.
TARGET TAB
When editing the attributes associated with a Chilled ceiling it is possible to apply the same changes to units in other zones in the same HVAC Zone group. To do this select the components on the Target tab of the edit dialog as required.
Chilled Ceiling - Constant Flow

The constant flow chilled ceiling keeps flow rate constant via a local circulation pump and varies the water temperature that is sent to the ceiling. This is accomplished with a mixing valve that is controlled by a sensor. The constant flow chilled ceiling type has a built-in local secondary loop. It will re-circulate flow coming out of the
- 538 -
system and mix this with flow from the loop to arrive at the desired inlet temperature to the ceiling (note that this chilled ceiling model has the temperature sensor after the pump to insure proper inlet temperature to the ceiling). The local loop also contains a pump which is assumed to be upstream of the component and after the mixing valve. So, the local loop can have some recirculation. The flow from the main loop may also bypass the component if more than enough flow is available and the main loop is also a constant flow system.
GENERAL Name
This is a read-only label that is automatically generated by the software and which incorporates the name of the zone in which the chilled ceiling is located.
Type
There are two types of chilled ceiling available: 1-Constant flow and 2-Variable flow
TUBE SETTINGS Hydronic tubing inside diameter

This is the inside diameter (in m or in) of the tubes through which water is circulated. The inside diameter is used to determine the convective heat transfer from the water to the inside surface of the hydronic tubing.
Hydronic tubing length

This is the total length of embedded pipe (in m or ft). The length of the tube is used to determine the effectiveness of heat transfer from the fluid being circulated through the tubes and the tube/surface. Longer tubing lengths result in more heat that will be transferred to/from the radiant surface to the circulating fluid.
FLOW SETTINGS Rated flow rate

This is the maximum flow rate of water through the chilled ceiling (in m 3/s or gal/min). This flow rate is held constant by the local component pump, but you have the option of varying this flow rate via a schedule (see Pump flow rate schedule below). The constant flow system will accept this flow rate and control the inlet temperature based on the control and water temperature schedules defined below.
PUMP SETTINGS Pump flow rate schedule

This schedule modifies the maximum flow rate of water through the chilled ceiling (in m 3/s only). Note that the values for this schedule must be between zero and one.
Rated pump head

This is the pump rated head (Pa or ftH20).

This is the pump rated power consumption (W).
- 539 -
Motor efficiency
This is the pump efficiency in decimal form (0 = 0%, 1 = 100%).

This is the fraction of the pump power lost to the fluid.
CONTROL Temperature control type

Along with setpoint (control) and water schedules, this setting allows you to specify how the chilled ceiling is to be controlled. The temperature denoted in the setpoint schedule can refer to one of five different temperatures: the zone mean air temperature, the zone mean radiant temperature, the zone operative temperature, the outdoor drybulb temperature, or the outdoor wet-bulb temperature. The choice of temperature is controlled by the temperature control type. Select from the following options: 1-Mean air temperature 2-Mean radiant temperature 3-Operative temperature 4-Outdoor dry bulb temperature , 5-Outdoor wet bulb temperature
Operative temperature for chilled ceiling controls is the average of Mean air temperature and Mean radiant temperature. See the control temperature schedule settings below for more information.
Cooling high water temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the high water temperature (in C only) for the temperature control of a constant flow chilled ceiling. Water and control temperatures for cooling work together to provide a linear function that determines the water temperature sent to the chilled ceiling. The current control temperature (see Temperature Control Type above) is compared to the high and low control temperatures at the current time. If the control temperature is above the high temperature, then the inlet water temperature is set to the low water temperature. If the control temperature is below the low temperature, then system will be turned off and the water mass flow rate will be zero. If the control temperature is between the high and low value, then the inlet water temperature is linearly interpolated between the low and high water temperature values.
- 540 -
Cooling low water temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the low water temperature (in C only) for the temperature control of the constant flow chilled ceiling. For more information on its interpretation, see Cooling High Water Temperature Schedule above.
Cooling high control temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the high control temperature (in C only) for the temperature control of a constant flow chilled ceiling. For more information on its interpretation, see Cooling High Water Temperature Schedule above.
Cooling low control temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the low control temperature (in C only) for the temperature control of a constant flow chilled ceiling. For more information on its interpretation, see Cooling High Water Temperature Schedule above.
CONDENSATION CONTROL Condensation control type

With a chilled ceiling, there is the possibility that condensation will occur on the surface that is being cooled. This is due to the fact that the surface temperature may drop below the dew-point temperature of the space. When this occurs, condensation on the surface will occur. There are two options for handling this situation: 1-Simple Off and 2-Off.
If you choose the 2-Off option, EnergyPlus will not do anything other than produce a warning message when condensation is predicted to occur. The simulation will simply proceed; no moisture will be removed from the zone air and there will be no adjustment of the surface temperature as a result of the condensation. When the 1-Simple off option is selected, EnergyPlus will predict cases where condensation will occur and shut-off the chilled ceiling to avoid this situation. With this latter option, you also have the opportunity to adjust when the system will shut down. This is specified with the Condensation Control Dew-point Offset, below.
Condensation control dew-point offset

This setting (in C or F) is only valid with the 1-Simple off condensation handling algorithm (see Condensation control type above). It establishes the difference between the calculated dew-point temperature of the space and the allowed surface temperature to which the surface can drop before the chilled ceiling shuts down. This setting can be any positive, negative, or zero value. When this parameter is zero, the chilled ceiling will shut down when the surface temperature drops to the dew-point temperature or below. When this parameter is positive, the radiant system will shut down when the surface is this value above the dewpoint temperature. This allows some extra safety to avoid condensation. When this parameter is negative, the chilled ceiling will shut down when the surface temperature is this value below the dew-point temperature. While not recommended, this strategy allows the user to simulate a situation where small amounts of condensation are tolerable.

This schedule that denotes whether the component can run during a given hour. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit is available and can be on during the hour. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit is not available and must be off for the hour.
- 541 -
Chilled Ceiling - Variable Flow

Similar to the constant flow chilled ceiling but control of the variable flow chilled ceiling is accomplished by throttling the chilled water flow to the unit. Note one big advantage of the EnergyPlus variable flow chilled ceiling over the constant flow chilled ceiling is that it is fully autosizable.
GENERAL Name
This is a read-only label that is automatically generated by the software and which incorporates the name of the zone in which the chilled ceiling is located.
Type
There are two types of chilled ceiling available: 1-Constant flow and 2-Variable flow.

This is the inside diameter of the tubes through which water is circulated (in m or in). The inside diameter is used to determine the convective heat transfer from the water to the inside surface of the hydronic tubing.

This is the total length of embedded pipe (in m or ft). The length of the tube is used to determine the effectiveness of heat transfer from the fluid being circulated through the tubes and the tube/surface. Longer tubing lengths result in more heat that will be transferred to/from the radiant surface to the circulating fluid. This value is auto-sizable.
FLOW SETTINGS Maximum cold water flow rate

This is the maximum flow rate of cold water through the chilled ceiling (in m 3/s or gal/min). The controls for the ceiling will vary the flow rate of hot water through the surface(s) using zero flow and the maximum flow rate specified in this field as the lower and upper bounds, respectively. This value is auto-sizable.

Along with setpoint (control) and water schedules, this setting allows you to specify how the chilled ceiling is to be controlled. The temperature denoted in the setpoint schedule can refer to one of five different temperatures: the zone mean air temperature, the zone mean radiant temperature, the zone operative temperature, the outdoor drybulb temperature, or the outdoor wet-bulb temperature. The choice of temperature is controlled by the temperature control type. Select from the following options: 1-Mean air temperature 2-Mean radiant temperature
- 542 -
Chilled Ceiling - Variable Flow
3-Operative temperature 4-Outdoor dry bulb temperature , 5-Outdoor wet bulb temperature
Operative temperature for chilled ceiling controls is the average of Mean air temperature and Mean radiant temperature. See the Throttling range and Cooling control temperature schedule settings for more information.
Cooling control temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the cooling setpoint or control temperature for the chilled ceiling (in C only). Used in conjunction with the Throttling Range, it will define whether or not the system is running and the current flow rate. Water flow rate to the system is varied linearly around the setpoint temperature based on the Throttling Range and the Maximum Cooling Flow Rate parameters (see above). It should be noted that this control schedule will allow different setpoint temperatures throughout the year for heating. The control of the chilled ceiling is based solely on the Cooling Control Temperature Schedule, and the Control Temperature Type listed above. The chilled ceiling will not use any zone thermostat that might be used by other systems serving the zone in which the component resides.
Throttling range
This is the range of temperature (in C or F) over which the chilled ceiling throttles from zero flow rate up to the maximum defined by the Maximum Cold Water Flow Rate described above. The throttling range parameter is used in conjunction with the control temperature to define the response of the system to various zone conditions. The cooling control temperature schedule specifies the setpoint temperature where the flow rate to the system is at half of the maximum flow rate. For example, if the cooling control temperature setpoint is currently 25C and the cooling throttling range is 2C, the water flow rate to the radiant system will be zero when the controlling temperature (see Temperature Control Type below) is at or below 24C and the maximum flow rate when the controlling temperature is at or above 26C. This represents a throttling range of 2C around the setpoint of 25C. In between 24C and 26C, the flow rate to the radiant system is varied linearly.
CONDENSATION CONTROL Condensation control type

With a chilled ceiling, there is the possibility that condensation will occur on the surface that is being cooled. This is due to the fact that the surface temperature may drop below the dew-point temperature of the space. When this occurs, condensation on the surface will occur. There are two options for handling this situation: 1-Simple Off and 2-Off.
- 543 -
If you choose the 2-Off option, EnergyPlus will not do anything other than produce a warning message when condensation is predicted to occur. The simulation will simply proceed; no moisture will be removed from the zone air and there will be no adjustment of the surface temperature as a result of the condensation. When the 1-Simple off option is selected, EnergyPlus will predict cases where condensation will occur and shut-off the chilled ceiling to avoid this situation. With this latter option, you also have the opportunity to adjust when the system will shut down. This is specified with the Condensation Control Dew-point Offset, below.
Condensation control dew-point offset

This setting (in C or F) is only valid with the 1-Simple off condensation handling algorithm (see Condensation control type above). It establishes the difference between the calculated dew-point temperature of the space and the allowed surface temperature to which the surface can drop before the chilled ceiling shuts down. This setting can be any positive, negative, or zero value. When this parameter is zero, the chilled ceiling will shut down when the surface temperature drops to the dew-point temperature or below. When this parameter is positive, the radiant system will shut down when the surface is this value above the dewpoint temperature. This allows some extra safety to avoid condensation. When this parameter is negative, the chilled ceiling will shut down when the surface temperature is this value below the dew-point temperature. While not recommended, this strategy allows the user to simulate a situation where small amounts of condensation are tolerable.

This is the schedule that determines whether or not the component is available for each hour of the simulation. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during the hour. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the hour.
Heated Floor
The heated floor component is a low temperature radiant system and can be used to define heating elements that comprise water fed tubular systems embedded within the floor construction of a building. Two types of heated floor are available in DesignBuilder HVAC, a constant flow and a variable flow system. Note that this system will only control based on the radiant system controls defined for the component and not via a zone thermostat such as is used for forced air systems. If the radiant system is serving a zone with forced air equipment, the radiant system will follow the priority order established by the zone thermostat but will still base its response on the controls defined by the user for the radiant system.
- 544 -
Heated Floor - Constant Flow
Note: The floor constructions of zones in which heated floors are to be positioned must have a special internal source construction which incorporates details of the embedded tubing system. See Internal Source under Constructions for further details. To edit the data associated with a heated floor, you first need to select it by moving the mouse cursor over it and then clicking the mouse button to select it. You can then access the edit dialog by right-clicking the mouse and selecting the Edit selected component option or alternatively, select the Edit selected component tool from the toolbar.
TARGET TAB
When editing the attributes associated with a Heated floor component it is possible to apply the same changes to units in other zones in the same HVAC Zone group. To do this select the components on the Target tab of the edit dialog as required.
Heated Floor - Constant Flow

The constant flow heated floor keeps flow rate constant via a local circulation pump and varies the water temperature that is sent to the floor. This is accomplished with a mixing valve that is controlled by a sensor. The constant flow heated floor type has a built-in local secondary loop. It will re-circulate flow coming out of the system and mix this with flow from the loop to arrive at the desired inlet temperature to the floor (note that this heated floor model has the temperature sensor after the pump to insure proper inlet temperature to the floor). The local loop also contains a pump which is assumed to be upstream of the component and after the mixing valve. So, the local loop can have some recirculation. The flow from the main loop may also bypass the component if more than enough flow is available and the main loop is also a constant flow system.
GENERAL Name
This is a read-only label that is automatically generated by the software and which incorporates the name of the zone in which the heated floor is located.
Type
There are two types of heated floor available: 1-Constant flow and 2-Variable flow

This is the inside diameter of the tubes through which water is circulated (in m or in). The inside diameter is used to determine the convective heat transfer from the water to the inside surface of the hydronic tubing.

This is the total length of embedded pipe (in m or ft). The length of the tube is used to determine the effectiveness of heat transfer from the fluid being circulated through the tubes and the tube/surface. Longer tubing lengths result in more heat that will be transferred to/from the radiant surface to the circulating fluid.
- 545 -
FLOW SETTINGS Rated flow rate

This is the maximum flow rate of water through the heated floor (in m3/sec or gal/min). This flow rate is held constant by the local component pump, but you have the option of varying this flow rate via a schedule (see Pump Flow Rate Schedule). The constant flow system will accept this flow rate and control the inlet temperature based on the control and water temperature schedules defined below.
PUMP SETTINGS Pump flow rate schedule

This schedule modifies the maximum flow rate of water through the heated floor (in m 3/s only). Note that the values for this schedule must be between zero and one.
Rated pump head

This is the pump rated head (Pa or ftH20).

This is the pump rated power consumption (W).
Motor efficiency
This is the pump efficiency in decimal form (0 = 0%, 1 = 100%).

This is the fraction of the pump power lost to the fluid.

Along with setpoint (control) and water schedules, this setting allows you to specify how the heated floor is to be controlled. The temperature denoted in the setpoint schedule can refer to one of five different temperatures: the zone mean air temperature, the zone mean radiant temperature, the zone operative temperature, the outdoor drybulb temperature, or the outdoor wet-bulb temperature. The choice of temperature is controlled by the temperature control type. The user must select from the following options: 1-Mean air temperature 2-Mean radiant temperature 3-Operative temperature 4-Outdoor dry bulb temperature , 5-Outdoor wet bulb temperature
Operative temperature for heated floor controls is the average of Mean Air Temperature and Mean Radiant Temperature. See the control temperature schedule settings below for more information.
Heating high water temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the high water temperature (in C only) for the temperature control of the constant flow heated floor. Water and control temperatures for heating work together to provide a linear function that determines the water temperature sent to the heated floor. The current control temperature (see Temperature Control Type above) is compared to the high and low control temperatures at the current time. If the control temperature is above the high temperature, then the system will be turned off and the water mass flow rate will be zero. If the
- 546 -
Heated Floor - Variable Flow
control temperature is below the low temperature, then the inlet water temperature is set to the high water temperature. If the control temperature is between the high and low value, then the inlet water temperature is linearly interpolated between the low and high water temperature values.
Heating low water temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the low water temperature (in C only) for the temperature control of the constant flow heated floor. For more information on its interpretation, Heating high water temperature schedule above.
Heating high control temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the high control temperature (in C only) for the temperature control of a constant flow heated floor. For more information on its interpretation, see Heating high water temperature schedule above.
Heating low control temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the low control temperature (in C only) for the temperature control of a constant flow heated floor. For more information on its interpretation, see Heating high water temperature schedule above.

This is the schedule that denotes whether the component can run during a given timestep. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit is available and can be on during the timestep. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit is not available and must be off for the timestep.
Heated Floor - Variable Flow

Similar to the constant flow heated floor but control of the variable flow heated floor is accomplished by throttling the hot water flow to the unit. Note one big advantage of the EnergyPlus variable flow heated floor over the constant flow heated floor is that it is fully autosizable.
- 547 -
Name
This is a read-only label that is automatically generated by the software and which incorporates the name of the zone in which the heated floor is located.
Type
There are two types of heated floor available: 1-Constant flow and 2-Variable flow.

This is the inside diameter of the tubes through which water is circulated (in m or in). The inside diameter should be entered in metres and is used to determine the convective heat transfer from the water to the inside surface of the hydronic tubing.

This is the total length of embedded pipe (in m or ft). The length of the tube is used to determine the effectiveness of heat transfer from the fluid being circulated through the tubes and the tube/surface. Longer tubing lengths result in more heat that will be transferred to/from the radiant surface to the circulating fluid. This data is auto-sizable.
FLOW SETTINGS Maximum hot water flow rate

This is the maximum flow rate of hot water through the heated floor (in m 3/s or gal/min). The controls for the floor will vary the flow rate of hot water through the surface(s) using zero flow and the maximum flow rate specified in this field as the lower and upper bounds, respectively.

Along with setpoint (control) and water schedules, this setting allows you to specify how the heated floor is to be controlled. The temperature denoted in the setpoint schedule can refer to one of five different temperatures: the zone mean air temperature, the zone mean radiant temperature, the zone operative temperature, the outdoor drybulb temperature, or the outdoor wet-bulb temperature. The choice of temperature is controlled by the temperature control type. The user must select from the following options: 1-Mean air temperature 2-Mean radiant temperature 3-Operative temperature 4-Outdoor dry bulb temperature , 5-Outdoor wet bulb temperature
Operative temperature for heated floor controls is the average of Mean Air Temperature and Mean Radiant Temperature. See the control temperature schedule settings below for more information.
Heating control temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the heating setpoint or control temperature for the heated floor (in C only). Used in conjunction with the Throttling Range, it will define whether or not the system is running and the current flow rate.
- 548 -
Setpoint Manager
Water flow rate to the system is varied linearly around the setpoint temperature based on the Throttling Range and the Maximum Heating Flow Rate parameters (see above). It should be noted that this control schedule will allow different setpoint temperatures throughout the year for heating. The control of the heated floor is based solely on the Heating Control Temperature Schedule, and the Control Temperature Type listed above. The heated floor will not use any zone thermostat that might be used by other systems serving the zone in which the component resides.
Throttling range
This is the range of temperature (C) which the heated floor throttles from zero flow rate up to the maximum defined by the Maximum Hot Water Flow Rate described above. The throttling range parameter is used in conjunction with the control temperature to define the response of the system to various zone conditions. The heating control temperature schedule specifies the setpoint temperature where the flow rate to the system is at half of the maximum flow rate. For example, if the heating control temperature setpoint is currently 15C and the heating throttling range is 2C, the water flow rate to the system will be zero when the controlling temperature (see Temperature Control Type below) is at or above 16C and the maximum flow rate when the controlling temperature is at or below 14C. This represents a throttling range of 2C around the setpoint of 15C. In between 14C and 16C, the flow rate to the radiant system is varied linearly.
OPERATION Availability Schedule

Setpoint Manager
To edit the data associated with a setpoint manager, you first need to select it by moving the mouse cursor over it and then clicking the mouse button to select it. You can then access the edit dialog by right-clicking the mouse and selecting the Edit selected component option or alternatively, select the Edit selected component tool from the toolbar.
Name
This is the name that you assign to the setpoint manager which should be unique. If the supplied name is not unique, the software will automatically append a backslash and integer to ensure that there are no duplicate names.
- 549 -
Type
There ten different types of setpoint manager available. However only certain types of setpoint manager are available for different types of loop: 1-Scheduled (All loops). 2-Warmest (Generic and dual duct air loops only). 3-Coldest (Generic and dual duct air loops only). 4-Multi-zone minimum humidity average (Air loops only). 5-Multi-zone maximum humidity average (Air loops only). 6-Multi-zone humidity minimum (Air loops only). 7-Multi-zone humidity maximum (Air loops only). 8-Single zone humidity minimum (Air loops only). 9-Single zone humidity maximum (Air loops only). 10-Outdoor air reset (Generic and dual duct air loops, plant and condenser loops).
SCHEDULED SETPOINT MANAGER

Scheduled setpoint managers are available in all loops. A scheduled Setpoint manager will place a scheduled setpoint value at the point or connection in the loop at which the setpoint manager control line has been placed. This value may represent one of several control types: 1-Temperature. 2-Maximum temperature. 3-Minimum temperature. 4-Humidity ratio. 5-Maximum humidity ratio. 6-Minimum humidity ratio. 7-Mass flow rate. 8-Maximum mass flow rate. 9-Minimum mass flow rate.
WARMEST SETPOINT MANAGER

Warmest setpoint managers are available only in Generic and Dual Duct air loops. The warmest setpoint manager resets the cooling supply air temperature of a central forced air HVAC system according to the cooling demand of the warmest zone. For each zone in the system at each system timestep, the manager calculates a supply air temperature that will meet the zone cooling load at the maximum zone supply air flow rate. The lowest of the possible supply air temperatures becomes the new supply air temperature setpoint, subject to minimum and maximum supply air temperature constraints. The resulting temperature setpoint is the highest supply air temperature that will meet the cooling requirements of all the zones. When compared to a fixed cooling supply air temperature setpoint, this strategy minimises zone reheat coil energy (or overcooling) and central chiller energy consumption (if the chilled water temperature is also reset) at the cost of possible increased fan energy.
Minimum Setpoint Temperature

This is the minimum allowed setpoint temperature (in C or F). If the calculated setpoint temperature is less than this minimum, the setpoint is set to the minimum.
Maximum Setpoint Temperature

This is the maximum allowed setpoint temperature (in C or F). If the calculated setpoint is greater than this value the setpoint is set to the maximum. This value is also used as the setpoint temperature when none of the zones have a cooling load.
- 550 -
Setpoint Manager
COLDEST SETPOINT MANAGER

Coldest setpoint managers are available only in Generic and Dual Duct air loops. The coldest setpoint manager is used in dual duct systems to reset the setpoint temperature of the air in the heating supply duct. Usually it is used in conjunction with a Warmest Setpoint Manager resetting the temperature of the air in the cooling supply duct. For each zone in the system at each system timestep, the manager calculates a supply air temperature that will meet the zone heating load at the maximum zone supply air flow rate. The highest of the possible supply air temperatures becomes the new supply air temperature setpoint, subject to minimum and maximum supply air temperature constraints. The resulting temperature setpoint is the lowest supply air temperature that will meet the heating requirements of all the zones. When compared to a fixed heating supply air temperature setpoint, this strategy minimises central boiler energy consumption (if the hot water temperature is also reset or there are variable speed pumps) at the cost of possible increased fan energy (if there is variable volume control in the air system).
Minimum Setpoint Temperature

This is the minimum allowed setpoint temperature (in C or F). If the calculated setpoint temperature is less than this minimum, the setpoint is set to the minimum. This value is also used as the setpoint temperature when none of the zones have a heating load.
Maximum Setpoint Temperature

This is the maximum allowed setpoint temperature (in C or F). If the calculated setpoint is greater than this value the setpoint is set to the maximum.
MULTI-ZONE MINIMUM HUMIDITY AVERAGE SETPOINT MANAGER

This setpoint manager allows for controlling the minimum humidity level in multiple zones served by a central forced air HVAC system (air loop). This setpoint manager, together with humidistats which must be defined for the controlled zones, detects the air humidity level in multiple controlled zones served by the HVAC air loop and uses air/moisture mass balances to calculate an average supply air humidity ratio needed to maintain the zone relative humidity levels near their respective humidifying setpoints. The calculated humidity ratio is then used as the minimum humidity ratio setpoint for the designated setpoint node(s). A humidification component (e.g. humidifier) placed upstream of the setpoint node can then use the minimum humidity ratio setpoint to control humidification rate. Note: This setpoint manager requires that humidistats are specified for the controlled zones.
Minimum Setpoint Humidity Ratio

This is the minimum humidity ratio (kg/kg) that is allowed by this setpoint manager. If the calculated setpoint humidity ratio is less than this value, then the setpoint is set to this minimum value.
Maximum Setpoint Humidity Ratio

This is the maximum humidity ratio (kg/kg) that is allowed by this setpoint manager. If the calculated setpoint humidity ratio is greater than this value, then the setpoint is set to this maximum value.
MULTI-ZONE MAXIMUM HUMIDITY AVERAGE SETPOINT MANAGER

This setpoint manager allows for controlling the maximum humidity level in multiple zones served by a central forced air HVAC system (air loop). This setpoint manager, together with humidistats which must be defined for the controlled zones, detects the air humidity level in multiple controlled zones served by the HVAC air loop and uses air/moisture mass balances to calculate an average supply air humidity ratio needed to maintain the zone relative humidity levels near their respective dehumidifying setpoints. The calculated humidity ratio is then used as the maximum humidity ratio setpoint for the designated setpoint node(s). A dehumidification component (e.g. water cooling coil) placed upstream of the setpoint node can then use the maximum humidity ratio setpoint to control its moisture removal rate.
- 551 -
In the case of a chilled water coil which is used for both temperature and high humidity control, this setpoint manager works in conjunction with the coil controller to determine the supply air temperature required to meet both the temperature (sensible) and humidity (latent) load in the control zone. Note: This setpoint manager requires that humidistats are specified for the controlled zones.


This is the maximum humidity ratio (in kg/kg) that is allowed by this set point manager. If the calculated setpoint humidity ratio is greater than this value, then the setpoint is set to this maximum value.
MULTI-ZONE HUMIDITY MINIMUM SETPOINT MANAGER

This setpoint manager allows for controlling the minimum humidity level in multiple zones served by a central forced air HVAC system (air loop). This setpoint manager, together with humidistats which must be defined for the controlled zones, detects the air humidity level in multiple controlled zones served by the HVAC air loop and uses air/moisture mass balances to calculate a supply air minimum humidity ratio based on a zone with the critical humidification requirement (i.e., a zone with the highest humidity ratio setpoint) to maintain the zone relative humidity levels near their respective humidifying setpoints. The calculated humidity ratio is then used as the minimum humidity ratio setpoint for the designated setpoint node(s). A humidification component (e.g. humidifier) placed upstream of the setpoint node can then use the minimum humidity ratio setpoint to control humidification rate. If a humidistat is defined for only one of the zones served by the air loop then this setpoint manager behaves in the same way as the Single Zone Humidity Minimum setpoint manager. Note: This setpoint manager requires that humidistats are specified for the controlled zones.


This is the maximum humidity ratio (kg/kg) that is allowed by this setpoint manager. If the calculated setpoint humidity ratio is greater than this value, then the setpoint is set to this maximum value.
MULTI-ZONE HUMIDITY MAXIMUM SETPOINT MANAGER

This setpoint manager allows for controlling the maximum humidity level in multiple zones served by a central forced air HVAC system (air loop). This setpoint manager, used in conjunction with one or more Zone humidistat objects, detects the air humidity level in multiple controlled zones served by the HVAC air loop and uses air/moisture mass balances to calculate the maximum supply air humidity ratio based on a zone with the critical dehumidification requirement (i.e., a zone with the lowest humidity ratio setpoint) to maintain the zone relative humidity levels near their respective dehumidifying setpoints. The calculated humidity ratio is then used as the maximum humidity ratio setpoint for the designated setpoint node(s). A dehumidification component (e.g., desiccant dehumidifier) placed upstream of the setpoint node can then use the maximum humidity ratio setpoint to control its moisture removal rate. The use of this object requires that a Zone Humidistat object be specified with a dehumidifying relative humidity schedule for one or more controlled zones served by the HVAC air loop. If the Zone Humidistat is defined for only one of the zones served by the air loop then this Setpoint Manager performs as a Single zone humidity maximum setpoint manager.
- 552 -
Setpoint Manager
In the case of a chilled water coil which is used for both temperature and high humidity control, this setpoint manager works in conjunction with a the controller associated with the Cooling coil - water object to determine the supply air temperature required to meet both the temperature (sensible) and dehumidification (latent) load in the control zone. See object Controller:WaterCoil in the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference for a detailed discussion of how this is achieved.

The minimum humidity ratio (in kg/kg) that is allowed by this setpoint manager. If the calculated setpoint humidity ratio is less than this value, then the setpoint is set to this minimum value. The default value is 0.008 kg/kg.

The maximum humidity ratio (in kg/kg) that is allowed by this set point manager. If the calculated setpoint humidity ratio is greater than this value, then the setpoint is set to this maximum value. The default value is 0.015 kg/kg.
SINGLE ZONE HUMIDITY MINIMUM SETPOINT MANAGER

The Single Zone Minimum Humidity Setpoint Manager allows the control of a single zone minimum humidity level. This setpoint manager detects the humidity level in a control zone and, using air and moisture mass balance, calculates the supply air humidity ratio needed to maintain the zone relative humidity at or above a given setpoint. The calculated supply air humidity ratio is then used as the setpoint for the designated setpoint node. A humidifier component placed upstream of the setpoint node can then use the humidity ratio setpoint to control its moisture addition rate. Note: This setpoint manager requires that a humidistat be specified for the controlled zone.
Control Zone
Click on the <Select zone> label and then click on the displayed ellipsis button to bring up the zone selector dialog. Select the zone for humidity control.
SINGLE ZONE HUMIDITY MAXIMUM SETPOINT MANAGER

The Single Zone Maximum Humidity Setpoint Manager allows the control of a single zone maximum humidity level. This setpoint manager, together with a humidistat which must be defined for the controlled zone, detects the air humidity level in a single control zone and uses air/moisture mass balances to calculate the supply air humidity ratio needed to maintain the zone relative humidity at or below a given setpoint. The calculated supply air humidity ratio is then used as the setpoint for the designated setpoint node. A dehumidification component placed upstream of this node can then use the humidity ratio setpoint to control its moisture removal rate (e.g. water cooling coil). In the case of a chilled water coil which is used for both temperature and high humidity control, this setpoint manager works in conjunction with the coil controller to determine the minimum supply air temperature required to meet both the temperature (sensible) and humidity (latent) load in the control zone. Note: This setpoint manager requires that a humidistat be specified for the controlled zone.
Control Zone
Click on the <Select zone> label and then click on the displayed ellipsis button to bring up the zone selector dialog. Select the zone for humidity control.
- 553 -
OUTDOOR AIR RESET SETPOINT MANAGER

The Outdoor Air Reset Setpoint Manager sets the supply air temperature according to the outdoor air temperature using a reset rule. The reset rule is determined by 2 points: the supply air setpoint temperature at the outdoor high temperature (SATOH) and the supply air setpoint temperature at the outdoor low temperature (SATOL). If the outdoor temperature is above the outdoor high temperature, the supply air temperature is set to SATOH. If the outdoor temperature is below the outdoor low temperature, the supply air temperature is set to SATOL. If the outdoor temperature is between the outdoor high and outdoor low temperatures, the supply air temperature is linearly interpolated between SATOH and SATOL. An optional second reset rule may be defined.
Setpoint at Outdoor Low Temperature

This is the setpoint (C) at the outdoor low temperature for the first reset rule.
Outdoor Low Temperature

This is the outdoor air low temperature (C) for the first supply air temperature reset rule. Generally, at this outdoor air temperature the supply temperature is at its maximum.
Setpoint at Outdoor High Temperature

This is the setpoint temperature (C) at the outdoor high temperature for the first reset rule.
Outdoor High Temperature

This is the outdoor air high temperature (C) for the first supply air temperature reset rule. Generally, at this outdoor air temperature the supply temperature is at its minimum.
Second Reset Rule

This check-box allows you to define a second reset rule.
Second Reset Schedule

This is the schedule whose values indicate which reset rule to use. Schedule values of 1 indicate that the first reset rule will be used. Schedule values of 2 select the second reset rule.
Second Reset Rule Setpoint at Outdoor Low Temperature

This is the setpoint temperature (C) at the outdoor low temperature for the second reset rule.
Second Reset Rule Outdoor Low Temperature

This is the outdoor air low temperature (C) for the second supply air temperature reset rule. Generally, at this outdoor air temperature the supply temperature is at its maximum.
Second Reset Rule Setpoint at Outdoor High Temperature

This is the setpoint temperature (C) at the outdoor high temperature for the second reset rule.
Second Reset Rule Outdoor High Temperature

This is the outdoor air high temperature (C) for the second supply air temperature reset rule. Generally, at this outdoor air temperature the supply temperature is at its minimum.
- 554 -
DHW
DHW
Domestic Hot Water (DHW) is provided in DesignBuilder Detailed HVAC through DHW loops, Water outlet groups and Water outlet components. DHW loops are added at the HVAC System level. On the demand side of the DHW sub loops, Water outlet groups can be added. However a default Water outlet group is provided with the initial DHW loop so in many cases you will not need to add a new Water outlet group. Instead simply navigate to the default Water outlet group and add one or more Water outlet components to define hot water consumption and any heat transfer to a building zone. If you are working with the default 1-Simple HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data model option then simply associate the zones to be connected on the Zones served tab of the dialog. In many cases this would be all occupied zones in the building. In this case the amount of DHW consumed is calculated as a function of the activity in the zone. For example, there is a demand assumed to arise from the occupants of an office for activities such as washing hands and washing up cups. This demand is associated with the office rather than the toilet or tea room. Thus the demand from each space needs to be assigned to a DHW system even if the system itself is not present in the space. On the other hand, when using the 2-Detailed HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data model option it would normally make more sense to model the actual water draw off rates in the rooms where hot water is consumed (toilet, tea room, shower etc). Tip: For consistency with Simple and Compact HVAC use the default 1-Simple HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data model option, create a single DHW loop, use the default Water outlet group and Water outlet provided with the DHW loop and select all zones in the building on the Zones served tab of the Water outlet.
Water Outlet Group
- 555 -
The Water outlet group component is used to group Water outlet components and connect them to a Water heater. Water outlet groups are placed on the demand sub loop of a DHW loop as shown in the screenshot above. To add new Water outlets to a Water outlet group first navigate to the Water outlet group and then use the Add water outlet toolbar option. You can edit the details for each Water outlet by right clicking on it in the Water outlet group screen image and selecting the Edit drop down menu option.
DRAIN WATER HEAT EXCHANGER Drain water heat exchanger type

The heat exchanger type to be used for drain water heat recovery. The options are: 1-None indicating no heat recovery is to be simulated. 2-Ideal sets a heat exchanger effectiveness of 1.0. 3-Counter flow where effectiveness is calculated dynamically 4-Cross flow where effectiveness is calculated dynamically. One popular type of drain water heat exchanger is the Gravity-Film Heat Exchanger (GFX). The GFX is most closely approximated with the 3-Counter flow option, but keep in mind that the UA varies more with flow rate for the GFX than for most traditional heat exchangers.
Drain water heat exchanger destination

The heat exchanger configuration to be used for drain water heat recovery. The configuration determines where the heat will be used after it is recovered. The options are: 1-Plant which indicates that the all of the recovered heat will be sent to the return flow at the outlet node of the Water outlets to preheat the make-up cold water from the water mains. 2-Equipment, indicating that the all of the recovered heat will be used to preheat the cold water flow side of the Water outlets listed in this Water outlet group 3-Plant and Equipment, indicating that the recovered heat will be divided between the plant and the Water outlets, as described above. This is the only option where the flow rates are equal in the drain and the heat exchanger.
Drain water heat exchanger UA

The UA is the heat transfer coefficient (in W/K or Btu/h-F) for the heat exchanger. It is the product of U, the overall heat transfer coefficient, and A, the heat exchanger surface area.
Water Outlet
The Water outlet component defines hot water consumption, delivery temperatures as well as any heat conduction and latent gains to zones. Water outlets must be associated with a previously defined Water outlet group.
GENERAL Name
Enter a unique name for the water outlet.
Target temperature schedule

Select a schedule defining the temperature of the water delivered from taps etc.
- 556 -
Water Outlet
FLOW RATE
Note: The data under the Flow Rate header is only shown when using the 2-Detailed HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data setting.
Peak flow rate

The peak demanded hot water flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min). This value is multiplied by the Flow rate fraction schedule (below) to determine the actual volumetric flow rate at any time in the simulation.
Flow rate fraction schedule

Select the schedule specifying the flow rate fraction relative to the Peak flow rate (above).
HEAT GAIN TO ZONE Heat gain to zone

Check this option if you wish to model sensible and/or latent heat transfer from the Water outlet to a zone in the building model.
Zone
Select the zone to receive sensible and/or latent loads from this water outlet.
Sensible Fraction Schedule Name

Select the schedule specifying the fraction of the maximum possible sensible heat gain (based on inlet water conditions and ambient zone conditions) that is added to the zone. Select schedule Off for no sensible load.
Latent Fraction Schedule Name

Select the schedule specifying the fraction of the maximum possible latent heat gain (based on inlet water conditions and ambient zone conditions) that is added to the zone. Select schedule Off for no latent load.
ZONES SERVED
The Zones served tab on the Water outlet dialog is only visible when using the default 1-Simple HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data setting. It allows you select the zones served by this Water outlet. For these zones the actual hot water consumption rates used in the simulation are generated based on the DHW consumption rate set on the Activity tab and the DHW Operation schedule on the HVAC tab in the same way as for Simple and Compact HVAC. Check the boxes of the zones to be served by this Water outlet as shown below.
- 557 -
Tip: You can use the checkboxes at building and block levels as a fast way to select/deselect all of the available zones in the building or block. Note: Any zones selected on the Zones served tab will not consume hot water in the simulation if their DHW consumption rate is 0. This means that you can select all zones in a building without concern for generating DHW demand for unoccupied zones.
Water Heater
Used in:
WaterHeater:Mixed WaterHeater:Sizing
Supply side of DHW Loops
The Water heater simulates a well-mixed, single-node water tank. It can be used for simulating many types of water heaters and storage tanks, including gas and electric residential water heaters, and a variety of large commercial water heaters. It models stand-alone operation, on- and off-cycle parasitic loads and thermal losses to the zone, instantaneous/tankless water heaters The Water heater analytically solves the differential equation governing the energy balance of the water tank. Within a timestep, conditions are solved separately for when the heater element or burner is "on" (on-cycle) and when it is "off" (off-cycle). This approach allows ambient losses and parasitic loads to be divided into on-cycle and off-cycle effects and accounted for in detail. For losses to the ambient environment, the ambient air temperature can be taken from a schedule, a zone, or the exterior. When used with a zone, a fraction of the skin losses can be added to the zone heat balance as internal heat gains. Control options allow the heater to cycle or modulate to meet the load. When cycling, the heater element or burner is either on or off. The heater remains fully on while heating the tank up to the setpoint temperature. When the setpoint is reached, the heater turns off. The heater remains off until the tank temperature falls below the "cut-in" temperature, i.e., the setpoint temperature minus the deadband temperature difference. The heater continuously cycles on and off to maintain the tank temperature within the deadband. Most storage-tank water heaters cycle.
- 558 -
Water Heater
When modulating, the heater power varies between the maximum and minimum heater capacities. The heater stays on as long as the required total demand is above the minimum capacity. Below the minimum capacity, the heater will begin to cycle on and off based on the deadband temperature difference. Equipment is usually designed and rated to avoid this condition. Most tankless/instantaneous water heaters modulate.
GENERAL Name
The name of the Water heater object.
Tank volume
The volume of the storage tank (in m3 or ft3). This field is autosizable based on the Sizing data. Although this field is allowed to go down to zero, even so-called "tankless" water heaters have some volume of water that is maintained around the heating elements or in the heat exchanger, typically around 0.00379 m3 (1 gallon).
EXTERNAL HEATING PLANT CONNECTION External heating plant connection

Check this option if the water heater is to be supplied with heat from a Hot water loop. In this case inlet and outlet connections are included on the bottom of the water heater allowing the connection to be made to the demand side of the Hot water plant loop.
Indirect water heating recovery time

This field is only required when the External heating plant option is checked, i.e. when the water heater is connected to the demand side of a plant loop. It is used to provide a design parameter for autosizing design flow rates The recovery time is expressed in hours. This is the time that the entire volume of the tank can be heated from 14.4C to 57.2C (58F to 135F) with an inlet temperature defined as the exit temperature in the associated Plant Sizing object. The default is 1.5 hours. The calculation is based on log-mean temperature difference (LMTD) and includes the heat transfer effectiveness factor entered above.
TEMPERATURE SETTINGS Setpoint temperature schedule

Select the Schedule that defines the hot water temperature setpoint in C. Also known as the "cut-out" temperature.
Deadband temperature difference

The delta temperature difference (in C or F) between the setpoint and the "cut -in" temperature at which the heater will turn on. In other words, the "cut-in" temperature is Setpoint Deadband.
Maximum temperature limit

The temperature (in C or F) at which the tank water becomes dangerously hot and is vented through boiling or an automatic safety. The tank temperature will never exceed the maximum. Any extra heat added to the tank is immediately vented. Note: The maximum temperature must be greater than the setpoint temperature at all times.
- 559 -
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SETTINGS Ambient temperature indicator

The Ambient temperature indicator specifies how the temperature of the air surrounding the Water heater is to be defined. These options are available: 1-Schedule where the Ambient temperature schedule field defines the ambient temperature. 2-Zone where the zone air temperature of the zone specified by Ambient temperature zone, below, provides the ambient temperature 3-Outdoors where the outdoor dry-bulb air temperature provides the ambient temperature for the water heater.
Ambient temperature schedule

Select the schedule specifying the ambient air temperature around the tank for skin losses. This field is only required if Ambient temperature indicator is 1-Schedule.
Ambient temperature zone

The building zone specifying the ambient air temperature around the tank for skin losses. This field is only required if Ambient temperature indicator is 2-Zone.
On-Cycle loss coefficient to ambient temperature

The loss coefficient (in W/K or Btu/h-F) to the ambient air temperature. Often this coefficient is identical to the "UA" for skin losses. If the loss effects of the flue are being modelled in the Off-Cycle Loss Coefficient, than this field would have a different value accounting only for the skin losses.
On-Cycle loss fraction to zone

If the Ambient temperature indicator is 2-Zone, this field adds the specified fraction of the on-cycle losses to the zone heat balance as an internal gain.
HEATER SETTINGS Heater control type

The control type can be one of: 1-Cycle for most storage tank water heaters, or, 2-Modulate for most instantaneous, tank-less water heaters.
Heater maximum capacity

The maximum heat rate (in W or btu/h) that can be supplied to the water, probably the same as the "nominal" capacity. This field is autosizable.
Heater minimum capacity

The minimum heat rate (in W or btu/h) that can be supplied to the water. This field is only used when the Heater control type is 2-Modulate. If the total demand rate for heating is less than the minimum, even a modulating water heater will begin to cycle.
Heater fuel type

The type of fuel used for heating. The fuel type can be one of: 1-Electricity, 2-Natural gas,
- 560 -
Water Heater
3-Propane gas, 4-Fuel oil #1, 5-Fuel oil #2, 6-Coal, 7-Diesel, 8-Gasoline, 9-Steam, or 10-District heating.
Heater thermal efficiency

The thermal conversion efficiency from fuel energy to heat energy for the heater element or burner. This is not the same as the overall efficiency of the water heater.
Heater part load factor curve

Select the Quadratic or Cubic curve that relates the overall efficiency of the water heater to the runtime fraction (if Control Type 1-Cycle) or part load ratio (if Control type is 2-Modulate). This is an additional multiplier applied to the Heater thermal efficiency above, to compute fuel energy use. The Part load factor curve should not have a value less than 0.1 in the domain from 0 to 1. Note: If the curve accounts for ambient losses and/or parasitic fuel consumption, these effects should not also be input into the related fields in this object as that would result in double-counting.
ON-CYCLE SETTINGS On-Cycle parasitic fuel consumption rate

On-cycle parasitics include parts of the water heater that consume fuel when the heater is on, for example, an induction fan, or stand-by electronic control circuits. The fuel consumption rate (in W or Btu/h) is the total fuel that is consumed by all of the on-cycle parasitics.
On-Cycle parasitic fuel type

The type of fuel used by the on-cycle parasitics. The fuel type can be 1-Electricity, 2-Natural gas, 3-Propane gas, 4-Fuel oil #1, 5-Fuel oil #2, 6-Coal, 7-Diesel, 8-Gasoline, 9-Steam, or 10-District heating.
The fuel type can be the same or different from the Heater Fuel Type.
On-Cycle parasitic heat fraction to tank

The fraction of on-cycle parasitic fuel energy that is converted to heat energy that ends up in the tank water. For example, an induction fan might (maybe) deliver a small fraction of its energy to the tank water for a value of 0.05. Electronic control circuits, on the other hand, do not add any heat to the tank and should be 0.
- 561 -
OFF-CYCLE SETTINGS Off-Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate

Off-cycle parasitics include parts of the water heater that consume fuel when the heater is off, for example, a pilot light, or stand-by electronic control circuits. The fuel consumption rate (in W or Btu/h) is strictly the total fuel that is consumed by all of the off-cycle parasitics.
Off-Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type

The type of fuel used by the off-cycle parasitics. The fuel type can be one of 1-Electricity, 2-Natural gas, 3-Propane gas, 4-Fuel oil #1, 5-Fuel oil #2, 6-Coal, 7-Diesel, 8-Gasoline, 9-Steam, or 10-District heating.
The fuel type can be the same or different from the Heater fuel type.
Off-Cycle parasitic heat fraction to tank

The fraction of off-cycle parasitic fuel energy that is converted to heat energy that ends up in the tank water. For example, a pilot light would deliver most of its heat to the tank water, as long as the thermal conversion efficiency must be taken into account, so perhaps 0.80 is reasonable. Electronic control circuits, on the other hand, do not add any heat to the tank and should be 0.
Off-Cycle loss coefficient to ambient temperature

The loss coefficient (in W/K or Btu/h-F) to the ambient air temperature. Often this coefficient is identical to the "UA" for skin losses. However, it can also be used to model the loss effects of the flue in a combustion water heater, in addition to the skin losses.
Off-Cycle loss fraction to zone

If the Ambient temperature indicator is 2-Zone, this field adds the specified fraction of the off-cycle losses to the zone heat balance as an internal gain.
USE-SIDE SETTINGS Use side effectiveness

This field specifies the heat transfer effectiveness between the use side water and the tank water. If the effectiveness is set to 1 then complete heat transfer occurs, simulating perfect mixing of the use side water and the tank water. If the effectiveness is lower, then the use side outlet water temperature will not be as hot as the tank water, simulating a heat exchanger.
Use side design flow rate

This field is optional and is used to specify the design flow rate through the Use Side of the water heater. The volumetric design flow rate is specified in m3/s or gal/min. The field is needed when the Use side is connected to a plant loop. The field can be autosized. Sizing results are reported in the EIO file.
- 562 -
Water Heater
SOURCE-SIDE SETTINGS Source side effectiveness

This field specifies the heat transfer effectiveness between the source side water and the tank water. If the effectiveness is set to 1 then complete heat transfer occurs, simulating perfect mixing of the source side water and the tank water. If the effectiveness is lower, then the source side outlet water temperature will not be as hot as the tank water, simulating a heat exchanger.
Source side design flow rate

This field is optional and is used to specify the design flow rate through the Source Side of the water heater. The volumetric design flow rate is specified in m3/s or gal/min. The field is needed when the Source Side is connected to a plant loop. The field can be autosized. Sizing results are reported in the EIO file.
SIZING
The Water heater sizing data is entered on the Sizing tab.
Design mode
This field describes the method to be used for sizing the water heater. There are six choices: 1-Peak draw. This design method uses the design flow rates of all the different demands placed on the water heater. The tank size is based on how long it can meet the demand and how quickly it can recover. The user enters the time in hours that the water heater can meet the demands. Only the hot water uses connected to an individual water heater are included in that water heaters peak draw. 2-Residential HUD-FHA minimum This design method is based on minimum permissible water heater sizes (established by HUD-FHA in its Minimum Property Standards for One- and Two-Family Living Units, No. 4900.1-1982). The user enters the number of bathrooms and bedrooms in this input object. The smallest allowable water heater sizes are used. 3-Per person This design method scales sizes based on the total number of people in all zones in the building. Each water heater in the model will be sized using the total (peak, design) number of people for the entire model. The number of people is determined from People objects defined elsewhere in the input file 4-Per floor area This design method scales sizes based on the total floor area in all the zones in the building. Each water heater in the model will be sized using all the floor area in the model. The floor areas are determined from the geometry input elsewhere in the input file. 5-Per unit This design method scales sizes based on an arbitrary number of units. This can be used, for example, to size based on the number of rooms in a lodging building. The user provides the number of units in an input field in this object. 6-Per solar collector area This design method scales tank volume based on the collector area for a solar hot water collector. The collector area is summed for all the collectors in the model and each tank is sized for the total. The collector area is determined from input for Solar Collectors defined elsewhere in the input file.
Time storage can meet peak draw

This field provides the time, in hours, that the tanks volume can sustain a peak draw. It is used to size the tanks volume which is the simple product of peak draw volume flow rate and the draw time. There is no assurance that the water will be at the desired temperature for the entire draw. This field is only used if the Design mode is 1Peak draw. The water heater must be connected to a full plant loop and be on the supply side.
Time for tank recovery

This field provides the time, in hours, that tanks heater needs to recover the volume of the tank. The temperatures used to define recovery are a starting temperature of 14.4C (58F) and a final temperature of 57.2C (135F). Time for tank recovery data is only required if the Design mode is 1-Peak draw.
- 563 -
Nominal tank volume for autosizing plant connections

This field is used in case the water heater is indirectly heated by its source side connections and they are also autosized. The units are m3 or ft3. Because of the complexity of such a water heater and the timing for when sizing calculation happen inside EnergyPlus, the Source side connection flow rates need to be reported before the tanks volume can be sized to meet Peak draw. This input field is used to provide a nominal tank volume to use temporarily while the flow connections are sized. This field is only required if the Design mode is 1-Peak draw and the water heater has autosized plant connections on the demand side.
Number of bedrooms
This field is used to enter the number of bedrooms in the model. It is only required if the Design mode is 2Residential HUD-FHA minimum.
Number of bathrooms
This field is used to enter the number of bathrooms in the model. It is only required if the Design mode is 2Residential HUD-FHA minimum.
Storage capacity per person

This field is used to enter the tanks storage volume on per-person basis. The units are m3/person or ft3/person. The storage capacity per person is only required if the Design mode is 3-Per person.
Recovery capacity per person

This field is used to enter the recovery capacity per person in units of m3/person-hr or ft3/person-h. This is the volume of water the heater can recover in one hour per person. Recovery is heating water from a starting temperature of 14.4C (58F) to a final temperature of 57.2C (135F). The Recovery capacity per person is only required if the Design mode is 3-Per person.
Storage capacity per floor area

This field is used to enter the tanks storage volume on a per-floor-area basis. The units are m3 /m2 or ft3/ft2. The Recovery capacity per person is only required if the Design mode is 3-Per person.
Recovery capacity per floor area

This field is used to enter the recovery capacity per floor area in units of m3/h-m2 or ft3/h-ft2. This is the volume water the heater can recover in an hour per floor area. Recovery is heating water from a starting temperature of 14.4C (58F) to a final temperature of 57.2C (135F). The Recovery capacity per floor area is only required if the Design mode is 4-Per floor area
Number of units
This field is used to enter the number of Units for use in sizing on per-Unit basis with the next two fields. The Number of units data only required if the Design mode is 5-Per unit. This can be used to account for any arbitrary item such as lodging rooms, desks, water fixtures, restrooms, etc.
Storage capacity per unit

This field is used to enter the tanks storage volume on per-Unit basis. The units are m3/h or ft3/h. The number of Units is entered in the previous field. The Storage capacity per unit is only required if the Design mode is 5-Per unit.
Recovery capacity per unit

This field is used to enter the recover capacity per Unit in units of m3/h or ft3/h. This is the volume of water the heater can recover in an hour per Unit. Recovery is heating water from a starting temperature of 14.4C (58F) to a final temperature of 57.2C (135F). This field is only required if the Design mode is 5-Per unit.
- 564 -
Water Heater
Storage capacity per collector area

This field is used to enter the tanks storage volume on per-solar-collector-area basis. The units are m3/m2 or f3/m2. The Recovery capacity per unit is only required if the Design mode is 6-Per solar collector area.
WATER HEATER OUTPUTS

The following Water heater output variables are available: HVAC,Average,Water Heater Tank Temperature [C] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Final Tank Temperature [C] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Loss Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Loss Energy [J] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Use Flow Rate [kg/s] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Use Inlet Temperature [C] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Use Outlet Temperature [C] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Use Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Use Energy [J] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Source Flow Rate [kg/s] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Source Inlet Temperature [C] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Source Outlet Temperature [C] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Source Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Source Energy [J] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Off-Cycle Parasitic Heat Rate To Tank [W] HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Off-Cycle Parasitic Heat Energy To Tank [J] HVAC,Average,Water Heater On-Cycle Parasitic Heat Rate To Tank [W] HVAC,Sum,Water Heater On-Cycle Parasitic Heat Energy To Tank [J] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Total Demand Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Total Demand Energy [J] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Heating Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Heating Energy [J] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Unmet Demand Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Unmet Demand Energy [J] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Venting Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Venting Energy [J] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Net Heat Tranfer Rate [W] HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Net Heat Tranfer Energy [J] HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Cycle On Count [] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Runtime Fraction [] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Part Load Ratio [] HVAC,Average,Water Heater <Fuel Type> Consumption Rate[W] HVAC,Sum,Water Heater <Fuel Type>Consumption [J] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Off-Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Consumption Rate[W] HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Off-Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Consumption [J] HVAC,Average,Water Heater On-Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Consumption Rate[W] HVAC,Sum,Water Heater On-Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Consumption [J] HVAC,Average,Water Heater Water Consumption Rate [m3/s] HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Water Consumption [m3]
Water Heater Tank Temperature [C]

The average water tank temperature.
Water Heater Final Tank Temperature [C]

The final water tank temperature at the end of the system timestep. If reported at the "Detailed" interval, this report variable can be used to verify an exact energy balance on the water heater. Also see the report variable: Water Heater Net Heat Transfer Energy.
- 565 -
Water Heater Loss Rate [W]

The average heat loss rate due to the off- and on-cycle loss coefficients to the ambient temperature.
Water Heater Loss Energy [J]

The heat loss energy due to the off- and on-cycle loss coefficients to the ambient temperature.
Water Heater Use Flow Rate [kg/s]

The use side mass flow rate. If stand-alone, this is the scheduled use flow rate.
Water Heater Use Inlet Temperature [C]

The inlet temperature on the use side.
Water Heater Use Outlet Temperature [C]

The outlet temperature on the use side.
Water Heater Use Rate [W]

The average heat transfer rate between the use side water and the tank water.
Water Heater Use Energy [J]

The heat transfer energy between the use side water and the tank water.
Water Heater Source Flow Rate [kg/s]

The source side mass flow rate. If in stand-alone operation, this is 0.
Water Heater Source Inlet Temperature [C]

The inlet temperature on the source side.
Water Heater Source Outlet Temperature [C]

The outlet temperature on the source side.
Water Heater Source Rate [W]

The average heat transfer rate between the source side water and the tank water.
Water Heater Source Energy [J]

The heat transfer energy between the source side water and the tank water.
Water Heater Off-Cycle Parasitic Heat Rate To Tank [W]

The average heat gain rate to the tank water due to off-cycle parasitics.
Water Heater Off-Cycle Parasitic Heat Energy To Tank [J]

The heat gain energy to the tank water due to off-cycle parasitics.
Water Heater On-Cycle Parasitic Heat Rate To Tank [W]

The average heat gain rate to the tank water due to on-cycle parasitics.
Water Heater On-Cycle Parasitic Heat Energy To Tank [J]

The heat gain energy to the tank water due to on-cycle parasitics.
- 566 -
Water Heater
Water Heater Total Demand Rate [W]

The average heating rate demanded to maintain the setpoint temperature.
Water Heater Total Demand Energy [J]

The heating energy demanded to maintain the setpoint temperature.
Water Heater Heating Rate [W]

The average heating rate supplied by the heater element or burner.
Water Heater Heating Energy [J]

The heating energy supplied by the heater element or burner.
Water Heater Unmet Demand Rate [W]

The average heating rate unmet by the heater element or burner. The difference between the Total Demand Rate and the Heating Rate.
Water Heater Unmet Demand Energy [J]

The heating energy unmet by the heater element or burner. The difference between the Total Demand Energy and the Heating Energy.
Water Heater Venting Rate [W]

The average venting rate to keep the tank below the Maximum Temperature Limit.
Water Heater Venting Energy [J]

The venting energy to keep the tank below the Maximum Temperature Limit.
Water Heater Net Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The average net heat transfer rate when considering all losses and gains.
Water Heater Net Heat Transfer Energy [J]

The net heat transfer energy when considering all losses and gains.
Water Heater Cycle On Count []

The number of times that the heater turned on in the time period.
Water Heater Runtime Fraction []

The fraction of the time period that the heater was running.
Water Heater Part Load Ratio []

The fraction of the Heater Maximum Capacity.
Water Heater <Fuel Type> Consumption Rate [W]

The average fuel consumption rate for the heater element or burner.
Water Heater <Fuel Type> Consumption Energy [J]

The fuel consumption energy for the heater element or burner.
Water Heater Off-Cycle <Fuel Type> Consumption Rate [W]

The average fuel consumption rate for the off-cycle parasitics.
- 567 -
Water Heater Off-Cycle <Fuel Type> Consumption Energy [J]

The fuel consumption energy for the off-cycle parasitics.
Water Heater On-Cycle <Fuel Type> Consumption Rate [W]

The average fuel consumption rate for the on-cycle parasitics.
Water Heater On-Cycle <Fuel Type> Consumption Energy [J]

The fuel consumption energy for the on-cycle parasitics.
Water Heater Water Consumption Rate [m3/s]

The water consumption rate for the use side, if in stand-alone operation.
Water Heater Water Consumption [m3]

The water consumption for the use side, if in stand-alone operation.
- 568 -
Components
Components
Components represent individual building elements and can be referenced from other components, templates or model data. The following components are available: Constructions Glazing Materials Panes Profiles Schedules Textures Window gas Local shading Window blinds Vents Holidays
Library components are loaded into the model at the time the file is created and from then on they are associated specifically with the model and so are known as Model components. Any later change made to the Library components does not affect existing building models because they reference their own set of Model components.
Managing component data

You can edit and move component data around in various ways: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Add, Edit, Delete, Import and Export Component library data from the Opening Screen - Component Library tab. If a model file is loaded you can edit Model components from the Components tab in the Navigator panel (Learning mode switched off) or by using the Data management panel on the right of the screen (Learning mode switched on). In either case, to add a component open up the component type you wish to define by clicking on the + to the left of the component icon, then click on the category of component you wish to define. Now click on the Green '+' to add a component of the selected category. Import/export Model component using the File > Export > Library data menu command to create a .ddf file with the .dsb model file open. To import the previously exported Model component data to the Component library close the .dsb file and import the .ddf file to the library. Load the latest library components into your model using the Import library components and templates to model command from the Tools menu when a model is loaded. Any new data that has been added to the library since the model file was created will be imported to the model. Also if there have been any changes to library component data, this new data will overwrite the original data.
Important Note: any component you add while a model is open will be added to Model components and not to the Component library. It will only be added to the library and hence to new models if you export the new component model data in .ddf form and import the .ddf file to the library before creating the new model.
Colour code
Components are coded by colour in the Navigator panel and selection lists as follows: Red shows user data, i.e. data that was not supplied by DesignBuilder. Green indicates that the data is derived from a reputable national or international source.
- 569 -
Blue indicates that the data is generated internally by DesignBuilder. Black is used for other data.
Construction Components
The thermal properties of the construction are calculated based on layers, each layer having a material reference and thickness. The combination of thickness and material gives the thermal characteristics of the layer. Layers can include repeating thermal bridges. Construction components also store derived data on the thermal properties of the overall layered construction for example U-value, convective heat transfer coefficients etc. There are 4 tabs on the Constructions dialog: Layers Surface Properties Image Calculated
Construction component data can be accessed: from the Components tab on the opening screen (to view/edit library components if no file is open), from the Components tab in the Navigator panel (to view/edit model components if a file is open), by double-clicking on the construction icon in the model data, by clicking on the Edit button when selecting constructions from a list.
Construction Layer Data

Layers tab on Constructions Dialog. Set the number of layers first, then select the material and thickness for each layer. Use the Controls in the Info Panel to insert and delete layers. For example to delete a layer, first click on the material for the layer to identify which layer you want to delete, then click on Delete layer. You can create constructions with up to 6 layers. You should define the layers in the same order they appear in the actual construction starting with the outermost layer and finishing with the innermost. The outermost layer will be positioned adjacent to outside (or in the case of Semi--exposed walls) adjacent to the semi-exposed unconditioned zone. For interior surfaces (partitions, internal floors etc) the order of the layers is determined through a series of checks to see which zone is relatively more external. For example, if one zone is unconditioned and the other not then the partition layers are ordered so that the outermost layer is next to the unconditioned zone. When both zones are occupied, a similar check is made using heating and cooling setpoint temperatures. If after all these checks the zones are still both equally internal then the direction of the layers will be set up in an arbitrary way. Note: You should not include surface resistance (film coefficient) layers to represent the resistance of the air films adjacent to the inner and outer surfaces. These are included automatically by DesignBuilder.
- 570 -
Thickness
This field characterizes the thickness of the material layer. This is the dimension of the layer in the direction perpendicular to the main path of heat conduction. This value must be a positive. Note: If the material referenced is defined as a simple R-value then the construction thickness does not have to be entered.
Bridging
You can add repeating thermal bridging to any layer to model the effect of a relatively more conductive material bridging a less conductive material. For example wooden joists bridging an insulation layer. Note: bridging effects are not yet used directly in EnergyPlus, but are used in energy code compliance checks requiring U-values to be calculated according to BS EN ISO 6946. However see below for a workaround to this limitation.
Method for approximating repeating bridging effects in simulations

Although EnergyPlus cannot allow repeating bridging directly in simulations it is possible to approximate the effect of bridging by adjusting the thickness of the insulation to a value that gives the same U-value as the bridged construction calculated using BS EN ISO 6946. This is easily achieved by following these steps: 1. Define the construction including bridging data as in the screenshot below.
- 571 -
2.
Note the construction bridged U-value on the Calculated tab, see below.
- 572 -
3.
Going back to the layers tab, switch off all bridging and set the U-value to the bridged U-value by clicking on the Set U-value link in the Info panel.
- 573 -
4.
Enter the recorded bridged U-value (0.397 W/m2-K in this case) on the dialog and press OK.
5. 6.
Confirm the reduced insulation thickness when prompted. Check the new insulation thickness and U-value of the construction. The insulation thickness should be reduced as per the pop up message and the U-value should be the same as the bridged value you recorded earlier. The construction should now behave in a very similar way to the bridged construction in heating and cooling design calculations and in simulations.
- 574 -
Surface Properties
Surface Properties
Surface properties tab on Constructions Dialog. Data on this tab allows the inside and outside surface convection properties of the construction to be set to fixed values. This may be useful for validation exercises where DesignBuilder outputs are to be compared with those for other software in which particular convection coefficients have been used. In most cases you should leave the check boxes on this tab unchecked. To fix the outside convection heat transfer coefficient for all surfaces using this construction, check the Fix convective heat transfer coefficient check box under the Outside Surface header and enter the coefficient. Likewise for inside properties. Note that if the SimpleCombined Outside convection option has been selected at building level on the Constructions tab under Surface Convection or on the Calculation options or Model options dialogs the outside convective heat transfer coefficients set will actually be used as a combined convective plus radiation coefficient.
Construction Image
Image tab on Constructions Dialog. This tab shows the construction to scale (except for very thin layers) using material textures as specified.
Note: Bridging elements are not displayed on this image.
- 575 -
Construction Calculated Data

Calculated tab on Constructions Dialog. This tab provides further information on the heat transmission properties of the construction.
U-values and R-Values are shown including and excluding the effect of surface resistance and are calculated with and without bridging effects. Note that when working with library constructions, the outer surface resistance is calculated assuming a 'typical' exposure to wind. When working with model constructions the outer surface resistance is calculated using the wind exposure as defined on the Location tab at site level.
Convective heat transfer coefficients

The calculated convective heat transfer coefficients are used in EnergyPlus when the 'CIBSE' Inside/Outside convection algorithm is selected. Otherwise EnergyPlus uses its' own convection algorithm as set in the simulation options and the transmission data displayed here is not used.
Internal Source Glazing Components

There are 2 ways to enter Glazing component data depending on the Definition method setting: 1. Simple - the glazing properties for the overall glazing system are defined using basic U-value, Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) and Visible transmittance (VT) data. This approach is suitable when only
- 576 -
Glazing Layer Data
manufacturers is available. 2. Layers - where the properties of the glazing component is defined in much more detail through selection of a series of glazing layers (Panes) separated from each other by window gas layers. In this case there are two tabs on the Glazing data dialog:
Layers where the glazing panes and window gas layers are entered Calculated where derived calculated data on the glazing system is displayed Glazing component data can be accessed: from the Components tab on the opening screen (to view/edit library components if no file is open), from the Components tab in the Navigator panel (to view/edit model components if a file is open), by double-clicking on the glazing icon on the Openings tab in the model data, by clicking on the Edit button when selecting glazing components from a list.
Glazing Layer Data

Layer tab on Glazing Dialog. Set the number of glazing layers first (2 = double glazing), then select the pane and window gas material for each layer. The DesignBuilder glazing data consists of layers of panes interspersed with layers of window gases. Summary derived data for the overall glazing system such as internal and external surface heat transfer coefficients, U-values etc can be found on the Calculated tab. Note: Low emissivity glazing systems can be defined by specifying an appropriate 'LoE' Pane type for the Innermost Pane. You can find some typical low emissivity panes under the 'Clear ' Panes category.
- 577 -
Glazing Calculated Data

Calculated tab on Glazing Dialog. The Calculated data on the Glazing tab has been calculated by EnergyPlus using the Layer data on the previous tab. You can refresh the Calculated data by clicking on the Update link in the Info panel on the right of the dialog. The data can be useful for setting up glazing model descriptions in cases where global glazing system data is known rather than data on individual panes and window gases. Two different U-values are provided, one using standard ISO 10292 / EN 673 and the other using the ASHRAE method. For the ASHRAE calculation, the U-value is determined by doing a heat balance calculation on the glazing layers for the following standard ASHRAE winter conditions: Inside air temperature = 21.1C (70F) Outside air temperature = -17.8C (0F) Wind speed = 6.71 m/s (15 mph) Outside convective air film conductance = 25.47 W/m2-K (4.486 Btu/h-ft2-F) Inside convective air film conductance: calculated by EnergyPlus No solar radiation
The 'Total solar transmission (SHGC)' (Solar Heat Gain Coefficient) is the fraction of incident beam solar radiation that enters the zone. This includes the transmitted solar radiation and the inward flowing heat from the solar radiation that is absorbed by the glazing. SHGC applies only to the centre of the glazed part of a window construction; it does not include the effect of beam solar radiation absorbed by a window frame or divider. SHGC is calculated for the following standard summer condition: Inside air temperature = 23.9C (75F) Outside air temperature = 31.7C (89F) Wind speed = 3.35 m/s (7.5 mph) Incident beam solar radiation normal to glazing = 783 W/m2 (248 Btu/h-ft2)
Simple Glazing Definition

If only basic manufacturers data on the glazing system is available then you may need to use the more approximate simple glazing definition method. In this case the glazing properties for the overall glazing system are defined using U-value, SHGC and Visible transmittance (VT) data.
U-Value
This field describes the value for window system U-Factor, or overall heat transfer coefficient. Units are in W/m2K. This is the rated (NFRC) value for U-factor under winter heating conditions. The U-factor is assumed to be for vertically mounted products. The maximum U-value is 5.8 W/m2K because this is the most conductive glazing system possible given the above standard conditions that can realistically be achieved.
Solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC)

Enter the value for solar heat gain coefficient for the combined glazing system, a fractional value from 0 to 1 without units. This is the rated (NFRC) value for SHGC under summer cooling conditions and represents SHGC for normal incidence and vertical orientation.
- 578 -
Materials
Visible transmittance
Enter the visible transmittance for the glazing coefficient, a fractional value from 0 to 1. It is the rated (NFRC) value for visible transmittance at normal incidence.
Frame
Simple glazing data can either include or exclude the effect of the frame. If the glazing data includes the frame then you should make sure to switch off frames in the openings model data to ensure that they are not doublecounted.
Shading
Windows defined using the simple definition method cannot be used together with Window shading. This model data is not available in the Openings data tab when a glazing component using Simple definition is selected. Note: When using the simple glazing definition it is important to understand that there may be significant differences in performance between the simple window system and the usual more detailed model. This option should therefore only be used when layered data is not available.
Materials
Material data contains data accessed from 3 tabs: Thermophysical data on building material. Surface Properties - data on the surface characteristics of the material. Green Roof - if the material is a green roof enter the data on the corresponding here. Embodied Carbon - data on embodied carbon contained the material
Material component data can be accessed: from the Components tab on the opening screen (to view/edit library components if no file is open), from the Components tab in the Navigator panel (to view/edit model components if a file is open), by double-clicking on the material icon in the model data, by clicking on the Edit button when selecting a material from a list.
Material Thermophysical Properties

General tab on Materials Dialog. Materials are used to define the properties of construction layers. There are 2 types of material: 1. 2. Detailed properties including the thermophysical properties, surface properties and visual appearance for the material. Simple resistive material with no thermal mass. This option will typically be used to model air gaps.
- 579 -
DETAILED PROPERTIES Thermal bulk properties Thermal conductivity

This field is used to enter the thermal conductivity of the material layer. Thermal conductivity must be greater than zero.
Specific heat
This field represents the specific heat of the material layer. Only positive values of specific heat are allowed.
Density
This field is used to enter the density of the material layer. Density must be a positive quantity.
SIMPLE RESISTANCE Thermal resistance

This field is used to enter the thermal resistance (R-value) of the material layer. Note: Materials defined using an R-value do not contribute to construction (and hence building) thermal mass in the calculations and so should be used with care, especially if you plan to use the model for dynamic thermal simulations.
Surface Properties
Surface properties tab on Materials Dialog Surface properties are only used in simulations when the material is located on an inner or outer surface of the construction.
Thermal absorptance (emissivity)

The thermal absorptance represents the fraction of incident long wavelength radiation that is absorbed by the material. This parameter is used when calculating the long wavelength radiant exchange between various surfaces and affects the surface heat balances (both inside and outside as appropriate). Values for this field must be between 0.0 and 1.0 (with 1.0 representing black body conditions).
Solar absorptance
The solar absorptance field in the Material input syntax represents the fraction of incident solar radiation that is absorbed by the material. Solar radiation includes the visible spectrum as well as infrared and ultraviolet wavelengths. This parameter is used when calculating the amount of incident solar radiation absorbed by various surfaces and affects the surface heat balances (both inside and outside as appropriate). Values for this field must be between 0.0 and 1.0.
Visible absorptance
The visible absorptance field in the Material input syntax represents the fraction of incident visible wavelength radiation that is absorbed by the material. Visible wavelength radiation is slightly different than solar radiation in that the visible band of wavelengths is much more narrow while solar radiation includes the visible spectrum as well as infrared and ultraviolet wavelengths. This parameter is used when calculating the amount of incident
- 580 -
Green Roof
visible radiation absorbed by various surfaces and affects the surface heat balances (both inside and outside as appropriate) as well as the daylighting calculations. Values for this field must be between 0.0 and 1.0.
Roughness
This field is a character string that defines the relative roughness of a particular material layer. This parameter only influences the the calculated exterior convection coefficient. A special keyword is expected in this field with the options being VeryRough, MediumRough, Rough, Smooth, MediumSmooth, and VerySmooth in order of roughest to smoothest options.
Colour
The colour data is used for display purposes when the texture is not available for any reason. It is not used in any of the calculations.
Texture
The texture is used to represent this material when it is specified as either the inside or outside material of a construction which is selected in the building model. It is also used to represent the material in diagrams of any construction using this material.
Green Roof
Green roof tab Materials Dialog Green roofs can be modelled in DesignBuilder by creating a roof construction using a Green roof material as the outer layer. The green roof can receive water during the simulation from an irrigation system and/or from site precipitation (defined separately from the hourly weather data). The initial properties of the soil layer are defined on the Green roof tab of the Materials dialog. Green walls can also be modelled though in this case the irrigation must be treated differently to roofs as walls will not naturally trap much precipitation. Note that specifying a green roof material as the material for a component block will not work - these only use materials for their reflective properties. Background Use of green roofs (aka ecoroofs or vegetated roofs) is becoming increasingly common for both new and retrofit buildings. There is widespread recognition and a growing literature of measured data that suggest green roofs can reduce building energy consumption. The EnergyPlus Green Roof capability can assist developers and architects in assessing the likely magnitude of energy savings associated with various implementation options (e.g., soil type/depth, irrigation options, plant type). It provides a quantitative and physically-based building energy simulation tool that represents the effects of green roof constructions and facilitates more rapid spread of green roof technologies and make it possible to account for green roof benefits in state energy codes and related energy efficiency standards such as LEED. The green roof model accounts for: Long wave and short wave radiative exchange within the plant canopy, Plant canopy effects on convective heat transfer, Evapotranspiration from the soil and plants, and Heat conduction (and storage) in the soil layer
- 581 -
The ability to track moisture-dependent thermal properties is not implemented yet due to stability issues in the CTF scheme, but is under development for use with the finite difference solution scheme made available in EnergyPlus starting in version 2. As implemented in EnergyPlus the green roof module allows the user to specify ecoroof as the outer layer of a rooftop construction. The user can then specify various aspects of the green roof construction including growing media depth, thermal properties, plant canopy density, plant height, stomatal conductance (ability to transpire moisture), and soil moisture conditions (including irrigation). The model formulation includes the following: Simplified moisture balance that allows precipitation, irrigation, and moisture transport between two soil layers (top and root zone). Soil and plant canopy energy balance based on the Army Corps of Engineers FASST vegetation models (Frankenstein and Koenig), drawing heavily from BATS (Dickenson et al.) and SiB (Sellers et al.). Soil surface (Tg) and foliage (Tf) temperature equations are solved simultaneously each time step, inverting the CTF to extract heat flux information for the energy balance calculation. The detailed energy balance analysis and resulting equations, being rather complicated, are summarized here. The interested reader is referred to the FASST documentation cited herein for the complete development. The end result is a set of two simultaneous equations for temperatureone for the soil surface and the other for the foliage.
Green Roof Model Description As with a traditional roof, the energy balance of an green roof is dominated by radiative forcing from the sun. This solar radiation is balanced by sensible (convection) and latent (evaporative) heat flux from soil and plant surfaces combined with conduction of heat into the soil substrate. This energy balance is illustrated in the diagram below. The variables introduced in this figure are defined in the EnergyPlus Engineering Document.
The energy balance for a green roof. The energy budget analysis follows the Fast All Season Soil Strength (FASST) model developed by Frankenstein and Koenig for the US Army Corps of Engineers. FASST was developed, in part, to determine the ability of soils to support manned and unmanned vehicles and personnel movement. In order to accomplish this, however, FASST tracks the energy and moisture balance (including ice and snow) within a vegetated soil. It is a one-dimensional model that draws heavily from other plant canopy models including BATS (Dickinson et al.) and SiB (Sellers et al.). FASST is implemented in EnergyPlus with only a few modifications to adapt it for use with a relatively thin soil layer.
- 582 -
Green Roof
GREEN ROOF DATA Height of Plants

The average height of plants in the green roof.
Leaf Area Index (LAI)

This is the projected leaf area per unit area of soil surface. It is a dimensionless number between 0.001 and 5.0. The tables below gives some typical values for LAI. The table below is reproduced from Global Leaf Area Index Data from Field Measurements, 1932-2000
- 583 -
The table below is reproduced from the PhD Thesis of Chen Yu entitled The intervention of plants in the conflicts between buildings and climate - A case study in Singapore
- 584 -
Green Roof
Plant description
Mean Leaf Area Index (LAI)
Picture
"White flowers, spider lily"
3.07
"Pink flowers"
4.95
- 585 -
Plant description
Picture
"Yellow green leaves"
3.75
"Dark green long blades of leaves/grass"
5.82
- 586 -
Green Roof
Plant description
Picture
"Pinkish red flowers"
2.44
"Fern-like"
6.59
- 587 -
Plant description
Picture
"Palm tree-like"
4.41
"White flowers with yellow center"
3.21
- 588 -
Green Roof
Plant description
Picture
"Small yellow green leaves" 4.08
"Long big leaves"
5.28
- 589 -
Plant description
Picture
"Orange stems and leaves for those which are taller"
2.15
"No special features"
3.32
- 590 -
Green Roof
Plant description
Picture
"Light green edges with dark 5.83 green center leave blades"
"Red yellow tulip like flowers" 3.04
- 591 -
Plant description
Picture
"Large red leaves"
2.33
"Dark green leaf blades"
~0
- 592 -
Green Roof
Plant description
Picture
Tree
1.69
Palm tree
2.37
Leaf Reflectivity
The fraction of incident solar radiation that is reflected by the individual leaf surfaces. Solar radiation includes the visible spectrum as well as infrared and ultraviolet wavelengths. Values for this field must be between 0.1 and 0.4.
Leaf Emissivity
This field is the ratio of thermal radiation emitted from leaf surfaces to that emitted by an ideal black body at the same temperature. This parameter is used when calculating the long wavelength radiant exchange at the leaf surfaces. Values for this field must be between 0.8 and 1.0 (with 1.0 representing black body conditions).
- 593 -
Minimum Stomatal Resistance

This field represents the resistance of the plants to moisture transport. It has units of s/m. Plants with low values of stomatal resistance will result in higher evapotranspiration rates than plants with high resistance. Values for this field must be in the range of 50.0 to 300.0.
Max volumetric moisture content of the soil layer (saturation)

Maximum volumetric moisture content of the soil depends on the properties of the soil and in particular the porosity.
Min (residual) volumetric moisture content of the soil layer

The minimum possible volumetric moisture content of the soil layer.
Initial volumetric moisture content of the soil layer

The volumetric moisture content of the soil layer at the start of the simulation. The moisture content will be updated during the course of the simulation based on surface evaporation, irrigation and precipitation.
Embodied Carbon
You can enter data on the embodied carbon that is associated with the material. This definition for embodied energy is provided on the Bath ICE website: Embodied energy may be taken as the total primary energy consumed during resource extraction, transportation, manufacturing and fabrication of a product... to separate it from operational impacts. Likewise embodied carbon is the carbon released in the above processes. It has become common practice to specify the embodied carbon as Cradle to Gate, which includes all carbon until the product leaves the factory gate. The final boundary condition is Cradle to Site, which includes all of the carbon emitted until the product has reached the point of use (i.e. the building site).
Embodied carbon available

If embodied carbon data is available for the material then this check box should to ticked.
Embodied carbon
Enter the amount of embodied carbon associated with the material. When using SI units, the units are kgCO2/kg.
Conversion factor name

Enter the name of the conversion factor as defined in the source documentation. This can be used to help you to trace the conversion factor back within the source database.
Source
The source of the data in text form. Much of the data provided by DesignBuilder is derived from the Bath ICE database.
Assumption / factor boundary

Typically embodied energy is defined as the carbon emitted into the atmosphere in order to mine, process and produce the material. Some common definitions are: Cradle to Gate - the carbon emitted to bring the material to the factory gate (but not to transport it to the building site)
- 594 -
Pane Components
Cradle to Site - as above but additionally includes consideration of transport from factory to the building site.
Equivalent carbon available

If data on equivalent carbon is available then check this box.
Equivalent carbon
Equivalent carbon is similar to Embodied carbon (above) but also includes the effects of other greenhouse gases so as to provide an equivalent amount of CO2 that would cause the same amount of global warming as the actual greenhouse gases (which may include sulphur dioxide, methane etc) emitted by the processes involved in production of the material.
EMBODIED CARBON REPORT

Material, construction and glazing inventories and embodied carbon reports are included on the Cost and Carbon screen and in the CSV report file.
Pane Components
Pane components holds data on the thermal, solar, visible and infrared properties of individual window panes. Note that the Info Panel on the right of the Dialog contains information on the naming convention is used with EnergyPlus glazing data. There are five tabs on the Pane dialog: General Thermal Solar Visible Infra-red Spectral data
Pane component data can be accessed: from the Components tab on the opening screen (to view/edit library components if no file is open), from the Components tab in the Navigator panel (to view/edit model components if a file is open), by clicking on the Edit button when selecting panes from a list.
Panes - General
General tab on Panes Dialog. Enter the name, description and category of the pane. Also enter the source of the data.
Data type
The Data type allows you to define whether the glazing pane has solar transmission and reflectance data in spectral or broadband form. The options are: 1-Broadband - where transmission and reflection data is averaged across all wavelengths,
- 595 -
2-Spectral - the more accurate option where solar transmission and reflectance data is defined for a range of wavelengths between 0.1 and 4 microns on the Spectral data tab of the dialog.
Note: Where possible you should use glazing panes which have Spectral data defined because the calculations in EnergyPlus are more accurate accounting for the way solar transmission varies with wavelength. In particular, the results for glazing systems using spectral data can be significantly more accurate relative to the equivalent broadband data for panes with selective coatings e.g. low-e glass.
International Glazing Database (IGDB)

The IGDB is a comprehensive international glazing layer database compiled by NFRC and provided through the specialist WINDOW and OPTICS fenestration analysis software provided by LBNL. The IGDB contains, amongst other things, detailed spectral data for around 2500 manufacturers glazing pane products from around the world. DesignBuilder is kept up to date with the latest version of the IGDB.
Panes - Thermal Data

Thermal Data tab on Panes Dialog.
Thickness
Enter the thickness of the pane.
Thermal conductivity
This field is used to enter the thermal conductivity of the material layer. Thermal conductivity must be greater than zero.
Panes - Solar Data

This data is not used in simulations when the Data type is 2-Spectral but is still displayed as it gives a spectralaverage overview of the solar transmission and reflectance. For uncoated glass, when alternative optical properties are availablesuch as thickness, solar index of refraction, and solar extinction coefficientthey can be converted to equivalent solar transmittance and reflectance values using the equations given in Glass Optical Properties Conversion.
Solar transmittance
The solar transmittance for the pane at normal incidence averaged over the solar spectrum.
Solar reflectance
The inside (back-side) and outside (front-side) solar reflectance properties of the pane at normal incidence averaged over the solar spectrum. Note, For uncoated glass, when alternative optical properties (thickness, solar index of refraction, and solar extinction coefficient) are available, they can be converted to equivalent solar transmittance and reflectance values using the equations given in 'Conversion from Alternative Specification of Glass Optical Properties' in the EnergyPlus documentation).
- 596 -
Panes - Visible Data
Panes - Visible Data

Visible Data tab on Panes Dialog. For uncoated glass, when alternative optical properties are availablesuch as thickness, solar index of refraction, and solar extinction coefficientthey can be converted to equivalent solar transmittance and reflectance values using the equations given in Glass Optical Properties Conversion.
The visible transmittance for the pane at normal incidence averaged over the solar spectrum, and weighted by the response of the human eye.
Visible reflectance
The inside (back-side) and outside (front-side) visible reflectance properties of the pane at normal incidence averaged over the solar spectrum, and weighted by the response of the human eye.
Panes - Long-wave (Infra-red) Properties

Infra-red tab on Panes Dialog.
Long-wave transmittance
The long wave transmittance at normal incidence. Note that although EnergyPlus data input allows a range of inputs between 0 and 1 the only value that is allowed in the calculations is zero so this value is now fixed at zero.
Emissivity
Enter the inside (back-side) and outside (front-side) hemispherical emissivity properties of the pane. Note that emissivity is 1 minus the infra red reflectance value.
Spectral Data
Spectral data tab on Panes Dialog. Solar transmission and reflectance data is entered for a range of wavelengths between 0.1 and 4 microns. This data will generally have been extracted from the IGDB (International Glazing Database) and supplied by DesignBuilder. The data is arranged in comma-separated table form with a single line per wavelength, each line having 4 columns: 1. 2. 3. 4. Wavelength (microns) Solar transmittance (Tsol) Solar reflectance, front (Rsol1) Solar reflectance, back (Rsol2)
An example is shown in the screenshot below.
- 597 -
Note: due to the large volume of data involved, spectral data is only stored in the Library and not in the model and DesignBuilder uses this Library data in the simulations and display screens. Therefore any changes to the spectral data when a file is open will have no effect.
Glass Optical Properties Conversion

Conversion from Glass Optical Properties Specified as Index of Refraction and Transmittance at Normal Incidence The optical properties of uncoated glass are sometimes specified by index of refraction, n, and transmittance at normal incidence, T. The following equations show how to convert from this set of values to the transmittance and reflectance values required by DesignBuilder and EnergyPlus. These equations apply only to uncoated glass, and can be used to convert either spectral-average solar properties or spectral-average visible properties (in general, n and T are different for the solar and visible). Note that since the glass is uncoated, the front and back reflectances are the same and equal to the R that is solved for in the following equations. Given n and T, find R:
- 598 -
Schedules
Schedules
Schedules are used in DesignBuilder to define: Occupancy times Equipment, lighting HVAC operation Heating and Cooling temperature setpoints Transparency of component blocks (usually seasonal)
Apart from their use for defining Transparency of component blocks, Schedules are only used in simulations when the Timing model option is set to 'Schedules' You can define schedules in one of 2 ways: 7/12 Schedules - where each day of the week and each month of the year has a unique daily variation defined using profiles. Compact Schedules - more flexible definition using EnergyPlus Schedule:Compact text-based data format.
Use the Schedule type drop list on the Schedules dialog to make the selection. Click here for information on temperature setpoint schedule definition. Schedule data can be accessed: from the Components tab on the opening screen (to view/edit library components if no file is open), from the Components tab in the Navigator panel (to view/edit model components if a file is open), by double-clicking on the schedules icon in the model data, by clicking on the Edit button when selecting schedules from a list.
- 599 -
See also the Timing, Schedules, Profiles and Holidays Tutorial
7/12 Schedules - Defined Using Profiles

General tab on Schedules Dialog. 7/12 Schedules reference Profiles of daily variation, one Profile for each day of the week and for each month of the year (hence 7/12). You can select multiple rows (months) or columns (days) and edit the data by clicking on the Edit selected cells link in the Info Panel. Likewise, you can select individual profiles by clicking on the appropriate cell and clicking Edit selected cells.
Design days
Winter and summer design day simulations are carried out when required for autosizing heating and cooling equipment prior to a Compact HVAC simulation.
Design day definition method

With 7/12 Schedules there are 2 ways to define the schedule during these winter design day simulations, 1-Enduse defaults or 2-Profiles:
1. End-use defaults
When the End use defaults option is selected you should define the intended use for the schedule using the options below and DesignBuilder controls whether the schedule is active during heating design using the options set on the Heating Design tab of the model options dialog. General - include general purpose schedules in Compact HVAC heating autosizing calculations . Occupancy - defines occupancy Lighting - Schedule to be used for lighting Equipment - defines operation of equipment. Heating demand - defines operation of heating equipment Cooling demand - defines operation of cooling equipment HVAC - defines operation of general HVAC equipment Natural ventilation demand - defines operation of window opening and/or natural ventilation airflow operation DHW - defines operation of hot water equipment It is also necessary to apply the behaviour for each category as defined on the Heating design tab of the Model options dialog. Note that if the schedule is to used for heating or cooling operation then it is especially important to select the appropriate setting. Note: Some users find this system of categories confusing and so generally you are advised to use either the 2-Profiles option where the schedule operation during heating and cooling are defined explicitly using a profile or use compact schedules where again heating and cooling design operation is defined explicitly.
- 600 -
7/12 Schedules - Defined Using Profiles
2. Profiles
In this option both heating and cooling design day operation are defined explicitly as a Profile. This is more flexible and clearer than End-use defaults and is the preferred choice. Heating design day profile - the profile defining the schedule output during the heating autosizing design day. Cooling design day profile - the profile defining the schedule output during the cooling autosizing design day.
Weekly and monthly variations

Other tools are available for rapid selection/de-selection and setting of schedule data: Select all weekdays Select all weekends Set all weekends 'Off' Select all Deselect all
See also EnergyPlus Compact Schedules
- 601 -
Compact Schedules
General tab on Schedules Dialog. Compact Schedules are defined using a slightly modified version of the standard EnergyPlus Schedule:Compact format documented below. Using the Compact Schedule definition all the features of the schedule components are accessed in a single command.
Name
This field is for your own use and is replaced by DesignBuilder with the name of the Schedule when generating data for EnergyPlus.
ScheduleType
ScheduleType should generally be Fraction even for schedules to be used for temperature setpoint definition. You can enter Any Number to enter values greater than 1 but please bear in mind: The maximum gains values (e.g. people/m2) are multiplied by the values in the schedule to obtain the actual value to use at each time step in the simulation. So if you enter large schedule values the actual maximum value in the simulation will be higher than the 'maximum' value entered in DesignBuilder. There is no problem with this, just a possible concern that if the DesignBuilder interface indicates that the maximum occupancy density is say 0.1 people/m2 but the schedule has values > 1 then the simulation results will, at first sight, appear incorrect. If you come back to the model 6 months later you may not remember the reason. Temperature set-point schedules should only have values 0, 0.5 or 1.0. So generally we recommend using Fraction Compact schedules for clarity.
FIELD-SET (THROUGH, FOR, INTERPOLATE, UNTIL, VALUE)

Each Compact Schedule must contain the elements Through (date), For (days), Interpolate (optional), Until (time of day) and Value.
Through
This field starts with 'Through:' and contains the ending date for the schedule period. You may define multiple schedule periods in this way, for example to define seasonal variations. If there are no seasonal variations then enter: Through: 31 Dec, to indicate that the data that follows applies to the whole year. Note 1: each Compact Schedule must cover all the days for a year and it must have values for all 24 hours and all values for all day types. Note 2: The dates in the Through fields must be provided consecutively, starting at the beginning of the year and finishing at the end of the year. Note 3 only Month-Day combinations are allowed for this field.
For
This field starts with 'For: ' and contains the applicable days. Multiple choices may be combined on the line. Choices are: Weekdays, Weekends,
- 602 -
Compact Schedules
Holidays, Alldays, SummerDesignDay, WinterDesignDay, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, CustomDay1, CustomDay2.
In fields after the first 'For', 'AllOtherDays' may also be used. Note: EnergyPlus has limit of line length of about 60 characters so lines like: For: Weekdays SummerDesignDay WinterDesignDay Weekends Holidays AllOtherDays, should be changed to: For: AllDays,
Interpolate (optional)
Schedule values are input to the simulation at the zone time step, so there is also a possibility of 'interpolation' from the entries used in this object to the value used in the simulation. This field, if used, starts with 'Interpolate:' and contains the word 'Yes' or 'No'.
Until
This field contains the ending time for the current days and day schedule being defined. The data should represent clock time (standard) in the format HH:MM. 24 hour clock format (i.e. 1pm is 13:00). Note that 'Until: 7:00' includes all times up through 07:00 (7am). The time is followed by a comma and the value the schedule takes until the given time. See note above on usual values. Generally you should enter values between zero and 1.
Value
Finally, the value field is the schedule value for the specified time interval. Note: you can use 0 for Temperature type Compact Schedules to indicate that the heating/cooling system is switched off during the specified period. See Example 2 below.
Example 1 - Operation Schedule

SCHEDULE:COMPACT, Office_CellOff_Light, Fraction, Through: 31 Dec, For: Weekdays SummerDesignDay, Until: 07:00, 0, Until: 19:00, 1, Until: 24:00, 0,
- 603 -
For: Weekends, Until: 24:00, 0, For: Holidays WinterDesignDay AllOtherDays, Until: 24:00, 0; This schedule is intended to be used to describe the lighting operation in an office. It indicates: Schedule is a fraction (0-1). No seasonal variation. Weekdays and SummerDesignDays the schedule is 1 (i.e. 'on') between 7am and 7pm and 0 (i.e. 'off') other times. Weekends, holidays, WinterDesignDays and all other days the schedule is 'off'.
Example 2 - Temperature Setpoint Schedule

SCHEDULE:COMPACT, Bedroom_Cool, Temperature, Through: 31 Dec, For: Weekdays SummerDesignDay, Until: 05:00, 0.5, Until: 09:00, 1, Until: 17:00, 0.5, Until: 24:00, 1, For: Weekends, Until: 05:00, 0.5, Until: 24:00, 1, For: Holidays WinterDesignDay AllOtherDays, Until: 24:00, 0; This schedule is intended to be used to describe the cooling temperature setpoint and setback in a bedroom. It indicates: Schedule is a temperature (in degC). No seasonal variation. Weekdays and SummerDesignDays the main temperature setpoint data (Activity tab) is used between 5am and 9am and also between 5pm and midnight. Cooling operates at setback temperature setpoint data at all other times on these days. Weekends the cooling setpoint is main temperature setpoint between 5am and midnight. Cooling operates at setback temperature setpoint data at all other times on these days. Holidays, WinterDesignDays and all other days the cooling is off.
IMPORTANT NOTE: even if you are using IP units for the main interface you must use SI units for compact schedule values as these are passed directly to EnergyPlus. More on Temperature setpoint schedules.
- 604 -
Defining Setpoint Temperature And RH Schedules
Defining Setpoint Temperature And RH Schedules

SCHEDULES TIMING MODEL OPTION
Operation of heating and cooling equipment is defined by selecting a Schedule under the Heating, Cooling and Operation headers on the HVAC tab. These schedules are used to generate both the heating/cooling availability schedule and the temperature setpoint schedules used in the simulations. Schedule values greater than 0.5 indicate the system is in full operation controlling temperature to the main heating/cooling setpoint, values between 0 and 0.5 indicate the equipment in setback mode and values of 0 indicate that the equipment is switched off. See Table below. Value 0 > 0.5 0 < Value <= 0.5 Heating/Cooling Equipment Operation Equipment is off Equipment is controlled using the main temperature setpoint data (Activity tab) Equipment is controlled using the setback temperature setpoint data (Activity tab)
Notes
1. 2. When using 7/12 Schedules, for 0.5 read 50% etc. When using 2-Single period profiles with 7/12 Schedules to generate temperature setpoints the 'Off' periods are modelled using setback temperatures, i.e. the system is not switched off. If you wish the system to switch off outside main heating/cooling hours use the 3-Custom profile type. If the setback temperature set does not appear to affect results, this may be because the heating/cooling operation schedule selected uses only 0 and 1, not the 0.5 required to access setback temperature (see table above).
3.
TYPICAL WORKDAY TIMING MODEL OPTION

You can define the operation of heating and cooling equipment by entering Typical workday start and end times and seasonal operation under the Heating and Operation headers on the HVAC tab. This data is used to generate both the heating/cooling availability schedule and the temperature setpoint schedule used in the simulations. The equipment is switched on between the On and Off times (8am and 6pm in the example below). During this time the equipment is controlled using the main temperature setpoint (Activity tab). At other times and during weekends the equipment is controlled using the setback temperature setpoint. Weekends are defined on the Activity tab at the building level under Occupancy by setting the number of working days per week. The Seasonal control data allows you to set times when the equipment is switched off altogether. For example the heating system data shown below indicates that the heating system will be switched on during the winter only and switched off in the summer.
- 605 -
Schedules And Design And Sizing Simulations

Schedules are not used for Heating design calculations which are based on a steady state analysis that does not account for timing. In cases where for example a maximum mechanical ventilation rate is defined and modified by a schedule for simulation purposes, for the steady-state Heating design calculations the same maximum mechanical ventilation rate is used continuously. Note that this comment does not apply to the sizing calculations carried out before Compact and Detailed HVAC simulations because these are driven by the same IDF data as the simulation which includes schedules. Therefore for these HVAC sizing simulations the WinterDesignDay and SummerDesignDay day types define the values for the heating zone sizing simulation. Cooling design calculations are of course dynamic and so schedules are required for these. It is possible to select the day type to be used for Cooling design calculations on the Calculation options dialog. By default the Compact schedule day type is SummerDesignDay for Cooling design calculations. For cooling sizing calculations carried out before Compact and Detailed HVAC simulations the SummerDesignDay day type is always used.
Simulation Hourly Weather Data

DesignBuilder uses EnergyPlus format hourly weather data to define external conditions during simulations. Each location has a separate file describing the external temperature, solar radiation, atmospheric conditions etc. for every hour of the year at that location. These hourly weather data sets are often 'typical' data derived from hourly observations at a specific location by the National weather service or methodological office. Examples of these typical data include TMY2 and WYEC2 in the United States and Canada and TRY (CEC 1985) in Europe. See EnergyPlus Hourly Weather Data for more on the hourly weather data itself. Because hourly weather data is not always available for every location, it is often necessary to use weather data for a nearby location which represents the weather of the actual site. The DesignBuilder hourly weather data has been obtained from the Weather section of the EnergyPlus website and processed using the DesignBuilder weather data translator, but you can use any weather data provided it is in the correct format. EnergyPlus format hourly weather data has extension 'epw' by convention.
Hourly weather data video tutorial See also: Add new hourly weather data Edit/Translate hourly weather data EnergyPlus Hourly Weather Data
Downloading Hourly Weather Data

DesignBuilder comes with a database of hourly weather data but the EnergyPlus epw files are not loaded onto your computer until you actually need them. This keeps the size of the DesignBuilder setup program small. The first time you require an hourly weather data file it is automatically downloaded from the DesignBuilder Website into the Weather data folder on your computer where it can be accessed by EnergyPlus for any subsequent simulations. You must be connected to the Internet to download weather data in this way.
- 606 -
Hourly Weather Data - General
Selecting hourly weather data

When you select an hourly weather data set on the Location tab at Site level, you do not select the file directly, but rather an hourly weather data component, which in turn references the actual file. It works this way so that we can supply you with a database of hourly weather data locations without needing to include hundreds of large hourly weather files. When editing an hourly weather data component there are two tabs on the Hourly Weather Data dialog: General Statistics
Template data can be accessed: from the Templates tab on the opening screen (if no file is open), from the Templates tab in the Navigator panel (if a file is open), by double-clicking on the template icon in the model data, by clicking on the Edit button when selecting templates from a list.
Hourly Weather Data - General

General tab on Hourly Weather data Dialog. Select the Hourly weather data filename and the rest of the data is loaded directly from the .epw and .stat files. Each file is named using the ISO standard three-letter country abbreviation (i.e. CUB for Cuba), followed by the location name, and the source format (CityUHK, CSWD, CTYW, CTZ2, CWEC, ISHRAE, IWEC, IGDG, INETI, KISR, SWEC, SWERA, TMY2, or TMY). Thus, CUB_Havana_IWEC.epw is the EnergyPlus weather file (epw) from the ASHRAE International Weather for Energy Calculations (IWEC) data for Havana, Cuba (CUB). There are three files associated with each location: epw - EnergyPlus weather files stat - a summary report on the data. Data from this file is loaded into the Statistics tab when an hourly weather data file is selected. ddy - design conditions.
Note: the above hourly weather data and associated statistics files are located in the Weather data folder.
Hourly Weather Data - Statistics

Statistics tab on Hourly Weather data Dialog. The statistics displayed are generated by the EnergyPlus weather data translation utility. The statistics data is used to identify useful simulation periods: Summer start month, Summer end month define the summer simulation period in mmm format. Winter start month, Winter end month define the winter simulation period in mmm format.
- 607 -
Extreme hot week, starting defines the first day of the hottest week of the year. Typical hot week, starting defines the first day of a typical summer week. Extreme cold week, starting defines the first day of the coldest week of the year. Typical cold week, starting defines the first day of a typical winter week. Note: week starting dates must be in the format mmm dd - any other format will generate an error when clicking on the links in the Simulation Options dialog. This data can be accessed from the Simulation Calculation options dialog to set up typical simulation periods (screenshot right) .
Add New Hourly Weather Data

The processes described on this page are also covered in a Video tutorial. If you have hourly weather you wish to use in simulation you can add it to the library by following the steps below: Copy the EnergyPlus format hourly weather data .epw file to the weather data folder (File > Folders > Weather data). If you have it, copy the .stat file there too. 2. From the Opening screen click on the Component libraries tab. 3. Click on the + to the left of Hourly weather data to open up the list of countries. 4. Select the country of the location (or a location within the country). 5. Add a new Hourly weather data set by clicking on the green + icon in the Toolbar. 6. Select the epw file and enter any extra information in the dialog as described below. Note that the location and other statistics are automatically loaded from the .stat and .epw files when you select the file. 7. Click OK to save the new Hourly weather data. See further below for the alterative steps to follow if you have a file open and wish to create a new hourly weather data set just for that model. Note 1: Any custom hourly weather epw file you select in your model will be saved with the dsb file so that the model can be used on other computers without the need to copy weather files manually. Note 2: Although DesignBuilder can been used with any valid epw data sets, you are strongly advised to process the data first to ensure that each hourly record has year 2002. This ensures that daily, hourly and sub-hourly data generated by EnergyPlus is correctly synchronised with the DesignBuilder graphics display. If you do not set the year to 2002 it will not affect the results but it will affect the day of the week display in DesignBuilder graphic output. In particular, daily, hourly and sub-hourly data will not necessarily show the correct day of the week in the results display graphics. The steps are shown in the screenshots below. 1.
- 608 -
Add New Hourly Weather Data
In the Hourly weather data, enter the details of the location and select the EnergyPlus epw filename as shown below.
Once the epw has been selected, DesignBuilder loads the Latitude, Longitude and WMO station identifier.
- 609 -
It also searches for the equivalent .stat file and if it is found (in the weather data folder) the data on the Statistics tab is also loaded (below).
Note: If a stat is not available you should enter the information on the Statistics tab by hand in the format shown above. The stat file is automatically generated by the Hourly weather data translation process. When you click on the OK button you will be able to select this new Hourly weather data from: 1. 2. Location tab at site level. Add New site dialog.
- 610 -
Edit / Translate Hourly Weather Data
The above process creates a library Hourly weather data component. If you have a dsb file open, you can follow an equivalent process to create a model Hourly weather data component. In this case the process is: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Copy the EnergyPlus format hourly weather data epw file to the weather data folder (File > Folders > Weather data). If you have it, copy the .stat file there too. Go to site level, Location tab, open the Simulation Weather Data header and click on the currently selected Hourly weather data selection. In Learning mode, select the country of the location (or a location within the country) in the Info, data panel on the right of the screen. Add a new Hourly weather data set by clicking on the green + icon in the Toolbar. Select the epw file and enter any extra information in the dialog as described above. Click OK to save the new Hour weather data.
In this case you will need to export the hourly weather data you have just created from this model and reload the ddf file to the library if you wish to use the weather data in other models. If you don't have the data in epw format yet then it can be translated from a range of formats using the inbuilt DesignBuilder weather data translation tool or if the format is not supported then you can use the EnergyPlus translation tool that supports all weather formats. Obtain this from the EnergyPlus website. The documentation can be found in the Auxiliary Programs document. It can be worth contacting EnergyPlus support about obtaining weather data for particular locations as they have a lot of contacts and sometimes can provide data that is not on the main website.
Weather file requirements

While EnergyPlus is quite flexible in the format of the data used in simulations, DesignBuilder requires: Each line to represent one hour - shorter time intervals are not supported. Each file must have exactly 8760 records, one for each hour of the year, starting on Jan 1 and ending Dec 31. The years do not have to be consecutive but should ideally be set to 2002.
Simulating periods longer than a year

In some cases you may need to simulate a period longer than a year, possibly using custom weather data. Because DesignBuilder simulations can run for a maximum of a year, you would need to run 2 separate simulations to achieve this. Each simulation would use the appropriate weather file. For example to simulate the period September 2008 to December 2009 you could create 2 weather files, one for 2008 and the other for 2009 and run simulations for the 2 years separately. Results for the 2 simulations could be combined afterwards outside DesignBuilder (e.g. in a spreadsheet).
Edit / Translate Hourly Weather Data

The Edit/Translate Hourly Weather Data dialog can be accessed from the Tools menu and can be used to process hourly weather data. You may wish to do this for various reasons: Convert EnergyPlus epw data to be compatible with DesignBuilder day of week results for daily, hourly and sub-hourly output (set the year to 2002). Translate weather data in other formats to the epw format so that it can be used in DesignBuilder. Generating modified weather data sets for investigating climate change scenarios.
Translating
Use this dialog to convert weather data to and from a range of file formats. Supported formats are: EnergyPlus data files (.epw) EnergyPlus 'comma separated values' files (.csv) TMY2 data files (.tmy2 or tm2)
- 611 -
TMY data files (.tmy) IWEC data files (.iwec or iwc) Samson data files (.samson or dat) WYEC2 data files (.wyec2 or wy2) DOE-2 formatted data files (.fmt or txt) ESP-r formatted data files (.esp-r or clm) BLAST ASCII formatted data files (.blast or asc)
Required extensions are shown in brackets. To edit/convert a file or files: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the folder containing the file(s) using the browse box at the top of the left-hand side of the screen. All relevant weather data files are then loaded into the table on the left. Check the check box next to each file that is to be converted. Ensure that the correct options have been set on the Options tab. Press the Convert button to start the process.
Converted files are stored in the Weather data folder. You can access these files by clicking on the 'Edit/Review' tab.
CONVERTING FROM OTHER FORMATS

If you have data in a format that is not supported by the DesignBuilder weather data translator there are 2 ways this can be used to generate an equivalent weather file in epw format. 1. Use the EnergyPlus custom weather data translation tool. Detailed descriptions on its use are provided in the Auxiliary Programs Guide (which is an essential guide for all epw weather data conversion/analysis. The EnergyPlus weather converter tool can be obtained by downloading the EnergyPlus software and is not supported by DesignBuilder support desk. However if you run into problems with it, you should be able to get help from the EnergyPlus support desk or forum. The second option is to use an existing epw file as a template and copy columns of data across from your weather data source file using the csv spreadsheet format.
2.
The rest of this article provides details on the second of these methods. To translate weather data from any format follow these instructions. Note that as a starting point you will need to have the main data required by EnergyPlus stored in a csv format file or spreadsheet. The data required is: Air temperature Dew point temperature Relative Humidity Atmospheric pressure Global horizontal solar radiation Diffuse Horizontal solar radiation Direct normal radiation Wind Speed Wind Direction Cloud cover If any of the above parameters are missing and you are unsure about how to derive them, you may wish to consider using the EnergyPlus custom weather translator instead which has built-functions to derive some missing parameters based on other equivalent data. e.g. Direct normal radiation can be derived based on known solar position and global and diffuse horizontal radiation. If you do have all the required data in columns of a csv file then you are ready. The process is as follows:
- 612 -
EnergyPlus Hourly Weather Data
1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
To start the process, generate a template for a similar location in csv format. To do this use the weather data translation tool, selecting the 'EnergyPlus 'comma separated values' files' output option on the Options tab. Load the csv file created in step 1 into a spreadsheet to use as the template. In a separate spreadsheet load the new data. Copy and paste the data column by column from the new data spreadsheet into the equivalent columns in template spreadsheet. A 'missing value indicator' value can be entered in any of the places EnergyPlus doesn't use the data. The 'missing value indicator' value is different for each field and details can be found in the Auxiliary Programs Guide. Check that the header data at the top of the template spreadsheet is correct. Ensure the year is set to 2002 in all rows. Save the template as a csv file. Use the weather file translator to translate the template csv file to epw format. Rename the epw file as required. Check that the data has been copied correctly by loading the file into DesignBuilder and clicking on the Simulation tab when at site level. You'll need to set up a new Hourly weather data component referencing the new epw file and select this first. Check carefully that data output from simulations that use the new weather file makes sense. Pay particular attention to solar radiation. To do this you could check hourly incident solar radiation on a few surfaces in a model.
Note 1: If your regional settings aren't like UK/US, you could run into a couple of problems, such as the spreadsheet program changing the DataPeriods line from 1/1, 12/31 to 01-Jan -- you'd need to hand edit that before step 7 Note 2: Be aware that specific year data is not usually deemed appropriate for Energy Analysis. See this document for more information on selecting weather data: Drury B. Crawley. 1998. "Which Weather Data Should You Use for Energy Simulations of Commercial Buildings?" in ASHRAE Transactions, pp. 498-515, Vol. 104, Pt. 2. Atlanta: ASHRAE. (PDF 197 KB) PDF: http://energyplus.gov/pdfs/bibliography/whichweatherdatashouldyouuseforenergysimulations.pdf
EnergyPlus Hourly Weather Data

All of the hourly weather data that comes with DesignBuilder is supplied by DOE from: www.eere.energy.gov/buildings/energyplus/cfm/weather_data.cfm But with the year changed to 2002 as described in Add new hourly weather data. Most of these weather files are composite files from multiple years. Each month has been selected to be representative of that month for the period of record. Representative of the normal patterns for that month not the average. The selection of months is usually based on a weighting of temperature, humidity, wind, and solar. There are some variations among the weighting, most are similar to the TMY2 done in the US in the 1990s: http://rredc.nrel.gov/solar/pubs/tmy2/ You can find the details of the file format in the AuxiliaryPrograms.pdf EnergyPlus document.
Climate change data

You can download future climate change weather data for the UK in EnergyPlus format from: http://centres.exeter.ac.uk/cee/prometheus/downloads.html
- 613 -
Profiles
Profiles define the variation in occupancy, equipment usage or temperature over the course of a single day. They are used as building blocks in the definition of Schedules.
There are 3 types of profile: 1. 2. 3. Constant - has the same value all day. Enter the constant value for the profile Single period - define the 'on' period by setting the start and end times for the profile using the mouse. The operation is assumed to be 'off' for the rest of the day Custom - the profile is defined by a number of intervals, each of which can have a different value. There are two ways to set interval values: a. To change the value for a single interval (single histogram bar) select the top of the histogram bar and drag up/down using the LEFT mouse button. b. To apply a constant value over a range of intervals select the top of the histogram bar which has the required value and drag left/right over the range of intervals to be set using the RIGHT mouse button. The figure above shows an example custom profile. Profile data can be accessed: from the Components tab on the opening screen (to view/edit library components if no file is open), from the Components tab in the Navigator panel (to view/edit model components if a file is open), by clicking on the Edit button when selecting profiles from a list in the Schedules dialog.
- 614 -
Textures
Textures
Textures are used to represent the external surface of building constructions in the rendered views in the Visualisation Screen. Select the texture file and the real-world width and height represented by the texture. Textures are associated with materials and used to render the model in the Visualisation Screen. Note: If an image does not appear under the Image header this means that the selected file is not installed.
Adding your own textures

DesignBuilder comes with a library of textures but you can also add your own to the library. To add a texture to a model you should first get a list of textures and then click on the Add new icon. Then in the texture dialog, enter a name, the width and height represented by the texture and click on the browse button to bring up the list of texture files. In the texture file list click on the Add button to add a new texture file. Then select the texture file you've just added. The texture file you've just added will be stored with the dsb file so that it will be available if you copy the model to another computer. Texture data can be accessed: from the Components tab on the opening screen (to view/edit library components if no file is open), from the Components tab in the Navigator panel (to view/edit model components if a file is open), by double-clicking on the texture icon in the model data, by clicking on the Edit button when selecting textures from a list.
Window Gas
Window Gas component data is used to define the thermal properties of the cavity fill gas between window Panes in Glazing components. The gas which fills the inter-glazing cavity affects the heat transfer through the assembly but has almost no effect on the solar heat gain or the visible light transmission. Air, of course, is the most common cavity fill gas, but the use of an inert gas (typically argon or krypton) can significantly reduce window heat transfer. Krypton and argon are colourless, odourless and non-toxic. Argon is the most commonly-used fill gas because it offers good thermal performance at low cost. Krypton is more effective at reducing heat loss, but is roughly 200 times more expensive than argon per unit volume. Because krypton works best at smaller pane spacings (8 mm), it is often used in triple and quadruple-glazed windows to minimize the overall thickness of the unit. Other types of gases are used (e.g. sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) and carbon dioxide (CO2)) to reduce sound transmission, but these gases do not offer the improved thermal performance of the inert gases.
Category
This is the gas type. Select from: Air Argon CO2
- 615 -
Krypton Other SF6 Xenon
The window gas you are defining does not fit with the available options select Other. Select Air for an air gap.
Thickness
Enter the thickness of the inter-glazing cavity.
Custom material properties

The window gas properties of the gases Air, Argon, Krypton, Xenon are known by EnergyPlus and so no further data is required for these gases. For CO2, Other and SF6 you must enter custom properties.
CUSTOM GASES ONLY

If you elect to enter custom material properties then you must enter the details. The A and B coefficients are those in the following expression that gives a property value as a function of temperature in degrees K: Property = Coefficient_A + Coefficient_B * Gas_Temperature (K)
Conductivity Coefficient A
The A coefficient for gas conductivity (W/m-K).
Conductivity Coefficient B
The B coefficient for gas conductivity (W/m-K2).
Viscosity Coefficient A
The A coefficient for gas viscosity (kg/m-s).
Viscosity Coefficient B
The B coefficient for gas viscosity (kg/m-s-K).
Specific Heat Coefficient A

The A coefficient for gas specific heat (J/kg-K).
Specific Heat Coefficient B

The B coefficient for gas specific heat (J/kg-K2).
Molecular Weight
The molecular weight (mass) of the gas (Kg/kmol). Window gas component data can be accessed: from the Components tab on the opening screen (to view/edit library components if no file is open), from the Components tab in the Navigator panel (to view/edit model components if a file is open), by clicking on the Edit button when selecting window gases from a list.
- 616 -
Metabolic Rates
Metabolic Rates
Metabolic rate data defines a category of human metabolic output. The metabolic rate can be selected in Model data on the Activity tab by choosing a Metabolic rate component. The metabolic rate per person data is supplied to EnergyPlus which multiplies it by the number of people in the zone as the starting point for occupancy heat emission calculations. Metabolic rate data can be found in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, Chapter 8, Table 5. DesignBuilder data is derived from this data and is for adult males having typical surface area of 1.8m2. For women multiply the adult male value by 0.85 and for children multiply by 0.75. Component data can be accessed: from the Components tab on the opening screen (to view/edit library components if no file is open), from the Components tab in the Navigator panel (to view/edit model components if a file is open), by clicking on the Edit button when selecting window gases from a list.
Background
Heat is generated in the human body by oxidation at a rate called the metabolic rate. This heat is dissipated from the body surface and respiratory tract by a combination of radiation, convection and evaporation. The relative proportions of sensible and latent heat from people is a complex function of the metabolic rate and the environmental conditions. EnergyPlus uses a polynomial function to divide the heat gain into sensible and latent portions. More details can be found in the EnergyPlus EngineeringDoc.pdf documentation. See also the section on metabolic activity data.
Local Shading Components

General tab on Local Shading Dialog. Local Shading Components are used to define simple generic shading devices to apply to the Windows in the model. Enter the name and category for the local shading data set. Overhangs, louvres and sidefins can be specified either individually (e.g. just overhangs) or in combination (e.g. sidefins combined with louvres).
- 617 -
Local Shading component data can be selected from the Openings tab in Model Data and is applied to all windows on the surface, including custom windows. The data applies only to external glazing - roof and internal glazing do not use local shading data. Overhang, louvre and sidefin blades are all assumed to be 100% opaque and made of the material specified on this tab. Note: the DesignBuilder Local shading devices allow a range of different overhangs, side fins and louvres to be defined, but if you need to model a shading device not covered by the standard mechanism, you can draw custom shading devices using Component blocks. There are four tabs on the Local Shading dialog: General Louvres Sidefins Overhangs
Local shading data can be accessed: from the Components tab on the opening screen (to view/edit library components if no file is open), from the Components tab in the Navigator panel (to view/edit model components if a file is open), by double-clicking on the local shading icon on the Openings tab in the model data, by clicking on the Edit button when selecting local shading devices from a list.
Local Shading - General

General tab on Local Shading Dialog. Enter the name, category and source for this Local shading data set.
- 618 -
Local Shading - Louvres
Local Shading - Louvres

Louvres tab on Local Shading Dialog. Enter details on the louvres, if fitted.
The number of louvres is a maximum value and if the window is not high enough to accommodate the requested number of louvres blades, any louvres blades which would be positioned below the window are not added.
- 619 -
Local Shading - Sidefins

Sidefins tab on Local Shading Dialog. Enter details on the sidefins, if fitted.
Local Shading - Overhangs

Overhangs tab on Local Shading Dialog. Enter details on the overhangs if fitted.
- 620 -
Window Blinds
Window Blinds
Window blind components can be selected for external glazing, roof glazing and interior glazing from the Openings tab in the Model Data. There are four types of window blinds, as selected in the Category data on the General tab: Slat - slatted blinds which have different transmission properties with solar position. Shade - assumed perfectly diffusing. Transparent insulation - transparent insulation material to be positioned on the outer surface of an external wall. Electrochromic switching - switchable visible and solar properties based on solar gain.
- 621 -
Window blind component data can be selected from the window shading data on the Openings tab in Model Data and is applied to all windows on the surface, including custom windows. The data applies only to external and roof glazing, internal windows cannot have window blinds. Window blinds component data can be accessed: from the Components tab on the opening screen (to view/edit library components if no file is open), from the Components tab in the Navigator panel (to view/edit model components if a file is open), by double-clicking on the window blinds icon on the Openings tab in the model data, by clicking on the Edit button when selecting window blinds from a list.
Window Blinds - General

General tab on Window Blinds Dialog. Enter the name, category and source for this Window blinds data set.
Window Blinds - Slat Data

Slat data tab on Window Blinds Dialog. This object specifies the properties of a window blind consisting of flat, equally-spaced slats. Unlike window shades, which are modelled as perfect diffusers, window blinds have solar and visible transmission and reflection properties that strongly depend on slat angle and angle of incidence of solar radiation. When in place, the blind is assumed to cover all of the glazed part of the window, including dividers; it does not cover any of the window frame, if present. The plane of the blind is assumed to be parallel to the glazing. When the blind is retracted it is assumed to cover none of the window. The solar and thermal effects of the blinds support strings, tapes or rods are ignored. Slat curvature, if present, is ignored.
Side Elevation
- 622 -
The slat angle is the angle between the glazing outward normal to the slat outward normal. A slat angle of 0 sets slats to be vertical and an angle of 90 sets them to be horizontal. A slatted blind can be applied inside, outside or mid-pane.
SLAT PROPERTIES Blind to Glass Distance

For interior and exterior blinds, the distance from the mid-plane of the blind to the adjacent glass (m). See schematic above. Not used for between-glass blinds. As for window shades this distance is used in calculating the natural convective air flow between glass and blind that is produced by buoyancy effects.
Slat Orientation
The choices are Horizontal and Vertical. Horizontal means the slats are parallel to the bottom of the window; this is the same as saying that the slats are parallel to the X-axis of the window. Vertical means the slats are parallel to Y-axis of the window.
Slat Width
The width of the slat measured from edge to edge. Note: if the Blind is applied mid-pane, the gap between the inner pane and the second pane must be at least large enough to accommodate the slat width. The gap thickness is defined by the Window gas selected in the Glazing component.
Slat Separation
The distance between the front of a slat and the back of the adjacent slat.
Slat Thickness
The distance between the faces of a slat.
Slat Angle
The angle (degrees) between the glazing outward normal and the slat outward normal, where the outward normal points away from the front face of the slat (degrees).
Minimum Slat Angle

The minimum allowed slat angle (degrees). Used only if WindowProperty:ShadingControl (for the window that incorporates this blind) varies the slat angle (i.e., the WindowProperty:ShadingControl has Type of Slat Angle Control for Blinds =ScheduledSlatAngle or BlockBeamSolar). In this case, if the program tries to select a slat angle less than Minimum Slat Angle it will be reset to Minimum Slat Angle. (Note that if the Minimum Slat Angle itself is less than the minimum allowed by Slat Width, Slat Separation and Slat Thickness, it will be reset to that minimum.)
Maximum Slat Angle

The maximum allowed slat angle (degrees). Used only if WindowProperty:ShadingControl (for the window that incorporates this blind) varies the slat angle (i.e., the WindowProperty:ShadingControl has Type of Slat Angle Control for Blinds = ScheduledSlatAngle or BlockBeamSolar). In this case, if the program tries to select a slat angle greater than Maximum Slat Angle the slat angle will be reset to Maximum Slat Angle. (Note that if the Maximum Slat Angle itself is greater than the maximum allowed by Slat Width, Slat Separation and Slat Thickness, it will be reset to that maximum.)
- 623 -
Slat Conductivity
The thermal conductivity of the slat.
SLAT BEAM SOLAR PROPERTIES Slat Beam Solar Transmittance

The beam solar transmittance of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of incidence on the slat. Any transmitted beam radiation is assumed to be 100% diffuse (i.e., slats are translucent).
Front Side Slat Beam Solar Reflectance

The beam solar reflectance of the front side of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of incidence (matte finish). This means that slats with a large specularly-reflective component (shiny slats) are not well modelled.
Back Side Slat Beam Solar Reflectance

The beam solar reflectance of the back side of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of incidence (matte finish). This means that slats with a large specularly-reflective component (shiny slats) are not well modelled.
SLAT DIFFUSE SOLAR PROPERTIES Slat Diffuse Solar Transmittance

The slat transmittance for hemispherically diffuse solar radiation. This value should equal Slat Beam Solar Transmittance.
Front Side Slat Diffuse Solar Reflectance

The front-side slat reflectance for hemispherically diffuse solar radiation. This value should equal Front Side Slat Beam Solar Reflectance.
Back Side Slat Diffuse Solar Reflectance

The back-side slat reflectance for hemispherically diffuse solar radiation. This value should equal Back Side Slat Beam Solar Reflectance.
SLAT BEAM VISIBLE PROPERTIES Slat Beam Visible Transmittance

The beam visible transmittance of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of incidence on the slat. Any transmitted visible radiation is assumed to be 100% diffuse (i.e., slats are translucent).
Front Side Slat Beam Visible Reflectance

The beam visible reflectance on the front side of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of incidence (matte finish). This means that slats with a large specularly-reflective component (shiny slats) are not well modeled.
Back Side Slat Beam Visible Reflectance

The beam visible reflectance on the front side of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of incidence (matte finish). This means that slats with a large specularly-reflective component (shiny slats) are not well modeled.
- 624 -
SLAT DIFFUSE VISIBLE PROPERTIES Slat Diffuse Visible Transmittance

The slat transmittance for hemispherically diffuse visible radiation. This value should equal Slat Beam Visible Transmittance.
Front Side Slat Diffuse Visible Reflectance

The front-side slat reflectance for hemispherically diffuse visible radiation. This value should equal Front Side Slat Beam Visible Reflectance.
Back Side Slat Diffuse Visible Reflectance

The back-side slat reflectance f or hemispherically diffuse visible radiation. This value should equal Back Side Slat Beam Visible Reflectance..
SLAT INFRA RED PROPERTIES Slat Infrared Hemispherical Transmittance

The slat Infrared transmittance. It is zero for solid metallic, wooden or glass slats, but may be non-zero in some cases (e.g., thin plastic slats).
Front Side Slat Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity

Front-side hemispherical emissivity of the slat. Approximately 0.9 for most materials. The most common exception is bare (unpainted) metal slats or slats finished with a metallic paint.
Back Side Slat Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity

Back-side hemispherical emissivity of the slat. Approximately 0.9 for most materials. The most common exception is bare (unpainted) metal slats or slats finished with a metallic paint.
OPENINGS
The openings data allows you to define the distance between the blind and the window and also define the fraction of the blind surface that is open to air flow on each side of the blind. The following opening multipliers are defined in the same way as for window shades. Note that, unlike window shades, there is no input for Air-Flow Permeability; this is automatically calculated by the program from slat angle, width and separation.
Blind Top Opening Multiplier

Defined as for Shades.
Blind Bottom Opening Multiplier

Blind Left-Side Opening Multiplier

Blind Right-Side Opening Multiplier

- 625 -
Window Blinds - Shade Data

Shade data tab on Window Blinds Dialog. Shade blinds can be used for diffusing materials such as drapery and translucent roller shades. For slat-type shading devices, like Venetian blinds, that have a strong angular dependence of transmission, absorption and reflection, it is better to use the Slat option. You can specify the properties of window shade materials. Reflectance and emissivity properties are assumed to be the same on both sides of the shade. Shades are considered to be perfect diffusers (all transmitted and reflected radiation is hemispherically-diffuse) with transmittance and reflectance independent of angle of incidence. When in place, the shade is assumed to cover all of the glazed part of the window, including dividers; it does not cover any of the window frame, if present. The plane of the shade is assumed to be parallel to the glazing. Transmittance and reflectance values for drapery material with different colour and openness of weave can be obtained from manufacturers or determined from 2001 ASHRAE Fundamentals, Chapter 30, Fig. 31. A diffusing blind can be applied inside, outside or mid-pane.
SHADE PROPERTIES Thickness

Thickness of the shade material. If the shade is not flat, such as for pleated pull-down shades or folded drapery, the average thickness normal to the plane of the shade should be used. Note: If you plan to apply the shade mid-pane then you should enter the minimum 0.001m as the thickness.
Conductivity
Shade material conductivity.
Solar transmittance
Transmittance averaged over the solar spectrum. Assumed independent of incidence angle.
Solar reflectance
Reflectance averaged over the solar spectrum. Assumed same on both sides of shade and independent of incidence angle.
Transmittance averaged over the solar spectrum and weighted by the response of the human eye. Assumed independent of incidence angle.
Visible reflectance
Reflectance averaged over the solar spectrum and weighted by the response of the human eye. Assumed same on both side of shade and independent of incidence angle.
Thermal hemispherical emissivity

Effective long-wave emissivity. Assumed same on both sides of shade. We can approximate this effective emissivity, eff, as follows. Let be the openness the shade, i.e., the ratio of the area of openings in the shade to the overall shade area (see Air-Flow Permeability, below). Let the emissivity of the shade material be . Then eff .(1 )
- 626 -
Window Blinds - Shade Data
For most non-metallic materials is about 0.9.
Thermal transmittance
Effective long-wave transmittance. Assumed independent of incidence angle. We can approximate this effective long-wave transmittance, eff, as follows. Let be the openness the shade, i.e., the ratio of the area of openings in the shade to the overall shade area. Let the long-wave transmittance of the shade material be . Then Teff +T.(1 ) For most materials is very close to zero, which gives Teff
OPENINGS Shade to glass distance

Distance from shade to adjacent glass. This is denoted by s in Figures below. If the shade is not flat, such as for pleated pull-down shades or folded drapery, the average shade-to-glass distance should be used. (The shade-toglass distance is used in calculating the natural convective air flow between glass and shade produced by buoyancy effects.). Note used for between-glass shades. In the following, H is the glazing height and W is the glazing width.
Shade top opening multiplier

Effective area for air flow at the top of the shade divided by sW, the horizontal area between glass and shade (see Figures below).
Shade bottom opening multiplier

Effective area for air flow at the bottom of the shade divided by sW, the horizontal area between glass and shade (see Figures below).
Shade left-side opening multiplier

Effective area for air flow at the left side of the shade divided by sH, the vertical area between glass and shade (see Figures below).
Shade right-side opening multiplier

Effective area for air flow at the right side of the shade divided by sH, the vertical area between glass and shade (see Figures below).
Shade air-flow permeability

The fraction of the shade surface that is open to air flow, i.e., the total area of openings (holes) in the shade surface divided by the shade area, HW. If air cannot pass through the shade material, Air-Flow Permeability = 0. For drapery fabric and screens the Air-Flow Permeability can be taken as the openness of the fabric (see 2001 ASHRAE Fundamentals, Chapter 30, Fig. 31), which is 0.0 to 0.07 for closed weave, 0.07 to 0.25 for semi-open weave, and 0.25 and higher for open weave.
- 627 -
Vertical section (a) and perspective view (b) of glass and interior shade layers showing variables used in the gap air flow analysis. In (b), the air-flow opening areas Abot, Atop, Al, Ar and Ah are shown schematically. See Engineering Manual for definition of thermal variables.
- 628 -
Window Blinds - Electrochromic Switching
Examples of air-flow openings for an interior shade covering glass of height H and width W. Not to scale. (a) Horizontal section through shade with openings on the left and right sides (top view). (b) Vertical section through shade with openings at the top and bottom (side view). In (a) Left-Side Opening Multiplier = Al /sH = min(l/s,1) and Right-Side Opening Multiplier = Ar /sH = min(r/s,1). In (b) Top Opening Multiplier = Atop /sW = t/s and Bottom Opening Multiplier = Abot /sW = b/s.
Window Blinds - Electrochromic Switching

Electrochromic tab on Window Blinds Dialog. Enter the electrochromic switchable pane material. This pane will be used in place of the standard outer glazing pane according to the control data in the Model Data. More information on Electrochromic glazing. Note: that the blind position in Openings Model Data must be 'Switchable' to use electrochromic switchable shading
- 629 -
Vent Components
Vent Components have a coefficient of discharge and a texture (used to represent a vent in the rendered view). They can be selected from the Openings tab when the Calculated natural ventilation model option is selected. More information about vents. There are two tabs on the Vents dialog: General Airflow
Vent component data can be accessed: from the Components tab on the opening screen (to view/edit library components if no file is open), from the Components tab in the Navigator panel (to view/edit model components if a file is open), by double-clicking on the vent icon on the Openings tab in the model data, by clicking on the Edit button when selecting vents from a list.
Vents - General
General tab on Vents Dialog. Enter the name and category for this vent component. The texture is used to represent the vent in rendered views.
Vents - Airflow
Airflow tab on Vents Dialog. Enter the discharge coefficient for this vent component. The velocity of the air moving through the vent is given by the standard orifice equation:
Where: v: Velocity Cd: Discharge coefficient P: Pressure either side of the vent density of the air going through the opening You can select this vent from the Openings model data. Note: The discharge coefficient is only used in thermal simulations when the Natural ventilation Model option is set to Calculated.
- 630 -
Holiday Schedule
Holiday Schedule
A 'Holiday schedule' is a list of intervals of one or more day which identify the days the building may be unoccupied. The holiday intervals are listed in order, with holidays most likely to be taken at the top of the list. The Holidays per year Model data on the Activities tab at building level defines how many holidays are taken and this 'Holiday schedule' defines which days are holidays. Days are selected from the top of the list working downwards. The data is used to specify EnergyPlus 'SpecialDayPeriods'. There are two tabs on the Holidays dialog: General List
Holiday data can be accessed: from the Components tab on the opening screen (to view/edit library components if no file is open), from the Components tab in the Navigator panel (to view/edit model components if a file is open), by double-clicking on the holidays icon on the Activity tab in the model data, by clicking on the Edit button when selecting holidays from a list.
Holiday Schedule - General

General tab on Holidays Dialog. Enter the Region and Category for the Holiday Schedule.
Holiday Schedule - List

List tab on Holidays Dialog. Holidays are selected from the top of the list, so holidays which are most likely to be taken should be defined first (so they are positioned at the top of the list). Use the controls in the Info panel to add, edit and delete holidays. Valid holiday date formats are defined in Compact Schedules: EnergyPlus Date Definition
- 631 -
Templates
Templates
DesignBuilder templates allow you to quickly load data into your model in bulk. If you often work with similar types of buildings you may find it useful to create your own templates. This will allow you to load the same data into any models you work with in the future. DesignBuilder Templates are databases of typical generic data. The following templates are available: Activity templates Construction templates Glazing templates Facade templates HVAC templates Location Templates Hourly weather data Pressure coefficients Metabolic rates Cracks Legislative regions Energy codes Sectors World time zones (predefined, not editable)
Library Templates are loaded into the model at the time the dsb file is created and from then on, they are associated specifically with this model and so are known as Model Templates. Any changes made to the Library Templates do not affect existing building models because they reference their own set of Model Templates. The latest set of library templates can be loaded into a model using the Import library components and templates to model command. Also templates are used for loading data into models, so a change to a template will not affect the model until the data is loaded. Note: Templates are loaded to the model in the same way that components are so that any edit to Model template data will be associated with that model only.
Managing template data

You can edit and move template data around in various ways: 1. 2. 3. Add, Edit, Delete, Import and Export Template library data from the Opening Screen - Template Libraries tab. If a model file is loaded you can edit Model templates from the Templates tab in the Navigator panel (Learning mode switched off) or by using the Data management panel on the right of the screen (Learning mode switched on). In either case, to add a template, open up the template type you wish to define by clicking on the + to the left of the template icon, then click on the category of template you wish to define. Now click on the Green '+' to add a template of the selected category. Import/export Model template using the File > Export > Library data menu command to create a .ddf file with the .dsb model file open. To import the previously exported Model template data to the Template library close the .dsb file and import the .ddf file to the library. Load the latest library templates into your model using the Import library components and templates to model command from the Tools menu when a model is loaded. Any new data that has been added to the
4. 5. 6.
- 633 -
library since the model file was created will be imported to the model. Also if there have been any changes to library template data, this new data will overwrite the original data. Note: any template you add while a model is open will be added to Model templates and not to the Template library. It will only be added to the library and hence to new models if you export the new component model data in .ddf form and import the .ddf file to the library before creating the new model.
Loading to Model Data

Each tab in the Model data has the name of the template last used to load the data at the top (shown in bold). At the top of the HVAC tab is the HVAC Template, at the top of the Lighting tab is the Lighting Template etc. This is the template that was previously used to load the default data, but you can load different data from a different template by clicking on the template data, then clicking again on the '... to the right of the template data and making a new selection. When you make the selection, the appropriate data is loaded from the template into the model. Note 1: It is important to understand that the template data itself does not contribute to the model until it is loaded in. Note 2: Changes to the model data relative to the data in the template last loaded are highlighted in bold to show that it overrides the template data previously loaded. Note 3: Another way to load data to a model from templates is to use the Load Data From Template tool.
Colour code
Templates are coded by colour in the Navigator panel and selection lists as follows: Red shows user data, i.e. data that was not supplied by DesignBuilder. Green indicates that the data is derived from a reputable national or international source. Blue indicates that the data is generated internally by DesignBuilder. Black is used for other data.
Activity Templates
Activity templates are used as a source of default activity (building usage) data for building models. The data covers occupancy, equipment usage and suitable design internal temperatures, illuminance levels and ventilation rates per person. There are five tabs on the Activity Template dialog: General
- 634 -
Activity Templates - General
All gains Occupancy Other gains Environmental
Activity Templates - General

General tab on Activity Templates Dialog. Enter the name, category, sector and region for this activity template. Enter the region as 'General' if you want the data to be generally available (i.e. not restricted to a particular region). The floor shade colour is used to shade the floor of the model at block and zone levels to give a quick indication of the usage of the building in various areas.
Activity Templates - All Gains

All Gains tab on Activity Templates Dialog. The lumped gains into the space from people, equipment, lights etc. Data on this tab is only used when the Gains option is set to 'Lumped'.
Activity Templates - Occupancy

Occupancy tab on Activity Templates Dialog. Occupancy levels and times, metabolic activity on this tab is used when the 'Gains' option is set to 'Early' or 'Detailed'. Set the metabolic rate according to the level of activity within the space. The metabolic factor accounts for people of various sizes. Enter 1.00 for men, 0.85 for women, 0.75 for children, or you can use an average value if there is a mix of sizes. The Workday profile is used when the 'Timing' option is set to 'Typical workday' and the Schedule data is used when the Timing option is set to '7/12 Schedules'.
Activity Templates - Other Gains

Other Gains tab on Activity Templates Dialog.
- 635 -
Data on this tab is used when the 'Gains' option is set to 'Early'. DHW Data is always used. The default gains into the space from computers, office equipment, catering, process and miscellaneous equipment for this activity. Also hot water consumption rate per person per day and the operation schedules are defined here.
Activity Templates - DHW

Enter the Domestic Hot Water (DHW) volumetric consumption per unit of floor area per day and the operation schedule. In DesignBuilder the amount of DHW consumed is considered to be a function of the activity. For example, there is a demand assumed to arise from the occupants of an office for activities such as washing hands and washing up cups. This demand is associated with the office rather than the toilet or tea room. Thus the demand from each space needs to be assigned to a DHW system even if the system itself is not present in the space.
Activity Templates - Environmental/Comfort

Environmental tab on Activity Templates Dialog. Enter the data related to the environmental and comfort requirements of this activity: Heating set-point temperature (if the space is heated). Cooling set-point temperature (if the spaces cooled). Ventilation set-point temperature Illuminance levels required. Fresh air levels required per person - defines mechanical ventilation air change rates.
If there is never any heating or cooling, you can leave these set-points. See Environmental Control under Activity Model Data for more details.
Construction Templates
Construction templates are used as a source of generic construction data for loading into building models. The template provides data on the construction of external walls, roofs, floors, partitions, roofs etc and airtightness data. There are four tabs on the Construction template dialog: General Simple Standard Airtightness
Template data can be accessed: from the Templates tab on the opening screen (if no file is open), from the Templates tab in the Navigator panel (if a file is open),
- 636 -
Construction Templates - General
by double-clicking on the template icon in the model data, by clicking on the Edit button when selecting templates from a list.
Construction Templates - General

General tab on Construction Templates Dialog. Enter the name, source, category and region for this construction template.
Construction Templates - Simple

Simple tab on Construction Templates Dialog. Data on this tab is used when the Construction model detail is set to Pre-design. Enter default levels of insulation and thermal mass for this construction type.
Construction Templates - Walls

Walls tab on Construction Templates Dialog. Data on this tab is used when the Construction model detail is set to Pre-design or General (i.e. it is always used). Select default walls, partitions for exposed and semi-exposed surfaces for this Constructions template. You can also select the external and internal wall sub-surface constructions here.
Construction Templates - Roofs/Floors/Slabs/Ceilings

Roofs/Floors/Slabs/Ceilings tab on Construction Templates Dialog. Data on this tab is used when the Construction model detail is set to Pre-design or General (i.e. it is always used). Select default constructions for roofs, floors, slabs and ceiling surfaces for this Constructions template. You can also select the roof sub-surface construction here.
Construction Templates - Doors

Doors tab on Construction Templates Dialog. Data on this tab is used when the Construction model detail is set to Pre-design or General (i.e. it is always used).
- 637 -
Select default door constructions for internal and external doors for this Constructions template. You can also select the external and internal wall sub-surface constructions here.
Construction Templates - Airtightness

Airtightness tab on Construction Templates Dialog.
Cracks template
The Cracks template setting indicates the Cracks data template to use as a source for crack data when the Calculated Natural ventilation model option is selected.
Infiltration
The default infiltration rate used when the 'Natural ventilation' model detail level is 'Simple'.
Construction Templates - Thermal Mass

Thermal mass tab on Construction Templates Dialog. Data on this tab is used when the Construction model detail is set to Pre-design or General (i.e. it is always used). Enter the default thermal mass construction for this construction template. See Internal Thermal Mass for more information on defining thermal mass in a model.
Glazing Templates
Glazing templates are used as a source of default glazing, frame and shading construction data for building models. There are three tabs on the Glazing Template dialog: General Glazing Shading
- 638 -
Glazing Templates - General
Glazing Templates - General

General tab on Glazing Templates Dialog. Enter the name, category and region for this glazing template. Enter the region as 'General' if you want the data to be generally available (i.e. not restricted to a particular region). Glazing templates with category '<System>' have their data set up at the time a file is created or when the Legislative region is changed.
Glazing Templates - Glazing

Glazing tab on Glazing Templates Dialog. Enter data on the glazing construction, frame and opening area for external glazing, internal glazing and roof glazing.
Glazing Templates - Shading

Shading tab on Glazing Templates Dialog. Select any shading devices to be applied when this glazing templates is loaded to the model.
Facade Templates (Types)

Facade templates are used to provide a choice of typical simple facade layouts and frame definitions which can be easily loaded into a building model. There are two tabs on the Facade Template dialog: General Openings
Facade Templates - General

General tab on Facade Templates Dialog. Enter the name and category for this Facade Template.
- 639 -
Facade Templates - Openings

Openings tab on Facade Templates Dialog. Enter the glazing and frame data for the facade. There are a number of standard facade types: None - there is no glazing. Continuous horizontal - glazing is generated in a continuous horizontal strip using sill height and % glazing. Fixed height - glazing is generated with a fixed height at the specified sill height, and width is calculated based on the % glazing. This option uses % glazing but prioritises window height. Preferred height - glazing is generated using the window height data and the % glazing, but the window height may be adjusted to achieve the required % glazing. This option uses window and sill height but prioritises % glazing. Fixed width and height - windows have fixed width and height. This option uses % glazing but prioritises window width and height. Fill surface (100%) - the entire surface is filled with glazing and there is no frame. If the glazing does not have a frame, uncheck the 'Has a frame?' box.
Lighting Templates
Lighting templates data sets are used as a source of generic lighting systems for loading into the building data. There are three tabs on the Lighting Template dialog: General Output Control
Lighting Templates - General

General tab on Lighting Templates Dialog. Enter the name, category and region for this Lighting Template. Enter the region as 'General' if you want the data to be generally available (i.e. not restricted to a particular region). See also Building Model Lighting Data for more information on the use of this template data in the model.
- 640 -
Lighting Templates - Output
Lighting Templates - Output

Output tab on Lighting Templates Dialog. Enter the lighting energy for task and general lighting in W/m2/100 lux (W/ft2/100 lux). This data is used for setting up the actual Lighting energy W/m2 data in each zone using: Lighting energy (W/m2) = Lighting (W/m2/100 lux) x Design lux level (Activity tab) / 100 Substitute ft2 for m2 for equation in IP units. The 'Output' data is used for generating default lighting loads based on lighting type and required illuminance levels as set in Activity data. See General Lighting under Building Model Lighting Data for more information on the use of this template data in the model.
Lighting Templates - Control

Control tab on Lighting Templates Dialog. If the lighting is to be controlled by the availability of natural daylight, check the 'control' option box and select the type of control.
Continuous Control
For 'continuous' control, the overhead lights dim continuously and linearly from maximum electric power, maximum light output to minimum electric power, minimum light output as the daylight illuminance increases. The lights stay at the minimum point with further increase in the daylight illuminance.
The minimum input power fraction for 'continuous' control type is the lowest power the lighting system can dim down to, expressed as a fraction of maximum input power. For 'continuous/off' lighting control, this is the power fraction reached just before the light switch off completely. The minimum output fraction for 'continuous' control type, is the lowest lighting output the lighting system can dim down to, expressed as a fraction of maximum light output. This is the fractional light output that the system produces at minimum input power. For 'continuous/off' lighting control, this is the power fraction reached just before the light switch off completely.
- 641 -
Continuous/Off Control
'Continuous/off' control is the same as continuous control except that the lights switch off completely when the minimum dimming point is reached.
Stepped Control
For 'stepped' control, the electric power input and light output vary in discreet, equally spaced steps. The number of steps can be set.
HVAC Templates
HVAC templates data sets are used as a source of generic heating/cooling and ventilation systems for loading into the building data. There are four tabs on the HVAC Template dialog: General Ventilation System Air temperature distribution
HVAC Templates - General

General tab on HVAC Templates Dialog. Enter the name, category, sector and region for this HVAC template. Enter the region as 'General' if you want the data to be generally available (i.e. not restricted to a particular region).
- 642 -
HVAC Templates - Ventilation
The floor shade colour is used to shade the floor of the model at block and zone levels to give a quick indication of the system type fitted in various areas.
HVAC Templates - Ventilation

Ventilation tab on HVAC Templates Dialog. Enter the maximum natural/mechanical ventilation rates as appropriate.
HVAC Templates - System Heating/Cooling

System tab on HVAC Templates Dialog. The data on this tab is divided into 'System' (i.e. whole system data), 'Heating' and 'Cooling'. Auxiliary energy - defines the energy consumption of fans, pumps and other auxiliary equipment when using the 'Simple' HVAC model option. This energy is assumed to be consumed during periods when either heating or cooling systems are operating. Type - defines the EnergyPlus compact system type when the 'Compact' HVAC model option is set. Select from: Unitary single zone - for modelling 'window' air conditioning units and any other system which does not use ducted air Unitary multizone - for modelling constant volume air conditioning systems. VAV - for modelling variable air volume air conditioning systems.
When using the VAV compact system type you can define the system in more detail using: Outside air control type - select either 'Fixed' or 'Proportional'. 'Fixed means that the minimum outside air flow rate is fixed no matter what the actual system flow rate is. Proportional means the minimum outside air flow rate varies in proportion to the total system air flow rate. Supply air min flow fraction - is the fraction that the zone VAV box can reduce to based on the supply air maximum flow rate.
Heating/cooling system CoP is the whole system seasonal coefficient of performance including distribution losses when using the 'Simple' HVAC model option. Boiler/chiller CoP is the seasonal coefficient of performance of the boiler/chiller, excluding any energy consumption by fans, pumps etc and excluding distribution losses..
HVAC Templates - Air Temperature Distribution

Air temperature distribution tab on HVAC Templates Dialog. By default EnergyPlus assumes that air temperature within a zone is completely uniform (i.e. the air is fully mixed). The data on this tab allows you to set up a temperature gradient which varies dynamically depending on: Outside temperature. Inside temperature. Inside-outside temperature difference.
- 643 -
Heating load. Cooling load.
See Air Temperature Distribution for more information on defining vertical zone temperature profiles (temperature gradients).
Location Templates
Location Templates are a database of locations from around the world based on ASHRAE design weather data including daylight savings. Each Location data set is located within a 'Legislative Region'. Most Regions in Europe include some basic data on the energy codes which apply. There are four tabs on the Location Template dialog: Location Winter design weather Summer design weather Simulation weather
Location Templates - Location

Location tab on Location Templates Dialog. DesignBuilder Location Templates are located within 'Legislative Regions'. Most regions in Europe include some basic data on the energy codes which apply.
Location Templates - Winter Design Weather

Winter design weather tab on Location Templates Dialog. The weather data used in winter design calculations is: Minimum outside dry-bulb temperature Co-incident wind speed and direction.
There are options for 99.6 or 99% confidence (i.e. 0.4 or 1% chance of more extreme winter weather occurring).
Location Templates - Summer Design Weather

Summer design weather tab on Location Templates Dialog.
- 644 -
Location Templates - Simulation Weather
The weather data used in summer design calculations is: Maximum outside dry-bulb temperature Minimum outside dry-bulb temperature Wet-bulb temperature at the time of the maximum dry-bulb temperature.
Risk can be specified based on dry or wet-bulb temperatures, for 99.6, 99 and 98% confidence (i.e. 0.4, 1 or 2% chance of more extreme weather occurring).
Location Templates - Simulation Weather

Simulation weather tab on Location Templates Dialog. DesignBuilder will only use hourly weather data for simulations (winter and summer design calculations use design weather data). You can add your own Hourly Weather data.
Crack Templates
Crack data is used when the 'Calculated' natural ventilation option is set. In this case every surface in the model has a crack and its size (characterised by flow coefficient and exponent) is determined by Airtightness as set on the Constructions tab in the Model Data. The value of Airtightness is used as a key to look up corresponding crack sizes in the Cracks database. The cracks database has been set up empirically to give typical air change rates for each of the five Airtightness categories in a range of building types. There are five tabs on the Crack Template data dialog: General Openings Walls Floors/ceilings Roofs
Crack Templates - General

General tab on Crack Templates Dialog. Tab contains the name and category of the crack template.
Crack Templates - Openings

Openings tab on Crack Templates Dialog. Enter the characteristics of the cracks around internal and external windows, vents and doors.
- 645 -
Note that the opening crack characteristics are normalised by opening perimeter lengths.
Crack Templates - Walls

Walls tab on Crack Templates Dialog. In reality the porosity of walls is caused by a very large number of small cracks and holes. DesignBuilder models this porosity using a single equivalent crack. Enter the characteristics this equivalent single crack for internal and external walls. Note that the crack characteristics are normalised by surface area.
Crack Templates - Floors/Ceilings

Floors/Ceilings tab on Crack Templates Dialog. In reality the porosity of floors is caused by a very large number of small cracks and holes. DesignBuilder models this porosity using a single equivalent crack. Enter the characteristics this equivalent single crack for internal and external floors. Note that the crack characteristics are normalised by surface area.
Crack Templates - Roofs

Roofs tab on Crack Templates Dialog. In reality the porosity of roofs is caused by a very large number of small cracks and holes. DesignBuilder models this porosity using a single equivalent crack. Enter the characteristics this equivalent single crack for roofs. Note that the crack characteristics are normalised by surface area.
Legislative Region Templates

A Legislative region in DesignBuilder is typically a whole country or a region, province or state within a country which has its own building control powers. In current versions of the software a Legislative Region contains information on: Local energy codes/building regulations. Carbon dioxide emission factors are provided for a range of fuels.
The current regions database is only sparsely populated with useful data (most of that is from countries within Europe). But we expect to expand this in time. There are three tabs on the Legislative Region Template dialog: General
- 646 -
Legislative Region Templates - General
Standard insulation Emissions
Legislative Region Templates - General

General tab on Legislative Region Templates Dialog. Enter the name of the Legislative region, the category (country) and a description of the Region.
Legislative Region Templates - Standard Insulation

Standard insulation tab on Legislative Region Templates Dialog. Data on this type specifies 4 standard insulation levels which apply to this region: Uninsulated - typical U-values for buildings in the region which are not insulated Stock average - Average (estimated) insulation standards for real buildings in the region. This data is used in some asset rating calculations. Mandatory energy code - Defines the maximum U-values allowed in the energy code/building regulations in force in the region. Best practice - Defines the U-values to be expected in a state-of-the-art building in the region.
The data on this tab indicates the required maximum U-values.
Legislative Region Templates - Emissions

Emissions tab on Legislative Region Templates Dialog. The factors on this tab define the amount of carbon dioxide emitted per unit of energy consumed for each of the major fuel types in the region. The CO2 emission factors depend on the mix of technology used to generated the electricity, the quality of the fuel and other factors such as production carbon cost. CO2 emissions are calculated in DesignBuilder by multiplying fuel consumption by the kg CO2 per kWh conversion factor for that fuel. Conversion factors can be made specific to the region by going to the site level and Region tab and changing the data for the region. Youll need to copy the default region first, edit the copy and select the copy as DesignBuilder library data cannot be edited. Recent CO2 conversion factors are provided with the installation for some European countries but you should check values used and if necessary enter specific values as described above.
Energy Code Templates

Energy code data is used within DesignBuilder to indicate the mandatory energy performance of building components and/or the whole building.
- 647 -
There are three types of heat transmission code: 1. Envelope component performance 2. Whole building envelope performance 3. Whole building energy performance You can define the type of energy code by making selections on the next 3 tabs. If this energy code requires for example that minimum component perforance and whole building energy performance then check both these options. Template data can be accessed: from the Templates tab on the opening screen (if no file is open), from the Templates tab in the Navigator panel (if a file is open), by double-clicking on the template icon in the model data, by clicking on the Edit button when selecting templates from a list.
Energy Code Templates - General

General tab on Energy Code Templates Dialog. Enter a name and description of this Energy code.
Energy Code Templates - Envelope (component)

Envelope (component) tab on Energy Code Templates Dialog. Specifies mandatory maximum U-values through the individual components (walls, windows, roofs etc.). The data on this tab indicates the required maximum U-values.
Energy Code Templates - Envelope (building)

Envelope (building) tab on Energy Code Templates Dialog. Sets a limit on the rate of heat transfer through the overall building envelope. The limit is typically set as an average U-value for the overall building envelope.
Energy Code Templates - Energy Performance

Energy performance tab on Energy Code Templates Dialog. Sets a limit on the rate of heat transfer through the overall building envelope. The limit is typically set as an average U-value for the overall building envelope.
Sector Templates
Sectors are used to categorise buildings according to their use/activity.
- 648 -
Times Zone Templates
A sector is located within a legislative region and can only be accessed if the building is situated within the region containing the sector. The 'General' sector is an exception to this rule as it can be accessed from all regions if the 'List region data' Program Options setting is 'All or 'General+Local'. You can also associate a holiday schedule with the sector. Template data can be accessed: from the Templates tab on the opening screen (if no file is open), from the Templates tab in the Navigator panel (if a file is open), by double-clicking on the template icon in the model data, by clicking on the Edit button when selecting templates from a list.
Times Zone Templates

DesignBuilder comes with a database of all of the world's time zones including information on daylight savings. This data is sourced from ASHRAE. If the time zone does not have daylight saving then the text N/A is entered in the Daylight saving from field. The time zone is selected in model data under Time and Daylight Saving on the Location tab at site level. Note: you can override daylight savings to be off in the model data by unchecking the Use daylight saving. Template data can be accessed: from the Templates tab on the opening screen (if no file is open), from the Templates tab in the Navigator panel (if a file is open), by double-clicking on the template icon in the model data, by clicking on the Edit button when selecting templates from a list.
Wind Pressure Coefficient Templates

Wind pressure coefficients are used when Natural ventilation model option is set to 'Calculated'. The EnergyPlus Airflow Network calculations use pressure coefficients when calculating wind-induced pressure on each surface during simulations when the Calculated Natural ventilation option is selected. DesignBuilder is supplied with a database of wind pressure coefficients based on data from Martin Liddament, Air Infiltration Calculation Techniques, An Applications Guide, AIVC. The Cp data is buildings of 3 storeys or less, with square surfaces and for 3 levels of site exposure. The data is given in 45 increments. Note: The AIVC wind pressure coefficient data provides a good first level of approximation for basic design purposes. However, ideally you would override this default data with pressure coefficient data specific to your application. This data might be calculated from CFD simulations or measured from wind tunnel studies using physical models. Template data can be accessed:
- 649 -
from the Templates tab on the opening screen (if no file is open), from the Templates tab in the Navigator panel (if a file is open), by double-clicking on the template icon in the model data, by clicking on the Edit button when selecting templates from a list.
- 650 -
Visualisation
Visualisation
The Visualisation screen allows you to view the model in full 3-D rendered mode. This section describes the process of creating and controlling rendered images. From the Visualisation screen you can export rendered images in various formats and also generate AVI movies of the scene. To render a model, click on the Visualisation tab:
which takes you to the Visualisation screen:
- 651 -
Visualisation Controls
The following controls are available to customise the view: View Rotation Orbit Zoom Fit view Pan view Zoom window
Controls are also provided to customise the rendered image: Show shadows Antialiasing Show north arrow Dynamics
These controls are accessed from the Display Options panel on the Visualisation screen:
- 652 -
Show Shadows, Time, Day, Month

Display options on Visualisation screen You can incorporate solar shading within the rendered model view by switching the Show shadows check box on and then clicking on the Apply button:
- 653 -
After clicking on the Apply button, a progress control appears to inform of shadow generation and then the view is updated:
- 654 -
If you want to look at more detailed shading, you can include the window frame dividers in the shading calculations by checking the Show window frame shadows check box and clicking the Apply button:
- 655 -
Period
The month, day and time-of-day can be controlled using the controls under the Period header. Note that the time specified here is local mean time excluding any daylight saving. You can account for daylight saving time by adding 1 hour to the local mean time during summer months to see shading for clock time. Note: Time is defined in decimal hours, e.g. '10.5' is the same as 10:30 a.m.. In the screenshot below the time has been changed to 10:00 and the shadows adjust accordingly.
- 656 -
Show North Arrow
Show North Arrow

Display options on Visualisation screen Use this control to switch the display of the North direction arrow on or off.
Sunpath
You can display a Sunpath diagram for the building at its current location by checking the Show Sunpath diagram Display option and pressing the Apply button. This will display a Sunpath diagram similar to that shown below.
- 657 -
The Sunpath diagram provided in DesignBuilder can be a very useful way to view the paths taken by the sun as it moves through the sky at all times of the year.
Sunpath diagram scale factor

There is an option to override the default scale factor applied to the Sunpath diagram. With a scale factor of 1 the Sunpath diagram fits snugly round the building. The default scale factor is 1.5.
Sunpath day of month

By default DesignBuilder uses the first day of the month when generating the sunpath lines for each month of the year. This option allows you to use any other day of the month from 1 to 28.
Change solar position tool
When both the Show Sunpath diagram and Show shadows Display options are set, the Change solar position tool becomes available. This allows you to move the sun around the diagram. To do this first click on the Change solar position toolbar icon (above). When this tool is active the cursor become a cross and you can use it to click on a junction of time/month sunpath lines to set the new solar position. You can continue to move the sun around the sky by clicking on the diagram in the same way. An alternative way to use this tool is to drag the sun around the sky. You will notice that the Time of day and Month data in the Display options panel are updated along with shadows as the sun moves through the sky. When you have finished press the <Escape> key to return to Select mode. Tip: You can use the Sunpath diagram with the Create movie tool to show the sun moving through the sky for the current design month. To do this select the 2-Shading for design day option on the Movie options data dialog box
- 658 -
Antialiasing
Antialiasing
Display options on Visualisation screen The antialiasing option can be used to improve image quality. You may need to experiment with antialiasing to confirm whether or not the graphics card fitted to your computer will facilitate this feature - with some earlier cards, antialiasing can be very slow. Tip: more advanced graphics cards can provide hardware antialiasing and in this case this software antialiasing option may only provide marginal benefit. To enable antialiasing, switch the Antialiasing check box on and click on the Apply button:
You can improve the quality of the image using the Increasing Quality slider control:
- 659 -
Bear in mind that as you increase image quality, the display speed will decrease.
Dynamics
Display option on Visualisation screen With larger and more complex models, orbit and zoom control speed can be increased very significantly by selecting 'Wireframe' from the 'Dynamics' control drop list.
Visualisation Limitations
Visualisations are based on the same model as that used for the calculations but you may notice some slight differences in the way the model is displayed vis-a-vis the floor constructions and Zone volume calculation options. 1. DesignBuilder uses a single floor 'slab' for each block even when some floors in the block may have different constructions. This is done for simplicity and also to ensure the most realistic images are produced without step changes in the floor level throughout the block. So there is only limited scope for adjusting the height of floor level in the visualisation. Where there is external floor and internal floor in the same block you will notice that the internal floor slab used to represent the floor in the rendered view is the same no matter what settings are used in the Zone volume options. You will also notice that the floor slab takes on the texture of the internal floor even for areas of the floor that are actually external floor and may have a different texture. Where the Ground floor construction is below ground and is not subtracted from zone volume option is selected, the top of the ground floor will be shown in the visualisation screen as being at
2.
3.
- 660 -
Creating Movies
ground level - this is consistent with the data. However you will not be able to see the ground construction below the ground if you adjust the camera level to be below ground.
Creating Movies
When on the Visualisation or CFD screens you can create AVI movies of your model. To create a video file from a rendered view, click on the Generate AVI movie tool which opens the Movie options data dialog box:
Use the Type drop list to select either: 1-Orbit - 360 orbit movie. This option generates a series of images, one for each angular Orbit increment and then allows you stitch them together to create an AVI file. 2-Shading for design day - fixed camera position, varying the solar position over the design day as specified on the Visualisation Display options panel. Tip: The 2-Shading for design day option works particularly well with the Sunpath diagram displayed Click on the OK button to generate the movie. After the movie generation has completed, a file save dialogue will be displayed to allow you to save the movie file to any required location. Note: smaller Shading time increments and Orbit increments can generate a lot of data and take a long time to complete movie generation, especially for large models when software antialiasing is switched on.
- 661 -
Calculations
Calculations
There are four types of energy simulation: Heating design simulation Cooling design simulation Simulation using hourly weather data (simply referred to as 'simulation' in DesignBuilder documentation) Calculate - for SBEM and Portuguese IEE calculations. CFD Daylighting Cost/Embodied Carbon
Display Options in the Panel in the bottom left of the screen allow you to change the data displayed and the presentation style. Results can be exported in a variety of file formats or they can added as a Report topic.
Heating Design Calculation

Heating design calculations are carried out to determine the size of heating equipment required to meet the coldest winter design weather conditions likely to be encountered at the site location. These design calculations are traditionally carried out using steady-state methods such as those offered by ASHRAE and CIBSE. You can use DesignBuilder to carry out effectively the same calculation using the EnergyPlus dynamic thermal simulation engine. Click on the Heating design Screen tab to view Heating Design data. If the necessary data has not yet been generated, a Heating Design calculation is automatically started to generate the data.
See also the Heating Design Calculations Tutorial Heating design simulations using EnergyPlus have the following characteristics: Constant (Steady-state) external temperature set to the winter design external temperature. Wind speed and direction set to design values. No solar gain. No internal gains (lighting, equipment, occupancy etc). Heated zones are heated constantly to achieve the heating temperature set point using a simple convective heating system. Includes consideration of heat conduction and convection between zones of different temperatures. Schedules are not used for Heating design calculations which are based on a steady state analysis which does not account for timing.
Simulation continues until temperatures/heat flows in each zone have converged. If convergence does not occur then simulation continues for the maximum number of days as specified in the calculation options. The simulation calculates heating capacities required to maintain the temperature set points in each zone and displays the total heat loss broken down as:
- 663 -
Glazing Walls Partitions Solid floors Roofs External infiltration Internal natural ventilation (i.e. heat lost to other cooler adjacent spaces through windows, vents, doors, holes)
The total heat loss in each zone is multiplied by a Safety factor (1.5 by default) to give a recommended heating Design Capacity. This heating capacity can be written directly into the Heating capacity model data depending on the setting of the Plant sizing model option on the Data tab under HVAC. Customise the data displayed and display style using the Display Options panel. Note: heating design calculations do not use any Natural ventilation data.
EnergyPlus IDF data

You can view the EnergyPlus IDF data used to carry out the calculation by clicking on the 'View the input data' link in the info panel (Learning mode only) or from the Tools menu.
Heating Design Calculation Options

These calculation options can be accessed from the Heating design calculation options tab of the Model Options dialog and from the Heating design calculation options dialog. Calculation Options Heating system sizing Advanced Calculation Options
Enter some text to identify the calculation. This will be used in reports and in the filename for automatically generated ESO files. Click on the OK button to start the Heating design calculation.
Reviewing Heating Design Output

You can review heating design output in 2 ways: Heat loss breakdown - on the Steady State tab. Summary table - heating capacity data for each zone on the Summary tab.
To update the data using different calculation options, click Update (Ctrl-U). The General tab on the Display Options panel provides options for controlling the data displayed in the Heating design data display screen. General Display Options are grouped under three headers: Data - control the data displayed. Y-axis - for customising the layout of the Y-axis.
- 664 -
Reviewing Heating Design Output
Appearance - for customising the style and appearance of the graphics.
The Detailed tab on the Display Options panel provides controls which allow you to select exactly the data items you wish to display.
DATA OPTIONS Data

Select an option to indicate the data you wish to display: 1-All - fabric and ventilation heat gains/losses, internal gains (not Heating Design), temperatures and outside dry-bulb air temperature. 2-Site data - all site data. 3-Comfort - inside air, the radiant and comfort temperatures. 4-Internal gains - internal gains including equipment, lighting, occupancy, solar and HVAC heating/cooling delivery. 5-Fabric and ventilation - heat gains to the space from the surface element (walls, floors, ceilings etc.) and ventilation. Negative values indicate heat loss from the space.
Tip: to update the data using different calculation options, click Update (Ctrl-U).
Show as
You can display the data in one of four ways: Graph Grid Graph and table Table
Note: you must select the Grid option to export data in spreadsheet format.
Normalise by floor area

Check this option if you wish data to be displayed 'per floor area' i.e. /m2 or /ft2. You can select the area to use as the denominator from: 1-All areas - Total area is used, 2-Occupied area - just occupied areas are used.
Note: you can only select 1-All areas if the building and block data includes occupied areas as set in Include unoccupied zones in block and building totals and averages option in Heating design Output options, Likewise you can only select 2-Occupied area if the building and block data excludes occupied areas.
Y-AXIS OPTIONS
These options give you control over how the Y-axis is displayed.
Lock min/max
This option locks the extent of the Y-axes so that they keep their current maximum and minimum values. This allows consistent comparison with the future results display.
- 665 -
The Y-axis keeps its current settings until you unlock it again. You can achieve the same effect by clicking on the 'Lock Y-axis min/max values' toolbar command
. When you lock the Y-axis the current settings are stored and displayed for each of the available Y-axes. You can edit any of these to get a more precise setting. Remember to click on the Apply button when you are ready to register a change to any numeric display option data.
Overlap multiple axes

Option allows you to save space on the Y-axis allowing different axes to overlap.
Separate axes
Check this option to add a vertical space between each of the displayed axes.

Check this option if you wish data to be displayed 'per floor area' i.e. /m2 or /ft2.
APPEARANCE
You can control the details of the presentation of the graphical output by making selections on the Display Options panel under the Appearance header.
ENERGYPLUS SCRIPT
You can view the input data script used to calculate these results by selecting the 'Tools | Display simulation input script' menu option. If you do not have the EnergyPlus IDF editor installed, then you should associate the .idf file extension with a text editor to make this option work. Note: this shows the script stored with the model just before the simulation not the _Ref-600109359in.idf file stored in the EnergyPlus folder.
Heating Design Summary Table

The Summary screen shows Comfort temperature, Steady state heat loss and Design heating capacity: Comfort temperature - The mean of the internal air and radiant temperatures (also known as the 'operational' temperature) Steady-state heat loss - same as 'Heating delivered' on the Steady State tab - heat delivered to maintain the internal heating design temperature. Design capacity - is the Steady-state heat loss multiplied by the Design margin to give the design heating capacity of the equipment.
- 666 -
Heat Loss Breakdown Results
Use the Export command to export this data in spreadsheet format.

The 'Steady-State' tab has detailed heating design results (displayed as a histogram and table by default). For more on how the output is calculated see: Calculation of DesignBuilder Output from EnergyPlus Report Variables. Air Temperature - the calculated average temperature of the air. Radiant Temperature - the (area * emissivity) weighted average of the zone inside surface temperatures. Operative Temperature - The mean of the internal air and radiant temperatures. Outside Dry-Bulb Temperature. Glazing - heat loss through all glazing. Walls - heat loss through all external walls. Ceilings (int) - heat loss through internal ceilings (e.g. zone above is colder). Floors (int) - heat loss through internal floors (e.g. zone below is colder). Floors (ext) - heat loss through external floors (not ground floor, e.g. floor in cantilevered space, roof eaves etc). Ground Floors - heat loss through ground floors. Doors and Vents - conduction heat loss through doors and vents. Partitions (int) - heat loss through all internal partitions (e.g. adjacent zone is colder). External Infiltration - heat loss through air infiltration (non-unintentional air entry through cracks and holes in building fabric). External Mechanical Ventilation - is the heat loss due to the entry of outside air through the air distribution system. View can exclude mechanical ventilation from the heating design calculations by unchecking the 'Mechanical ventilation On' Model Data.
- 667 -
Internal Natural Ventilation - heat loss due to air exchange through open internal windows, doors, vents, holes and virtual partitions to adjacent spaces. Zone Sensible Heating - heat delivered to maintain the internal heating design temperature.
Note: The Heating delivered is the sum of the component heat loss values. Surface heat loss data (walls, ceilings, floors etc) refers to heat transfer from the zone to the inside surface of the building elements. You can also customise the data displayed and display style using the Display Options panel.
- 668 -
- 669 -
Cooling Design Calculation

Cooling design calculations are carried out to determine the capacity of mechanical cooling equipment required to meet the hottest summer design weather conditions likely to be encountered at the site location. In zones which are not mechanically cooled free-floating temperatures are calculated including the effects of natural or mechanical ventilation if these options are selected on the zone HVAC tab. These design calculations are traditionally carried out using periodic steady-state methods such as the admittance and response factor methods provided by CIBSE and ASHRAE. You can use DesignBuilder to carry out effectively the same calculation using the EnergyPlus dynamic thermal simulation engine. Click on the Cooling design Screen tab to view Cooling Design data. If the necessary data has not yet been generated, a Cooling Design calculation is automatically started to generate the data.
See also the Cooling Design Calculations Tutorial Cooling design simulations using EnergyPlus have the following characteristics: Periodic steady-state external temperatures calculated using maximum and minimum design summer weather conditions. No wind. Includes solar gains through windows and scheduled natural ventilation. includes internal gains from occupants, lighting and other equipment. Includes consideration of heat conduction and convection between zones of different temperatures.
For buildings situated in the Northern Hemisphere, Cooling Design calculations are made for the month of July and for buildings in the Southern Hemisphere they are made for the month of January. Simulation continues until temperatures/heat flows in each zone have converged. If convergence does not occur then simulation continues for the maximum number of days as specified in the calculation options. The simulation calculates half-hourly temperatures and heat flows for each zone and determines cooling capacities required to maintain any cooling temperature set points in each zone. The maximum cooling load in each zone is multiplied by a Safety factor (1.3 by default) to give a Design Cooling Capacity. This design cooling capacity can be written directly into the Cooling capacity model data depending on the setting of the Plant sizing model option on the Data tab under HVAC. Customise the data displayed and display style using the Display Options panel. Note: Cooling Design calculations use Scheduled Natural ventilation model data set on the HVAC tab even when the Calculated natural ventilation option is set. This is to help you to document the input data for your Cooling Design calculations. Calculated natural ventilation data input is too complex to be adequately summarised.
Cooling Design Calculation Options

These calculation options can also be accessed from the Cooling design calculation options tab of the Model Options dialog. Calculation Options Summer design day
- 670 -
Cooling Design Detailed Results
Cooling system sizing Solar Options Advanced Calculation Options
Enter some text to identify the calculation. This will be used in reports and in the filename for automatically generated ESO files. Click on the OK button to start the Cooling design calculation.

The 'Analysis' tab has detailed half-hourly cooling design results (displayed as a line graph by default). For more on how the output is calculated see: Calculation of DesignBuilder Output from EnergyPlus Report Variables. Air Temperature - the calculated average temperature of the air. Radiant Temperature - the (area * emissivity) weighted average of the zone inside surface temperatures. Operative Temperature - The mean of the mean internal air and mean radiant temperatures. Outside Dry-Bulb Temperature. Glazing - the total heat flow to the zone from the glazing, frame and divider of exterior glazing excluding transmitted short-wave solar radiation (which is accounted for in Solar Gains Exterior Windows below). For windows without an interior shading device this heat flow is equal to: + [Convective heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the glazing] + [Net IR heat flow to the zone from zone side of the glazing] [Short-wave radiation from zone transmitted back out the window] + [Conduction to zone from window frame and divider, if present] Here, short-wave radiation is that from lights and diffuse interior solar radiation. For windows with an interior shading device this heat flow is equal to: [Convective heat flow to the zone from the air flowing through the gap between glazing and shading device] + [Convective heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the shading device] + [Net IR heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the glazing] + [Net IR heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the shading device] [Short-wave radiation from zone transmitted back out the window] + [Conduction to zone from window frame and divider, if present] Walls - heat gain due to conduction through all external walls, including the effect of solar radiation and longwave radiation to the sky. Roofs - heat gain due to conduction through all external roofs, including the effect of solar radiation and longwave radiation to the sky. Ceilings (int) - heat conduction gain through internal ceilings (e.g. zone above is colder). Floors (int) - heat conduction gain through internal floors (e.g. zone below is colder). Floors (ext) - heat conduction gain through external floors (not ground floor, e.g. floor in cantilevered space, roof eaves etc). Ground floors - heat conduction gain through ground floors.
- 671 -
Partitions (int) - heat conduction gain due to heat conduction through all internal partitions from adjacent zones at different temperatures. Doors and vents - conduction heat gain through doors and vents. External Infiltration - heat gain through air infiltration (non-unintentional air entry through cracks and holes in building fabric). External Vent - heat gain due to the entry of outside air through natural and mechanical ventilation (as defined on the HVAC tab). You can exclude mechanical ventilation from the cooling design calculations by unchecking the 'Mechanical ventilation On' Model data. Internal Natural Ventilation - heat gain from other zones due to air exchange through open internal windows, doors, vents, holes and virtual partitions. Task Lighting - heat gain due to task lighting. General Lighting - heat gain due to general lighting. Miscellaneous - heat gain due to miscellaneous equipment. Process - heat gain due to process equipment. Catering - heat gain due to cooking. Computer and Equipment - heat gain due to computer and other IT-related equipment. Occupancy - sensible gain due to occupants. Please note that this can vary depending on the internal conditions. With very high temperatures the sensible gain can drop to zero with all cooling effects taking place through latent heat transfer. Solar Gains Exterior Windows - (used to be called 'Transmitted solar gains'). Short-wave solar radiation transmission through external windows. For a bare window, this transmitted radiation consists of solar radiation passing through the glass and diffuse radiation from solar reflected from the outside window reveal, if present. For windows with a shade, this transmitted radiation is totally diffuse (shades are assumed to be perfect diffusers). For windows with a blind, this transmitted radiation consists of beam + diffuse radiation that passes between the slats and diffuse radiation from beam-to-diffuse reflection from the slats. Solar re-reflected back out of the external window and transmitted through interior windows is not subtracted. Solar Gains Interior Windows - Total beam + diffuse solar radiation transmission through interior windows. Requires the 3-Full interior and exterior solar model option to be set. Zone Sensible Cooling - is the sensible cooling effect on the zone of any air introduced into the zone through the HVAC system. It includes any 'free cooling' due to introduction of relatively cool outside air. Cooling always shows as a negative heat gain in the results. It is best thought of as part of the zone heat balance.
Airflow
Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltration - The sum of outside air (in ac/h) flowing into the zone through: The HVAC air distribution system + Infiltration + Natural ventilation
System Heat Flows (Compact HVAC only)

These heat flows are plotted on the System Energy axes: Zone Heating - energy supplied by local room heaters and reheat coils to maintain room internal heating temperature setpoint temperature when using Compact HVAC data. Total Cooling - depending on the Sizing method: for the default ASHRAE sizing method Total Cooling is the rate at which total energy (sensible and latent) is removed from the mixed outside and return air stream in order to bring the mixed air stream to the specified temperature and humidity ratio of the supply air stream. for Compact HVAC sizing method - at building level: sensible + latent cooling transfer to the supply air from the AHU cooling coil + any single zone unitary and fan coil units in the building. At zone level: sensible + latent cooling transfer to the supply air from a single zone unitary or fan coil unit. Sensible Cooling - depending on the Sizing method:
- 672 -
for ASHRAE sizing method Sensible Cooling is the rate at which sensible energy is removed from the mixed outside and return air stream in order to lower its temperature to the specified temperature of the supply air stream. Any energy needed for moisture addition or removal is ignored. for Compact HVAC sizing method Sensible Cooling is sensible only cooling heat transfer from the cooling coil to the supply air. Latent coil heat can be calculated as the difference: Total Cooling Sensible Cooling.
Surface heat gain data refers to heat transfer from the inside surface of the building elements to the zone. You can also customise the data and the way it is displayed using the Display Options panel.
- 673 -
- 674 -
Reviewing Cooling Design Output
Reviewing Cooling Design Output

You can review Cooling design output in 2 ways: Detailed results - half-hourly heat balance and inside conditions displayed on 'Analysis' tab. Summary table - cooling capacity data for each zone on the Summary tab.
To update the data using different calculation options, click Update (Ctrl-U).Data Options The General tab on the Cooling design Display options panel provides options for controlling the data displayed in the Simulation data display screen. General Display options are grouped under three headers: Data - control the data displayed. Y-axis - for customising the layout of the Y-axis. Appearance - for customising the style and appearance of the graphics.
DATA OPTIONS Data

Select an option to indicate the data you wish to display: 1-All - fabric and ventilation heat gains/losses, internal gains (not Heating Design), temperatures and outside dry-bulb air temperature. 2-Site data - all site data. 3-Comfort - inside air, the radiant and comfort temperatures, relative humidity, ASHRAE 55 and various comfort indices. 4-Internal gains - internal gains including equipment, lighting, occupancy, solar and HVAC heating/cooling delivery. 5-Fabric and ventilation - heat gains to the space from the surface element (walls, floors, ceilings etc.) and ventilation. Negative values indicate heat loss from the space.
Tip: to update the data using different calculation options, click Update (Ctrl-U).
Show as

Check this option if you wish data to be displayed 'per floor area' i.e. /m2 or /ft2. You can select the area to use as the denominator from: 1-All areas - Total area is used,
- 675 -
2-Occupied area - just occupied areas are used.
Note: you can only select 1-All areas if the building and block data includes occupied areas as set in Include unoccupied zones in block and building totals and averages option in Cooling design Output options, Likewise you can only select 2-Occupied area if the building and block data excludes occupied areas.
Y-AXIS OPTIONS
Lock min/max
This option locks the extent of the Y-axes so that they keep their current maximum and minimum values. This allows consistent comparison with the future results display. The Y-axis keeps its current settings until you unlock it again. You can achieve the same effect by clicking on the 'Lock Y-axis min/max values' toolbar command.
When you lock the Y-axis the current settings are stored and displayed for each of the available Y-axes. You can edit any of these to get a more precise setting. Remember to click on the Apply button when you are ready to register a change to any numeric display option data.

Separate axes

Check this option if you wish data to be displayed 'per floor area' i.e. /m2 or /ft2.
APPEARANCE
ENERGYPLUS SCRIPT
You can view the input data script used to calculate these results by selecting the 'Tools | Display simulation input script' menu option. If you do not have the EnergyPlus IDF editor installed, then you should associate the .idf file extension with a text editor to make this option work. Note: this shows the script stored with the model just before the simulation not the _Ref-600109359in.idf file stored in the EnergyPlus folder.
Summary Cooling Design Table

The Summary screen shows design cooling loads and flow rates for each zone plus other related data.
- 676 -
Parametric Analysis (Cooling Design)
Design Capacity, shown in bold, is the maximum value of Total Cooling Load and Sensible multiplied by the Design margin to give the design cooling capacity of the equipment. This value is written into the Cooling capacity Model Data on the HVAC tab if the appropriate Plant sizing Model Option is set. Design Flow Rate, shown in bold, is the flow rate required to deliver the Sensible cooling load using the Design supply temperature and the zone air temperature at the time of the maximum load multiplied by the Design margin. Total Cooling Load is the total maximum Sensible + Latent loads for the zone at the time of maximum Sensible Cooling load. If latent load is negative then it is ignored here and the Total Cooling Load is the same as the Sensible load. Sensible is the maximum Sensible Cooling load for the zone in the Design day. Latent is the latent load for the zone at the time of maximum Sensible load, calculated as Total Cooling Sensible Cooling. Air Temperature is the Air temperature in the zone at the time of maximum Sensible load. Humidity is the humidity (%) in the zone at the time of maximum Sensible load. Time of Max Cooling - the time at which the maximum sensible cooling occurs. Max Op Temp in Day is the maximum operative temperature in the zone (using radiant fraction = 0.5) over the design day including periods when the zone may be unconditioned. Floor area is the floor area of the zone. Volume is the volume of the zone. Flow/Floor area (MBH/ft2 in IP units) is the Design Flow Rate divided by the Floor area of the zone. It provides a useful check for the flow rates calculated.
Use the Export command to export this data in spreadsheet format.
Parametric Analysis (Cooling Design)

For more information on Cooling design parametric analysis see the equivalent topic for simulation.
Simulation Using Real Weather Data

You can generate detailed building energy performance data based on simulations using real weather data. Click on the Simulation Screen tab to view simulation data. If the necessary data has not yet been generated, a simulation is automatically started to generate the data. Simulations using EnergyPlus have the following characteristics: Weather data comes from Hourly weather data file. Includes consideration of heat conduction and convection between zones of different temperatures. Includes solar gain through windows. Simulation of HVAC equipment (options) Includes one or more 'warmup' days to ensure correct distribution of heat in building thermal mass and the start of the simulation. Warmup continues until temperatures/heat flows in each zone have converged. If convergence does not occur then simulation continues for the maximum number of days as specified in the calculation options.
- 677 -
Customise the data displayed and display style using the Display Options panel.
See also the Setting Up and Running Simulations Tutorial
Simulation Calculation Options

These options control the simulation and the output produced. Click on the OK button to start the Simulation.
GENERAL Calculation description

Enter some text to identify the calculation. This will be used in reports and in the filename for automatically generated ESO files.
Simulation Period
The simulation period is described in the help for the Model options.
Interval
Selecting Monthly is required to obtain annual output. Monthly, daily, hourly and sub-hourly data can selected by checking the appropriate boxes. Note: selecting output at hourly or sub-hourly intervals can produce large amounts of data which slows processing and results in large file sizes. If you want to generate hourly or sub-hourly data you may wish to consider switching off some of the Output options to ensure you are only generating the data you require.
Auto-Update
This dialog is always shown when you select 'Update' and will also be shown before all simulations if 'Don't show this dialog' at the bottom is cleared.
OPTIONS
See Help for Simulation calculation options tab of the Model Options dialog.
Simulation Display Options

The General tab on the Simulation Display Options Panel provides options for controlling the data displayed in the Simulation data display screen. General Display Options are grouped under three headers: Data - control the data displayed. Y-axis - for customising the layout of the Y-axis. Appearance - for customising the style and appearance of the graphics.
- 678 -
Simulation Display Options
DATA OPTIONS Interval

Select an interval from the list: 1-Annual - show data for the entire simulation. 2-Monthly - show data broken down by month. 3-Daily - show data broken down by day. 4-Hourly - show hourly data. Useful for checking operation of equipment and comfort conditions for particular design periods. 5-Sub-hourly - show data recorded at time step intervals (2 and 6 intervals per hour depending on the 'Time steps per hour' calculation option). Useful for detailed checking of building performance. 6-Distribution - temperature distribution curves showing 'hours at', 'hours below' and 'hours above' temperature levels in 1C temperature intervals during the occupied period. Note that 'Data' (below) should be set to 3-Comfort to get temperature distribution curves.
Note: be aware that requesting Hourly and Sub-hourly results in large buildings and/or long simulation periods can result in very large data sets which take a long time to read in after the simulation.
Data
Select an option to indicate the data you wish to display: 1-All - fabric and ventilation heat gains/losses, internal gains (not Heating Design), temperatures and outside dry-bulb air temperature. 2-Site data - all site data. 3-Comfort - inside air, the radiant and comfort temperatures, relative humidity, ASHRAE 55 and various comfort indices. If you set Interval to 6-Distribution you get temperature distribution curves. 4-Internal gains - internal gains including equipment, lighting, occupancy, solar and HVAC heating/cooling delivery. 5-Fabric and ventilation - heat gains to the space from the surface element (walls, floors, ceilings etc.) and ventilation. Negative values indicate heat loss from the space. 6-Fuel breakdown - fuel consumption broken down by system category (building level only). 7-Fuel totals - fuel consumption broken down by fuel (building level only) 8-CO2 production - CO2 production by weight (building level only)
Click here for information on the meaning of the data. Tip: to update the data using different calculation options, click Update (Ctrl-U).
Show as
- 679 -
Days per Page (Simulation only)

DesignBuilder displays all simulation results together, but you can select how many days are displayed at any one time using The 'Days displayed per page' option. A value of 365 means you will show all simulation data on the same screen and a value of 1 means you see each day on a separate screen. Note: you can use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the graph to see simulation results not currently displayed.

Check this option if you wish building, block and zone data to be displayed 'per floor area' i.e. /m2 or /ft2 and surface and opening data to be displayed 'per surface or opening area'. At building, block or zone level you can select the floor area to use as the denominator from the options: 1-All areas - Total floor area is used, 2-Occupied area - just occupied floor areas are used.
Note: you can only select 1-All areas if the building and block data includes occupied areas as set in Include unoccupied zones in block and building totals and averages option in Simulation Output options, Likewise you can only select 2-Occupied area if the building and block data excludes occupied areas.
Y-AXIS OPTIONS
Lock min/max
This option locks the extent of the Y-axes so that they keep their current maximum and minimum values. This allows consistent comparison with the future results display. The Y-axis keeps its current settings until you unlock it again. You can achieve the same effect by clicking on the 'Lock Y-axis min/max values' toolbar command.
When you lock the Y-axis the current settings are stored and displayed for each of the available Y-axes. You can edit any of these to get a more precise setting. Remember to click on the Apply button when you are ready to register a change to any numeric display option data.

Separate axes
APPEARANCE
- 680 -
Simulation Detailed Results

The main Display options are in the bottom left of the screen. They allow you to control the content of the Detailed data and also the Display style. The 'Analysis' tab has detailed simulation results (displayed as a line graph by default).
See also the Analysing Simulation Results Tutorial For more on how the output is calculated see: Calculation of DesignBuilder Output from EnergyPlus Report Variables.
Environmental/Comfort Output
Air Temperature - the calculated average temperature of the zone air. Radiant Temperature - the (area * emissivity) weighted average of the zone inside surface temperatures. Operative Temperature - the mean of the zone air and radiant temperatures. Outside Dry-Bulb Temperature. Relative Humidity - the calculated average relative humidity of the air. Fanger PMV - Fanger Predicted Mean Vote calculated according to ISO 7730. Pierce PMV ET - the Predicted Mean Vote (PMV) calculated using the effective temperature and the Pierce two-node thermal comfort model. Pierce PMV SET - the Predicted Mean Vote (PMV) calculated using the 'Standard' effective temperature and the Pierce two-node thermal comfort model. Pierce Discomfort Index (DISC) - the Discomfort index calculated using the Pierce two-node thermal comfort model. Pierce Thermal Sens. Index (TSENS) - the Thermal Sensation Index (PMV) calculated using the Pierce two-node thermal comfort model. Kansas Uni TSV - the Thermal Sensation Vote (TSV) calculated using the KSU two-node thermal comfort model. Discomfort hrs (summer clothing) - the time when the zone is occupied that the combination of humidity ratio and operative temperature is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 summer clothes region. Discomfort hrs (winter clothing) - the time when the zone is occupied that the combination of humidity ratio and operative temperature is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 winter clothes region. Discomfort hrs (all clothing) - the time when the zone is occupied that the combination of humidity ratio and operative temperature is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 summer or winter clothes region.
More on Comfort Analysis...
Fabric and ventilation

Glazing - the total heat flow to the zone from the glazing, frame and divider of exterior glazing excluding transmitted short-wave solar radiation (which is accounted for in Solar Gains Exterior Windows below). For windows without an interior shading device this heat flow is equal to: + [Convective heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the glazing] + [Net IR heat flow to the zone from zone side of the glazing] [Short-wave radiation from zone transmitted back out the window] + [Conduction to zone from window frame and divider, if present] Here, short-wave radiation is that from lights and diffuse interior solar radiation.
- 681 -
For windows with an interior shading device this heat flow is equal to: [Convective heat flow to the zone from the air flowing through the gap between glazing and shading device] + [Convective heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the shading device] + [Net IR heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the glazing] + [Net IR heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the shading device] [Short-wave radiation from zone transmitted back out the window] + [Conduction to zone from window frame and divider, if present] Walls - Sum of heat gains to the zone from external wall inner surfaces. Roofs - Sum of heat gains to the zone from external roof inner surfaces. Ceilings - Sum of heat gains to the zone from ceiling inner surfaces. Floors - Sum of heat gains to the zone from internal floor inner surfaces. Floors (ext) - Sum of heat gains to the zone from external floor inner surfaces (e.g. floor in cantilevered space, roof eaves etc, not ground floors). Ground floors - Sum of heat gains to the zone from ground floor inner surfaces. Partitions - Sum of heat gains to the zone from internal partition inner surfaces. Doors and Vents - Sum of heat gains to the zone from door and vent inner surfaces. External Infiltration - heat gain through air infiltration (non-unintentional air entry through cracks and holes in building fabric) when using Simple natural ventilation option. External Natural Ventilation - heat gain due to the entry of outside air through natural ventilation, as defined on the HVAC tab, when using Simple natural ventilation option. Internal Natural Ventilation - heat gain from other zones due to air exchange through open internal windows, doors, vents, holes and virtual partitions. External Mechanical Ventilation - heat gain due to the entry of outside air through the air distribution system. You can exclude mechanical ventilation from the cooling design calculations by unchecking the 'Air Distribution On' Model Data. External Air - heat gain due to the entry of outside air through external windows, vents, doors, holes and cracks when using Calculated natural ventilation option. Mixing Air - heat gain due to the entry of inside mixing air through internal windows, vents, doors and holes when using Scheduled natural ventilation option.
Note: Surface conduction data for Walls, Roofs, Ceilings, Floors, Partitions and Doors and Vents represents the heat conduction flow just below the surface of the construction and so includes all surface heat transfer mechanisms (convection, long and short-wave radiation).
Airflow
Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltration - The sum of outside air (in ac/h) flowing into the zone through: The HVAC air distribution system + Infiltration + Natural ventilation
Internal Gains
Task Lighting - heat gain due to task lighting. General Lighting - heat gain due to general lighting. Miscellaneous - heat gain due to miscellaneous equipment. Process - heat gain due to process equipment. Catering - heat gain due to cooking. Computer and Equipment - heat gain due to computer and other IT-related equipment. Occupancy - sensible gain due to occupants. Please note that this can vary depending on the internal conditions. With very high temperatures the sensible gain can drop to zero with all cooling effects taking place through latent heat transfer.
- 682 -
Solar Gains Exterior Windows - (used to be called 'Transmitted solar gains'). Short-wave solar radiation transmission through all external windows. For a bare window, this transmitted radiation consists of solar radiation passing through the glass and diffuse radiation from solar reflected from the outside window reveal, if present. For windows with a shade, this transmitted radiation is totally diffuse (shades are assumed to be perfect diffusers). For windows with a blind, this transmitted radiation consists of beam + diffuse short-wave radiation that passes between the slats and diffuse radiation from beam-to-diffuse reflection from the slats. The heating effect of solar radiation on opaque roofs and walls is accounted for in the Roofs and Walls fabric heat conduction data. Solar re-reflected back out of the external window and transmitted through interior windows is not subtracted. Solar Gains Interior Windows - Total beam + diffuse solar radiation transmission through interior windows. Requires the 3-Full interior and exterior solar model option to be set. Zone Sensible Cooling - is the sensible cooling effect on the zone of any air introduced into the zone through the HVAC system. It includes any 'free cooling' due to introduction of relatively cool outside air and the heating effect of any fans present. Cooling always shows as a negative heat gain in the results. It is therefore not the same as a cooling coil energy delivery when mechanical ventilation is involved. It is best thought of as the HVAC cooling contribution to the zone heat balance. Zone Sensible Heating - is the sensible heating effect of any air introduced into the zone through the HVAC system including any 'free heating' due to introduction of relatively warm outside air and the heating effects of fans. It is therefore not the same as a heating coil energy delivery when mechanical ventilation is involved. It is best thought of as the HVAC heating contribution to the zone heat balance.
Surface heat gain data refers to heat transfer from the inside surface of the building elements to the zone. Note: taken together the Internal gains and the Fabric and ventilation data above give an approximate Zone Heat Balance, i.e. the data represents all of the heat flows into and out of the zone. Technical Note It is important to understand when looking at the 'Zone heat balance' data that the values do not necessarily add to exactly to zero. This is one reason why accurate HVAC design requires such complex simulation software. Factors which have a bearing on this are: 1. Solar radiation values reported by EnergyPlus are gross values and do not account for the radiation rereflected back out of internal and external windows. EnergyPlus tracks solar radiation in full detail but does not report all of the calculated values. It is not currently possible to generate net solar radiation gains from EnergyPlus. Also bear in mind that solar and some internal gains are mostly radiative gains and find their way into the fabric whereas the cooling is to the air. In thermal modelling terms it is not possible to make a simple heat balance of heat which is added to different parts of the thermal network.More specifically, heat transfer gains between the zone and the surfaces cannot be added directly to ventilation gains because they are to different 'points' in the zone heat balance (surface heat transfer is to the 'rad-air' point and ventilation is to the 'air' point). Minor EnergyPlus inaccuracy in reporting of conduction through window frames causes a minor error (~1%) in Glazing heat gain reported values. This does not affect the rest of the simulation, it is just in the Glazing heat gain report. There are issues such as heat conduction through walls, floors, roofs etc and diurnal storage of heat in thermal mass, especially in thermally massive buildings to take into account. When doing heat balances make sure to view data over a reasonable period (> week) to avoid such thermal storage issues.
2.
3.
4.
System Heat Flows

These heat flows are plotted on the System Energy axes: Simple HVAC
- 683 -
Zone Heating - energy supplied by local room heaters and reheat coils to maintain room internal heating temperature setpoint temperature when using Compact HVAC data. Total Cooling is the rate at which total energy (sensible and latent) is removed from the mixed outside and return air stream in order to bring the mixed air stream to the specified temperature and humidity ratio of the supply air stream. Sensible Cooling is the rate at which sensible energy is removed from the mixed outside and return air stream in order to lower its temperature to the specified temperature of the supply air stream. Any energy needed for moisture addition or removal is ignored. A common question from new users is: "What is the difference between Zone Sensible Heating/Cooling (on the Heat Balance graph) and Zone Heating, Sensible/Total Cooling (on the System Energy graph)?" The Zone Sensible Heating is the heating effect of the HVAC system action on the zone heat balance, in particular the heating effect of introducing air that is warmer than the zone air. Likewise Zone Sensible Cooling is the cooling effect of the HVAC system on the zone. Note that it these are not always directly related to heating and cooling coil energy delivery, especially because of the effect of free cooling from outside air. So for example even if there is no cooling coil operational at a particular time, the Zone Sensible Cooling output on the Heat Balance graph can be high due to introduction of relatively cooler outside air into the space through mechanical ventilation. These Zone Sensible Heating/Cooling outputs will also include a component due to fans (if operational) which will tend to warm air that moves through it. The Zone Heating data in the System energy graph is the energy provided by zone heating equipment such as reheat coils and radiators/baseboard units. Likewise Sensible and Total Cooling report the sensible and total energy transferred by cooling coils to the airstream. Compact HVAC Zone Heating - energy supplied by local room heaters and reheat coils to maintain room internal heating temperature setpoint temperature when using Compact HVAC data. Preheat - energy supplied by preheat coils to temper the outside air before it enters the outside air mixing box when using Compact HVAC data. AHU Heating - energy supplied by the AHU heating coil when using Compact HVAC data. Total Cooling - at building level: sensible + latent cooling transfer to the supply air from the AHU cooling coil + any single zone unitary and fan coil units in the building. At zone level: sensible + latent cooling transfer to the supply air from a single zone unitary or fan coil unit. Sensible Cooling - sensible only cooling transfer from the cooling coil to the supply air. Latent coil heat can be calculated as the difference: Total Cooling - Sensible Cooling. Heat Recovery Sensible Cooling - the sensible cooling rate of the supply air by the heat exchanger. This rate is determined using the supply air mass flow rate through the heat exchanger unit, the supply air inlet and outlet conditions, and the specific heat of the inlet supply air. A positive value is reported if the supply air is cooled by the heat exchanger, else the rate is set to zero. Heat Recovery Total Cooling - the total cooling rate of the supply air by the heat exchanger. This rate is determined using the supply air mass flow rate through the heat exchanger unit, and the enthalpy of the supply air entering and leaving the unit. A positive value is reported if the enthalpy of the supply air is decreased by the heat exchanger, else the rate is set to zero. Heat Recovery Sensible Heating - the sensible heating rate of the supply air by the heat exchanger. This rate is determined using the supply air mass flow rate through the heat exchanger unit, the supply air inlet and outlet conditions, and the specific heat of the inlet supply air. A positive value is reported if the supply air is heated by the heat exchanger, else the rate is set to zero. Heat Recovery Total Heating - the total heating energy added to the supply air by the heat exchanger.
BUILDING LEVEL ONLY Fuel breakdown

The data for fuel consumption for building level broken down by end-use:
- 684 -
Heat Generation - total fuel consumption due to operation of heat generators such as boilers and heat pumps. Chiller - total chiller fuel consumption. Fans - total electrical energy consumed by HVAC fans (when using the Separate fans and pumps model option). Pumps - total electrical energy consumed by HVAC pumps (when using the Separate fans and pumps model option). Auxiliary Energy - total electrical energy consumed by HVAC fans and pumps (when using the NCM model option). Preheat - heating energy transferred from main plant preheat coils to HVAC system air when using Compact HVAC data. Lighting - electricity consumed by general and task/display lights. Room Electricity - electricity consumed by room equipment other than lights (computers, equipment, process etc). Room Gas - gas consumed by room equipment (miscellaneous, process and catering) Room Oil - oil consumed by room equipment (miscellaneous, process and catering) Room Solid - solid fuel (such as coal) consumed by room equipment (miscellaneous, process and catering) Room Bottled gas - bottled gas (propane) consumed by room equipment (miscellaneous, process and catering) Room Other - other fuel consumed by room equipment (miscellaneous, process and catering)
Fuel totals
Total fuel consumption for building, data available at building level only: Electricity - total building electricity consumption. Gas - fuel consumption total building gas consumption. Oil - total building or oil consumption. Solid - total building solid fuel consumption. Bottled gas - total building gas consumption. Other fuel consumption - total consumption of all other fuels.
CO2 production
Total carbon dioxide emission for building, data available at building level only: CO2 - total CO2 emissions mass.
Site Weather data

Weather data stored at the site level and derived from the hourly weather file: Outside Dry-Bulb Temperature Outside Dew-Point Temperature Direct Normal Solar Diffuse Horizontal Solar Wind Speed Wind Direction Atmospheric Pressure Solar Altitude Solar Azimuth
Note: although Site weather data is stored at the Site level, it can be displayed at Building, Block and Zone levels too.
- 685 -
Comfort Analysis
DesignBuilder EnergyPlus simulations can generate extensive data on environmental conditions within the building and resultant occupant comfort levels. The following comfort-related output is available: Internal air temperature - the calculated average temperature of the air. Internal radiant temperature - the average Mean Radiant Temperature (MRT) of the zone, calculated assuming that the person is in the centre of the zone, with no weighting for any particular surface. Internal operative temperature - The mean of the internal air and radiant temperatures. Outside dry-bulb temperature - site data. Relative Humidity - the calculated average relative humidity of the air. Fanger PMV - Fanger Predicted Mean Vote calculated according to ISO 7730. Pierce PMV ET - the Predicted Mean Vote (PMV) calculated using the effective temperature and the Pierce two-node thermal comfort model. Pierce PMV SET - the Predicted Mean Vote (PMV) calculated using the 'Standard' effective temperature and the Pierce two-node thermal comfort model. Pierce Discomfort Index (DISC) - the Discomfort index calculated using the Pierce two-node thermal comfort model. Pierce Thermal Sens. Index (TSENS) - the Thermal Sensation Index (PMV) calculated using the Pierce two-node thermal comfort model. Kansas Uni TSV - the Thermal Sensation Vote (TSV) calculated using the KSU two-node thermal comfort model. Discomfort hrs (summer clothing) - the time when the combination of zone humidity ratio and operative temperature is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 summer clothes region. Discomfort hrs (winter clothing) - the time when the combination of zone humidity ratio and operative temperature is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 winter clothes region. Discomfort hrs (all clothing) - the time when the combination of zone humidity ratio and operative temperature is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 summer or winter clothes region. Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltration - The sum of outside air (in ac/h) flowing into the zone through: The HVAC air distribution system + Infiltration + Natural ventilation
The Discomfort hrs data above is equivalent to ASHRAE 'unmet load hours'. The above data can be displayed at all time increments. In addition, air, radiant and operative temperatures can be displayed as distribution curves (below). You can find more detailed information about Fanger, Pierce and Kansas State University Thermal comfort prediction algorithms in the EnergyPlus Background Section. The Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltration data is the sum of fresh air delivered through the HVAC system, infiltration and natural ventilation outside airflow in air changes per hour (ac/h). When used together with the other environmental output it can be very useful in checking for occupant discomfort. Note 1: It is possible to display comfort data for occupied periods only by selecting 2-Just occupied periods as Zone environmental and comfort reports on the Output tab of the simulation options dialog. This option applies to all data described in this Comfort Analysis help section.
- 686 -
Comfort Analysis
Note 2: Comfort data are not generated when the Gains data model option is set to Lumped. This is because in EnergyPlus the request for comfort calculations is made in the 'PEOPLE' statement and this is not used with Lumped gains.
Block and Building comfort level data

The comfort data listed above is calculated for blocks using floor area weighted averages of the zones in the block. For example: Block average Air temperature (Ta) = (A1 x Taz1 + A1 x Taz2 + A3 x Taz3 + ...) / (A1 + A2 + A3 + ...) Where: An is floor area of zone n, Tazn is the air temperature of zone n There is one exception, Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltration, which is calculated in a similar way but using volume-weighted averages, i.e. using zone volumes instead of floor areas in the above equation. Building data is calculated in the same way but including all blocks. if the Include unoccupied zones in block and building totals and averages option is not set then unoccupied zones are not included in the above equation. Note: if all zones in the block/building are unoccupied and the option is not set the denominator is zero and an error message is shown and results are deleted.
TEMPERATURE DISTRIBUTION
If you requested Temperature distribution data prior to the simulation, you can generate temperature distribution curves showing 'hours at', 'hours below' and 'hours above' temperature levels in 1C temperature intervals during the occupied period. Bins include data for the labelled temperature through to that temperature + 1C, so for example, the bin labelled '12C' holds data for all temperatures in the range 12C <= T < 13C. To view temperature distribution data set the Interval option in the Display Options panel to Distribution and the Data option to Comfort. This data can be useful for getting an overview of the levels of comfort (or otherwise) provided by the building over time. The results can be compared with benchmark comfort criteria. For example, CIBSE provides recommended benchmark summertime peak temperatures and overheating criteria as follows: Offices, schools, dwellings (living areas) should have no more than 1% of the annual occupied hours over operative temperature of 28C. Bedrooms in dwellings should have no more than 1% of the annual occupied hours over operative temperature of 26C. UK DfES Building Bulletin BB87 recommends an allowable overheating criteria of 80 occupied hours in a year over and air temperature of 28C. Note 1: Temperature distribution data is only available at zone level. Note 2: This data is not available when using Lumped gains model option as the data is tied in with the EnergyPlus 'People' data set and this is not generated for Lumped gains. Note 3: This data is not available if the 1 time step per hour option is selected
- 687 -
Example Temperature Distribution Output
SIMPLIFIED ASHRAE 55-2004 GRAPH RELATED OUTPUTS

The Discomfort hours data is based on whether the humidity ratio and the operative temperature is within the region shown in ASHRAE Standard 55-2004 in Figure 5.2.1.1. For these outputs the operative temperature is simplified to be the average of the air temperature and the mean radiant temperature. For summer, the 0.5 Clo level is used and, for winter, the 1.0 Clo level is used. The graphs below are based on the following tables which extend the ASHRAE values to zero humidity ratio. In some cases you may find a large number of discomfort hours for a particular zone even though the air temperature in the space is within normal ranges. If this happens you should check: 1. 2. Operative temperatures which can be very different in highly glazed spaces in the summer or poorly insulated spaces in the winter. Humidity levels are within range - you may find very high or very low humidity caused by inadequate ventilation. Note that the minimum comfort temperature with winter clothes when the air is very dry is 21.7C / 71F which may be lower than some heating temperature setpoints. Likewise in the summer when the air is very humid operative temperatures above 26.8C / 80.2F are considered too hot with summer clothes.
- 688 -
Comfort Analysis
Winter Clothes
Summer Clothes
You can also determine distributed comfort levels using CFD Comfort Calculations.
- 689 -
Parametric Analysis
DesignBuilder can automatically run multiple simulations automatically adjusting up to 2 variables to create design curves. Design curves can be very useful at conceptual stages of the design process to understand how building performance is affected by variations. DesignBuilder allows you to generate curves to show how performance parameters like carbon emissions and comfort vary as key elements of the building design vary. You can select up to 2 design variables. For example you might want to plot the cooling energy consumption for the base design with a range of window to wall % and glazing types variations. The selection of the design variables is done in the Display options panel in the bottom left of the Simulation screen. Click on the Parametric tab to carry out parametric simulations. See below.
The design curves are generated by automatically running multiple simulations of the base design (i.e. the model defined on the edit screen) with variations applied at the building level.It is important to take into account how this data will be inherited to down to blocks, zones etc to ensure you are testing the design variants you think you are. For example if the Window to wall % was hard set at block level then changes in this data at building level would not influence the surfaces of the design variants and the results will indicate that the Window to wall % does not influence results (see Troubleshooting below). Because there is no visual check on the state of the design variants the parametric function would normally be carried out on: Well structured and checked models that have been set up to be compatible with parametric analysis, that is allowing the appropriate data to inherit from the building level parametric changes, or, Smaller models where it is easy to see how data inherits. Parametric simulation results are stored with a record of the change made to the base case to create it and this allows new variants to be added to the study without invalidating previous results. The number of design variants that are tested for 2 variable tests is the number of variants for the first variable multiplied by the number for the second variable. The variations in the above example would be different combinations of Glazing type and Window to wall %. In all, 6 x 5 = 30 simulations would be required to generate the design curves in this example.
- 690 -
Parametric Analysis
Tip: Parametric simulations can take a long time to complete and DesignBuilder can keep grabbing focus away from the window you are working in as it refreshes the progress bar. To avoid this you can minimise the main DesignBuilder window. If you have a dual core processor, you should now be able to continue working while the simulations continue.
The graph above shows the diminishing returns with extra louvre projection from 0.5m to 1.5m.
- 691 -
The image above shows a parametric analysis of total annual carbon emissions where glazing percentage is varied in a building with lighting control, heating and cooling for 4 different glazing types. It illustrates how optimum configurations can be identified using this approach. Typical uses for parametric simulation are: Generating design curves to assist with decision making at early design stages. As a teaching aid to help students understand the impact of variations in the design. To help communicate concepts with non-experts in building simulation, clients, architects etc. Architects often particularly appreciate the visual nature of the parametric data. Design optimisation
Troubleshooting
A common question from beginners with the parametric simulations goes something like this:
- 692 -
EnergyPlus Daylight Map Output
Q: "Why do I get a flat line variation of energy consumption/CO2/max temperature when running parametric analyses" A: The usual reason for parametric analysis generating a flat line variation is that there is no clear data inheritance path from the building level (where the parametric changes are applied) down to the individual zones/surfaces. For example, when using Window to wall% as a variable, you should make sure that: The Window to wall% value is not hard set at block, zone or surface level in positions in the building where you wish the parametric changes to be applied. Likewise, you are not using custom openings, whose opening areas cannot be modified as part of the parametric variation. You have one of the Facade types set that can accurately calculate window areas based on % glazing (Preferred height and Continuous horizontal) and that this data is inherited from building down to surface level.
Q: "Is it possible to change the intervals for variables? For example is it possible to change "Window operation %" range from 20, 40, 60... to 10, 20, 30, 40..." A: In the current version of the software there is no way to modify the intervals but this will be allowed in future versions.
EnergyPlus Daylight Map Output

EnergyPlus generates a file called eplusmap.csv when one or more zones have daylight control and the Daylight map simulation output option has been selected for those zones. This file contains a series of grids for each zone with daylight controls and having daylight map output requested and for each hour of the day in the simulation. The example output below shows some graphical output for 3 hours for a zone using a spreadsheet with cells shaded based on illuminance values. This is done using a macro as described in a forum article by Jean Marais.
- 693 -
More sophisticated daylight analysis tools using Radiance are also available on the Daylighting screen.
Optimisation
Parametric analysis is a well known technique for searching for 'optimal' designs. A parametric analysis would usually consist of 1, 2 or 3 design variables being adjusted in a systematic way to find designs with the most favourable characteristics (e.g. low energy consumption, best comfort etc). With parametric analysis, a maximum of 3 variables is normally used because a) the results of more than 3 dimensions to a design problem are difficult
- 694 -
Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD)
to visualize and b) the large number of simulations required with 4 or more design variables would take too long to complete. For example a designer might want to investigate the carbon impact of variable levels and types of glazing. The results would be displayed as a series of parametric design curves. This is a fairly crude way to find optimal designs as only a few variables can practically be included. Genetic or evolutionary optimisation algorithms can be used to explore parameter space for optimal design solutions much more efficiently when more variables are involved. This process allows typically up to 10 variables to be analysed and often with multiple conflicting objectives (e.g. minimize carbon emissions while also minimizing life-cycle costs). For example a base design might be optimised for orientation, wall and roof construction, glazing amount and type, degrees of shading and HVAC system type. The results might be displayed graphically with carbon on one axis and cost on the other and the performance of each design permutation plotted on the graph. The minimum values for cost/carbon form a Pareto front along the bottom of the data points. DesignBuilder are developing optimisation functionality to allow this powerful design process to be carried out with the minimum of previous technical knowledge in future versions of the software.
Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD)

Click on the CFD screen tab to start CFD calculations. The rest of this section covers the processes involved in running CFD calculations in DesignBuilder.
What is CFD?
Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) is the term used to describe a family of numerical methods used to calculate the temperature, velocity and various other fluid properties throughout a region of space. CFD when applied to buildings can provide the designer with information on probable air velocities, pressures and temperatures that will occur at any point through a predefined air volume in and around building spaces. Boundary conditions are specified which may include the effects of climate, internal heat gains and HVAC systems. DesignBuilder CFD can be used for both external and internal analyses.
External CFD analysis

External CFD analysis provides the distribution of air velocity and pressure around building structures due to the wind effect and this information can be used to assess pedestrian comfort, determine local pressures for positioning HVAC intakes/exhausts and to calculate more accurate pressure coefficients for EnergyPlus calculated natural ventilation simulations.
- 695 -
Example External CFD Analysis Output - Wind Pressure Study
Internal CFD analysis

Internal CFD analysis provides information on the distribution of air velocity, pressure and temperature (and several other calculated parameters) throughout the inside of building spaces. Also calculated is 'age of air' to indicate the relative 'freshness' of the air through the domain and also a comfort index. This information can be used to assess the effectiveness of various HVAC and natural ventilation system designs and to evaluate consequent interior comfort conditions.
- 696 -
Creating Model Geometry For CFD
Example Internal CFD Analysis Output - Occupant Comfort
CFD Calculations Topics Contents

Creating Model Geometry for CFD Finite Volume Grid and Geometric Modelling Considerations Building Levels and CFD Analyses CFD Boundary Conditions Boundary Conditions for Internal CFD Analyses Component Blocks and Assemblies as CFD Boundaries Setting Up a New External CFD Analysis Setting Up a New Internal CFD Analysis Editing the CFD Grid CFD Grid Information Setting Up CFD Cell Monitor Points CFD Calculation Options Residuals and Cell Monitor Graphs Convergence Difficulties and Troubleshooting Displaying Results Conducting CFD Comfort Calculations CFD Results Manager Appendix - CFD Calculations and Convergence
Creating Model Geometry For CFD

If you have already created a model for the purpose of an additional analysis (e.g. thermal simulation or SBEM calculation), you can use exactly the same model for CFD, although you should first read the Finite volume grid and geometric considerations section.
- 697 -
On the other hand, if you intend to conduct a CFD analysis from scratch, you should refer to the Building Models section for information on creating models.
Finite Volume Grid And Geometric Modelling Considerations

The calculation method requires that the geometric space across which the calculations are to be conducted is first divided into a number of non-overlapping adjoining cells which are collectively known as the finite volume grid. When a CFD project is created, a grid is automatically generated for the required model domain by identifying all contained model object vertices and then generating key coordinates from these vertices along the major grid axes. These key coordinates, extended from the X, Y and Z-axes across the width, depth and height of the domain respectively are known as grid lines. The distance between grid lines along each axis is known as a grid region and these regions are initially spaced employing user-defined default grid spacing in order to complete the grid generation. The grid used by DesignBuilder CFD is a non-uniform rectilinear Cartesian grid, which means that the grid lines are parallel with the major axes and the spacing between the grid lines enables non-uniformity. For example, looking at a simple building block with a single component assembly representing a table:
The resulting grid, generated with 0.3m default grid spacing would be as follows:
- 698 -
By default, grid regions are spaced uniformly using a spacing that is calculated to be as close to the user-defined default grid spacing as possible. Notice the narrow regions created between key coordinates associated with the tabletop and table legs. In this case, the distance between these key coordinates is of an acceptable value. However, very narrow regions resulting in long narrow grid cells or cells having a high aspect ratio should be avoided, as they tend to result in unstable solutions that can fail to converge. Highly detailed component assemblies can result in very large numbers of closely spaced key coordinates resulting in cells having high aspect ratios. Large numbers of key coordinates can also lead to overly complex grids and correspondingly high calculation run times and excessive memory usage which can be avoided by replacing very detailed assemblies with cruder representations for the purpose of the CFD calculation. However, where very narrow grid regions are unavoidable, adjacent grid lines formed from key coordinates can be merged together using the merge tolerance setting which is accessed through the new CFD analysis dialogs (see the Setting Up a New External CFD Analysis and Setting Up a New Internal CFD Analysis sections). For instance, in the above example, if the table assembly had been located closer to the edge of the adjacent window, this could result in unacceptably close grid lines:
- 699 -
These closely spaced grid lines can be merged by creating a new analysis and increasing the grid line merge tolerance setting to say 0.025m:
- 700 -
Due to the strict rectilinear nature of the grid, grid cells that lie in regions outside of the domain required for calculation are blocked-off in order to cater for irregular geometries. It is important to take this into account when creating a model in order to maximise the efficiency of grid generation and/or to ensure that surface CFD boundaries will lie in the plane of a major grid axis to achieve accuracy of boundary representation. In some cases, the model may be rotated in order to ensure that most of the wall surfaces are orthogonal with respect to the grid axes. To take an extreme example, if a simple rectangular space has been drawn at a 45 angle to the Zaxis:
- 701 -
The resulting grid, generated using 0.3m default grid spacing, contains a great deal of redundancy in the form of blocked-off regions and inaccuracy of surface representation:
If the block is first rotated, to be aligned with the X-axis:
- 702 -
The resulting grid exhibits no redundancy and there is no inaccuracy in surface representation:
The accuracy of the representation of non-orthogonal surfaces can be improved by using smaller default grid spacing and in some cases specific grid regions can be modified to increase accuracy in a more localised fashion as illustrated by the following example:
- 703 -
Grid generated using default 0.3m grid spacing:
Using the Edit CFD Grid tool, the grid spacing within just the regions spanning the angled section is reduced to 0.2m to improve the representation:
- 704 -
Building Levels And CFD Analyses
Grid regions between key coordinates can also be spaced using non-uniform spacing options and additional key coordinate regions can be added. Further information is provided on grid modification in the Editing the CFD Grid section.
Building Levels And CFD Analyses

Internal CFD analyses can be conducted at zone, building block and building levels. Calculations can also be conducted for single zones that span several blocks by connecting them with holes and using the Merge zones connected by holes model option setting. External analyses can only be conducted at the site level. The level you are at when you create the CFD Analysis defines both the type of the CFD analysis (internal or external) and also the extent of the CFD domain. If you are at building level then the domain is the whole building, if you are at block level the domain will be the block and if you are at zone level the domain is the current zone.
CFD Boundary Conditions

An important initial concept for CFD analyses is that of boundary conditions. Each of the dependent variable equations requires meaningful values at the boundary of the calculation domain in order for the calculations to generate meaningful values throughout the domain. These values are known as boundary conditions and can be specified in a number of ways.
- 705 -
The specification of boundary conditions for external analyses is relatively straightforward because it is an isothermal calculation and so it only requires the building exposure, wind velocity and wind direction to be set and this is done in the New CFD Analysis dialog box. Internal analysis boundary conditions tend to be more involved and can require the addition of zone surface boundaries such as supply diffusers, extract grilles, temperature and heat flux patches and also the incorporation of model assemblies representing occupants, radiators, fan-coil units, etc. DesignBuilder provides default wall and window boundary temperatures automatically but it is important that you check that these defaults are appropriate and that you correctly specify any additional boundary conditions required for your project. You can also calculate the internal surface temperature for each surface in the domain using EnergyPlus simulation by switching on the appropriate options. You can also calculate airflow rates through open windows, vents, doors and holes using the Calculated natural ventilation option. See also: Boundary Conditions for Internal CFD Analyses CFD Model Data Component Blocks Assemblies as CFD Boundaries
Boundary Conditions For Internal CFD Analyses

Internal boundary conditions can be defined in three ways: 1. 2. 3. Surface temperatures can be defined for all zone surfaces including windows and other openings. Zone surface boundary conditions including supply diffusers, extract grilles, temperatures and heat fluxes can be added in the form of surface patches using a similar method to that used for adding windows and doors. Component blocks and component assemblies can be defined as temperature or heat flux boundaries or they can also have boundary condition patches added as described above for Zone surfaces.
In all cases the CFD boundary conditions can be edited on the CFD Model data tab.
DEFAULT WALL AND WINDOW TEMPERATURES

All zone surfaces within a model have default wall and window boundary temperatures. These boundary temperatures are inherited from the building level down to the zone surface level and may be set at any intermediate level. This mechanism provides a convenient method for defining wall and window temperature boundary conditions throughout a building model in the absence of imported EnergyPlus boundary data. Default inside and outside wall and window boundary temperatures can be accessed under the CFD Boundary header on the CFD tab.
ZONE AND COMPONENT BLOCK SURFACE BOUNDARIES

Supply diffusers, extract grilles, temperature and heat flux patches can be added to zone and component block surfaces using the Add CFD boundary tool. To add a surface boundary, move down to the surface on which you want to locate the boundary, either by selecting it from the model navigator or by navigating to it in the Edit screen. At the surface level, you can then select the Add CFD boundary tool from the toolbar:
- 706 -
You can draw a CFD boundary on to the surface in exactly the same way that you would draw a window. Refer to the Draw Window section for details of drawing windows. After selecting the Add CFD boundary tool, the boundary settings are displayed on the Drawing options data panel. You can select the required boundary type from the Boundary type drop list. The following boundary types are available for surfaces of all orientations: 1Supply (general purpose HVAC supply diffuser) 4Extract (HVAC extract grille) 5Temperature (surface temperature patch) 6Flux (surface heat flux patch)
The following additional boundary types for multi-directional diffusers will appear for ceiling and other downwardfacing surfaces only: 2Four-way (four-way supply diffuser) 3Two-way (two-way supply diffuser)
Various settings are available depending on the boundary type:
- 707 -
1-Supply:
Boundary temperature - the temperature of the air entering the space. Flow rate - the supply volume flow rate. X-discharge angle () - the discharge angle between the local surface X-axis and an inward facing normal to the surface. At the surface level, taking a normal view from the inside of the zone to the surface, the Xaxis discharge angle is positive between the normal and the positive X-axis (i.e. the axis pointing towards the right) and negative between the normal and the negative X-axis (i.e. the axis pointing towards the left). For example to define a discharge angle of 45 pointing towards the left of the centre of a diffuser, looking at it from the inside of the zone, you would enter 45. On the other hand, to define a discharge angle of 45 pointing towards the right of the centre, you would enter 45:
Y-discharge angle () - the discharge angle between the local surface Y-axis and an inward facing normal to the surface. At the surface level, taking a normal view from the inside of the zone to the surface, the Yaxis discharge angle is positive between the normal and the positive Y-axis (i.e. the axis pointing upwards) and negative between the normal and the negative Y-axis (i.e. the axis pointing downwards). For example to define a discharge angle of 45 pointing downwards from the centre of a diffuser, looking at it from the inside of the zone, you would enter 45. On the other hand, to define a discharge angle of 45, pointing upwards from the centre, you would enter 45:
- 708 -
Minimum discharge velocity is the minimum required velocity at the face of the diffuser. If the minimum discharge velocity cannot be achieved by combining the specified flow rate with the face area of the diffuser as drawn, supply diffusers are created using a number of elements, the areas of which are determined by combining the specified volume flow rate together with the minimum discharge velocity. The maximum linear dimension of each component element is currently 'hard-set' at 0.2m. If the minimum discharge velocity is set to a very small value (e.g. 0.01m/s), a single element will be created spanning the entire area of the diffuser as drawn and the actual discharge velocity will be determined from the geometry of the diffuser face and the supply volume (i.e. v=V/A for orthogonal diffusers) - the actual discharge velocity is displayed for diffusers on the CFD data tab at the opening level. Note: the minimum discharge velocity is an important setting in that the diffuser supply velocity in conjunction with the diffuser discharge angle(s) can determine the flow pattern in a space.
2Four-way
Boundary temperature - temperature of the air entering the space. Flow rate - the supply flow rate. Multi-way diffuser discharge angle () - the discharge angle is the angle between the downward pointing normal and the diffuser jet. Minimum discharge velocity - the minimum required velocity at the face of the diffuser. Four-way diffusers are created using four separate elements, one located at each edge of the diffuser, the area of each being determined by combining the specified volume flow rate together with the minimum discharge velocity.
- 709 -
3Two-way
Boundary temperature - the temperature of the air entering the space. Flow rate - enter the supply flow rate. Multi-way diffuser discharge angle () - the angle between the downward pointing normal and the diffuser jet (see illustration in Four-way section). 2-way diffuser discharge direction - the local surface axis along which the diffuser is to discharge. Minimum discharge velocity - the minimum required velocity at the face of the diffuser. Two-way diffusers are created using two separate elements, one on either side of the diffuser along the discharge axis, the area of each being determined by combining the specified volume flow rate together with the minimum discharge velocity.
- 710 -
Component Blocks & Assemblies As CFD Boundaries
4Extract
Flow rate - the extract flow rate.
5Temperature
Boundary temperature - temperature for the patch.
6 Flux
Heat flux - heat flux for the patch.
Component Blocks & Assemblies As CFD Boundaries

Component blocks and assemblies can be used for CFD analyses to simply allow for the effect of obstructions on the airflow. However, they also allow the definition of CFD boundary attributes to enable them to act as constant temperature surfaces or heat flux sources and can also be modified to behave as non-solids to allow air to pass through them. Note: in current versions of the software, component blocks and assemblies defined at block level do not affect EnergyPlus simulations
Component Blocks
CFD attributes for component blocks are inherited down from the building level to component blocks located at both building and building block levels. CFD attributes for component blocks are accessed on the CFD model data tab.
Assemblies
The CFD assembly library that is provided with DesignBuilder contains a number of pre-defined assemblies that can be used to add items such as occupants, radiators and furniture. Some of these pre-defined assemblies already have CFD boundary attributes associated with them, e.g. occupant assemblies have a defined convective heat flux of 45W. You can also define your own assemblies for use in CFD analyses and you will find details of how to do this in the Assemblies Help section.
- 711 -
CFD attributes for component assemblies are inherited from the parent assembly to instances of the assembly at the building and building block levels. CFD attributes for assemblies are accessed from the CFD tab after moving down to an assembly instance level by clicking on it in the navigator or double-clicking on it in the Edit screen. It is important to understand that if you change an attribute for a specific instance of an assembly, the attributes will be changed for all other instances of the same assembly.
The following CFD boundary settings are available for both component blocks and component assemblies: Thermal boundary type: The thermal boundary type can be set to one of the following: 1None - component block does not act as a CFD boundary condition. 2Temperature - component block acts as a fixed temperature CFD boundary condition (enter temperature below) 3Flux - component block supplies a fixed heat flux to the surroundings (enter the convective flux below).
Temperature
If the thermal boundary type has been set to Temperature, enter the temperature of the block.
Flux
If the thermal boundary type has been set to Flux, enter the convective only portion of the heat emission of the block. If you know the total heat flux then you can calculate the convective part by multiplying by (1-radiant fraction). For modelling building occupants you can assume a radiant fraction of 0.5. You can search the DesignBuilder help using "radiant fraction" as the search term to find more example radiant fractions for different types of equipment.
Mass
Determines whether or not the block will act as a physical obstruction to the surrounding flow. In some cases, it may be desirable to fix the temperature or flux of the component but allow air to pass through the block, e.g. to represent an occupancy flux throughout a large volume without needing to locate individual occupants.
- 712 -
Setting Up A New External CFD Analysis
Setting Up A New External CFD Analysis

To create a new external CFD analysis, first make sure that you have selected the Site object in the model navigator and then click on the CFD tab:
The New CFD Analysis Data dialog is displayed which allows you to name the analysis, define grid generation variables, wind data and the extents of the domain to be included in the analysis:
- 713 -
Grid type
With External CFD analyses you can select from 2 grid types: 1-Non uniform - where the grid is set up using a simple grid with fixed cubic cells using the Default grid spacing as the cell size. This is the default option. This is the same setting as used for internal CFD simulations, for which there is no option for a uniform grid. 2-Uniform - where DesignBuilder tries to set up a uniform grid but creates exceptions in order to ensure that corners are located at the intersections of the grid. To achieve this, variations must be created in the grid using the Grid line merge tolerance data.
Note: Uniform grids are preferred for large and or very complex external CFD analyses to encourage convergence.
Default Grid Spacing

On entry to the CFD screen after completing and closing the new CFD analysis dialog, the CFD grid is automatically generated throughout the overall external domain extents. The grid is created by first determining key points obtained from constituent model blocks along the major axes, the distance between each of these key points being known as regions. Each CFD grid region along each major axis is automatically spaced using the default grid spacing dimension.
Grid Line Merge Tolerance

A potential problem when generating the grid is the creation of cells with a high aspect ratio that can lead to instability in the equation solver. In order to avoid such cells, grid lines that are very close together can be
- 714 -
Setting Up A New Internal CFD Analysis
merged. The grid line merge tolerance is the maximum dimension that will be used in determining whether or not to automatically merge grid lines.
Wind Velocity
Enter the required free stream wind velocity in m/s (measured at 10m above ground).
Wind Direction
The wind direction is defined clockwise from North. The default direction is 270, i.e. Westerly.
Wind Exposure
The free stream wind velocity is corrected for height above ground and surrounding terrain using an empirical relationship. Urban, suburban and open country exposures can be selected.
Site Domain Factors

The length, width and height site domain factors are multipliers that are applied to the overall dimensions of the building model in order to arrive at an external volume or domain across which the analysis is carried out. The default factors are 3.0 applied to the length and width and a factor of 2.0 that is applied to the model height. After clicking on the OK button, the CFD screen is displayed showing the model in conjunction with the site domain object:
Setting Up A New Internal CFD Analysis

To create a new internal CFD analysis, first make sure that you have selected the appropriate level object (building, block or zone) in the model navigator and then click on the CFD tab:
- 715 -
New CFD analysis dialog

The New CFD Analysis dialog is displayed which allows you to name the analysis and define grid generation variables:
Default Grid Spacing

On entry to the CFD screen after completing and closing the new CFD analysis dialog, the CFD grid is automatically generated throughout the overall external domain extents. The grid is created by first determining key points obtained from constituent model blocks along the major axes, the distance between each of these key points being known as grid regions. Each CFD grid region along each major axis is automatically spaced using the default grid spacing dimension.
- 716 -
Editing The CFD Grid
Grid Line Merge Tolerance

A potential problem when generating the grid is the creation of cells with a high aspect ratio that can lead to instability in the equation solver. In order to avoid such cells, grid lines that are very close together can be merged. The grid line merge tolerance is the maximum dimension that will be used in determining whether or not to automatically merge grid lines.
Editing The CFD Grid
As soon as a new analysis data set has been created, a default CFD grid is generated using the default grid spacing defined as part of the data set. The default grid may be edited using the Edit CFD Grid tool which allows you to change the spacing used for default regions, insert additional regions or remove previously inserted regions. When you select the Edit CFD Grid tool, the grid is displayed with the building outline overlaid as a ghosted wire frame. Grid regions are displayed along the major axes bounded by dark grey lines, the auto-generated grid region spacing lines being displayed in a lighter grey. The currently selected grid region is selected in cyan or yellow if the region is a non-default inserted region. To select regions on one of the other major axes, you can change the axis by clicking on the required axis of the axis selector displayed at the top right of the screen:
- 717 -
To edit a grid region, move the mouse cursor across the grid to the required region that will highlight to indicate that it has been selected and then click the mouse button. The selected region will then highlight in red and the Edit CFD Grid data panel will be displayed at the bottom left of the screen:
The following settings are available on the Edit CFD Grid data panel:
Operation
1Edit Region - change the spacing of the currently selected region. 2Insert Region- insert a new custom key coordinate at a defined point in the current region to form an additional region. 3Remove Region - this option is only available if the current region has been previously inserted and allows you to remove it.
New coordinate (m)

If the Insert Region operation has been selected, this setting is displayed allowing you to define a custom coordinate within the current region. Note that the coordinate must lie in the range defined by the displayed start and end coordinates.
Spacing Type
The spacing type can be set to one of the following: 1-None - the region is not sub-divided. 2-Uniform - the region is sub-divided into a number of equal sub-divisions, the dimension of which is calculated to be as close to the specified Spacing dimension as possible. 3-Increasing power-law - the location of each sub-division grid line within the region increases as the power of the spacing number, which starts at the beginning of the region. So that if i represents the index number of the grid line counted from the start of the region, the coordinate of the ith sub-division grid line is calculated using the following relationship: x i=(region dimension)(i/n)power+xs 4-Decreasing power-law - the location of each sub-division grid line within the region decreases as the power of the spacing number, which starts at the end of the region. So that if i represents the index
- 718 -
CFD Grid Information
number of the grid line counted from the start of the region, the coordinate of the i th sub-division grid line is calculated using the following relationship: xi=(region dimension)[1-(i/n)power]+xs 5-Symmetric power-law - the coordinate of the ith sub-division grid line is calculated using both increasing and decreasing power-law relationships that meet at the middle of the region: For i <= n/2: x i=[(region dimension)/2](2i/n)power+xs For i >= n/2: x i=[(region dimension)/2][2-(2i/n))power]+xs
Spacing dimension (m)

If the uniform spacing type has been selected, this setting is displayed and allows you to enter the dimension used for sub-dividing the region.
Spacing power
If the Increasing/Decreasing/Symmetric power law spacing type has been selected, this setting is displayed and allows you to enter the power used in the associated power-law spacing relationship.
Number of divisions
If the Increasing/Decreasing/Symmetric power law spacing type has been selected, this setting is displayed and allows you to enter the number of divisions used in the associated power-law spacing relationship. After selecting an operation and adjusting the required settings, you then need to click on the Apply changes button to update the selected grid region with the current settings.
CFD Grid Information
Information about the CFD grid can be obtained using the Show CFD grid statistics tool, which displays the CFD grid statistics dialog:
- 719 -
If the maximum cell aspect ratio exceeds the allowable limit of 50 or the required memory exceeds the physical memory available, the Check will indicate a failure:
Setting Up CFD Cell Monitor Points
- 720 -
Setting Up CFD Cell Monitor Points
The CFD calculation process is iterative and is considered to have completed once convergence has been achieved. The main indicator for convergence is the point at which the finite difference equations for all cells are satisfied by the current values of the appropriate dependent variables. However, it can be very useful in many cases to monitor the variation of the dependent variables at specific locations throughout the calculation domain in order to observe the point at which they stabilise. It may be acceptable, in many cases, to terminate a calculation as soon as the dependent variables have achieved adequate stability but before the residuals have arrived at their defined termination values When a project is first created, a default central cell monitor point is automatically added to the domain. The Define CFD monitor points tool enables you to identify up to ten cells throughout the calculation domain at which you want to monitor the variation of the calculated variables. After selecting the Define CFD monitor points tool, the cell monitor screen is displayed which includes the model view together with a cell selection frame, perpendicular to the currently selected axis. You can select a plane along the current axis by moving the mouse cursor across the model in the direction of the axis. To change the axis, click on the required axis on the axis selector tool, which is located at the top right of the screen:
After selecting the required axis, move the cell selection frame along the axis, and then click the mouse button to select a plane at the required distance along the axis. A cell selection grid is then displayed in the selected plane allowing you to move the mouse cursor to the required cell in that plane:
- 721 -
After moving the mouse cursor to the required cell, click the mouse button to display the cell monitor data panel at the bottom left of the screen. The following settings are available on the cell monitor data panel:
Operation
This control is only active if you have selected a cell for which a monitor point has already been defined. The following options are available: 1Update cell - add a monitor point or edit the name of a previously defined point. 2Remove cell - remove a previously defined monitor point.
Monitor location name

Enter a name for monitor point - this is used later when selecting data for the monitor point to be displayed on the CFD Calculation Options dialog. After changing the required settings, click on the Apply changes button to update the selected cell. You can cancel the Define CFD monitor points command by pressing the <Esc> key or by selecting another tool.
CFD Calculation Options
To run the calculations, click on the Update calculated data tool. If a problem is found with the grid generation, the CFD Grid Statistics dialog is displayed showing the error. There are three possible error conditions: 1. Maximum cell aspect ratio exceeds the limit - you will need to delete the existing project and create a new one either reducing the default grid spacing dimension or increasing the grid line merge tolerance by a suitable amount (see the CFD Results Manager section).
- 722 -
2. 3.
Required memory exceeds the available memory - you will need to delete the existing project and create a new project with larger default grid spacing or consider simplifying the problem definition in terms of complexity of assemblies, etc. Flow imbalance the total flow rate specified for supply diffusers does not balance with the total flow rate specified for extract grilles. You will need to add supply diffusers or extract grilles or edit the existing flow rates to establish the correct balance
If no problem is encountered in creating the grid, the Edit Calculation Options dialog will be displayed:
The Edit Calculation Options dialog is divided into two main sections, the Residuals and Cell Monitor graphs and the Calculation Options Data panel.
BUTTONS
There are also a group of buttons at the bottom of the dialog, which allow you to control the calculations:
Start
Start, or if the calculations have been paused, re-start the calculations.
Pause
Interrupt or pause the calculations. Once the calculations have been paused, the calculation dialog can be temporarily closed in order to review the results.
Reset
After pausing the calculations, the calculations may then be re-initialised to start from scratch. If the solution is found to diverge and you pause the calculations to decrease the velocity false time steps, you will then need to reset the calculations before re-starting. The calculation settings panel incorporates the following settings:
TURBULENCE MODEL
The following turbulence model options are available:
- 723 -
1k-e: This model is one of the most widely used and tested of all turbulence models and can be used reliably for most building flows, including high velocity flows and highly buoyant flows. The k-e model belongs to the so-called RANS (Reynolds Averaged Navier-Stokes) family of models. These models involve replacing the instantaneous velocity in the Navier-Stokes and energy equations with a mean and fluctuating component. The resulting equations give rise to additional terms known as Reynolds stresses and turbulent heat flux components. Reynolds stresses are replaced with terms involving instantaneous velocities where molecular viscosities are substituted for effective viscosities and a similar substitution is conducted for the energy equation. The effective viscosity is the sum of the molecular viscosity and a turbulent viscosity, which is derived from the turbulence kinetic energy and the dissipation rate of turbulence kinetic energy: where k= turbulence kinetic energy and e = dissipation rate of turbulence kinetic energy k and e are both derived from partial differential equations which are in turn derived from a manipulation of the Navier-Stokes equations. There is a certain amount of controversy surrounding the applicability of turbulence models but all turbulence models have their strengths and weaknesses. There has been some suggestion that the k-e model over-predicts diffusion in the case of highly separating flows and has limitations in the prediction of jet spread, however it should be understood that the standard k-e model is perceived as the most robust and reliable of all turbulence models and that the application of CFD to building analyses is relatively undemanding as far as turbulence models go - compared with hypersonic flows, reacting flows, super-fluid flows, shock waves etc. 2 Constant effective viscosity: The constant effective viscosity model is a much simpler approach because it does not model the generation and transport of local turbulence, but instead assumes that the effect of turbulence is evenly distributed throughout a space. However, despite the fact that the constanteffective viscosity model is simplistic, it is more stable than the k-e model and can be useful for generating fairly realistic initial results more quickly than the k-e model. The method involves the replacement of the molecular viscosity in the Navier-Stokes equations with a constant effective viscosity (typically in the order of 100-1000).
DISCRETISATION SCHEME
The following discretisation schemes are available: 1-Upwind - The calculation process involves replacing the defining set of partial differential equations with a set of finite difference equations. The conventional approach to this is to use a Taylors series formulation, which leads to a set of central difference equations. However, although this approach is physically realistic for diffusion, it is not found to be realistic for convection because of its one-way nature, i.e. upwind conditions affect downwind conditions but not the reverse. The upwind scheme allows the convective term to be calculated assuming that the value of the dependent variable at a cell interface is equal to the value at the cell on the upwind side of the interface. 2Hybrid a more computationally expensive approach than the upwind scheme but it reduces numerical diffusion at high values of Pe number. 3Power-Law - The power-law scheme is arguably more accurate than the hybrid scheme but is more computationally expensive.
ITERATIONS
This is the maximum number of iterations conducted by the outer iterative calculation loop (see CFD Calculations and Convergence section). The calculations will terminate when the number of iterations reaches this value regardless of whether or not the solution has converged.
- 724 -
ISOTHERMAL
Temperature is assumed to be constant throughout the calculation domain and the energy equation is removed from the calculations.
Surface heat transfer

The following surface heat transfer options are available: 1Calculated - Surface heat transfer coefficients are calculated by the CFD calculation scheme if the k-e turbulence model has been selected. 2User-defined - Surface heat transfer coefficients can be defined for ceilings, wall and floors.
INITIAL CONDITIONS
In some cases, a faster solution can be achieved by setting the initial conditions closer to the final expected conditions.
CELL MONITOR
Select any defined cell monitor point and associated dependent variable to be displayed on the cell monitor (see Setting Up CFD Cell Monitor Points section).
RESIDUAL DISPLAY
Residuals give an indication of the extent to which the calculations have converged to the final solution. They are a measure of the total 'error' still left on the solution. You can select the dependent variables and/or mass for which residuals are to be displayed in the residuals monitor. The mass residual is similar to the dependent variable residuals but is extracted from a continuity equation mass balance for each cell and is the most significant residual in terms of indicating a successfully converged solution.
DEPENDENT VARIABLE CONTROL SETTINGS

The calculations involve a nested iterative scheme whereby dependent variable equations are solved iteratively within an overall outer iterative loop (see CFD Calculations and Convergence section). The dependent variable control settings enable control inner iterative dependent variable calculations.
Inner iteration
The number of iterations used for the calculation of the dependent variable.
False time step

The finite difference equation set is formulated in the form of a transient equation set although the calculations are essentially a snap-shot in time. The reason for this form ulation is that the transient term behaves as a very effective relaxation method, which can slow the change in dependent variables in order to arrive at a more stable solution. The false time step is the time step used in the pseudo-transient term of the dependent variable equation. For forced convection flows, a best-guess optimal false time step is automatically calculated for velocities, however for buoyancy driven flows, a default value of 0.2 is used. Reducing the false time step has the effect of slowing down the change in the dependent variable and can be a helpful remedy for unstable solutions.
Relaxation factor
This is used in the text book relaxation method, which can be used to allow only a proportion of the calculated value of the current iteration dependent variable to be assigned to the variable. However, the false time step is normally the preferred method of achieving under-relaxation.
- 725 -
Termination residual
The outer iterative calculation loop is repeated until the finite difference equations for all cells are satisfied by the current values of the appropriate dependent variables, at which point the scheme is said to have converged. The dependent variable residual is the maximum residual quantity for the equation balance across all cells in the domain. The solution is deemed to have converged for each dependent variable when the residual is less than the termination residual. The CFD Calculations and Convergence section gives an overview of the calculation methodology that will help in understanding the concepts used to initialise, control and monitor the calculations.
Residuals And Cell Monitor Graphs

During the CFD simulation, you can monitor the progress of calculations by keeping an eye on residual and cell monitor graphs. The value of each selected dependent variable residual together with the mass residual is plotted on the residuals graph, at the end of each outer iteration of the calculation. You can use the residuals plot to monitor the overall convergence of the solution and to determine whether or not any remedial action is required. When considering the residual plots, you should bear in mind that the residuals can fluctuate quite markedly throughout the period of the calculations and in some cases rise appreciably before falling and so you need to get an idea of the overall trend after several hundred iterations. The following screenshot shows a plot of residuals and a default centrally located monitor cell plot for the internal analysis illustrated in the Displaying Results section. Notice that the monitored velocity has reached a steady final value.
If you notice that the residuals are fluctuating wildly or steadily increasing over several hundred iterations, you should pause the calculations and take remedial action (see Convergence Difficulties and Troubleshooting section). The cell monitor graph displays the variation in the selected dependent variable for the currently selected monitor cell (see Setting Up CFD Cell Monitor Points section and Cell Monitor setting in the CFD Calculation Options
- 726 -
Convergence Difficulties And Troubleshooting
section). The variation of monitored cell point variables provides a good indication of solution convergence, i.e. when the variation of the variable stabilises.
Convergence Difficulties And Troubleshooting

If the plotted residuals are found to diverge or fluctuate significantly, in many cases you will find that the situation can be improved by reducing the false time steps for the velocity components. The recommended procedure is to continuously half the time steps until a more stable solution is found.
Turbulence models
In some cases a solution can be very difficult, if not impossible, to achieve using the standard k-e turbulence model. Particularly difficult problems involve very low velocity buoyancy-driven flows where diffusion is dominated by convection and this can cause velocities to fluctuate around a mean value. In these cases, reducing false time steps may not improve the situation. In order to force a solution, you may consider introducing additional boundary conditions such as occupants, which can change the flow sufficiently to obtain a solution without the problem necessarily becoming unrealistic. Alternatively, you may consider using the constant effective viscosity turbulence model with a relatively high turbulent viscosity or turbulent viscosity multiplier but bear in mind that this will introduce an artificially high level of diffusion into the flow and also, the constant effective viscosity model is incapable of modelling the transport of turbulence.
Use of residual data

If the residuals have dropped to very low levels and the monitored variables are fairly constant (they don't have to be absolutely constant), then you can be confident that you have a good solution even though the lack of convergence message is displayed. The message is always displayed even if the residuals are very slightly above the termination values. These are conservative values and don't need to be strictly adhered to.
Velocity false time steps

You should only need to reduce the velocity false time steps if you experience a very unstable solution which exhibits diverging residuals or high amplitude oscillations. The time steps have a 'damping' effect on the solution which can increase stability but increases the overall simulation time. Generally, if you experience a solution that doesn't converge easily where the residuals appear to remain constant, it's better to re-structure the model definition by removing unnecessary obstructions and aligning any repeating component/assemblies with each other in order to reduce the number of grid lines.
Displaying Results
After completing or pausing the calculations, the CFD Display Options data panel is shown in the bottom left of the screen and the Select CFD slice tool becomes enabled (above). This is the main mechanism for displaying results. It allows you to select a slice along one of the main grid axes and perpendicular to it, within which any of the selected results can be displayed. After selecting the Select CFD slice tool, the CFD results screen is displayed which includes the model view together with a slice selection frame, perpendicular to the currently selected axis. You can select a slice along the current axis by moving the mouse cursor across the model in the direction of the axis. To change the axis, click on the required axis on the axis selector tool, which is located at the top right of the screen:
- 727 -
After selecting the required axis and moving the slice selector frame to the required position along the axis, click the mouse button to add the slice to the display. Notice that as you move the slice selection frame to a slice that was previously added to the display, the frame colour changes from green to red and if you click the mouse button, the slice is removed from the display:
- 728 -
Displaying Results
Slice variable plots are selected under the Slice Settings header on the Display Options data panel and controlled under the Variable Settings header:
Note that any modifications made to items on the Display Options data panel will only come into effect after clicking on the Apply changes button.
- 729 -
The Variable Settings group contains groups of variable banding data for velocity, temperature and pressure variables. Also, under the variable settings Velocity header, there are two velocity vector settings, Maximum vector length and Velocity scale factor. Velocity vectors are displayed as arrows, the length of which corresponds to the magnitude of the velocity and with the default vector scale factor of 1.0, a length of 1.0m corresponds to a magnitude of 1.0m/s. The maximum vector length is the maximum length of a vector that will be displayed to prevent the display from becoming cluttered with excessively large vectors. Any vector, which has a magnitude greater than this maximum, will be displayed translucently to distinguish it from vectors with lengths that do represent magnitude. The variable banding data comprises the defined band range, followed by twelve contour band values within the defined range. The band range defines the minimum and maximum variable values between which data will be displayed and the band values are the actual values within that range that are displayed in the form of contours or in the case of velocity vectors, vector colours. The default minimum and maximum variable display values are extracted from the calculated values and this range is then divided into twelve equal increments in order to arrive at the dependent variable contour bands. Each contour band can be edited or switched off altogether. When the band range values are modified, the individual band values are automatically re-calculated. The Slice Settings group is used to select the plots required to be included in subsequently added slices. The last item on the Display Options data panel is the 3-D contours group that allows you to select any of the available variables for which a 3-D contour plot is required:
CFD Comfort Calculations
DesignBuilder CFD comfort calculations allow you to carry out a distributed analysis of the comfort conditions in the domain. The comfort calculations are carried out for each cell in the grid and include consideration of the local air temperature and velocity. Radiant temperatures of the surrounding surfaces are also considered. Note that solar radiation through windows is not considered in DesignBuilder v.2 CFD.
- 730 -
CFD Results Manager
Comfort calculations use the Fanger comfort model. Metabolic rates and clothing levels are obtained from the data entered under the Metabolic header on the Activity tab of the model data panel. After completing or pausing the CFD calculations the Update CFD comfort tool will become enabled. After selecting this tool, a progress bar will be displayed indicating that mean radiant temperature (MRT) calculations are in progress, followed by another progress bar for the comfort calculations themselves. After the comfort calculations, when comfort data is available, some additional comfort slice display variables are available on the Display options data panel: PMV - Predicted Mean Vote calculated using Fanger equations according to ISO 7730 PPD - Predicted Percentage Dissatisfied calculated using Fanger equations according to ISO 7730 Mean Radiant Temperature Operative Temperature
You can find out more about Fanger comfort calculations in the EnergyPlus Thermal Comfort section.
CFD Results Manager
The CFD results manager tool allows you to create new CFD projects, open existing projects or remove existing projects. For example, considering the internal analysis example illustrated in the Displaying Results section, you may want to conduct another analysis after moving the position of a radiator in order to look at the effect on air distribution. You would first go to the Edit screen and modify the radiator layout:
- 731 -
After returning to the CFD screen, you can then click on the CFD results manager tool to open the CFD Results Manager dialog:
The CFD Results Manger dialog incorporates a list of all available projects together with buttons that allow you to create a new project, open a project or delete a project. For each project entry in the list, the first column indicates the project name, the second column the model domain object used for the calculations (site, building, building block, zone) and the third column indicates whether or not the model geometry contained within the results is upto-date. In this case, you would click on the New button to create a new project:
- 732 -
CFD Results Manager
See the Setting Up a New Internal CFD Analysis section for details of creating a new internal analysis. After creating the new analysis, you can then conduct the calculations:
You can then use the CFD Results Manager to open the previous project in order to compare results:
- 733 -
Example - CFD External Analysis

This CFD example will go through the steps required for a typical external CFD analysis: Create model for external analysis. Switch to the CFD screen and create a new CFD analysis. Perform the CFD calculation. Review the results.
External analyses are simpler than internal analyses in that you do not need to define any internal boundary conditions. Also they are isothermal and take account principally of only velocity and pressure. It is possible to edit the grid and select monitor cells with external CFD as well as with internal CFD.
CREATING THE MODEL

The model comprises a simple rectangular block with dimensions 30.0m x 20.0m x 30.0m. Click on the Add new block tool and change the Block type to Building block and the Height to 30.0m. To place the origin of the building at the site origin, type in 0 0 and press the <Return> key. To then create the block with a 30.0m x 20.0m perimeter, type in 30 20 and press the <Return> key. A block will be created with the required dimensions. Alternatively create the block by drawing the base perimeter in the normal way.
- 734 -
CREATING A NEW CFD EXTERNAL ANALYSIS

Each DesignBuilder project can have one or more CFD analyses. Each CFD Analysis can be a different set of results for a different variation on the model. Unlike simulation data, CFD Analyses are not deleted automatically when the model is modified on the Edit screen. 1. Click on the site in the navigator to move to the site level. 2. 3. 4. 5. External CFD analyses can only be conducted at the site level. Click on the CFD tab to set up an external CFD analysis. After clicking on the CFD tab, the New CFD analysis dialog is displayed. Enter Wind analysis in the Name field and leave the grid spacing and grid line merge tolerance in their default settings. Default grid spacing and grid line merge tolerance settings are covered later. Under the Wind header, change the free-stream velocity to 12.0m/s, the Direction to 45 and the Exposure to Urban. The wind direction is defined clockwise from North, so the default of 270 represents a westerly and a setting of 45 a North-easterly. The Site Domain Factors are multipliers that are applied to the overall model extent in the X (length), Y (width) and Z (height) dimensions to derive a site domain across which the calculations will be carried out. Keep the defaults of 3, 3 and 2. After clicking on OK to create the analysis data set, the CFD screen displays the model in wire-frame together with the site domain, which is outlined in dotted lines.
6.
7.
Notice the rotation of the domain with respect to the building to account for the wind direction.
SETTING UP MONITOR CELLS

It is usually a good idea to display the state of one or more monitor cells in the domain so that you can monitor the extent to which the calculations have settled down to a final converged solution. DesignBuilder automatically sets up a single monitor cell at the centre of the domain. You can add new monitor points at any time as follows. Click on the Define CFD monitor points tool and select the Z grid axis using the grid axis selector tool. Move the cursor along the axis to select a plane a couple of grid cells above the building and then move the cursor across the selected plane and select a cell roughly above the centre of the building. The Cell monitor data panel is displayed at the bottom left of the screen. Enter the name Roof into the Monitor location name field and click on the green tick Apply changes button.
- 735 -
Press <Esc> to cancel the Define CFD monitor points tool.
RUNNING THE CFD CALCULATIONS

To set up calculation data and run the CFD calculations, click on the Update calculated data button, which will bring up the CFD Calculation options dialog. The left hand side of the calculation dialog contains various calculation options. Keep the default options except for Iterations which should be set to 5000 and under the Residual Display header, switch on the X, Y and Z-axis velocity residuals. Click on the Start button to begin the calculations. Wait until the calculation is fully converged when the residuals have reached the specified minimum and the Finished (Converged) indicator is displayed at the bottom left of the dialog. Notice that the displayed velocity for the supply monitor point becomes constant. Press the Cancel button to close the calculation dialog.
DISPLAYING CFD RESULTS

1. 2. 3. 4. Go to the Display Options panel and open the Velocity header under the Variable Settings header and set the Vector scale factor to 2.0 and the Maximum vector length to 5m. Under the Slice Settings header, make sure that only Velocity vectors is switched on. Click on the green tick Apply changes button. Click on the Select CFD slice tool. Use the grid axis selector to change the current axis to the Z-axis and then move the mouse across one of the side surfaces of the site domain along the Z-axis until the slice selection frame is located 25m above the ground plane. Click on the mouse to add the currently selected slice to the display.
- 736 -
1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
Clear the current slice from the display using the Clear all slices tool. Switch off Velocity vectors under the Slice Settings header on the Display Options panel and switch on the Velocity contours and Filled Velocity contours. Click on the green tick Apply changes button. Select the Y-axis from the grid axis selector and move the cursor over the top surface of the site domain along the Y-axis until the slice selection frame is 50.68m from the origin and click the mouse to add the slice to the display. To add a horizontal slice 5m from the ground, select the Z-axis from the grid axis selector and move the cursor over one of the side surfaces of the site domain along the Z-axis until the slice selection frame is 5.0m above the ground plane and click the mouse to add the slice to the display.
- 737 -
DISPLAY 3-D CONTOURS

3-D contours can be displayed to show the values of a variable throughout the domain. 3-D contours can display a lot of data: 1. Clear the current slice from the display using the Tools > Clear all slices menu option. 2. Under the 3-D Contours header on the Display Options data panel, switch on Pressure. Click on the green tick Apply changes button.
- 738 -
Example - CFD Internal Analysis Basics

This internal CFD example will guide you through the basic minimum steps required for an internal CFD analysis: Create a simple single zone model. Add CFD surface boundaries to the model including a simple sidewall supply diffuser and ceiling mounted extract grille. Switch to the CFD screen and create a new CFD analysis. Perform a CFD calculation using default calculation options and grid. Review the results.
CREATING THE MODEL

The model comprises a simple rectangular block housing a zone with dimensions 6.0m x 4.0m x 3.5m. Create a new site and add a new building using default settings. From the building level Click on the Add new block tool and change the Block type to Building block, the Height to 3.5m and set the wall thickness to 0.25m.
- 739 -
DEFAULT WALL AND WINDOW BOUNDARY TEMPERATURES

Default wall and window boundary temperatures can be defined from the building level down to the surface level. As with other DesignBuilder attribute data, these attributes are inherited from the level above unless deliberately overwritten. The default wall and window boundary temperatures can be accessed under the CFD Boundary header on the CFD tab of the model data. At the building level, change the default window temperature to 20C. Go down to the zone surface facing North and change the default wall temperature to 18C and the default window temperature to 10C. Go through the same procedure for the west facing zone surface.
ADDING SURFACE SUPPLY DIFFUSER AND EXTRACT GRILLE Supply grille

1. 2. 3. 4. Click on the zone in the navigator and select the North-facing surface in the Edit screen. Double-click to drop down to the surface level. Click on the Normal view button to obtain a normal view of the surface. Click on the Add CFD boundary tool. The CFD boundary data panel is displayed at the bottom left of the screen. Select Supply from the Boundary type drop list. Keep all of the remaining boundary defaults but change the Y discharge angle to 45 in order that the supply jet will be projected upwards at an angle of 45 from the horizontal. The supply diffuser is to be 1.0m x 0.2m and is to be located midway between the North and South surface edges, 0.4m from the top edge of the surface. With the Increment snap switched on, move the cursor to the top left corner of the surface and press <SHIFT> to lock the origin to the surface corner, move the cursor away from the corner until the cursor is snapped 0.4m from the top edge and 1.5m from the left edge and click the mouse button to place the top left corner of the boundary. Move the cursor to place the bottom right corner of the boundary 1.0m to the right and 0.2m below the top left corner and click the mouse to place the supply.
5.
- 740 -
Extract grille
A 0.5m x 0.5m extract grille is to be located in the corner of the ceiling 0.5 m from the North and east surface edges. 1. 2. 3. Click on the zone roof surface in the navigator and again click on the Normal view button to obtain a normal view. Click on the Add CFD boundary tool and select Extract from the Boundary type drop list. Keep the default flow rate of 200 l/s to match the supply flow rate. Move the cursor until it is snapped 0.5m from the top edge of the surface and 0.5m from the right edge and click the mouse to place the top right corner of the extract, move the mouse 0.5m to the left and 0.5m below the top right corner of the extract and click the mouse to place it.
CREATING A NEW CFD INTERNAL ANALYSIS

Click on the building in the navigator to move to the building level and click on the CFD tab to set up an internal CFD analysis. An internal analysis can be set up for any level from a single zone up to the whole building. In this case, because we are dealing with a single zone building, the analyses for each level would be identical. After
- 741 -
clicking on the CFD tab, the New CFD analysis dialog is displayed. Enter Basic Vent in the Name field and leave the grid spacing and grid line merge tolerance at their default settings. More on grids in the next exercise. Click OK to create the analysis data set. You will see the model in wire-frame mode by default and at this stage the CFD analysis has been created including the default grid and the model is ready for calculations. If you were going to edit the grid now is the time before starting the calculations, but for now we will use the default grid.

To set up calculation data and run the CFD calculations, click on the Update calculated data button, which will bring up the CFD Calculation options dialog. The left hand side of the calculation dialog contains various calculation options. Keep the default options except under the Residual Display header, switch on the X, Y and Zaxis velocity residuals. Click on the Start button to begin the calculations. Wait until the calculation is fully converged when the residuals have reached the specified minimum (1x10-5 is the default for all variables) and the Finished (Converged) indicator is displayed at the bottom left of the dialog. Notice that the displayed velocity for the default Centre monitor point becomes constant (bottom graph).
Press the Cancel button to close the calculation dialog.
DISPLAYING CFD RESULTS

After the calculations have been completed, the CFD results display options data panel is enabled allowing you to set various results display options. Use default Display options.
- 742 -
Example - CFD Internal Analysis Including Assemblies
Click on the Select CFD slice tool. Click on the Y-axis of the grid axis selector (top right of screen) and then move the cursor over the ceiling surface along the Y-axis to move the slice selection frame midway between the North and South-facing walls, 2.0m from each wall and click the mouse button to add the currently selected slice to the display.
Notice that as you move the slice selection frame to a slice that was previously added to the display, the frame colour changes from green to red and if you click the mouse button, the slice is removed from the display. Try adding more slices in other planes to see the key characteristics of temperature and velocity distribution in the zone. Press the ESC key to cancel Select CFD slice tool.

In this second internal CFD exercise, the model is modified to include radiators as well as the supply and extract vents entered in the first tutorial. Also some more advanced features of the CFD calculations and display are explored. You will learn how to: Create a component representing a constant temperature radiator, convert the component to an assembly, assign CFD boundary conditions to the assembly and add the assembly to the model assembly library. Place the previously created radiator assembly within the zone. Edit the CFD grid. Add cell monitor points for calculation monitoring purposes. Edit the CFD Calculation options. Deal with common errors and non-convergence. Perform comfort calculations.
- 743 -
CREATING THE RADIATOR ASSEMBLY

Assemblies consist of 1 or more component blocks combined and are used to create boundary conditions inside or outside blocks. They can be used to create furniture, heat generating equipment, airflow supply and extract etc. In this exercise a radiator assembly is to be created from a single component block, which is to be drawn using a rectangular extrusion. 1. 2. 3. Click on the Add new block tool and change the Block type on the Drawing Options panel to Component block and the Height to 1.0m. To place the origin of the radiator component block at the site origin, type in 0 0 and press the return key. Now to create the radiator component with a length of 1.0m and say a thickness of 60mm to represent a single panel convector type radiator, type in 1.0 0.06. The component block will then appear with the specified dimensions. Alternatively use the mouse to define the component block dimensions in the usual way.
To convert the component block to an assembly and add the resulting assembly to the model assembly library: 1. First select the component block and then click on the Add assembly to library tool. The selected component block will be displayed with a wire frame bounding-box and the Add assembly to library data panel is displayed at the bottom left of the screen. Set the Assembly creation mode to Delete because the original component block will not be needed after the conversion and type the name Radiator into the Name field. Set the Thermal boundary type to Temperature in order to create a constant temperature radiator and set the Temperature to 75.0C. Make sure that the Mass check box is checked to ensure that the assembly will represent a solid boundary and that air will not be able to pass through it. The next stage is to select the attachment plane for the assembly, which is the surface plane of the assembly that will be used when attaching the assembly to a model surface during the assembly placement process. In this case, the base (bottom) surface of the radiator should be selected as the attachment plane. To select the attachment plane, move the cursor over the radiator assembly and as you do so, each surface of the assembly bounding-box will highlight in yellow, move the cursor to the base surface of the bounding-box and click the mouse. The assembly will then be automatically added to the model assembly library and because the Delete creation mode has been selected, the original component will be deleted.
2. 3. 4. 5.
- 744 -
POSITIONING RADIATORS WITHIN THE BLOCK

Assemblies inside the building must be placed at Block level (not zone level) so to place a radiator assembly first click on the block in the navigator to move down to the block level. To position assemblies accurately you must use construction lines. To do this, orbit the model to get a clear view of the west-facing end wall from the inside of the block and then click on the Place construction line tool. To position the construction line accurately, switch on the Increment snap under Point Snaps on the Drawing Options data panel. Move the cursor to snap to the lower surface edge at the bottom of the North-facing wall and move the cursor to obtain an edge snap 0.3m from the end nearest the west-facing wall. Click the mouse to start the construction line and move the mouse to the opposite edge at the bottom of the South-facing wall, snapped to the Y-axis and click the mouse once the edge snap is established on the opposite edge to place the construction line.
- 745 -
Click on the Place assembly tool and as you move the cursor back across the Edit screen, you will see that a copy of the previously created radiator assembly is attached to the cursor and the Place assembly data panel is displayed at the bottom left of the screen. Set the Offset to 0.1m to offset the base of the radiator 0.1m above the floor level, set the Width to 2.0m, the height to 0.6m and leave the Depth at 0.06m. Move the cursor to establish a snap on the construction line and click the mouse to place the radiator origin. Once the radiator has been placed, a protractor is displayed at the assembly origin enabling you to define the rotation. Rotate the radiator assembly until it is parallel with the nearest wall and then click the mouse to set the rotation.
Repeat this procedure to place a 3.0m radiator adjacent to the North-facing wall.
- 746 -
CREATING A NEW CFD INTERNAL ANALYSIS

We are now ready to start a new CFD calculation so again click on the building in the navigator to move to the building level and click on the CFD tab. If you have just finished the first CFD exercise, the analysis results for these calculations will be displayed. You should now create a new analysis because the model has changed with the addition of the radiators. To do this click on the CFD Results Manager toolbar icon. This displays the dialog below.
Note that the first Basic Vent analysis is flagged as not up-to-date. This is because the model has been edited since the last calculation was made.
- 747 -
Click on the New button to create a new analysis using the model in its current state. The New CFD analysis dialog is displayed. Enter Radiators and Vent in the Name field and leave the default grid spacing and grid line merge tolerance at their default settings. The default grid spacing and grid line merge tolerance are used in generating the CFD grid. During the process of creating a new CFD analysis data set, a 3-D CFD grid is automatically generated by extracting key points from the model geometry along each of the major axes. The spaces between the key points are known as grid regions and are automatically divided into sub-regions using the default grid spacing entered on the Calculation options dialog. The grid line merge tolerance enables key point grid lines that are very close together to be merged in order to prevent very high aspect ratio cells from being created which can lead to calculation instability. Click OK to create the analysis data set. You will see the model in wire-frame mode by default and at this stage the CFD analysis has been created including the default grid and the model is ready for calculations.
EDITING THE CFD GRID

But before starting the calculations we will explore the edit grid capability. First click on the Edit CFD grid tool. Move the cursor across the displayed CFD grid to select grid regions along the current grid axis. Selected grid regions are highlighted in cyan.
To change the current grid axis, click on one of the major axes in the grid axis selector tool that is displayed at the top right of the CFD screen. To edit a selected region, click the mouse on the currently selected region. The selected region will turn red and the Edit CFD grid region data panel will be displayed at the bottom left of the screen. You can select Edit region from the Operation drop list to change the default spacing of the region or Insert region to create a new region and in the case of a previously inserted region, you can select Remove region to remove it.
- 748 -
To cancel the Edit CFD grid tool press the <Esc> key. After editing the default grid, you can reset it to the default by clicking on the Reset CFD grid tool. Also, to obtain information about the grid, you can click on the Show CFD grid statistics tool which brings up a dialog indicating the number of cells, required memory, available memory and maximum cell aspect ratio. For the purpose of this tutorial, the default grid will be used.
SETTING UP MONITOR CELLS

In order to monitor the convergence of the solution, it can be useful to set up a number of monitor points throughout the calculation domain. During the calculation it is then possible to enable a plot of the variation of the various dependent variables for each of the defined monitor points in order to see if the variables have reached a constant value as the CFD calculation proceed. 1. 2. 3. To set up a monitor point, click on the Define CFD monitor points tool. Move the cursor along the current grid axis to select the plane in which the monitor cell is to be selected. You can change the current grid axis using the grid axis selector tool as before. Once the plane has been selected, you can the move the cursor to select the required cell in that plane. With the current grid axis set to the default X axis, move the cursor along the axis to select a plane about 1.0m from the supply diffuser and then move the cursor across the selected plane and select a cell directly in front of the diffuser. The Cell monitor data panel is displayed at the bottom left of the screen. Enter the name Supply in the Monitor location name field and click on the green tick Apply changes button
4.
- 749 -
When a monitor cell has been added, a cell marker is displayed together with the cell name.
- 750 -
You can press <Esc> to cancel the Define CFD monitor points tool.

To set up calculation data and run the CFD calculations, click on the Update calculated data button, which will bring up the CFD Calculation options dialog. The left hand side of the calculation dialog contains various calculation options. Keep the default options except under the Residual Display header, switch on the X, Y and Zaxis velocity residuals. Click on the Start button to begin the calculations. Wait until the calculation is fully converged when the residuals have reached the specified minimum and the Finished (Converged) indicator is displayed at the bottom left of the dialog. Notice that the displayed velocity for the default Centre monitor point becomes constant (bottom graph).
CFD DISPLAY OPTIONS

In the CFD results slices, velocity vectors are displayed as arrows, the length of which corresponds to the magnitude of the velocity and with the default vector scale factor of 1.0, a length of 1.0m corresponds to a magnitude of 1.0m/s. The maximum vector length is the maximum length of a vector that will be displayed to prevent the display from becoming cluttered with excessively large vectors. Any vector, which has a magnitude greater than this maximum, will be displayed translucently to distinguish it from vectors with lengths that do represent magnitude.
- 751 -
The default minimum and maximum dependent variable values are extracted from the minimum and maximum values found in the domain and this range is then divided into twelve equal increments in order to arrive at the dependent variable contour bands. Each contour band can be edited or switched off altogether. In this tutorial the maximum temperature will be 75.0C (the temperature of the radiators), which is well above the mean temperature of the space, and consequently the default contour bands would be far from the mean and the resulting display would not be very informative. So in order to compress the contour bands to be within the likely temperature range throughout the domain DesignBuilder automatically sets the Maximum Temperature under temperature bands range to 24.0C and the minimum value to 18C. You can manually change these maximum and minimum values in the Display options panel. Note that you need to click on the green tick Apply changes button in order for the display attributes to take effect. Notice also that the temperature contour bands are updated using the new temperature range. You can revert to the absolute minimum and maximum values in the model by using the Tools > Reset CFD display variables menu command.
COMFORT CALCULATIONS
Click on the Update CFD comfort tool to carry out comfort calculations. After the calculations have been completed, various comfort variables are available for display, PMV, PPD, operative temperature and mean radiant temperature. Clear all slices from the display using the Clear all slices tool. Switch off Velocity vectors and Filled temperature contours under the Slice Settings header on the Display options panel and switch on the PMV contours and Filled PMV contours. Click on the green tick Apply changes button. Click on the Select CFD slice tool and click on the Y-axis of the grid axis selector. Move the cursor over the ceiling surface along the Y-axis to move the slice selection frame again to be midway between the North and Southfacing walls and click the mouse button to add the slice to the display.
- 752 -
Appendix - CFD Calculations And Convergence
CHANGE CFD ANALYSIS

You can now switch between the 2 CFD analyses you have carried out using the CFD Result Manager dialog. Select the analysis you wish to switch to and use the Open button to load results. Any slices associated with the analysis will be restored. These 2 analyses will be stored in the dsb file by default and are not deleted when changes are made to the model.
Appendix - CFD Calculations And Convergence

The numerical method used by DesignBuilder CFD is known as a primitive variable method, which involves the solution of a set of equations that describe the conservation of heat, mass and momentum. The equation set includes the three velocity component momentum equations (known as the Navier-Stokes equations), the temperature equation and where the k-e turbulence model is used, equations for turbulence kinetic energy and the dissipation rate of turbulence kinetic energy. The equations comprise a set of coupled non-linear second-order partial differential equations having the following general form, in which f represents the dependent variables:
Term 1 represents the rate of change, term 2 represents convection, term 3 represents diffusion and S is a source term.
- 753 -
Due to its non-linearity, the equation set cannot be solved using analytical techniques, which necessitates the requirement for a numerical method. The numerical method employed by DesignBuilder involves re-casting the differential equations into the form of a set of finite difference equations by sub-dividing the required building space (or calculation domain) into a set of non-overlapping adjoining rectilinear volumes or cells, which is collectively known as a finite volume grid. The equation set is then expressed in the form of a set of linear algebraic equations for each cell within the grid and the overall set of equations is solved using an iterative scheme. The non-linearity of the equation set is accounted for by the use of a nested iterative scheme whereby each dependent variable equation set (velocity components, temperature, etc.) are themselves solved iteratively within an overall outer iterative loop and at the termination of each outer iteration, the most recent values of the dependent variables are fed back into the dependent variable coefficients. The outer iterative loop is repeated until the finite difference equations for all cells are satisfied by the current values of the appropriate dependent variables, at which point the scheme is said to have converged. An appreciation of the requirement for convergence and the nested iterative procedure used to achieve it will help in understanding the meaning of the various calculation options that are described in the Conducting CFD Calculations section.
The Iterative Nature of the Procedure

The calculation procedure has been developed to ensure that the iterative solution of the equation set would be guaranteed to converge if the equation coefficients were constant. However, the equation set is non-linear and the coefficients actually contain the dependent variables themselves, and consequently convergence cannot be guaranteed in all cases. Although in the majority of cases, as long as the dependent variables and particularly the velocities only change slowly, a converged solution is normally achieved. The main mechanism to ensure that the variables change slowly is that of false time steps. The finite difference equation set is formulated in the form of a transient equation set although the calculations are steady state, i.e. essentially a snap-shot in time. The reason for this formulation is that the transient term behaves as a very effective relaxation method, which can slow the change in dependent variables in order to arrive at a more stable solution. The false time step is the time step used in the pseudo-transient term of the dependent variable equation. You can find more details on the calculation method used in the CFD Technical online document.
Daylighting Calculations
DesignBuilder provides 2 types of daylighting calculations: 1. Daylight illuminance contour plots and average daylight factor and uniformity are generated for each zone calculated using the Radiance ray-tracing simulation engine. Standard reports detailing eligibility for LEED EQ8.1, BREEAM HW1 and Green Star IEQ4 daylighting credits are provided. Click on the Daylighting screen tab to view these daylighting results. Daylighting integrated within EnergyPlus simulations allowing savings in electric lighting to be calculated based hour-by-hour on daylight availability throughout the year.
2.
The rest of this section covers the first of these 2 options, that is detailed Radiance ray-tracing calculation of daylight.
Model Data Used

You can use DesignBuilder to generate data on distribution of illuminance levels and daylight factors within each zone for one or more zones in the building. To do this, DesignBuilder uses the following data provided in the model: Surface visible reflectance of the material on the innermost layer of constructions. Window glazing transmittance. Detailed geometry description including the 3-D surfaces as seen on the Visualisation screen.
- 754 -
Daylighting Calculation Options
Daylighting calculation options. Site ground reflectance You can select which zones are regularly occupied with regard to daylighting calculations using the Include zone in daylighting calculations option on the Activity tab.
The above data is passed to the Radiance simulation engine which calculates the distribution of illuminance and daylight factors on the working plane using a ray-tracing method. When the calculations have been carried out, the daylight data can be displayed.

Radiance daylighting calculations are controlled using a set of options on the Daylighting calculation options dialog which is displayed before the calculations are started. It is important to make a selection here that is appropriate to the building you are analysing.
GENERAL CALCULATION OPTIONS Report type

Select the report type (if any) that you will require after the calculations have finished. Options are: 1-Map - a daylight distribution contour map on the working plane of the current object is displayed. 2-Grid - a table of summary daylight statistics for each zone is displayed, including average, min and max daylight factors and uniformity factor data. 3-LEED v2 Credit EQ8.1 Report - generates documentation that can be used towards obtaining LEED v2 IEQ 8.1 credits. 4-LEED v3 Credit IEQ 8.1 Report - generates documentation that can be used towards obtaining LEED v3 IEQ 8.1 credits. 5-BREEAM Credit HW1 Report, - generates documentation that can be used towards obtaining BREEAM HW1 credits. 6-Green Star Credit IEQ4 Report, generates documentation that can be used towards obtaining Green Star IEQ4 credits
If you do not require any particular report then select either 1-Map or 2-Grid.
Detail template
Select a detail template from the drop list to load a set of ambient parameters to the dialog as shown in the table below. You do not necessarily need to have an in-depth understanding of the meaning of each of these parameters to carry out an accurate assessment in DesignBuilder. However knowing a little bit about the way the calculations work and how the options affect tje calculations will help you to understand how to get the best trade-off between accuracy and simulation times. It is important to realise from the outset that Radiance works using a statistical Monte Carlo approach and this means that you may (will) not get exactly the same results if you repeat a calculation using exactly the same model and options. You can reduce this effect by using higher detail settings but you cannot completely eliminate it. This is discussed in more detail under Advanced options below. Detail template 1-Fast Ambient bounces Radiance code -ab 1 Ambient accuracy -aa 0.3 Ambient resolution -ar 128 Ambient divisions -ad 256 Ambient supersamples -as 128
- 755 -
Detail template
Typically used for initial calculations
Ambient bounces 2 2 2 2 3
Ambient accuracy 0.25 0.00 0.22 0.20 0.18
Ambient resolution 256 512 512 512 1024
Ambient divisions 512 1024 1024 2048 4096
Ambient supersamples 256 512 512 1024 2048
2-Standard 3-Good (no interpolation) 4-Good 5-Accurate 6-High quality

Typically used for final results
Working plane height

Enter the height of the working plane above floor level for each zone in the daylight simulation (in m or ft). The default value will depend on the Report type selected. A typical value will be in the range 0.7-0.8m.
Margin
Enter the margin (in m or ft) around the zone boundaries where illuminance data is not to be calculated or included in summary results. This option can be used to help avoid inclusion of potentially misleading illuminance data close to walls and windows. A typical margin recommended by CIBSE is 0.5m.
Sky model
Select the sky model to be used for the daylighting calculations. Select from: 1-CIE sunny clear day, the sky distribution corresponds to the standard CIE clear sky condition with additional direct illumination from the sun included. Expect very bright patches due to direct illumination from the sun with relatively dark areas where direct sunlight does not fall. 2-CIE clear day, the standard CIE clear sky distribution without direct illumination from the sun. 3-CIE sunny intermediate day, sky with intermediate conditions between the overcast and clear skies (see graph below) with direct illuminance from the sun included. 4-CIE intermediate day, the CIE standard intermediate sky with illuminance distribution conditions between the overcast and clear skies (see graph below). Direct illuminance from the sun is not included. 5-CIE overcast day, The CIE Standard Overcast Sky, originally known as the Moon and Spencer Sky, was devised to represent the luminance distribution observed for overcast skies. Adopted as a standard by the CIE in 1955, this description is the one most frequently used for illuminance modelling. In this model, the sky brightness increases gradually with altitude from the horizon to the zenith, but it does not vary with azimuth. 6-CIE overcast day (10000 Lux) This option is similar to 5-CIE overcast day described above but with scaled with a standard sky illuminance at the zenith of 10,000 Lux such that daylight factors can be calculated simply as working plane illuminance values divided by 100. This option is frequently used for daylight factor calculations. 7-Uniform cloudy sky where the sky illumination is completely uniform.
- 756 -
Sky luminance profiles for 3 sky models (Source Rendering with Radiance: A Practical Tool for Global Illumination)
GRID SIZE Maximum grid size

The main grid size that can be used to divide up the working plane when calculating illuminance. Larger values will speed up calculations but give lower resolution in daylighting outputs. You should consider the size and number of zones in the building when selecting the grid size. A very fine grid will of course cause Radiance calculations to take a lot longer to complete. On the other hand a very coarse grid in a small zone may not give a good enough distribution. You should use a maximum grid size no greater than 5ft or 1.5m for LEED EQ8.1 calculations.
Minimum grid size

This is the smallest grid size that can be used to fill in gaps in the working plane in cases where the maximum grid size is too large, especially at the edges of the plane. Use smaller values (e.g. 0.01m) to fill in most gaps between the main grid cells and the borders of the working plane for a more continuous output. It is common to use a Minimum grid size that is a factor of between 1 and 0.2 times the Maximum grid size. To maintain a uniform grid across the working plane set the Minimum grid size the same value as the Maximum grid size.
- 757 -
ADVANCED OPTIONS Ambient bounces (-ab)

The number of ambient bounces is the maximum number of diffuse bounces computed by the indirect calculation. A value of zero implies no indirect calculation.The number of ambient bounces that Radiance should apply varies depending on the type of building and daylighting system you are analysing. It can be set based on the number of reflections typically required by the light to reach the task plus one or two extra for inter reflection within the space. When the number of ambient bounces is set to 0 the ambient lighting calculations are switched off, so only direct sun/sky light patches are considered. The sky will be visible through the window, but the contribution of the sky onto each of the room surfaces is not considered. If the number of ambient bounces is set to 1, light is considered to reach the interior surfaces from the sun's direct rays, from the diffuse sky, and from first bounce reflections of direct sunlight rays from both interior and exterior surfaces. Reflections of sky light off interior or exterior surfaces to other interior surfaces will not be considered. Additional bounces can be added to consider additional flux paths. Note that a value of 1 for the number of ambient bounces is often enough for daylight factor calculations. However, if the daylight factor plot is "lumpy", setting a higher value alone will not fix it. Doubling Ambient bounces can double rendering time
Ambient accuracy (-aa)

Ambient accuracy (-aa) is the maximum error (expressed as a fraction) permitted in the indirect irradiance interpolation. You should normally use a value between 1 and 0.1, with lower values giving the best accuracy. A value of zero gives no interpolation. Halving Ambient accuracy approximately quadruples rendering time.
Ambient resolution (-ar)

The Ambient resolution sets the distance between ambient calculations by determining the maximum density of ambient values used in interpolation. Factors that influence the scale over which interpolation may occur are: The ambient accuracy. The ambient resolution. The maximum scene dimension.
The minimum possible spacing between hemispherical indirect irradiance sampling points is the maximum scene dimension multiplied by the ambient accuracy divided by the ambient resolution. In other words, for distances less than this minimum, the calculation will always resort to interpolation, rather than initiate more sampling, regardless of the error estimate associated with that interpolation. This prevents the calculation from spending unnecessary time resolving irradiance gradients over negligible scales. This distance gives the scale at which the interpolation accuracy begins to deteriorate from the ambient accuracy setting. The minimum separation for calculated irradiances, Smin, is: Smin= Dmax Ambient accuracy / Ambient resolution Where the scene dimension, Dmax, is a measure of the maximum dimension of the zone being treated. The effect of increasing Ambient resolution depends on the scene but it can quadruple calculation times for double the value.
- 758 -
Ambient divisions (-ad)

Ambient divisions sets the number of initial sampling rays sent from each ambient point into the hemisphere to determine the indirect incident light. The error in the Monte Carlo calculation of indirect illuminance will be inversely proportional to the square root of this number. A value of zero implies no indirect calculation. The Ambient divisions and super-samples parameters can be used to help reduce "noise" in a calculation. By setting these options higher more rays will be tested when calculating an ambient value for a point. High values of this parameter (4096 is perhaps the highest value that would be used under normal circumstances) will minimise "patchiness" of daylighting outputs but slow calculations. Doubling Ambient divisions will approximately quadruple calculation time.
Ambient super-samples (-as)

The number of extra rays that will be used to sample areas in the divided hemisphere that appear to have high variance. Ambient super sampling should usually be set to about one half or one quarter of the Ambient divisions parameter. Super-samples are applied only to the ambient divisions which show a significant change. The effect of increasing Ambient super-samples is to reduce "patchiness" in regions where indirect illuminance is changing rapidly, but adding to the Ambient divisions and calculation times.
SETTING AMBIENT PARAMETERS

1. 2. 3. Set Ambient divisions high enough to capture the visible luminous features at the first bounce. Give sufficient ambient bounces to redistribute the light. Set the remaining ambient parameters to sufficiently high resolution to deliver acceptably smooth results.
Technical discussion on hemispherical sampling Hemispherical sampling at the first level will always be initiated from the first point supplied to rtrace. From these hemispherical sampling rays, the ambient calculation will predict the way the indirect irradiance is changing about that point (the indirect irradiance gradient). The calculation also evaluates an estimation of error associated with the prediction for the irradiance gradient. These quantities, together with the Ambient accuracy parameter, are used to determine a radius of validity for the gradient estimate. If the next point supplied to r trace is within this radius, the indirect irradiance is evaluated from the gradient estimate and not from further hemispherical sampling. In other words, the value is obtained by a form of interpolation rather than by actual sampling. Irradiance interpolation can occur across the points supplied to rtrace, so hemispherical sampling at the first level will not necessarily be initiated from every point in the working plane supplied to rtrace. It is important to appreciate the element of chance at work whenever hemispherical sampling is used. If the number of initial sampling rays were set too small, the calculation might, for example, miss a bright patch even though it was visible from the point at which the rays were spawned. Likewise, an unrepresentativ e chance hit of a small bright patch by one of the sampling rays can produce a gross overestimate for indirect irradiance. In a rendering, the artefacts associated with ambient undersampling can cause bright and dark blotches. To minimise blotches we need to set a sufficiently high value for the number of initial sampling rays, Ambient divisions. Hemispherical sampling is generally too expensive to initiate at every surface visible from the eye point. The calculation needs good indirect irradiance estimates from sampling at a limited number of locations. We then rely on the irradiance interpolation algorithm to estimate missing values. To generate a fairly smooth rendering for a daylight calculation accounting for the first level of inter-reflection, we would need to set moderately high resolution values for the ambient parameters.
- 759 -
Daylighting Display Options

This section describes the Display options that are available for showing different reports on the Daylighting results. The main selection to be made is the Report type and the following options are available: 1-Map - a daylight distribution contour map on the working plane of the current object is displayed. 2-Grid - a table of summary daylight statistics for each zone is displayed, including average, min and max daylight factors and uniformity factor data. 3-LEED v2 Credit EQ8.1 Report - generates documentation that can be used towards obtaining LEED v2 IEQ 8.1 credits. 4-LEED v3 Credit IEQ 8.1 Report - generates documentation that can be used towards obtaining LEED v3 IEQ 8.1 credits. 5-BREEAM Credit HEA1 Report, - generates documentation that can be used towards obtaining BREEAM HW1 credits. 6-Green Star Credit IEQ4 Report, generates documentation that can be used towards obtaining Green Star IEQ4 credits
These options together with their associated Display options are described in more detail below.
1-MAP - DAYLIGHT ILLUMINANCE DISTRIBUTION

When the Report type Display option is set to 1-Map a contour map showing the daylight distribution across a slice along the working plane of the object is displayed. When at zone level, the map is the only option and it is a daylight distribution map for the zone is displayed if available. An example daylight map for a single zone is shown below.
You can see that the zone boundary has a 0.5m margin around it where data is not calculated avoiding use of potentially misleading data close to walls and windows. To calculate the daylight illuminance right up to zone boundaries set the Margin calculation option to 0. When at building and block levels maps of daylight distribution across the working plane of the current object can be displayed. An example daylight distribution map displayed across multiple zones is shown below.
- 760 -
You can see that each zone boundary has a margin around it.
Clear sky time

If you carried out a LEED v3 calculation then 2 sets of illuminance maps will be calculated and stored, one for 9am and the other for 3pm. You can select which of these to display using the Clear sky time display option.
Scale source
The scale of the daylight illuminance maps can be defined using data from the buildng, block or zone level or it can be entered manually. It is a way to define the minimum and maximum values on the scale. Select from one of these options. 1-Building, where all of the illuminance values calculated for the whole building are scanned and the lowest and highest values are used. This allows illuminance plots to be generated using a consistent scale even when displaying data at block or zone level. 2-Block, where all of the illuminance values calculated for the current block are scanned and the lowest and highest values for are used. This allows illuminance plots to be generated using a consistent scale even when displayed data at zone level. 3-Zone, where the scale is tailored to the current zone allowing in many cases a more even distribution of colours through the map. When using this option images generated for each zone will use a different scale and so will not be so easily comparable as if the 1-Building had been used. 4-User defined, where you can enter the minimum and maximum values on the scale manually. This has the advantage of allowing a specific lower and upper scale value to be used. For example for many calculations, daylight factors lower than 2% are considered to be inadequately daylit and entering . These areas can be highlighted in a special colour to help provide a clear visual indication of the success or otherwise of the daylighting of a building.
- 761 -
Low DF (%)
When using the 4-User defined Scale source you can enter the minimum daylight factor scale value to be displayed.
High DF (%)
When using the 4-User defined Scale source you can enter the maximum daylight factor scale value to be displayed.
Apply scale "too dark" colour

If you wish to draw attention to areas of the working plane that have daylight factor below the entered Low DF (%) value then check this box and define the colour in the colour selector below.
Scale "too dark" colour

Select the colour to be used to represent areas of the working plane that are below the entered Low DF (%) value. Typically a dark grey or black colour might be used. For example the dark grey areas of the images above were generated using this option. They represent areas where the daylight factor is less than 2%.
Apply scale "too bright" colour

If you wish to draw attention to areas of the working plane that have daylight factor above the entered High DF (%) value then check this box and define the colour in the colour selector below.
Scale "too bright" colour

Select the colour to be used to represent areas of the working plane that are above the entered High DF (%) value.
Working plane
When viewing data for a block or building there can be multiple zones and these can have working planes at various heights. DesignBuilder therefore provides a drop list to allow you select which zones zones are to be displayed based on all relevant working planes identified in the current building or block.
Working plane margin

When DesignBuilder calculates which zones to include in the display for a particular working plane selection, it applies a margin which is a sort of tolerance. Any zones having a working plane height above ground within the band of the selected Working plane height +/- Working plane margin will be included in the display. This allows zones that are required to be included with a particular floor illuminance plot but which have slight differences in working plane height, to be displayed together with other zones of similar working plane height.
2-GRID
Available at building and block levels, the 2-Grid Report type displays information on average daylight factors, daylight uniformity and illuminance values for each zone together with a total for the building. The following data is calculated for each zone: Floor Area (m2) Floor Area above Threshold (m2) Floor Area above Threshold (%) Reference Illuminance (Lux) Average Daylight Factor (%) Minimum Daylight Factor (%) Maximum Daylight Factor (%) Uniformity ratio (Min / Avg) Uniformity ratio (Min / Max)
- 762 -
Min Illuminance Max Illuminance
This option might be useful if the built-in daylight reports don't cover the particular calculation you need to make. In this case you can export the summary data for each zone for further analysis in a spreadsheet. An example grid output is shown below.
LEED V2 CREDIT EQ8.1 REPORT

A report is generated detailing eligibility for the LEED v2 daylighting credit EQ8.1 based on % area of the occupied part of the building that has better than the minimum daylight factor. The CIE overcast sky (10000 lux) sky model is used. An example LEED daylight report is shown below.
- 763 -
LEED V3 CREDIT EQ8.1 REPORT

A report is generated detailing eligibility for the LEED v3 daylighting credit EQ8.1 based on % area of the occupied part of the building that has better than the minimum daylight factor. LEED v3 EQ8.1 requires 2 calculations using CIE clear day conditions at 9am and 3pm on 21 September. When the LEED v3 calculation option is selected these calculations are carried out automatically. Note that this report will only be available if the LEED v3 EQ8.1 calculation option was selected, otherwise the calculations will have to be re done using this option. An example LEED v3 daylight report is shown below.
- 764 -
- 765 -
BREEAM CREDIT HEA1

A report detailing eligibility for the BREEAM daylighting credit based on % area of the occupied part of the building that has better than minimum daylight factors plus better than minimum uniformity ratios. Note that if you request the BREEAM HEA1 report you must also select the building type. At the moment the only option is 1-Office.
- 766 -
- 767 -
GREEN STAR IEQ4

A report detailing the number of Green Star daylighting credit achieved (a maximum of 3 credits are possible). The calculations are based on % area of the occupied part of the building that has better than minimum daylight factors.
Cost And Carbon

The Cost and Carbon screen allows you to review the projected construction cost of the building design and the embodied carbon in the building fabric. Construction Cost Embodied and Equivalent Carbon
Cost
To be completed - the cost model is still under development.
Embodied Carbon Results

The embodied carbon and equivalent carbon data for the building are shown on the Cost and Carbon screen. The carbon data covers only bulk construction and glazing materials and not lighting, HVAC and other building services. The materials and constructions inventories are equivalent ways of showing the same data, but broken down in different ways. The total for the building is shown at the bottom. An example Embodied carbon report is shown below.
- 768 -
Embodied Carbon Results
- 769 -
Reporting
Reporting
You can use DesignBuilder to generate reports using the Compile Reports and Report topic mechanism or you can Export individual report content to file, clipboard (for pasting into word processors) or directly to the printer.
Export Data
You can export data from DesignBuilder screens: Edit Screen - exports a non-rendered 3-D image of the building. Alternatively a 3-D DXF file can be exported. Visualisation Screen - exports a rendered 3-D image of the building optionally including shading and antialiasing.. Heating and Cooling Design Screens - exports design data (graphical, tabular, spreadsheet). Simulation Screen - exports simulation data (graphical, tabular, spreadsheet).
You can export to a range of destinations (depending on the nature of the data): File - store output in a file which can be imported into your documents/e-mails. Printer - sends output directly to the printer. Clipboard - for pasting directly into word processors etc. Report topic - for generating reports using the Compile Reports feature.
Export format options depend on the nature of the data. The full range of options is: Bitmap - best bitmap based output quality but very large file sizes. PNG - better quality compression than JPEG but sometimes have larger file sizes. TIFF - best bitmap based output quality but very large file sizes. GIF - good compression but black and white only. JPEG - recommended for 3-D images of the model because of its good quality combined with small file sizes. DXF - generate 3-D DXF data of the model - only available from Edit and Visualisation Screens. The 3-D DXF file generated by DesignBuilder is suitable for reading into other CAD software. Two options are available: 1-Whole model with details which includes all of the details of the model as seen on the Visualisation tab, and, 2-Zones which generates the internal surfaces as used in simulations and other energy calculations. Windows metafile - results graphs only - scalable so graphs can be resized without losing quality. CSV spreadsheet - grid results and library data only. Text - reports only.
See also the Exporting Data and Compiling Results Tutorial
- 771 -
Report Topics
Report topics are used to store snapshots of model data including model descriptions, graphic images of the model and results. You can export to a report topic by selecting 'Report topic' from the 'Export to' option on the Export Data dialog. When Report topic is selected, a second tab becomes available called Report on which you can enter a title and caption for the topic. You can also choose to include a model description with the topic. This allows a building description to be included alongside the data when the report is compiled using the Compile Report dialog.
Report topics are retained within the dsb file and are available for compiling into a report if the file is saved and reloaded.
Compile Reports
The Compile Reports dialog allows you to control the generation of a report based on previously created Report topics. Available report topics are listed and can be previewed by clicking on them. The Title entered on this dialog is displayed in a table at the top of the report. Check the checkbox to the left of the report topics to be included in the report and click on OK.
See also the Exporting Data and Compiling Results Tutorial
- 772 -
Program Options
Program Options
The Program options dialog is accessed from the Tools menu. The Program options apply to the overall application no matter which file is loaded. There are six tabs: User interface Dialogs Files EnergyPlus Limits International
Program Options - User Interface

User Interface tab of the Program options dialog
Learning
You should generally select Learning mode while you gain experience with DesignBuilder. In Learning mode, the Info panel is shown to the right of the main screen, providing additional information and commonly used tools relevant to each screen. Model Data is accessed from tabs along to the top of the screen. With Learning mode switched off, the Info window is not shown and Model data is shown on the right of the screen alongside the Model edit screen. This allows you to see the effects of updates to data as they are made.
See the New Project and Learning Mode Tutorial
Help System
Select one of: 1-Web-help - the default option where the latest help is displayed from the DesignBuilder servers using the Web Help system. This option has the advantage of providing the most up-to-date help but it requires an Internet connection and is slower than... 2-Local help - a chm format help file is downloaded and displayed. Once the help file is downloaded no Internet connection is required. The help file is called Manual.chm and is downloaded and stored in the folder "Local settings\Application data\DesignBuilder\Help" on Windows XP or AppData\Local\DesignBuilder\Help\V3.0.
Use Slider controls

Some significant data items are (by default) controlled using a 'slider' which allows rapid selection of typical values. If however you need to enter precise values (for example when modelling an existing building) or if you need to enter values outside the slider range you may prefer to type this data in a text box. In this case uncheck the 'Use slider controls' data. Common reasons for this are to enter Computer gain densities for IT suites or dealing rooms. Note: when using DesignBuilder with IP units, slider controls are always switched off regardless of this setting.
- 773 -
Sort lists
By default DesignBuilder automatically sorts navigator and other data lists alphabetically. This can make it easier to find the data you are looking for but also increases the time taken to generate lists and so slows some program operations requiring lists to be generated. You can request unsorted lists by unchecking this option.
Line smoothing in the display

DesignBuilder can optionally smooth lines in the Edit screen to provide a crisp clear view of the model without 'jaggies'. On some computer displays however, (notably those with Intel onboard graphics systems) some line types in the model edit screen can be hard to see with this option selected. You should ensure that this option is unchecked if you have this problem on your computer. The default setting is off. If you have a good quality graphics card you may prefer to leave this option unchecked and switch on hardware antialiasing on the control panel provided by the software that comes with the graphics card. This will improve image quality without the need to change DesignBuilder settings.
Automatically refresh site navigator lists

By default DesignBuilder automatically refreshes the contents of the site navigator list on the left of the screen as the building is modified. In large models frequent rebuilding of the navigator list can slow progress especially when drawing partitions. Uncheck this option to avoid this problem. You can manually refresh the navigator lists by clicking on the refresh list icon above the Navigator panel (below).
Double-click to navigate site hierarchy

By default you can navigate to an object in the site hierarchy (building, block, zone etc) by single-clicking in the Navigator. You can change this behaviour by checking Double-click to navigate site hierarchy. In this case you must double-click to go to objects in the Navigator and a single click highlights the object in the Edit view (if you are already at the level above). For example if you are at block level and you single click on one of the zones in the block the zone is highlighted in red in the Edit view. Note: disabling this option can be useful for identifying blocks, zones, surfaces by single-clicking in the Navigator.
Show 'Load data from template' dialog when template selected

When you select a new template by clicking on the browse button in the Model data, by default the data in the template is loaded directly to the current object. However if this option the 'Load data from template' dialog is opened giving you the opportunity to select various options and load other templates. This option is switched off by default.
Show model data departures from template in bold

Select this option to show any differences in model data relative to the selected template in bold. This option is switched on by default.
Default surface normal view

When working at surface level it can be useful to get a normal view of the surface by clicking on the Normal button in the top right of the screen. By default this will show a normal view of the surface as viewed from outside. You can use the Default surface normal view program option to instead view from the inside.
- 774 -
Program Options - Dialogs
Maximum characters shown in data display lists

You can control the number of characters displayed in data lists on the right hand panel. This provides a workaround to a problem with the list component used in DesignBuilder which always scroll to the right when an item with a long name is selected. This scrolling can be inconvenient so we have implemented the option to control the amount of text displayed. By default this is set to 35 characters but you can use a larger value if you prefer.
Show tooltips in Model data

With small window sizes or when Learning mode is switched off there is not always enough space to display the caption for each Model data item so DesignBuilder provides the option for tooltips to appear when the mouse hovers over a truncated caption. See screenshot below.
Program Options - Dialogs

Dialogs tab of the Program options dialog
Calculation dialogs
These options control whether a calculation option dialog appears by default before every calculation. Note that a dialog always appears when you press Update.
New object dialogs

When you create a new site or building, a dialog box appears by default allowing you to enter basic data on the new object. If you prefer not to see these dialogs and just use default data, uncheck these two check boxes.
EN ISO 6946 GLAZING U-VALUE CALCULATIONS

There are some options for the calculation of the U-value ISO 6946.
Fixed mean gas temperature (10C)

You can choose to fix the mean gas temperature to 10C which is the requirement for strict adherence to ISO 6946. Unchecking this option allows the gas temperature for each gas layer to be calculated individually for a more accurate estimate of gas conduction (and hence the glazing U-value) to be calculated.
Outside air temperature

You can define the outside air temperature to be used as boundary conditions in the calculation of glazing Uvalue. The outside air temperature should be 0C for strict adherence to ISO 6946 .
- 775 -
Inside air temperature

You can define the inside air temperature to be used as boundary conditions in the calculation of glazing U-value. The inside temperature should be 20C for strict adherence to ISO 6946 .
Program Options - Files

Files tab of the Program options dialog
Backup
DesignBuilder will by default make automatic backups of your current working file. Check the Automatic backup option box and select a backup interval to enable this option. If for any reason DesignBuilder does not close down cleanly and is unable to save, a skh backup file will remain in the same folder as the dsb file and DesignBuilder will ask whether you want to recover this data the next time you open the dsb file. In addition DesignBuilder copies the auto backup file to the Backup folder below DesignBuilder Data folder. Note: DesignBuilder keeps files in the Backup folder for up to 30 days and removes old backups each time the program is run.
Default folders
DesignBuilder stores the most recently used folders for: Data file storage Picture file export AVI file export Report file export DXF file import/export
You can edit these default folders on this tab.
Program Options - EnergyPlus

EnergyPlus tab of the Program options dialog
EnergyPlus
You can select the version of EnergyPlus to use in your simulations. This can be useful to target a specific DOE version you may wish to use or when a new version becomes available which might provide new functionality or address previous problems. You should generally select the recommended DLL option as it is more tightly integrated within DesignBuilder and provides progress feedback. DesignBuilder comes with 2 internal versions of EnergyPlus: DLL - the default option, runs the internal version of EnergyPlus supplied with the program asynchronously giving visual feedback of progress and allowing interaction with the computer during the simulation. Executable - an executable version of the program running in a command window.
- 776 -
...or you can select an executable version of EnergyPlus supplied by DOE. If you are exporting IDF data for use outside DesignBuilder you should select the appropriate DOE version to avoid incompatibilities. Note: the EnergyPlus version selected here is used for simulations within DesignBuilder but also as the target version when exporting IDF data for use outside DesignBuilder.
Mode
If you select an executable version (internal or DOE) there are four options available to control the way EnergyPlus is executed when simulating within DesignBuilder: 1-Executable (minimised) - runs the executable invisibly - you will just see a minimised window on the Task bar but not the EnergyPlus command window. 2-Executable (visible) - runs the executable showing EnergyPlus screen output in a command window. 3-Executable (debug) - runs the executable showing EnergyPlus screen output in a command window and pauses after simulation - intended for advanced EnergyPlus users who may want to see the stack dump following a crash. 4-Executable (EP-Launch) - runs the DOE-supplied EP-Launch program, waiting until this is closed before loading results. This option is only possible if you have selected a DOE-supplied version of the EnergyPlus executable. This option can be useful for making quick minor changes to the IDF data prior to simulation. Any changes made to the IDF data from within EP-Launch will be included in the simulation but will not be retained for future simulations. Info on the EP-Launch option. The screenshot below shows EP-Launch being used to control EnergyPlus simulations from DesignBuilder.
- 777 -
Note 1: If you use this method you must make sure to set the correct weather file manually. Note 2: Any changes you make to the IDF data, either in the IDF Editor or using a text editor, will be saved in a file called ip.inp in the EnergyPlus folder. This file will be overwritten the next time a simulation is requested so if you wish to save the any changes you make to IDF data you should use the File > Export option and edit the data and make simulations outside DesignBuilder. Note 3: If you want to run EnergyPlus without DesignBuilder then use the File > Export > Export EnergyPlus IDf file > Simulation option to generate the idf file and load this using EP-Launch outside DesignBuilder.
- 778 -
EnergyPlus export folder

When using a DOE EnergyPlus executable version you must also select the folder where the selected version is installed. You can scan the disk for DOE installations by clicking on the link in the Info help panel.. When you select any option other than the default DLL option, the necessary EnergyPlus files are downloaded seamlessly prior to the first simulation following the change. Note: If you wish to install a different DLL version of EnergyPlus to that which is recommended, you must have administrative rights on the computer. DesignBuilder are licensed distributors of EnergyPlus. All versions of EnergyPlus supplied by DesignBuilder have been compiled by the DOE.
ESO Output
You can generate ESO output files containing Heating design, Cooling design and Simulation results. The files can be loaded later using the File > Load results file menu option, provided the model hasn't changed too much. Rules: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. The DesignBuilder model must still have same zones and surfaces it had at the time the simulation data was generated If you have modified these files and carried out further simulations in EnergyPlus you should find that the results will read in OK provided you haven't changed zone or surface names in the IDF data. You cannot read in ESO files generated from IDF data which was entered by hand (or by other software) because the zone and surface references will be different. Results must be loaded to the correct screen - you can't for example read Heating design results into the Simulation screen. Simulation only: the results to be read in must have been generated using the same simulation period and number of timesteps currently set in the Simulation options.
If you choose to Save ESO simulation output then you can also select options to Prompt for filename and Auto load ESO described below.
Prompt for filename

Tell DesignBuilder whether you wish to be prompted for a filename after each simulation. If you choose not to be prompted then DesignBuilder will automatically generate output filenames based on the name of the dsb file, the calculation type, the calculation description and the date. It places the file in the EnergyPlus folder. If you choose to be prompted the file can be stored anywhere on your computer system.
Auto load ESO

Check this option to automatically load the ESO results file after simulations. If you have been warned that there will be a lot of data and the program may crash on reading results you may wish to switch this option off and reload the results later. It is often possible to read in very large ESO files after DesignBuilder has restarted following a simulation and this can be a useful for avoiding a crash due to too much data. You may also wish to switch the option off to avoid waiting for the results to read in when carrying out parametric simulations. This option only refers to Simulation results no Heating/Cooling Design results.
- 779 -
IDF OPTIONS Display extra warnings

Requesting Display extra warnings causes the statement: Diagnostics,DisplayExtraWarnings; to be included in the IDF data. This option is for experienced EnergyPlus users who understand the significance of the extra warning messages generated.
IDF Formatting
The IDF data can be formatted using the options: 1-Full - indentation and comments are included in the IDF data 2-Basic - just indentation and comments required to reference the IDF objects with data in the DesignBuilder model. 3-Compressed - the IDF data is fully compressed. Choose this option if your model is very large and you wish to reduce the amount of IDF text being processed. When the IDF data uses more than about 10MB of disk space DesignBuilder is unable to process the quantity of text involved and if this happens when the 1Full or 2-Basic options are set it will attempt to regenerate the IDF data using the 3-Compressed option to reduce the memory requirement. If IDF data is being generated twice before your simulations you can speed the process by selecting this option from the start ensuring that IDF data is only generated once.
Options will be made available in future versions to ease reading of IDF data generated by DesignBuilder.
Program Options - Limits

Limits tab of the Program options dialog You can enter the maximum number of arc and circle segments if you have a special requirement.
Program Options - International

International tab of the Program options dialog
Language
DesignBuilder currently supports 4 languages: English (native language) Italian (available from Evolvente only) French Spanish German
When you change the language you must restart DesignBuilder to see the full effect.
Units
DesignBuilder can be used either with SI units (metric) or IP units. Because the program uses SI units internally, and because the databases which come with the program have been built up assuming SI units, US users may find some limitations with the data supplied and with some aspects of the user interface. These will be addressed in due course.
- 780 -
Program Options - International
Region filter
The region filter allows you to see only the data relevant to your particular region. Note that if you have a file loaded then DesignBuilder will use the region associated with the location of the site. The region in this dialogue is only used when no file is loaded. Data tables which can be filtered in this way are: Constructions Glazing Materials Metabolic rates Schedules Holidays Activity templates Construction templates Glazing templates Lighting templates HVAC templates DHW templates Sectors
Show other region data

Use this option to display/hide component and template data from other regions.
Show 'General' data

Use this option to display/hide component and template data from the 'General' region. Options are: 1-Never - Never show General data 2-Always - always show General data 3-When no region specific data - only show General data when the is no region specific data available.
Show program 'Early' data

Use this option to display/hide special 'Early' and other 'broad-brush' typical system component and template data. Options are: 1-Never - Never show 'Early' data 2-Always - always show 'Early' data 3-When no region specific data - only show 'Early' data when the is no region specific data available. Note when categories of data are hidden this does not mean they are deleted from the database - the data is still there but it does not appear on lists.
- 781 -
Library Management
Library Management
DesignBuilder is supplied with libraries of Templates and Components and these can be managed from the opening screen (i.e. when no dsb file is loaded).
Click on Component Libraries or Templates tabs (above) to manage library data. Tip: you can load the latest library components and templates into your model using the Import library data to model command from the Tools menu when a model is loaded. Any new data that has been added to the library since the model file was created will be imported to the model. Also if there have been any changes to library component and template data, this new data will overwrite the original data.
Keeping Templates and Component Libraries

You may build up a large database of your own templates and components and to avoid losing this data between version upgrades, DesignBuilder backs up your library data in a series of .dat files which you can access from the File > Folders > Library data menu command. These files are retained when the software is uninstalled. When you install a new version of DesignBuilder and run it for the first time, any data you entered in the old libraries is merged with the new libraries. This ensures that you keep any data you created, while receiving the latest DesignBuilder system template and component data. Note: DesignBuilder keeps separate program options and template and component libraries for each user on the computer system.
Opening Screen - Component Libraries

From the Component Library screen you can add, clone (copy), delete, view, edit, import, export, backup, restore components as shown below. You can also save the libraries by clicking on the Save toolbar icon (libraries are also saved when the program exits). Library Components are automatically loaded into the model at the time the file is created and from then on, they are associated specifically with this model and so are known as 'Model Components'. Any change made to the Library Components does not affect existing building models because they reference their own set of Model Components.
- 783 -
Add New Component

To add a component: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click on the + to the left of the component type (Glazing in the above screen shot). Click on the category (folder icon) or on a component within a category. Click on the green + on the toolbar to create a new component of the selected category. Fill in the details on the dialog and press OK.
The component has been added.
Clone (Copy) Component

Cloning a component creates an exact copy of the selected component gives the copy name 'Copy of ...' followed by the name of the original component. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click on the + to the left of the component type (Glazing in the above screen shot). Click on the component you wish to copy. Click on the clone icon on the toolbar to create a new component identical to the selected one. This creates the copy and selects it, To edit the new component click on the Edit toolbar button Fill in the details on the dialog and press OK.
- 784 -
Template Library Management
View Component
You can view the details of a component in the Info | Data panel on the right of the screen as shown in the diagram above. Note that icons in the View panel indicate that you can click on the component to see its' details. You can also use the Previous and Next Navigation buttons above the Info panel to navigate through previously viewed components and templates.
Template Library Management

Use the opening screen to work with template libraries. The whole screen is dedicated to the job and you get access to the Info Data panel which allows you to review the data for the currently selected template (screen shot below). You can add, clone (copy), delete, view, edit, import, export, backup, restore library templates as shown below. You can also save the libraries by clicking on the Save toolbar icon (libraries are also saved when the program exits)
Add New Template

To add a template:
- 785 -
1. 2. 3. 4.
Click on the + to the left of the template type (Activity templates in the above screen shot). Click on the category (folder icon) or on a template within a category. Click on the green + on the toolbar to create a new template of the selected category. Fill in the details on the dialog and press OK.
The template has been added.
Clone (Copy) Template

Cloning a template creates an exact copy of the selected template gives the copy name 'Copy of ...' followed by the name of the original template. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click on the + to the left of the template type (Activity templates in the above screen shot). Click on the template you wish to copy. Click on the clone icon on the toolbar to create a new template identical to the selected one. This creates the copy and selects it, To edit the new template click on the Edit toolbar button Fill in the details on the dialog and press OK.
View Template
You can view the details of a template in the Info | Data panel on the right of the screen as shown in the diagram above. Note that icons in the View panel indicate that you can click on the template to see its' details. You can also use the Previous and Next Navigation buttons above the Info panel to navigate through previously viewed components and templates. Note: You can work with templates with a file open from the Templates tab on the Navigator panel but in this case you're working with Model Templates, i.e. templates specifically associated with a particular model not the library.
Import Components/Templates
Import component/template .DDF files previously exported using the File > Import > Library data menu command: Import the data to the model by selecting the Import menu command with a file open. Import to libraries by working from the Opening screen.
This command imports all components/templates in the DDF file.
Export Components/Templates
You can export your user DesignBuilder Component/Template libraries by selecting the File > Export > Library data menu command to create a .DDF file. This file can be shared with other users, imported on other computers in your office or simply used as a backup.
- 786 -
Export Components/Templates
When exporting a complex set of data, DesignBuilder will check that where user data references other user components, these referenced components are also selected. For example, if you select a construction for export which uses your own materials, you must make sure that all materials used in this construction are also selected. If any required user components are not selected DesignBuilder displays a dialog showing the missing components. See below.
- 787 -
Press the OK button to continue with the export automatically including the missing data. Note: if there is any data that is referenced but does not exist it is flagged with a red '!' icon (above). In this case you should press the Cancel button and make the necessary edits to ensure that all referenced data exists. DesignBuilder will not prevent you from continuing so it is possible to create DDF files with missing data. When you use the library data Export command with a model data file open, the data exported will be user Model components/templates, not Library components/templates. From the Opening screen you can also export entire data tables as csv-spreadsheet files suitable for viewing in a spreadsheet. This data cannot be read back into DesignBuilder.
Backup Component/Template Libraries
Back up your Component and Template libraries by clicking on the Backup toolbar icon. Backups created in this way are stored in the 'Backup\Manual' folder beneath the rest of the library data. As well as backing up the compiled .dbt files, DesignBuilder also exports the files in .dat format and packages the whole backup into a zip file. If you have problems with your libraries you may find it helpful to send this zip file to DesignBuilder Support for analysis.
- 788 -
Restore Component/Template Libraries
You can use this data as a backup of your library data and can restore it at a later date using the Restore libraries command.
Restore Component/Template Libraries
Click on the Restore icon to open the Restore Data dialog which allows you to Restore previously backed up Component/Template libraries. Select the source of the restore - you can either restore the libraries to their state when you first installed DesignBuilder or you can restore library data from a previous backup (if one exists). In the screenshot below, no backup had been made so the Previous backup option is not available.
If you choose to restore libraries supplied with installation you can use the Restore custom data (clear to delete all custom data) option to either: 1. 2. Restore the custom data which existed on the computer at the time the software was installed, or, Clear all custom data to keep only the data supplied by DesignBuilder.
Note to restore the libraries supplied with the installation and clear any custom data select Restore libraries supplied with installation and uncheck the Restore custom data (clear to delete all custom data) option.
- 789 -
Menu
Menu
The DesignBuilder menu is located at the top of the screen and provides a full reference of all the currently available commands.
The following sub-menus are available: File - access file operations Edit - options for editing the model Go - options for navigating and obtaining data View - options for adjusting the view of the model Tools - miscellaneous tools Help - documentation and other support resources on use of the program.
File Menu
The File menu can be accessed from the horizontal top bar menu at the top of the screen. The following options are available when a file is open:
General
New project (Ctrl+N) - create a new DesignBuilder dsb file. Open project (Ctrl+O) - Open an existing DesignBuilder dsb file. Close (Ctrl+F4) - close the currently open DesignBuilder dsb file and returned to the opening screen. Print - Print current view Load results file - load a previously generated ESO file.
Save
Save (Ctrl+S) - Save currently open DesignBuilder dsb file. If no file is currently loaded then this command saves the libraries. Save without output results - save the current DesignBuilder dsb file without output results reducing the file size. Use this option if you plan to send the dsb file by e-mail or to the support forums. Save as (F12) - save the DesignBuilder dsb file using a different name/location. Save as template - save the DesignBuilder dsb file as a template so it can be used as a starting point for subsequent new projects.
Import
Import 2-D DXF floorplan - import a 2-D DXF floorplan into the model for tracing over. Import detailed survey data - import a survey data file into the model (advanced option - contact DesignBuilder support for more information on this) Import building from external file - import a building into the current model from an external file. The option assumes that there is only one building in the external file and requires that there is at least one building in the destination file. Import assembly library - imports an assembly library from an external asl file previously created using the Export assembly library command. Import library data - import library data from an existing DDF file.
- 791 -
Export
Export EnergyPlus Heating design IDF file - export an IDF file using options for heating design calculations. Export EnergyPlus Cooling design IDF file - export an IDF file using options for cooling design calculations. Export EnergyPlus Simulation design IDF file - export an IDF file using options for simulation using hourly weather data. Export model image - export the currently displayed image of the model. Export 3-D DXF model - export the model in 3-D DXF format. Export assembly library - exports the current assembly library to an asl file for importing into another model. Export CSV report file - export a summary of the model in spreadsheet format. The report includes an inventory of all the materials, constructions and glazing systems used in the model as well as a summary of each zone with walls, floors, roofs etc, glazing, airflow paths, heating and cooling setpoint temperatures. Export library data - export library data in DDF format.
Folder
EnergyPlus folder - opens a Windows Explorer window in the folder used by DesignBuilder for storing temporary EnergyPlus files. Weather data folder - opens a Windows Explorer window in the folder where the hourly weather files are stored. Library data folder - opens a Windows Explorer window in the folder where library data files are stored. Template projects folder - opens a Windows Explorer window in the folder where dsb file templates are stored. File templates are available for selection on the second tab of the Add new project dialog.
Edit Menu
The Edit menu can be accessed from the horizontal top bar menu at the top of the screen.
General
Undo (Ctrl+Z) - undo last operation Redo (Ctrl+R) - redo last operation End stream (Enter) - end the partition stream creating a floating partition Cancel current operation (Escape) - cancel the current operation returning to select mode Undo last point (Escape) - undo the last point drawn when creating a block or when drawing partitions Clear to default - clear model data to defaults Load data from template (Ctrl+L) - loads data from template Reload non-default templates - loads data from template throughout model where template is non-default Transfer blocks - transfers blocks from one building to another Convert selected outlines to blocks - convert any selected outlines to component or building blocks Drag block face -start the drag face operation on the currently selected block Divide block - divide the currently selected block using the cutting tool Measure (Ctrl+M) - measure length, angles or areas in the model
Draw
Draw block add a new block (building level only) Draw internal perimeter- draw a void/courtyard (block level only) Draw partition - draw partition streams (block level only) Draw window - draw windows (surface level only) Draw sub-surface - draw sub-surface (surface level only) Draw door - draw doors (surface level only)
- 792 -
Go Menu
Draw hole - draw holes (surface level only) Draw vent - draw vents (surface level only) Draw construction line - draw one or more construction lines
Remove
Remove DXF data - remove all current DXF data Remove all construction lines - remove all construction lines Remove all outlines - remove all outline blocks
General
Select - returned to select mode Select all - select all objects in current view
Equipment (zone level, Equipment tab when Detailed gains model option selected)
Add - at an item of equipment Edit - edit currently selected equipment Delete - delete currently selected equipment
Opening screen component and template edit

Add - add a new component/template as per currently selected item Edit - edit currently selected component/template Delete - delete currently selected component/template
Edit currently selected model objects

Move (Ctrl+V) - move selected objects Clone (Ctrl+C) - clone (copy) selected objects Rotate (Ctrl+T) - rotate selected objects Stretch (Ctrl+J) - stretch selected objects Delete (DEL) - delete selected objects
General
Building model options (F11) - open Model options dialog Add building (Ctrl+A) - add a new building (site level only)
Go Menu
The Go menu can be accessed from the horizontal top bar menu at the top of the screen.
View Menu
The View menu can be accessed from the horizontal top bar menu at the top of the screen.
Tools Menu
The Tools menu can be accessed from the horizontal top bar menu at the top of the screen.
- 793 -
General
Program options - open program options dialog. Rebuild - recalculate the zone, surface and adjacency geometry from the base building elements. Merge zones - control the way zones are combined. Rezone block - refresh the zoning in the current block. Import library components to model - import current component and template libraries to the model replacing existing ones. Export data - export results/graphics results from the current screen. Compile report - generation of a report based on previously created Report topics. Hourly weather data - open the hourly weather data dialog. Show log file - show a log file containing information on your computer and all significant actions taken during the current DesignBuilder session.
Results screens
Update calculated data - refreshes the results first opening the Calculation options dialog allowing you to enter new options. Lock Y-axis min/max values - locks the extent of the Y-axes so that they keep their current maximum and minimum values allowing consistent comparison with the future results display.
Libraries (opening screen)

Backup libraries - backup component and template libraries Restore libraries - restore previous component and template library backups
Help Menu
The Help menu can be accessed from the horizontal top bar menu at the top of the screen. Index - access program help using the Index. Search - access program help using the Search facility. Contents - access program help using the hierarchical Contents. Licence - enter serial number and licence keys Tutorials - access DesignBuilder web tutorials About - DesignBuilder version number
- 794 -
Modelling Advice
Modelling Advice
Modelling advice topics: Working with large models Natural ventilation modelling Ground modelling Adjacent Buildings Defining setpoint temperature schedules Electrochromic Glazing Trombe Walls Autosizing Heating and Cooling Equipment Daylight Saving and Local Time Mixed mode Double Facades Solar Radiation Distribution Solar Technology Solutions Warehouse with Office
Working With Large Models

It is possible to create very large, complex building models using DesignBuilder but you should consider what you're trying to achieve by your modelling exercise before diving in and including every detail of the building design. Otherwise you may find you have created a beautiful model which is impractical to simulate because it takes too long or causes the simulation engine to fail. You can should consider the following points. EnergyPlus simulations are slowed down by: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Lots of windows Lots of zones Lots of windows per zone Lots of surfaces Radiant heating systems Calculated natural ventilation using the Airflow Network Calculating solar reflections Reading hourly or sub-hourly results for extended simulation periods Not enough computer memory (RAM) Lots of output (quantity of data and number of reports) Lots of timesteps per hour
Note: You can speed up modelling, and in particular the drawing and deleting of partitions in large models, by switching off Automatic block zoning option. You can speed up simulations by using these techniques: 1. Reduce the number of windows in the model by increasing the Window spacing. Shading issues aside, modelling a small number of large Windows has the same effect as a large number of small Windows provided you get the frame area right.
- 795 -
2.
3.
4.
5. 6.
7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
12. 13.
14.
15. 16. 17.
Avoid unnecessary wiggles and indents in block perimeters and partitions - keep it as simple as possible. The larger the model the more important it is to follow this advice. Where an indent in the perimeter gives shading then you could instead model this using a single flat surface without indent and use local shading devices with sidefins to model local window shading. Use the Lump similar windows on surface option to speed up simulations with many similar windows per surface. Note that switching this option on has no effect for zones using Daylight lighting control or if the Full interior and exterior solar distribution option is selected. Wherever possible lump similar adjacent zones together. Only create zones to model areas of the building with specific environmental conditions, and HVAC systems or internal gains schedules. A common mistake made by the beginners is to model each room as a separate zone. This is often not necessary for building energy simulations because many rooms will have reasonably similar operating conditions. In this case you may want to use one of the DesignBuilder Merging features to reduce the number of zones. If there are multiple identical zones then you can use the Zone multiplier to reduce the number of zones processed. When you first create a building model you may want to carry out simulations before partitioning the blocks into zones. If your un-partitioned blocks are very large there could be an enormous number of windows in the single zone making up a block and this can slow down EnergyPlus simulations especially if carrying out daylighting analysis. In this case you should try to reduce the number of windows in the model as recommended above. Try to use the smallest number of blocks possible to keep the number of surfaces down. Exclude semi-exterior unconditioned zones from the model and replace them with an R-Value. Use Simple, (convective heating) HVAC descriptions. Use the Scheduled Natural ventilation option. If you need to use Calculated natural ventilation in your simulations then you should aim to minimise the number of cracks and openings involved in the airflow calculations. One way to do this is to switch off infiltration calculations. Normally DesignBuilder includes a single crack in each surface in the simulation to simulate infiltration. If you have other openings such as vents, windows, doors etc in a particular block/zone you can switch off infiltration. This approach can be used in roof blocks or calculations such as cooling design where infiltration is relatively insignificant. Switching off calculation of solar reflections in the Model options dialog Restricting hourly and sub-hourly results to short simulations for investigation of detailed building operation. You should not attempt to generate hourly or sub-hourly results for long periods (such as a whole year) unless your model is simple. If you are interested in analysing a single zone within a much larger model, you could consider using the single zone option to carry out simulations just on the zone, excluding consideration of the rest of the building. If you want to model a only a group of zones then you can exclude unnecessary zones by unchecking the Include zone model option. Fit as much memory (RAM) to your computer as possible (2-4 GB ideally). Paging memory to disk during simulations of large models can cause EnergyPlus to grind to a halt. Only request the output you really need. This will speed up simulation initialisation and reading of output (especially hourly and sub-hourly) at the end. If you are only looking at hourly results then you can get noticeably faster initialisation and simulations by switching off monthly and daily results. For example, simulation times for a test winter week simulation on a real model were: 1. - With hourly, daily, monthly outputs: 39 min 2. - Only hourly outputs: 14 min 3. - Only hourly outputs and checking 'Internal surface as adiabatic': 12 min If you don't need surface data (Walls, Windows etc. heat transfer) switch the Surface heat transfer incl solar output option off. Note that if you request large volumes of data this can result is a program crash when results are being loaded into DesignBuilder. It is sometimes possible to use less timesteps per hour to speed up simulations. Some models can give reliable results using 2 timesteps per hour, however when complex Compact HVAC systems are being modelled, 4, 6 or even 10 timesteps may be required. If you aren't sure, compare the hourly results you
18. 19. 20.
- 796 -
Natural Ventilation Modelling
21.
obtain when using a range of timesteps per hour values and choose the minimum value that gives results equivalent to the 6 or 10 timesteps case. If all else fails then you can model very large buildings by splitting them into smaller units and summing results outside DesignBuilder.

There are two general approaches to natural ventilation and infiltration modelling in DesignBuilder depending on the setting of the Natural ventilation model option: Scheduled in which the natural ventilation change rate is explicitly defined for each zone in terms of a maximum ACH value and a schedule and infiltration air change rate is defined by a constant ACH value. Calculated where natural ventilation and infiltration are calculated based on window openings, cracks, buoyancy and wind driven pressure differences crack dimensions etc.
You should generally choose Scheduled natural ventilation if you are able to make a reasonable estimate of the natural ventilation rates and infiltration rates in the building. Some airflow scenarios are more difficult to estimate and it may be necessary to calculate airflows.
SCHEDULED NATURAL VENTILATION AND INFILTRATION

Scheduled Natural Ventilation flow rate and schedule data is accessed on the HVAC tab. The flow is switched off if the zone air temperature falls below the Ventilation setpoint temperature set under Environmental Control on the Activity tab. Infiltration is defined by a constant ACH value under Airtightness on the Construction tab. Airflow through Exterior Windows, Vents and Doors is considered to be included in the Natural ventilation outside air ac/h value set on the HVAC tab. Airflow through Interior Windows, Vents and Doors is modelled using the concept of mixing where equal amounts of air are transferred from one zone to another and vice-versa. The flow rate is directly proportional to the opening area using Airflow rate per opening area data accessed from the Model Options dialog. There is no way in v.1 to set airflows between zones using Scheduled Natural ventilation.
- 797 -
CALCULATED NATURAL VENTILATION AND INFILTRATION
By default Calculated natural ventilation is controlled by timer (window and vent data on the Operation header on the Openings tab) and by Ventilation setpoint temperature on the Activity tab. The Crack data under Airtightness on the Constructions tab is used in the EnergyPlus Airflow Network to calculate infiltration. Note 1: Using the Calculated option increases the complexity of the model and slows simulations down. You should aim to simplify the model as appropriate to the requirements of the calculations. For example if you are carrying out a summertime simulation of a naturally ventilated building you could consider switching off infiltration modelling if infiltration heat flow is only a very small part of summertime heat balance. Note 2: In Version 1 the calculated airflows through external windows, vents, doors, holes and cracks are all lumped into 'External air' data on the Simulation results screen.
Calculations
The ventilation rate (q) through each opening and crack in the model is calculated based on the pressure difference using wind and stack pressure effects: q = C.(DP) n
Where: q is the volumetric flow through the opening. DP is the pressure difference across the opening/crack. n is the flow exponent varying between 0.5 for fully turbulent flow and 1.0 for fully laminar flow.
- 798 -
C is the flow coefficient, related to the size of the opening/crack.
Wind-Driven Ventilation
When wind impinges on the surface of a rectangular building, a positive pressure is induced on the upwind face. The flow separates at the corners resulting in negative pressure regions on the side of the building and a negative pressure distribution on the leeward facade. The pressure distribution on the roof varies according to pitch - the pressure on the upwind face being negative for roof pitches of 30 and positive for steeper pitches. The pressure on any point on the surface of a building facade can be represented by: Pw = 0.5 .rho. Cp . vz2 Where: Pw is the surface pressure due to wind, rho is the density of air, Cp is the wind pressure coefficient at a given position on the surface and vz is the mean wind velocity at height z. The wind pressure coefficient, Cp, is a function of wind direction, position on the building surface and side exposure. Some typical approximate values for buildings subjected to varying degrees of shelter and wind directions is given in an AIVC publication A guide to energy-efficient ventilation. This data is also quoted in the CIBSE A Guide. DesignBuilder uses this data to populate the Pressure Coefficients templates and provide default pressure coefficients suitable for use in basic design calculations for buildings having no more than three stories. For more detailed analysis, or for buildings having 4 or more stories you should obtain specific pressure coefficient data from CFD analysis of from wind tunnel measurements and enter it for each surface under the Pressure Coefficients header on the Openings tab.
Excluding Wind-Effects
When carrying out conservative design calculations you may prefer to exclude (or reduce) the effects of wind from Calculated natural ventilation. To exclude wind-driven airflow from the analysis altogether set the Wind factor on the Advanced tab of the Model Options dialog to 0. For full treatment of wind effects set it to 1 and for intermediate treatment of wind set to a number between 0 and 1.
Limitations
DesignBuilder uses the EnergyPlus Airflow Network method to calculate air flow rates. You should be aware Airflow Network simulations can take considerably longer than the equivalent simulations with Scheduled natural ventilation.
Modulation
You can modulate the opening sizes to reduce the large temperature swings that can occur if the windows/doors are too far open when they are venting, especially when there is a large inside-outside temperature difference. Use the Modulation settings on the Advanced tab of the Model Options dialog to control this. By default modulation is on and opening sizes are reduced to 5% of full values when the outside is 15C or more colder than inside. This models the fact that occupants are unlikely to throw the windows wide open when it is very cold outside (for manual control systems).
Modelling Infiltration
Normally when Calculated natural ventilation is set DesignBuilder includes a single crack in each surface in the simulation to account for infiltration. The size and properties of this crack depend on the setting of the Airtightness slider.
- 799 -
Tip: The effects of infiltration in some areas of the building and in some calculation types can be minor and so in order to reduce simulation time for calculated natural ventilation models infiltration can be switched off. This can be done by unchecking the Model infiltration checkbox for the areas of the building where infiltration in not to be modelled. For example you may wish to switch off infiltration in roof blocks (and include the roofspace ventilation using a smaller number of vents or holes instead) or you could switch it off in the whole building for Summertime simulations where the effects of infiltration would be minimal relative to the much larger flow rates due to open windows, vents, holes and doors.
Airtightness slider
The setting of the Airtightness slider indicates the Crack template applied when setting crack properties: Very poor Poor Medium Good Excellent
See also Mixed mode.
Technical details
You can find more technical details of the Airflow network used in EnergyPlus including background, algorithms, limitations and validation results in a paper by Lixing Gu at: http://www.ibpsa.org/proceedings/BS2007/p398_final.pdf
Mixed Mode Cooling

In mixed mode buildings natural ventilation is used as the primary means of providing cooling and, when this is inadequate to provide comfort conditions, active cooling is introduced. Definition of a mixed mode building:
"It is a building in which occupants can open windows, and which is designed with effective passive strategies for limiting the effects of the external climate. The passively designed building is utilised to provide acceptable conditions for the majority of the year, and is supplemented by a mechanical system, either on an as and when required basis, or on a seasonal basis."
Source: Cooper, V.A., Occupancy Comfort and Energy Consumption in Naturally Ventilated and Mixed Mode Office Buildings, PhD thesis, UMIST, 1998
Mixed-mode refers to a hybrid approach to space conditioning that uses a combination of natural ventilation from operable windows (either manually or automatically controlled), and mechanical systems that include air distribution equipment and refrigeration equipment for cooling. A well-designed mixed-mode building begins with intelligent facade design to minimize cooling loads. It then integrates the use of air-conditioning when and where it is necessary, with the use of natural ventilation whenever it is feasible or desirable, to maximize comfort while avoiding the significant energy use and operating costs of year-round air conditioning."
Source: Mixed mode page on Center for Built Environment website, contains background, case studies and a database of 150 mixed mode buildings.
- 800 -
Mixed Mode Cooling
Some useful background documents on mixed mode design and simulation: 1. 2. www.cbe.berkeley.edu/mixedmode www.ibpsa.org/proceedings/BS1999/BS99_D-07.pdf
DesignBuilder can model all three types of mixed mode system defined by CBE in the above reference. 1. Concurrent (Same space, same time) Concurrent mixed-mode operation is the most prevalent design strategy in practice today, in which the airconditioning system and operable windows operate in the same space and at the same time. The HVAC system may serve as supplemental or background ventilation and cooling while occupants are free to open windows based on individual preference. Typical examples include open-plan office space with standard VAV air-conditioning systems and operable windows, where perhaps perimeter VAV zones may go to minimum air when sensor indicates that a window has been opened. Change-over (Same space, different times) Change-over designs are becoming increasingly common, where the building changes-over between natural ventilation and air-conditioning on a seasonal or even daily basis. The building automation system may determine the mode of operating based on outdoor temperature, an occupancy sensor, a window (open or closed) sensor, or based on operator commands. Typical examples include individual offices with operable windows and personal air conditioning units that shut down for a given office anytime a sensor indicates that a window has been opened; or a building envelope where automatic louvers open to provide natural ventilation when the HVAC system is in economizer mode, and then close when the system is in cooling or heating mode. Zoned (Different spaces, same time) Zoned systems are also common, where different zones within the building have different conditioning strategies. Typical examples include naturally ventilated office buildings with operable windows and a ducted heating/ventilation system, or supplemental mechanical cooling provided only to conference rooms. For many mixed-mode buildings, operating conditions sometimes deviate somewhat from their original design intent (e.g., a building originally designed for seasonal changeover between air-conditioning and natural ventilation may, in practice, operate both systems concurrently).
2.
3.
Concurrent and Zoned systems can be modelled without using DesignBuilder mixed mode control. In DesignBuilder 'mixed mode' specifically refers to Change-over systems where the HVAC and the natural ventilation do not take place at the same time.
- 801 -
When modelling mixed mode systems in DesignBuilder you should use Calculated natural ventilation and Compact HVAC. The steps to setting up a change-over mixed mode model in DesignBuilder are: 1. 2. 3. Include active cooling and natural ventilation by switching on the 'Natural ventilation on' and 'Cooling on' options on the HVAC tab. Also, include mechanical ventilation if there is outside air introduced through the HVAC system. Ensure that the setpoints for natural ventilation and cooling operation are correct. The natural ventilation (window/vent opening) setpoint should ideally be 2C lower than the cooling setpoint to ensure maximum use of natural ventilation and to avoid the active cooling system being used unnecessarily and also 2C higher than the heating .temperature. Typical values might be heating setpoint temperature = 20C, natural ventilation setpoint temperature = 22C, cooling setpoint temperature = 26C. Heating should ideally be switched off in the summer to avoid unnecessary heating caused by natural ventilation overcooling the space. See the mixed mode section on the HVAC help for detailed information on the data that can be set, including conditions that require windows and vents to be closed such as rain, wind and low outside air temperature.
4.
- 802 -
Ground Modelling
Ground Modelling
HOW IT WORKS
In EnergyPlus, heat is transferred between zones and the ground through one-dimensional ground floor surface elements. The 2-D and 3-D effects in the ground heat conduction that occur in reality are not treated by default. EnergyPlus uses ground construction data to model the storage of heat in the ground and it can accurately model heat transfer processes over several days (so it can model the effect of say a warm week followed by a cool week) but it cannot directly model long-term ground thermal storage effects (periods measured in months). For more on advanced ground modelling see bottom of this topic. EnergyPlus applies a constant temperature boundary condition for each month on the lower surfaces of ground adjacent elements. There are 3 ways to create an adjacency to ground in DesignBuilder: 1. Using DesignBuilder's Auto adjacency detection where ground adjacency is set for all surfaces at or below ground level. By default, all external surfaces which are at or below ground level are considered to be adjacent to ground. Surfaces that are partly above ground (z=0) and partly below, are modelled as entirely adjacent to outside (if the Adjacency setting is 1-Auto - see below). Using Ground component blocks - any surfaces (or part of surfaces) touching a ground component block are considered to be adjacent to ground. Using the Adjacency model data on the Construction tab at block, zone and surface levels where external surfaces can be defined as being adjacent to ground by changing the Adjacency model data on the Construction tab from 1-Auto to 3-Adjacent to Ground. If a surface is below ground level but is not adjacent to ground you can select 2-Not adjacent to ground.
2. 3.
When using Separate constructions, and when the Add ground construction layers to surfaces in contact with ground option is selected, DesignBuilder automatically combines the site ground construction (0.5m of earth by default) with the main construction (typically ground floor or wall) set on the Constructions tab. With Combined constructions the earth layers must be explicitly included in the ground floor/wall constructions if you wish to define ground temperatures within the earth.
GROUND TEMPERATURES
Monthly ground temperatures are defined at the site level under Site details. Note: You should not use the ground temperatures in the EnergyPlus weather file header because these are for undisturbed sites. The temperature beneath buildings is significantly affected by the building itself - the EnergyPlus documentation recommends using ground temperatures of 2C below average internal temperatures for large commercial buildings (where perimeter heat loss is relatively less important). Note that this temperature should be applied directly below the slab and should not include ground material - so if you use this approach to ground temperature definition, you should switch off use of the ground construction at the site level. EnergyPlus cannot model very thick constructions so it is necessary to use less thick constructions (2m or smaller) combined with some assumptions about temperatures at about half a metre below the floor. Many modellers prefer to define the ground temperature just below the slab and exclude the earth layers from the model. This has the advantage of simplicity and clarity and is the approach recommended by EnergyPlus developers.
- 803 -
Note: the default ground temperatures provided in DesignBuilder assume that an earth layer is included in the constructions adjacent to ground. If an earth layer is not included then you should increase the default site ground temperatures to values closer to those typically found just below the ground slab (as described in note above).
EXAMPLE APPLICATION - BASEMENT OR CELLAR UNDER INCLINED GROUND SLOPE

This example illustrates how to create a simple 3 storey rectangular building model with: Basement which is fully below ground and Ground floor is partially buried under an inclined ground plane.
Step 1
Draw 3 blocks on the z=0 ground plane. The lowest block will be the basement (completely buried), the middle block will be the ground level block, partially buried and the top block will be the second level. So far only the bottom surface is adjacent to ground because it sits on the z=0 plane.
- 804 -
Ground Modelling
Step 2
Draw 2 ground component blocks around the basement building block to give it's surfaces ground adjacency. Note this step could be avoided by moving the whole building down so that the basement is fully below ground. To do this go to building level, select all the blocks, select the move command, click on one of the bottom corners of the middle block to create a reference point then click on a blank part of the screen to move the reference point down to z=0.
Step 3
Draw three new ground component blocks to create the sloping ground and the upper ground levels.
- 805 -
Step 4
The zone of the middle block is shown above. Notice how 3 of the surfaces have been split into external and ground adjacencies (ground adjacencies are flagged by green ground symbols). Note also that the portions of the surfaces touching the ground component block cannot have windows but DesignBuilder attempts to set up the correct % glazing for the remaining external parts of the surface.
Step 5
The ground component blocks probably do not need to shade this model as they are mainly below all surfaces that can receive solar radiation/light, but if you are modelling reflections you will probably need to include the reflection of solar radiation and light from the ground blocks during simulations. In other cases you may prefer to switch off the generation of the component blocks shading/reflection surfaces to speed simulations. Do this on the Constructions model data tab under Component Block.
Step 6
The finished model. The texture of Ground component blocks is defined by the material set under Component blocks on the Constructions tab.
- 806 -
Adjacent Buildings
3-D MODELLING USING THE ENERGYPLUS SLAB PREPROCESSOR (ADVANCED)

To accurately model long-term ground thermal storage you may wish to consider using an external 2 or 3-D conduction tool such as the Slab utility supplied with EnergyPlus. This can be used to calculate the temperatures applied to the underside of the ground floor surface elements. The EnergyPlus slab program produces temperature profiles for the outside surface at the core and at the perimeter of the slab. It also produces the average based on the perimeter and core areas used in the calculation. EnergyPlus has a single GroundTemperatures object that is used for twelve monthly average ground temperature values - see the Input Output Reference document. Because of this, there are two options for dealing with the ground temperatures: 1. Use the average temperatures produced by the slab program for the GroundTemperatures object. This will provide an average ground temperature at the outside face of any heat transfer surface whose OutsideFaceEnvironment field is 'ground'. If two or more ground temperature conditions are desired, it is necessary to utilize the ground temperature modification feature of other side coefficients (OtherSideCoef field in OutsideFaceEnvironment). Then, for example, if core and perimeter temperatures are wanted, the perimeter temperatures from the slab program should be specified in the GroundTemperatures object, and the surface associated with that condition is treated as in Option 1 above. The surface that is to be exposed to the core temperature should be given the OtherSideCoef designation, and the OtherSideCoefficients object should be used to specify the temperatures. To do this, all of the numerical fields in this object should be zero except field N5. This field should contain the ratio of the average annual core temperatures and average annual perimeter temperatures. In other words, the resulting core profile values will be N5 times the perimeter values. This same procedure can be used to generate as many profiles as needed. However, it should be noted that they will all have the same profile as the GroundTemperatures object values.
2.
Detailed ground modelling may only give a marginal difference in results and you might want to carry out a sensitivity study to check the influence of ground temperatures on simulation results before deciding on the most appropriate level of detail. DesignBuilder version 2 does not account for 2-D and 3-D thermal bridging effects but future versions may.
Adjacent Buildings
Adjacent buildings (i.e. other buildings that are touching the modelled building) usually modify the boundary conditions relative to external and also provide shade. There is no explicit way in DesignBuilder 1.2 to model temperatures and heat flows in 2 buildings simultaneously and account for energy transfer between them. Future versions may allow this, but in the meantime there are two options: 1. Model the adjacent building using component blocks (for shading/reflection) and adiabatic surfaces between the buildings. This is the usual way to treat an adjacent building not requiring full simulation and is accurate if the temperature of the adjacent and actual buildings are similar or if there is insulation between the two buildings. If the adjacent building does require simulation then model it as part of the actual building and separate simulation results at the end.
2.
You can set adiabatic adjacent condition data under Constructions on the Constructions tab at surface level.
Merging buildings
Where two separate buildings have been created inadvertently, the blocks of one building can be transferred to the other building using the Transfer blocks command from the Edit menu.
- 807 -
Airflow
If there is airflow between the two buildings and the adjacent building is at the same temperature as the modelled building then you could probably ignore its effect. To model the effect of the airflow through an opening between buildings in detail you should model both buildings as one DB building using the Calculated natural ventilation model option. If you do it this way and the adjacent building uses energy you must separate results for the two buildings at the end. You can use different boiler and chiller fuels to differentiate fuel consumption between the two buildings. If you use the Simple natural ventilation instead of Calculated, DesignBuilder uses an assumed mixing of air between the two buildings based on 'flow per opening area' as set on the Model options dialog on the Advanced tab under Natural Ventilation.
Electrochromic Glazing
Electrochromic windows are part of a new generation of technologies called switchable glazing-or 'smart' windows. Switchable glazing can change the light transmittance, transparency, or shading of windows in response to an environmental signal such as sunlight, temperature or an electrical control. Electrochromic windows change from transparent to tinted by applying an electrical current. Potential uses for electrochromic technology include daylighting control, glare control, solar heat control, and fading protection in windows and skylights. By automatically controlling the amount of light and solar energy that can pass through the window, electrochromic windows can help save energy in buildings. A variety of electrochromic technologies and media have been developed. One type is darkened by applying a small electrical voltage to the windows and lightened by reversing the voltage. Light transmittance during operation varies from five to 80 percent. Once the change in tint has been initiated, the electrochromic glazing has 'memory' and does not need constant voltage to maintain the tinting. Further, the film can be tuned to block certain wavelengths, such as infrared (heat) energy. Another switchable technology, the liquid crystal suspended particle device (SPD), contains molecular particles suspended in a solution between plates of glass. In their natural state, the particles move randomly and collide, blocking the direct passage of light. When energized, the particles align rapidly and the glazing becomes transparent. This type of switchable glazing can block up to about 90 percent of light. You can easily model electrochromic glazing in DesignBuilder using the Window shading data and defining the properties of the outer Window Pane to be used when the shading is active. The procedure is: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Specify the glazing type to be used when the electrochromic glazing system is clear (bleached) in the standard way on the Openings tab under External glazing. Under External Glazing and Shading headers, check the 'Window shading' option. Select the Type as 'Electrochromic absorptive 6mm' (for example). Select the Position as 4-Switchable. The Shading Type defines the properties of the pane which is to be used in place of the standard outer glazing pane according to the control data in the Control type. Set the Control type together with any supplementary setpoint data.
- 808 -
Trombe Walls
A model using the data in the above screenshot would enter its' darkened state whenever the solar radiation incident on the outside of the window is greater than 200 W/m2..
Trombe Walls
Trombe walls are passive solar devices designed for thermal storage and delivery. A Trombe wall consists of a thick wall (150mm to 300mm) [8" to 16"] faced with a selective surface solar absorber, air gap, and high transmissivity glass pane. Trombe walls are usually South facing (in the Northern Hemisphere) for maximum sun exposure. An overhang above the wall is used to decrease exposure in the summer when the sun is high in the sky and heating is not required, yet still allows for full exposure in the winter when the sun is low in the sky and heating is desirable. In DesignBuilder, there is no Trombe wall object per se; rather, it is composed of other standard building components. This approach provides flexibility in specifying the various wall parameters and allows the freedom to explore unusual configurations. To simulate the Trombe wall, a narrow zone is coupled to the desired surface via an interzone partition. The depth of the zone corresponds to the size of the air space usually 18mm to 150mm (" to 6"). In most cases the Trombe zone will be a sealed zone with no ventilation. The exterior wall of the Trombe zone contains a single or doublepane window. Optimally, the window covers nearly all of the wall area and has a very high transmissivity to allow the maximum amount of solar flux into the Trombe zone. Frames and dividers can be defined as usual for the window. The interior wall is usually constructed of very thick masonry materials with a solar absorber surface as the innermost layer of the wall. The absorber is a selective surface material with very high absorptivity and very low emissivity, e.g. copper with a special black surface treatment. It is important to make sure the Solar Distribution is set to 3-Full Interior and Exterior so that the majority of the solar flux is directed on the absorber surface and not just on the very small area of the Trombe zone floor. The Zone type on the Activity tab should be set to 3-Cavity at zone level in the Trombe wall cavity zone and this causes the following further changes to be made to the model: The zone is set as unoccupied by loading <None> Activity, HVAC and Lighting template data. Suspended floors and ceilings are switched off when using Separate constructions. The 5-Cavity Internal convection algorithm is set for Cooling design, Heating design and simulation calculations to correctly model the air space. The 3-Full interior and exterior Solar distribution algorithm is set for Cooling design and simulation calculations because it allows solar radiation to be accurately distributed onto zone internal surfaces. The default option 2-Full exterior assumes all solar radiation falls on floor which is not good for modelling solar absorption by a Trombe wall.
Finally, an overhang should be attached to the Trombe zone to control the amount of seasonal sun exposure. There is considerable freedom to experiment with different materials, sizes, and configurations.
Passive Trombe wall

Passive Trombe walls perform without the assistance of any additional mechanical equipment. Most Trombe walls are passive Trombe walls. They can be either sealed or naturally ventilated. For a sealed or unvented Trombe wall, the Zone Inside Convection Algorithm should be set to 5-Cavity. This algorithm correctly calculates the convection coefficients for a narrow sealed vertical cavity based on the ISO 15099 standard. The EnergyPlus modeling approach for the sealed passive Trombe wall has been validated with experimental data (Ellis 2003). For a naturally ventilated Trombe wall, there is no built-in algorithm for calculating the correct convection coefficients on the inside of the cavity walls. One option is to use the 1-Detailed Inside convection algorithm. This algorithm takes into account some natural convection effects but is intended for a normal sized room. You can define holes and vents through the Trombe wall by drawing them on at surface level. Vent openings can be scheduled and controlled by internal temperature.
- 809 -
Mechanically ventilated Trombe wall

You can also model mechanically ventilated Trombe walls by using Compact HVAC and specifying the Trombe wall cavity zone as a plenum zone.
TROMBE WALL EXAMPLE

A Trombe wall example model is provided with DesignBuilder. This is a simple 2 zone building, one occupied zone, the other zone representing the cavity. The screen shot below of the example building shows the 2 zones and the high mass partition between them.
The screenshot below shows the configuration of vents in the partition between the 2 zones allowing warm air to move into the occupied space. The calculated natural ventilation model option has been used to allow detailed calculation of air movement between the 2 zones.
- 810 -
Trombe Walls
The hourly results below are for the occupied zone and illustrate the delayed heating effect of the Trombe wall mass on the occupied zone during the evening and also the lesser but more instantaneous heating effect of the warm air entering through the vents during the daytime.
- 811 -
Double Skin Facades

Background
A ventilated Double Skin Facade (DSF) can be defined as a traditional single facade doubled inside or outside by a second, essentially glazed facade. Each of these two facades is commonly called a skin . A ventilated cavity having a width which can range from several centimetres at the narrowest to several metres for the widest accessible cavities - is located between these two skins. In some DSF designs the ventilation of the cavity is controllable by fans and/or openings, and other concepts where this ventilation is not controllable . The indoor and outdoor skins are not necessarily airtight (see, for example, the "louvre" type facades). Automated equipment, such as shading devices, motorised openings or fans, are most often integrated into the facade. The main difference between a ventilated double facade and an airtight multiple glazing, whether or not integrating a shading device in the cavity separating the panes, lies in the intentional and possibly controlled ventilation of the cavity of the double facade. The standard prEN 13119, specifies the terminology associated with curtain walls and of a double-skin facade. These are defined as: External building facade produced with framing made mainly of metal, timber or PVC-U, usually consisting of vertical and horizontal structural members, connected together and anchored to the supporting structure of the building, which provides, by itself or in
Curtain walling
- 812 -
Double Skin Facades
DoubleSkin Facade
conjunction with the building construction, all the normal functions of an external wall, but does not contribute to the load bearing characteristics of the building structure. A curtain wall construction comprising an outer skin of glass and an inner wall constructed as a curtain wall that together with the outer skin provide the full function of a wall.
This definition includes only references to the constructive and structural aspects of the facade. No reference is made to the ventilation of the cavity. Thus formally, the term "double-skin facade" does not designate a ventilated double facade. It is for this reason that the term Ventilated Double-Skin Facade has been proposed as the generic term to designate these facades. DSFs can be categorised according to the type of ventilation. Type of ventilation Natural Mechanical Hybrid Name of the facade concept Passive facade Active facade Interactive facade
This table contains the commonly used names referring (only) to the type of ventilation and thus giving no indication about the partitioning of the facade or the ventilation modes. In the literature, the double facades adopting the air supply ventilation mode are called airflow window or also ventilated window. The facades adopting the air exhaust ventilation mode are also called extract air or exhaust airflow.
DOUBLE SKIN FACADE EXAMPLE

A simple example DSF model is provided with DesignBuilder (Double Skin Facade Example.dsb). A screenshot of the model at block level is shown below.
- 813 -
The model was created using a single block with a partition to divide it into 2 zones, one zone to represent the occupied space and the other for the ventilated cavity. The glazing for the partition was set up at surface level.
Modelling Considerations
There are some important considerations when using DesignBuilder to model double facades. Firstly, the Zone type on the Activity tab should be set to 3-Cavity at zone level in the cavity zone and this causes the following further changes to be made to the model: The zone is set as unoccupied by loading <None> Activity, HVAC and Lighting template data. The 5-CavityInternal convection algorithm is set for Cooling design, Heating design and simulation calculations to correctly model the air space. The 3-Full interior and exterior Solar distribution algorithm is set for Cooling design and Simulation because it allows solar radiation to be accurately transmitted through the interior glazing in the partition.
In the example model a simple ventilation control system has been defined in the cavity zone to provide 10 ac/h of outside air into the cavity when the air temperature in the cavity is greater than 24C. This helps to ensure that the cavity does not overheat, reducing cooling loads in the occupied zone. The schedule and setpoint could be adjusted to fine-tune the ventilation. The model assumes no transfer of cavity air into the occupied space. This could be modified using an approach similar to that in the Trombe wall example model where vents in the partition between occupied and cavity zones are used to transfer air between the 2 zones. Finally, an overhang has been added to control the amount of summer sun exposure. 1. Because the model uses a zone to model the cavity in the double facade, the inner glazing is 'interior' and so requires the Full interior and exterior solar distribution option to allow solar radiation to pass through exterior and then through interior windows. You should read the information about the restrictions associated with this option before using it. Take care when comparing the exterior solar radiation transmitted into the double facade zone with the interior solar radiation transmitted into the occupied zone. These do not include the re-reflection of solar back out of the external windows. Read the definitions for the output data.
2.
Source of background information on DSF: http://www.bbri.be/activefacades/new/content/1_home/en.html
Autosizing Heating And Cooling Equipment

The Heating Capacity and Cooling Capacity Model Data is found on the HVAC tab at zone level. If the Plant sizing building model option is set to 4-Autosize when not set these heating and cooling capacities can be automatically calculated by the software. Note: if you change heating or cooling capacities by hand you should be aware that the data will be overwritten if Model Options change. To keep the heating and cooling capacities fixed, change the Plant sizing model option to 2-Manual. You may choose to use this option if you are already satisfied with the autosized capacities and wish to keep them as they are regardless of future changes to the model.
- 814 -
Daylight Saving And Local Time
COMPACT HVAC AUTOSIZING

Winter and summer design day simulations are automatically carried out as required for autosizing heating and cooling equipment prior to a Compact HVAC simulation. There are some considerations you should be aware of regarding autosizing. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Internal gains should normally be excluded from Winter design day calculations. You therefore shouldn't use the same schedule for equipment, occupancy and HVAC operation because equipment and occupancy should be off for heating autosizing and HVAC should be on. Typical workday gives the easiest route to defining autosizing operation - the appropriate Winter Design Day schedule data settings are used. Summer design day schedules are normally the same as the general ones so are easier to deal with. If you are using Compact schedules then you should ensure that a specific line of WinterDesignDay data is included for all schedule periods. If you are using 7/12 Schedules then there are 2 options: End-use defaults and Profiles. You can include intermittent operation by using a time-varying Heating demand or HVAC schedule. This would normally provide heating equipment sizes with higher capacity than a steady-state calculation where the heating is on all day.
Daylight Saving And Local Time

DesignBuilder allows you to model the effect of daylight saving time where the clocks are moved forward one hour in the summer months in most non-equatorial countries. The timing of this is handled automatically using DesignBuilders' time zones database when you load data from one of the Location templates supplied with the program. You can set the Time zone at the Site level on the Location tab:
There are however some factors you should be aware of: Simulation results are displayed in 'local mean time'. This means that during the summer, occupancy will appear to start 1 hour earlier in the day than it does in the winter. To help you pinpoint this, DesignBuilder prints the times when daylight saving starts and ends on the graph. Visualisations use local mean time when setting the position of the sun for site shading analysis. Again you should add 1 hour to the time to see shading for local time.
Solar Radiation Distribution

This topic summarises the methods used in calculation of solar radiation in EnergyPlus.
Sky Radiance Model

In EnergyPlus the calculation of diffuse solar radiation from the sky incident on an exterior surface takes into account the anisotropic (non-uniform) radiance distribution of the sky. For this distribution, the diffuse sky irradiance on a surface is given by: AnisoSkyMult * DifSolarRad where:
- 815 -
DifSolarRad is the diffuse solar irradiance from the sky on the ground and AnisoSkyMult is determined by surface orientation and sky radiance distribution, and accounts for the effects of shading of sky diffuse radiation by shadowing surfaces such as overhangs. It does not account for reflection of sky diffuse radiation from shadowing surfaces. The sky radiance distribution is based on an empirical model based on radiance measurements of real skies, as described in Perez et al., 1990. In this model the radiance of the sky is determined by three distributions that are superimposed (see Figure 33) 1. 2. 3. An isotropic distribution that covers the entire sky dome; A circumsolar brightening centered at the position of the sun; A horizon brightening.
Schematic view of sky showing solar radiance distribution as a superposition of three components: dome with isotropic radiance, circumsolar brightening represented as a point source at the sun, and horizon brightening represented as a line source at the horizon. The proportions of these distributions depend on the sky condition, which is characterized by two quantities, clearness factor and brightness factor, defined below, which are determined from sun position and solar quantities from the weather file. The circumsolar brightening is assumed to be concentrated at a point source at the center of the sun although this region actually begins at the periphery of the solar disk and falls off in intensity with increasing angular distance from the periphery. The horizon brightening is assumed to be a linear source at the horizon and to be independent of azimuth. In reality, for clear skies, the horizon brightening is highest at the horizon and decreases in intensity away from the horizon. For overcast skies the horizon brightening has a negative value since for such skies the sky radiance increases rather than decreases away from the horizon.
Shadowing of Sky Long-Wave Radiation

EnergyPlus calculates the sky long-wave radiation incident on exterior surfaces assuming that the sky long-wave radiance distribution is isotropic. If obstructions such as overhangs are present the sky long-wave incident on a surface is multiplied by an isotropic shading factor. The long-wave radiation from these obstructions is added to the long-wave radiation from the ground; in this calculation both obstructions and ground are assumed to be at the outside air temperature and to have an emissivity of 0.9.
Solar Gains
The total solar gain on any exterior surface is a combination of the absorption of direct and diffuse solar radiation given by
- 816 -
where: a =solar absorptance of the surface A =angle of incidence of the sun's rays S =area of the surface Ss = sunlit area Ib =intensity of beam (direct) radiation Is =intensity of sky diffuse radiation Ig =intensity of ground reflected diffuse radiation Fss = angle factor between the surface and the sky Fsg = angle factor between the surface and the ground If the surface is shaded the program modifies Fss by a correction factor that takes into account the radiance distribution of the sky (see Shadowing of Sky Diffuse Solar Radiation). Shading of ground dif fuse solar radiation is not calculated by the program. It is up to the user to estimate the effect of this shading and modify the input value of Fsg accordingly.
SOLAR DISTRIBUTION
As discussed in the Solar Model options section, the Solar Distribution determines how EnergyPlus will treat beam solar radiation entering a zone through exterior windows. The three choices: 1-Minimal shadowing, 2-Full exterior and 3-Full Interior and exterior are discussed in the Solar options topic. EnergyPlus calculates the distribution of short-wave radiation in the interior of each thermal zone. This radiation consists of beam solar radiation, diffuse solar radiation, and short-wave radiation from electric lights. The program determines the amount of this radiation that is (1) absorbed on the inside face of opaque surfaces, (2) absorbed in the glass and shading device layers of the zones exterior and interior windows, (3) transmitted through the zones interior windows to adjacent zones, and (4) transmitted back out of the exterior windows. The effects of movable shading devices on the exterior windows are taken into account.
Initial Distribution of Diffuse Solar Transmitted through Exterior and Interior Windows
As of Version 2.1 the treatment of diffuse solar transmitted first through exterior windows and subsequently through interior windows has been improved. Diffuse solar (from sky and ground sources) transmitted through exterior windows is first distributed to the interior heat transfer surfaces in the zone containing the exterior windows. This initial distribution apportions the transmitted diffuse solar to interior surfaces using the approximate view factors described above in LW Radiation Exchange Among Zone Surfaces. The amount of this initially distributed diffuse solar absorbed by each interior surface, and each window material layer, is calculated and later added to the short-wave radiation absorbed values described below. The amount of this initially distributed diffuse solar that is reflected is accumulated for each zone and redistributed uniformly to the other surfaces. The amount of this initially distributed diffuse solar that is transmitted by interior windows to adjacent zones is initially distributed to the interior heat transfer surfaces in the adjacent zone in the same manner as just described. This new treatment of diffuse solar is intended to more accurately account for the initial absorption, transmittance, and reflection of short-wave radiation prior to the uniform distribution described below.
Interior Solar Radiation Absorbed by Opaque Surfaces

The short-wave radiation absorbed on the inside face of an opaque surface (floor, wall or ceiling) is given by:
- 817 -
Ground surface reflectance

Ground reflectance values are used to calculate the ground reflected solar amount. This fractional amount (entered monthly) is used in the following equation: GroundReflectedSolar = (BeamSolar x COS(SunZenithAngle) + DiffuseSolar) x GroundReflectance The Ground Reflected Solar is never allowed to be negative. The Snow Ground Reflectance Modifier can further modify the ground reflectance when snow is on the ground. If the user enters 0.0 for each month, no ground reflected solar is used.
Ground Reflectances (Snow)

When snow is on the ground, ground reflectances may change. The user can specify two values, Snow reflected solar modifier and Snow reflected daylight modifier.
Snow reflected solar modifier

A number between 0.0 and 10.0 which is used to modify the basic ground surface reflectance when snow is on the ground. Note that the value of GroundReflectanceUsed (below) must be <=1. GroundReflectanceUsed = GroundReflectance x ModifierSnow During simulations, the ground is considered to be snow-covered when the SnowDepth data in the hourly weather file is > 0.
Snow reflected daylight modifier

A number between 0.0 and 10.0 which is used to modify the basic ground surface reflectance when snow is on the ground. Note that the value of DaylightingGroundReflectanceUsed (below) must be <=1. DaylightingGroundReflectanceUsed = GroundReflectance x ModifierSnow During simulations, the ground is considered to be snow-covered when the SnowDepth data in the hourly weather file is > 0.
Beam distribution
If the Solar Distribution option is Minimal shadowing or Full exterior, it is assumed that all beam solar from exterior windows falls on the floor. If Solar Distribution is Full Interior and Exterior the program tracks where beam solar from exterior windows falls inside the zone, and wall as well as floor surfaces can receive beam radiation.
Diffuse distribution
Diffuse solar transmitted through exterior and interior windows is distributed according to the approximate view factors between the transmitting window and all other heat transfer surfaces in the zone. This variable is the amount of transmitted diffuse solar that is initially absorbed on the inside of each heat transfer surface. The portion of this diffuse solar that is reflected by all surfaces in the zone is subsequently redistributed uniformly to all heat transfer surfaces in the zone, along with interior reflected beam solar and shortwave radiation from lights. The total absorbed shortwave radiation is given by the next variable.
- 818 -
Solar radiation reflected from exterior surfaces

EnergyPlus has an option to calculate beam and sky solar radiation that is reflected from exterior surfaces and then strikes the building. For zones with detailed daylighting, these reflections are also considered in the daylight illuminance calculations. The reflecting surfaces fall into three categories: 1. Shadowing surfaces. These are surfaces like overhangs, component blocks or surfaces of the building Examples are shown in Solar Options. These surfaces can have diffuse and/or specular (beam-to-beam) reflectance values that are specified with the based on the material surface properties. Exterior building surfaces. In this case one section of the building reflects solar radiation onto another section (and vice-versa). See Figure 47. Opaque building surfaces (walls, for example) are assumed to be diffusely reflecting. Windows and glass doors are assumed to be specularly reflecting. The reflectance values for opaque surfaces are calculated by the program from the Absorptance:Solar and Absorptance:Visible v alues of the outer material layer of the surfaces construction. The reflectance values for windows and glass doors are calculated by the program from the reflectance properties of the individual glass layers that make up surfaces construction assuming no shading device is present and taking into account interreflections among the layers. The ground surface. Beam solar and sky solar reflection from the ground is calculated even if the Reflections option is not used (the default). But in this case the ground plane is considered unobstructed, i.e., the shadowing of the ground by the building itself or by obstructions such as component blocks is ignored. This shadowing is taken into account only if the Reflections option is used. In this case the ground view factor calculated by DesignBuilder is not used.
2.
3.
See Solar Options,
Diffuse reflection of beam solar and sky solar radiation

A ray-tracing method is used to calculate beam solar and sky solar radiation that is diffusely reflected onto each of a buildings exterior surfaces (walls, roofs, windows and doors), called here "receiving surfaces". The calculation begins by generating a set of rays proceeding into the outward hemisphere at each receiving point on a receiving surface. Then it determines whether each ray hits the sky, ground or an obstruction. The radiance at the hit point from reflection of incident beam or sky solar is determined and the contribution of this radiance to the receiving surface is calculated, added to the contribution from other hit points, and averaged over the receiving points. Separate calculations are done for beam-to-diffuse and sky solar reflection from all obstructions and beam-todiffuse and sky solar reflection from the ground. (For beam-to-beam reflection see Beam solar radiation specularly reflected from obstructions below.)
Rays
A total of 90 rays are sent out into the exterior hemisphere surrounding each receiving point. An upgoing ray may hit an obstruction or the sky. A downgoing ray may hit an obstruction or the ground. See diagram below.
- 819 -
Two-dimensional schematic showing rays going outward from a point on a receiving surface. Rays 1-6 hit the ground, rays 7-11 hit an obstruction, and rays 12-15 hit the sky.
Sky Solar Radiation Diffusely Reflected from the Ground

If a downgoing ray from a receiving point hits the ground (for example, rays 1-6 in diagram below), the program calculates the radiance at the ground hit point due to sky diffuse solar reaching that point. To do this, rays are sent upward from the ground hit point and it is determined which of these rays are unobstructed and so go to the sky (for example, rays 6-10 below). For this calculation it is assumed that the radiance of the sky is uniform.
Two-dimensional schematic showing rays going upward from a ground hit point.
- 820 -
Warehouse With Office
Beam Solar Radiation Specularly Reflected from Obstructions

The diagram below shows schematically how specular (beam-to-beam) reflection from an obstruction is calculated.
Two-dimensional schematic showing specular reflection from an obstruction such as the glazed faade of a neighboring building. The receiving point receives specularly reflected beam solar radiation if (1) DB passes through specularly reflecting surface EF, (2) CD does not hit any obstructions (such as RS), and (3) AC does not hit any obstructions (such as PQ). More detailed information on can be found in the EnergyPlus EngineeringReference.pdf document.

Sometimes it is necessary to create a smaller zone such as an office within a larger zone (e.g. a large warehouse space). This tutorial explains how to set up a simple 2 zone model such as that illustrated in the screenshots below where a small office is located in bottom corner of a larger warehouse space.
- 821 -
The process described below is also illustrated in the Office in Warehouse Tutorial The steps involved are: 1. Draw the ground floor block including both office and warehouse. The block should be the height of the office space as the top of the block will form the ceiling of the office.
- 822 -
2. Draw the 1st floor block representing the high-level warehouse space. 3. Draw a hole in the floor of the 1st floor block to connect the upper and lower warehouse zones together. The upper warehouse zone should look something like the screenshot below. The green line shows the perimeter of the hole.
4. Select the Merge zones connected by holes model option to merge the upper and lower parts of the warehouse into a single zone. 5. The 'floor' on top of the office zone is not usable floor area so go to this floor surface and select the Exclude this surface from total zone floor area option. This indicates that the surface is not part of the building useable floor area. This step ensures that this floor area is not counted in the floor area provided to certification tools such as SBEM. This step is not currently required for EnergyPlus simulations.
- 823 -
Note: if the excluded floor surface contains some external adjacencies as well as internal ones these external areas will not be subtracted from the zone floor area.
So the building now consists of 2 zones - an Office and a Warehouse zone. This model is available as one of the DesignBuilder example templates.
- 824 -
Reference
Reference
Reference sections: DesignBuilder files, locations and extensions Hardware requirements Licensing and activation Diagnostics Model Geometry Example Surface Types Calculation of Air Density Pitched Roof Geometry - Technical Description Triangulation Calculation of HVAC Energy Consumption ASHRAE 90.1 Reference Limitations Component blocks used for local shading
DesignBuilder Files, Location And Extensions

Filename/Extension Folder Any local folder(DesignBuilder Data folder is default) .dsb Description
DesignBuilder model description file. Note that dsb files are Important: dsb files should already compressed so don't need to be 'zipped' before only be loaded from folders sending in emails. on the local machine as loading/saving on network drives can cause problems. DesignBuilder exported component/template data Construction and Template exported files. DesignBuilder Licence file for extended evaluation, activating licences when Internet access is not available or for training. EnergyPlus input script file. EnergyPlus hourly weather data statistics file used by DesignBuilder to automatically load location and weather statistics to the Hourly weather data dialog when the epw file is selected. stat files are supplied with DesignBuilder and are automatically generated by the Hourly weather data translation process when creating custom weather data. EnergyPlus hourly weather data. a database of hourly weather data is supplied by automatic download or you can create your own hourly weather data. Compact.idf is generated when using Compact HVAC. It is the full input data with HVAC in compact form, i.e. prior to being expanded into detailed form. Expanded.idf is generated when using Compact HVAC. It is
.ddf .dat .lic .idf
Library folder Any (DesignBuilder Data folder is default) EnergyPlus folder
.stat
Weather data folder
.epw Compact.idf Expanded.idf
Weather data folder EnergyPlus folder EnergyPlus folder
- 825 -
ip.idf
EnergyPlus folder
in.idf
EnergyPlus folder
Energy+.idd Eplusout.err Eplusout.eso
EnergyPlus folder EnergyPlus folder EnergyPlus folder
Eplusout.eio
EnergyPlus folder
Eplusout.rdd Eplusout.bnd Eplusout.dxf Eplusout.mtr Eplusout.end Eplusout.dbg
EnergyPlus folder EnergyPlus folder EnergyPlus folder EnergyPlus folder EnergyPlus folder EnergyPlus folder
EPlusmap.csv
EnergyPlus folder
Eplusout.csv
EnergyPlus folder
the full input data with HVAC in expanded form, i.e. after being expanded into detailed form. It is copied The EnergyPlus input file when using DOE version in EPLaunch - it is necessary because EP-Launch cannot accept in.idf as an input filename. You can make minor changes to ip.idf in EP-Launch and see the effects in the DB results. Temporary file generated by DesignBuilder used as input to EnergyPlus - this file is overwritten before each simulation. Note when using DOE version in EP-Launch, in.idf is generated by EP-Launch. EnergyPlus data definition dictionary (see EnergyPlus documentation for information on this). EnergyPlus error message file. Standard eso Output File - contains detailed results to be read in by DesignBuilder. EnergyPlus model summary configuration output file. Note there is a free utility called xESOView that can be used to quickly view EnergyPlus eso output files. Download it from: http://sourceforge.net/projects/xesoview. Report Variable Data Dictionary - list all possible EnergyPlus output reports for a particular idf input file. HVAC layout summary file - shows details about the branches, nodes, and other elements of the flow connections. It is intended for use in debugging potential problems and supports the EnergyPlus diagramming tool. DXF file (from Report,Surfaces,DXF;) Similar to .eso but only has Report Meter outputs. A one line summary of success or failure used by DesignBuilder to indicate whether the simulation was successful or not. From Debug Output object may be useful to support to help track down problems. For zones simulated with daylighting controls, an illuminance map will be generated with a user defined grid (max 10 x 10) of daylighting reference points. The resulting map is output as a comma delimited text file that can be imported into a spreadsheet program for rapid visualization of the daylighting illuminance patterns in a zone. Not directly from EnergyPlus - produced by EnergyPlus utility program that reads the .eso file and produces output files for spreadsheet programs.
Compact HVAC file translation process When using Compact HVAC, the EnergyPlus input file generation process is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. DesignBuilder first creates in.idf using Compact HVAC notation. in.idf is copied to Compact.idf as a backup/record - this file is not used in the simulation process in.idf is processed by ExpandObjects.exe to generate expanded.idf - the full HVAC data set that can be read by EnergyPlus. expanded.idf is copied to in.idf as a backup/record and plays no further part. in.idf is used as input to EnergyPlus simulation.
- 826 -
DesignBuilder Files, Location And Extensions
All above files are stored in the EnergyPlus folder.
Folders
Folder DesignBuilder Data Typical Location* XP: My Documents\DesignBuilder Data Vista/7: Documents\DesignBuilder Data XP: My Documents\DesignBuilder Data\Backup Vista/7: Documents\DesignBuilder Data XP: C:\Documents and Settings\User\LocalSettings\Application Data\DesignBuilder\EnergyPlus Vista/7: C:\Users\User\AppData\Local\DesignBuilder\EnergyPlus XP: C:\Documents and Settings\User\LocalSettings\Application Data\DesignBuilder\Radiance Vista/7: C:\Users\User\AppData\Local\DesignBuilder\Radiance XP: C:\Documents and Settings\User\LocalSettings\Application Data\DesignBuilder\Data Vista/7 C:\Users\User\AppData\Local\DesignBuilder XP: C:\Documents and Settings\User\LocalSettings\Application Data\DesignBuilder Vista/7: C:\Users\User\AppData\Local\DesignBuilder DesignBuilder dsb files stored in this folder can be used as templates for future models. Click on the Templates tab on the Create New Site dialog for a list of available template files. EnergyPlus hourly weather data is stored in this folder. The data may have been automatically downloaded from the DesignBuilder website or it can be added manually. Use Default location for storing DesignBuilder dsb data files. Default location for DesignBuilder automatic backup files and file copies made when opening existing files. Storing files related to EnergyPlus simulations. Storing files related to Radiance simulations. Library data and .dat files currently being used by DesignBuilder
DesignBuilder Data\Backup
EnergyPlus
Radiance
Library data
Diagnostic files folder
Diagnostic files
Template projects
XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\DesignBuilder\Templates Vista/7: Vista/7: C:\ProgramData\DesignBuilder\Templates
Weather data
XP: C:\Documents and Settings\User\LocalSettings\Application Data\DesignBuilder\Weather Data Vista/7: C:\ProgramData\DesignBuilder\Weather Data
* The actual names of the folders on a particular computer will depend on the language setting and on your Windows user name. The above locations assume English as the language and are given for Windows XP operating system (XP) and for Windows Vista and Windows (Vista/7). The Windows user name ' User' is used as an example.
- 827 -
Tip: the above folders can most easily be accessed from the File > Folders menu group of commands.
Hardware Requirements
DesignBuilder is a professional graphics application and requires a high standard of computer hardware for successful use. This page contains information on the minimum system requirements and also the recommended specification. The main areas you should pay attention to if you are buying or upgrading your computer system to run DesignBuilder are: Graphics adapter - a good 100% OpenGL compatible graphics adapter is required to run DesignBuilder. The mid-range and better NVIDIA cards seem to be the most reliable. Some graphics adapters integrated with the motherboard we have tested are unable to run DesignBuilder. See also note below. Memory - DesignBuilder will use all the memory you can throw at it - at least 2 GB is recommended for serious modelling or more if you are running under Windows Vista which itself uses 1 GB. CPU speed - get as fast as you can afford. Cores - having more than one processor core does not necessarily speed up simulations in DesignBuilder version 1 but it does allow you to continue using your computer while simulations are running. Dual core processors also make the software more responsive in use.
Minimum Requirements
Windows 7, Vista, XP or Windows 2000 running on 1000 MHz processor 800x600 pixel screen 1 GB RAM 200 MB free disk space Pointing device 100% OpenGL compatible 3D graphics adapter with hardware acceleration running in 32-bit color mode
The above specification will allow you to successfully model small buildings using DesignBuilder but we recommend a more powerful computer for best results especially when working with larger building models.
Recommended
Windows XP SP2 2.4 GHz dual core processor or faster. Dual Core processors are recommended as they allow you to continue using your computer while simulations are carried out. 4 GB (or more) RAM. 5 GB free disk space Pointing device 100% OpenGL compatible 3-D graphics adapter with hardware acceleration running in 32-bit color mode 1280x1024 pixels or larger screens for efficiency during the modelling process and for displaying highquality visualisation images and walk-throughs of DesignBuilder models and CFD results. DesignBuilder works well with wide screens.
Windows Vista
DesignBuilder works under Windows Vista, but you must ensure that you follow the advice on the support knowledgebase to switch off desktop composition and set XP-compatibility mode.
- 828 -
DesignBuilder Licensing
Graphics Card Settings

If you plan to purchase a computer we recommend choosing an NVIDIA graphics adapter as these, in our experience, have more reliable drivers for use with OpenGL. ATI graphics cards are generally not recommended for use with DesignBuilder as they often have bugs in their OpenGL driver software, especially new releases. Many graphics cards allow you to customise driver settings. The example screenshot below is for an NVIDIA card showing recommended settings. Note antialiasing, anisotropic filtering and unified back/depth buffer have been changed from default settings to provide hardware accelerated optimal visualisations. The antialiasing option provides sharp lines without slowing program operation and unified back/depth buffer gives best results for dragging selection rectangles on some graphics cards allowing double buffering to be used for cursor dynamics.
DesignBuilder v.2 has different licensing systems for single user and site licences. This page gives further details on these beyond the basics described in the Licensing and Activation section.
SINGLE USER LICENSES

A single user licence allows you install DesignBuilder onto a maximum of 2 computers for personal use, for example one on a desktop and one on a laptop. If you need to use the software on a third computer then you must first deactivate one of the other 2 computers. When you purchase a DesignBuilder v.2 license from the website, you will receive an 8-digit activation code. To use this enter it in the License dialog accessed from the Help menu within DesignBuilder and press the Activate button. This will cause DesignBuilder to automatically download licences for all modules associated with the activation code and activate them. You will then be able to use the software and run functionality associated with each activated license. DesignBuilder also periodically checks to ensure that the licence is still valid. To do this it must connect to our servers over the Internet. If DesignBuilder hasn't been able to check licences for 2 days then it will request that you connect to the Internet so it can check license status. If it still fails to connect after another 24 hours, then the
- 829 -
licenses will be deactivated on that computer. To reactivate simply connect to the Internet and press the Activate button on the License dialog. You can also deactivate activation codes either from within DesignBuilder by pressing the Remove activation code from this computer button or from the deactivate webpage. You get to the deactivate webpage by first clicking on the Activation codes option on the left hand side of the web site under Account Management.
Clicking on the Deactivate button takes you to the Deactivation page (below):
- 830 -
From this webpage you can either deactivate a license on a particular computer or permanently cancel an activation to prevent users no longer entitled to use the software from using it. For example if an employee leaves the company but still has a copy of the software activated at home then this can easily be cancelled allowing the activation code to be used by someone else. To cancel an activation click on the disable button on the Deactivation webpage.
SITE LICENSES
Site licenses require a single license server to be installed and run on the network and for each client computer using DesignBuilder an environment variable must be set to tell DesignBuilder where on the network to find the license server.
Summary of Process
In summary, the steps to set up DesignBuilder Site Licenses are: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Download the designb_rlm.zip file from the Downloads > Software area of the DesignBuilder website Extract the files in the designb_rlm.zip file to the folder on the server to be used to store DesignBuilder site license files (e.g. c:\RLMSERVER) Obtain the License file by clicking on activate.cmd, following instructions on the webpage and saving the license file to the site license folder. Run the RLM server as a service and start the service. On client machines which are to run the DesignBuilder software, set the environment variable DB_SITE_SERVER to the IP address of the site license server on the network.
The above steps are detailed below.
Obtaining your License File

Before you run the rlm server you will need to obtain your license file and save it into the rlm installation folder. That's the folder containing rlm.exe and other files listed above. You should have received an activation code from your site license purchase, this is an 8-digit number and is needed to activate the license. Open the rlm installation folder in Windows Explorer and double click on activate.cmd This loads a web page at www.designbuilder.co.uk with a form for you to enter your activation code. Other values in the form such as Hostid are automatically filled in for you. After entering your activation code click Activate License and if successful you will be presented with a download link for your activated license file. Download the license file and save in your rlm installation folder.
- 831 -
Running the RLM Server

The server can be run directly by double clicking rlm.exe. This runs a command window and logs activity to the window. This is useful when you first run the license server as you'll be able to see the license server starting up correctly and loading the license file as well as DesignBuilder clients obtaining licenses from the server.
Running RLM as a Service

It is best to set rlm up to run as a Windows service rather than in the command window, otherwise you'll need to remember to manually restart the license server when the computer reboots. If you are running rlm in a command window please close that before starting up rlm as a service. To create the Windows service to run rlm automatically double click on service_install.cmd or use Manage Windows Service in the admin interface. Note: The service will be added to Windows services but not started. Use Control Panel > Services to start DesignBuilder License Server.
- 832 -
Once started in this way the service will restart automatically if the computer is rebooted. By default the service will write a log file designb_rlm.log into the rlm installation folder. If you want this in a different location you can use the admin interface (below) to set up the service then you can specify the service name and the log file location. On Vista you may have problems with permissions when setting up the service. You can either disable the UAC or try right clicking service_install.cmd and choosing "Run as administrator"
Setting up Client Machines

DesignBuilder will examine the environment variable DB_SITE_SERVER to decide whether to look for site licenses or single user licenses. If DB_SITE_SERVER is set then DesignBuilder will try to 'check out' licenses from the server at start up. If DB_SITE_SERVER is not set this DesignBuilder will use single user licenses. The environment variable DB_SITE_SERVER should be set to port@host where port is 5053 and host is the license server hostname (in your DNS system) or IP address. For example: DB_SITE_SERVER=5053@192.168.1.99
- 833 -
or: DB_SITE_SERVER=5053@OUR_SYSTEM_SERVER To set environment variables use the Environment Variables button on the Advanced tab of Systems Properties which can be accessed from the Windows Control panel. You can find the IP address of your server by typing ipconfig in the Windows Command box on the server machine.
Once DesignBuilder is running you can check out or check back in module licenses using the License dialog which can be accessed from the DesignBuilder Help menu.
RLM Server Admin Interface

RLM provides a browser-based administration interface to the license server. To run this, double click on the admin_interface.cmd file in the RLM folder using Windows Explorer. Refer to the RLM End User Manual (double click online_manual.cmd) for more details on using the admin interface. Note: DesignBuilder does not use the Activation page of the admin interface. Reprise Software developers of the RLM licensing system always maintains a current version of the RLM End User's Manual here:
- 834 -
Diagnostics
www.reprisesoftware.com/RLM_Enduser.html
Diagnostics
DesignBuilder creates two types of diagnostics files on startup, "diagnostic log" files and "installation diagnostics log files": 1. Diagnostics_dd_mm_yyyy_hh_mm_ss.log - files contain information about the operating system settings, hardware configuration and settings within the program. Installation Diagnostics_dd_mm_yyyy_hh_mm_ss.log - files contain information on the steps carried out during the final stage of software installation and any errors that may have occurred.
2.
The "dd_mm_yyyy_hh_mm_ss" part of the filename is the date and time the file was originally created. For example the file "Diagnostics_01_08_2010_09_26_53.log" was created at 1 August 2010 at 9:26:53 am. The diagnostics files are generated in the Diagnostic files folder which can be accessed from the File > Folders > Diagnostic files folder menu command. When you select this menu option a Windows Explorer window opens and you will see the diagnostics and installation diagnostic log files. You may be requested to supply these files to DesignBuilder Support if you have problems with program operation on your computer. One typical request from the Support desk is to supply the diagnostics file from a particular program run and this will usually be the most recent one. To find the most recently created diagnostics file, simply sort the files in Windows Explorer by using the "Details" view and clicking on the "Date modified" column to carry out the sort. Alternatively you can scan the files by eye to find the most recently created file using the "dd_mm_yyyy_hh_mm_ss" part of the filenames.
Model Geometry Example

This section documents the way the DesignBuilder model geometry you define is used in the calculations and visualisations. The description is based on the Model Geometry Example.dsb example building shown below. The file Model Geometry Example.dsb is supplied with DesignBuilder. The model consists of 4 blocks, each block containing a single zone, except the Ground floor block which is divided into equal sized North and South zones.
- 835 -
and Visualisation view:
See the Visualisation Limitations section for information on some minor differences in the rendered images and the model used in the calculations. The model consists of: 1 x 10m x 10m Ground floor block partitioned into equal size North and South zones using partition of thickness 0.05m. 1 x 10m x 10m First floor block stacked on ground block.
- 836 -
1 x 10m x 5m Block with flat roof and external floor connects with the First floor block on the North side. 1 x 10m x 10m Roof block with 45 roof slope drawn in the vertical plane and extruded horizontally, i.e. it is not defined as a Pitched roof block form. The Roof block is stacked on top of the First floor block. Above are external block dimensions. Block wall thickness = 0.2m for all blocks. 30% Glazing ratio for all blocks, all glazing uses default facades (i.e. no windows or doors have been drawn). Model uses default Zone volume calculation options - Internal floor constructions not subtracted from zone volume, External floor constructions not subtracted from zone volume and Ground floor construction is below ground and is not subtracted from zone volume. When exported to 3-D DXF using the Whole model with details option and dimensioned the model looks like this:
The same model in 3-D view looks like this:
- 837 -
The ceiling / floor surface between First floor block - Zone 1 and Roof block - Zone 1 has area 9.6m x (9.6 - 2 x 0.2 / sin 45) where the 0.2 / sin 45 term is the Roof block wall thickness (0.2m) adjusted to account for the roof slope (45) as shown in the diagram below.
- 838 -
The dimension data for the zones, surfaces and openings used in the calculations can be seen in the Navigator and can also be obtained by exporting a csv report file. The general principles used in DesignBuilder are: Internal zone surface areas are used in calculations and these are derived from block outer dimensions accounting for block wall thickness. Full block height is used when calculating wall areas Zone volume is calculated accurately even for very complex shaped zones but for a simple 'shoebox' model the zone volume is simply zone floor area x block height. If one of the Zone volume calculation options is not selected then the volume of appropriate floor constructions is subtracted from the basic zone volumes. The volume of the floor construction is the Thickness of the construction x the surface area.
The tables below list the most important geometric data and show how each item is calculated. Note that surfaces with glazing have area of glazing subtracted. The areas below are consistent with EnergyPlus and SBEM calculations.
Zone Ground floor block North

Floor area (m2) Volume (m3) Area (m2) 46.08 46.08 138.24
Calculation Note 4.8m x 9.6m 46.08m2 x 3m (subtract volume of ground floor if Ground floor construction is below ground and is not subtracted from zone zolume model option set) Adjacency (Orientation / adjacent zone) Ground
Surface Ground floor
Area Calculation Note 4.8m x 9.6m
- 839 -
Ceiling Wall Outside Glazing Outside Wall Outside Glazing Outside Wall Outside Glazing Outside Partition
46.08 10.08 4.32 20.16 8.64 10.08 4.32 28.8
4.8m x 9.6m 4.8m x 3m - glazing area on surface (2.88m x 1.5m) 2.88m x 1.5m 9.6m x 3m - glazing area on surface (5.76m x 1.5m) 5.76m x 1.5m 4.8m x 3m - glazing area on surface (2.88m x 1.5m) 2.88m x 1.5m 9.6m x 3m
First floor block - Zone 1 90 90 0 0 270 270 Ground floor block South
Zone Ground floor block South

Floor area (m2) Volume (m3) Area (m2) 46.08 46.08 10.08 4.32 20.16 8.64 10.08 4.32 28.8 46.08 138.24
Calculation Note 4.8m x 9.6m 46.08m2 x 3m (subtract volume of ground floor if Ground floor construction is below ground and is not subtracted from zone volume model option set) Adjacency (Orientation / adjacent zone) Ground First floor block - Zone 1 90 90 180 180 270 270 Ground floor block North
Surface Ground floor Ceiling Wall Outside Glazing Outside Wall Outside Glazing Outside Wall Outside Glazing Outside Partition
Area Calculation Note 4.8m x 9.6m 4.8m x 9.6m 4.8m x 3m - glazing area on surface (2.88m x 1.5m) 2.88m x 1.5m 9.6m x 3m - glazing area on surface (5.76m x 1.5m) 5.76m x 1.5m 4.8m x 3m - glazing area on surface (2.88m x 1.5m) 2.88m x 1.5m 9.6m x 3m
First floor block - Zone 1

Floor area (m2) Volume (m3) Area (m2) 46.08 46.08 90.569 20.16 92.16 276.48
Calculation Note 9.6m x 9.6m 92.16m2 x 3m (subtract volume of ground floor if Ground floor construction is below ground and is not subtracted from zone volume model option set) Adjacency (Orientation / adjacent zone) Ground floor block North Ground floor block South Roof block - Zone 1 90
Surface Floor Floor Ceiling Wall Outside
Area Calculation Note 4.8m x 9.6m 4.8m x 9.6m 9.434m x 9.6m (9.434m = 10 - 2 x 0.2 / sin 45) 9.6m x 3m - glazing area on surface (5.76m x 1.5m)
- 840 -
Glazing Outside Wall Outside Glazing Outside Wall Outside Glazing Outside Wall (with hole) Interblock partition
8.64 20.16 8.64 10.08 8.64 0.201 28.649
5.76m x 1.5m 9.6m x 3m - glazing area on surface (5.76m x 1.5m) 5.76m x 1.5m 9.6m x 3m - glazing area on surface (5.76m x 1.5m) 5.76m x 1.5m Necessary surround for interblock partition Interblock partition 9.6m x 3m - wall (with hole) (0.201m2)
90 180 180 270 270 0 Block with flat roof and external floor - Zone 1
Block with flat roof and external floor - Zone 1

Floor area (m2) Volume (m3) Area (m2) 44.16 44.16 9.66 4.14 20.16 8.64 9.66 4.14 0.201 28.649 44.16 132.48
Calculation Note 4.6m x 9.6m 44.16m2 x 3m (subtract volume of external floor if Internal and external floor construction is below ground and is not subtracted from zone volume model option set) Adjacency (Orientation / adjacent zone) Outside Outside 90 90 0 0 270 270 180 First floor block - Zone 1
Surface Floor Flat roof Wall Outside Glazing Outside Wall Outside Glazing Outside Wall Outside Glazing Outside Wall (with hole) Interblock partition
Area Calculation Note 4.6m x 9.6m 4.6m x 9.6m 4.6m x 3m - glazing area on surface (2.76m x 1.5m) 2.76m x 1.5m 9.6m x 3m - glazing area on surface (5.76m x 1.5m) 5.76m x 1.5m 4.6m x 3m - glazing area on surface (2.76m x 1.5m) 2.76m x 1.5m Necessary surround for interblock partition Interblock partition 9.6m x 3m - wall (with hole) (0.201m2)
Roof block - Zone 1

Floor area (m2) Volume (m3) Surface Floor Wall Outside Glazing Outside Wall Outside Glazing Outside Roof (slope 45 ) Area (m2) 90.569 15.576 6.676 15.576 6.676 64.042 90.569 213.615
Calculation Note 9.434m x 9.6m (9.434m = 10 - 2 x 0.2 / sin 45) 90.569m2 x (5m - 0.2 / cos 45) x 0.5 Adjacency (Orientation / adjacent zone) First floor block - Zone 1 90 90 270 270 90
Area Calculation Note 9.434m x 9.6m (9.434m = 10 - 2 x 0.2 / sin 45) 9.434m x (5m - 0.2 / cos 45) x 0.5 - glazing area (6.676) 4.45m x 1.5m 9.434m x (5m - 0.2 / cos 45) x 0.5 - glazing area (6.676) 4.45m x 1.5m 6.671m x 9.6m, 6.671 is the internal eaves to apex length = (5 - 0.2 / cos 45) / sin 45
- 841 -
Roof (slope 45 )
64.042
6.671m x 9.6m, 6.671 is the internal eaves to apex length = (5 - 0.2 / cos 45) / sin 45
270

1. 2. 3. Block and Zone Dimensions is an introductory section explaining how to enter blocks and the relationship with zones. Also see Constructions for how to edit the construction configuration. See Combined Constructions for information on the meaning of the Construction Model data.
Surface Types
The meaning of most surface types listed in the Navigator should be obvious. This section provides further information on the meaning of 3 less obvious surface types: Inter-block partition Wall (with hole) Link body edge surfaces
These special surfaces are required because DesignBuilder uses 3-D surface slabs to represent building fabric. Using 3-D surface slabs allows accurate calculation of zone volumes, definition of blocks using external dimensions and realistic rendered images. Zones for EnergyPlus simulations and other calculations provided by DesignBuilder are generated from the interior faces of the block geometry.
- 842 -
Surface Types
Cutaway of DesignBuilder Zone showing 3D-slabs
Inter-block partition
An Inter-block partition surface is the shared partition wall between 2 zones in different blocks. Inter-block partition surfaces are generated whenever 2 blocks touch along a plane. They are listed in the Navigator twice, once in each of the 2 zones in which they appear. They are however a single partition object within DesignBuilder and in the thermal calculations. So if, for example, you change the Partition construction model data for an inter-block partition (or draw windows) the change will also be reflected in the equivalent inter-block partition surface in the adjacent zone.
- 843 -
Wall (with hole)

Surfaces marked Wall (with hole) in the navigator are external surfaces on the same block face as an inter-block partition surface (see above). The 'hole' is where the inter-block partition goes. So 'Wall (with hole)' is the part of the block face that is adjacent to outside. The partition with the adjacent block is in a separate surface called inter-block partition (it is separated from the rest of the wall because it has a different adjacency). So the sum of the inter-block partition(s) and the wall with the hole make up the actual surface. The figures below illustrate.
At building level
- 844 -
Surface Types
At surface level
Note that at surface level you can only draw openings on the grey areas of the surface. The white 'hole' is actually where the inter-block partition is located (above).
Wall (with hole) representation in EnergyPlus

Because EnergyPlus does not allow surfaces to be defined with holes (i.e. surfaces are defined using a single set of vertices) DesignBuilder generates 2 or more valid sub-polygons to represent the surface in EnergyPlus. The diagram below illustrates the procedure used for a typical Wall (with hole) surface.
- 845 -
The surface is split into 2 (often equal area) polygons that, together, enclose the 'hole' left by the interblock partition. You should bear this in mind when looking at EnergyPlus IDF data.
Link body edge surfaces

Link body edge surfaces are used to connect the Wall (with hole) and the Inter-block partition surfaces to ensure that zones are fully enclosed. They are required because zones in adjacent blocks are separated from each other due to the thickness of the walls of the 2 blocks. The link body edge surfaces bridge the gap between the (internal) zone shell and the (external) block shell. The link body is the volume between the link edge surfaces and the inter-block partition.
Link body edge surfaces are included by default, but you can exclude them by unchecking the Generate fully enclosed zones Advanced model option. When included, these surfaces are modelled using very high resistance zero mass elements. The purpose of Link body edge surfaces is to: Allow EnergyPlus to calculate zone volumes avoiding warning messages about volume mismatches. This does not actually affect the results because EnergyPlus uses the accurately calculated zone volumes supplied by DesignBuilder. Provide a slightly more accurate picture of the actual internal zone surface area and so potentially provide a more accurate convective/radiant calculation.
The pictures below show how the link body edge surfaces are used to connect the 2 blocks and ensure that zones are enclosed.
- 846 -
Surface Types
EnergyPlus Model with link body edge surfaces - zones are enclosed and the zone volume includes the volume enclosed by the link surfaces and the inter-block partition. This volume is the thickness of the block wall x inter-block partition area).
- 847 -
Equivalent EnergyPlus Model without Link body edge surfaces - zones are not enclosed and the zone volume excludes the link body (volume enclosed by the link surfaces and the inter-block partition).
Calculation Of Air Density

The air density is used for calculating the air volumetric flow rate from air mass flows as part of the loads calculation procedure. The method used in DesignBuilder is the same as that in EnergyPlus for consistency. Air is assumed to be dry and at 20C. The site elevation is used to calculate standard atmospheric pressure using the equation for 'standard atmospheric' pressure on p 6.1 of the ASHRAE 1997 HOF. Density = P / (R * T) Where: R is the Gas constant = 287.05 J/kg-K T is the temperature in K. Air is assumed to be at 20C so, T = (20 + 273.15) P is standard pressure: P = 101325 x (1.0 Z x 0.0000225577)5.2559 where: Z = Elevation above sea level (m)
- 848 -
Pitched Roof Geometry - Technical Description

This page describes DesignBuilder pitched roof geometry generation with reference an example roof created by drawing a rectangular perimeter with an offset of 0.3m and an external wall thickness of 0.25m:
Roof perimeter blocks are created behind the scenes by first generating a conventional plan extrusion using the current external wall thickness and then generating the roof inner profile topology from the resulting block outer perimeter:
- 849 -
The roof geometry is created as if a stub wall existed from the original extrusion, cut to fit within the roof space and on top of which the roof assembly sits:
The resulting roof block is composed of a polyhedron representing the inner zone, which is created from the original inner block perimeter and is cut to fit within the roof space and a number of slabs that represent the actual roof construction. The roof slabs are generated from the inner roof profile and an outer profile created using the roof construction thickness.
- 850 -
EnergyPlus model
DesignBuilder automatically generates overhangs for Pitched roof block types using EnergyPlus shading devices. The diagram below shows EnergyPlus DXF output of the building model generated using the above data. It shows the overhangs in grey.
- 851 -
Triangulation
Starting with Version 1.2 DesignBuilder optimises for triangulation so the advice below should not apply in most cases Triangulation is the process of breaking up polygons of complex shape into simple triangles which can be easily be manipulated by computers. This is routinely done behind the scenes in DesignBuilder for generating optimal surfaces in the OpenGL display routines, but is also sometimes necessary when generating EnergyPlus surfaces. There is an option on the Advanced tab of the Model Options dialog which allows triangulation to be switched on/off explicitly. You should leave this switched off as it is intended for developer testing, but if you do switch it on all surface polygons (apart from triangular and rectangular ones) are triangulated. You should however be aware of some situations requiring EnergyPlus surfaces to be triangulated even when this option is switched off: 1. When two blocks are adjacent and one of the adjacent faces is larger than the other and has glazing (see EnergyPlus DXF output below). This situation requires triangulation because EnergyPlus cannot handle surfaces with holes. You should try to avoid this situation wherever possible, especially if the surface involved is large or has a large number of windows because the large number of triangulated surfaces can slow simulations significantly
- 852 -
Triangulation
Illustration of triangulation in inter-block connection surfaces Windows which are neither triangular nor rectangular must be triangulated to fit with EnergyPlus requirements. If a surface, shading surface or opening has more vertices than is allowed from the IDD definition then it must be triangulated.
TIP TO REDUCE NUMBER OF TRIANGLES WHEN TRIANGULATION IS REQUIRED

You can reduce the number of triangles required when a smaller block is placed adjacent to a large one and the larger block has Windows by drawing a partitions stub to separate the block connection area from the window area as shown the diagram below.
- 853 -
Calculation Of HVAC Energy Consumption From EnergyPlus Loads

DesignBuilder calculates boiler, chiller, DHW fuel consumption from the loads calculated by EnergyPlus using the CoP data at the building level on the HVAC tab as follows:
Simple HVAC
Boiler energy = EnergyPlus heating loads / Heating system CoP Chiller energy = EnergyPlus cooling loads / Cooling system CoP
Compact HVAC
Boiler energy = (EnergyPlus heating loads x Heating distribution loss factor) / Boiler CoP Chiller energy = (EnergyPlus cooling loads x Cooling distribution loss factor) / Chiller CoP Where: Heating distribution loss factor = 1 + (Heating Distribution Loss) / 100 Cooling distribution loss factor = 1 + (Cooling Distribution Loss) / 100
DHW (Simple and Compact HVAC)

DHW energy (kWh) = DHW CoP x 1000 (kg/m3) x 4.187 (KJ/kg-K) x (EnergyPlus DHW m3 loads) x (Delivery water temperature - Mains water temperature) Where: DHW CoP is Heating system CoP when using '1-Central heating boiler' DHW type Data shown in blue is HVAC model data. Data shown in italics is read from the EnergyPlus results eso file .
ASHRAE 90.1 Reference

This section contains some background information on ASHRAE 90.1 modelling for advanced DesignBuilder / EnergyPlus users. It is undergoing ongoing development.
UNMET HOURS
Unmet hours of a building are the summation of the number of hours when the heating or the cooling set point temperature of a zone is not met either by the HVAC system or by the plant.
Understanding/Interpreting/Calculating the number of unmet hours:

Unmet hour is for a particular zone when the zone indoor temperature is higher than the heating or cooling set point specified in that hour. The number or the percentage of unmet hours in a building is usually given as one of the outputs of the simulation. Zone wise, unmet hours can be read from the Energy Plus: Output Variable, Time Cooling Set point Not met. When two zones are unmet at the same hour, this will count to one unmet hour for the building. When two zones have unmet hours during different non overlapping times of a day, the total number of unmet hours in that day is the summation of these unmet hours of each zone. This total for the year should be considered as the total unmet hours of the building.
- 854 -
Limitations
Example
When each zone is unmet in the specified hours as beside Zone 1 unmet during hours: 6 8 14 16 Zone 2 unmet during hours: 6 8 12 16 Zone 3 unmet during hours: 7 8 12 13 Total number of unmet hours of the building: 7 hrs and not 12 hrs. 6 7 8 12 13 14 16 When percentage of unmet is specified, then this is the percentage of total number of hours (1 year- 8760 hours) for which the simulation is performed (not just the occupied hours). As per ASHRAE 90.1-2004, the unmet load hours of the total building should be less than or equal to 300 hours and unmet load hours for the proposed design shall not exceed the number of load hours for the baseline building design by more than 50. If unmet load hours in the proposed building exceed the unmet load hours in the baseline building by more than 50, then the size of equipment in the baseline building shall be reduced incrementally, until the condition is satisfied. ASHRAE and USGBC say that it is OK if the baseline unmet load hours exceed the proposed unmet load hours by more than 50, provided they are both below 300.
The above information on Unmet hours is sourced from a post by Ashu Gupta (and subsequent posts) on the bldg-sim mailing list
Limitations
This page summarises the known limitations in DesignBuilder simulations together with workarounds were they exist. 1. In Simple HVAC it is not possible to use radiant heating together with cooling in any particular zone. If you need to use radiant heating with cooling then you should consider using Compact HVAC single zone unitary systems. In Compact HVAC there are only limited options for defining heating and cooling sizes manually. These limitations are due to EnergyPlus generally requiring all HVAC data to be either autosized or manually defined. DesignBuilder Compact HVAC does not provide access to all of the data required to do this. One example of a known related issue is that it is not possible to manually define sizes of radiant/baseboard heating systems in unitary single zone Compact HVAC systems using the "2-Replaces main heating" option. Possible workarounds to this problem are to not use autosizing or to use Simple HVAC instead.
2.
Component Blocks Used For Local Shading

Component blocks are a flexible way to apply shading to any part of the building and can be used to model more complex window shading systems not catered for by the in-built local shading systems that can be selected on the Openings tab. The issues to consider when using component blocks in this way are discussed below.
Positioning
Component blocks placed close to the window at building level may not be as close to the window in the simulation as might be expected from the view in the model. For example, in the simple model shown below a
- 855 -
component block has been placed directly in front of a window, which cannot be seen as it is hidden by the component block. It is placed so that it touches the outer surface of the block. So from a naive point of view one would think that it is touching the window in the simulation model and therefore no solar gain and light could pass round or through the component block shade.
However results from simulations will show quite a lot solar gain entering the window. This is because the window is actually placed on the zone surface which is on the inner surface of the block, the difference between the inner zone surface and the block outer surface being due to the block wall thickness. In this model the block wall thickness is 0.23m so there will be a gap of 0.23m between the component block shade and the window in the simulation model. This can be seen in the example DXF output shown below which corresponds to the model above.
- 856 -
Component Blocks Used For Local Shading
The DXF output above shows the gap between the window and the component block shade caused by the block wall thickness. The solution in this case was simply to use a very low block wall thickness (lowest value allowed is 0.01m) which gives rise to a negligible gap between window and shade of 1cm.
Reflection from ground

As discussed elsewhere, shading of the ground by component blocks is only taken into account if the Model reflections option is used. So if you use component blocks to model a local shading device and forget to include reflections in the simulations you will obtain higher than expected solar gains due to unobstructed groundreflected solar gain.
- 857 -
EnergyPlus Background Information
EnergyPlus Background Information

EnergyPlus is the U.S. DOE building energy simulation program for modelling building heating, cooling, lighting, ventilating, and other energy flows. It builds on the most popular features and capabilities of BLAST and DOE-2 but also includes many innovative simulation capabilities such as time steps of less than an hour, modular systems and plant integrated with heat balance-based zone simulation, multizone air flow, thermal comfort, and photovoltaic systems. EnergyPlus is a stand-alone simulation program without a 'user friendly' graphical interface which is where DesignBuilder comes in. We have integrated EnergyPlus tightly within the DesignBuilder environment to allow you to carry out simulations without any fuss just define your building model, request data and let the EnergyPlus simulation engine take care of the details. DesignBuilder has been specifically developed around EnergyPlus allowing most of the EnergyPlus fabric and glazing data to be input. Databases of building materials, constructions, window panes, window gas, glazing units and blinds are provided. HVAC is modelled using the Compact HVAC descriptions. A range of commonly used HVAC system types can be defined parametrically without the need for complex system layouts. These compact descriptions are automatically expanded behind-the-scenes into full HVAC simulation data sets prior to simulation. You can use DesignBuilder to generate IDF files and work with these outside DesignBuilder to access system functionality not provided by DesignBuilder. There is a range of EnergyPlus simulators to choose from including the current DOE executable release, the current DLL release and any interim releases made available by DOE. You can carry out DesignBuilder simulations via EP-Launch. See also: EnergyPlus Program options Exporting EnergyPlus IDF Files EnergyPlus Version Compatibility EnergyPlus IDF Window Dimensions Calculation of DesignBuilder Output from EnergyPlus Report Variables EnergyPlus Errors and Warnings EnergyPlus Daylight Calculations EnergyPlus Thermal Comfort EnergyPlus Date Definition DOE EnergyPlus website Simulation Hourly Weather Data DesignBuilder Files, Location and Extensions Licensing & Activation EnergyPlus Documentation EnergyPlus Hourly Weather Data
Exporting IDF Files

You can use DesignBuilder to generate EnergyPlus idf files for use in external simulation environments such as EP-Launch. There are 4 alternative procedures for doing this:
- 859 -
1. 2. 3. 4.
From the File | Export menu option (preferred method). By copying the intermediate in.idf file in the EnergyPlus folder. Tools | Display simulation input script from Simulation or Heating/Cooling design screens. Using the DOE executable EnergyPlus simulation option to open the EP-launch application before simulation.
Note that DesignBuilder will automatically generate compatible IDF files with the target version of EnergyPlus as set on the Program options dialog. It is important to set the EnergyPlus version you intend to use before exporting the IDF data.
1. File > Export menu option (recommended)

1. 2. Open your DesignBuilder dsb model file. In the Program options dialog on the EnergyPlus tab, ensure that the recommended executable DOE version of the most current version of EnergyPlus available on the list is selected (e.g. "Version 6.0.0.023 (Recommended DOE)"). Make sure that you have that version of EnergyPlus downloaded and installed from the DOE website. Make sure you are at building level or below. Click on File > Export > Export EnergyPlus or DBSim input file > Simulation menu option.
3. 4. 5.
2. Copy in.idf in the EnergyPlus folder

An alternative way to generate IDF files is to use the intermediate file in.idf in the EnergyPlus folder which is generated prior to each DesignBuilder EnergyPlus simulation. You should copy this file to a different filename/location before using it. Important: You should not generally make any changes to in.idf itself because this file will get overwritten before the next DesignBuilder EnergyPlus simulation and your changes will then be lost.
3. Tools > Display menu option

You can view the input data script used to calculate these results by selecting the Tools > Display simulation input script menu option. If you do not have the EnergyPlus IDF editor installed, then you should associate the .idf file extension with a text editor to make this option work. Note: this shows the script stored with the model just before the simulation not the in.idf file stored in the EnergyPlus folder.
4. DOE executable EnergyPlus simulation option

In the Program options dialog you can select an executable EnergyPlus option and set the execution mode to 4Executable (EP-Launch). This gives you some control over the IDF data before the simulation. Any changes made to the IDF data from within EP-Launch will be included in the simulation but will not be retained for future simulations. See Program options > EnergyPlus for more info on this. Reading ESO results files back into DesignBuilder Provided you haven't changed the zone and surface names in the IDF data you can read ESO results files generated from your modified data back into DesignBuilder for display and analysis.
Tip: If you are already familiar with the EnergyPlus data structure you may find it most convenient to edit DesignBuilder IDF data using a text editor as it shows more clearly the comments included to help reference IDF data back to the DesignBuilder model.
- 860 -
EnergyPlus Version Compatibility
EnergyPlus Version Compatibility

You should ensure that you have the correct version of EnergyPlus set before exporting IDF data for use outside DesignBuilder. DesignBuilder will automatically generate compatible IDF files with the target version of EnergyPlus as set on the EnergyPlus tab Program options dialog. If you are generating IDF files for simulation outside DesignBuilder you should note that, by default, DesignBuilder targets an internal version of EnergyPlus which has an extended IDD data definition file to allow: 1. 2. 3. Surfaces of up to 330 vertices. Shading surfaces of up to 33 vertices. Up to 400 zones in compact HVAC systems.
So if you attempt to use IDF files generated for internal versions of EnergyPlus in a version of EnergyPlus supplied by DOE, you may find some surface or HVAC data errors related to the above changes. To avoid this situation you should either: 1. 2. Explicitly target your DOE EnergyPlus installation by making the appropriate setting on the Program options dialog (preferred option), or Carry the DesignBuilder IDD extensions over to your standalone version of EnergyPlus by copying Energy+.idd from the DesignBuilder EnergyPlus folder (use the File > Folder > EnergyPlus folder menu command) to your standalone EnergyPlus folder (e.g. C:\EnergyPlusV2-0-0).
EnergyPlus IDF Window Dimensions

The window dimensions supplied to EnergyPlus are the total opening size (window size including the frame), but deflated by an amount equal to the width of the window frame. The deflation is required because EnergyPlus expects window dimensions excluding the frame whereas DesignBuilder openings include the frame. DesignBuilder takes this approach because it is usually more convenient to enter the size of the opening in the fabric. The default window areas generated by DB should correspond with the Window to wall % (WWR) setting on the Openings tab , provided you are using either Continuous horizontal or Preferred height facade types. Tip: switching off frames on the Openings tab causes EnergyPlus windows of the expected dimensions to be generated given the simplistic 'window area divided by total wall area' calculation.
Calculation Of DesignBuilder Output From EnergyPlus Report Variables

At the end of an EnergyPlus simulation DesignBuilder reads the EnergyPlus output file eplusout.eso. The format of this file is described in EnergyPlus documentation. The table below explains how the raw EnergyPlus output is processed to create DesignBuilder output. The Environmental/Comfort Output column refers to the data shown in DesignBuilder output screens. EnergyPlus Report variable column data shows report variable names with the units in square brackets. The units should be omitted when using the report variables in IDF data. The Area column indicates the zone, surface, component etc.
- 861 -
Environmental/Comf ort Output

Internal air temperature Internal radiant temperature Internal operative temperature Relative Humidity Fanger PMV Pierce PMV ET Pierce PMV SET Pierce Discomfort Index (DISC) Pierce Thermal Sens. Index (TSENS) Kansas Uni TSV Discomfort hrs (summer clothing) Discomfort hrs (winter clothing) Discomfort hrs (all clothing)
EnergyPlus Report Variable

Zone Mean Air Temperature [C] Zone Mean Radiant Temperature [C]
Area
ZoneId ZoneId ZoneId
Notes*
0.5 x (Zone Mean Air Temperature + Zone Mean Radiant Temperature)
Zone Air Relative Humidity [%] FangerPMV PiercePMVET PiercePMVSET PierceDISC PierceTSENS KsuTSV Time Not Comfortable Summer Clothes [hr] Time Not Comfortable Winter Clothes [hr] Time Not Comfortable Summer or Winter Clothes [hr]
ZoneId PEOPLE ZoneId PEOPLE ZoneId PEOPLE ZoneId PEOPLE ZoneId PEOPLE ZoneId PEOPLE ZoneId PEOPLE ZoneId PEOPLE ZoneId PEOPLE ZoneId
Fabric and ventilation

Window Transmitted Solar is subtracted so that Glazing heat gain represents the transfer of all heat through the window excluding beam and diffuse short-wave solar heat effects. This makes it more comparable with the opaque surface conduction results. NB The subtraction of solar from glazing heat gain is done as a post process on the output results and does not affect the simulation itself. Walls, Roofs, Ceilings (int), Floors (int), Floors (ext), Ground floors, Partitions (int), Doors and vents Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduction [W]
Glazing heat gain
Window Heat Gain [W] - Window Heat Loss [W] - Window Transmitted Solar [W]
SurfaceId
SurfaceId
- 862 -
External infiltration
External natural ventilation
External mechanical ventilation
Internal Air
External Air
Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Loss [J] + Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Gain [J] Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Gain [J] + Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Loss [J] Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Gain [J] + Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Loss [J] AirflowNetwork Mixing Sensible Loss Rate [W] + AirflowNetwork Mixing Sensible Gain Rate [W] AirflowNetwork Infiltration Sensible Loss Rate [W]+ AirflowNetwork Infiltration Sensible Gain Rate [W]
ZoneId
Scheduled Natural ventilation only
ZoneId
Scheduled Natural ventilation only Scheduled Natural ventilation only
ZoneId
ZoneId
Calculated Natural ventilation only
ZoneId
Calculated Natural ventilation only
Airflow
Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltration Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltration Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltration Zone Mechanical Ventilation Air Change Rate [ach] Zone Ventilation Air Change Rate [ach] Zone Infiltration Air Change Rate [ach] ZoneId Summed across blocks and building using volumeweighted average Summed across blocks and building using volumeweighted average Summed across blocks and building using volumeweighted average
ZoneId
ZoneId
Internal Gains
Task lighting gains ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT#ZoneId# TaskLights* [J] The 'GeneralLights' ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT EnergyPlus output is a lighting fuel consumption and is summed to give the Lighting fuel consumption (below). The gain to the zone is calculated from this in each zone by multiplying by (1 - Return air fraction). The '02' ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT EnergyPlus output is the miscellaneous internal gains fuel consumption and is summed
General lighting gains
ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT#ZoneId# GeneralLights* [J]
Miscellaneous gains
ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT#ZoneId# 02:InteriorEquipment* [J]
- 863 -
Process gains
Catering gains
to give the Room fuel consumption (below). The gain to the zone is calculated from this in each zone by multiplying by (1 - Fraction lost). The '03' ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT EnergyPlus output is the process internal gains fuel consumption and is summed to give the Room fuel consumption (below). The gain to the zone is calculated from this in each zone by multiplying by (1 Fraction lost). The '04' ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT EnergyPlus output is the catering internal gains fuel consumption and is summed to give the Room fuel consumption (below). The gain to the zone is calculated from this in each zone by multiplying by (1 Fraction lost).
Computer and equipment gains Occupancy gains Solar Gains Exterior Windows
Solar Gains Interior Windows
ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT#ZoneId# 05:InteriorEquipment* [J] Zone People Sensible Heat Gain [J] Zone Transmitted Solar [W] Zone Diff Solar from Interior Windows [W] + Zone Beam Solar from Interior Windows [W] Zone/Sys Sensible Cooling Rate [W] Zone/Sys Sensible Heating Rate [W]
ZoneId ZoneId
ZoneId Cooling energy to the zone from the HVAC system (not energy consumption) Heating energy to the zone from the HVAC system (not energy consumption)
Zone Sensible Cooling
ZoneId
Zone Sensible Heating
ZoneId
System Heat Flows

Zone Heating Zone Heating Zone Heating Zone Heating Preheat Total Water Heating Coil Rate [W] Heating Coil Rate [W] Heating Coil Rate [W] Total Water Heating Coil Rate [W] Heating Coil Rate [W] ZoneId REHEAT COIL ZoneId REHEAT COIL ZoneId AHU HEATING COIL ZoneId HEATING COIL AHU PREHEAT VAV/CAV Hot water reheat coils VAV/CAV Electric reheat coils Unitary single zone Fan coil VAV/CAV Gas/Electric
- 864 -
AHU Heating AHU Heating Total Cooling Total Cooling Total Cooling Total Cooling Total Cooling Sensible Cooling Sensible Cooling Sensible Cooling Sensible Cooling Sensible Cooling
Total Water Heating Coil Rate [W] Heating Coil Rate [W] Purchased Air Total Cooling Rate [W] Total Water Cooling Coil Rate [W] DX Coil Total Cooling Rate [W] DX Coil Total Cooling Rate [W] Total Water Cooling Coil Rate [W] Purchased Air Sensible Cooling Rate [W] Sensible Water Cooling Coil Rate [W] DX Coil Sensible Cooling Rate [W] DX Coil Sensible Cooling Rate [W] Sensible Water Cooling Coil Rate [W]
COIL AHU HEATING COIL AHU HEATING COIL ZONE ZoneId PURCHASED AIR AHU COOLING COIL AHU COOLING COIL ZoneId AHU COOLING COIL ZoneId COOLING COIL ZONE ZoneId PURCHASED AIR AHU COOLING COIL AHU COOLING COIL ZoneId AHU COOLING COIL ZoneId COOLING COIL
preheat coils VAV/CAV Hot water coils VAV/CAV with Gas/Electric AHU heating coils and Unitary multizone Simple HVAC convective and ASHRAE Cooling design VAV/CAV with Chilled water coils Unitary Multizone Unitary single zone Fan coil Simple HVAC convective and ASHRAE Cooling design VAV/CAV with Chiller water Unitary multizone Unitary single zone Fan coil
Fuel breakdown (building level)

The fuel consumption for each heating load is calculated based on the efficiency of the heat generation and distribution loss: Heat generator fuel = (Heating Load x Heating distribution loss factor) / Heat generator CoP Heat generator Compact HVAC Where: Heating distribution loss factor = 1 + (Heating Distribution Loss) / 100 Note 1: distribution loss is 0 for direct electric and gas heating coils. Note 2: CoP for direct gas coils is assumed to be 0.8
- 865 -
and direct electric coils 1.0.
Heat generator fuel = Heating load / Heating system CoP Heat generator Simple HVAC Note: the Heating system CoP is defined separately for each zone. The fuel consumption for each cooling load is calculated based on the efficiency of the chiller and distribution loss: Chiller fuel = (Cooling Load x Cooling distribution loss factor) / Chiller CoP Where: Cooling distribution loss factor = 1 + (Cooling Distribution Loss) / 100 Chiller fuel = Cooling load / Cooling system CoP Chiller Simple HVAC Note: the Cooling system CoP is defined separately for each zone. VAV/CAV with Chiller water, Unitary multizone Unitary single zone Fan coil
Chiller
Compact HVAC
System fan System fan System fan
Fan Electric Consumption [J] Fan Electric Consumption [J] Fan Electric Consumption [J]
AHU SUPPLY FAN ZoneId AHU SUPPLY FAN ZoneId SUPPLY FAN
- 866 -
System pumps
Pump Electric Consumption [J]
HOT WATER LOOP HW SUPPLY PUMP + CHILLED WATER LOOP CHW SUPPLY PUMP + CHILLED WATER LOOP CNDW SUPPLY PUMP DHW energy (kWh) = _Ref21063842821000 (kg/m3) x 4.187 (KJ/kg-K) x (Domestic Hot Water Consumption [m3]) x (Delivery water temperature - Mains water temperature) / DHW CoP Where: DHW CoP is Heat generator CoP when using 1-Central heating boiler DHW type. (Preheat Heating Coil Rate + Distr loss if appropriate) / Preheat CoP
DHW
Domestic Hot Water Consumption [m3]
ZoneId DHW 1
Preheat energy Lighting Room Room Room Room Room Room electricity gas oil solid bottled gas other
Fuel totals (building level)

Electricity Gas Oil Solid Bottled gas Other fuel consumption 1-Electricity from grid 2-Natural gas 3-Oil 4-Coal + 7-Anthracite + 8Smokeless fuel (including coke) 5-LPG + 6-Biogas 9-Dual fuel appliances (mineral + wood) + 10Biomass + 11-Waste heat
CO2 production (building level)

CO2 Calculated from Fuel totals above using locally published CO2 emission factors from the Emissions tab on the Legislative regions dialog
- 867 -
accessed from the Site level on the Regions model data tab.
Site Weather data

Simulation: Direct from EPW - spot value, Outside dry-bulb temperature Outdoor Dry Bulb Cooling design: Outdoor Dry Bulb spot value. Simulation: Direct from EPW - spot value, Outside dew-point temperature Outdoor Dew Point Cooling design: Outdoor Dew Point - spot value. Simulation: Direct from EPW preceding hour, Direct normal solar Direct Solar Cooling design: Direct Solar preceding hour. Simulation: Direct from EPW preceding hour, Diffuse horizontal solar Diffuse Solar Cooling design: Diffuse Solar preceding hour. Simulation: Direct from EPW - spot value, Wind speed Wind Speed Cooling design: Wind Speed preceding hour. Simulation: Direct from EPW - spot value, Wind direction Wind Direction Cooling design: Assumed wind is from North. Simulation: Direct from EPW - spot value, Cooling design:Outdoor For Cooling design, value is initialised from user input before calculation is run but is updated with E+ value after the calculation.
Atmospheric pressure
Outdoor Barometric Pressure
Estimated from elevation before cooling design calc is run but E+ value used after calculation.
- 868 -
EnergyPlus Errors And Warnings
Barometric Pressure preceding hour. Simulation: Calculated - spot value, Solar altitude Solar Altitude Angle Cooling design:Solar Altitude Angle preceding hour. Simulation: Calculated - spot value, Cooling design:Solar Azimuth Angle preceding hour.
Solar azimuth
Solar Azimuth Angle
For Cooling design, solar positions are initialised with calculated values before calculation is run but are updated with E+ values after the calculation. Calculated simulation data is based on 'spot values' on the hour so in this case the value for 12:00 is the value exactly at midday.
* Variables shown in green represent EnergyPlus output. 'Direct from EPW' means that the values in the hourly weather file itself are displayed. EnergyPlus hourly output always represents totals and averages over the preceding hour so data for 12:00 is for the period 11:01 to 12:00. See also: When DesignBuilder output is different from unprocessed EnergyPlus Output

A file eplusout.err is generated following each EnergyPlus simulation in the EnergyPlus folder. It may contain three levels of errors (Warning, Severe, Fatal) as well as the possibility of just message lines. These errors may be duplicated in other files (such as the standard output file) and are described more completely in the EnergyPlus Output Details and Examples documents.
ERRORS 1
** Severe ** Did not find "Until: 22:00" in list of Objects
You may have entered a semi-colon character (;) at the end of one of the lines in a Compact schedule when you meant to enter a comma (,). ** Severe ** Problem in interior solar distribution calculation (CHKBKS) ** ~~~ ** Solar Distribution = FullInteriorExterior will not work in Zone=78474 ** ~~~ ** because vertex 3 of back surface=W_73536_2_0_0 is in front of receiving surface=W_78474_3_0_0 ** ~~~ ** (Dot Product indicator=1.4966) ** ~~~ ** Check surface geometry; if OK, use Solar Distribution = FullExterior instead. The 3-Full interior and exterior solar distribution option is selected but one or more zone in the model is non-convex. Note that DesignBuilder is configured by default to check for this condition and provides more friendly error messages.
- 869 -
- 870 -
** Severe ** For Purchased Air ZONE 21438 PURCHASED AIR serving Zone 21438 ** ~~~ ** ..the supply air temperature for cooling [10.00] is greater than the zone cooling setpoint [8.99]. This severe error can occur when using Simple HVAC, or Cooling design calculations with Operative control in zones with strong radiant heat gains causing high radiant temperatures (e.g. un-insulated roof or zone is highly glazed). The supply air temperature is fixed (to 10C in the above example) but the zone air temperature must be cooled lower than this (8.99C in the above example) to give the required operative setpoint (.e.g. 24 C). Operative temperature, Top, is calculated as: Top= 0.5 x (Ta + Tr) where: Top is the operative temperature. Ts is the air supply temperature. Ta is the zone air temperature (Ta must be > Ts). Tr is the zone radiant temperature. So there is a requirement: Tr
max
<= 2 Top - Ts
If the zone radiant temperature is higher than Tr max and Operative temperature control is used then this severe error will occur. The solution may be to use Air temperature control and to reduce the radiant temperatures using solar shading/insulation as appropriate.
See the discussion on Operative temperature control under Calculation options for more on this.
** Severe ** Problem in interior solar distribution calculation (CHKBKS) ** ~~~ ** Solar Distribution = FullInteriorExterior will not work in Zone=42272 ** ~~~ ** because vertex 6 of back surface=F_42272_10106_0_10277 is in front of receiving surface=W_42272_9_0_0 ** ~~~ ** (Dot Product indicator=7.3314) ** ~~~ ** Check surface geometry; if OK, use Solar Distribution = FullExterior instead. One or more zones is non-convex which makes the model incompatible with the 3-Full interior and exterior solar distribution algorithm. This error can also lead to temperature out of bounds errors. ** Severe ** Temperature out of bounds (637.89) for surface=W_43311_4_0_0 ** ~~~ ** in Zone=43276 ** ~~~ ** Occurrence info=BRUSSELS - BEL IWEC DATA WMO#=064510, 01/04 13:30 - 13:32 ** ~~~ ** A temperature out of bounds problem can be caused by several things. The user ** ~~~ ** should check the weather environment, the level of internal gains with respect ** ~~~ ** to the zone, and the thermal properties of their materials among other things. ** ~~~ ** A common cause is a building with no thermal mass -- all materials with ** ~~~ ** Regular-R definitions. A temperature of a surface has become too high, during the simulation. Possible causes are:
- 871 -
1. 2. 3. 4.
Highly glazed zone with a small floor or other surface area (e.g. double facade cavity zone floor, solar chimney solar floor). Some form of geometric error in the simulation, sometimes related to unrealistic amounts of solar radiation falling on small surfaces. Use of the finite-difference solution method. Very high/low heating/cooling setpoint temperature.
WARNINGS
** Warning ** GetHTSubSurfaceData: A Multiplier > 1.0 for window/glass door W_67_4_0_0_0_0 ** ~~~ ** in conjunction with SolarDistribution = FullExterior or FullInteriorExterior ** ~~~ ** can cause inaccurate shadowing on the window and/or ** ~~~ ** inaccurate interior solar distribution from the window. The Lump similar windows on surface model option has been selected which causes DesignBuilder to use the EnergyPlus Window Multiplier option to speed up simulations. The message is warning that the Window Multiplier option, when used in conjunction with the Full exterior or Full interior and exterior calculation options can lead to inaccurate distributions of solar radiation around the room. ** Warning ** GetSurfaceData:The total number of floors, walls, roofs and internal mass surfaces in Zone 59 ** ~~~ ** is < 6. This may cause an inaccurate zone heat balance calculation. This warning is often generated for pitched roofs and for interior zones separated by virtual partitions and can safely be ignored. ** Warning ** GetGroundTemps: Some values for "GroundTemperatures" fall outside the range of 15-25C. ** ~~~ ** These values may be inappropriate. Please consult the Input Output Reference for more details. The default ground temperatures used in DesignBuilder is 14degC. This may be inappropriate in some cases and EnergyPlus is warning about this. You should take care to enter realistic ground temperatures bearing in mind the advice given in the Ground Modelling section.
** Warning ** DXFOut: Could not triangulate surface="W_7469_0_0_1", type="Wall", check surface vertex order(entry) Caused by a minor bug in EnergyPlus when creating a DXF representation of the model - it is not always able to fully triangulate all surfaces and generate a full set of surfaces. You can ignore the message for the purposes of simulation results. ** Warning ** Base surface does not surround subsurface (CHKSBS), Overlap Status=No-Overlap ** ~~~ ** The base surround errors occurred 3 times. ** ~~~ ** Surface "W_7376_3_0_0" misses SubSurface "W_7376_3_0_0_0_0" These warnings are usually a reporting bug in EnergyPlus v.2.0 and earlier.
** Warning ** Calculated design cooling/heating load for zone=78474 is zero. ** ~~~ ** Check ZONE SIZING and ZONE CONTROL:THERMOSTATIC inputs.
- 872 -
EnergyPlus Daylight Calculations
Cooling/heating may have been switched off in this zone or there is no cooling/heating load (i.e. the zone does not require any cooling/heating).
For a zone sizing run, there must be at least 1 Zone Sizing object input. Can usually be ignored. ** Severe ** CAUTION -- Interzone surfaces are usually in different zones ** ~~~ ** Surface=F_59604_10071_0_10046, Zone=59604 ** ~~~ ** Surface=C_72917_1_0_0, Zone=59604
This warning can be safely ignored. These messages can be prevented by switching on the Surfaces within zone treated as adiabatic option in Simulation Advanced Calculation Options
** Warning ** CAUTION -- Interzone surfaces are usually in different zones This warning will occur for partitions between 2 merged zones. Because of the merging, the zone is the same on both sides of the partition and EnergyPlus flags this as a potential mistake. To avoid this message, you can select the 'Surfaces within zone treated as adiabatic model option for Heating design, Cooling design and Simulation calculation options. In this case such partitions will instead be modelled using an adiabatic formulation where the Outside face environment surface is the same as the actual surface and the warning is not generated. The warning can in any case be safely ignored.
EnergyPlus Daylight Calculations

The EnergyPlus daylighting model, in conjunction with the thermal analysis, determines the energy impact of daylighting strategies based on analysis of daylight availability, site conditions, window management in response to solar gain and glare, and various lighting control strategies. The daylighting calculations are carried out during the simulation in 3 main steps: 1. Daylight factors, which are ratios of interior illuminance or luminance to exterior horizontal illuminance, are calculated and stored. The user specifies the coordinates of one or two reference points in each daylit zone. EnergyPlus then integrates over the area of each exterior window in the zone to obtain the contribution of direct light from the window to the illuminance at the reference points, and the contribution of light that reflects from the walls, floor and ceiling before reaching the reference points. Window luminance and window background luminance, which are used to determine glare, are also calculated. Taken into account are such factors as sky luminance distribution, window size and orientation, glazing transmittance, inside surface reflectances, sun control devices such as movable window shades, and external obstructions. Dividing daylight illuminance or luminance by exterior illuminance yields daylight factors. These factors are calculated for the hourly sun positions on sun-paths for representative days of the run period. A daylighting calculation is performed each heat-balance time step when the sun is up. In this calculation the illuminance at the reference points in each zone is found by interpolating the stored daylight factors using the current time steps sun position and sky condition, then multiplying by the exterior horizontal illuminance. If glare control has been specified, the program will automatically deploy window shading, if available, to decrease glare below a specified comfort level. A similar option uses window shades to automatically control solar gain.
2.
- 873 -
3.
The electric lighting control system is simulated to determine the lighting energy needed to make up the difference between the daylighting illuminance level and the design illuminance. Finally, the zone lighting electric reduction factor is passed to the thermal calculation, which uses this factor to reduce the heat gain from lights. The EnergyPlus daylighting calculation is derived from the daylighting calculation in DOE-2.1E, which is described in [Winkelmann, 1983] and [Winkelmann and Selkowitz, 1985]. There are two major differences between the two implementations: (1) In EnergyPlus daylight factors are calculated for four different sky typesclear, clear turbid, intermediate, and overcast; in DOE-2 only two sky types are used clear and overcast. (2) In EnergyPlus the clear-sky daylight factors are calculated for hourly sun-path sun positions several times a year whereas in DOE-2 these daylight factors are calculated for a set of 20 sun positions that span the annual range of sun positions for a given geographical location.
EnergyPlus Thermal Comfort

EnergyPlus includes a sophisticated building thermal analysis tool allowing you to determine whether the environmental control strategy will be sufficient for the occupants to be thermally comfortable. This section provides background on thermal comfort and gives an overview of state of the art thermal comfort models.
Background on Thermal Comfort Models

Throughout the last few decades, researchers have been exploring the thermal, physiological and psychological response of people in their environment in order to develop mathematical models to predict these responses. Researchers have empirically debated building occupants' thermal responses to the combined thermal effect of the personal, environmental and physiological variables that influence the condition of thermal comfort. There are two personal variables that influence the condition of thermal comfort: the thermal resistance of the clothing (Icl), and the metabolic rate (H/ADu). The thermal resistance of the clothing (Icl) is measured in units of "clo." The 1985 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals (3) suggests multiplying the summation of the individual clothing items clo value by a factor of 0.82 for clothing ensembles. The environmental variables that influence the conditions of thermal comfort include: 1. 2. 3. 4. Air Temperature (Ta), Mean Radiant Temperature (Tr), Relative air velocity (v), Water vapor pressure in ambient air (Pa)
The Air Temperature (Ta), a direct environmental index, is the dry-bulb temperature of the environment. The Mean Radiant Temperature (Tr) is a rationally derived environmental index defined as the uniform black-body temperature that would result in the same radiant energy exchange as in the actual environment. The Relative air velocity (v) a direct environmental index is a measure of the air motion obtainable via a hot wire or vane anemometers. The Water vapor pressure in ambient air (Pa) is a direct environmental index. The physiological variables that influence the conditions of thermal comfort include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Skin Temperature (Tsk), Core or Internal Temperature (Tcr), Sweat Rate, Skin Wettedness (w), Thermal Conductance (K) between the core and skin.
Where the Skin Temperature (Tsk), the Core Temperature (Tcr) and the Sweat Rate are physiological indices. The Skin Wettedness (w) is a rationally derived physiological index defined as the ratio of the actual sweating rate to the maximum rate of sweating that would occur if the skin were completely wet. One more consideration is important in dealing with thermal comfort - the effect of asymmetrical heating or cooling. This could occur when there is a draft or when there is a radiant flux incident on a person (which is what is of primary interest to us here). Fanger (5) noted that the human regulatory system is quite tolerant of asymmetrical radiant flux. A reasonable
- 874 -
upper limit on the difference in mean radiant temperature (Tr) from one direction to the opposing direction is 15_ (1). This limit is lower if there is a high air velocity in the zone.
Mathematical Models for Predicting Thermal Comfort

Many researchers have been exploring ways to predict the thermal sensation of people in their environment based on the personal, environmental and physiological variables that influence thermal comfort. From the research done, some mathematical models that simulate occupants' thermal response to their environment have been developed. Most thermal comfort prediction models use a seven or nine point thermal sensation scale, as in the following tables. Seven point Thermal Sensation Scale: 3 hot 2 warm 1 slightly warm 0 neutral -1 slightly cool -2 cool -3 cold Nine point Thermal Sensation Scale: 4 very hot 3 hot 2 warm 1 slightly warm 0 neutral -1 slightly cool -2 cool -3 cold -4 very cold The most notable models have been developed by P.O. Fanger (the Fanger Comfort Model), the J. B. Pierce Foundation (the Pierce Two-Node Model), and researchers at Kansas State University (the KSU Two-Node Model). Berglund (6) presents a detailed description of the theory behind these three models. Note: for all Thermal Comfort reporting: Though the published values for thermal comfort vote have a discrete scale (e.g. 3 to +3 or 4 to +4), the calculations in EnergyPlus are carried out on a continuous scale and, thus, reporting may be off the scale with specific conditions encountered in the space. This is not necessarily an error in EnergyPlus rather a different approach that does not take the limits of the discrete scale values into account. The main similarity of the three models is that all three apply an energy balance to a person and use the energy exchange mechanisms along with experimentally derived physiological parameters to predict the thermal sensation and the physiological response of a person due to their environment. The models differ somewhat in the physiological models that represent the human passive system (heat transfer through and from the body) and the human control system (the neural control of shivering, sweating and skin blood flow). The models also differ in the criteria used to predict thermal sensation.
FANGER COMFORT MODEL

Fanger's Comfort model was the first one developed. It was published first in 1967 (7) and then in 1972 (2), and helped set the stage for the other two models. The mathematical model developed by P.O. Fanger is probably the most well known of the three models and is the easiest to use because it has been put in both chart and graph form.
- 875 -
Predicted Mean Vote (PMV) and Predicted Percentage Dissatisfied (PPD)

Fanger developed the model based on the research he performed at Kansas State University and the Technical University of Denmark. Fanger used the seven-point form of a thermal sensation scale along with numerous experiments involving human subjects in various environments. He related the subjects in response to the variables, which influence the condition of thermal comfort. Fanger's model is based upon an energy analysis that takes into account all the modes of energy loss (L) from the body, including: the convection and radiant heat loss from the outer surface of the clothing, the heat loss by water vapour diffusion through the skin, the heat loss by evaporation of sweat from the skin surface, the latent and dry respiration heat loss and the heat transfer from the skin to the outer surface of the clothing. The model assumes that the person is thermally at steady state with his environment. By determining the skin temperature and evaporative sweat rate that a thermally comfortable person would have in a given set of conditions, the model calculates the energy loss (L). Then, using the thermal sensation votes from subjects at KSU and Denmark, a Predicted Mean Vote (PMV) thermal sensation scale is based on how the energy loss (L) deviates from the metabolic rate (M). Fanger proposed that the condition for thermal comfort is that the skin temperature and sweat secretion lies within narrow limits. Fanger obtained data from climate chamber experiments, in which sweat rate and skin temperature were measured on people who considered themselves comfortable at various metabolic rates. Fanger proposed that optimal conditions for thermal comfort were expressed by the regression line of skin temperature and sweat rate on metabolic rate in data from these experiments. In this way an expression for optimal thermal comfort can be deduced from the metabolic rate, clothing insulation and environmental conditions. The final equation for optimal thermal comfort is fairly complex and need not concern us here. Fanger has solved the equations by computer and presented the results in the form of diagrams from which optimal comfort conditions can be read given a knowledge of metabolic rate and clothing insulation. Fanger extended the usefulness of his work by proposing a method by which the actual thermal sensation could be predicted. His assumption for this was that the sensation experienced by a person was a function of the physiological strain imposed on him by the environment. This he defined as "the difference between the internal heat production and the heat loss to the actual environment for a man kept at the comfort values for skin temperature and sweat production at the actual activity level" (Fanger 1970). He calculated this extra load for people involved in climate chamber experiments and plotted their comfort vote against it. Thus he was able to predict what comfort vote would arise from a given set of environmental conditions for a given clothing insulation and metabolic rate. Tables of PMV are available for different environments for given clothing and metabolic rates. Such tables form the basis of ISO standard 7730 Note however that his method for PMV is inconsistent with the basic assumptions of his equation (Humphreys and Nicol 1995). Fanger realised that the vote predicted was only the mean value to be expected from a group of people, and he extended the PMV to predict the proportion of any population who will be dissatisfied with the environment. A person's dissatisfaction was defined in terms of their comfort vote. Those who vote outside the central three scaling points on the ASHRAE scale were counted as dissatisfied. PPD is defined in terms of the PMV, and adds no information to that already available in PMV. The distribution of PPD is based on observations from climate chamber experiments and not from field measurements.
PIERCE TWO-NODE MODEL

The Pierce Two-Node model was developed at the John B. Pierce Foundation at Yale University. The model has been continually expanding since its first publication in 1970 (8). The most recent version on the model appears in the 1986 ASHRAE Transactions (9). The Pierce model thermally lumps the human body as two isothermal, concentric compartments, one representing the internal section or core (where all the metabolic heat is assumed to be generated and the skin comprising the other compartment). This allows the passive heat conduction from the core compartment to the skin to be accounted for. The boundary line between two compartments changes with respect to skin blood flow rate per unit skin surface area (SKBF in L/hm2) and is described by alpha the fraction of total body mass attributed to the skin compartment (13).
- 876 -
Furthermore, the model takes into account the deviations of the core, skin, and mean body temperature weighted by alpha from their respective set points. Thermoregulatory effector mechanisms (Regulatory sweating, skin blood flow, and shivering) are defined in terms of thermal signals from the core, skin and body (13). The model for Standard Effective Temperature (SET) also uses skin temperature as part of it's limiting conditions, but uses skin wettedness (w) rather than sweat rate for the other limiting condition. The values for Tsk and w are derived from the Pierce `two-node' model of human physiology (see Nevins & Gagge (1972)). SET relates the real conditions to the (effective) temperature in standard clothing and metabolic rate and 50% RH which would give the same physiological response. Effective temperature can then be related to subjective response. The latest version of the Pierce model (15) uses the concepts of SET* and ET*. The Pierce model converts the actual environment into a "standard environment" at a Standard Effective Temperature, SET*. SET* is the drybulb temperature of a hypothetical environment at 50% relative humidity for subjects wearing clothing that would be standard for the given activity in the real environment. Furthermore, in this standard environment, the same physiological strain, i.e. the same skin temperature and skin wettedness and heat loss to the environment, would exist as in the real environment. The Pierce model also converts the actual environment into a environment at an Effective Temperature, ET*, that is the dry-bulb temperature of a hypothetical environment at 50% relative humidity and uniform temperature (Ta = MRT) where the subjects would experience the same physiological strain as in the real environment. In the latest version of the model it is suggested that the classical Fanged PMV be modified by using ET* or SET* instead of the operative temperature. This gives a new index PMV* which is proposed for dry or humid environments. It is also suggested that PMV* is very responsive to the changes in vapor permeation efficiency of the occupants clothing. Besides PMV*, the Pierce Two Node Model uses the indices TSENS and DISC as predictors of thermal comfort. Where TSENS is the classical index used by the Pierce foundation, and is a function of the mean body temperature. DISC is defined as the relative thermoregulatory strain that is needed to bring about a state of comfort and thermal equilibrium. DISC is a function of the heat stress and heat strain in hot environments and equal to TSENS in cold environments. In summary, the Pierce Model, for our purposes, uses four thermal comfort indices; PMVET-a function of ET*, PMVSET- a function of SET*, TSENS and DISC.
KSU TWO-NODE MODEL

The KSU two-node model, developed at Kansas State University, was published in 1977 (10). The KSU model is quite similar to that of the Pierce Foundation. The main difference between the two models is that the KSU model predicts thermal sensation (TSV) differently for warm and cold environment. The KSU two-node model is based on the changes that occur in the thermal conductance between the core and the skin temperature in cold environments, and in warm environments it is based on changes in the skin wettedness. In this model metabolic heat production is generated in the core which exchanges energy with the environment by respiration and the skin exchanges energy by convection and radiation. In addition, body heat is dissipated through evaporation of sweat and/or water vapor diffusion through the skin. These principles are used in following passive system equations. Here, control signals, based on set point temperatures in the skin and core, are introduced into passive system equations and these equations are integrated numerically for small time increments or small increments in core and skin temperature. The control signals modulate the thermoregulatory mechanism and regulate the peripheral blood flow, the sweat rate, and the increase of metabolic heat by active muscle shivering. The development of the controlling functions of skin conductance (KS), sweat rate (Esw), and shivering (Mshiv) is based on their correlation with the deviations in skin and core temperatures from their set points. The KSU model's TSV was developed from experimental conditions in all temperature ranges and from clo levels between .05 clo to 0.7 clo and from activities levels of 1 to 6 mets (6).
- 877 -
References
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. ASHRAE, High Intensity Infrared Radiant Heating, 1984 system Handbook, American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Atlanta, GA, Chapter 18, 1984. Fanger, P.O., Thermal Comfort-Analysis and Applications in Environmental Engineering, Danish Technical Press, Copenhagen, 1970. ASHRAE, Physiological Principles for Comfort and Health, 1985 Fundamental Handbook, American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Atlanta, GA, Chapter 8, 1985. Du Bois, D. and E.F., A Formula to Estimate Approximate Surface Area, if Height and Weight are Known, Archives of internal Medicine, Vol.17, 1916. Fanger, P.O., Radiation and Discomfort, ASHRAE Journal. February 1986. Berglund, Larry, Mathematical Models for Predicting the Thermal Comfort Response of Building Occupants, ASHRAE Trans., Vol.84, 1978. Fanger P.O., Calculation of Thermal Comfort: Introduction of a Basic Comfort Equation, ASHRE Trans., Vol.73, Pt 2, 1967. Gagge, A.P., Stolwijk, J. A. J., Nishi, Y., An Effective Temperature Scale Based on a Simple Model of Human Physiological Regulatory Response, ASHRAE Trans., Vol.70, Pt 1, 1970. Gagge, A.P., Fobelets, A.P., Berglund, L. G., A Standard Predictive Index of Human Response to the Thermal Environment, ASHRAE Trans., Vol.92, Pt 2, 1986. Azer, N.Z., Hsu, S., The prediction of Thermal Sensation from Simple model of Human Physiological Regulatory Response, ASHRAE Trans., Vol.83, Pt 1, 1977. Hsu, S., A Thermoregulatory Model for Heat Acclimation and Some of its Application, Ph. D. Dissertation, Kansas State University, 1977. ISO., Determination of the PMV and PPD Indices and Specification of the Conditions for Thermal Comfort, DIS 7730, Moderate Thermal Environment, 1983. Doherty, T.J., Arens, E., Evaluation of the Physiological Bases of Thermal Comfort Models, ASHRAE Trans., Vol.94, Pt 1, 1988. ASHRAE, Physiological Principles and Thermal Comfort, 1993 ASHRAE Handbook- Fundamentals, American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Atlanta, GA, Chapter 8, 1993. Fountain, Marc.E., Huizenga, Charlie, A Thermal Sensation Prediction Tool for Use by the Profession, ASHRAE Trans., Vol.103, Pt 2, 1997. Int-Hout, D., Thermal Comfort Calculation / A Computer Model, ASHRAE Trans., Vol.96, Pt
EnergyPlus Date Definition

Field Contents <Number> / <Number> <Number> / Month Month / <Number> <Number> Weekday in Month Last Weekday in Month Interpretation Month / Day Day and Month Month and day Numbered weekday of month Last weekday of month Example 12 / 31 31 Dec Dec 31 1st Saturday in April Last Sunday in October
Notes
Month can be one of: January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August,
- 878 -
EnergyPlus Documentation
September, October, November, December.
Abbreviations of the first three characters are also valid. Weekday can be one of: Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday.
Abbreviations of the first three characters are also valid.
EnergyPlus Documentation
You can get the EnergyPlus user guides free from: Getting Started and Overview Input/Output Reference Output Details and Examples Engineering Reference Auxiliary Programs
Or from the EnergyPlus website: http://www.eere.energy.gov/buildings/energyplus/documentation.cfm
When DesignBuilder Output Is Different From Unprocessed EnergyPlus Output

At the end of an EnergyPlus simulation DesignBuilder reads the EnergyPlus output file eplusout.eso. Much of the data is stored and displayed without further processing but in some cases the outputs are processed to ensure that they are consistent with the DesignBuilder model data. DesignBuilder output data will differ from the data that can be found in the Simulation Summary tab in these cases:
Simple HVAC Heating and Cooling Fuel

DesignBuilder applies a fuel type and a CoP to the idealised heating and cooling systems used in Simple HVAC, whereas EnergyPlus displays the unprocessed loads under 'District heating'. This is because the idealised systems in EnergyPlus are considered to be met directly without use of HVAC equipment through a district heating/cooling type system.
- 879 -
Simple and Compact HVAC DHW Fuel

Like the heating and cooling in Simple HVAC, the Simple and Compact HVAC DHW system is modelled as a simple water heater which does not need a heat source so it is considered to be provided by district heating and loads are displayed directly in EnergyPlus output. In DesignBuilder the DHW loads reported by EnergyPlus are multiplied by the DHW CoP value at building level (when the DHW type is the Same as HVAC) or the DHW CoP at zone level for all other DHW type settings.
Compact HVAC VAV/CAV Gas AHU/Preheat coil Fuel

Preheat and AHU heating coils of fuel type 'Gas' will report different fuel consumption values in DesignBuilder compared with EnergyPlus. This is because DesignBuilder calculates fuel consumption of gas heating coils in a simple way by multiplying the heating load by a the simple gas heating coil CoP entered on the HVAC tab. EnergyPlus performs a more complex calculation using the same CoP value but also incorporating performance curves during the simulation.
Compact HVAC Unitary Cooling Fuel

Unitary cooling coils will report different fuel consumption values in DesignBuilder compared with EnergyPlus. This is because DesignBuilder calculates unitary cooling fuel consumption a simple way by multiplying the cooling load by a the simple CoP entered on the HVAC tab. EnergyPlus performs a more complex calculation using the same CoP value but also incorporating performance curves during the simulation.
Compact HVAC Unitary Heating and Cooling Fuel

If a distribution loss has been applied then this is added outside of EnergyPlus and won't be included in EnergyPlus results which do not account for distribution losses. See also: Calculation of DesignBuilder Output from EnergyPlus Report Variables
- 880 -
Support - Getting Help
Support - Getting Help

If you need information that you could not find in this help file you should first check the FAQ and Support Forum on the Website: http://www.designbuilder.co.uk/support If this does not give you the information you need you can send us a support request using a Support Request Form and DesignBuilder team will endeavour to answer your question by email.
Tutorials
These video tutorials are provided on demand to all registered DesignBuilder users free of charge. They mostly last about 10-20 minutes. You will probably learn most effectively by "doing" rather than "watching" so make sure to try out the techniques shown in the tutorials while they are fresh in your mind before moving on to the next tutorial.
GETTING STARTED
The Getting Started tutorials provide an overview of how to create DesignBuilder models and run simulations. Basics of creating a building model Basics of running simulations
BASIC GEOMETRY
The Basic Geometry series of tutorials explain how to create and modify the blocks used to define building geometry in DesignBuilder. Introduction to the DesignBuilder user interface Creating a model - adding buildings and blocks, drawing guides and snaps Adding, moving and cloning blocks, deleting objects, increment snap, check dimensions of existing objects Rotate, stretch, drag face and construction line tools Adding roofs basics: roof angle conventions, pitched and extruded roofs Cut block, use of protractor tool and outline blocks Zoning blocks by drawing partitions, zone types and zoning protocols Drawing holes, merging zones and creating an atrium Adding shading and adjacency modification using component blocks Drawing arcs, circular shapes and domes Importing 2-D floor plans from DXF and bitmaps to help draw blocks and partitions How to create a room in roof How to draw dormer windows How to model a smaller zone within a larger zone (e.g. an office in a warehouse)
BASIC MODEL DATA

The Basic Model Data tutorials show how to set up data on the Activity, Constructions, Openings, Lighting and HVAC model data tabs for EnergyPlus simulations. Overview of the model data tabs and of data inheritance
- 881 -
Starting a new project, adding a building and use of learning mode Activity data Constructions data 1 Constructions data 2 Drawing windows, doors and sub-surfaces, editing openings at building level Openings model data Shading data Lighting and daylight control data HVAC data (heating, cooling, ventilation, DHW) Timing, schedules, profiles and holidays Hourly weather data
CALCULATIONS
The Calculations tutorials explain how to set up DesignBuilder EnergyPlus simulations and analyse results. Heating design calculations for sizing heating systems Cooling design calculations for sizing cooling systems Settiing up and running simulations Analysing simulation results Exporting data and compiling reports
NATURAL VENTILATION
Scheduled natural ventilation Calculated natural ventilation
OTHER VIDEO LEARNING RESOURCES

Demo of DesignBuilder Simulation capabilities Getting started tutorials DesignBuilder Webinars
Frequently Asked Questions

An up-to-date Knowledgebase is available in the Support section of the DesignBuilder web site.
- 882 -

DesignBuilderManual v3.0 Letter

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DesignBuilderManual v3.0 Letter

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DesignBuilder Documentation

DesignBuilder EnergyPlus Simulation Documentation

LEARN ABOUT DESIGNBUILDER

8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

Recent Files (Opening Screen)

Recent Files (Opening Screen)

You can also:

See also the Introducing DesignBuilder User Interface Tutorial

Learning Mode Off

Licensing & Activation

SINGLE USER LICENSES

Licensing & Activation

ACTIVATE FROM FILE

SITE NETWORK LICENSING

Model Data Hierarchy & Data Inheritance

Templates And Components

Templates And Components

You can model an entire building as a single block:

And then cut the block into storeys:

Navigating Building Models

Navigating Building Models

See also HVAC Component Hierarchy and Navigation.

Customising Model Options

Create New Site

Create New Site - Location

Create New Site - Template

View Controls In Edit Mode

Perimeter Drawing Options

Snaps, Drawing Guides & Protractor

See also the Creating a model Tutorial

Normal (Perpendicular) Snap

Normal (Perpendicular) Snap

Snap To Lower Perimeters

The increment snap also works in conjunction with the Protractor:

Switch snap increment direction

Completing the window perimeter:

Drag the perimeter to complete the offshoot:

See also the Basic Drawing Tools 5 Tutorial

Drawing Construction Lines

Drawing Construction Lines

The finished block:

Drawing Construction Lines

You can also snap to the intersection of construction lines:

Removing Construction Lines

See also the Basic Drawing Tools 3 Tutorial

Removing Construction Lines

See also the Basic Drawing Tools 2 Tutorial

See also the Basic Drawing Tools 2 Tutorial

See also the Basic Drawing Tools 2 Tutorial

See also the Basic Drawing Tools 3 Tutorial

Importing Geometric Data

See also the Basic Drawing Tools 2 Tutorial

Importing Geometric Data

Import Floor Plans

IMPORT DRAWING FILE WIZARD

6-GIF - GIF drawing file. 7-TIFF - TIFF drawing file.

DXF FILE TYPES

Import Floor Plans

Import Floor Plans

EDITING DXF DATA

Set X-axis for imported DXF

Scale DXF drawing

BITMAP-BASED FILE TYPES